Discover User Guide PDF

DISCOVER 2017 64-BIT
USER GUIDE
NOTICES
The Datamine Discover suite is developed and supported by Datamine
Corporate Limited.
SUPPORT
support.discover@dataminesoftware.com
support.dataminesoftware.com
LEGAL
Datamine, the Corporate logo, Datamine Discover are [registered]
trademarks of Datamine Corporate Limited or a subsidiary. All other
trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
© 2018 Datamine Corporate Limited. All rights reserved.
CONTENTS
INTRODUCTION TASKS
1 - INTRODUCING DATAMINE 6 - MAP WINDOW CONTROLS
DISCOVER Map view settings ............................................... 32
About this guide.................................................... 3 Map projections .................................................. 34
Conventions used in this guide............................. 3 Displaying map coordinates, distances and
bearings ....................................................... 37
2 - INSTALLING AND Add a dynamic map grid to a map window ......... 38
Window size and zoom controls ......................... 39
CONFIGURING DATAMINE Linking map windows.......................................... 40
DISCOVER
7 - IMPORTING AND EXPORTING
System requirements............................................ 6
What the Datamine Discover Bundle includes ..... 7 Import and export tools ....................................... 44
Installing Datamine Discover ................................ 7 Importing and exporting tabular and vector data 45
Uninstalling Datamine Discover............................ 7 Importing and exporting images ......................... 73
Licensing Datamine Discover ............................... 7 Importing and exporting drillhole data................. 77
Product Improvement Initiative ........................... 11
Starting Datamine Discover................................ 11 8 - WORKING WITH TABLES
Running multiple instances of MapInfo Pro and Opening and closing tables .............................. 100
Datamine Discover....................................... 12 Refreshing tables with database connections .. 103
Configuring Datamine Discover.......................... 12 Searching and replacing text in tables.............. 104
Selecting records by attribute ........................... 105
3 - GETTING HELP Sorting tables.................................................... 107
Help .................................................................... 16 Changing the map bounds of a mappable table108
Technical support ............................................... 16 Splitting tables .................................................. 109
Checking for Datamine Discover updates .......... 17 Digitizing and data entry ................................... 111
Viewing and printing the electronic manuals ...... 17 Adding unique identifiers to table records......... 138
Updating multiple columns................................ 139
4 - MANAGING THE USER Working with multiple tables ............................. 140
INTERFACE AND WORKSPACES 9 - GPS CONNECT TOOL
Controlling the interface...................................... 19
Supported Platforms ......................................... 147
Organizing your MapBasic tools......................... 19
User Interface ................................................... 148
Managing your workspaces................................ 21
Connecting the GPS Receiver.......................... 148
MapInfo Pro context menus................................ 26
Setting up the GPS data capture ...................... 156
5 - ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS Selecting a GPS map window .......................... 162
Capturing GPS data.......................................... 162
Acknowledgements ............................................ 29 GPX import and export ..................................... 167
10 - DATA PROCESSING AND

STATISTICS
Pre-processing and cleaning data .................... 169
Classifying data ................................................ 169
Normalising or levelling data............................. 175
Computing summary statistics.......................... 176
Computing a correlation matrix......................... 178 15 - VIEWING DATA IN THREE
11 - COORDINATES AND DIMENSIONS
PROJECTIONS Datamine Discover 3D...................................... 296
Viewing data in 3D............................................ 296
Calculating distances between points in separate
tables ......................................................... 180 16 - GRAPHS AND PROFILES
Displaying cursor coordinates in a map window181
Updating coordinates........................................ 181 General purpose graphs ................................... 299
Coordinate transformations .............................. 182 Stacked profiles ................................................ 304
Projection Editor ............................................... 188
Reprojecting coordinates.................................. 195 17 - USING THE GRAPHMAP TOOL
Generating traverse lines and peg coordinates 198 Starting GraphMap ........................................... 307
12 - WORKING WITH MAP GraphMap menus and toolbars ........................ 307
Creating graphs ................................................ 314
OBJECTS Preconditioning data ......................................... 321
Creating derived columns ................................. 323
Objects and layers............................................ 204
Viewing data values.......................................... 325
Creating objects from a table............................ 204
Arranging and modifying graph displays........... 326
Creating and editing objects from the keyboard206
Selecting data in graphs ................................... 331
Create and Clean Lines into Polygons ............. 210
Multi-table relationships .................................... 334
Creating Voronoi polygons ............................... 225
GeoLocated graphs .......................................... 335
Managing and applying object styles................ 227
Displaying statistics .......................................... 341
Selecting objects .............................................. 227
Changing the style of graph objects ................. 342
Copying, moving and transforming objects ...... 229
GraphMap settings ........................................... 348
Manipulating lines, polylines and polygons ...... 233
Using polyline and polygon attributes............... 241 18 - WORKING WITH IMAGES
Colouring map objects by RGB values............. 246
Formatting vector objects ................................. 247 Processing images ........................................... 352
Cloning object styles......................................... 249 Using the Image Tool........................................ 353
Linking objects to external documents ............. 250 Registering and rectifying raster images .......... 353
Reprojecting an image...................................... 360
13 - MAP MAKING Clipping an image ............................................. 362
Displaying image properties ............................. 363
Creating scaled maps....................................... 255
Enhancing an image ......................................... 364
Add a map grid ................................................. 265
Applying image filters........................................ 365
Add a scaled frame to a layout ......................... 268
Rotating an image............................................. 367
Add a title block and scale bar.......................... 268
Converting an image to another format ............ 369
Add a map legend ............................................ 271
Setting image transparency .............................. 370
Add and format text and labels......................... 275
Geotagged Imagery .......................................... 371
Apply transparent fill patterns ........................... 281
Apply geological line styles and line annotations ... 19 - WORKING WITH DRILLHOLES
283
Drillhole data workflow...................................... 386
14 - CAPTURING MAPS AS IMAGES Project Database .............................................. 386
AND MOVIES Drillhole source data formats ............................ 387
Trench Source table formats ............................ 393
Saving a map window as a registered raster image Importing drillhole data from other drillhole
287 applications ................................................ 399
Making movies and animations from a map window Creating and managing drillhole projects ......... 399
288 Desurveying method......................................... 420
Creating sections and plans ............................. 422
Managing and analysing sections and plans .... 429
Displaying downhole data................................. 441
Displaying downhole logs ................................. 457
Creating and editing legends............................ 462 22 - WORKING WITH STRUCTURAL
Creating section legends .................................. 468
Adding sections to a layout............................... 469 DATA
Adding a map grid to sections .......................... 472 Creating orientated structural symbols from point
Creating a section collar plan ........................... 473 table data in a map..................................... 638
Interrogating drillholes ...................................... 473 Digitizing orientated structural symbols into a map
Downhole compositing ..................................... 474 window ....................................................... 638
Merging downhole tables.................................. 483 Dip and Dip Direction........................................ 638
Clipping drillholes by 3D solids or surfaces ...... 485 Strike and Dip (Right Hand Rule) ..................... 638
Generating 3D coordinates............................... 489 Applying structural styles to linear map features ....
Calculating maximum and EOH values ........... 490 639
Converting alpha-beta core angles................... 494 Dip and plunge angles ...................................... 639
Calculating sectional resources........................ 497 Discover structure codes .................................. 639
Oriented structural symbols .............................. 640
20 - WORKING WITH SURFACES
Surfaces module............................................... 503 23 - TENEMENTS
Introduction to Surface Gridding....................... 504 Tenements module ........................................... 642
Supported Grid Formats ................................... 510 Apply for an Australian mineral tenement......... 642
Creating Grids .................................................. 511 Displaying graticular state reference grid ......... 647
Converting Vector Files to Grids....................... 564 Searching Australian tenements....................... 648
Importing Grids ................................................. 566
Exporting Grids................................................. 567
Interrogating a Grid........................................... 569
Modify Grid Colours and Shading..................... 570
Contouring a Grid ............................................. 583
Creating Polygonal Regions by Selection Criteria..
586
Creating Grid Profiles ....................................... 588
Calculating Surface Properties and Volumes ... 593
Computing Cell Values by Expressions............ 593
Using Grid Tools............................................... 596
21 - HYDROLOGICAL SURFACE
ANALYSIS
Hydrology workflow .......................................... 624
Extract drainage features from a DEM ............. 625
Pit fill options .................................................... 629
Flow direction options....................................... 631
Surface derived drainage ................................. 634
Custom outlet derived drainage........................ 636
TOOLS Favourite Tables ............................................... 700
Favourite Workspaces ...................................... 700
Favourite MapBasics ........................................ 700
Scaled Output ................................................... 700
24 - DATAMINE DISCOVER TOOLS Map Legend...................................................... 703
Scaled Frame ................................................... 705
Datamine Discover tools................................... 654 Title Block ......................................................... 706
Map Grid ........................................................... 707
25 - PRO TAB Dynamic Grid .................................................... 710
Add-Ins ............................................................. 670 Label Creator .................................................... 711
Options ............................................................. 671 Line/Point labels ............................................... 712
Tool Search ...................................................... 674 Polyline Labels.................................................. 714
Polyline Label Positioner .................................. 714
26 - DISCOVER TAB Format Text ...................................................... 716
Label Angles ..................................................... 717
Open Table....................................................... 679 Colour Labels.................................................... 717
Save Table ....................................................... 679 Labels from Table ............................................. 718
Revert Table ..................................................... 679 Table from Labels ............................................. 718
Close All ........................................................... 679 Window Animator.............................................. 719
Vector Import .................................................... 679 Projection Info................................................... 721
Multi-File Open ................................................. 679 Favourite Projections ........................................ 721
Multi-MIF Import ............................................... 680 Update Coordinates.......................................... 722
ASCII Import ..................................................... 680 Custom Transform ............................................ 723
acQuire Import.................................................. 684 Reproject Coordinates ...................................... 727
DataSight Import............................................... 685 Multi-Table Reproject........................................ 727
EGB Import....................................................... 688 Reproject Image ............................................... 728
ECW/JP2 import ............................................... 689 Reproject surface.............................................. 728
Geosoft Import.................................................. 690 Mapper State .................................................... 728
ioGAS Import .................................................... 691 Standard Views................................................. 728
LIDAR LAS Import ............................................ 692 Cursor Setup..................................................... 729
Micromine Import.............................................. 693 Map Linking ...................................................... 730
Vulcan Import ................................................... 693 Map Size........................................................... 731
Multi-MIF Export ............................................... 694 Picklist Manager ............................................... 731
Vector Export.................................................... 694 Setup Table ...................................................... 731
Datamine Studio Export.................................... 694 Record Entry..................................................... 731
Leapfrog Export ................................................ 695 Enter Data......................................................... 731
Minesight Export............................................... 695 Structural Symbols............................................ 731
Vulcan Export ................................................... 695 Apply Picklist..................................................... 732
EGB Export....................................................... 696 Apply Style........................................................ 732
Vector Transform.............................................. 697 Tablet Mode...................................................... 732
Structure Manager............................................ 697 Desktop Mode................................................... 732
Modify Bounds.................................................. 697
Default View ..................................................... 697 27 - IMAGES TAB
Open Hotlink..................................................... 698
Setup Hotlink .................................................... 698 Rectify Image.................................................... 734
Create Hotlink................................................... 698 Map to Image.................................................... 734
Configure .......................................................... 698 Reproject Image ............................................... 735
Refresh On ....................................................... 699 Convert Image .................................................. 735
Refresh Off ....................................................... 699 Modify Image .................................................... 735
Refresh ............................................................. 699 Clip Image......................................................... 735
Workspace Export ............................................ 699 Rotate Image .................................................... 736
Workspace Editor ............................................. 699 Filter Image....................................................... 736
Workspace Advanced....................................... 699 Enhance Image................................................. 736
Restore Workspace .......................................... 700 Properties Image .............................................. 736
GeoTag Setup .................................................. 736
GeoTag Viewer................................................. 736 30 - QUERY TAB
28 - ANALYSIS TAB Select by Attribute............................................. 776
Split by Attribute................................................ 777
Data Statistics................................................... 738
Search and Replace ......................................... 778
Data Classification............................................ 740
Table Sort ......................................................... 778
Trivariate Classification .................................... 745
Select by Style .................................................. 779
Data Normalisation ........................................... 748
Vector Clip ........................................................ 779
Correlation Matrix ............................................. 749
Line Orientation ................................................ 780
Assign Values................................................... 750
Location Info ..................................................... 780
Hydrology ......................................................... 751
Area Change..................................................... 781
Geophysical Filters ........................................... 751
Proximity Search............................................... 783
Contour Labels ................................................. 756
Distance Calculator........................................... 784
Contour Label Positioner .................................. 756
Zoom to Object ................................................. 785
Graphing........................................................... 756
Window to Object.............................................. 785
Graph Overlay .................................................. 756
Stacked Profiles................................................ 756 31 - DRILLHOLES TAB
Traverse Lines.................................................. 758
Plot Vectors ...................................................... 761 Open Project..................................................... 788
Structural Symbols ........................................... 762 Open Session ................................................... 788
Create Application ............................................ 762 Import Project ................................................... 788
Create State Grid.............................................. 763 New Project ...................................................... 788
Tenement Search ............................................. 763 Manage Project................................................. 788
Legend Editor ................................................... 763 Subset Project .................................................. 788
Colour Table Editor........................................... 763 Session Manager.............................................. 789
Edit Data ........................................................... 789
29 - MODIFY TAB Section Manager............................................... 789
Generate Sections ............................................ 789
Build Object ...................................................... 767
Generate Logs .................................................. 796
Object Builder ................................................... 767
Downhole Data ................................................. 797
Voronoi Polygons ............................................. 767
Legend Editor ................................................... 798
PolyBuilder ....................................................... 767
Traverse Lines .................................................. 798
Mulit-Column Update........................................ 767
Print Sections.................................................... 798
Multi-Append .................................................... 768
Accept Parameters ........................................... 798
Insert Nodes ..................................................... 768
Modify Parameters............................................ 799
Extract Nodes ................................................... 768
Close................................................................. 799
Unique Identifier ............................................... 768
Section Grid ...................................................... 799
Smooth Lines.................................................... 769
Create Section Legend ..................................... 799
Reverse Line .................................................... 769
Collar Plan ........................................................ 799
Line Join ........................................................... 769
Grade................................................................ 799
Line Cut ............................................................ 769
Depth ................................................................ 800
Line Annotation................................................. 769
Attribute ............................................................ 800
Line Annotation Select...................................... 771
Max/EOH .......................................................... 800
Thin Node Number ........................................... 771
Alpha/Beta ........................................................ 800
Thin Node Position ........................................... 771
Resource Calculator ......................................... 800
Clone Style ....................................................... 771
Downhole Info................................................... 800
Donut Polygons ................................................ 771
Downhole Clip................................................... 801
Custom Patterns............................................... 771
Downhole Merge............................................... 801
RGB Colourizer ................................................ 773
3D Coordinates................................................. 801
Transform Object.............................................. 773
LAS Viewer ....................................................... 801
Align Objects .................................................... 774
LAS Template ................................................... 801
Offset Object..................................................... 774
LAS Import........................................................ 801
WinLoG Import.................................................. 802
gINT Import....................................................... 802
Drillhole DXF Export ......................................... 802
Section Layer Export ........................................ 802 Export GPX....................................................... 816
Section Image Export ....................................... 802
Drillhole Traces................................................. 803 34 - SURFACES TAB
Trench Traces .................................................. 803
Open table ........................................................ 820
Sections............................................................ 803
Vector to Grid.................................................... 820
Section Layers.................................................. 803
Contours to DXF ............................................... 820
Logs.................................................................. 803
Grid to ASCII..................................................... 820
3D Coordinates................................................. 803
Grid Export........................................................ 820
Export Drillhole Tables ..................................... 804
Grid to Image .................................................... 820
Export Drillhole Traces ..................................... 804
Interactive Gridding........................................... 821
Export Drillhole Section .................................... 804
Multi-File Gridding............................................. 821
Export Drillhole Layers ..................................... 804
Hydrology.......................................................... 821
Export Drillhole Image ...................................... 804
Grid Colour ....................................................... 821
32 - DISCOVER 3D TAB Grid Toggle ....................................................... 821
Grid Legend ...................................................... 822
Open 3D Window ............................................. 806 Contour Labels ................................................. 822
Open 3D Workspace ........................................ 806 Contour Label Positioner .................................. 822
Save 3D Workspace......................................... 806 Grid Stats.......................................................... 822
Refresh 3D Data............................................... 806 Grid Info ............................................................ 822
Toggle............................................................... 806 Grid Query ........................................................ 823
Map Window..................................................... 807 Assign Values ................................................... 823
Vectors ............................................................. 807 Calculator.......................................................... 823
Surfaces ........................................................... 807 Classify ............................................................. 823
3D Points .......................................................... 807 Clip.................................................................... 823
3D Lines ........................................................... 807 Clip to Grid........................................................ 823
Seismic Sections .............................................. 807 Convert ............................................................. 824
Drillhole Traces................................................. 808 Curvature .......................................................... 824
Sections............................................................ 808 Cut/Fill............................................................... 824
Section Layer.................................................... 808 Edit.................................................................... 824
3D Coordinates................................................. 808 Fill Holes ........................................................... 824
Trench Traces .................................................. 808 Filter.................................................................. 824
Logs.................................................................. 808 Flip .................................................................... 825
Extrusion Wizard .............................................. 809 HGT Convert..................................................... 825
Display Wizard.................................................. 809 Merge................................................................ 825
Drape Image..................................................... 809 Outline .............................................................. 825
Multi-Section..................................................... 809 Overlay ............................................................. 825
Object Manager ................................................ 809 Profile................................................................ 825
Range Query .................................................... 826
33 - GPS TAB Replace............................................................. 826
Resample.......................................................... 826
GPS Setup........................................................ 811
Reproject .......................................................... 826
Capture Setup .................................................. 811
RGB Grid .......................................................... 826
Display Window ................................................ 811
RGB Split .......................................................... 826
Point Trace ....................................................... 811
Rotate ............................................................... 827
Polyline ............................................................. 811
Shift................................................................... 827
Region .............................................................. 812
Slope................................................................. 827
Point ................................................................. 812
Statistics ........................................................... 827
Pause ............................................................... 812
Surface Area..................................................... 827
Resume ............................................................ 812
Tile Grid ............................................................ 827
Stop .................................................................. 812
Value Query...................................................... 828
Waypoint........................................................... 812
Vectorize........................................................... 828
Manual.............................................................. 813
Viewshed .......................................................... 828
Automatic Recenter .......................................... 813
Volume.............................................................. 828
Import GPX....................................................... 814
REFERENCE
INFORMATION
35 - GEOPHYSICAL FILTER
DESCRIPTIONS
Filter process .................................................... 831
Geophysical FFT Derivative Filters .................. 831
36 - CUSTOMIZING TITLE BLOCKS

About title blocks .............................................. 837
Company logo .................................................. 837
Title block parameters ...................................... 839
Placeholders..................................................... 840
Scale bar .......................................................... 841
37 - PROJECTIONS AND
TRANSFORMATIONS
Encom reprojections......................................... 843
NTv2 transformation ......................................... 843
38 - STYLES AND SYMBOL FONTS

Line styles......................................................... 846
Style library....................................................... 846
Geological symbol font ..................................... 846
Structural symbol font....................................... 849
Hydrographic symbol font................................. 855
Environmental symbol font ............................... 857
39 - SUPPORTED FILE FORMATS

Tabular and vector data.................................... 860
Images.............................................................. 862
Raster (grid) data.............................................. 863
Drillhole data..................................................... 864
40 - PRODUCT IMPROVEMENT
INITIATIVE
Configuring PII for enterprise deployment. ....... 866
Frequently asked questions.............................. 866
41 - DATAMINE STUDIO
Properties of .DM files ...................................... 869
Standard file types............................................ 870
INDEX
INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCING
DATAMINE
DISCOVER
Datamine Discover is an extension to MapInfo Pro, developed especially for
geoscientists. Datamine Discover runs with MapInfo Pro® version 17 (64-bit)
only on Windows 7, 8, 8.1 or 10 (64-bit) operating systems.
Building on the many powerful Geographic Information System (GIS)
features of MapInfo Pro, Datamine Discover converts MapInfo Pro into a
sophisticated and easy-to-use tool for managing, manipulating and
displaying exploration data sets.
Datamine Discover gives users the ability to process and view data in ways
that previously required a number of software packages. A geologist in the
field, an exploration manager in head office, or a draftsperson in a regional
office can use Datamine Discover to track tenement activity, contour point
data, view drillholes in plan and section, analyse geochemical data, facilitate
map creation, easily produce scaled hard copy output, and more.
Datamine Discover delivers new and improved functionality in a number of
key areas and incorporates a significant number of changes requested by
existing Datamine Discover users.
IN THIS SECTION
About this guide 3
Conventions used in this guide 3
INTRODUCING DATAMINE DISCOVER 3
ABOUT THIS GUIDE

This guide provides an overview of the capabilities of Datamine Discover and detailed instructions for
installing the program files, sample data, and other program resources. After you have successfully
installed the program, you can then access the comprehensive online documentation installed with the
program.
This is not a MapInfo Pro manual and knowledge of MapInfo Pro is required for Datamine Discover to
be used to its best advantage. Refer to the MapInfo Pro documentation for further information on using
MapInfo Pro.
This guide is organized into four sections:
INTRODUCTION
Describes how to install and configure Datamine Discover, and introduces users to the Datamine
Discover user interface.
TASKS
Describes how to use Datamine Discover tools to perform specific tasks, such as importing and
exporting data, displaying and analysing data, managing drillhole projects, and other common
workflows you can perform in Datamine Discover.
TOOLS
Describes the features and options displayed on Datamine Discover tools (dialog boxes). These are
the context help topics displayed when you open Help from a Datamine Discover dialog box.
REFERENCES
Provides useful reference information, such as lists of tools, symbol codes, grid filters, supported file
formats, and coordinate transforms used by Datamine Discover.
Refer to the Getting help section of this guide for more information about accessing this guide and other
forms of documentation provided with Datamine Discover.
CONVENTIONS USED IN THIS GUIDE

Certain conventions are used throughout this guide:
• Keys on the keyboard appear in small capital letters. For example, the Ctrl key appears as CTRL
in the text.
• Ribbon tools, buttons, and dialog labels (literals) are in boldface. For example, “On the QUERY
tab, click Select by Style.”
• The shorthand form ribbon tab>group>[menu]item indicates the ribbon path to a tool. For
example, “Select DISCOVER>Projection>Custom Transform.” is equivalent to the instruction “On
the DISCOVER tab, in the Projection group, click Custom Transform.” And “Select
DRILLHOLES>Output>[Section Output]>Print Sections.” is equivalent to the instruction “On the
DRILLHOLES tab, in the Output group, click the Section Output menu, and then click Custom
Transform.”
• Links to other sections in the documentation are blue. For example, see Licensing Datamine
Discover. Clicking the text will take you to that reference. References to other publications that
are not linked are shown in black italicized text, for example, MapInfo Pro User Guide.
DATAMINE DISCOVER 2017 USER GUIDE

INTRODUCING DATAMINE DISCOVER 4
• In tool descriptions, clicking the Related tasks link will display the task topic that explains how to
use that tool. In the corresponding task description, clicking the Related tools link will then take
you back to the tool description.
• File and folder names and paths are shown monospaced. For example,
disk:\Users\username\Desktop
where the italicized terms “disk” and “username” are placeholders (values vary with each
installation).
• Programming terms, variables, screen text, and text that you type are shown monospaced. For
example, “Click the Value box and type null.”
• Options that you select from a list are shown enclosed by < > symbols. For example, “Click the
Projection box and select <Custom>.”

INSTALLING AND
CONFIGURING
DATAMINE
DISCOVER
This section describes the installation and operation of the software under
the Windows 7, 8, 8.1 or 10 (64-bit) operating systems. This guide only
applies to single workstation installations of the software. If you are installing
a network license, refer to the License Manager User Guide (provided as a
PDF in the C:\Program Files(x86)\Encom folder) or Technical support.
IN THIS SECTION
System requirements 6
What the Datamine Discover Bundle includes 7
Installing Datamine Discover 7
Uninstalling Datamine Discover 7
Licensing Datamine Discover 7
Product Improvement Initiative 11
Starting Datamine Discover 11
Running multiple instances of MapInfo Pro and Datamine Discover 12
Configuring Datamine Discover 12
INSTALLING AND CONFIGURING DATAMINE DISCOVER 6
SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
MAPINFO PRO ADVANCED

Datamine Discover 2017 supports and installs MapInfo Pro Advanced version 17 (64-bit) only.
OPERATING SYSTEM
Datamine Discover 2017 supports the following operating systems:
• Windows 10 (64-bit)
• Windows 8.1 (64-bit)
Datamine Discover 2017 does not support:
• Apple Macintosh OSX and Linux operating systems
• Virtualization systems such as Citrix, Mac Parallels or VMWare
• Windows XP or Vista
MINIMUM HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS

• Pentium 4 series or equivalent CPU processor
• 2 gigabytes of RAM memory
• A monitor of at least XGA capability (1024 x 768 resolution)
RECOMMENDED HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS

• Core 2 series or equivalent CPU processor (Datamine Discover does not utilise multiple CPU
cores in most tools)
• 4 gigabytes of RAM memory
• A monitor of at least SXGA capability (1280 x 1024 resolution)
PREREQUISITES
The install wizard checks for the following and prompts if not already on your system. You can choose
to have the install wizard install these requirements or cancel the installation if you do not want to
proceed:
• Microsoft .NET Framework 4.6.1 (Client and Extended)
• Microsoft SQL Server Compact 3.5 Service Pack 2 (x86) for Windows Desktop
• Microsoft SQL Server Compact 3.5 Service Pack 2 (x64) for Windows Desktop
• Microsoft Visual C++ 2015 Update 2 Redistributable Package (x64)
• Microsoft Visual C++ 2013 Redistributable Package (x86)
• Microsoft Visual C++ 2013 Redistributable Package (x64)
• Microsoft Access Database Engine 2010 Redistributable (x64)
• SlimDX runtime .NET 4.0 x64 January 2012 (end user runtime)

WHAT THE DATAMINE DISCOVER BUNDLE INCLUDES

The Datamine Discover 2017 Bundle installs and licenses the following applications:
• MapInfo Pro Advanced 17.0 (includes MapInfo Pro Raster)
• MapInfo Premium Services
• Datamine Discover 2017 &
• Datamine Discover 3D 2017 (optional license option)
INSTALLING DATAMINE DISCOVER

You can install the software either by downloading the installation program from the Datamine website.
Initially, the software is not licensed and, when you first run the program, it requests you license the
software (Licensing Datamine Discover).
It is recommended to leave the Check for product updates option enabled at the end of the installation
process to detect if there is a maintenance release available.
INSTALLING FROM A DOWNLOADED INSTALLATION FILE

• Download the installation program from:
http://support.dataminesoftware.com/software-downloads/
• From Windows Explorer, double-click the downloaded file to start the installation.
SILENT INSTALLATION
For details on installing Datamine Discover silently, refer to the License Manager User Guide, provided
as a PDF in the C:\Program Files(x86)\Encom folder.
See also
System requirements
Uninstalling Datamine Discover
Licensing Datamine Discover
Configuring Datamine Discover
UNINSTALLING DATAMINE DISCOVER

To uninstall Datamine Discover, select Datamine Discover from Programs and Features in the
Windows Control Panel.
Note When Datamine Discover is uninstalled, the entire Discover folder and it contents are
removed. The Datamine Discover license and License Manager are not removed. You will
need to transfer the license to another computer or Datamine. User customizations, such as
drillhole projects, picklists and legends, are not removed.
LICENSING DATAMINE DISCOVER

Datamine Discover is protected under international copyright law. Datamine Corporate Limited
(Datamine) licensing systems are designed to protect against unlawful copying and use of the
software.

Datamine Discover is supplied with a hard-disk license system. If you are using a network license,
contact your system administrator or Datamine Technical support for assistance. Hard-disk licensing
involves sending an automated request to Datamine. When installing Datamine Discover, choose from
the following licensing procedures:
DISPLAY INFORMATION ABOUT DATAMINE SOFTWARE INSTALLED ON YOUR COMPUTER

• See Displaying license information.
REINSTALLING DATAMINE DISCOVER

• If Datamine Discover is installed on the computer with a valid license, the software does not need
to be relicensed if you reinstall the software. Your current Datamine Discover configuration files
and settings will be preserved.
DATAMINE DISCOVER HAS NOT BEEN PREVIOUSLY LICENSED ON THE COMPUTER

• A hard-disk license is required. For detailed instructions, see Installing a new license.
THE LICENSE IS BEING TRANSFERRED FROM ANOTHER COMPUTER

• You can transfer a license from one computer to another without contacting Datamine. For
detailed instructions, see Transferring a license.
A LATER VERSION OF THE SOFTWARE HAS BEEN INSTALLED

• If you are upgrading an installation with a valid license to a later version of the software, see
Upgrading an existing license.
See also
Troubleshooting license issues
INSTALLING A NEW LICENSE

1. Start Datamine Discover. You will be asked to license your installation.
2. Click Yes.
3. The Create License File dialog box is displayed.
Type in the company name and click OK. The License Manager is displayed.
4. Select the Activate License tab.
5. Under the Activation Details section type in both the 7-digit Customer Number and 10-digit Serial
Number supplied with the software.
6. Type in your User Name, E-mail and Confirm Email.
7. Click the Automatically Activate button to activate your license.
Note If you are not online or have to activate by email select the Manual/Evaluation option and
click the Generate Activation Request File button and follow the instructions.
8. Your license will be automatically activated within 20 seconds.
When prompted, click OK on the license notification, and close the License Manager.
Note If an error message is displayed, send the e-mail notification (sent to the e-mail address
you provided above) to Info.discover@dataminesoftware.com for assistance.

Datamine Discover is now ready to use.

See also
Displaying license information
UPGRADING AN EXISTING LICENSE

After installing Datamine Discover, if a license for an earlier version exists, a 20-day grace period is
granted, during which you can continue to use the software. However, you must upgrade your license
by contacting Info.discover@dataminesoftware.com and activate the upgraded license before this
grace period expires. The procedure is otherwise the same as Installing a new license.
See also
TRANSFERRING A LICENSE
If a hard-disk license is operating effectively on one computer (the source), you can transfer the license
to a second computer (the destination). This can be done without contacting Datamine. Follow the
steps below to transfer a valid license from one computer to another.
INSTALL DATAMINE DISCOVER ON THE DESTINATION COMPUTER
1. Install Datamine Discover on the second, destination computer. The version of the software on
the source and destination computers must be identical.
START DATAMINE DISCOVER ON THE DESTINATION COMPUTER
2. On the destination computer, start Datamine Discover. A message is displayed indicating no
license was found.
3. Click Yes.
4. The Create License File dialog box is displayed. Type the company name and click OK. The
License Manager is displayed.
OBTAIN THE HARDWARE ID OF THE DESTINATION COMPUTER
5. Select the Activate License tab.
6. Write down the 7-digit code displayed in the Hardware ID box.
TRANSFER THE LICENSE FROM THE SOURCE COMPUTER
7. On the source computer, start Datamine Discover.
8. On the PRO tab, click Add-Ins, and under Datamine Discover, click License Manager.
9. Select the Transfer License tab.

10. At Step 2 of the Transfer License tab, type in the Destination Hardware ID you recorded earlier.
Note To park the license with Datamine (e.g. when formatting a computer, or the source and
destination machines are in different locations), select the Return License option.
Note The license transfer will disable the license on the source machine. The source computer
license cannot be reactivated unless the license is transferred back from the destination
computer or a new activation code is obtained from Datamine.
11. At Step 3 of the Transfer License tab, click Create Transfer Activation Code. You will be prompted
to confirm the destination hardware ID.
The activation code for the destination computer is displayed.
Note The license on the source computer is now disabled.
12. Write down the activation code.
ACTIVATE THE LICENSE ON THE DESTINATION COMPUTER
13. If necessary, restart Datamine Discover on the destination computer and display the License
Manager as described in steps 2 through 4.
14. On the Activate License tab, under Activate Product, type in the Activation Code that you
obtained from the source computer.
15. Click the Activate button. A message is displayed confirming that the license has been
successfully transferred.
16. Click OK.
Datamine Discover is now ready to use.
If the transfer was not successful, on the source computer, browse to the C:\ProgramData\Encom
folder and open the file Transfer_Log.txt file. This contains a copy of the activation code generated
for the license transfer.
Note If you need to transfer the Datamine Discover license back to the original machine, you must
repeat the transfer procedure.
See also
DISPLAYING LICENSE INFORMATION

After you have installed and licensed the software, to display information about the installed
license, on the PRO tab, click Add-Ins, and under Datamine Discover, click License Manager.
The Licensed Software tab provides details of what License Types are available on the computer, and
what Product Licenses are activated and available. When you select a product, the product options
and details will be displayed.
See also

TROUBLESHOOTING LICENSE ISSUES

For more information on using the features in the License Manager, refer to the License Manager User
Guide, provided as a PDF in the C:\Program Files(x86)\Encom folder. If you believe that the license
is correctly installed, but you are unable to correctly operate Datamine Discover, contact Technical
support.
See also
PRODUCT IMPROVEMENT INITIATIVE

The Product Improvement Initiative (PII) has been implemented to better understand user
workflow and interaction with Datamine Discover which helps Datamine to improve future
releases. The PII works by recording menu clicks while Datamine Discover is operational; a
summary of this information is sent anonymously on a monthly basis to Datamine for analysis.
HOW DO I PARTICIPATE?
The first time Datamine Discover is started, you will be presented with a dialog asking if you would like
to participate in the initiative. Click Yes if you would like to participate or No if you do not want to
participate.
WHAT IF I CHANGE MY MIND?

On the PRO tab, click Add-Ins, and under Datamine Discover, click Product Improvement.
• To stop participating, select “No, I do not want to participate.” and click OK.
• To join the program, select “Yes, I would like to participate” and click OK.
Full details of the program can be found in Product Improvement Initiative. Information on configuring
PII for enterprise deployment can also be found in this topic.
STARTING DATAMINE DISCOVER

By default, Datamine Discover runs every time MapInfo Pro starts. If Datamine Discover does
not load automatically, the next time you run MapInfo Pro, you can start the application
manually, and then set it to start automatically. By setting Datamine Discover to start
automatically when MapInfo Pro starts, the Datamine Discover tabs will be instantly available.
Note To use Datamine Discover, you must have write permissions for the Datamine Discover
configuration folder (see Viewing and changing Datamine Discover directory locations). If the
user doesn't have write permissions to this folder, an error message is displayed. Before
continuing, you must set the required write permissions.
TO START DATAMINE DISCOVER MANUALLY:
1. On the HOME tab, click Tool Extensions, and then select the Registered tab.
2. Locate Datamine Discover and click Load Tool (Run).
TO SET DATAMINE DISCOVER TO START AUTOMATICALLY WHEN MAPINFO PRO STARTS:
1. On the HOME tab, click Tool Extensions, and then select the Registered tab.
2. Locate Datamine Discover and select the Autoload check box.
The next time MapInfo Pro starts, Datamine Discover will then automatically load and run.

See also
Getting help
Running multiple instances of MapInfo Pro and Datamine Discover
RUNNING MULTIPLE INSTANCES OF MAPINFO PRO AND DATAMINE

DISCOVER
Datamine Discover does not support either:
• Running multiple instances of MapInfo Pro simultaneously (whether the same or differing
versions). This includes running MapInfo Pro 32-bit and 64-bit versions simultaneously.
• Running multiple instances of Datamine Discover simultaneously. Issues are likely to occur with
some advanced modules (such as Drillholes, Discover 3D and GraphMap).
For further information, refer to the Knowledge Base article:
http://encomkb.encom.com.au/questions.php?questionid=733
CONFIGURING DATAMINE DISCOVER

The install program configures each installation to the default settings, including Datamine
Discover directory locations, status bar settings, and autosave interval. You can customize
these settings at any time.
• Viewing and changing Datamine Discover directory locations
• Overriding the default map status bar display
• Autosaving and restoring the workspace
See also
Installing Datamine Discover
Starting Datamine Discover
VIEWING AND CHANGING DATAMINE DISCOVER DIRECTORY LOCATIONS

During installation, you can specify the paths for the Datamine Discover program files, configuration
files and temporary files. These and other Datamine Discover directory locations can be viewed and
edited at any time after installation. For information about the Datamine Discover directories, see
Configuration Dialog Box.
TO DISPLAY AND EDIT DISCOVER DIRECTORY SETTINGS:
1. On the PRO tab, click Options, and under Datamine Discover, click Configuration.
The current directory locations are displayed on the Directories tab.
Note When you change the location of a configuration directory, you are asked if you want to
copy the contents of the existing directory to the new location. Unless you have been
instructed otherwise by Datamine support, always click Yes. Clicking No will create an
empty directory, which you must manually copy the template configuration files into.
2. To change a directory location, click the browse button next to the path name. On the
Configuration Directory Dialog Box, select:

• All users if you want all users to share the same directory and files.
• Current user if you want each user to have separate directories and files.
• Custom if you want to create a custom folder. Click the browse button to select or create a
folder.
Note Current user files are not overwritten when switching to All users.
3. Click OK to apply changes.
4. Click OK to close.
5. Restart Datamine Discover.
Note A template copy of the configuration and common files are installed and stored in
C:\ProgramData\Encom\Discover and C:\ProgramData\Encom\Common. These are
automatically copied to each user's profile settings folder when starting Datamine Discover.
See also
OVERRIDING THE DEFAULT MAP STATUS BAR DISPLAY

By default, MapInfo Pro sets the Status Bar to display the window width (Zoom). You can override this
default so that when a new Map window is opened, the status bar displays either the cursor position,
window width, map scale, or cartographic scale.
This override only has effect when Datamine Discover is running. You can also change the status bar
display for each map window manually by clicking the display on the bottom-left of the Status Bar or
from MAP>Options>Map Options.
TO OVERRIDE THE MAPINFO PRO STATUS BAR DISPLAY DEFAULT:

2. On the Display tab, under MapInfo Pro/Discover Options, click the Status Bar box and
select the desired display option.
3. Click OK to apply.

AUTOSAVING AND RESTORING THE WORKSPACE

Related tools Restore Workspace
Datamine Discover automatically saves the workspace every few minutes. The workspace is saved to
DISCOVER.WOR in the Discover Configuration folder and can be restored.
The Discover workspace is useful for recovering from user or program errors. For example, if you have
accidentally closed a complex layout before saving a workspace, use the Datamine Discover
workspace to resurrect your work.
TO CHANGE OR DISABLE THE AUTOSAVE INTERVAL:
2. On the Display tab, under MapInfo Pro/Discover options, in the Workspace save box, type
the interval in minutes between autosaves, or type zero to disable.
TO RESTORE THE AUTOSAVED WORKSPACE:
• On the DISCOVER tab, in the Manage group, click Workspaces, and select Restore
Workspace. You can also open the workspace from the Discover Configuration folder.
See also
Viewing and changing Datamine Discover directory locations
DISABLING MAPINFO PRO'S AUTOMATIC TAB SWITCHING

MapInfo Pro tabs are context sensitive, and MapInfo by default will automatically switch to the
appropriate tab depending on the window type or data type selected. This can be annoying for
Datamine Discover users, particularly when using the Drillholes tab.
Disable this behaviour by navigating to the PRO>Options>Application option, and setting the 'Ribbon
Tab Switching' setting to <None>.

GETTING HELP
Should difficulties or questions arise while using Datamine Discover, there
are several sources of help available.
IN THIS SECTION
Help 16
Technical support 16
Checking for Datamine Discover updates 17
Viewing and printing the electronic manuals 17
GETTING HELP 16
HELP
Datamine Discover Help is a comprehensive and accessible reference and contains all topics
found in the Datamine Discover User Guide. Choose one of the following methods to display
Datamine Discover Help:
• On the PRO tab, click Add Ins, and under Datamine Discover, click Help.
• When a Datamine Discover dialog box is displayed, click the Help button on the dialog to
display the relevant help topic (context help).
• Context help can also be displayed by pressing the F1 key when a Datamine Discover dialog box
is displayed.
Note Pressing F1 will otherwise open MapInfo Pro Help.
DATAMINE DISCOVER USER GUIDE

The Datamine Discover User Guide contains all topics found in the Datamine Discover Help,
but in a print-friendly PDF format.
TO ACCESS THE DATAMINE DISCOVER USER GUIDE:
• On the PRO tab, click Add Ins, and under Datamine Discover, click Manuals. This opens the
Documentation folder, which containing PDFs of Datamine Discover documentation. For more
information, see Viewing and printing the electronic manuals.
ONLINE KNOWLEDGE BASE

The Online Knowledge Base contains useful information that is regularly updated, including
how-to articles, tips and tricks, error messages and their resolutions, video tutorials, and such.
TO ACCESS THE DATAMINE DISCOVER ONLINE KNOWLEDGE BASE:
• On the PRO tab, click Add Ins, and under Datamine Discover, click Knowledge Base.
TECHNICAL SUPPORT
Users with current Datamine Maintenance and Technical Support (MATS) are entitled to
technical support. Support can be obtained by e-mail or from the Datamine website.
A response from our technical support team may consist of:
• An answer to a support query.
• An estimate of how long it takes to answer the query.
• A request by Datamine for additional information.
• An explanation of why the query cannot be answered.
• A suggestion on where further information can be obtained.
CONTACTING DATAMINE
• E-mail: support.discover@dataminesoftware.com

GETTING HELP 17
CHECKING FOR DATAMINE DISCOVER UPDATES

Users with current Datamine Maintenance and Technical Support (MATS) are entitled to
maintenance releases. The availability of maintenance releases can be checked by:
• On the PRO tab, click Add Ins, and under Datamine Discover, click Updates.
VIEWING AND PRINTING THE ELECTRONIC MANUALS

The manuals are in the form of PDF files (Portable Document Files) that can be viewed on-
screen, or once displayed, can be printed in part or in full. To view or print the files, Adobe
Reader must be installed on your computer. The installation of this software (as well as the
documentation files) is an option provided during the installation process of Datamine Discover.
TO VIEW THE ELECTRONIC MANUALS WITH ADOBE READER:
1. On the PRO tab, click Add Ins, and under Datamine Discover, click Manuals.
2. Double-click the PDF file to open in Adobe Reader.

MANAGING THE
USER INTERFACE
AND WORKSPACES
IN THIS SECTION
Controlling the interface 19
Organizing your MapBasic tools 19
Managing your workspaces 21
MapInfo Pro context menus 26
MANAGING THE USER INTERFACE AND WORKSPACES 19
CONTROLLING THE INTERFACE

When Datamine Discover starts, additional tabs are added to the MapInfo Pro interface. The Datamine
Discover tools are accessed from these ribbon tabs. As you move the cursor over each tool, a tooltip
is displayed, which provides a short description of each tool. To quickly locate a tool, use Tool Search
(see Organizing your MapBasic tools). To find out which tool to use for a particular task, search for the
task in Datamine Discover Help.
The Datamine Discover ribbon is configurable. The tools in the default ribbon (factory setting) are
described in the Tools section of this guide. An alphabetical listing of Datamine Discover tools is also
provided in the Datamine Discover tools section.
TO CHANGE THE DATAMINE DISCOVER RIBBON:
The available ribbons are shown on the Ribbons tab.
2. Select a ribbon from the list on the left.
3. Click OK.
4. Restart Datamine Discover.
TO HIDE AND SHOW DATAMINE DISCOVER TABS ON THE CURRENT RIBBON:
The selected ribbon is shown on the Ribbons tab.
2. In the Tabs box, clear and select tabs are required.
3. Click OK.
TO CREATE A CUSTOM TAB ON THE DATAMINE DISCOVER RIBBON:
• Contact Technical support.
Note It is recommended to disable MapInfo Pro's Ribbon Tab Switching (default option is
<Automatic>). Select PRO>Options>System>Application, and set Ribbon Tab Switching to
<None>.
See also
Starting Datamine Discover
ORGANIZING YOUR MAPBASIC TOOLS

Related tools Favourite MapBasics
A MapBasic tool is generally a custom or freeware tool written in the MapInfo Pro MapBasic
programming language that provides additional functionality to MapInfo Pro and Datamine Discover.
MapBasic tools have an .MBX file extension.
The Favourite MapBasics tool enables frequently used MapBasic tools to be added to a list
where they can be quickly selected and run. Favourite MapBasic tools can also be assigned an
“alias” name to make it easier to determine the contents of the MapBasic program in the list if
desired.

Favourite MapBasics
TO ADD A FAVOURITE MAPBASIC TOOL:

1. Select DISCOVER>Manage>Favourites>Favourite MapBasics.
2. On the MapBasic MBXs tab, click Add. The Add Favourite dialog box is displayed.
3. Next to the File path box, click the Open button and browse to the location of the
MapBasic tool.
4. In the Name box, type an alias for the MapBasic tool.
5. Click OK to add the MBX to the list of favourite MapBasic MBXs on the Favourites dialog box.
6. Repeat steps 2 through 5 to add another MapBasic tool to the list.
7. Click Close to finish.
TO RUN A FAVOURITE MAPBASIC TOOL:

2. On the MapBasic MBXs tab, double-click the MapBasic tool or select the MBX
and click Run MBX.
TO MAINTAIN YOUR MBX FAVOURITES:
2. On the MapBasic MBXs tab:
• To remove a MapBasic tool, select and click Remove.
• To edit a MapBasic tool name or location, select and click Edit.
• To reorder MapBasic tools, select and click the Up and Down arrow buttons to
move it up and down the list.

MANAGING YOUR WORKSPACES

• Favourite workspaces
• Checking and modifying table locations in a workspace
• Preparing a workspace for sharing and archiving
• Fixing problems in a workspace
• Opening the last auto-saved workspace
FAVOURITE WORKSPACES
Related tools Favourite Workspaces
The Favourite Workspaces tool enables frequently used workspaces to be added to a list
where they can be quickly opened. Favourite workspaces can also be assigned an “alias” name
to make it easier to determine the contents of the workspace in the list if desired. Workspaces
have a.WOR file extension.
Adding a favourite workspace
TO ADD A FAVOURITE WORKSPACE:

1. Select DISCOVER>Manage>Favourites>Favourite Workspaces.
2. On the Workspaces tab, click Add. The Add Favourite dialog box is displayed.
3. Next to the File path box, click the Open button and browse to the location of the
workspace file (.WOR).
4. In the Name box, type an alias for the workspace.
5. Click OK to add the workspace to the list of favourite workspaces on the Favourites dialog box.
6. Repeat steps 2 through 5 to add another workspace to the list.
TO OPEN A FAVOURITE WORKSPACE:

2. On the Workspaces tab double-click the workspace or select the workspace and
click Open Workspace.

TO MAINTAIN YOUR FAVOURITE WORKSPACES:

2. On the Workspaces tab:
• To remove a workspace, select and click Remove.
• To edit a workspace name or location, select and click Edit.
• To reorder workspaces, select and click the Up and Down arrow buttons to move it
up and down the list.
CHECKING AND MODIFYING TABLE LOCATIONS IN A WORKSPACE

Related tools Workspace Editor
Workspace Advanced
Use the Datamine Discover Workspace Editor to check and modify table references in
workspaces.
TO EDIT A WORKSPACE:
1. Select DISCOVER>Manage>Workspaces>Workspace Editor.
2. Select the workspace you want to edit and click Open.
3. Under Tables in workspace, the status of each table is listed as either OK, Unused or Missing:
• OK: the table is used in the workspace, i.e. displayed in a map window or browser and that
the file path to that table is correct.
• Unused: the table is open but not displayed in a map window or browser in the workspace.
• Missing: the table is set to display in a map window or browser but the table cannot be found
in the location specified by the file path.
Note Before applying changes to tables and path names, select the Save backup of workspace
before changes check box.
4. Make your changes (see editing tasks below) and then click OK to save your changes.
TO REMOVE UNUSED TABLES:
From the Workspace Editor,
1. Click Open Workspace.
2. Close the unused tables.
3. Save the workspace.
TO REMOVE MISSING TABLES:
• Use the Workspace Advanced tool (see Fixing problems in a workspace) to remove the
reference to the table.

TO EDIT TABLE PATHS:

1. Select the table, and then click Edit Selected Path.
2. Click OK and browse to the table location.
3. Click OK to update table path.
4. When finished updating paths, click OK to save changes to workspace.
TO MAKE TABLE PATH NAMES ABSOLUTE OR RELATIVE TO THE WORKSPACE FOLDER:
• Click Set All to Current to set the path names of all tables to the same folder as the
workspace.
• Click Set All to Absolute to save the selected drive and directory path for all the tables in the
workspace.
• Click Set All to Relative to make the path names of all tables located under the folder where the
workspace is stored relative to the workspace folder. If the table folder is not located under the
workspace folder, the full path is preserved.
Other tasks you can perform with the Workspace Editor:
• Select the Turn off editable layers check box to turn off all the editable layers in all map
windows. This is useful when a workspace is to be written to USB drive, or to prevent other users
from making modifications to tables.
• Select the Open all with interactive check box to open all tables in a workspace in interactive
mode. In interactive mode the user is prompted to browse for a new table location if the
workspace file path is incorrect. If the file path in a workspace is not interactive and a table is not
present in the saved file location, the workspace will not open.
• Select the Remove printer settings check box to delete the printer setting information from a
workspace.
See also
Fixing problems in a workspace

PREPARING A WORKSPACE FOR SHARING AND ARCHIVING

Related tools Workspace Editor
Workspace Export
Before writing a workspace and its tables to portable media, such as a USB drive, or archiving as a zip
file, use the Workspace Editor and Workspace Export tools to check and consolidate the tables
referenced in the workspace to a single folder.
TO PREPARE A WORKSPACE AND TABLES FOR PACKAGING:
1. Use the Workspace Editor to check for unused and missing tables and to turn off editable
layers. You can also use the Workspace Editor to save tables to the workspace folder and
make table names relative or absolute. For more information, see Checking and modifying
table locations in a workspace.
2. Use the Workspace Export tool to save the workspace and all open tables in a workspace
to a single folder.
Note All tables saved to a new folder using Save Tables and Workspace will be saved as native
MapInfo Pro files regardless of their original format (Excel, Access etc) with the exception
of raster images.
See also
Fixing problems in a workspace
Checking and modifying table locations in a workspace
FIXING PROBLEMS IN A WORKSPACE

Related tools Workspace Advanced
Use the DISCOVER>Manage>Workspaces>Workspace Advanced tool to check workspaces
with missing or corrupted tables and to fix links and commands. This allows workspaces with
complex layouts and customized map views to be opened when some tables are missing or
corrupted.
After selecting the workspace, the Workspace Advanced dialog box is displayed, from which you can:
• Load hidden tables
Hidden tables that were open when the workspace was created are loaded by default. Uncheck
this box to not load hidden workspace tables
• Load printer settings
Printer settings captured when the workspace was created are loaded by default. Uncheck this
box to not load workspace printer settings.
• Pause on error
By default the workspace loader tool will pause when an erroneous command line is encountered.
It is recommended to always have this option enabled.
• Step line-by-line
If the Step Line-by-Line box is checked, each time the Run button is pressed the workspace
loader tool will advance through the workspace one line at a time. This enables the user to edit
and test the workspace command lines as the workspace is loading.
Click the Run button to automatically run through each command of the workspace file in the Current
Statement Editor window at the top of the dialog. The status of each command is displayed in the
bottom Status window with either an OK or ERROR message.

Workspace Loader showing erroneous command line encountered
When an erroneous command line is encountered, the tool will pause and display it in the Current
Statement Editor. The ERROR message in the Status window will be accompanied by an error
description. The errors are detailed in the table below along with recommendations as to whether the
erroneous command needs to manually edited in the Current Statement Editor or skipped using the
Skip Line button. The error message table can also be accessed via the Error Message Definitions
button at the base of the dialog.
Error Message Solution

“Unable to open table name” Table name has been deleted or corrupted. Click Skip Line.
“Table name is not open” The Open Table command has been skipped for table name.
Delete the reference to table name in the Current Statement
Editor, then click Continue.
“ERROR” with no message Click Skip Line.
“Invalid view layer” This command line references an unopened table. Click Skip
Line.
More advanced users can use this tool to run MapBasic scripts coded into a workspace.
See also
Checking and modifying table locations in a workspace

OPENING THE LAST AUTO-SAVED WORKSPACE

Related tools Restore Workspace
Datamine Discover automatically saves the workspace every few minutes. The workspace is
saved to DISCOVER.WOR in the Discover Configuration directory and can be restored.
• Select DISCOVER>Manage>Workspaces>Restore Workspace.
See also
Autosaving and restoring the workspace
MAPINFO PRO CONTEXT MENUS

When Datamine Discover is started in MapInfo Pro, a number of tools are added to existing context
("right-click") menus to aid in the use of MapInfo Pro and Datamine Discover tools. The following
shortcuts are added to the mapper window, Layer Control, Table List and Explorer context menus:
MAPPER WINDOW CONTEXT MENU

Right-click inside a map window to display the context menu.
• Display Map in 3D
See Viewing data in three dimensions.
• Projection Info
Display the projection of the current map window
• Save/Restore Mapper State
Save a map scale and location and restore.
• Zoom to Selected Object
Zoom map window to the extents of the selected object
• Info Tool
Open MapInfo Info Tool to display tabular information about map objects.
LAYER CONTROL WINDOW CONTEXT MENU

Right-click on selected layer names or map window names to display the context menu.
For selected Layers:
• Table Projection
Displays the Projection information for the selected tables.
• Open Map Window
Open selected layers in a new map window.
• Unselect All
Unselect all records/objects in any of the selected tables.
• Close Table
Close the selected tables.
For a selected Map window name:
• Projection Info
Displays the Projection information for the selected tables and map window.

TABLE LIST WINDOW CONTEXT MENU

Right-click on selected layer names to display the context menu.
EXPLORER WINDOW CONTEXT MENU

Datamine Discover adds the following context menu options:
In the Maps section, for a selected Map window name,
• Projection Info
Display the projection of the current map window
In the Maps section, for selected Layers,
• Open Map Window
Open selected layers in a new map window.
• Unselect All
Unselect all records/objects in any of the selected tables.
• Close Table
Close the selected tables.
In the Tables section, for a selected Map window name,

ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
Included below are acknowledgments for the third parties whose software
has been used in permissible forms with the Datamine Discover product.
IN THIS SECTION
Acknowledgements 29
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS 29
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
ECW/JP2
This application supports the ECW data format and ECWP compression protocols. Portions of this
computer program are Copyright 2007-2012 Intergraph Corporation. All rights reserved. Creating
compressed files using ECW technology is protected by one or more of US Patent Nos 6,201,897,
6,442,298 and 6,633,688.
PRE-DEFINED PICKLISTS IN PICKLIST MANAGER

Picklist data is sourced from Commonwealth of Australia (Geoscience Australia) 2009:
Australian Surface Geology Codes (r_Australian Surface Geology Codes.xml)
Australian Surface Geology Unitnames (r_Australian Surface Geology Unitnames.xml)
TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR REUSE OR DISTRIBUTION

For any reuse or distribution by the user, this data is subject to the license terms at the following link:
http://www.creativecommons.org/licenses/by/2.5/au/.
DISCLAIMER
While every care is taken in respect of the data, commentary and information contained in this product,
Datamine Corporate Limited (Datamine) does not make any representations or warranties about its
accuracy, reliability, completeness or suitability for any particular purpose and, to the extent permitted
by law, Datamine disclaims all responsibility and all liability (including without limitation, liability in
negligence) for all expenses, losses, damages (including indirect or consequential damages) and costs
which might be incurred as a result of any of the data, commentary and/or information being inaccurate
or incomplete in any way and for any reason.

TASKS
MAP WINDOW
CONTROLS
IN THIS SECTION
Map view settings 32

Map projections 34
Displaying map coordinates, distances and bearings 37
Add a dynamic map grid to a map window 38
Window size and zoom controls 39
Linking map windows 40
MAP WINDOW CONTROLS 32
MAP VIEW SETTINGS

• Setting the default map view
• Saving and restoring the mapper state
• Saving and applying view settings
• Previous view
• Next view
SETTING THE DEFAULT MAP VIEW

Related tools Default View
MapInfo Pro stores a default view for each layer in a map window. When a new map window is
opened for a table, the layer is displayed in this default view. Use the
DISCOVER>Manage>Default view tool to change the default view. This feature is not
applicable for raster tables. Set the default table view to display an entire data layer or to only display
a selected area for large data tables.
SAVING AND RESTORING THE MAPPER STATE

Related tools Mapper State
Use the DISCOVER>Windows>Mapper State tool to save the position, size, centre point and
zoom width of the front map window. After saving the map window state you can then restore it
with the same tool. The Mapper State tool is useful when you want to restore a map window
that is used in a layout window after you have zoomed or panned across the map window.
See also
Saving and applying view settings
Saving and applying map projections
SAVING AND APPLYING VIEW SETTINGS

Related tools Standard Views
Use the DISCOVER>Windows>Standard Views tool to store the current map window
geographic extents and window dimensions. By storing the geographical extents over a project
area or area of interest the current map window view can be quickly re-positioned over the
location defined by the selected view. Standard Views can be used with any open datasets and are
independent of the current map window projection.

Standard Views Dialog Box
TO ADD A STANDARD VIEW:

1. Display the extents of the project area or area of interest in the current map window.
2. Select DISCOVER>Windows>Standard Views.
3. On the Standard Views dialog box, click Add.
The Add View dialog box is displayed, which shows the map window extents and size.
4. In the Description box, type the name for the view and click OK.
5. To add another view zoom and pan the current map window or set up a new view in another map
window, and then repeat steps 3 and 4.
TO APPLY A STANDARD VIEW:
1. Open the dataset or datasets in a new map window.
2. Select DISCOVER>Windows>Standard Views.
3. From Standard Views dialog box,
• To apply the saved view geographical extents, double-click the view or select the
view and click Restore View.
• Alternatively, to apply the saved view geographical extents and window
dimensions, select the view and click Restore View & Size.

TO MAINTAIN STANDARD VIEWS:

1. Select DISCOVER>Windows>Standard Views .
2. From Standard Views dialog box,
• To delete a view, select the view in the list and click Delete.
• To re-order views, select the view and use the Up and Down arrow buttons to
move the view up and down in the list.
Note The selected view is applied regardless of whether there is any data in that area.
See also
Saving and restoring the mapper state
PREVIOUS VIEW
Use the DISCOVER>Windows>Previous View to navigate back to a previous viewed zoom
level in a map window. Previous views are saved for all open map windows.
NEXT VIEW
Use the DISCOVER>Windows>Next View to navigate forward to a previous viewed zoom level
in a map window. Previous views are saved for all open map windows.
MAP PROJECTIONS
• Saving and applying map projections
• Displaying mapper projection details
SAVING AND APPLYING MAP PROJECTIONS

Related tools Favourite Projections
Use the Favourite Projection tool to create a list of frequently used map projections. Favourite
projections are used to change the current map window from one projection to another.
Favourite Projections Dialog Box

Any projections added to this list are also displayed in the first window of the Choose Projection dialog
box whenever a Datamine Discover tool requires a projection to be assigned.
Choose Projection Dialog Box
TO ADD A FAVOURITE PROJECTION:

1. Select DISCOVER>Projection>Favourite Projection. The Favourite Projections dialog box
is displayed.
2. Click Add. The Choose Projection dialog box is displayed.
3. Select the projection from the Category box and Category Members box.
4. Click OK.
5. Repeat steps 2 through 4 to add another projection to the list.
TO APPLY A FAVOURITE PROJECTION:
1. Select the map window to which the new map projection will be applied.
2. Select DISCOVER>Projection>Favourite Projection.
3. From the Favourite Projections dialog box, double-click the projection in select the
projection and click Apply.
To view details of the new map window projection, see Displaying mapper projection details.
MAINTAINING FAVOURITE PROJECTIONS:
1. Select DISCOVER>Projection>Favourite Projection.
2. From Favourite Projections dialog box,
• To delete a projection, select the projection in the list and click Remove.
• To re-order projections, select the projection and use the Up and Down arrow
buttons to move the projection up and down in the list.

Favourite Projections are stored in the DISCOVER.PRJ file in the .\Discover\Config directory. This
file uses a similar format to the MapInfo Pro projection file and can be opened and edited manually
using a text editor such as WordPad.
See also
Saving and restoring the mapper state
Saving and applying view settings
Displaying mapper projection details
Coordinates and projections
DISPLAYING MAPPER PROJECTION DETAILS

Related tools Projection Info
Use DISCOVER>Projection>Projection Info to display details of the coordinate system for the
front map window (or right-click in the map window and select from the context menu). You can
use the information in this window, together with the MapInfo Pro help topic on Working with
coordinate systems to understand more about how MapInfo Pro uses coordinate systems and to create
your own custom coordinate systems.
A table can be stored in a projection that is not defined in the MapInfo Pro projection file
(MAPINFOW.PRJ). In this case, the coordinate system name is undefined and is referred to as a custom
coordinate system. It is accompanied by a list of the projection parameters. Use these parameters to
add the new coordinate system to the MapInfo Pro projection file.
Custom coordinate systems can also be created so data collected in local coordinate systems such as
a mine grid can be overlain with data collected in real world projections such as UTM or lat-long. See
Coordinate transformations for more information on creating a custom projection.
See also
Displaying map coordinates, distances and bearings
Coordinate transformations

DISPLAYING MAP COORDINATES, DISTANCES AND BEARINGS

Related tools Location Info
Use QUERY>Map Object>Location Info to view the current cursor location in coordinates from
one or more projections, measure the distance and bearing between two map window locations,
and display the browser entries for a selected table continuously as the cursor moves over map
objects in the map window.
The Location Info dialog box can be moved by dragging the title bar. To close, click the button in
the top-right corner.
CURSOR COORDINATES
The cursor position coordinates in the current map window projection are displayed continuously in the
Location Info dialog box as the cursor moves within the map window. Click Select alternate
projection for position to display coordinates in an additional projection. For example, the cursor
position can be viewed in UTM and lat-long coordinates or UTM and Local Grid coordinates at the
same time.
Note The coordinates displayed in the Location Display window may appear different to those
displayed by the MapInfo Pro cursor position due to in-built rounding in the MapInfo Pro
coordinates. Datamine Discover reports and displays the coordinates as reported by MapInfo
Pro for the screen position. The precision of the coordinate locations is dependent on the map
window zoom level, the higher the zoom the greater the coordinate precision.
MEASURING DISTANCE AND BEARING

The Bearing and Distance measurements displayed are taken from the last selected cursor position.
To start measuring, click at the desired location in the map window. The bearing and distance
measurements from the selected location to the current cursor location are displayed in the Location
Info dialog box. The measurements are updated continuously as the cursor is moved within the map
window. Click in the map window again to re-start the bearing and distance measurements.
Note When selecting map window locations to be used in Bearing and Distance measurements,
map objects cannot be selected using the MapInfo Pro Snap tool.

OBJECT ATTRIBUTES
In addition to coordinate display and bearing/distance measurements the browser attribute entries for
a selected table can be displayed as the cursor is moved over map objects within the map window. In
the Details for pull-down list choose the table to display the browser information. Move the cursor over
the map objects to view the browser entries from the selected table. To stop displaying browser entries
select <None> from the Details for pull-down list.
Note If the map window has scroll bars enabled, the browser details may not be displayed when the
cursor is placed over an object. Remove the scroll bars using the MAP>Options>Map Options
tool.
See also
Coordinate transformations
Map projections
ADD A DYNAMIC MAP GRID TO A MAP WINDOW

Related tools Dynamic Grid
A dynamic grid can be added to the front map window. The map window grid coordinates are
updated automatically whenever the map window is zoomed or panned. The grid redisplays the
new map window coordinates on the fly when the window view dimensions are modified and can
be turned on and off as required.
Note This functionality is being superseded by MapInfo Pro's new Gridlines tool, found under
MAP>Content>Add to Map.
A dynamic grid is ideal for interactive work, but when creating grids for presentation purposes in scaled
maps, you should use a static map grid as described in Map making.

TO DEFINE AND ADD A DYNAMIC GRID TO THE FRONT MAPPER WINDOW:

1. Select DISCOVER>Map Grid>Dynamic Grid.
2. The Dynamic Grid dialog box is displayed. See Add a map grid for information on setting
the grid display options.
3. To hide the dynamic grid, select the Dynamic Grid tool again. Each time the grid is turned on the
Dynamic Grid dialog box is displayed with the last entered grid line styles and colours and default
label positions.
Note Dynamic grids cannot be removed from a map window through the Layer Control options.
See also
Creating scaled maps
Add a map grid
Map projections
Map view settings
WINDOW SIZE AND ZOOM CONTROLS

The following tools allow you to use objects to reset the map window. The map window can either be
fitted to the bounding rectangle of an object, or zoomed to the extents of the object (or objects) without
changing the aspect ratio (height to width ratio) of the window:
• Fit the map window to the selected object
• Zoom to the extents of the selected object
FIT THE MAP WINDOW TO THE SELECTED OBJECT

Related tools Window to Object
Use QUERY>Zoom>Window to Object to resize the map window to the aspect ratio of the
selected object and to zoom and re-position the map window to display the minimum bounding
rectangle of the selected object.
This is useful when adding a frame of specific size to a layout. Use the drawing tools or
DISCOVER>Modify>Build Object tool to create a rectangle covering the area to print, and then use
Window to Object to resize the map window to the selected rectangle.
This tool can also be used to display an entire map object when a selected region or polyline object is
much larger than the current map window zoom level. In this case, remember that the aspect ratio of
the map window is fitted to the object’s bounding rectangle.
Note For objects that have an aspect ratio of less than 0.1 or greater than 10, the selected object
does not completely fill the map window.
See also
Zoom to the extents of the selected object
Matching the sizes of linked windows

ZOOM TO THE EXTENTS OF THE SELECTED OBJECT

Related tools Zoom to Object
Select the object or objects, and then select QUERY>Zoom>Zoom to Object (or right-click and
select Zoom to Object from the context menu) to zoom the map window to show the entire
minimum bounding rectangle of the selected objects.
See also
Fit the map window to the selected object
LINKING MAP WINDOWS

Related tools Map Linking
Map Linking provides the ability to geographically link mapper windows so that any pan or zoom
update applied to one mapper is automatically applied to all other map windows included in the
linked group.
To access Map Linking either select DISCOVER>Windows>Map Linking.
Map Linking dialog to select and enable mapper windows
The Map Linking dialog box lists all currently open mappers and the projection of each. Use the
checkboxes next to Mapper names to select/unselect mappers. Select All and Unselect All buttons
are also provided.
Two mapper Linking Methods are available:
• Fixed extents – The windows are synchronized so that the window centre point and the X axis
extents are always visible in the map window regardless of either the map scale or the window
dimensions.
• Fixed scale – Following a pan or zoom, the new map centre and scale are applied to the other
linked mappers. Thus, each linked mapper window has the same centre coordinate and scale but
the amount of data shown in each depends on the individual window size and dimensions.
After selecting the map windows to be linked and linking method, click OK.

Map linking can be deselected from the Map Linking dialog by clicking Unselect All. When this option
is disabled the menu item will not show a tick beside it (see above).
See also
Show cursor position in linked windows
SHOW CURSOR POSITION IN LINKED WINDOWS

Related tools Cursor Setup
Use DISCOVER>Link>Cursor Setup displays the same geographic location in separate
mapper windows by placing a symbol at the same position as selected in one linked window. If
the cursor position is not visible in a linked map window the mapper can be panned to show the
selected location.
Cursor Position Dialog Box
In the Cursor Position dialog box, select the map windows to display the cursor locator symbol by
placing a check next to each window box. Sometimes the cursor position selected in one mapper is not
currently visible in another mapper because the data coverage does not include the selected position.
Check the Pan mapper to show cursor position box to pan the map window view to show the cursor
position.
The cursor symbol style button allows you to modify the cursor position symbol to any of the standard
MapInfo Pro symbols. To adjust the symbol style, click the Symbol button or use
SPATIAL>Style>Symbol Style.
Cursor positioning is a useful function in circumstances where you wish to use a mapper as a ‘locator’
and review data at a different scale in a second or third window. An example of two windows with the
location symbol placed at the same geographic position but with different scales and information
content is shown below:

Cursor Positioning showing a symbol placed at the same geographic location
The Cursor Position operation can be deselected at any time by clicking on the Cursor Position Off
button on the Cursor Position toolbar.
See also
Linking map windows
MATCHING THE SIZES OF LINKED WINDOWS

Related tools Map Size
The DISCOVER>Link>Map Size tool allows linked mapper windows to be displayed in the
standard size map window. If tables are displayed in a number of different sized linked mapper
windows the preferred map window size can be selected and all other map windows will be re-
sized to these map window dimensions. This allows for easy comparison of the same area between
the linked map windows.
See also
Linking map windows

IMPORTING AND
EXPORTING
This section describes the tools available for importing and exporting data
files from Datamine Discover.
IN THIS SECTION
Import and export tools 44
Importing and exporting tabular and vector data 45
Importing and exporting images 73
Importing and exporting drillhole data 77
IMPORTING AND EXPORTING 44
IMPORT AND EXPORT TOOLS

The combined MapInfo Pro/Datamine Discover GIS platform can import or export in excess
of 100 industry-standard and third-party data formats. The file formats that can be imported
into MapInfo Pro and Datamine Discover are listed in Supported file formats. A number of
additional formats can be imported using Safe Software Feature Manipulation Engine (FME).
In addition to the extensive import-export tools available in MapInfo Pro, the following import and export
tools are provided in Datamine Discover (click the tool name to view its description):
DISCOVER>File> IMAGES>Image Tools>

• Vector Import • Rectify Image
• Multi-File Open • Map to Image
• Multi-MIF Import • Convert Image
• ASCII Import DRILLHOLES>External Data>
• acQuire Import • LAS Viewer
• DataSight Import • LAS Template
• EGB Import • LAS Import
• ECW/JP2 import • WinLoG Import
• Fusion import • gINT Import
• Geosoft Import • Drillhole DXF Export
• ioGAS Import • Section Layer Export
• LIDAR LAS Import • Section Image Export
• Micromine Import
• Vulcan Import
• Multi-MIF Export
• Vector Export
• Datamine Studio Export
• Leapfrog Export
• Minesight Export
• Vulcan Export
• EGB Export
• Vector Transform

IMPORTING AND EXPORTING TABULAR AND VECTOR DATA

• acQuire
• ASCII data
• Datamine Studio
• DataSight
• DXF
• Fusion import
• Fusion import
• ioGAS
• Leapfrog Geo
• LIDAR LAS
• MicroMine
• MineSight
• Surpac
• Vulcan
• Transform vector formats
ACQUIRE
Related tools acQuire Import
The acQuire Import tool enables you to import drillhole or geochemical data directly from an
acQuire® database into MapInfo Pro tables for use with the Datamine Discover drillhole display
module. The import tool uses the acQuire direct API to provide direct access to the acQuire
database.
Note This tool downloads and creates a native copy of the database. It is recommend if you are
always connected to the network, to create a live link to the data instead, using
HOME>Open>Database Table. See MapInfo Pro Help for more information.
Due to database size and performance considerations Datamine Discover imports the selected data
from the acQuire database into MapInfo Pro .TAB files rather than establish a live connection to the
data. Therefore, if the data is modified or updated in the database you will need to import a new copy
of the data into Datamine Discover to make sure you are using the latest information.
Note The acQuire database import supports all acQuire data models up to 4.5.5.900 For more
information on the data models and version support, see Select Data from acQuire dialog box
help topic.
TO IMPORT DATA FROM AN ACQUIRE DATABASE:
1. Select DISCOVER>File>Import>acQuire Import. The Import from acQuire dialog box is
displayed.
2. Under Mode, select either Drillholes or Point samples.
3. Under Commands, click Select data from acQuire to connect to the acQuire database. Refer to
the acQuire documentation for information about creating database connections and how to use
the acQuire API interface to select the data you want.

4. Click Choose MapInfo projection and choose the projection that the collar coordinates were
recorded in.
5. In the X field and Y field boxes, select the fields containing the X and Y coordinates.
6. Select Open database to display the table in a browser window. Select Create map to display the
table in a map window.
7. Click Save acQuire Settings to retain these settings for future use. Next time the acQuire data is
to be displayed use the Load acQuire Params button to re-load a saved acQuire database
query.
8. Click Import. The Choose Output Files dialog box is displayed.
9. Next to the Collars file box, click the Open button to select the output folder and file name. When
selected, the other output file locations are updated to match. Click in any box to edit the defaults
or click Open.
10. To disable import of the survey, lithology or assay data table, clear the Import check box adjacent
to each file name box.
11. Press the OK button to complete the import process.
To use this data in the Drillhole module, you will need to create a new database from the TAB files.
See the Creating and managing drillhole projects for more information.
ASCII DATA
Related tools ASCII Import
The Datamine Discover ASCII Import tool is designed to import external multi-column ASCII
data files into a MapInfo Pro .TAB file.
Features of the ASCII Import tool include:
• Batch import of multiple files of the same format.
• Flexible import format that can accommodate any number of ASCII data columns.
• Can read ASCII files with either fixed width (defined by column size) or delimited by user defined
characters.
• Easy interface for column naming can use a header line or interactive dialogs. Unwanted header
records can be skipped during the import.
• Comment lines are accommodated as are various data formats such as real, and scientific
notation.
• Data specification can include multi-channel and banded data (for example, EM data)
• Use or save templates to describe the data format for re-use. Comments, headers and nulls are
all handled in the templates.
To view samples of ASCII files that you can import, see Supported ASCII file formats.

As well as generic or custom ASCII text file formats, the following formats are automatically detected
with in-built templates:
• CSV format
• LAS downhole log
• Minesight SRG (see MineSight)
• Geosoft XYZ
• GemSys
• AmiraTEM
• ERMapper vectors
• ModelVision
After data is imported, it is saved to a .TAB file and automatically opened in a browser view. If X and
Y columns are present in the file, points will automatically be created and displayed in a map window.
TO IMPORT AN ASCII FILE:
1. Select DISCOVER>File>Import>ASCII Import. The ASCII Data Import dialog box is
displayed.
2. Under Input file, click Open and select the ASCII file to be imported. Hold down the CTRL
key to select multiple files for batch import.
The first 100 data records of the file are displayed in the Data preview box. If the format is not
supported (e.g. binary file or inappropriate text file), a warning message is displayed.
To examine the input file in an external text editor, click the Preview button. To change the
default editor, click Options (see ASCII import options).
3. The file is scanned to determine whether if it is a fixed width or delimited format. View the sample
records in the Data preview box.
To change the format, under Column Format, click a different format . A Fixed width file is one
where each column is confined to fixed character positions on each line of the file. A Delimited
data file is one where each column is separated from the others by single or multiple delimiter
characters. Some common delimiters include spaces, tabs and commas. Additional delimiters
can be typed in the Other box. A comma separated value (.CSV) file is delimited with commas.
4. The column widths are indicated by vertical lines in the Data preview box. With fixed-width data,
if fields that are not properly identified, you can add and move separators.
• To add a separator, click the new position in the Data preview box.
• To delete a separator, double-click the separator.
• To move a separator, click and drag it to a new position. Holding the CTRL key while you move
a separator will also shift all columns to the right of the current column.
5. If the file contains header lines, under Header, select the Number of lines in header. The header
lines are displayed in the Data preview box.

6. Column names can be assigned to each column either automatically from a header record or by
selecting the name for each column.
• If column names are provided in the header:
Under Header, select the Field names are in header on line check box and select which line of
the header contains the field names. Click Get Field Names to update the preview. Only field
names starting with alphabetic characters or underscores are accepted. To ignore an invalid
leading character, using the Starting at char option.
• To manually assign column names:
In the Data preview box, right-click the column label and select a standard field from the
Fields shortcut menu or click Properties to create a new field name and type. Fields named
Skip are not imported.
Click Field Summary to display a list of all the assigned column names and field data types. To
change the field assignment and filed type, right-click the column label and click Properties.
7. Input data fields containing an asterisk (*), a solitary minus sign (-) or a space ( ) are automatically
treated as null values. When imported, nulls are written out to the .TAB file as blanks in character
fields and zeroes in numerical fields. To define a different null specifier string, (e.g. –999.99),
right-click the column label and select a standard field from the Fields shortcut menu and click
Properties. From the Properties dialog box, under Nulls, in the String interpreted as null input
value box, type the null string. To apply the same null string to all input fields, select Apply to all
fields.
8. When you have completed defining the structure of the input file, click Import to create the .TAB
file. If multiple ASCII files are selected, they will be saved in the selected output folder with a
default name.
The steps above describe the common tasks when importing ASCII files. For information about
advanced ASCII import features, see:
• ASCII import options
• Line identifier
• Ignored records
• Ignored characters
• Save and reload ASCII template
SUPPORTED ASCII FILE FORMATS

The Datamine Discover Advanced ASCII Import tool can load a wide range of ASCII multi-column
formats. Typically the formats fall into the following classes:
NO HEADER OR COMMENTS, MULTI-COLUMNS OF CONSTANT WIDTH

1600 300200.0 6253800.000 56481.027 -0.010
1600 300220.0 6253810.000 56479.535 -999999
1600 300240.0 6253820.000 56478.371 -0.003
1600 300260.0 6253830.000 56477.547 -0.001
1600 300280.0 6253840.000 56477.035 -0.000
1600 300300.0 6253850.000 56476.781 -0.000
1600 300320.0 6253860.000 56476.707 -0.001
1600 300340.0 6253870.000 56476.723 -0.003
1600 300360.0 6253880.000 56476.734 -0.005
1600 300380.0 6253890.000 56476.660 -0.008

HEADER LINES AND COMMENTS WITH MULTI-COLUMNS OF CONSTANT WIDTH

LINE EAST NORTH MAG GRAV
\ This is a comment line used for information
1600 300200.0 6253800.000 56481.027 -0.010
1600 300220.0 6253810.000 56479.535 -999999
1600 300240.0 6253820.000 56478.371 -0.003
1600 300260.0 6253830.000 56477.547 -0.001
1600 300280.0 6253840.000 56477.035 -0.000
1600 300300.0 6253850.000 56476.781 -0.000
1600 300320.0 6253860.000 56476.707 -0.001
1600 300340.0 6253870.000 56476.723 -0.003
1600 300360.0 6253880.000 56476.734 -0.005
1600 300380.0 6253890.000 56476.660 -0.008
GEOSOFT-STYLE DATA FILES WITH LINE NUMBERS EMBEDDED AS STANDARD XYZ FILE
Line 1600
300200.0 6253800.000 56481.027 -0.010
300220.0 6253810.000 56479.535 *
300240.0 6253820.000 56478.371 -0.003
300260.0 6253830.000 56477.547 -0.001
300280.0 6253840.000 56477.035 -0.000
300300.0 6253850.000 56476.781 -0.000
300320.0 6253860.000 56476.707 -0.001
300340.0 6253870.000 56476.723 -0.003
Line 1700
300660.0 6243880.000 56476.734 -0.005
300680.0 6243890.000 56476.660 -0.008
DELIMITED DATA WITH INCONSISTENT COLUMN WIDTHS WITH OR WITHOUT HEADERS

1600,300200,6253800,56481,-0.01
1600,300220,6253810,56479.5,-1.00E+30
1600,300240,6253820,56478.4,-0.003
1600,300260,6253830,56477.5,-0.001
1600,300280,6253840,56477,0
1600,300300,6253850,56476.8,0
1600,300320,6253860,56476.7,-0.001
1600,300340,6253870,56476.7,-0.003
1600,300360,6253880,56476.7,-0.005
1600,300380,6253890,56476.7,-0.008
ASCII IMPORT OPTIONS

The Options dialog box contains defaults for importing an ASCII file:
• If the Use last format file (*.i3) by default is checked, next time a saved format file (*.i3) is
loaded by pressing the Load format button, the directory path of the previously loaded or saved
format file directory will be used. If this option is left unchecked, the default path when browsing
for a format file will be the same as the path of the ASCII file currently being imported (but with an
.i3 extension).
• If the Rename selected easting field to X and selected northing to Y is checked the field
names for the respective easting and northing columns will be changed to X and Y.

• Two options are available for the Auto-classify behaviour: Hide header when classified and
Show dialog compacted. These options are toggles for the initial display of the Advanced ASCII
import dialog. Auto-classification occurs when the Advanced ASCII importer can detect the ASCII
structure upon loading a file without any prompts from the user.
• Null value inputs can be specified under the Properties dialog when right clicking on a particular
field. To specify the output value of a defined null value, type in for example -9999 into the Output
null value dialog box. Subsequent to importing the ASCII file, the defined null values will populate
the MapInfo Pro Browser.
• The input file can be previewed with an external editor of the user’s choice as set under the Editor
option. By default this is set to WordPad.exe.
LINE IDENTIFIER
Check the Import the Line Field box if there is a column containing a line identifier in your data. In
some cases, there is not a line field in your survey data. Instead, the file contains a separate data line
that specifies the start of each new survey line. The data following the line identifier are all the
measurements relating to that survey line. The simplest example of this is for the line simply to contain
the string Line x, where x is a survey line name e.g. 1020.
To import data from files with interspersed line numbers check the box Has interspersed line
numbers and select an appropriate line number prefix from the pull-down list. If the line prefix that is
not in this drop-down list, it can be typed in manually. The line prefix may be included in the output or
can be left out altogether (e.g. Line 1020 or just 1020). When the Has interspersed line numbers
option is enabled there is no need to select a field to be the Line field.
IGNORED RECORDS
Sometimes a file may contain additional data lines that are not needed in the data import. To enable
Datamine Discover to ignore particular lines of data in an ASCII file, enter the symbol or text used at
the start of the unwanted lines (e.g. “#”,”//”, etc) in the Comment Lines control. Make sure each entry
is contained within quotation marks and multiple entries are separated by a comma.
To import the ASCII file select the Import button in the top-right corner of the dialog. You are then
prompted to select the name of the TAB file that is created to contain the imported data.
IGNORED CHARACTERS
To pre-process or filter out unwanted characters from the ASCII dataset, type the characters to ignore
(such as *, %, $, #, @ or ?) into the Ignore characters text box (top left of the dialog). Once these
characters have been defined, the Data preview will interactively change displaying the dataset
without the specified characters. Upon import these characters will not be displayed.
SAVE AND RELOAD ASCII TEMPLATE

If you need to import a number of files with the same data layout it may be useful to save the ASCII
import Template for later use. To do this, simply press the Save Format button and enter a name for
the template. Make sure to save the import template before you start importing the data the format
information is lost.
When you want to import another data file with an identical format, reload the saved template using the
Load Format button. Datamine Discover will automatically configure the new data file with the
appropriate field names, field properties, delimiters, column widths, etc.

DATAMINE STUDIO
Related tools Datamine Studio Export
The Datamine Studio table exporter is a wizard-style interface designed to easily select and
convert MapInfo Pro vector, grid and image files into Datamine Studio .DM format (see
Datamine Studio for formats). The Datamine Studio exporter is designed to work exclusively
with open Map Windows in MapInfo Pro—only mapped datasets can be used.
To start the export wizard, open the datasets in MapInfo, and then select
DISCOVER>File>Export>Datamine Studio Export. If multiple Map Windows are open in MapInfo Pro,
the Select Mapper Window dialog is displayed, from which you can select the window containing the
data you wish to export. Click OK to start the wizard:
• Step 1: Settings
• Step 2: Vector tables
• Step 3: Surface tables
• Step 4: Surface to image tables
STEP 1: SETTINGS
FOLDER
Displays the default folder where the .DM files will be exported to. To navigate or modify the path,
click the adjacent folder button and navigate to the desired folder.
REPROJECTION OPTIONS
Datamine Studio does not handle reprojection on-the-fly as in MapInfo Pro. Therefore, all spatial data
needs to be reprojected into the same coordinate space. All selected data types (vector, grid and
image) are reprojected.
MAPPER PROJECTION
The projection system of the selected map window.
NEW PROJECTION
The target system the tables will be reprojected into. By default, the Mapper Projection and New
Projection are the same. If any table is already in the target projection it will not be reprojected.
Only files not in the target projection will be reprojected.
To set a new projection, click the Projection button to display the Choose Projection dialog
box. Select the new projection from the Category and Category Members options. The
selected projection is displayed in the New Projection box.
Note Avoid reprojecting into a geographical coordinate system (longitude-latitude). Although
Datamine Studio can open data in these systems, it is not recommended. Cartesian
coordinate systems are preferred.
The Projection Method toggles between Standard and NTv2 Grid Shift methods of reprojection. If
the Standard method is selected, the reprojection will be either a three- or seven-parameter
translation. If the NTv2 Grid Shift method is selected, the NTv2 grid shift method is used.
The Datamine Discover projection list is stored in a separate file to the MapInfow.prj file. To
reproject files into a custom coordinate system in the MapInfow.prj file, copy the custom
projection line into the Encom.prj file located in the
C:\Users\USERNAME\AppData\Roaming\Encom\Common\Projections directory. For more
information on NTv2 grid transformations, see NTv2 transformation.

INTERPOLATION
Sets the method of reprojection for image and grid files. Three interpolation methods are available:
• Nearest Neighbour – Simple interpolation whereby the new image/grid cell value is taken
from the closest image/grid cell in the original image/grid.
• Bilinear – The value of a grid cell in the new image/grid is assigned the weighted value of the
four surrounding image/grid cells in the original image/grid.
• Bicubic – Uses the weighted value of 16 surrounding image/grid cell values in the original
image/grid to interpolate the value a grid cell in the new image/grid. This method requires
more processing but is more accurate than bilinear interpolation. Bicubic interpolation also
produces a smoother image/grid.
OUTPUT OPTIONS
Select the output files types and precision of the dataset.
IMAGE TYPE
Select the output image format from the dropdown, output image formats include PNG, JPG and
TIF. The default output Image Type is PNG.
BACKGROUND COLOUR
Select a background colour from the palette. This colour is used for all null image/grid cells around
the reprojected image/grid.
Click Next to continue to Step 2: Vector tables.
STEP 2: VECTOR TABLES

The vector dialog enables the selection/deselection of tables and fields as well as the validation of the
tables and fields so the conversion of TAB files to .DM files is seamless.
The vector dialog displays a grid listing all the open vector tables from the selected map window.
SELECTED
Click the check box to toggle the selection of the table. By default, all vector tables are selected. If a
table is unselected it will not be exported.
VALID
The valid column displays the validation status of the table. The table is either invalid or valid. A valid
table is ready for export; an invalid table cannot be exported until it is corrected. Hover the pointer over
the validation icon to display information about the validation error detected.
Three validation states are displayed:
• Valid – No validation issues detected in table.
• Invalid fields – Validation issues detected in table fields.
• Invalid table – Validation issues with table, this error is due to the maximum size for a DM file
has been exceeded.
See Datamine Studio for further information on Datamine Studio file structures.
TABLE NAME
Name of the table to be exported.

METHOD
All Datamine Studio files require a Z reference RL, height etc. Select the method to attribute a Z value.
Three methods are available:
• Constant – a user define numeric number can be assigned to the table.
• Field – a user defined numeric field can be selected to attribute the table objects.
• Surface – a user defined surface file can be used to extract a Z value from a grid cell.
Z VALUE
This option is used for Constant, Field and Surface Methods. For a Constant method type in a numeric
value, for Field select a numeric field from the table and for Surface method select a surface file.
DEFAULT Z VALUE
This option is used only when the Surface method has been selected. Type in a numeric value, this
value is required whenever a vector object bounds exceeds the bounds of the selected surface file.
(FIELDS)
Click the Fields button to open the Modify Fields dialog box, from which you can rectify field
validation errors that prevent the table from being exported.
MODIFY FIELDS DIALOG BOX

SELECTED
Toggle the selection of the field, by default all table fields are selected, to deselect uncheck the box. If
a field is unselected it will not be exported.
VALID
The valid column displays the validation status of the field:
• Valid – field is valid and ready for export,
• Warning – field is valid and ready for export but an automatic change has been applied. When
a field name from the MapInfo Pro table exceeds eight characters, the field name is automatically
truncated suffixed by an underscore and number.
• Invalid – field cannot be exported until it is corrected. Hover the pointer over the validation icon
to display information about the type of error type detected:
• Field name begins with . , ! : * & = ( ) ? or space or number
• Field contains spaces or , ! : * & = ( )
• Field name is blank
• Field name is duplicated
• Field name is a restricted name
• Field name contains a space
• Field width must be divisible by 4
• Field width exceeds 1024 characters
• Field name exceeds 8 characters

NAME
Name of the field from the MapInfo Pro table.
TYPE
Type of field in the MapInfo Pro table. When exported, Character, Date, Date Time, Time, and Logical
are converted to Alphanumeric; and Float, Decimal, Integer and Small Integer are converted to
Numeric (Float).
WIDTH
Width of the exported Datamine Studio field. The width must be a divisible of 4.
ALIAS
Name of field to be exported to Datamine Studio. The field name must not exceed 8 characters.
Click Next to continue to Step 3: Surface tables.
STEP 3: SURFACE TABLES

Displays all open raster grids from the selected map window. Use the controls to move tables from the
Selected box to the Unselected box and vice versa. When a multiple banded raster grid is selected a
Raster Multiple Band Selector dialog will pop up to select Field and Bands to export.
Raster grids are not directly supported by Datamine Studio but are converted into wireframe triangle
and point files.Refer to Datamine Studio for more information.
Click Next to continue to Step 4: Surface to image tables.
STEP 4: SURFACE TO IMAGE TABLES

Displays all open raster grids from the selected map window. Use the controls to move tables from the
Selected box to the Unselected box and vice versa. Selected surface files will be converted into
geolocated images.
When a multiple banded raster grid is selected a Raster Multiple Band Selector dialog will pop up to
select Field and Bands to export.
Click Next to continue to Step 5: Image tables.
STEP 5: IMAGE TABLES

Displays all open image tables from the selected map window. Use the controls to move tables from
the Selected box to the Unselected box and vice versa.
Click OK to export all selected vector, raster grids and image tables.
See also
Datamine Studio

DATASIGHT
Related tools DataSight Import
DataSight is a platform for the management, communication and reporting of any natural
resource data. DataSight handles information relating to any part of the sector—surface and
groundwater, atmosphere, soil and others. DataSight stores data on the MS SQL Server
platform and the DataSight import tool is designed to provide Datamine Discover users with a simple
interface for connecting to, and importing data from SQL Server tables and views created by
DataSight. This allows information stored in DataSight to be quickly visualized and analysed in its
spatial and 3D context.
For more information, see:
• Server authentication
• Access methods
• Prerequisites for using the DataSight import tool
• Using the DataSight import tool
SERVER AUTHENTICATION
The DataSight Import Tool supports both Windows authentication and SQL Server authentication for
connecting to MS SQL Server. Windows Authentication uses your Windows ID and password to
access the database. If you select this option, you will be able to open the resulting .TAB file or .WOR
files that contain this table without entering a user name or password. You do not have to enter a user
name or password in the fields provided.
SQL Server authentication requires that you enter a unique ID and password to access this database.
If you select this option, you will be prompted for this ID and password each time you open this .tab file
or access it in a workspace. Please see your database administrator to determine which authentication
methods are enabled on your server.
ACCESS METHODS
The DataSight import tool supports two methods for connecting MapInfo Pro to the server. A linked
table is a MapInfo Pro table that is downloaded from a remote database and retains links to its remote
database table. The remote database table is known as a DBMS table. When MapInfo Pro downloads
a table, it copies the entire contents of the table to the local machine. Any changes you make to the
copy can be committed to the server table at any time. Linked tables rather than live tables are
recommended to improve performance.
You can access remote data as a live access table using MapInfo Pro. It is called a live access because
there is no local copy of the data, that is, all operations against the data go directly to the server. This
differs from linked tables, which download a snapshot from the remote database into a native MapInfo
Pro table.
You can perform most operations on a live access table that you do for a regular MapInfo Pro table.
For example, you can view, edit, copy, and save a live access layer just as you can a regular MapInfo
Pro table. However, you cannot pack or modify a live access table.
You can create live access tables with or without a cache. The cache is a memory cache, which
contains only the rows that are in the map display for that window. This optimizes certain operations
such as ToolTips, labelling, etc. on the map. The cache is automatically updated when the view of the
map changes, (for example, zooming or panning).

PREREQUISITES FOR USING THE DATASIGHT IMPORT TOOL

Before using the DataSight import tool, ensure that the following prerequisites have been established:
• An instance of SQL Server, containing at least one DataSight database.
• The user has a valid login for SQL Server and permission to read the DataSight database.
• The DataSight database has been configured to include GIS coordinates for stations, and that
these coordinates have been populated.
• The user understands the map projection in which the GIS coordinates in DataSight have been
created.
USING THE DATASIGHT IMPORT TOOL

The following tools are provided in the DataSight import tool (DISCOVER>Import>DataSight Import):
• Setup – Setup a database connection.
• Import – Create an SQL query and import data into a MapInfo Pro table.
• Open – Reopen a table using a previous SQL query.
• Refresh – Refresh a linked database table.
• Delete – Delete a linked database table.
Before importing data, you must set up the connection.
SET UP A DATABASE CONNECTION
1. Select DISCOVER>File>Import>DataSight Import>Setup. The Setup Database Connection
dialog box is displayed.
2. In the SQL Server box, type the name of a SQL Server instance that contains a DataSight
database, or click Browse to select from the list of available SQL servers.
3. In the Authentication box, choose either <Windows Authentication> or <SQL Server
Authentication>.
4. If SQL Server Authentication is selected box, in the User Name and Password boxes, type a user
name and password
5. In the Select Database box, type the name of a DataSight database, or click Browse to select
from the list of databases available on the selected SQL server.
6. To verify the connection, click Test Connection.
CREATE A NEW SQL QUERY AND IMPORT DATA INTO A MAPINFO PRO TABLE
1. Select DISCOVER>File>Import>DataSight Import>Import. The Import from DataSight -
Step 1 of 2 dialog box is displayed.
2. In the Database box, select from the list of available database connections.
3. In the Available tables box, select a table or view to import. Click Advanced Table Filter to filter
this list.
4. Under Select fields and criteria, move fields into the Selected box to include them in the imported
table.
5. Select the Refine selection criteria check box if additional criteria are required to filter the rows
imported into MapInfo Pro.

On the Simple tab, use the expression builder to define selection criteria. To create a multi-line
expression, in the Join column, select AND or OR, and then define the following criteria.
6. Click Next. The Import from DataSight - Step 2 of 2 dialog box is displayed.
7. Under MapInfo Table Options, select either linked tables (recommended) or Live Access.
8. Under MapInfo Output Table, type a file name for the MapInfo Pro table or press the disc button
to open a save file dialog.
9. Select Table is Mappable to create points in the MapInfo Pro table and click the symbol button to
apply a point symbol style.
10. Press Projection to choose the appropriate projection to create the points (must match the
projection used to create the Latitude / Longitude fields in DataSight).
OPEN DATA WITH AN PREVIOUS SQL QUERY
1. Select DISCOVER>File>Import>DataSight Import>Open.
2. In the Table box, select a previous query.
3. Click Open.
REFRESH OPEN TABLES
1. Select DISCOVER>File>Import>DataSight Import>Refresh.
2. In the list box select a table to refresh, the click Refresh
DELETE LINKED MAPINFO PRO TABLES
1. Select DISCOVER>File>Import>DataSight Import>Delete.
2. In the list box select a table to delete, the click Delete.
DXF
Related tools Vector Import
Vector Export
Vector Transform
Section Manager
Section Layer Export
Importing DXF files with Datamine Discover has several important advantages over using the MapInfo
Pro DXF Import and Universal Translator (UT) tools:
• Datamine Discover assigns layer names as attributes to each object. Whereas MapInfo Pro does
not retain layering information unless you write each layer to a separate file.
• Datamine Discover stores the average elevation of all object types, including 3D polylines
(contours), polygons, and mesh surfaces (TINS). Whereas MapInfo Pro stores only points and 2D
line elevation.
Datamine Discover provides several DXF import-export tools—use the tool that is best suited to your
needs:
• Use the Vector Import tool to import vectors from DXF files (see Import vector files).
• Use the Vector Export tool to export vectors to DXF format (see Export vector data).
• Use the Vector Transform tool to transform vector data to DXF format (see Transform vector
formats).

• Use the Section Layer Export tool to export section layers from a drillhole project to DXF
format (see Export section layers to 3D DXF).
• Use the Display 3D Models function in the Drillhole Section Manager to import and display
3D vectors from DXF files on drillhole cross-sections (see Display 3D Vector Models).
For recommendations on structuring DXF files for import to Datamine Discover, see:
• DXF attribute data
• DXF elevation values
You can also export drillhole traces from a drillhole project to DXF format (see Export Drillholes as 3D
DXF Traces).
DXF ATTRIBUTE DATA

In your CAD drawing, you should digitize each rock type (or other data type) into an appropriately
named layer. For example, digitize all basalt polygons to a layer called "Basalt", all tenement
boundaries to a layer called “Tenement” and all stream polylines to a layer called “Streams”.
When Datamine Discover reads a DXF file created in your CAD package, all objects are inserted into
the one table, but the DXF layer name is written as an attribute for each object. The end result is one
table containing all DXF layers, each of which has an appropriate name as an attribute. You can then
easily split out all objects of one type (such as basalts or tenements) and save them to a different table
or join them to related attribute tables.
DXF ELEVATION VALUES

Elevation values are automatically stored from the DXF file and an extra Z is added to the new table.
Note that for points, the elevation is unambiguous, but for multi-node objects such as polylines,
polygons, and surface meshes, only one elevation is stored for an entire object. This elevation is the
average Z value of all nodes in the object. If a polyline defines a watershed or fence line for example,
the first elevation is likely to be unrepresentative of the average elevation of the object.
Note The MapInfo Pro DXF import function allows you to store elevations of DXF lines, but not
polylines. To store elevations of DXF polylines, polgons, or mesh surfaces (TINs), you need to
use Datamine Discover.
EXPORT SECTION LAYERS TO 3D DXF

Related tools Section Layer Export
Select DRILLHOLES>File>Export>Section Layer Export to export objects digitized into a
section layer to 3D DXF files for visualization in 3D software systems including the Datamine
Discover 3D add-on module. Any type of map object (polylines, regions, points etc) can be
digitized into the section layer. When these objects are exported to 3D DXF, any attributes that have
been added to the boundary objects are also exported.
Choose the boundary to export from the Available Section Feature Layers list. Enter a Layer Name
for the individual DXF layer. Datamine Discover can export section boundaries as a single 3D DXF file
with all boundaries in one layer. In addition, a single 3D DXF file with separate layers for each boundary
may be exported.
3D DXF files can also be created using unique attributes from a column in the section boundary table.
For example, if one or more section boundary tables contain lithological boundaries for shale,
sandstone, basalt, etc select the column that stores this attribute from the Multiple Files pull-down list.
A series of 3D DXF files are created with each file containing all the lithology polygons for one unique
attribute, e.g. Shale.DXF

See also
Export Drillholes as 3D DXF Traces
FUSION IMPORT
Fusion by Datamine is a comprehensive data repository and management system for geological,
geochemical, geotechnical, geophysical, QA/QC, mapping, surveying and other field data. The Fusion
import tool enables you to import data from Fusion from both your DHLogger and Sample Station
databases, into MapInfo TAB files.
Note To use the Fusion Import tool you will need to have a licenced installation of Fusion version 9
with service pack 1.4 and higher installed.
TO IMPORT DATA FROM FUSION
1. Select DISCOVER>File>Import>Fusion Import. The Connect to Fusion Database dialog is
displayed.
2. You are required to enter a Login ID and Password, these will be the same credentials you use to
log into your instance of Fusion.
3. Under Environment select either LOCAL, CENTRAL or FUSIONREMOTE, this is the same
Environment type you use to log into your instance of Fusion.
4. Click OK to open the Fusion Import dialog.
5. On the Fusion Import dialog under Fusion Module select either DHLogger or Sample Station.
6. Under Fusion Workspace either click on the Folder button to navigate and use an existing
Fusion Workspace, or click the Add button to create a new Fusion Workspace. The Fusion
Workspace holds the parameters for importing user defined tables and fields.
7. Under Output Directory navigate to a folder to save the MapInfo Pro TAB files containing the
imported Fusion database data.
8. Click OK to open the Fusion Connnex dialog. Depending on your module selection your will be
presented with either a DHLogger or Sample Station view.

9. Select the tables and columns you wish to import and click OK on the Fusion Connnex dialog.
You will be presented with a Choose Projection dialog, select a Category and Category Member
to enable the correct plotting of points imported from the Fusion dataset. Click OK to import the
points and data into MapInfo Pro.
GEOSOFT
Related tools Geosoft Import
The Geosoft Import tool enables you to import data from a Geosoft® Oasis Montaj™ database
into a MapInfo Pro table. The imported data is stored in native MapInfo Pro .TAB file format.
When importing databases which contain multi-channel array data (such as Geotem or EM
data) data into Datamine Discover, each array channel will be imported as a single column. Because
MapInfo Pro has a table width limit of 4096 bytes, any Geosoft tables that are wider than 4096 bytes
will be truncated during import. If this occurs, you will be warned that some data loss will occur.
TO IMPORT DATA FROM A GEOSOFT DATABASE:
1. Select DISCOVER>File>Import>Geosoft Import . The Import Geosoft Database dialog box
is displayed.
2. Next to the Input file box, click the browse button and select the .GDB input file.
3. If the data file contains spatial data, select the Has X and Y fields check box.
4. In the X field and Y field boxes, select the fields containing the X and Y coordinates.
5. To import a subset of records from the input file, click Select subset of lines. From the Line
Selection Dialog Box choose the lines to be included or excluded.

Select lines from Geosoft database to import
6. Click Choose Projection and choose the projection that the data coordinates were recorded in.
7. Select Open in map to display the table in a map window. Clear the check box to display the data
into a browser only.
8. Click OK to start the import.
IOGAS
Related tools ioGAS Import
The ioGAS Import tool was developed by Datamine in consultation with REFLEX ioGAS
(formely ioGlobal). This tool enables users to import ioGAS files and attributes directly into
MapInfo Pro and save as a series of .TAB files. The main data table contains the sample
locations plotted in geographical space and displayed using the saved attribute symbology. Each
attribute style also has an associated legend table.
TO IMPORT AN IOGAS FILE:
1. Select DISCOVER>File>Import>ioGas Import>Import. The ioGAS Importer Dialog Box is
displayed.
2. Under Input file, browse to the .GAS file to be imported.
3. Under Field assignments, review and select the input field assignments.
4. In the Null Value box, type the value that will be substituted into any blank field records in the
.GAS file. Otherwise, MapInfo Pro sets blanks to zero.
5. Under Field selection, use the controls to select additional fields to be imported.
6. Under Display options, choose if you want to import all data records, or only data that is visible
in ioGAS.
7. Under Output options, select the output table name and location.
8. Click Projection and choose the projection that the coordinates (see Field assignments above)
were recorded in.
When the data is imported a map window is displayed which contains the attributed data. Three legend
windows are also opened which correspond to each of the colour, shape and size attributes used in
the map window.
Note To avoid truncation of table names, keep ioGAS file names under 31 characters.

Imported MapInfo Pro table and attribute legends
TO REFRESH AN IMPORTED TABLE AND THEMATIC MAP FROM IOGAS:

• Select DISCOVER>File>Import>ioGas Import>Refresh. This will overwrite the existing
MapInfo Pro table. Use HOME>File>Save Copy As to preserve the original table.
LEAPFROG GEO
Related tools Leapfrog Export
Pushing your complex GIS spatial datasets into the Leapfrog environment is now fast, easy and
accurate, ensuring you can dedicate more time to modelling and analytics.
Easily share your detailed GIS datasets fast and accurately from MapInfo Pro into Leapfrog Geo.
The Leapfrog Geo exporter is a wizard-style interface for the easy selection, reprojection and
conversion of multiple MapInfo Pro vector, grid and image tables into a Leapfrog Geo project. The
Leapfrog Geo exporter is designed to work exclusively with open map windows in MapInfo Pro—only
mapped datasets can be exported.
The Leapfrog Geo Export tool is a simple and effective wizard that:

• Supports all MapInfo Pro vector, raster and (topography) surface data.
• Bulk exports your datasets in one routine.
• Reprojects all the data into the required Leapfrog Geo session (cartesian) projection.
• Allows the removal of unnecessary data fields (to help minimise output file sizes).
• Creates a batch session file (.XML) allowing easy import from within Leapfrog Geo.
This functionality requires Leapfrog Geo 2.1.
For more detailed information, watch the video https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=tVeQ-u6OmPg.
TO SHARE MAPINFO PRO DATA WITH LEAPFROG GEO:
1. Open the datasets you want to export in a single current MapInfo Pro mapper window.
2. Select DISCOVER>File>Export>Leapfrog Export.
• Enter a new Project Name. This will be the name of the batch .XML file required by
Leapfrog Geo, i.e. projectname.xml.
• Specify a new or empty existing Folder into which to export the MapInfo Pro datasets.
• Select the required New Projection system you will be working in within Leapfrog Geo. This
must be a cartesian projection.
3. In the next (Vector, Surface and Image) dialogs, move the required datasets across to the
Selected sections. The Vector dialog additionally allows the deselection of unnecessary fields—
this is recommended to help reduce the output file sizes, particularly for larger vector datasets.
4. From the Leapfrog Geo Project Tree:

• Under GIS Data, Maps and Photos, select Batch Import>From MapInfo.
• Browse to the folder specified in step 1 above, and select the file projectname.xml.
• On the Batch Import MapInfo Data dialog, click OK. Leapfrog Geo will now import each
dataset, and add these to the Project Tree.
LIDAR LAS
Related tools LIDAR LAS Import
The LIDAR LAS Importer is a quick and efficient way of importing ASPRS standard LAS files
into MapInfo Pro TAB files, creating the associated attributed points. LAS is a binary format
defined by ASPRS (www.asprs.org).
TO IMPORT LAS FILES INTO DATAMINE DISCOVER
1. Select DISCOVER>File>Import>LIDAR LAS Import. The LAS Import Dialog Box is
displayed.
2. Next to the Input file box, click the browse button and select the LAS input file.
3. In the Output file box, type or edit the output table name, or click the browse button to navigate to
the output folder and table.
4. Click Set Projection and choose the projection that the data coordinates were recorded in.
5. Click Choose optional fields and choose additional data fields (other than the X, Y, Z coordinates)
to be imported into the output table.
6. If required, create a coordinate transform using the boxes under Coordinate Transform.
7. Click Import.
Note To interpolate LIDAR LAS data into a raster grid for further analysis/modelling/etc,
use the RASTER>Interpolate>Create Raster Multifile tool.

MICROMINE
Related tools Micromine Import
Import MicroMine® data and string files into MapInfo Pro tables. Datamine Discover reads the
MicroMine file, creates an appropriately structured table and inserts the data.
TO IMPORT A MICROMINE FILE:
1. Select DISCOVER>File>Import>Micromine Import.
2. You are asked to select the input file and output table, and then the MicroMine Import dialog
box is displayed.
3. Select the input file data type:
• Data file: Select if the file contains sample and drillhole information, including survey and
downhole data files. The MicroMine Import dialog box is displayed.
• String file: Select if the file contains string (polyline) data. The Micromine String Import dialog
box is displayed.
4. Select the import options:
• For string files, select the fields in the input file that define the X and Y coordinates, and the
string ID. Options are also provided for creating closed polygons and defining the line style.
MINESIGHT
Datamine Discover supports import and export of MineSight SRG files:
• Importing MineSight Points and Polylines
• Exporting to MineSight
IMPORTING MINESIGHT POINTS AND POLYLINES

Related tools ASCII Import
Polyline and point files exported from MineSight are in an ASCII, CSV format. The MineSight file
has an SRG extension and contains fields: Easting, Northing, Elevation, Node Point count,
Material name, Attribute name, Object Name, and Attributed Material name. The Easting,
Northing, Elevation and Node Point count are required items. The data can either be imported as points
representing each vertex in the string file or as strings (polylines).
TO IMPORT A MINESIGHT SRG FILE:
1. Select DISCOVER>File>Import>ASCII Import.
2. Click Input File, and set the format (bottom right of the dialog) to <Minesight SRG files>.
Browse to the Minesight SRG file, and click Open.
For more information on this tool, see ASCII data.
3. Click Import.
4. You are then asked to select the output table and location, and select a projection.
Example MineSight SRG file:

2733.330,5507.240,420.000,1,TOE,,TOE,
2736.520,5502.470,420.000,2,TOE,,TOE,
2730.110,5490.940,420.000,3,TOE,,TOE,
2727.920,5479.010,420.000,4,TOE,,TOE,
2740.690,5472.920,420.000,5,TOE,,TOE,
2754.040,5480.850,420.000,6,TOE,,TOE,
EXPORTING TO MINESIGHT
Related tools Minesight Export
MapInfo Pro files can be exported in MineSight SRG format so they can be read straight into
MineSight.
TO EXPORT A MAPINFO PRO TABLE AS A MINESIGHT SRG FILE:
1. Select DISCOVER>File>Export>MineSight Export. The MineSight Export dialog box is
displayed.
2. Under File details, click the Input table box and select the table to be exported.
3. In the Output SRG file box, type or edit the output file name, or click the browse button to
navigate to the output folder and file.
4. Select the Flip XY check box to reverse the order of the X and Y coordinates.
5. Under Elevation, click the Z value from column box and select the field that defines the elevation,
or type a default elevation in the Default Z value box.
6. Under Attributes, select additional data fields (other than the X, Y, Z coordinates) to be exported
into the output file. To select multiple columns, click and drag, or hold the SHIFT or CTRL key while
you select columns.
8. Click OK to start the export.
SURPAC
See Import vector files and Export vector data.
VULCAN
Datamine Discover supports import and export of Vulcan Archive ASCII files:
• Importing Points and Polylines
• Exporting to Vulcan
IMPORTING POINTS AND POLYLINES

Related tools Vulcan Import
The Vulcan Import tool enables you to import Vulcan® Archive ASCII files into MapInfo Pro
tables. The data can either be imported as points representing each vertex in the string file,
strings (polylines) or as closed strings (polygons).
TO IMPORT A VULCAN ARCHIVE FILE:
1. Select DISCOVER>File>Import>Vulcan Import. The Vulcan Import dialog box is displayed.
2. Next to the Input file box, click the browse button and select the input file.

3. In the Output file box, type or edit the output table name, or click the browse button to navigate to
the output folder and file.
4. In the Create Object type box, choose the object type.
5. Click Set Projection and choose the projection that the data coordinates were recorded in.
Note The X, Y coordinate values will not be imported into the browser and the Z value will be an
average of the vertex Z values for each string in the original file because MapInfo Pro does not
support multiple vertex records per object in a browser.
EXPORTING TO VULCAN
Related tools Vulcan Export
MapInfo Pro files can be exported in Vulcan Archive ASCII format so they can be read straight
into Vulcan.
TO EXPORT A MAPINFO PRO TABLE AS A VULCAN ARCHIVE FILE:
1. Select DISCOVER>File>Export>Vulcan Export. The is Vulcan Export dialog box displayed.
2. Under File details, click the Input file box and select the table to be exported.
3. In the Output file box, type or edit the output file name, or click the browse button to navigate to
the output folder and file.
4. In the Name field box, select the column assigned to the Name field (HoleID, for example) in the
output file.
5. In the Value field box, select the column assigned to the Value field in the output file.
6. In the Z field box, select the field that defines the elevation, or select the Use fixed Z value check
box and type the elevation in the adjacent box.
IMPORT VECTOR FILES

Related tools Vector Import
The Vector Import wizard enables the importing of a wide range of 2D and 3D vector formats
into native TAB files. The tool can also batch import multiple files and convert them into multiple
TAB files. The supported file formats are:
• AutoCAD .DXF • Google keyhole markup language .KML

• Datamine wireframe *PT.DM, *TR.DM • GPS eXchange .GPX
• ER Mapper vector .ERV • LizardTech MrSID .SID
• ESRI Shapefiles .SHP • MapInfo Pro .TAB
• ESRI TIN .ADF • Surpac string .STR
• Gemcom BT2 .BT2 • Surpac wireframe .DTM, .STR
• GOCAD Vector .TS, .PL, .VS • Vulcan triangulation .00T

TO IMPORT A VECTOR FILE:

1. Select DISCOVER>File>Import>Vector Import.
2. Select the file format you wish to import and click OK.
3. Select the files to import. Select multiple files by holding down the CTRL key as you click on each
file name. Click Open.
Note All files must be in the same projection.
4. Review the Output folder location and if it is a 3D file, define the View Angle by selecting Convert
to 2D, viewed from the.
5. Click Import. The files are automatically opened in MapInfo Pro.
6. You may be prompted to select a projection for the output TAB files.
Note The projection list available in the Datamine Discover Vector Import tool is stored in a separate
file to the MapInfow.prj file. If you want to import into a custom coordinate system which has
been added to the MapInfow.prj file, then copy the custom projection line into the Encom.prj
file located in the C:\Users\USERNAME\AppData\Roaming\Encom\Common\Projections
directory.
See also
Transform vector formats
Export vector data

EXPORT VECTOR DATA

Related tools Vector Export
The Vector Export wizard enables the exporting of a native TAB file to a wide range of 2D vector
formats. The tool can also batch export multiple TAB files and convert them into multiple vector
files.
The supported file formats are:
• AutoCAD .DXF
• CSV text file .CSV
• Modelvision .TKM
• ESRI Shapefiles .SHP
• GOCAD Vector .TS, .PL, .VS
• Google keyhole markup language .KML
• GPS eXchange .GPX
• MapInfo Pro .TAB
• Surpac string .STR
TO EXPORT A VECTOR FILE:
1. Select DISCOVER>File>Export>Vector Export.
2. Select the TAB files to export from those open in MapInfo Pro. Select multiple files by
holding down the CTRL key as you click on each file name. Click Open.
3. Select file output format.
4. Review the output folder location.
5. Click Export.
See also
Transform vector formats
Import vector files

TRANSFORM VECTOR FORMATS

Related tools Vector Transform
The Vector Transform tool can transform, reproject, and convert a wide range of vector file
formats. The following input and output file formats are supported:
Input formats Output formats

• AutoCAD .DXF • CSV text file .CSV
• Datamine wireframe (point and triangle) .DM • Modelvision .TKM
• ER Mapper vector .ERV • ESRI shapefiles .SHP
• ESRI shapefiles .SHP • GOCAD vector .TS
• ESRI TIN .ADF • Google Keyhole Markup Language .KML
• Gemcom .BT2 • GPS exchange .GPX
• GOCAD vector .TS, .PL, .VS • MapInfo Pro .MIF
• Google Keyhole Markup Language .KML • MapInfo Pro .TAB
• GPS exchange .GPX • Surpac string .STR
• LizardTech MrSID .SID
• Surpac string .STR
• Surpac wireframe .DTM , .STR
• Vulcan triangulation .00T
TO TRANSFORM A VECTOR FILE:

1. Select DISCOVER>File>Export>Vector Transform.
2. Select the Input files from those open in MapInfo Pro. Select multiple files by holding down
the CTRL key as you click on each file name.
3. Select the Output file.
4. Select the Output format.
5. Review and select the transformation and processing Options (see below).
6. Click OK.

The Vector Transform dialog box
A range of transformation options are available as independent X, Y and/or Z operations, allowing

vector objects to be scaled, offset and/or rotated.
Transform options available are:
• Transform coordinates – enable the options button for Scale, offset and rotation settings. This is
useful for converting feet units to metres or transforming from a local grid to UTM.
• Convert to 2D, viewed from – converts an appropriate 3D input Vector file into a 2D view. It can
be viewed from each primary axis direction.
• Reproject coordinates – reprojection applied to coordinates. Note the from field is automatically
populated with the first input file's projection if it found.
• Name field – certain formats only support a single attribute or label field for the vector objects. If
enabled, select the desired field for labelling the points.
• Elevation field – when converting form a 2D (i.e. TAB file) to a 3D file format (i.e. DXF), this field
is enabled to define the elevation of the object.
Other processing options include:
• Convert to point cloud – converts all nodes/vertices in the input vector object to individual point
objects in the output vector file.
• Smooth polylines and polygons – applies a line smoothing filter, with a width defined over the
nearest nodes.
• Correct polygon vertex order problems – checks the node order in all polygon objects. Outer
parts will be stored clockwise and inner holes will be stored counter-clockwise.
• Compress polylines and polygons – removes any nodes with a spacing less than the defined
distance.

• Convert closed polylines to polygons – converts any closed polyline objects to a polygon object.
This is particularly useful for formats such as DXF which do not have a polygon object type, but
do have closed polyline objects.
• Convert polylines with one point to point objects and polygons with two points to polylines –
removes any erroneous objects.
Vector files can also be Reprojected to accommodate absolute coordinate handling in Datamine
Discover 3D. For instance, if all of your MapInfo Pro data is in a UTM projection, but an ore body DXF
model from a CAD program is in a different projection, this option will enable the DXF to be reprojected
into the same projection as the rest of the 3D data. Enable the Reproject Coordinates option, and set
the appropriate Source and Target projections using the Choose buttons.
Note The projection list available in the Datamine Discover Vector Import tool is stored in a separate file to
the MapInfow.prj file. If you wish to reporejct into a custom coordinate system which has been added
to the MapInfow.prj file then copy the custom projection line into the Encom.prj file located in
C:\Users\USERNAME\AppData\Roaming\Encom\Common\Projections.
Other processing options include:
• Convert to point cloud – converts all nodes/vertices in the input vector object to individual point
objects in the output vector file.
• Smooth polylines and polygons – applies a line smoothing filter, with a width defined over the
nearest nodes.
• Correct polygon vertex order problems – checks the node order in all polygon objects. Outer
parts will be stored clockwise and inner holes will be stored counter-clockwise.
• Compress polylines and polygons – removes any nodes with a spacing less than the defined
distance.
• Convert closed polylines to polygons – converts any closed polyline objects to a polygon object.
This is particularly useful for formats such as DXF which do not have a polygon object type, but
do have closed polyline objects.
• Convert polylines with one point to point objects and polygons with two points to polylines –
removes any erroneous objects.
See also
Export vector data
Import vector files

IMPORTING AND EXPORTING IMAGES

Datamine Discover provide supports a number of different located image formats (see Supported file
formats) and tools for importing and exporting raster imagery:
• Rectifying raster images
• ECW/JP2
• EGB
• Saving a map window as a registered raster image
RECTIFYING RASTER IMAGES

Related tools Rectify Image
Use IMAGES>Image Tools>Rectify Image to import and register other types of raster imagery.
For more information, see Registering and rectifying raster images.
See also
Importing an EGB image
ECW/JP2
Saving a map window as a registered raster image
ECW/JP2
Related tools ECW/JP2 import
Use the Datamine Discover ECW/JP2 tool to load and register ECW or JP2000 located images
in MapInfo Pro and to load images from an ECWP or IWS image server. ECWP files are defined
by a URL that starts with a ecwp:// prefix.

TO OPEN A LOCAL ECW/JP2 IMAGE FILE:

1. Select DISCOVER>File>Import>ECW/JP2 Import. The ECW/P/JP2 Import dialog box is
displayed.
2. Under Open, select Open ECW or JP2 file. to open a file from the local disk or network.
3. Click the Open button and select an image file to open. The image is displayed under Preview
and its details are displayed under Image properties. Use the preview toolbar to examine the
image.
To select multiple files, either repeat steps 2 and 3 for each file or select multiple files by holding
down the CTRL key.
4. If an appropriate projection is found in the image file, this will be automatically set and displayed
in the Image Projection box, otherwise click the browse button next to the Map Projection box
and select a MapInfo Pro projection. Do not override the projection defined in the input file;
instead, import the file, and then use IMAGES>Image Tools>Reproject Image to reproject the
image.
5. Check the dimensions of the Image in Columns x Rows, and further information can be found
under the Information button.
6. Click Open. The Images will be opened in MapInfo Pro, and a TAB file is created in each image
folder.
TO OPEN AN ECW/JP2 IMAGE FILE FROM AN ECWP IMAGE SERVER:
1. Select DISCOVER>File>Import>ECW/JP2 Import. The ECW/P/JP2 Import dialog box is
displayed.
2. Under Open, select Open file from Image Server.
3. Type or paste the URL link in the text box. Make sure to include the ecwp:// prefix.
4. Click the Load button to open the ECWP link in the preview area.
5. If an appropriate projection is found in the image file, this will be automatically set and displayed
in the Image Projection box, otherwise click the browse button next to the Map Projection box
and select a MapInfo Pro projection. Do not override the projection defined in the input file;
instead, import the file, and then use Images>Reproject Image to reproject the image.
6. Check the dimensions of the Image in Columns x Rows, and further information can be found
under the Information button.
7. Select the Open Image as Raster radio button.
8. Click Open. You are pormpted to select an output file name and location. When processed, this
generates both a TAB and an IWS file on the local disk. The IWS is a metadata file listing details
about the Image Web Server ECWP link.
ECWP image servers can be found via the internet, or on local database servers. There is a number
of free access and subscription based websites which provide access to ECW imagery databases via
the internet.
When ECWP file is opened in Datamine Discover, a local TAB file and a local metadata link file with
the extension IWS is created. The IWS file contains information such as the URL location of the ECWP
file.

If you have an ECW which contains no embedded registration, these can also be registered in MapInfo
Pro using this tool. When non-projection information is found, you can select the desired projection and
enter in the top-left corner and pixel height and width, which is then used to automatically determine
and register the image corner points.
See also
Rectifying raster images
Reprojecting an image
Converting an image to another format
EGB
EGB (Encom Georeferenced Bitmap) files can be created in Discover PA or Datamine Discover 3D.
EGB files are text header files that are used to open and display image files such as .BMP, .JPG, and
.PNG in 3D georeferenced space.
• Importing an EGB image
• Exporting as an EGB image
IMPORTING AN EGB IMAGE

Related tools EGB Import
Datamine Discover can automatically import EGB (Encom Georeferenced Bitmap) files created
in Discover PA or Datamine Discover 3D.
Example EGB file:
GeoreferenceImage Begin
Comments = ""
Version = "1.0"
Image = "Kangaroo_Flats_Geochem_Map.png"
ImageFormat = PNG
Geometry = QUAD
CoordinateSpace Begin
Projection = "Transverse Mercator (Gauss-Kruger)"
Datum = "Australian Geodetic 1966 (AGD 66)"
Units = "km"
CoordinateSpace End
Registration Begin
TopLeft = 373570,5380784.86,0
TopRight = 400692.53,5380784.86,0
BottomLeft = 373570,5356994.78,0
BottomRight = 400692.53,5356994.78,0
Registration End
GeoreferenceImage End
TO IMPORT AN EGB LOCATED IMAGE:
1. Select DISCOVER>File>Import>EGB Import. The EGB Import dialog box is displayed.
2. Under File details, next to the Input EGB file box, click the browse button and select the
input file.
3. In the Output TAB file box, type or edit the output table name, or click the browse button to
navigate to the output folder and file.

4. If a transparent colour is defeined in the input file, select Use transparent colour from EGB.
5. Click Set Projection and choose the projection that the image coordinates were created in.
6. If required, under Coordinate Transform, reassign the X and Y coordinates. For example, you can
map the Z field in a vertical section as the Y field in the map window.
See also
ECW/JP2
EXPORTING AS AN EGB IMAGE

Related tools EGB Export
MapInfo Pro files can be exported as EGB (Encom Georeferenced Bitmap) files so they can be
read straight into Discover PA or Datamine Discover 3D. The MapInfo Pro map window is
converted into a PNG file with an associated EGB header file.
You can also export sections and plans from a Datamine Discover drillhole project. This will correctly
register a plan or cross-section in 3D.
TO EXPORT A MAP WINDOW AS AN EGB LOCATED IMAGE:
1. Select DISCOVER>File>Export>EGB Export. The EGB Export dialog box is displayed.
2. Under Windows available for export, select the map window to be exported.
3. In the Height for Z axis box, type the elevation (Z) in metres.
See also
ECW/JP2
SAVING A MAP WINDOW AS A REGISTERED RASTER IMAGE

Related tools Map to Image
Use the IMAGES>Image Tools>Map to Image tool to save a map window as a registered raster
image. For more information, see Saving a map window as a registered raster image.
See also
Exporting as an EGB image
ECW/JP2

IMPORTING AND EXPORTING DRILLHOLE DATA

• Datamine Studio
• Datamine Discover Drillhole Projects
• Export Drillholes as 3D DXF Traces
• gINT
• LAS
• WinLoG
DATAMINE STUDIO
The Datamine Studio Drillhole Table exporter is a wizard-style interface designed to easily
select and convert MapInfo Pro vector files into Datamine Studio .DM format. The Datamine
Studio Drillhole Table exporter is designed to work exclusively with open Datamine Discover
drillhole projects in MapInfo Pro.
To start the export wizard, open the Drillhole Project to be exported, and then select
DRILLHOLES>Datamine>Studio Export>Drillhole Tables:
• Step 1: Settings
• Step 2: Validation
• Step 3: Other project tables
STEP 1: SETTINGS
PROJECT NAME
Displays the drillhole project from which the tables will be exported.

REPROJECTION OPTIONS
Datamine Studio does not handle reprojection on-the-fly as in MapInfo Pro. Therefore, all spatial data
needs to be reprojected into the same coordinate space. Only the collar table needs to be reprojected.
MAPPER PROJECTION
The projection system of the selected drillhole project.
NEW PROJECTION
The target system the collar will be reprojected into; by default the Projection and New Projection
are the same. If the collar is already in the target projection it will not be reprojected. Only files not
in the target projection will be reprojected.
To set a new projection, click the Projection button to display the Choose Projection dialog
box. Select the new projection from the Category and Category Members options. The
selected projection is displayed in the New Projection box.
Note Avoid reprojecting into a geographical coordinate system (longitude-latitude). Although
Datamine Studio can open data in these systems, it is not recommended. Cartesian
coordinate systems are preferred.
The Projection Method toggles between Standard and NTv2 Grid Shift methods of reprojection. If
the Standard method is selected, the reprojection will be either a three- or seven-parameter
translation. If the NTv2 Grid Shift method is selected, the NTv2 grid shift method is used.
The Datamine Discover projection list is stored in a separate file to the MapInfow.prj file. To
reproject files into a custom coordinate system in the MapInfow.prj file, copy the custom
projection line into the Encom.prj file located in the
C:\Users\USERNAME\AppData\Roaming\Encom\Common\Projections directory. For more
INTERPOLATION
The method used to reproject the surface file, the options include:
• Nearest Neighbour
simple interpolation where the new grid cell value is taken from the closest grid cell in the original.
• Bilinear
the value of a cell in the new grid is assigned the weighted value of the four surrounding grid cells
in the original.
• Bicubic (recommended)
uses the weighted value of 16 surrounding grid cell values in the original to interpolate the value
of a cell in the new grid. This method requires more processing but is more accurate than bilinear
interpolation. Bicubic interpolation also produces a smoother grid.
OUTPUT FOLDER
Select the output files types and precision of the dataset.
Displays the default folder where the .DM files will be exported to. To navigate or modify the path,
click the adjacent folder button and navigate to the desired folder.
VIEW IN STUDIO EM
This option will automatically send the created DM files into Studio EM. If Studio EM is not open it will
open and create a default project. If Studio EM is open it will send the files directly into the currently
open project.
Click Next to continue to Step 2: Validation.

STEP 2: VALIDATION
In this step, select and validate the drillhole project tables and fields to be exported. The validation
dialog displays a grid listing all the open vector tables from the selected Datamine Discover drillhole
project.
SELECTED
Click the check box to toggle the selection of the table. By default, all vector tables are selected. If a
table is unselected it will not be exported. To create a dynamic drillhole dataset in Datamine Studio,
both the collar and survey tables are mandatory and cannot be deselected. All other downhole tables
are optional
VALID
The valid column displays the validation status of the table. The table is either invalid or valid. A valid
table is ready for export; an invalid table cannot be exported until it is corrected. Hover the pointer over
the validation icon to display information about the validation error detected.
Three validation states are displayed:
• Valid – No validation issues detected in table.
• Invalid fields – Validation issues detected in table fields.
• Invalid table – Validation issues with table, this error is due to the maximum size for a double-
precision table has been exceeded.
TABLE NAME
Name of the table to be exported.
TYPE
Type of Datamine Discover Drillhole Project table these include Collar, Survey and Downhole

(FIELDS)
Click the Fields button to open the Modify Fields dialog, from which you can rectify field validation
errors that prevent the table from being exported.
The Modify Fields dialog is divided into the following columns:

SELECTED
Toggle the selection of the field, by default all table fields are selected, to deselect uncheck the box. If
a field is unselected it will not be exported.
VALID
The valid column displays the validation status of the field:
• Valid – field is valid and ready for export,
• Warning – field is valid and ready for export but an automatic change has been applied. When
a field name from the MapInfo Pro table exceeds eight characters, the field name is automatically
truncated suffixed by an underscore and number.
• Invalid – field cannot be exported until it is corrected. Hover the pointer over the validation icon
to display information about the type of error type detected:
• Field name begins with . , ! : * & = ( ) ? or space or number
• Field contains spaces or , ! : * & = ( )
• Field name is blank
• Field name is duplicated
• Field name is a restricted name
• Field name contains a space
• Field width must be divisible by 4
• Field name exceeds 8 characters
NAME
Name of the field from the MapInfo Pro table.

TYPE
Type of field in the MapInfo Pro table. When exported, Character, Date, Date Time, Time, and Logical
are converted to Alphanumeric; and Float, Decimal, Integer and Small Integer are converted to
Numeric (Float).
WIDTH
Width of the exported Datamine Studio field. The width must be a divisible of 4.
ALIAS
Name of field to be exported to Datamine Studio 3. The field name must not exceed 8 characters.
EXPORT DRILLHOLE PROJECT SURFACE FILE
This option will create a triangulated wireframe and point DM files for viewing in Datamine Studio from
the primary topographic Drillhole Project surface.
Click Next to continue to Step 3: Other project tables.
STEP 3: OTHER PROJECT TABLES

See Datamine Studio table export for details.
When all files have be selected and validated, click OK to export the project.
See also
Datamine Studio
DATAMINE DRILLHOLE TRACES EXPORT

The Datamine Drillhole Traces Export tool allows the user to select the downhole tables you
wish to export into a Datamine Studio DM file format. The traces will be downhole traces
attributed with the select downhole information.
To start the trace export, open the Drillhole Project to be exported, and then select
DRILLHOLES>Datamine>Studio Export>Drillhole Tables.

STEP 1: SELECT DOWNHOLE TABLES
PROJECT NAME
Name of the Drilllhole Project where the drillhole traces will be exported.
SELECT DOWNHOLE TABLES
From the selection panes select the downhole tables you wish to export information.
OUTPUT
Displays the default folder where the .DM files will be exported to. To navigate or modify the path, click
the adjacent Save button and navigate to the desired folder.
Click Next to continue Step 2: Validation.

STEP 2: VALIDATION
SELECT
Select the downhole tables you wish to export to Datamine Stuidio. Table field widths will be
automatically adjusted to be a divisible of 4.
ALIAS
Alias names will be modified to conform to the Datamine Studio standard.
VALID
You will be prompted in the Valid column if the field will be export or requires correcting.
To automatically open the Drillhole traces into Datamine Studio EM check the View in Studio EM
option.
Click OK to export the drillhole traces.
DATAMINE DRILLHOLE SECTIONS EXPORT

The Datamine Drillhole Section Export tool allows the user to select the drillhole sections you
wish to export into a Datamine Studio DM file format. The sections will contain the section plane
and envelopes as a vector.
To start the section export, open the Drillhole Project to be exported, and then select
DRILLHOLES>Datamine>Studio Export>Drillhole Sections

PROJECT NAME
Name of the Drilllhole Project where the drillhole sections will be exported.
SELECT SECTIONS
From the selection panes select the sections you wish to export information.
OUTPUT
option.
Click OK to export the sections.
DATAMINE DRILLHOLE LAYERS EXPORT

The Datamine Drillhole Layers Export tool allows the user to select the drillhole sections layers
you wish to export into a Datamine Studio DM file format. The sections layers will contain all the
selected section layers for open sections.
To start the section layer export, open the Drillhole Project to be exported, and then select
DRILLHOLES>Datamine>Studio Export>Drillhole Layers

PROJECT NAME
Name of the Drilllhole Project where the drillhole section layers will be exported.
SELECT SECTION LAYERS TO EXPORT
From the selection list select the section layers you wish to export.
OUTPUT
option.
Click OK to export the section layers.
DATAMINE DRILLHOLE SECTION IMAGE EXPORT

The Datamine Drillhole Section Image Export tool allows the user to select the drillhole sections
you wish to export into a Datamine Studio DM file format. The sections images will a screen
capture of the selected section presented as a georeferenced image.
To start the section image export, open the Drillhole Project to be exported, and then select
DRILLHOLES>Datamine>Studio Export> Section Image
SECTIONS AVAILABLE FOR EXPORT
Select the section map windows which you wish to export

OVERWRITE
Check the Overwrite check box to overwrite previous created section images, if you do not check this
box new section images will be created with a number suffix incremented.
Click OK to select a folder to save the section images in.
Select the folder to save the images in and click OK to export.

Note You will need to manually open the section images into Studio EM from the saved folder.

DATAMINE DISCOVER DRILLHOLE PROJECTS

Related tools Manage Project
Drillhole projects can be imported with the import project tool and exported (for sharing between
Datamine Discover users) with the Manage Project tools (see Sharing Datamine Discover
drillhole projects).
EXPORT DRILLHOLES AS 3D DXF TRACES

Related tools Drillhole DXF Export
Use the Drillhole DXF Export tool to export desurveyed drillhole traces in a Datamine Discover
drillhole project, or a selection of holes, can be exported as 3D DXF vector objects. This is useful
when sharing a drillhole project with other 3D applications or for viewing very large projects
(thousands of holes) in Datamine Discover 3D. This does not export downhole data—only the hole
traces are exported.
TO EXPORT A DATAMINE DISCOVER DRILLHOLE PROJECT AS 3D DXF TRACES:
1. Select DRILLHOLES>Project Manager, and open the drillhole project you want to export.
2. Select DRILLHOLES>External Data>Export>Drillhole DXF Export.
See also
Sharing Datamine Discover drillhole projects
Export section layers to 3D DXF

GINT
Related tools gINT Import
The gINT® product suite encompasses software for creation of borehole, well log and fence
diagrams, amongst other things. Bundled with Datamine Discover is an easy to use importer
which converts data stored in the gINT® database format into the necessary MapInfo Pro tables
required for a Datamine Discover drillhole project, and optionally automatically creating a drillhole
project.
TO IMPORT DATA FROM A GINT DATABASE:
1. Select DRILLHOLES>Import>gINT Import. The gINT Importer dialog box is displayed.
2. Under Input gINT project database file, if you have previously imported this database and saved
the import settings as a template, click Open Template and select the template. Otherwise, click
the Open button and browse to the .GPJ file to be imported.
If you have selected a template, review the table and field assignments on the Collar Settings and
Downhole Data Settings tabs, and then click OK to start the import. Otherwise, for a new
database import, follow the instructions below.
3. On the Collar Settings tab, under Collar table, click Projection and choose the projection that the
collar coordinates were recorded in.
4. Under Collar fields, review the field assignments.
5. On the Downhole Data Settings tab, use the controls to move the required data table to the
Selected box.

When a table is selected, the Downhole Field Assignments Dialog Box is displayed, from which
you can assign the hole ID, depth fields, and data fields. Note that:
• For downhole depth measurements, assign the depth field in both the Top Depth (From) and
Bottom Depth (To) boxes. The importer will automatically create two separate output fields.
• Required fields, such as sample depths and borehole number, cannot be deselected.
To review and edit field assignments, double-click the table in the Selected box, or select the table
and click Set Field Mappings.
6. Under Output options, click the Save button and select the folder where the new Datamine
Discover drillhole tables will be created.
7. To create a new Datamine Discover drillhole project (recommended), select the Create Discover
project check box and type a project name in the adjacent box. To overwrite or refresh an
existing drillhole project, select the project name from the list and ensure that the output folder
specified in the Directory box matches that of the target project.
Note Updating an existing project will not update any sections or plans. These will need to be
refreshed and regenerated.
8. Use the Save Template button to save your import settings so that you can quickly re-import an
updated version of this database using the Open Template option (see step 2).

If a drillhole project was created by the import, select Drillholes>Project Setup to open the new
project and review the project settings.
See also
Modifying and deleting drillhole projects

LAS
Datamine Discover can import LAS (Log ASCII Standard, see http://www.cwls.org/las/) version 1.2 and
2.0 format files into an existing Drillhole Project. This allows the visualization and analysis of well-log
information, such as generated by the oil-gas and water-well industries) with the Datamine Discover
Drillholes module.
The Datamine Discover LAS import and management tools are accessed from DISCOVER>External
Data>Import:
• LAS Viewer
• LAS Template Manager
• LAS Import
A Discover Drillhole Project must be open and loaded prior to using these tools.
LAS VIEWER
Related tools LAS Viewer
The LAS Viewer is used to manage the LAS file folder location and select LAS files from the LAS
file folder. To use, open the Drillhole Project and then select DRILLHOLES>External
Data>Import>LAS Viewer.

LAS FILES
FOLDER
Displays the folder where the LAS files are located and need to be imported.
• Click Open Folder to navigate to the desired folder.
FILES
Displays a list of LAS files in the selected folder.
• Select the LAS file you want to display.
• Click Notepad to open the selected LAS file in Notepad.
DISPLAY
Displays the various sections and mnemonics of the LAS file:
• Version ( ~V or VERSION INFORMATION SECTION)
• Well (~W or WELL INFORMATION SECTION)
• Curve (~C or CURVE INFORMATION SECTION)
• Parameter (~P or PARAMETER INFORMATION SECTION)
• Other (~O)
• ASCII (~A or ASCII LOG DATA)
IMPORT OPTIONS
• Click Manage Templates to open the LAS Template Manager.
• Click Import LAS Files to open the LAS Import tool.
LAS TEMPLATE MANAGER

Related tools LAS Template Manager
DRILLHOLES>EXTERNAL DATA FORMATS > LAS TEMPLATE MANAGER
The LAS Template Manager creates and manages templates, which are used for batch
importing LAS files into a Datamine Discover Drillhole Project Downhole Table. Two types of
templates can be created: New or Append.
To use, open the Drillhole Project and then select DRILLHOLES>External Data>Import>LAS Template
Manager.

LAS Template Manager with Append option selected in the Template Folder Type box.
TEMPLATE FOLDER
TEMPLATE
Displays a list of available LAS template files.
TYPE
Displays the type of the selected template:
• New – creates a new downhole table based on the selected mnemonics and parameters.
• Append – appends data to an existing Datamine Discover Drillhole downhole table based on
the selected mnemonics and parameters.
FILE
Displays the file selected to use as basis for the template.
• Click Open Folder to select the desired file.
(TOOLS)
• To create a new type New or type Append template, click Create. On the Create
Template dialog type the name of the template in the Name box, and then select the
type of template. Cick OK. The new template is added to the Template dropdown.

• To delete a template, select the template in the Template dropdown, and click Delete.
When prompted, click Yes to confirm.
• To set field aliases, import extra information stored in the LAS file, or control null
handling, click Configure. The Import Options dialog is displayed.
IMPORT OPTIONS
(Opened with the Configure button)
FIELD ALIAS
To standardise the field naming convention in the Datamine Discover Downhole table, field aliases
can be used. Using an alias will convert the mnemonic naming convention from the LAS file to the
alias name defined. Aliases can be defined for the mandatory fields Well ID, Depth From, and
Depth To.
Note Datamine Discover Drillhole Projects require consistent naming conventions for the Hole_ID,
From and To fields.
OPTIONAL TABLES
LAS files contain both a Well and Parameter section containing additional information about the
drillhole and instrumentation. If you want this information imported into a MapInfo Pro table, select
the Well Table and Parameter Table options. These tables will not be included in the Datamine
Discover Drillhole Project.
NULL HANDLING
LAS files can contain null values. This option allows nulls to be controlled by file or globally:
• Source file – Use the null value defined in the NULL mnemonic. This is usually -999.250.
• Global – Use a global null value. This is useful if you are batch importing LAS files with a
variable null value. Type the value in the Null box.
DOWNHOLE PROJECT
(Append type templates only)
TABLES
Displays the downhole tables in the current Datamine Discover Drillhole Project. Select a
downhole table to use in the construction of an Append type template.
• Click Refresh if any new tables have been added to the project since the LAS Import
tool was opened.
MANDATORY FIELDS
Map the mnemonics from the LAS fields to the corresponding field in the Datamine Discover Downhole
table:
• Well ID – The Hole_ID field, usually WELL, API or UWI.

• Depth From – The start depth of the downhole interval, usually DEPT.
• Depth To – The end depth of the downhole interval, usually DEPT.
Note LAS files generally only have one interval mnemonic: the DEPT mnemonic is used for both the
Depth From and Depth To values.
ADDITIONAL FIELDS
Select downhole data mnemonics in the LAS file to be included in the Datamine Discover Downhole
table:
For type Append templates:
• LAS Fields – Lists all data mnemonic from the selected LAS file.
• Downhole Table Fields – Lists all fields from the selected Datamine Discover downhole table.
Click to select the field that matches the mnemonic. Select <None> if appending a new field to the
downhole table.
For type New templates:
• Fields – Data mnemonic from LAS file
• Data Type – Define the data type for the output Datamine Discover Drillhole table: Character or
Float.
• Width – Define the width for the output Datamine Discover Drillhole table when the Data Type is
Character. Must be between 1 and 254.
• Required – Select or clear to include or exclude the mnemonic in the output Datamine Discover
Drillhole table.
Click Save to create or save the template.
LAS IMPORT
Related tools LAS Import
The LAS Import tool is a component of the LAS Manager. The LAS Import tool adds and
appends new downhole data tables to an open Datamine Discover drillhole project. It supports
version 1.2 and 2.0 LAS files.
To use, open the Drillhole Project and then select DRILLHOLES>External Data>Import>LAS Import.

LAS FILES
Displays all available LAS files. By default all LAS files are selected to import. The folder location is set
in the LAS Viewer.
• Holding down the CTRL or SHIFT key, select the files you want to import.
• Click Select All to select all files.
• Click Clear Selection to clear all selections.
LAS TEMPLATE
TEMPLATE
Select the template to use when importing the selected LAS Files.
• To modify or create a new template, click the LAS Template Manager button.
TEMPLATE TYPE
Displays the type (New or Append) of the selected the template.
DRILLHOLE PROJECT
PROJECT NAME
Displays the currently open Datamine Discover Drillhole Project.
NEW TABLE NAME
If importing LAS files with a type New template, the table name is displayed.
APPEND TO TABLE
If importing LAS files with a type Append template, select a Downhole table from the current project
to append the LAS files.

(TOOLS)
• If new LAS files, templates or downhole tables have been added after the LAS Importer was
opened, click Refresh to display these files.
• After importing LAS files, if problems were encountered with importing any files, click Import
Error Log to view the log file.
All files and parameters have been selected in the Import LAS Files dialog, click OK to import the LAS
files.
WINLOG
Related tools WinLoG Import
WinLoG is a well-logging application used in the environmental and hydrogeology fields.
Datamine Discover can easily import a WinLoG database, converting the data into the
necessary MapInfo Pro tables required for a Datamine Discover drillhole project, and optionally
automatically creating a drillhole project.
Before importing a WinLoG database, you need to know the following:
• The projection of the collar coordinates.
• Are all the wells/bores vertical, or does the database contain some inclined holes? WinLoG calls
these “deviated” boreholes.
• Which downhole data tables within the WinLoG database are to be used, and which fields in each
table are required. WinLoG stores data in a standard Access database (.MDB) structure,
regardless of what downhole data was input. Therefore every WinLoG database will have exactly
the same standard tables and table structure (e.g. Lithology, Geophysics_Data, Samples,
Water_Data, etc), even if these tables are empty.
TO IMPORT DATA FROM A WINLOG DATABASE:
1. Select DRILLHOLES>External Data>Import>WinLog Import . The WinLoG Importer dialog
box is displayed.
2. Under Input WinLoG project database file, if you have previously imported this database and
saved the import settings as a template, click Open Template and select the template. Otherwise,
click the Open button and browse to the .MDB file to be imported.
If you have selected a template, review the table and field assignments on the Collar Settings,
Survey Settings, and Downhole Data Settings tabs, and then click OK to start the import.
Otherwise, for a new database import, follow the instructions below.
3. On the Collar Settings tab, under Collar table, click Projection and choose the projection that the
collar coordinates were recorded in.

4. Under Collar fields, review the field assignments.

5. If the database consists entirely of vertical holes or wells, you can skip the Survey Settings tab.
The WinLoG Importer will automatically create the necessary Dip and Azimuth fields required by
the Datamine Discover Drillhole module and set these values at 90 and 0 degrees respectively.
If the database contains any inclined holes (WinLoG version 4 and later), on the Survey Settings
tab, under Borehole survey table, select Assign a separate downhole survey table for angled
holes. Tthe WinLoG DeviationSurvey table is automatically converted for use in Datamine
Discover.
Note WinLoG uses a dip of 0 degrees for vertical holes; these will be converted automatically to 90
degrees. Thus a WinLoG dip of 5.2 degrees will be converted to 84.8 degrees for use in
Datamine Discover.
6. On the Downhole Data Settings tab, use the controls to move the required data table to the
Selected box.
When a table is selected, the Downhole Field Assignments Dialog Box is displayed, from which
you can assign the hole ID, depth fields, and data fields. Note that:
• For downhole depth measurements, assign the depth field in both the Top Depth (From) and
Bottom Depth (To) boxes. The importer will automatically create two separate output fields.
• Required fields, such as sample depths and borehole number, cannot be deselected.

To review and edit field assignments, double-click the table in the Selected box, or select the table
and click Set Field Mappings.
7. Under Output options, click the Save button and select the folder where the new Datamine
Discover drillhole tables will be created.
8. To create a new Datamine Discover drillhole project (recommended), select the Create Discover
project check box and type a project name in the adjacent box. To overwrite or refresh an
existing drillhole project, select the project name from the list and ensure that the output folder
specified in the Directory box matches that of the target project.
Note Updating an existing project will not update any sections or plans. These will need to be
refreshed and regenerated.
9. Use the Save Template button to save your import settings so that you can quickly re-import an
updated version of this database using the Open Template option (see step 2).

If a drillhole project was created by the import, select Drillholes>Project Setup to open the new
project and review the project settings.
See also
Modifying and deleting drillhole projects

WORKING WITH
TABLES
IN THIS SECTION
Opening and closing tables 100
Refreshing tables with database connections 103
Searching and replacing text in tables 104
Selecting records by attribute 105
Sorting tables 107
Changing the map bounds of a mappable table 108
Splitting tables 109
Digitizing and data entry 111
Adding unique identifiers to table records 138
Updating multiple columns 139
Working with multiple tables 140
WORKING WITH TABLES 100
OPENING AND CLOSING TABLES

• Favourite tables
• Opening multiple tables
• Closing all tables
FAVOURITE TABLES
Related tools Favourite Tables
The DISCOVER>Manage>Favourites>Favourite Tables tool enables frequently used tables to
be added to a list where they can be opened and displayed quickly and easily. Instead of having
to use File>Open to open tables each time, tables located in different folders or on different
network drives can be opened from a single source. Favourite tables can also be assigned an "alias"
name to make it easier to determine the contents of the table in the list if desired.
Favourites Dialog Showing Tables List
TO ADD A FAVOURITE TABLE:

1. Select DISCOVER>Manage>Favourites>Favourite Tables.
2. Click the Add button.
3. Click File Open and browse to the location of the table to add.
4. Enter an alias name for the table into the Name window if desired.
5. Click OK.
6. Repeat steps 3 and 4 to add another table to the list.

TO OPEN FAVOURITE TABLES:

1. Select Discover>Table Utilities>Favourite Tables.
2. To open a single table select it from the list and double-click with the mouse or
click Open Tables.
3. To select multiple tables click and drag with the mouse or hold down the SHIFT or CTRL keys.
4. Select a Preferred View from the following:
• New Mapper for All – Open the selected tables into a single map window
• New Mapper for Each – Open the selected tables into separate map windows
• Current Mapper – Open the selected tables into the current map window
• Browser – Open the selected tables as browser windows only
• No View – Open the selected tables but do not display them in a map or browser window
5. Click Open Tables.
ADDITIONAL OPTIONS:
• To remove a table highlight it and click the Remove button.
• To edit a table name or location highlight it and click the Edit button.
• To re-order tables highlight the table in the list and click on the Up and Down arrow
buttons.
• Opening multiple tables
OPENING MULTIPLE TABLES

Related tools Multi-File Open
Open many tables at once from a number of different folders.
The DISCOVER>Import>Multi-File Open is extremely useful when working with many tables. It
is not uncommon for a user to want to open a number of tables from different folders and add
them to a new map window. Rather than using the MapInfo Pro HOME>File>Open Table menu
option once for each different folder containing the desired tables, the Datamine Discover Multi-File
options enable a user to choose all the tables from the one dialog.

Open Multiple Tables dialog
Select the disk drive from the Look in drop-down list. Browse through the folders in the drive until a
desired folder is reached. Highlight the table(s) from the folder and click on the Add File button. The
selected tables will then be displayed in the Selected Files window. Choose the mode of display from
the Preferred View drop-down list. The available preferred views include opening all the selected
tables into the one map window, each table into a separate map window, into a currently open map
window, as browser windows or as no view. If all the tables to open are located within the one folder,
click Open when all tables have been selected.
If some of the tables exist in other folders (or on another disk drive), change to the appropriate drive
and folder. Select another table and use the Add File button to add this table to those already in the
Selected Files window.
To remove a table from the Selected Files list make sure it is highlighted and then click on the Remove
File button. When all the files to be used are selected, choose the Preferred View and click on the
Open button.
CLOSING ALL TABLES

Related tools Close All
The MapInfo Pro HOME>File>Close Table or HOME>File>Close All commands enable all or
a selection of the currently open tables in the work session to be closed. In addition to closing
selected tables from the currently open table list the Datamine Discover DISCOVER>File>Close
All command can also enable unused or query tables to be removed from the current work session.

Close All Dialog
Hold down the SHIFT key or click and drag holding down the left mouse button to select consecutive
tables from the list to close. Hold down the CTRL key to select non-consecutive tables.
Click the Unused button to close all tables which are open but not currently visible in a map or browser
window. This option should be used before saving a workspace to close any unused tables open in the
background. This should help to minimize problems with opening the workspace in the future if all
unnecessary tables are removed prior to saving the workspace.
Click the Query button to close all tables created from map or browser window selections including
queries created using the TABLE>Selection>Select or TABLE>Selection>SQL Select menu options.
If the Save Queries in Workspaces option in the PRO>Options>Preferences>Startup dialog is
checked then any open query tables created using the TABLE>Selection>Select or
TABLE>Selection>SQL Select will be written to a saved workspace. Remove unwanted queries using
the Datamine Discover Close All command before saving the workspace.
REFRESHING TABLES WITH DATABASE CONNECTIONS

Related tools Configure
Refresh On
Refresh Off
Refresh
Tables linked to a remote DBMS database, such as SQL, Oracle or Access, can be manually or
automatically refreshed at a specified time interval. This ensures that the most recent exploration or
mining data is being used at all times with MapInfo Pro. In order to use the DBMS refresh tools, a
remote database connection must be created and the database tables already open into MapInfo Pro.
See the MapInfo Pro User Guide for more information on how to set up and work with remote database
connections.
Note If you have created a Live Access or Live Access with caching DBMS table, you do not need
to refresh the table.
The following DBMS refresh tools are available on the DISCOVER tab under Manage>Tables:
Use the Configure tool to setup automatic DBMS refresh.

Use the Refresh On tool to turn on automatic refresh.
Use the Refresh Off tool to turn off automatic refresh.
Use the Refresh tool to manually update DBMS connections between scheduled updates.
Select DISCOVER>Manage>Tables>Configure to display the Select Database Tables to Update

dialog:
All of the DBMS currently open tables are displayed along with the remote database connection details
including DSN name, database file path and driver information.
To configure, select the remote database tables to be updated automatically and then specify an
Update Interval Time in Minutes or Hours. Click OK to apply.
If a remote database table is closed during the automatic update, a warning message is displayed. To
prevent warning messages being displayed for closed tables, open the Configure dialog box and
remove the tables from the update list or turn off the automatic refresh altogether.
SEARCHING AND REPLACING TEXT IN TABLES

Related tools Search and Replace
Search one or more columns in a table for a particular text string with the option to replace each
occurrence with a new string.
The search facility enables identification of selected records which contain specific words or
characters. For example, select all sample numbers that contain the letters "SS" or all surveys that
contain the word "Aeromagnetic". The text search may be case-sensitive but does not require that the
whole word is entered. Datamine Discover will search selected fields for all records which contain the
characters and return all records regardless of the other characters in the string.
To start a search, select the QUERY>Text>Search and Replace tool and select the table to search from
the Select a Table dialog. The Text Search dialog is displayed.

Text Search dialog
Select the columns to search from the list. Click and drag holding the left-mouse button to select
consecutive search columns or use the SHIFT key. Use the CTRL key to select non-consecutive search
columns from the list.
Choose the type of search from Find text only or Find and replace selected text or whole string. All
searches can be designated to find records according to case by checking the Case sensitive search
box. To view the selected records check the Browse selection box. If this box is not checked a dialog
will appear with information relating to how many records are found and/or replaced with the selected
text.
Enter the entire text string or selected text characters from the search text string in the Find window.
In the above example, Datamine Discover will search for all occurrences of the text "Riversleigh" in the
Unitname field. The returned search records can also be replaced with new text if desired. Although
the above search is performed on a character column, searches can also be made on numeric fields
whereby Datamine Discover will search and/or replace the selected numerical data.
If a Find and replace text search has been selected enter the replacement text in the Replace with
window. For example, find all occurrences of “North” in the selected field and replace with “Nth”.
Depending on the Find and Replace option selected, records which only contain the text “North” may
be replaced or all records which contain the text “North” along with other text may be replaced.
The search result is held in a temporary table which is named according to the search text specified.
In the above example, a temporary table called “Riversleigh” is created.
SELECTING RECORDS BY ATTRIBUTE

Related tools Select by Attribute
Use the QUERY>Text>Select by Attribute tool to easily select records from an automatically
created list of unique attributes for a selected column via an automatically created list of unique
attributes in the selected column.

Select by Attribute dialog
Use this option to quickly see a list of all the unique entries in a selected column. For example, visualize
a list could easily be created of all the rock types logged in a drillhole downhole lithology table. The
user could then choose just the units of interest (e.g. QV and Fault) and create a query of all intercepts
with these lithologies.
To use the tool, choose the source table from the Table to Select From pull-down list. Select the
attribute column from the Selected based on field pull-down list. A complete list of unique data entries
for the selected column is displayed in the Groups window.
The unique field attributes will initially populate the Unselected pane. Move the required
attributes to the Selected pane using the selection buttons. To select consecutive attributes
hold the left-mouse button and drag or use the SHIFT key in combination with the mouse
control. To select non-consecutive attributes use the CTRL key in combination with the mouse
control.
A number of options are provided for displaying the output query:
• Browse selection displays the selected records in a browser window.
• Map Selection displays the selected records in a new map window.
• Zoom map to selection will zoom to the extents of the selected records in the current map
window.
The output query can be given a unique name by entering a value into the Selection Result Table text
box.
Click OK to complete the query.

SORTING TABLES
Related tools Table Sort
Use the QUERY>Text>Table Sort tool to sort an original table permanently based on either a
primary column or a primary and secondary column, in the one step.
In the Table Sort dialog select the table to sort from the Table Name list. Select the primary column
to sort the table from the Primary Column Name drop-down list. Select the Ascending or Descending
option to sort the records in ascending or descending order. If required, a secondary sort column may
be selected from the Secondary Column Name drop-down list. Click OK to sort the table.
Note Alphanumeric columns are sorted in character order, i.e. “A11” is greater than “A100”, but
“A011” is less than “A100”.
Sort Table dialog
By default, the selected table is sorted by the first column, with no secondary sort column.
A new table can be created which will make a copy of the original table before sorting. This will have
a default name of the input table with “_Sorted” suffixed...
Note This operation cannot be undone.
If you wish to add a row number prior to sorting, so that the original table order can be retrieved by
sorting on this column, you can use MODIFY>Update>Unique Identifier.

CHANGING THE MAP BOUNDS OF A MAPPABLE TABLE

Related tools Modify Bounds
Use the DISCOVER>Manage>Tables>Modify Bounds tool to adjust the map bounds of a
mappable table. The map bounds of a mappable table may need to be modified under the
following circumstances:
• New map objects are to be added that are located beyond the bounds of the existing non-earth
map table.
• Map objects digitized from a raster layer and then saved may have restricted map bounds that
prevent the addition of new map objects into the layer
• Loss of data precision resulting from map bound extents that are set too large for a non-earth
map table. Restricting the bounds can help to improve the data precision.
Alter Map Bounds dialog
Select DISCOVER>Manage>Tables>Modify Bounds and choose the table to modify the map bounds.
In the Alter Map Bounds dialog the Table Name, CoordSys, Current Map Bounds and the Current
Data Limits for the selected table are displayed. The New Map Bounds Minimum and Maximum X
and Y coordinates are automatically populated with the values calculated for the Current Data Limits.
The Current Data Limits encompass all of the map objects currently in the table.
If the Current Data Limits are not acceptable, enter new map bound coordinates into the Minimum
and Maximum X and Y windows. Click OK to alter the map bounds.
Note When using this option, data outside the specified boundary is deleted from the table file and
cannot be recovered.

SPLITTING TABLES
Related tools Split by Attribute
Use the Split Table tool to split a table into multiple tables using unique attribute values in a
field. For example, create separate tables for different geological units covering a project area
from a master table, extract tenement data by holder or split out open file geochemical data by
company.
Table Split dialog
Select the source table from the Table to Split pull-down list. Select the attribute field (e.g.
company_name or lithology) from the Split based on field pull-down list. The number of unique entries
or groups in the selected field will be indicated. If there are spelling mistakes or different entries for the
same attribute in a field these will be treated as unique and separate tables will be created for each.
A table can be split by two methods;
• Auto – A new table will be automatically created for every unique attribute in the selected field.
• Custom – The user can individually select which attributes are to be split or combine individual
attributes into Groups for splitting. A combination of individual and grouped attributes can also be
chosen. Multiple attributes grouped together will form a single output table.
In Custom mode, the unique field attributes will initially populate the Selected pane. To select
and deselect items use the selection buttons. To split a table using a limited number of
individual attributes, click None to deselect all attributes, then migrate each required attribute
separately to the Selected pane using the Select button. This process must be repeated for
each required attribute. If most (but not all) of the unique attributes in the source table are
required in separate tables, change from Auto to Custom mode, and just deselect the
unrequired attributes from the Selected list.

To Group a series of attributes (into a single output table), first deselect all the attributes (None). Then
in the Unselected list, hold the left-mouse button and drag or use the SHIFT key in conjunction with the
mouse control. To select non-consecutive attributes use the CTRL key in conjunction with the mouse
control.
When the attributes have been selected for grouping, press the Select button to create the split group.
The Group Properties dialog will open listing the Group members. The Group Name can be modified
if required.
Table Split Group Properties dialog
The default output table name for the newly created tables uses the original table name with the
unique attribute or group name extension. To change the default output name, click on the Save
button. The {GROUP} placeholder must be part of the output table name. As MapInfo Pro truncates
table names longer than 30 characters when they are displayed in MapInfo Pro it is recommended to
try and keep output table names as short as possible.

DIGITIZING AND DATA ENTRY

The Datamine Discover digitizing and data entry tools are designed to streamline the entry of table data
and creation of digitized map objects. Attribute data in a column can be incremented automatically,
validated, or selected from a look-up table. Customized styles can also be applied to objects as they
are created.
The following tools can be found on the DISCOVER tab under Data Entry:
Picklist Manager
Use this tool to manage picklists by either modifying existing picklists or creating new picklists
by importing from external files or creating a brand new picklist. For information about how to
use this tool, see Creating and managing picklists.
Apply Style
Use this tool to apply a single picklist style to either selected map objects or to newly created
map objects. For information about how to use this tool, see Applying a single style from a
picklist.
Apply Picklist
Use this tool to apply multiple selected picklist styles to map objects in a table either permanently
or as a thematic map. For information about how to use this tool, see Applying multiple styles
from a picklist.
Apply Structural Symbols
Use this tool to apply structural symbols to a point dataset. For information about how to use this
tool, see Applying structural styles from a picklist.
Note The Structural Symbols tool can also be found under ANALYSIS>Display.
Setup Table
Configure tables with validation rules and defaults for data entry. For information about how to
use this tool, see Configure table for data entry.
Enter Data
Digitize spatial or enter non-spatial validated data with attributes. For information about how to
use this tool, see Enter or digitize table data and map objects.
Single Record Entry
Digitize spatial or enter non-spatial validated data with attributes record by record. For
information about how to use this tool, see Enter or digitize table data and map objects.

CREATING AND MANAGING PICKLISTS

Related tools Picklist Manager
Object styles are managed with the Picklist Manager. Use the DISCOVER>Data
Entry>Setup>Picklist Manager to create map object and textural validation lists used for the
creation of new map objects and applying map styles and attributes to selected map objects.
On the Picklist Manager, an existing picklist can be selected from the Picklists box. Click the
Configure dropdown to manage the selected picklist or create a new picklist.
Note Structural picklists have limited modification options. See Structural picklists for details.
The Styles box displays the styles and information available in the selected picklist. The following tools
are provided to create and manage picklist entries:
Add New Style Create a new picklist entry.
Delete Selected Style Delete the selected picklist entry.

Rename Style Rename the selected picklist entry.
Edit Style Edit the selected picklist entry.
Move Item Up/Down Moves the selected picklist entry up and down.
TO CREATE A NEW PICKLIST:

1. On the Picklist Manager, under Picklists, click the Configure button and select the Create
new picklist option. The Create Picklist dialog is displayed.
2. Type the Picklist Name and Picklist Description (optional).

3. Select the type of picklist: Point Objects, Line Objects, Polygon Objects, No Objects, or Structure
Symbols.
You can also create a picklist from an existing picklist and then modify it by checking the Create
from existing picklist option and selecting the appropriate picklist.
Note If you need to shorten or modify a structural picklist, use this option to create a copy, and
then customize the new copy. See Structural picklists for more information.
4. Click OK to create a blank picklist.
5. Under the Styles box, click the Add New Style button.
6. The MapInfo style dialog is displayed, from which you can define a style for the selected
object type. Click OK and type in a description for the new style (e.g. Shale) into the New Style
Description dialog. Click OK.
7. Repeat steps 6 and 7 until you have defined all the required styles in this list.
8. Use the other controls below the Styles box to Delete, Rename, Edit, and order entries in the
picklist.

9. Click the Save button.

TO CREATE A PICKLIST FROM AN EXISTING DATASET:
1. On the Picklist Manager, under Picklists, click the Configure button and select the Import
picklist option. The Import Picklist dialog is displayed.
2. Choose a File Type:

• Colour Map – Imports a colourmap created in the legacy ColourMap tool in older versions of
Datamine Discover (superseded by the Data Entry tools).
• GeoStyles – Imports files from the legacy Styles Library tool (superseded by the Picklist
Manager).
• Legend – Import legend files from the Drillholes>Legend Editor tool.
• MapInfo Professional – Import patterns and textural information from a MapInfo Pro TAB
file.
• Mobile Picklist – Import textural information from a Discover Mobile picklist file.
• Mobile Style – Import style information from a Discover Mobile picklist file.
• Thematic Map Layer – Import patterns and textural information from a MapInfo Pro
Thematic Map layer.
3. Click OK and select the file to be imported. If the file contains multiple object types, these will be
separated into several picklist files.
picklist.
TO APPEND A PICKLIST ONTO ANOTHER PICKLIST:
1. On the Picklist Manager, under Picklists, click the Configure button and select the
Append Picklist option. The Append Picklist dialog is displayed.

2. Select a picklist in the Append Picklist and To Picklist combo boxes. The picklists must have
the same object type.
Note Only picklists of the same object type can be appended, i.e. you cannot append a Line
Objects picklist to a Polygon Objects picklist.
3. Click OK to append.
picklist.
TO DELETE A PICKLIST:
1. On the Picklist Manager, click the Picklists box and select the picklist you want to delete.
2. Click the Configure button and select the Delete existing picklist option.
3. A warning message will appears asking if you want to delete the selected picklist, click OK button
to delete the picklist.
Note See Structural picklists for how to recover a deleted default structural picklist.
TO RENAME A PICKLIST AND DESCRIPTION:

1. On the Picklist Manager, click the Picklists box and select the picklist you want to rename.
2. Click the Configure button and select the Rename picklist and description option. The
Rename Picklist dialog is displayed.
3. Modify the Picklist Name and Picklist Description text boxes as required, click OK to commit the
change.
TO MODIFY AN EXISTING PICKLIST:

1. On the Picklist Manager, click the Picklists box and select the picklist you want to edit.
2. The picklist entries are displayed in the Styles box. Use the tools under the Styles box to perform
the following editing tasks:
• To add a new entry, click Add. The MapInfo style dialog is displayed, from which you
can define a new entry. Click OK and type in a description for the new entry (e.g. Shale).
Click OK.
• To delete an entry, select the entry in the Styles box and click Delete.
• To rename an entry, select the entry in the Styles box and click Options.
• To add/remove an entry to a group, select the entry in the Styles box and click Options.
• To add/remove an entry comment, select the entry in the Styles box and click Options.
Note Entries can be added to a group to streamline the data entry process when using the
Data Entry tools.
• To edit an entry, select the entry in the Styles box and click Edit. The MapInfo style
dialog is displayed, from which you can edit the entry. Click OK.
• To reorder entries in the Styles box, select the entry you want to move and use the Move Up
and Move Down buttons to reposition.
3. Click the Save button to save your changes.
TO EXPORT AN EXISTING PICKIST:
1. On the Picklist Manager, under Picklists, click Configure and select the Export Picklist option.
The Export Picklist dialog is displayed.
2. Choose from the available File Types:

• Legend – Export to legend files to be used in the Drillholes>Legend Editor tool.
• Mobile Picklist – Export textural information to a Discover Mobile picklist file.
• Mobile Style – Export style information to a Discover Mobile style file.
3. Click OK.
4. Select the required options on the File Export dialog and click OK to export.
STRUCTURAL PICKLISTS
Discover provides three default structural picklists:
• ET Structure - Australia

• ET Structure - Canada
• ET Structure - USA
Only limited modifications can be applied to structural picklists, due to their intrinsic reliance on
Discover structure codes, dip and plunge angles, and the resulting display of oriented structure
symbols. Because of these restrictions, the following modifications cannot be applied to a Structural
Picklist:
• Add new style
• Symbol Style modified (except colour and size)
It is strongly recommended to always first create a copy of one of the default structural picklists (ET
Structure – Australia, Canada or USA) provided by Discover using Create a new picklist, and then
modify the copy. This is particularly useful if you need to create a short picklist of only commonly used
structural types in your area.
If one of the default structural picklists is inadvertently modified (e.g. multiple rows or structural types
deleted), these default picklists can be recovered from the Discover Picklists folder.
TO RESTORE A BACKUP OF THE DEFAULT STRUCTURAL PICKLISTS:
1. Close the Picklist Manager.
2. In Windows Explorer, navigate to the C:\ProgramData\Encom\Discover\Picklists folder. This
folder contains backup copies of the various ET Structure picklists in .XML format.
3. Copy the required picklist:
s_ET_Structural.xml (Australia)
s_ET_Structural_Canada.xml (Canada)
s_ET_Structural_USA.xml (USA)
4. Navigate to the C:\Users\USERNAME\AppData\Roaming\Encom\Discover\Picklists folder,
and paste in the picklist copied above, overwriting the existing picklist of the same name in this
location.
5. Restart the Picklist Manager.
APPLYING A SINGLE STYLE FROM A PICKLIST

Related tools Apply Style
A single picklist style can be applied to one or more selected map objects or applied when
creating new map objects. When applying the style, an optional Code can be entered into a
defined table field. If no table field is defined, the style of the selected style will be applied to the
map objects.
TO APPLY A SINGLE STYLE TO ONE OR MORE SELECTED MAP OBJECTS:
1. Select DISCOVER>Data Entry>Apply>Apply Style to open the Apply Style dialog.

2. Select the map object(s) in the Mapper window or Browser window.

3. In the Picklists box, select the picklist.
4. In the Styles box, select the style you want to apply.
5. Click Apply.
TO APPLY STYLE DESCRIPTION TO OBJECTS:
2. Select the map object(s) in the Mapper window or Browser window.
5. Select the Insert style description check box.
6. Select the table you want to apply the style description.
7. Select the table column you want to apply the style description.
8. Click Apply.
TO APPLY A STYLE WHEN DIGITIZING OBJECTS:
Note When setting a style for digitising, ensure that no map objects are selected. If an object is
selected, the style will be applied to that object.
4. Click Apply.

5. The selected style will be applied to any new objects.

Note If you wish to insert the style description text in the new object record, select the Insert style
description check box and populate the table and column dropdown boxes.
APPLYING MULTIPLE STYLES FROM A PICKLIST

Related tools Apply Picklist
Use the Apply Picklist tool to apply styles from multiple picklist entries. This tool allows for all or
selected picklist entries to update the defined MapInfo Pro table.
TO APPLY MULTIPLE STYLES PERMANENTLY TO A TABLE:
1. Select DISCOVER>Data Entry>Apply>Apply Picklist to open the Apply Picklist dialog.

Note By default all styles are selected, if you wish to apply certain styles select those styles.
4. In the Style Table Options box select Source Table.
5. Select the Table you wish to update the object style.

6. Select the table Column that contains the matching Code descriptions.
Note The Source Table is the MapInfo Pro table you want to permanently update the object
styles in. The Apply Picklist tool works by matching the exact values in the Code field of
the picklist to the values in the defined MapInfo Pro table.
7. Click Apply.
TO APPLY MULTIPLE STYLES TO A TABLE AS A THEMATIC MAP:
1. Select DISCOVER>Data Entry>Apply>Apply Picklist to open the Apply Picklist dialog.

Note By default all styles are selected, if you wish to apply certain styles select those styles.
4. In the Style Table Options box select Thematic Map.
5. Select the Table you wish to update the Thematic object style.
6. Select the table Column that contains the matching Code descriptions.
Note The Thematic Map option creates a new Thematic layer for the defined MapInfo Pro table.
The Apply Picklist tool works by matching the exact values in the Code field of the picklist
to the values in the defined MapInfo Pro table.

7. Click Apply.
Note Individual Thematic map styles are the only type currently supported by this tool.
APPLYING STRUCTURAL STYLES FROM A PICKLIST

Related tools Structural Symbols
For information on customising and managing structural picklists, see Structural picklists.
This functionality requires a field in the source dataset pre-populated with the relevant Discover
Structural Codes, Dip Direction and Dip/Plunge fields (see Working with structural data).
TO APPLY MULTIPLE STYLES PERMANENTLY TO A TABLE:
1. Select DISCOVER>Data Entry>Apply>Structural Symbols to open the Apply Structural
Symbols dialog.
Note This tool can also be found under ANALYSIS>Display.
2. In the Picklists box, select the structural picklist.

3. In the Styles box, select the styles you want to apply.
Note By default all styles are selected, if you wish to apply certain styles, select those styles.
4. In the Style Structural Options box select the Table you want to update the structural styles.
Select the Method the structure symbols were plotted, choose between Dip Direction/Dip and
Strike/Dip (RHR).
Note Selected point objects can be used instead of an entire table to apply structure symbols.
5. Select the Dip Direction or Strike, Dip and Discover Code fields (see Working with structural
data). (see Working with structural data).

6. If dip labels are required for the structural symbols click the Label Options button to open the
Structure Text Labels dialog.
Text label options:

• No Labels – Default state, no dip/plunge labels displayed.
• MapInfo Auto labels – Dip/plunge labels created as MapInfo Pro custom auto labels within
the structure table.
• Cosmetic Text Labels – Dip/plunge labels created on the Map Window Cosmetic Layer in the
Map Window.
• Show labels at 0 and 90 – Display dip labels at 0 and 90 degree angles; by default, this option
is not enabled.
Click OK after selecting the label options.
7. Click Apply to change the point objects into rotated structure symbols.
CONFIGURE TABLE FOR DATA ENTRY

Related tools Setup Table
Use the DISCOVER>Data Entry>Setup>Setup Table tool to configure any MapInfo Pro TAB file
with validation rules for data entry using the Datamine Discover Enter Data or Single Record
Entry tools (see Enter or digitize table data and map objects). The tables can be either mappable
or non-mappable. Because the validation settings are stored in the TAB file metadata, no auxiliary files
are required. This has the advantage of the validation settings being easily transported with the table.
TAB files linked to images, grids and read-only files such as Excel spreadsheets cannot be used with
this tool.

TO CONFIGURE RULES FOR VALIDATING TABLE DATA:

1. Select DISCOVER>Data Entry>Setup>Setup Table. The Select Tables dialog is displayed.
2. All open vector and non-mappable tables are listed in the Select Tables dialog box. Select a table.
Only one table can be configured at a time. To open a different table, Click the Open button and
select the TAB file you want to open in MapInfo Pro. The table type and validation status is
indicated by the following icons:
Mappable vector table with validation
Mappable vector table without validation
Mappable vector read-only table
Non-mappable table with validation
Non-mappable table without validation
Non-mappable read-only table
3. Click OK to load the selected table in the Setup Digitizing Table dialog box. The table name,
projection and location are displayed under Table Options. The Table Fields box is populated with
the table fields as rows and field properties as columns in a spreadsheet-like grid. The table
validation columns are initially blank.
Note Validation settings that are applicable to each field are shaded blue. For example, you can
only select a look-up table (of text values) for a text field (type Char). Similarly, minimum
and maximum numerical values can only be set for numerical fields (type Integer, SmallInt,
Float, and Decimal).
4. Make the validation settings for each field or as required. To clear a selection in the Setup
Digitizing Table, right-click in the cell and select Clear Value. For more information about
individual validation columns, see Table Validation Options.

Setup Digitizing Tables dialog showing validation settings for each table field
TABLE VALIDATION OPTIONS

Validation options available from the Setup Table tool depend on the field type.
Option Description
Name Name of the MapInfo Pro field.
Type MapInfo Pro field type and width where applicable.
Parameter Defines the field for automatic data insertion. The options available are:
• MapX table projection centroid X/Easting/Longitude value. Automatically inserts the
object centroid value into a numeric field type with the table projection.
• MapY table projection centroid Y/Northing/Latitude value. Automatically inserts the
object centroid value into a numeric field type with the table projection
• RepeatValue repeats previous record cell value in new record.
• CurrentDate inserts the current date.
• CurrentTime inserts the current time.
• CurrentDateTime inserts the current date and time.
• Dip (used for structure symbols) the field that contains the dip (see Dip and plunge
angles).
• DipDirection (used for structure symbols) the field that contains the dip direction.
• DiscoverCode (used for structure symbols) the field that contains the Discover Code
(see Discover structure codes).
• Strike (used for structure symbols) the field that contains the strike direction.
Visible Option shows and hides fields. By default, fields are visible. Fields that have validation
options defined cannot be hidden.

Option Description
Lookup Table Select a picklist to use as the validation list for that field. The default location of
picklists is:
C:\Users\USERNAME\AppData\Roaming\
Encom\Discover\Picklists
Exclusive This option is dependent on a Lookup Table picklist being selected. By default,
Exclusive is enabled. When selected, only values contained in the picklist can be
selected when entering data. When cleared, all values in the picklist selected or
freehand text can be entered.
Optional This option allows the user to make the entry of data into the field optional or
mandatory. By default, Optional is enabled. When selected, data is not required in
the field, including if a picklist has been defined. When cleared, data must be
entered into the field regardless of whether a picklist is defined for a field or not.
Default value Default value of field in new records:
• If text field and Lookup Table option is selected, click to select a default value from the
picklist. Otherwise, type a value.
• If a date or time field, pick the default date/time.
• If a numerical field, type a value.
Map Style This option is dependent on a Lookup Table picklist being selected. If Map Style is
selected when a map object is digitised into a Map Window, the style attributes for
the picklist entry selected will be used by the new object. To easily determine which
field has the Map Style applied, the name of the field in the Data Entry and Single
Record Entry tools is bolded.
Increment Increments a numerical field or a character field containing numbers by a fixed
value.
Min Numeric Minimum numerical value.
Max Numeric Maximum numerical value.
Min Date Minimum date value.
Max Date Maximum date value.
Min Date Time Minimum date/time value.
Max Date Time Maximum date/time value.
Min Time Minimum time value.
Max Time Maximum time value.
Note To clear a selection in the Setup Digitizing Table, right-click in the cell and select Clear Value.
If desired, multiple cells can be highlighted and cleared.
ENTER OR DIGITIZE TABLE DATA AND MAP OBJECTS

Two methods are provided for entering data into a MapInfo Pro table:
• Data Entry – displays the table as a multi-record browser, allowing the entry via a data grid
(see Multiple record data entry).
• Single Record Entry – displays each record in a table individually, allowing the entry of data
one record at a time (Single record data entry.

Data can be entered into standard MapInfo Pro TAB files (without validation) or TAB files with validation
settings created with the select DISCOVER>Data Entry>Setup>Setup Table. tool (see Configure table
for data entry).
Data can only be entered in existing TAB files: the Data Entry tool does not create MapInfo tables nor
alter their structure.
Tables can be either mappable or non-mappable. When opening a table an icon is displayed to indicate
the validation status of the table:
Mappable vector table with validation
Mappable vector table without validation
Mappable vector read-only table
Non-mappable table with validation
Non-mappable table without validation
Non-mappable read-only table
MULTIPLE RECORD DATA ENTRY

Related tools Enter Data
TO ENTER NON-MAPPABLE DATA WITH THE DATA ENTRY TOOL:
1. Select DISCOVER>Data Entry>Data Entry.
2. All open tables are listed in the Select Tables dialog box. Select a table. To open another
table, Click the Open button and select the TAB file you want to open in MapInfo Pro.
3. Click OK to load the selected table in the Data Entry tool. The table names are displayed on the
tabs at the top of the data sheet. The number of records and the current selected record are
displayed on the navigation bar at the bottom of the dialog box.
Note If multiple tables are open, a tab is displayed for each table. The order of the tabs
displayed can be modified by dragging the tab left or right.

4. Use these tools to open another table or view table information:

• Open another table for data entry.
• Close selected table.
• View information about the open table such as Name, Path and Projection.
• View all tables loaded or display hidden tables in Data Entry.
5. Use the navigation bar or keyboard arrow keys to move up and down the table records and
left and right between columns. You can then:
• Edit values. Use the TAB and right/left arrow keys to move between cells. Use the navigation
bar and up/down arrow keys to move between records. Click a cell to edit. If a picklist is
defined in the validation settings, select from the valid picklist values. Values are validated on
entry.
• Clear values. Right-click in the cell and select Clear Value or click in the cell and press DEL.
• Add a new record (to the end of the table). If validation settings have been set
up for this table, some columns will be populated by the increments or
defaults defined for that field.
• Use the TAB and arrow keys to move between cells. Type values in fields as required. If a
picklist is defined in the validation settings, click the cell and select from the valid picklist
values. New and edited values are validated on entry.
• This tool can only be used with non-mappable tables. To enter a new record into a mappable
table, create a new object in the map window.
• Delete selected records. Click, CTRL+click, or SHIFT+click to select the
required records.
• Click once to display only records that fail the validation rules. Click again to display
all records, including those that have failed a validation check.
• Run a validation scan across the entire table. If validation issues are detected, a
red icon is displayed next to the records that failed the validation check.
• Click to display on-screen-keyboard.
• Click to hide or show hidden fields.

6. Click Save to save your changes to the current table.
Note All validation errors must be resolved before the table can be saved. The Data Entry tool
cannot be closed when there are unresolved errors.

Enter Data dialog showing entry of data in a non-mappable table
TO DIGITIZE MAPPABLE OBJECTS WITH THE DATA ENTRY TOOL:

Note If multiple tables are open, a tab is displayed for each table. The order of the tabs
displayed can be modified by dragging the tab left or right.


5. Make the table you want to enter into editable.
6. Digitize a map object using the tools on the MapInfo Pro SPATIAL>Page>Insert menu.
Note You cannot enter a new browser record using the Data Entry tool for a mappable table. To
create a new record you must digitize a new map object in the map window.
7. Use the navigation bar or keyboard arrow keys to move up and down the table records and left
and right between columns. You can then:
• Edit values. Use the TAB key and right/left arrow keys to move between cells. Use the
navigation bar and up/down arrow keys to move between records. Click a cell to edit. If a
picklist is defined in the validation settings, select from the valid picklist values. Values are
validated on entry.
• Delete selected records. In the left-most column, click, CTRL+click, or
SHIFT+click to select the required records.
• Toggle editability of selected table (MapInfo Pro function).

Note The Data Entry tool supports the selection of singular map and browser
records and objects. Multiple record or object selections are not supported.
8. Click the Save button to save your changes to the current table. All validation errors must be
resolved before the table can be saved and the Data Entry tool can be closed.

Enter Data dialog showing entry of data in a mappable table
TO DIGITIZE POINT STRUCTURE SYMBOLS WITH THE DATA ENTRY TOOL:


Note If multiple tables are open, a tab is displayed for each table. The order of the tabs displayed
can be modified by dragging the tab left or right.
5. Make the table you want to enter into editable.
6. Digitize a point using the tools on the MapInfo Pro SPATIAL>Page>Insert menu.
Note Only point map object are supported when digitising structure symbols.
Note You cannot enter a new browser record using the Data Entry tool for a mappable table. To
create a new record you must digitize a new map object in the map window.
7. Use the navigation bar or keyboard arrow keys to move up and down the table records and left
and right between columns. You can then:
• Edit values. Use the TAB key and right/left arrow keys to move between cells. Use the
navigation bar and up/down arrow keys to move between records. Click a cell to edit. If a
picklist is defined in the validation settings, select from the valid picklist values. Values are
validated on entry.
• Delete selected records. In the left-most column, click, CTRL+click, or
SHIFT+click to select the required records.
• Label structural symbol options for digitizing structure points.
• Toggle editability of selected table (MapInfo Pro function).
Note Because the structure symbols are drawn dynamically, the strike of a structure
can be easily aligned with a feature on an existing map.
Note The Data Entry tool supports the selection of singular map and browser records and
objects. Multiple record or object selections are not supported.

8. To digitize rotated structural symbols the table must be set up correctly in the DISCOVER>Data
Entry>Setup>Setup Table tool. The table must be mappable and have three numeric fields with
the following parameters: Dip, DipDirection and DiscoverCode (see Working with structural data).
There must also be a character field defining one of the structural picklists, and the Exclusive and
Map Style options must be enabled.
9. 10. Click the Save button to save your changes to the current table. All validation errors must be
resolved before the table can be saved and the Data Entry tool can be closed.

Note The Data Entry tool only supports digitizing structural symbols with a point object using the Dip/
Dip Direction method. The Single Record Entry tool allows the user to digitize structural
symbols with both point and line objects using methods Dip/Dip Direction and Right Hand Rule
(RHR) Strike/Dip.
SINGLE RECORD DATA ENTRY

Single Record Entry allows both mappable and non-mappable tables to be edited, in a single record
view.
Note Note: The Record Entry tool can be docked into the active MapInfo Pro session window. To
dock or undock, click on the top of the dialog and drag into the preferred location.
TO ENTER NON-MAPPABLE DATA WITH THE RECORD ENTRY TOOL:
1. Select DISCOVER>Data Entry>Record Entry.
2. Select a table from the list of open tables in the Table dropdown box.
3. To enter a record simply digitize a map object, a new record will be created. Enter the appropriate
data into the displayed fields. If you have automatic data entry enabled data will be populated.
Alternatively, use the dropdown lists provided.
4. Located at the bottom of the dialog are the following options:
• Zoom map to current record
• Add a new record

• Delete the current record
• Structure Symbols labels (Available when using Structure Symbol table only)
• Temporarily hide fields or display hidden fields and select the fields you wish to view
• Sync the table you are editing in the Single Record Entry tool and the table in MapInfo
Pro. This can occur if you edit the structure of the table while the Single Record Entry
tool is open.
Note Note: If validation issues are detected, the cell record is outlined in red.
5. Once all the data has been entered close the single record entry tool and save the table edits in
MapInfo Pro.
TO ENTER MAPPABLE DATA WITH THE SINGLE RECORD ENTRY TOOL:

Note: You cannot enter a new record using the Single Record Entry tool Add button for a mappable
table. To create a new record you must digitize a new map object in the map window, this will add a
new record.

• Add a new record (Available when using non-mappable table only)
tool is open.
MapInfo Pro.
TO ENTER STRUCTURE SYMBOLS DATA WITH THE SINGLE RECORD ENTRY TOOL:
To digitize rotated structural symbols the table must be set up correctly in the DISCOVER>Data
Entry>Setup>Setup Table tool. The table must be mappable and have three numeric fields with the
following parameters: Dip, DipDirection/Strike and DiscoverCode (see Working with structural data).
There must also be a character field defining one of the structural picklists, and the Exclusive and Map
Style options must be enabled. If you want to display the coordinate for the structure symbol you can
select the MapX and MapY parameters.
Once the table has been setup you do not need to modify the setup again, it will be stored in the table
metadata. If you sent the table to another person the structural setup parameters will be remembered.
The Single Record Entry tool allows structural symbols to be digitized by the following MapInfo object
types:
• Point object
• Line object
• Polyline object
The Single Record Entry tool allows structural symbols to be digitized using the following methods:
• Dip/Dip Direction
• Strike/Dip (Right Hand Rule)

Table setup for structural data entry using Dip/Dip Direction method
Table setup for structural data entry using Strike/Dip Right Hand Rule method
Note Note: You cannot enter a new structure record using the Single Record Entry tool Add button
for a mappable table. To create a new record you must digitize a new map object in the map
window, this will add a new record.

Note Only point map object are supported when digitising structure symbols. However, you can
create a structural point object by digitizing a line or polyline.
DIGITIZING USING POINTS

To digitize using points select the MapInfo Pro SPATIAL>Create>Insert>Symbol tool. Simply digitize
the point object in the location you want the structure symbol. To modify the structure type select the
structure type from the Type dropdown, when you enter the DipDirection/Strike and Dip values the
symbol will rotate accordingly.
DIGITIZING USING LINES

Digitizing using lines is a convenient method of digitizing structure symbols if you wish to replicate the
bearing of a line feature such as a lineation, strike, fault trace etc. Using a line you can trace along the
structure orientation to obtain the Dip Direction, Strike or plunge value. You can digitize using either a
line or polyline object.

TO DIGITIZE USING LINE SELECT THE MAPINFO PRO SPATIAL>CREATE>INSERT>LINE

TOOL.
Simply digitize the line object in the location you want the structure symbol. The structure symbol
will be located at the start line node, the DipDirection/Strike will be recorded from the bearing of
the line object. To modify the structure type select the structure type from the Type dropdown. You
can modify the DipDirection/Strike and Dip values of the symbol if required.
TO DIGITIZE USING POLYLINE SELECT THE MAPINFO PRO
SPATIAL>CREATE>INSERT>POLYLINE TOOL.
Simply digitize the line object in the location you want the structure symbol. The structure symbol
will be located at the start line node, the DipDirection/Strike will be recorded from the bearing of
the line object. To modify the structure type select the structure type from the Type dropdown. You
can modify the DipDirection/Strike and Dip values of the symbol if required.
• Add a new record (Available when using non-mappable table only)
tool is open.
MapInfo Pro.
ADDING UNIQUE IDENTIFIERS TO TABLE RECORDS

Related tools Unique Identifier
Use the MODIFY>Update>Unique Identifier tool to add an incrementing numeric code, with
optional alphabetic prefixes/suffixes, to a table based on the row number.
This can be used to generate a unique “sample ID” to a table if this does not exist or is in an invalid
format for sorting. To add a unique ID to each row in a table:
1. Select MODIFY>Update>Unique Identifier.
2. Select the Input Table.
3. Enter a Start Number and Increment Value (e.g. 434, 435, 436, etc).
4. Optionally specify a Prefix and/or Suffix (e.g. pictured example adds a 'GHRC' hole refix to the
numeric value): the resulting code will therefore be an alphanumeric code.
5. Either add a New Field (and specify its position) or use an Existing Field for the output UID. For
new fields, the field type will automatically be assigned depending on the UID format. For existing
fields, only field types compatible with the UID formatting defined will be able to be selected.

6. Click OK to populate the table.
UPDATING MULTIPLE COLUMNS

Related tools Mulit-Column Update
Use the MODIFY>Update>Multi-Column Update tool to update columns in one table with data
from columns in another table where there is a common join such as sample number or drillhole
name between the two tables. Datamine Discover can update up to 30 columns at the one time
so long as the columns already exist in the table to update. Only the records which match the join
criteria are upated and any other unmatched records in the table retain their original values. This
enables subsets of data to be easily updated.
For example:
• Update surface sample table with assay data
• Update drillhole collars with survey data
Multiple Column Update dialog
TO UPDATE MULTIPLE COLUMNS:

1. Check that the table to update contains columns to store the new values. If the columns do
not already exist in the table, create them using DISCOVER>Manage>Tables>Structure
Manager.
2. Open the table to update in MapInfo Pro.
3. Open the table to update the values from into MapInfo Pro.
4. Select MODIFY>Update>Multi-Column Update.
5. Select the table to Update values in from the pull-down list.
6. Select the table to Get values from in the pull-down list.

7. Select the column in the table to update pull-down list and select the matching join column in the
from value table pull-down list.
8. Under Field Mapping select the first column in the Update From pull-down list.
9. Select the corresponding column in the table to update from the Update To pull-down list.
10. Repeat steps 8 and 9 to match all columns to update from and to in each table.
11. Click OK to update columns.
Note If the column name in Update To matches the column name in Update From simply select
the next Update From column to automatically display the matching Update From column.
ADDITIONAL OPTIONS:
• To save or load a set of Field Mappings, use the save/load buttons. This will save/load
the mappings based on the field names but not types. If not all saved fields exist when
loading a mapping, a summary report will be provided detailing which fields do not exist or are
invalid.
• To remove an entry under Field Mapping, select a cell in the row and click the Delete
button.
• Check the Allow Undo option to enable updates to a table to be undone using
TABLE>Selection>Revert Table. This will return the data in the table to the last
time it was saved.
• If a table is in non-native format, the join fields are not indexed or the datatypes are different
between the update from and to columns the Alert button is displayed. Place the cursor
over the button to view message. See Troubleshooting for more information.
TROUBLESHOOTING:
• To reduce processing time make sure table to update from is in native MapInfo Pro format instead
of linked to an Excel or Text file.
• To reduce processing time index the join column in each table, use
TABLE>Content>Table>Modify Structure.
• To avoid data loss, ensure columns in the table to update are the same datatype as the columns
in the update table. Eg. Character, Float, Date, etc. To compare and modify tables. use
DISCOVER>Manage>Tables>Structure Manager.
WORKING WITH MULTIPLE TABLES

• Opening and closing multiple tables
• Appending multiple tables
• Importing multiple MID/MIF files
• Exporting multiple MID/MIF files
• Reprojecting multiple tables
• Multi-table, multi-field editing

OPENING AND CLOSING MULTIPLE TABLES

See Opening and closing tables.
APPENDING MULTIPLE TABLES

Related tools Multi-Append
Use the MODIFY>Update>Multi-Append tool to append multiple tables to another table. Select
the table to append to from the available Open Tables list. Select the table to append the other
tables to from the Append to Table pull-down list. Choose the order in which the tables are to
be appended. Use the arrow keys to re-order if necessary. Click OK to append the selected tables.
Note With the Multi-Append tool, all tables selected must have the same number of columns. If the
tables have the same number of columns but do not have the same structure then data
conversion errors (such as when character values are read into a numeric column) may occur
during the appending process.
IMPORTING MULTIPLE MID/MIF FILES

Related tools Multi-MIF Import
Use the DISCOVER>File>Import>Multi-MIF Import tool to import multiple MID and MIF files
into MapInfo Pro.
Select a directory to store the new MapInfo Pro files created from the imported MID/MIF files. Follow
the same procedures for Opening multiple tables regarding selecting folders and files to add to the
Selected Files window, choosing the Preferred View, and removing files from the list.
EXPORTING MULTIPLE MID/MIF FILES

Related tools Multi-MIF Export
Use the DISCOVER>File>Export>Multi-MIF Export tool to export multiple tables to MID/MIF
format. Select the tables to export from the available open tables list. Choose to export to the
same directory as the tables or to a new directory. Click OK to export the selected tables.
REPROJECTING MULTIPLE TABLES

See Reprojecting multiple vector tables.

MULTI-TABLE, MULTI-FIELD EDITING

Related tools Structure Manager
The DISCOVER>Manage>Tables>Structure Manager is a powerful tool allowing the easy
comparison and editing of multiple fields across multiple tables. It essentially provides the multi-
table and field functionality of the MapInfo Pro Modify Table Structure dialog
(TABLE>Content>Table>Modify Structure). It is of particular use when altering the structure (field
names, formats, field order, etc) of a number of similar data tables prior to combining them using the
Multi-Append tool.
The Structure Manager contains the following multi-field editing options:
• Addition
• Deletion
• Copying
• Rename
• Type Alteration
• Reorder
The tables to be compared/altered need to open in MapInfo Pro prior to running the tool. Image and
raster tables cannot be viewed or modified with this tool.
The Structure Manager dialog matching two tables by field name
The Structure Manager enables multi-table comparison through a customizable grid/browser view.
First, a Base Table needs to be selected from the pull-down list of open tables. Generally this is the
table whose structure will be used as a template for other comparison tables; it will be the first table
displayed. Multiple comparison tables can then be selected; these will be displayed adjacent to the
Base Table.
The Structure Manager dialog is resizable, as are individual column widths.
The operation of the Structure Manager is described in the following topics:
• Field matching

• Editing tools
• Object count
FIELD MATCHING
Two field matching methods are available at the top right of the dialog:
• Match by Field Name will display fields with the same name in the same row. This is an excellent
way to check whether assay fields are named identically e.g. two tables might have a “Cu” field,
whilst a third table might have a “copper” field. Another example: one table may have a “HoleID”
field, whilst another a “Hole_ID” field. It also allows a simple visual comparison of the field types of
matching fields: three tables may have “HoleID” fields of differing types (e.g. Character(10),
Character(40) and Integer).
• Match by Column Order: fields are displayed in their individual table orders. This is useful once
field names and field types have been mirrored/replicated across the tables (using the Match by
Field Name option): it allows an easy visual comparison of whether the fields are ordered
identically across multiple tables.
MATCHING OPTIONS
• Non-matching fields are displayed in a cascading view below the Base Table fields. This
tool will attempt to match field names between comparison tables in the cascade view.
• The Case Sensitive option at the bottom left of the dialog enables matches only between field
names of the same case (e.g. “HoleID” will not match “holeID” or “holeid”).
EDITING TOOLS
At the base of the Table Structure Manager dialog are the editing tools. These require a field selection
to open: this can be a single field, multiple fields within a table or multiple fields across multiple tables.
Field selection is with the left mouse button: either hold this button down to highlight multiple adjacent
fields, or use it in combination with the keyboard CTRL button to select non-adjacent cells. However,
not all editing functions can handle multiple cell selections (e.g. you cannot rename multiple fields in
the same table at once); an appropriate warning message will be returned if the current selection is
invalid for the selected editing tool.
Each editing button will open an appropriate dialog, which can be resized to allow the full target file
name to be visible:

The Add Fields dialog resized to display the full target field names
• Add - adds a new field with the specified name and type to each selected table. The new field will
be added to the end of each table. This option requires a single field selection in each target table;
this can be a populated or blank field, neither of which will be altered.
• Delete - deletes all selected fields.
• Copy – copies the selected fields to other tables. The field, if it does not exist, will be appended to
the end of the destination table.
The warning dialog displayed when copying a field that already exists
• The Edit button accesses the following functionality:

• Rename - a single field from each table can be renamed.
• Change Types - multiple fields can have their types/format altered (e.g. from integer to float).
The selected fields do not need to have the same initial type. Note however that this may result in
data truncation or loss, e.g. changing latitude and longitude fields from float to integer will result in
a massive loss of precision. A warning message to this effect will be displayed prior to finalizing
field type alterations.
The warning dialog displayed when altering field types

• Order - a single field from each table can be assigned a new field position. This will result in a
reordering of all fields below this new position, e.g. moving a field to the 3rd position within its
table, the existing 3rd field will be moved to the 4th position, the 4th to the 5th, etc. If the specified
position does not exist within the table, the field will be placed at the end of the table (e.g. moving
a field in a 10 field table to position 20 will simply place it at the end of the table).
OBJECT COUNT
The Display Object Columns option at the bottom left of the dialog will add an Obj field to each
mappable table. This field is not editable, but allows a count of the total number of objects in a table,
as well as a count of each object type (points, lines and/or regions). To initiate an object count, select
the pull-down arrow in the Type cell of the appropriate Obj field; for a small number of objects the total
and sub-counts will be displayed.
An Object field displayed with its record count
If the table contains a large number of objects, a warning message will be displayed indicating the total
object count and that the sub-count may take some time.
Object count warning message for larger datasets
Click OK to continue with the count. When the warning message disappears, re-access the Type pull-
down arrow to view the count result.
A Text Report of the current multiple table comparison (it requires at least two tables to be open in the
dialog) can be generated using the button at the bottom left of the dialog. This output can be copied
and pasted to a text editor (e.g. Notepad or Word) using CTRL+C and CTRL+V.

GPS CONNECT TOOL
The GPS Connect tool allows the visualization of a live GPS point within a
selected Datamine Discover map window and the collection of point, line or
polygon objects from the live GPS NMEA feed.
IN THIS SECTION
Supported Platforms 147
User Interface 148
Connecting the GPS Receiver 148
Setting up the GPS data capture 156
Selecting a GPS map window 162
Capturing GPS data 162
GPX import and export 167
GPS CONNECT TOOL 147
SUPPORTED PLATFORMS
GPS UNIT
The GPS Connect tool has been tested on several external GPS receivers connected via either USB
cable or Bluetooth, as well as internal (onboard) GPS receivers.
Limited testing of Bluetooth connectivity with smart-phone GPS (Android and iPhone phone operating
systems) has also been conducted.
Note The choice of application (APP) used to capture and broadcast the NMEA stream on the
smart-phone can significantly affect the precision, quality and support of the GPS position.
SUPPORTED GPS FEED

NMEA -0183 (National Marine Electronics Association) Version 4.10
The following NMEA parametric formatters are supported in the GPS feed:
• RMC
• GSA
• GSV
• GGA.
Note Assist GPS (AGPS) - a protocol used by mobile phone carriers is not supported.
NMEA SENTENCE DETAILS

The following parametric formatters are supported for a positional fix, all other formatter types will be
dismissed.
• RMC: Recommended minimum navigation information required for the position fix.
• GSA: Detailed satellite information and signal quality.
• GSV: Satellite number and elevation information.
• GGA: GPS receiver information.
The GPS Connect tool will only support these four sentence types from a Global Navigation Satellite
System (GNSS) receiver compatible with the following talker identifier mnemonics:
• GP: American GPS (Global Positional System).
• GL: Russian GLONASS (Global Navigation Satellite System).
• BD/GB: Chinese BDS (BeiDou Navigation Satellite System), the BeiDou system is not support in
the NMEA-0183 version 4.10 standard. Therefore, limited support is offered for this satellite
system, which depends on the GPS receiver output and sentence format.
Any other national satellite system is currently not supported.

USER INTERFACE
The GPS Connect tool loads a ribbon tab into MapInfo Pro. The tab is divided into four groups -
Configure, Data Capture, recenter and GPX.
• Configure
Tools for setting up the GPS receiver and Data Capture.
• Data Capture
Tools for capturing point, point trace, line and polygon data, stopping and pausing capture.
Waypoint navigation is also contained to assist navigating to a location.
• Recenter
Tools to manually centering the map display and pause the automatic map centering.
• GPX
Tools for importing and exporting data into a GPX format.
Note To toggle the visibility of the GPS tab in Datamine Discover navigate to
PRO>Options>Configuration>Ribbons.
CONNECTING THE GPS RECEIVER
GPS SETUP
GPS>Configure>GPS Setup
[The GPS Setup tool contains all the required options for setting up the GPS receiver, displaying
satellite information and display options. The GPS Setup dialog must remain open when
connected to a GPS receiver and a live GPS feed is active, the GPS Setup dialog can be
minimised when in use to save screen space. If the GPS Setup dialog is closed when the GPS receiver
is connected the live connection will be terminated.
Four tabbed pages are available Location, Satellite, Hardware and Settings.

LOCATION TAB
The Location tab displays the current fix location information with the following options available:
• Longitude/X: Displays the X or Longitude coordinate from the GPS receiver in either decimal
degrees or degrees/minutes/seconds format.
• Latitude/Y: Displays the Y or Latitude coordinate from the GPS receiver in either decimal
degrees or degrees/minutes/seconds format.
• Elevation: Displays the elevation/altitude of the GPS receiver above mean sea level of the geoid
in either meters or feet units.
• Projection: Map projection of the X and Y coordinates displayed for the current GPS receiver
position. The default project displayed is Longitude/Latitude (WGS 84), this is the native
projection of the GNSS. If you want to display a different projection you can change this on the
Settings tab under Projection.
• Speed: Displays speed of the GPS receiver over the ground in either Km/h, Miles/h, Meters/sec,
Feet/sec or Knots.
• Bearing: Displays the current bearing/heading direction of the GPS receiver, the bearing can be
displayed in either true north or magnetic north. If magnetic north is displayed a declination can
be adjusted for your global position.

• Date/Time: Displays date and time for the current GPS receiver position. The date is calculated
from either the computer Locale or Universal Time Coordinated (UTC), the date is displayed as a
short date with several display options for separators. The time is calculated from either the
computer Locale or UTC, the time can be displayed in either 12 or 24 hour format.
• NMEA Sentences: This toggle turns on or off the display of the live GPS NMEA feed.
• Stream Box: This box displays the live GPS NMEA feed in real-time.
• Signal Quality Icon: This icon displays the quality of the GPS receiver fix, three states of fix
quality are displayed:
• No Signal Fix: No satellite fix has been established for the connected GPS receiver or
there is no connection to the GPS receiver.
• 2D Signal Fix: Only a 2D quality fix has been established with the satellite network, this is
usually not good enough for a reliable positional fix.
• 3D Signal Fix: A 3D fix has been established with the satellite network, this means enough
satellites and the geometry in the constellation will provide a reliable positional fix.
• GPS On/Off button: This toggles the connection to the GPS receiver.
• Grey indicates no connection.
• Green indicates a live GPS receiver connection.

SATELLITE TAB
The Satellite tab displays the active satellite constellation and quality information, the following options
are available:
• Satellite Constellation Map: Displays the location and position of the satellites being tracked
from the GPS receiver, numbers are the satellite identifier (PRN). Grey satellites are being
tracked but not used for a positional fix, red satellites are being used for a positional fix.
The satellite PRN number can be used to determine which satellite network/s are being tracked by
the GPS receiver.
• Status: Displays the signal fix quality either No Fix, 2D Fix or 3D Fix, this information is
graphically displayed by the signal quality icon.
• Satellites: Displays the number of satellites use for the positional fix followed by the total number
of satellites in the constellation which may or may not be used for the positional fix e.g. 6 used/12
tracked.
• PDOP: Dilution of precision value (Measure of accuracy of 3D position).
• HDOP: Dilution of precision value (Measure of accuracy in 2D X/Y position).

• VDOP: Dilution of precision value (Measure of accuracy in 1D Z position).

Note A value below 2 is good with a value between 2 and 5 acceptable, any higher indicates a
bad quality position fix with low confidence.
HARDWARE TAB
The Hardware tab has all available options required for establishing a connection to a GPS receiver,
the following options are available:
• Connection Method: Select the method for connecting to a GPS feed - either COM Port, Log
File or Internal GPS. COM Port is the default option. The GPS receiver will have a COM port
allocated to it, the correct one will need to be used for a connection. The Log File option allows a
previously saved text file to be used to playback the NMEA feed. The Internal GPS option
connects to an internal GPS sensor on a device routing through the Windows Location API. No
port configurations are required. Works only on Windows 10 operating systems with an internal
GPS.
Note Using a COM port is a standard method for connecting devices within the Windows
Operating System.
COM PORT CONNECTION METHOD
When the COM Port method is selected the following options are available:

• Protocol: GPS receiver communication protocol used, default is NMEA.

• COM Port: COM Port number the GPS receiver is using for inbound communication.
• COM Port Name: Friendly Windows name for COM port which may assist in determining the
COM the GPS receiver has been assigned.
• Baud Rate: Rate at which information is transferred, generally a GPS receiver is set to 4800
(Refer to GPS receiver specifications for this value.)
• Parity: Method of detecting errors in data transmission, generally a GPS receiver is set to
None (Refer to GPS receiver specifications for this value.)
• Data Bits: Number of data bits in each character, generally a GPS receiver is set to 8, (Refer
to GPS receiver specifications for this value.)
• Stop Bits: Number of bits at the end of a character, generally a GPS receiver is set to 1,
(Refer to GPS receiver specifications for this value.)
• Save Log File: Toggle to save a log file of the GPS feed, the log file can be used to playback
the GPS receiver location. Logs can be saved with either *.GPS or *.TXT extension.
LOG FILE CONNECTION METHOD
When the Log File method is selected the following options are available:

• File Path: Browse to a folder to select a log file for playback, a log file can have either *.GPS
or *.TXT extension.
• Playback Mode: When viewing a log file GPS feed select the method to view either restart or
continue. Restart will play log file from the beginning of the GPS feed each time you start and
stop the GPS connection. Continue will play the log file from the last location the GPS
connection was stopped at.
• Playback Speed (X): Speed at which the log file will be play at, the default speed is 1 times,
this will playback the GPS feed at 1 second intervals. The maximum playback speed is 10
times with the minimum 0.1 times.
INTERNAL GPS CONNECTION METHOD
When the Internal GPS method is selected no options are available or need to be configured. This
method does restrict certain NMEA parameters from being displayed, as a consequence the
Satellite graph does not show any information. This method will also allow you to connect to a WiFi
system to obtain a position, this will not produce a very accurate fix.

SETTINGS TAB
The Settings tab has all available options required for formatting the display on the Location tab and
units used when capturing the GPS location data, the following options are available:
• Projection: Map projection of the X and Y coordinates displayed for the current GPS receiver
position. The default project displayed is Longitude/Latitude (WGS 84), this is the native
projection of the GNSS.
• Projection Format: Select the format of the X and Y coordinates displayed for the current GPS
receiver position, either Decimal Degrees or Degrees/Minutes/Seconds.
Note This option is only applicable for Longitude/Latitude projections.
• Elevation Unit: Select the unit for the current GPS receiver elevation, either Meter or Feet. Meter
is the default unit.
• Waypoint Unit: Select the unit for the waypoint distance to target, either Meter or Feet. The
default unit is Meters (m).
• Speed Unit: Select the speed unit of the GPS receiver, either Km/h, Miles/h, Meters/sec, Feet/
sec or Knots.
• Bearing: Select the bearing type displayed, either true north or magnetic north. If magnetic north
is displayed a declination can be adjusted for your global position.
• Declination: Enabled when magnetic north bearing is selected. Type in a numeric declination
value for your relative global position.
• Time Zone: Select either Locale or UTC. Locale will use your local computer regional settings for
time, UTC or Universal Time Coordinated will use the current time as specified by the GPS
receiver.

• Time Format: Select either 12 or 24 hour time display.

• Date Format: Select the date and date separator format.
SETTING UP THE GPS DATA CAPTURE
CAPTURE SETUP
GPS>Configure>Capture Setup
The Capture Setup tool contains all the required options for setting up the GPS data capture and
default object styles.
Three tabbed pages are available Table, Style and Settings.
TABLE TAB
A data capture table is where the GPS data will be stored. If a data capture table has been selected
when a data capture session is stopped the GPS data capture will automatically save the data into the
specified table. A single table or separate tables can be used for each data capture type. If no data
capture tables have been selected for one or all of the data capture types when a data capture session
is stopped the data will be saved into a new or open table.

• Point: Toggle to select the MapInfo Pro vector table to insert point data. It is optional to save
attribute data for the GPS location. Click the adjacent button to open the Selected Table Fields
dialog, the following attributes can be saved into a table X, Y, Elevation, Date Time, Speed,
Bearing, PDOP, HDOP and VDOP.
Note The Point data capture type on the GPS ribbon will only enable if a data capture table is
selected. This is the only data capture type which has to have a table selected to enter
data into.

• Point Trace: Toggle to select the MapInfo Pro vector table to insert point trace data. It is optional
to save attribute data for the GPS location. Click the adjacent button to open the Selected Table
Fields dialog, the following attributes can be saved into a table X, Y, Elevation, Date Time, Speed,
Bearing, PDOP, HDOP and VDOP.
• Polyline: Toggle to select the MapInfo Pro vector table to insert polyline data.
• Region: Toggle to select the MapInfo Pro vector table to insert region/polygon data.

STYLE TAB
Define the default object styles used for data capture.

• Point: Click the Point button to select the default point and point trace object style.
• Polyline: Click the Polyline button to select the default polyline object style.
• Region: Click the Region button to select the default region object style.
• Symbol: Click the Symbol button to select the default live GPS object style.
• Destination: Click the Destination button to select the default waypoint destination point
object style.
• Track: Click the Track button to select the default waypoint track line object style.

SETTINGS TAB
COM PORT/INTERNAL GPS CONNECTION METHOD
When the COM Port/Internal GPS method is selected on the GPS Setup dialog Hardware tab the
following options are available:
• Capture Type: Select the method of capturing data either Distance or Time. When distance
is selected the user can specify the distance interval when a node or point is captured along
with the unit. When time is selected the user can specify the time interval when a node or
point is captured along with the unit.
• Distance Units: Enabled when distance capture type is selected, either Meter or Feet can be
selected.
• Capture Interval: Type in the numerical unit for the interval for node or point capture. Unit is
either in Meters or Feet.
• Auto-Center Map: Select the tolerance for when the map window will recenter for the live
GPS location.
• Live GPS Location: Toggle the display of the live GPS location position in a map window,
either On or Off can be selected.

LOG FILE CONNECTION METHOD
When the Log File method is selected on the GPS Setup dialog Hardware tab the following
options are available:
• Distance Units: Select distance units either Meter or Feet can be selected.
Note When capturing data in Log File mode time cannot be used.
• Auto-Center Map: Select the tolerance for when the map window will recenter for the live
GPS location.
• Live GPS Location: Toggle the display of the live GPS location position in a map window,
either On or Off can be selected.

SELECTING A GPS MAP WINDOW
DISPLAY WINDOW
GPS>Configure>Display Window
The Display Window tool opens the Select Map Window dialog which displays all thee open map
windows in Datamine Discover. This map window will be used for the display of the live GPS
symbol.
Note A map window can only be selected when the GPS receiver is not connected and no active
GPS feed.
CAPTURING GPS DATA

GPS data can only be captured as a single data type in one capture session, if another data type needs
to be captured a new data capture session will need to be started. To begin capturing data either a
COM Port or Log File connection must be established and active, an easy way is to make sure there
is a live GPS point in the selected map window.
POINT TRACE
GPS>Data Capture>Point Trace
The Point Trace option will create a series of point objects at the specified time or distance
intervals from the Capture Setup Settings tab. To begin a point trace capture session click the
Point Trace button. Points will continue to be captured until you click the Stop button. If you need
to temporarily stop the capture session click the Pause button, to continue the capture session click
the Resume button. If you have specified a table for data capture, the objects will be saved
automatically into that table. If no table has been specified you will be prompted to save into an open
or new table.

POLYLINE
GPS>Data Capture>Polyline
The Polyline option will create a polyline object with nodes at the specified time or distance
intervals from the Capture Setup Settings tab. To begin a polyline capture session click the
Polyline button. Nodes will continue to be captured until you click the Stop button. If you need to
temporarily stop the capture session click the Pause button, to continue the capture session click the
Resume button. If you have specified a table for data capture, the objects will be saved automatically
into that table. If no table has been specified you will be prompted to save into an open or new table.
REGION
GPS>Data Capture>Region
The Region option will create a region object with nodes at the specified time or distance
intervals from the Capture Setup Settings tab. To begin a region capture session click the Region
button. Nodes will continue to be captured until you click the Stop button. If you need to
temporarily stop the capture session click the Pause button, to continue the capture session click the
Resume button. If you have specified a table for data capture, the objects will be saved automatically
into that table. If no table has been specified you will be prompted to save into an open or new table.
POINT
GPS>Data Capture>Point
The Point option will create a point object at the current GPS receiver location. To begin a point
capture session click the Point button. To capture more Points click the Point button when
required, to end the capture session of points click the Stop button. It is mandatory to specify a
table for data capture, the objects will be saved automatically into that table.
Note The Point data capture type on the GPS ribbon will only enable if a data capture table is
selected.
PAUSE
GPS>Data Capture>Pause
The Pause button is used to temporarily stop the data capture, it can be useful when you need
to deviate off course and do not wanted data to be captured. The pause button is enabled for
capturing Point Trace, Polyline and Region data types.
RESUME
GPS>Data Capture>Resume
The Resume button is used to resume a paused data capture session. The resume button is
enabled for capturing Point Trace, Polyline and Region data types.
STOP
GPS>Data Capture>Stop
The Stop button is used to end a data capture session, when clicked the data will be
automatically saved into the specified table or a prompt will be displayed to save the data into a
new or open table.

WAYPOINT NAVIGATION
GPS>Data Capture>Waypoint
The Waypoint tool displays a dashboard which makes navigating to a destination easy.
DEFINE WAYPOINT
The Waypoint Navigation tool has the following options.
• Distance
Distance remaining from current GPS location to the selected target coordinate.
• Ave. Speed
Average speed of travel unit can be adjusted under GPS Setup>Settings>Speed Unit.
• Arrive Time
Estimated time of arriving at selected target coordinate at current average speed.
• Remaining Time
Estimate time remaining to arrive at selected target coordinate.
• X
X/Easting/Longitude coordinate of target.
• Y
Y/Northing/Latitude coordinate of target.
• Buffer
User defined buffer around selected target coordinate. Used to indicate when you are
approaching the target. Units can be adjusted under GPS Setup>Settings>Waypoint Unit.
• Select Waypoint
Select the target coordinates by clicking then selecting the location in a map window.
Coordinates are reported in the map window projection system.
Note Coordinates can be manually typed in rather than selected from a map window. The target
location will update when you start the waypoint navigation session.
• Start Waypoint Navigation
Click to start the waypoint navigation, you must have an active GPS session to start a
waypoint navigation.

• Stop Waypoint Navigation

Click to stop the waypoint navigation session.
• Dialog Toggle
Expand or contract the dialog to hide or reveal the target coordinates.
NAVIGATE TO WAYPOINT
1. Select a waypoint loctaion and set a buffer.
2. Click the Start button, Distance, Ave.Speed, Arrive Time and Remaining Time will be reported.
3. Within the map window you will observe visual prompts to navigate to the target.
• Navigation Arrow
The arrow shows the current direction of movement.
• Line to Target
Tangent from current location to target, if you align the navigation arrow and line you are
headed on a direct path to the target. Line style can be adjusted under Capture
Setup>Style>Waypoint Track.
• Buffer
Buffer set by user, when the current location is within the buffer zone the dialog turns green to
indicate you have entered the target buffer. If you wish the target to be the buffer set the
distance to 0.
• Target
Selected target waypoint. Target style can be adjusted under Capture Setup>Style>Waypoint
Destination.

4. When you have reached the buffer you are prompted by the change in colour of the dialog to
green.
5. To set another waypoint navigation session stop the current session and select a new target.
RECENTER
GPS>Recenter>Manual
The Recenter button is used to manually center the live GPS position on the selected map
window.
GPS>Recenter>Automatic On
The Automatic Recenter On button is used to turn on the auto-recenter of the live GPS position
on the selected map window.
GPS>Recenter>Automatic Off
The Automatic Recenter Off button is used to turn off the auto-recenter of the live GPS position
on the selected map window. Turning off the centering can be useful when wanting to navigate
to another section of the map window without bing auto-recentered.

GPX IMPORT AND EXPORT

TO IMPORT A GPX FILE
1. To import a GPX file select the file to import and output folder.
2. If the GPX file has multiple data types such as waypoint, route and track several files will be
created, hence the need for the various file suffixes.
3. If you are importing tracks or routes select if you want to import either segments or multiple lines.
If you want to import the points along the tracks or routes select these options.
Note Selecting the options to import route or track points will create files with potentially thousands
of points.
4. Click OK to import the GPX file.
EXPORTING A GPX FILE
1. To create a GPX file select the file to export and output folder.
Note If the MapInfo Pro TAB file has multiple data types such as waypoint, route and track only the
point data will be exported.
2. Select fields to export for each point, it is not mandatory to select all the fields to export.
3. Click OK to create a GPX file.

DATA PROCESSING
AND STATISTICS
IN THIS SECTION
Pre-processing and cleaning data 169
Classifying data 169
Normalising or levelling data 175
Computing summary statistics 176
Computing a correlation matrix 178
DATA PROCESSING AND STATISTICS 169
PRE-PROCESSING AND CLEANING DATA

Geochemical data is often received in a format that requires some manual manipulation before the
data can be used in geochemical analysis. Use the Data Handling tool to pre-process and clean the
input data. The Data Handling tool can be opened from various tools on the ANALYSIS tab and
selected other tools. The processing options available include:
NEGATIVE VALUES
• Set negative values to Null, which is statistically ignored, or any user-specified value. For
example, if –999 is used to identify “below detection limit,” you can reset these values to zero or a
discrete value such as 5 ppb.
• Multiply negative values by a constant—for example, multiply by –0.5 to convert each negative
value to half the detection limit.
NON-NUMERIC VALUES
• Set non-numeric values to Null or any user-specified value.
ZERO VALUES
• Set zero values to Null or any user-specified value.
REPLACEMENT VALUES
• To apply different replacement values for element data in a table or for multiple replacements
within the same element field, create a custom template. The template contains the element
name, the original assay value, and the replacement assay value.
TO PRE-PROCESS A GEOCHEMICAL DATA TABLE:
1. Open a geochemistry table in a map window.
2. Select a tool from the ANALYSIS>Statistics group, for example Data Statistics.
3. Select the geochemistry table.
4. Click the Data Handling Options button. The Data Handling Options dialog boxis displayed.
5. Under Input, select the options you want to apply to negative, non-numeric, zero, and other data
values.
6. Under Output, select the options you want to apply to the output table.
7. Click OK and return to the previous dialog box and continue processing the modified table.
CLASSIFYING DATA
Data classification is used to segregate a dataset into groups defined by a range or group of values.
Point symbols can be modulated by colour, size and/or symbol type using one or more data fields.
• Classifying data by colour, size, and symbol
• Multi-field classification
• Trivariate point classification
CLASSIFYING DATA BY COLOUR, SIZE, AND SYMBOL

Related tools Data Classification

Geochemical data is often collated from different sources and to highlight this graphically a
different symbol type can be assigned to each sub-grouping of the dataset. Assay values can
then be classified into value range groups via various statistical methods and displayed as the
colour or size of the symbol.
Point classifications can be displayed as a thematic map overlay or the new point symbols can be
saved to the existing table or new table.
TO APPLY A CLASSIFICATION SCHEME:
2. Select ANALYSIS>Statistics>Data Classification. The Data Classification dialog box is
displayed.
3. In the Table box, select the geochemistry table.

4. In the Column box, select the field you want to classify.
5. To ignore or replace negative, zero or non-numeric values in the data field, under Null Handling,
select Display Null Values and then click the Options button. For more information, see Pre-
processing and cleaning data.
6. Select a classification. You can classify data by colour, size and symbol concurrently.
Colour

• To classify by colour, on the colour tab, select the Colour check box, and then select a
method for distributing the data values for each colour division in the Colour method box. To
change the colour scheme, in the Colour table box, select a colour lookup table.
Size
• To classify by symbol size, on the size tab, select the Size check box, and then select a
method for distributing the data values for each size division in the Size method box. To
change the size range, edit the values in the Size min, Size max, and Size step boxes.
Symbol
• To classify by symbol type, on the symbol tab, select the Symbol check box, and then select a
method for distributing the data values for each symbol division in the Symbol method box.
The classification divisions and number of values in each are displayed in the classification table.
For many datasets, a linear range classification will not be suitable to show the data range
variation. There are a number of statistical methods to classify data, such as log and exponential
distributions, and percentile groups.
7. To edit the colour, size, or symbol assigned to a division, in the classification table, click the
Colour, Size, or Symbol cell and type or select another value.
8. To edit a division, click in a Description, >= or < cell and type a new value.
9. To add or remove divisions in the classification method, use the Add, Remove or
Clear All division buttons. Note that divisions cannot be changed for unique value
groups, such as for non-numeric data, except for a custom classification method.
10. Save a classification or load a saved classification using the Save and Load buttons. This
saves all colour, size and symbol classifications.
Note Values outside the lowest and highest classification groups will be ignored. However, the
tool applies continuous internal data ranges. Any gaps from one classification group to the
next will be ignored.
11. Choose output options. Under Output Table:
• Select New to create a new table containing the classification applied. Click the Filter button
to select which fields in the input table will be added to the output table and to change the
name of the new table.
• Select Source to apply the classification in-place to the input table.
• Select Thematic map to display the classification as a thematic map. Any null or unclassified
points will be displayed with the null Symbol. Points styles can be further modified with the
MAP>Modify Thematic Map option or by double-clicking on the Theme Legend window.
12. Under Null Handling, click the Symbol box to define the default null symbol to all null value data.
Only selected classification properties (colour, size, symbol) are applied to null value data.
13. When you have completed defining the classifications (on the colour, size, and symbol tabs) for
the selected data field, click Apply.

TO SAVE OR RESTORE A CLASSIFIED TABLE:

Select DISCOVER>File>Save Table to save the classification or DISCOVER>File>Revert Table to
restore the table to its last saved state. To save an RGB classification thematic map, you must save
the workspace.
Note The classified symbol may be hidden by a coincident point symbol. Use the QUERY>Map
Object>Select by Style tool to query the map table for all the samples that fall within a
particular point classification for a combination of colour, size, symbol style properties.
See also
Multi-field classification
Trivariate point classification
Selecting objects by graphical style
MULTI-FIELD CLASSIFICATION
Related tools Data Classification
To modulate the point styles by two or three different fields, apply the classifications consecutively,
saving the classified table between each classification. For example, to modulate the point colour by
Cu, and the point size by Pb:
1. Select ANALYSIS>Statistics>Data Classification.
2. Select the table, and then select the Cu field.
3. On the colour tab, select the Colour check box, and then select the classification options.
4. Under Output Table, select Source, and then click Apply.
5. Select DISCOVER>File>Save Table.
6. Select ANALYSIS>Statistics>Data Classification.
7. Select the table, and then in the Column box, select the Pb field
8. On the size tab, select the Size check box, and then select the classification options.
9. Under Output Table, select Source, and then click Apply.
10. Select DISCOVER>File>Save Table.
See also
Multi-field classification
Trivariate point classification
TRIVARIATE POINT CLASSIFICATION

Related tools Trivariate Classification
Trivariate Point classification of geochemical data is used to identify homogeneous groups of
data within a sample population which can be distinguished from other groups. Samples that
pass a combination of the thresholds for three selected elements are displayed using the same
symbol style, colour and size to enable them to be easily viewed in the map window. Each element is
assigned an RGB channel (red-green-blue) and a threshold value; during processing each sample is
compared with the threshold values set for its channel.
Trivariate classification can be used to highlight points that are above a threshold in individual RGB
channels, as well as above combinations of thresholds on multiple RGB channels.

The output classifications can be displayed as a thematic map overlay or the new point symbols can
be saved to the existing table or new table. Classification legends can be displayed as a thematic
legend or as a MapInfo Pro table which can be edited and scaled. Each sample is assigned a point
classification code which is saved to a new column in the original or new table.
The classification code is a three-digit binary number (stored as a character string) that indicates if the
value passes the threshold on each channel. For example, the code 101 indicates that the threholds
on the R and B channels have been passed (1) but has failed (0) on the G channel.
TO APPLY A TRIVARIATE CLASSIFICATION SCHEME:
2. Select ANALYSIS>Statistics>Trivariate Classification.
3. In the Trivariate Point Classification dialog box, under Table, in the Select table to classify
box, click the geochemistry table.
4. To ignore or replace negative, zero or non-numeric values in the input fields, click the Data
Handling Options button. For more information, see Pre-processing and cleaning data.
5. Under Channel selection, in the Red box, click the field you want to assign to the red channel.
Make field selections in the Green and Blue boxes.
6. Click a threshold type:
• Value: Type a threshold value for each channel in the adjacent boxes. The data range is
displayed to the right of the box.
• Percent: Type or select a percentage threshold for each channel in the adjacent boxes. The
corresponding threshold value for each channel is displayed to the right of the box.
• Percentile: Type or select a percentile threshold for each channel in the adjacent boxes. The
7. For each channel, type or select a threshold value in the corresponding box. Or click the Use
single threshold check box to use the same threshold (defined for the red channel) on all three
channels.
8. Select output options:
• Save classification code to field: The classification code field name. Click the box to select a
different, existing character field, or type a new field name. The default field name is
_ClassField.
• Set point styles: Click to assign point styles to each of the eight RGB classification codes. For
more information, see Setting point styles.
• Display custom legend: Select the check box to display the classification as a thematic
legend. For more inforamtion, see Displaying a point style legend.
• Display MapInfo legend: Select the check box to display the classification as a MapInfo Pro
table. For more inforamtion, see Displaying a point style legend.
• Display/classify points that incorporate null values: Select the check box to classify and
display all points in the input table. Clear the check box to exclude those with null values.
9. Select the type of output:
• Thematic map: Display each sample point according to their assay values relative to the
specified threshold level as a thematic map. The sample point style, colour and size are as
defined by the Set Point Styles option.

After the thematic map is created, points styles can be modified through the MAP>Modify
Thematic Map option or by double-clicking on the Theme Legend Window. To save an RGB
classification thematic map, the workspace must be saved.
• Change source: Permanently colour each sample point in the base geochemistry table
according to their assay values relative to the specified threshold level. The sample point
style, colour and size are as defined by the Set Point Styles option.
• Create new table: Create a new table with each sample point coloured according to their
assay values relative to the specified threshold level. Click the New Table Options button
and select fields from the input geochemistry table to add to the new classification table.
By default, the new table is named by adding the “_Classified” extension to the input table
name. The new table is saved to the same directory as the base geochemistry table. The new
classification table is automatically displayed in a new map window.
Note It is not possible to control the order in which multiple sample points at the same location are
displayed. Therefore it may appear that a sample which is coloured is masked by overlying
sample points. Use the QUERY>Map Object>Select by Group tool or an SQL query on the
“_Classfield” column to query the table for all the samples that fall within a particular RGB
Classification.
SETTING POINT STYLES

For each of the possible eight classification codes, a separate point style can be set. Each sample will
be coloured in the map window according to these classification point styles. To view or modify the
default point styles click the Set Point Styles button. The Set Point Styles dialog box contains a symbol
button for each classification code.
Assigns a 12 pt yellow solid-filled circle to the 110 classification code.
To change a symbol style, click the symbol button and choose a new symbol style, colour or size for
the selected code. The Null symbol shape will be applied to all points assigned a null value by the
Data Handling Options tool. To use the same symbol for all RGB threshold combinations, check the
Use single symbol style box, and select the symbol style to use. To automatically size the symbols
across the classification codes, select the Graduate symbol size from check box and type a size for
the smallest symbol.
DISPLAYING A POINT STYLE LEGEND

Two legend options are available for identifying what each symbol style represents.
CUSTOM LEGEND
To create a legend table that can be edited and scaled as a permanent MapInfo Pro table, select the
Display custom legend check box. The custom legend displays the legend items as text or point
objects, which can be modified using the standard MapInfo Pro map object style options. The legend
window is created in a non-earth centimetre projection and can be placed in a layout and scaled using
the frame tool.
The first five characters of the red, green and blue channel field names will be displayed in place of the
channel names. The threshold value and the threshold value as a percentage of the maximum value
is also displayed in the legend table.

MAPINFO PRO LEGEND

Check the Display MapInfo legend box to create a MapInfo Pro legend similar to those created in the
MapInfo Pro Create Legend or Create Thematic Map menu options. MapInfo Pro legends cannot be
scaled and must be saved as part of a workspace. To modify a MapInfo Pro legend, double-click in the
legend window and use the Styles and Legend buttons in the Modify Thematic Map dialog.
NULL VALUES
If the Display/classify points that incorporate null values option is checked, then a sample with a
null or 0 value (one or more elements) is deemed to be below the threshold and will be displayed using
the corresponding point symbol. If samples that contain only valid data values for all of the selected
elements are to be included in the final point classification display, then clear this option.
To ignore or replace negative, zero or non-numeric values in the data table click the Data Handling
Options button. See Pre-processing and cleaning data in for more information on using this tool.
NORMALISING OR LEVELLING DATA

Related tools Data Normalisation
Many statistical processes require data to be normally distributed. Because geochemical data
is often log-normally distributed or positively skewed, it must first be transformed or “levelled” so
the data conforms to a normal distribution. The Datamine Discover levelling tool provides a
number of standard levelling operations that can be applied in normalising the data.
Often a dataset contains mixed sample populations such as soil samples taken over different rock or
regolith lithologies, stream sediment samples taken from different mesh size fractions or samples
analysed by different analytical techniques. In these cases data should be levelled according to each
distinct value for a group.
Data levelling can be applied to either an entire dataset table or a subset (Query).
TO LEVEL (NORMALISE) A DATA SET:
2. Select ANALYSIS>Statistics>Data Normalisation.
3. In the Data Normalisation dialog box, in the Select table to classify box, click the
geochemistry table.
4. To ignore or replace negative, zero or non-numeric values in the input fields, click the Data
Handling Options button. For more information, see Pre-processing and cleaning data.
5. In the Fields to level box, select the assay fields to level. To select multiple fields, click the first
field and drag to select consecutive fields, or hold the CTRL key to select non-consecutive fields.
6. In the Fields to level by box, select the fields that contain data such as sample geology or regolith
type, sample type or analytical method which will be used in the levelling process to calculate
values for each unique attribute entry in these fields. As each field is selected the number of
distinct values in the column is automatically displayed. To select multiple fields, click the first field
and drag to select consecutive fields, or hold the CTRL key to select non-consecutive fields.
7. In the Levelling operations box, select one or more operations. For more information, see Data
Normalisation dialog box. To select multiple operations, click the first and drag to select
consecutive operations, or hold the CTRL key to select non-consecutive operations.
8. To filter the results columns by a minimum value, select the Include summary columns check box
and type a value in the Threshold box. The raw assay values will also be output.

9. To change the output table name and folder, in the Output table box, edit the default name or
type a folder and file name.
The levelled data table is created and opened into a new browser window.
Note Levelled data values are calculated for each element and each selected category. Use the
QUERY>Map Object>Select by Style tool to check unique field values and remove any
duplicate or misspelled entries and populate blank entries prior to running the Data
Normalisation tool.
Note To see the source data fields after any data handling options have been applied, in addition to
the new levelled fields, select the Include working columns in output table option in Data
Handling Options. These fields are the data values used to calculate the levelling operations.
If all negative values in a field are converted to zero, they are displayed as zero. Null values
will also be displayed as zero, but will be handled correctly internally (separately to true zeros).
COMPUTING SUMMARY STATISTICS

Related tools Data Statistics
The Data Statistics tool reports a number of common statistical measurements for a
geochemical dataset. If a dataset contains mixed sample populations such as soil samples
taken over different rock or regolith lithologies, stream sediment samples taken from different
mesh size fractions or samples analysed by different analytical techniques then statistics can be
calculated for each distinct value in a group.
As geochemical data generally has a lognormal or positively skewed distribution a number of additional
mean calculations aside from the arithmetic mean have been included such as geometric and
harmonic.
Summary Statistics Dialog

Data Statistics can be applied to either an entire dataset table or a subset (Query or Selection).
Select ANALYSIS>Statistics>Data Statistics to display the Data Statistics dialog box. Select
the input from the Select Table pull-down list. Select the assay fields to be used in the statistics
calculation from the Select Fields window. Click on an assay field and drag holding the left mouse
button to select consecutive fields. Use the CTRL key to select non-consecutive assay fields.
Statistics can also be calculated based on attribute entries from another field in the geochemical table
such as geology. The results table will contain an entry for each unique geological unit along with
statistics calculated from the samples that are located within each unit. Select the field to use from the
Select Group Field pull-down list.
To ignore or replace negative, zero or non-numeric values in the data table click the Data Handling
Options button. See Pre-processing and cleaning data for more information.
STATISTICAL OPERATIONS
Select one or more of the following statistical operations to calculate for the geochemical data:
• Count – Total number of samples in dataset
• Count Valid – Number of samples used in the statistical calculation
• Count Invalid – Number of samples not used in the statistical calculation. Any samples set to null
in Data Handling Options are invalid samples.
• Min - Minimum assay value
• Max - Maximum assay value
• Sum - Sum of assay values
• Mean - Sum of assay values divided by number of samples
• Median - Middle assay value or 50th percentile of ordered assay values. Median of even number
of samples calculated using mean of two middle assay values.
• Range - Maximum assay value minus minimum assay value
• Mode - Assay value that occurs most frequently
• RMS (Root Mean Square) - Square root of the mean of the squares of each assay value.
• Sum of Squares - Sum of the square of each assay value
• Geometric Mean - Used for positively skewed distributions. Nth root of the product of the assay
values. Negative or zero values in the dataset will return a value of “NA”.
• Harmonic Mean - Sum of the reciprocals of each assay value divided by the number of samples.
Negative or zero values in the dataset will return a value of “NA”
• Trimmed Mean - Remove a percentage of the largest and smallest assay values and re-calculate
arithmetic mean on trimmed dataset.
• Median Dev. Mean – Median deviation from the Mean
• Median Dev. Median – Median deviation from the Median
• Variance - Measure of the ‘spread’ within a dataset. Average squared deviation of set of assay
values from their mean.
• Standard Deviation - Measure of the ‘spread’ within a dataset. Square root of the variance.
• Skewness - Estimate of asymmetry of a distribution compared with a normal distribution.

• Kurtosis - Degree of “peakness” or “flatness” of a distribution compared with a normal

distribution.
• InterQuartile Range - Measure of the “spread” within a dataset. Difference between the 75th (3rd)
and 25th (1st) quartiles—that is, Percentile(75) minus the Percentile(25).
• Percentile - Division of a dataset into one hundred groups containing equal numbers of samples.
Each percentile represents the proportion of samples that lie below this value; e.g. 60% of data
lies below the 60th percentile, 95% of data lies below the 95th percentile, etc.
• Count = 0 - Number of samples with zero assay value
• Count < 0 - Number of samples with assay values less than zero
• Count of Minimum - Number of samples with minimum assay value
• Percent of Minimum - Percentage of samples with minimum assay value
• Percent = Null – Percentage of invalid samples
The default Output Table is named using the original geochemical base table with a “_Stats” extension
and saved to the same directory. Enter an alternative name and location if desired. Click OK. The
statistics data table is created and opened into a new browser window.
COMPUTING A CORRELATION MATRIX

Related tools Correlation Matrix
The correlation matrix is a variance–covariance matrix which is standardized to emphasize the
relative variation between two elements. Raw data is standardized by calculating the correlation
coefficient so all elements have a variance of one and a mean of zero. The correlation coefficient
is a unit-less number and is the ratio of the co-variance of two elements to the product of their standard
deviations.
Correlation coefficient values range from +1 to -1. A correlation coefficient of +1 indicates a direct linear
relationship between two elements whereas a correlation coefficient of -1 indicates an inverse
relationship between two elements. Correlation coefficients may fall anywhere between these two end
values with a correlation of zero indicating no linear relationship existing between the two elements.
For values in the correlation matrix that cannot be computed, due to one of the standard deviations
equalling zero, then a string ‘NA’ will be written in the matrix.

COORDINATES AND
PROJECTIONS
IN THIS SECTION
Calculating distances between points in separate tables 180
Displaying cursor coordinates in a map window 181
Updating coordinates 181
Coordinate transformations 182
Projection Editor 188
Reprojecting coordinates 195
Generating traverse lines and peg coordinates 198
COORDINATES AND PROJECTIONS 180
CALCULATING DISTANCES BETWEEN POINTS IN SEPARATE TABLES

Related tools Distance Calculator
The Distance Calculator can be used to measure the distance and angle between points in two
separate MapInfo Pro tables. For example, determine an error distance and bearing between
control points in Local and UTM projection when transforming point coordinates.
To effectively utilize this tool, the two tables must share a common field to create the link or join
between them; e.g. Control point number. The join must be a one-to-one relationship. One point in the
first table can only be linked to one point in the second table.
Note This tool has been primarily designed to work with point datasets. Region or line objects may
be used, however the distance and angle will be calculated from the object centroid which may
not be satisfactory.
Distance Calculator dialog
SELECT TABLES FOR DISTANCE CALCULATION

Select the two tables to calculate the distance and angle between using the pull-down lists. Make sure
that the correct Key Fields in each table specifying the join are selected.
The distance and bearing are calculated by measuring the object(s) in Table 1 to the object(s) in Table
2 where the objects contain the same attribute in the Key Field. The bearing is determined by using
grid north as the datum. The results for the calculation are stored in a new table containing the join key
and the Distance and Angle.
OUTPUT OPTIONS
By default, the output table is saved using the Table 1 name with a “Distances” extension. To change
the saved table name or location use the Save button.
When selecting the Output distance units, both metric and imperial units can be used independent
to the coordinate system convention e.g. distances between points in a UTM projection can be
displayed in miles (mi), yards (yd) or metres (m).
Note Calculations for bearing and distance can be perform between most standard MapInfo Pro
coordinate systems including geographical, UTM and local coordinate systems.

DISPLAYING CURSOR COORDINATES IN A MAP WINDOW

See Displaying map coordinates, distances and bearings.
UPDATING COORDINATES
Related tools Update Coordinates
Add or update map object coordinates into data columns in a browser or update positions of
existing points in a map window using coordinates from X and Y data columns in a browser.
Use Update Coordinates to place the coordinate positions of map objects (for example, sample points
or collar locations) into data columns in the same MapInfo Pro table. Alternatively, if new survey data
has become available, update the position of existing map objects with new coordinates from X and Y
data columns in the browser.
The Update Coordinates dialog
To update the coordinates held in the table with the current object positions, choose Map Object-
>Table Column. Coordinates may be added to existing numeric columns or to a new column. To add
new columns to store coordinates choose New Column from the X Column and Y Column pull-down
list. New columns cannot be created if the column name contains spaces or special characters.
To update map object locations in the map window with new coordinates stored in the X and Y data
columns, choose Table Column–>Map Object and nominate the X and Y columns containing the
coordinates.
For either update mode, select the projection in which the coordinates are to be updated. Auto
(selected table) will calculate coordinate positions for the map objects using the native projection of a
table (the projection in which the original map objects were created). Select User defined to calculate
coordinates in any other existing projection in the MapInfo Pro or Favourite Projections list.
The User defined projection option enables lat-long coordinates to be calculated for a table currently
containing points in AMG coordinate values. Alternatively, if new survey data is received in a different
projection to the existing data, then points can be moved to new positions using this projection data.

When processing a large table, coordinates may be updated more quickly if the table being processed
is not displayed as a browser window.
Note The Update Coordinates tool is best suited to point data but coordinates for polyline and
polygon map objects can be calculated using the centroid X and Y coordinates. Alternatively
you can extract nodes and create points from polyline and polygon objects using the
Discover>Object Editing>Extract Nodes tool (see Extracting nodes).
COORDINATE TRANSFORMATIONS
Related tools Custom Transform
Convert coordinates from one coordinate system to another based on either user-specified
parameters (such as a known shift, rotation and scaling) or based on a set of control points
between known and unknown (or non-earth) projections.
The Transformation Table window lists all of the tables that are currently open in MapInfo Pro to use
as the transformation table. Only native MapInfo Pro or TAB files connected to an editable source table
can be transformed. TAB files connected to Excel or Text files are Read-Only and will not be displayed
in the Transform Table list. Save these tables to native MapInfo Pro tables using the File>Save Copy
As tool and use the saved table for the transformation.
Note Raster images cannot be transformed using the Transform Coordinates tool. For image
reprojection, use the Reproject Image tool.
• Performing a one-time transformation
• Creating a custom affine projection
Datamine Discover provides two Transformation Targets:
• E, N data columns - Transform coordinates stored in XY columns according to entered
transformation parameters into new data columns in the table .
• Map Objects - Transform map objects (including complex regions and polylines) from one
coordinate system to another according to entered transformation parameters.
Transformed map objects are saved to an output table with a “_trans” suffix.

PERFORMING A ONE-TIME TRANSFORMATION

In addition simple plane (bearing and offset) transformations, the Custom Transform tool supports one-
time transformations (or rectifications) on non-earth coordinates, based on a set of control points. The
methods support are, in order of increasing complexity; projective, conformal, affine, 2nd order
polynomial, 2nd order conformal polynomial, and 3rd order polynomial. The input map table to be
transformed must be a in a non-earth projection.
Note The control point table for a one-off affine data transformation must contain four columns,
which read in order from left to right as Nonearth_Easting, Nonearth_Northing, UTM_Easting,
UTM_Northing . The naming convention of the column headings is not important, but the order
of the columns is critical.
Note The control point table for a once-off data transformation can be used to transform tables from
local to UTM coordinates, but cannot be used to create a custom affine coordinate projection
line. See Creating a custom affine projection for further information.
1. Open the table to transform into MapInfo Pro; this should be located in a local non-earth grid
projection e.g. Non-earth (metres).
2. Select DISCOVER>Projection>Custom Transform.
3. From the Custom Transform dialog box, select the table to transform from the Transformation
Table list. Choose <Affine> from the Transformation Type pull-down list.
Note You can select any transformation method except Plane.
4. Select the Transformation Target from E, N data columns or Map Objects.
5. Click on the Control Point Table button and browse to the control point table. The selected
control point table will be displayed on the Control Point Button. This table does not need to be
mappable.
6. Check the Show Transform Parameters box to run the transformation. The transformation
parameter, residuals and standard deviation information is saved to a text file named
MAPTRAN.LOG in the Discover temporary directory (refer to Configuring Datamine Discover).
Check the Calculate Parameters only box to display the calculated Transformation
Coefficients only without actually transforming the data.

Example maptran.txt report
7. Click OK to commence the data transformation. Select the UTM projection from the Choose
Projection dialog box.
Once the data has been transformed a new table will be created with the same name as the original
transformation table with a suffix “_trans”. This table is automatically opened in MapInfo Pro displayed
in map or browser window.
Note The maptran.log Total RMS is the total Euclidean distance between the X and Y residual
components of the transformation. It does not directly relate to the individual control point's
RMSs, and a large value can still be a relatively accurate transformation result depending on
the scale and area of application. The Standard deviation in X and Y indicate a better absolute
measure of the error in the transformation.
Note The transformed data table and the original data table cannot be displayed in the same map
window. The original table is still located in the local non-earth coordinate system.
PLANE TRANSFORMATION
Note The plane tranformation option cannot be used to convert to or from Latitude/Longitude
coordinates. For data in a lat-long projection add two new columns to the table and populate
with coordinates in a system such as UTM or AMG using the Update Coordinates tool.
1. Open the table to transform into MapInfo Pro; this should be located in a local non-earth grid
projection e.g. Non-earth (metres).
3. From the Custom Transform dialog box, select the table to transform from the
Transformation Table list.
4. Select <Plane> from the Transformation Type pull-down list.
5. Select the transform projection from the Choose Projection dialog box and click OK. The
Transform Coordinates dialog box is displayed:

Transform Coordinates using a Plane conversion
6. Select Add New Transform from the Choose a Grid Transform pull-down list. Alternatively, load
an existing transformation from the pull-down list. When existing transformation parameters are
loaded the dialog will be populated automatically.
7. For a new transformation select how the transformation is to be defined. Transformations can be
defined by:
Origin, Bearing – Enter the X and Y transformation origin in both original and new coordinate
systems. Enter the Bearing Offset from the Current (existing base cooridnate system) to the New
grid (the transformed coordiante system) in the Current Grid -> New Grid box. Note that the
Bearing offset is positive clockwise from North. You can also enter a negative number to indicate
anticlockwise rotation offset..
Two sets of coords – When specifying the transformation as the coordinates of two points in
each system enter the Current or original X and Y coordinates for both points overlain by the
corresponding New X and Y coordinates for each point.
8. If the E, N data columns Transformation Target was selected in the opening dialog, select the
X and Y data columns containing the original coordinates from the Transform Columns pull-
down lists. Set the destination X and Y into Columns to store the transformed coordinates using
the pull-down lists.
Note The new X and Y columns must already be available for selection in the transformation
table. To add new data columns to the table to store the transformation values use the
TABLE>Maintenance>Table>Modify Structure tool prior to running the Custom
Transform tool.
TRANSFORM COORDS NOW
In addition to transforming coordinates from table columns or map objects, single sets of coordinates
can be entered for immediate transformation. Check the Transform coords now box. Enter the
current X and Y coordinate to transform into the appropriate windows. Click the Calculate button to
run the transform calculation. The new coordinates are displayed in the dialog box.
PLANE TRANSFORMATION SCALE FACTOR
When a plane transformation is defined by Two sets of coords (coordinate pair and a bearing offset)
then a scale factor must be entered. The scale factor is used to correct for the difference between earth
curvature and the map projection used. By default the Scale Factor is set to 1.00.
If the plane transformation is defined by two pairs of coordinates, the scale factor is implicit (as is the
bearing offset) and should not be entered.

A scale factor can be used to convert between coordinate systems in different units. For example,
converting imperial coordinates in feet to a metric coordinates system enter a scale factor of 0.3048.
SAVE PLANE TRANSFORMATION
To save a plane transformation click on the Add button once all the transformation parameters have
been entered and supply a transformation name to identify this transformation in the list.
When a previously stored transformation is selected from the list in the top left of the Transform
Coordinates dialog, the transformation parameters are applied automatically but cannot be altered.
Plane transformations are saved to a table called LGTRANS (located in the Discover configuration
folder) and should be maintained from within this function in Datamine Discover. To delete a
transformation, open the LGTRANS table into a browser window and delete the corresponding browser
record. Transformations can also be modified from the LGTRANS browser window.
Note Saved transformation parameters can also be used with the DISCOVER>Output>Map Grid
and Scaled Output tools to display a local (non-earth) grid and a map (projected real-world)
grid in the same map window.
AFFINE TRANSFORMATION
An affine transformation is used to display MapInfo Pro tables located in a local non-earth grid
projection with data in a real-world projection, such as UTM or lat-long.
The Custom Transform tool enables data to be transformed as a one-time process using an affine
transformation. Alternatively a custom affine coordinate system can be created and added to the
MapInfo Pro projection file as a permanent custom affine projection.
The custom affine projection can be selected for use with tables or as the map window projection just
like any other existing projection. The custom affine projection can also be used to map point datasets.
The affine transformation method is based on using a Ground Control Point table with a set of known
points in both the non-earth and a known projection space. The method will use these to determine a
set of affine transformation parameters which are the best fit for the given control points, using a least-
squares method to minimize the misfit.
For more information, see:
• Creating a custom affine projection
• Using a custom affine projection in MapInfo Pro
CREATING A CUSTOM AFFINE PROJECTION

An affine or custom coordinate system is a custom projection that contains affine transformation
parameters and is added to the MAPINFOW.PRJ file. The projection is available for selection when
creating and saving tables or setting the projection of a map window. The affine transformation
parameters define a custom coordinate system which is based on a affine transformation from a
standard projection.
The data created or saved using the custom projection is still displayed in the local coordinates. The
custom projection transformation parameters relate the local grid to real-world coordinates, enabling
MapInfo Pro to overlay UTM or lat-long data with data collected in the local grid system.
The affine transformation method is based on using a Ground Control Point table with a set of known
points in both the non-earth and a known projection space. The method will use these to determine a
set of affine transformation parameters which are the best fit for the given control points, using a Least
Squares method to minimize the mis-fit.

Example Custom Affine Projection Control Point Table
Note In contrast to the once-off affine data transformation, the control point table for a custom affine
projection transformation must contain four columns which read from left to right as
UTM_Easting, UTM_Northing, Local_Easting and Local_Northing. The naming convention of
the column headings is not important, but the order of the columns is critical.
2. In the Custom Transform dialog box, select <Affine> from the Transformation Type pull-
down list.
3. Click on the Control Point Table button and browse to the control point table. The selected control
point table will be displayed on the Control Point Button. This table does not need to be
mappable.
4. Select the Make Affine Coordsys check box.
5. Click OK.
6. Select the required standard projection for the UTM coordinate fields from the Choose Projection
dialog box. This is the base projection the custom affine is based on.
7. Datamine Discover will create the affine transformation and add the custom coordinate system
description to the MAPTRAN.LOG file.
8. Copy the line beginning “My affine coordinate system” from the MAPTRAN.LOG file and paste into
the bottom of your MAPINFOW.PRJ file. The MAPINFOW.PRJ file is located in the
.\\MapInfo\Professional folder.
9. Assign a new name for the custom projection and add a new projection Category line above the
protection . This projection category is used to keep all your custom projections together, and
should be in the format below:
"--- Alex’s Projections ---"
10. Optionally, for enhanced sub-centimeter precision, change the first two numbers from "10xx" to
"30xx"—e.g. change 1008 to 3008. Add an appropriate bounds add an appropriate bounds clause
to hte projection line. To specify bounds for the new projection enter the appropriate min_x,
min_y, max_x, max_y values for your data as per the example below.
Example of a custom projection's in the MAPINFOW.PRJ file:
"--- Custom Coordinate Systems ---"
"Sylvania Local Grid", 1008, 13,7, 141, 0, 0.9996, 500000, 10000000, 7, 0.895898, -0.444543,
3108129.02, 0.444537, 0.895887, -6726798.31

"Sylvania Local Grid (bounds)", 3008, 13,7, 141, 0, 0.9996, 500000, 10000000, 7, 0.895898,
-0.444543, 3108129.02, 0.444537, 0.895887, -6726798.31, -500000, -500000, 10000000,
10000000
Note The '_trans' table lists the Transformation Coefficents as used by the following affine
transformation equations::
x' = Ax + By + C
y' = Dx + Ey + F
Note The maptran.log Total RMS is the total Euclidean distance between the X and Y residual
components of the transformation. It does not directly relate to the individual control point's
RMSs, and a large value can still be a relatively accurate transformation result depending on
the scale and area of application. The Standard deviation in X and Y indicate a better absolute
measure of the error in the transformation.
USING A CUSTOM AFFINE PROJECTION IN MAPINFO PRO

Use this custom projection to create points for data collected in local coordinates, to save data
collected in UTM or lat-long in local coordinates or to change the map window projection to display local
coordinates.
To convert existing polyline or polygon tables in local projection (non-earth metres) so they can be
overlain with UTM or lat-long data, export the tables as MapInfo Pro MID/MIF files. Open the MIF file
in a text editor and change the CoordSys line to the custom coordinate system. (To make sure the
correct CoordSys line format is used, export a MapInfo Pro table created in the custom coordinate
system as a MID/MIF file and copy and paste the CoordSys line from the MIF file). Once the
CoordSys line is replaced import the MID/MIF back into MapInfo Pro.
Note You cannot reproject from or to a non-earth coordinate system.
For more information on creating custom projections refer to the MapInfo Pro User Guide Appendix B.
PROJECTION EDITOR
DISCOVER>Projection>Projection Editor
The Projection Editor tool enables the viewing, editing and creation of the MapInfo Pro projection
file. To perform these tasks previously was a process by manually modifying the Mapinfow.prj
text file with intricate knowledge of the structure of various projection types. The editor enables
the simple manipulation of MapInfo Pro projections. The most likely scenario for updating the projection
file is the addition of local affine mine grids or projections not currently in the file.

The Projection Editor tool is divided into three modes; New, Edit and View.
• New Mode
The New Mode enables the creation of a projection string from a series of predefined dropdown
lists and text boxes for entry of projection parameters. Alternatively, a pre-existing projection
string from a MapInfow.prj file can be copied and appended to your projection file.
• Edit Mode
The Edit Mode enables the modification of existing projection entries in your projection file from a
series of predefined dropdown lists and text boxes for entry of projection parameters.
Note Caution must be taken when editing an existing projection string to as not to corrupt its
structure. Generally, you would edit a custom projection string if incorrect parameters had
been entered.
• View Mode
The View Mode enables the viewing of all the projection strings within the MapInfow.prj file, you
may want to view a project string to assist in the construction of a new projection.

The elements of a coordinate system are listed on the Projection Editor include:
• Projection String
MapInfo projection string syntax.
• Category
Broad category name such as a geographical area for a collection of Category Members.
• Category Member
Name of the coordinate system.
• Projection
Method used by the coordinate system to transform the curved earth into a flat grid.
• Datum
Parameter used to define an ellipsoid to a location on the Earth.
• Ellipsoid
Idealised earth model used by the Datum.
• Bounds/Affine
Constant value used to account for explicit bounds, affine transformation or both.
PARAMETERS TAB
• Units
Units of measure of the projection.
• Scale Factor
A factor applied to average scale error over the central area of a map and to reduce east/west
boundary errors.
• Origin (Longitude)
Coordinate system origin on the Earth longitude value.
• Origin (Latitude)
Coordinate system origin on the Earth latitude value.
• Standard Parallel 1
Parallel boundary latitude value used by conic projections.
Parallel boundary latitude value used by conic projections.
• False Easting
Easting measurement offset commonly used by Universal Transverse Mercator projections, units
defined by Units parameter.

• False Northing
Northing measurement offset commonly used by Universal Transverse Mercator projections,
units defined by Units parameter.
• Range
Range value in degrees between 1 and 180, specifies how much of the Earth is visible.
• Azimuth
Oblique azimuth value in degrees commonly used by Hotine Oblique Mercator projections
• Rectified Skew
Azimuth correction value in degrees commonly used by Hotine Oblique Mercator projections.
AFFINE PARAMETERS TAB
• Units
Units of measure of the affine parameters.
• Affine A
Affine coefficient A.
• Affine B
Affine coefficient B.
• Affine C
Affine coefficient C.
• Affine D
Affine coefficient D.
• Affine E
Affine coefficient E.
• Affine F
Affine coefficient F.

CUSTOM DATUM TAB
• Shift dX
X axis shift distance of the ellipsoid in meters.
• Shift dY
Y axis shift distance of the ellipsoid in meters.
• Shift dZ
Z axis shift distance of the ellipsoid in meters.
• Rotation Ex
X axis rotation angle in arc seconds to rotate ellipsoid.
• Rotation Ey
Y axis rotation angle in arc seconds to rotate ellipsoid.
• Rotation Ez
Z axis rotation angle in arc seconds to rotate ellipsoid.
• Scale Correction
Correction factor in parts per million (PPM) to adjust size of ellipsoid.
• Prime Meridian
Longitude of the prime meridian in degrees.

BOUNDS TAB
• Minimum X
Minimum X value for the coordinate system.
• Minimum Y
Minimum Y value for the coordinate system.
• Maximum X
Maximum X value for the coordinate system.
• Maximum Y
Maximum Y value for the coordinate system.
CREATING A NEW PROJECTION

A new projection can be created by either manually selecting the parameters or by pasting a string from
an existing MapInfo projection file.
MANUAL ENTRY
TO MANUALLY CREATE A NEW PROJECTION STRING FOLLOW THESE STEPS:
1. Open the Projection Editor by navigating to DISCOVER>Projection>Projection Editor.
2. Select the New Mode option.
3. Select a Category to define the projection to be listed under. If you need to create a new
Category click the adjacent Add button. On the Add Category dialog type in a new name such
as 'Custom Grids' and click OK.
4. Under Projection Name Type in a new name such as 'Jamieson Local Grid'.
5. Select a Projection system.
6. Select a Datum, the associated Ellipsoid will automatically populate the Ellipsoid option.
7. If your projection has either bounds or an affine transformation or both select from under the
Bounds/Affine option. If your projection has neither select None.
Note You will notice as you select parameters the project string at the top of the dialog is getting
constructed. There are placeholder comma separators indicating empty values which
require defining.

8. The simplest projection will require several Parameters to be defined. Select the Units of the
coordinate system, Meters is a very common unit used. Depending on the Projection system
previously defined will determine the various Parameters to define.
9. Enter the required values, if you haven't defined all the required parameters you will be prompted
to do so.
Note If you have selected Affine Transform, Custom Bounds or Affine Transform and Custom
Bounds from the Bounds/Affine option you will need to define the appropriate values on
each tab.
10. After entering all the required values to define your new coordinate system click Save to save the
string into the MapInfow.prj file.
PASTING A PROJECTION STRING

TO PASTE A PROJECTION STRING FOLLOW THESE STEPS:
2. Select the New Mode option.
3. Select a Category to define the projection to be listed under. If you need to create a new
Category click the adjacent Add button. On the Add Category dialog type in a new name such
as 'Custom Grids' and click OK.
4. Paste the projection string by either Ctrl+ V keys or right clicking in the Projection String text
box and selecting 'Paste projection string'. To clear the projection string click the adjacent
Clear button.
5. Check or modify any values as required, click Save to save the string into the MapInfow.prj file.
Note When a projection string is either modified or a new one entered into the MapInfow.prj file by
the Projection Editor tool the Encom.prj file will be automatically updated. In past versions
updating this file was done manually. Therefore, when you update a projection string via
Projection Editor all projection files will be updated and can be used instantly.
EDITING A PROJECTION STRING

TO EDIT AN EXISTING PROJECTION STRING PERFORM THESE STEPS.
1. 1.Open the Projection Editor by navigating to DISCOVER>Projection>Projection Editor.
2. Select the Edit Mode option.
3. Select a Category and a Projection Name (Category Member), the associated Parameters will be
displayed.
4. If required edit any of the displayed options and parameters.
5. Click Save to save the string into the MapInfow.prj file.
Note The main reason you may wish to edit an exist projection string would be if incorrect values
were inserted. You must use caution when editing and saving an existing projection string as
you have the potential to corrupt the projection file.

RESTORING A PROJECTION FILE

When the Projection Editor is opened a backup of the MapInfow.prj file is copied to the MapInfo
installation folder, generally C:\Program Files\MapInfo\Professional. This is called
MAPINFOW_backup.PRJ, it is a copy of the factory installed projection file or the last projection
modified prior to using the Projection Editor. Under certain circumstances you may need to restore your
projection file back to the factory default.
If a projection file is corrupted and needs to be restored you can click the Restore button.
When you restore a projection file you will lose all of your edits and added projection strings.
UNDO EDITS
While editing or creating a Projection string you may have accidentally modified or deleted a
parameter, you can click the Undo button to undo the last edit.
VIEWING A PROJECTION STRING

TO VIEW AN EXISTING PROJECTION STRING PERFORM THESE STEPS.
2. Select the View Mode option.
3. Select a Category and a Projection Name (Category Member), the associated Parameters will be
displayed.
REPROJECTING COORDINATES
• Reprojecting a table
• Reprojecting multiple vector tables
REPROJECTING A TABLE
Related tools Reproject Coordinates
The Reproject Coordinates tool enables data which is captured in one coordinate system to
be reprojected and viewed in a new coordinate system. For example, vector data captured in
Australian AGD84 coordinates can be reprojected into GDA94 coordinates. Vector data can be
reprojected between projected (e.g. UTM), geographic (e.g. lat-long) and custom coordinate systems.
The tool works in the same way as the MapInfo Pro HOME>File>Save Copy As tool but has been
designed specifically to incorporate the NTv2 grid shift transformation parameters.

Reproject Coordinates dialog with NTv2 grid shift option
In the Reproject Coordinates dialog box select the table to reproject from the Filename pull-down list.
Only tables currently open in MapInfo Pro are available for reprojection. The native projection of the
table should automatically be populated in the Projection window. If the tool does not recognize the
native table projection a warning message is displayed stating that the projection is not listed in the
Encom.prj file. See below for details on how to update the Encom.prj file.
Note The projection list available in the Datamine Discover Coordinate Reproject tool is stored in a
separate file to the MapInfow.prj file. Therefore not all the projections in the MapInfow.prj will
be available for selection in this tool. For example, if you wish to reproject data using a custom
coordinate system clause which has been added to the MapInfow.prj file you will need to copy
the custom projection line into the Encom.prj file located in the
C:\Users\USERNAME\AppData\Roaming\Encom\Common\Projections folder.
By default, a new reprojected table is created using the original table name and a “_reprojected”
extension. To change the output file name click on the new name and modify. Alternatively, click on
the Browse button and select a new name and/or location for the reprojected table.
Note Check the Use NTv2 grid-shift box when reprojecting images between NAD27 and NAD83
Canadian coordinate systems or AGD66/AGD84 and GDA94 Australian systems. If you are
not familiar with this method see NTv2 transformation for more information about this option.
REPROJECTING MULTIPLE VECTOR TABLES

Related tools Multi-Table Reproject
Save multiple vector tables in another projection. All available open tables are displayed in the
Tables to Reproject list. Use the Open Table button to add another table to the Tables to
Reproject list if necessary. Select the tables to reproject by placing a tick in the table checkbox
or use the Select All button. Click in the table checkbox to unselect a table or use the Unselect All
button.
Click on the New Projection button and choose the new table projection. This projection will then be
displayed in the Target Projection column of the Tables to Reproject window.

A number of options are available to save the reprojected tables. The existing tables may be saved in
the new projection or new tables may be created. These new tables will be created in the original table
directory unless a different directory is specified. The new tables also have the option to be renamed
with a “_reproject” filename extension but this can also be modified to something more applicable if
desired. Click OK to reproject the selected tables.
Note Multi-Table Reproject uses MapInfo Pro (9.0.2+) method for NTv2 (see NTv2 transformation)
for more details. Alternatively you can use Reproject Coordinates to perform the NTv2
reprojection on an individual file.
Note To reproject multiple raster image tables, use the Reproject Image tool.

GENERATING TRAVERSE LINES AND PEG COORDINATES

Related tools Traverse Lines
The Traverse Lines tool (previously Local Grid Layout) enables a user to quickly and
interactively design a local grid over an area of interest. A set of grid points (pegs) and traverse
lines with both map (real-world) and local grid coordinates will be generated; these can then be
used for geochemical sampling, drilling or geophysical surveys.
Note This tool is not designed to convert coordinates between coordinate systems. For this task,
see Coordinate transformations.
Traverse lines created over a prospective magnetic feature.
TO CREATE TRAVERSE LINES:

1. Open the background datasets into a mapper window (e.g. interpreted geology, aero-magnetics,
gravity, regional surface sampling). Set the view to encompass the target area, and use MapInfo
Pro Ruler tool to approximately gauge the width (line length) and length (baseline length) of this
area.
2. Select DRILLHOLES>Create>Traverse Lines. The Traverse Lines dialog box is displayed.
3. From the Grid Type tab, select Traverse/Cross Line Orientation.
4. From the Grid Parameters tab, click the Define Interactively on Map button. In the mapper
window, draw the initial traverse line by clicking on its start point, and while holding down the
mouse button, moving the mouse to the end of the line. Release the mouse to complete the line.
5. Under Output Options, click Save to specify a name and location for the output files. By default
a mappable _Point table will be created detailing every peg in both real world and local
coordinates. Enabling the Create Grid as Line File option will additionally create a _Line table
comprising a series of attributed grid lines.
6. Select the Add to Current Mapper Window option.

7. The details of the traverse line are displayed: X and Y start coordinates, traverse line angle, line
length and the projection of the Map window. These paramters can be manually changed in the
dialog, or the line can be redefined by clicking the Define Interactively on Map button again.
8. Specify the local grid coordinates of the start point e.g. 5000E and 10000N
9. As noted in step 1, specify the Baseline Length, and the required Line Spacing (i.e. distance
between grid lines). Press the Calculator button to return the number of lines that will result.
10. Enter the required Peg Spacing: it is likely that you will need to manually adjust the Line Length
(captured automatically via Step 3) to accommodate this value (e.g. from 1125.67m to 1200m).
Check that the line length is divisible by the peg spacing by pressing the Calculator button
11. Click the Preview button at the bottom left of the dialog.
12. To change the dimensions, spacing or orientation of the grid, simply edit the appropriate
parameters in the dialog and press Preview again (this may include redefining the initial grid
cross line). Note that if the generated grid lines have been placed on the wrong side of your initial
grid line, try changing the Grid Direction side at the top right of the dialog. Also if the grid line you
defined interactively is in the middle of the target area, try setting this control to Both.
TRAVERSE LINES DEFINITION OPTIONS

Traverse lines can be defined either by specifying the orientation, length and position of:
• the baseline i.e. a line perpendicular to the required traverse/grid lines. This is generally parallel
to anomalism/host rock
• or a traverse/grid cross line, generally perpendicular to the strike of anomalism/host rock

Both options can be defined either by:

• Interactively using the Define Interactively on Map button. In the mapper window, click and hold
the left mouse button at the line start point, and drag the mouse to the line end point, releasing the
button. The lines X/Y coordinates, orientation, length and mapper projection will be automatically
populated into the dialog
• Manually by entering the necessary parameters into the dialog directly, including the required
orientation and Projection
Note The Traverse Lines tool does not support Latitude/Longitude projections; ensure that the
mapper window is in a UTM projection system.
GRID LINE PARAMETERS
The user can specify any 2 of the following 3 parameters controlling the baseline and the number of
cross lines:
• Baseline Length (may be interactively populated)
• Line Spacing (distance between cross-lines)
• Number of cross-lines
To automatically calculate the 3rd parameter, select the toggle to the left of this parameter: the
Calculator button will move next to this parameter. Select the Calculator button to return the adjacent
parameter.
Note If the Baseline Length has been populated via interactive definition, it will probably need to be
manually adjusted so that it can be divided by the Line Spacing. Check this by using the
Calculator on the Number of Lines field.
GRID PARAMETERS
The user can specify any 2 of the following 3 parameters controlling the grid cross lines:
• Line Length
• Peg Spacing (distance between grid pegs along each line)
• Number of Pegs
To automatically calculate the 3rd parameter, select the toggle to the left of this parameter: the
Calculator button will move next to this parameter. Select the Calculator button to return the adjacent
parameter.
Note If the Line Length has been populated via interactive definition, it will probably need to be
manually adjusted so that it can be divided by the Peg Spacing. Check this by using the
Calculator on the Number of Pegs field.
OUTPUT OPTIONS
The Traverse Lines tool will generate a table called tablename_Point, where the tablename is specified
using the Save As button. This mappable table will contain a point for each output grid peg, attributed
with the following fields:
• PegNum – Peg number
• Line – Line number
• LocalX – non-earth easting coordinate

• LocalY – non-earth northing coordinate

• East – easting coordinate in the specified UTM projection
• North– northing coordinate in the specified UTM projection
If the Create Grid as Line File option is enabled, an additional mappable table tablename_Line will be
created, containing a series of attributed grid lines attributed with the Line and LocalY fields.
The output grid line file, labelled with the LocalY field.
If a map window other than the original mapper window is made active, enabling the Add to Current
Mapper Window option and pressing Preview will add the traverse lines to this window. This can be
useful when displaying different datasets of covering the same area in different windows (for instance
using the DISCOVER>Windows>Link and Cursor Setup options).
ADVANCED OPTIONS
The Advanced Options button provides the following controls:
• First Line No. – allows the initial line number in the output Line field to be set (default 1)
• First Peg No. - allows the initial peg number in the output PegNum field to be set (default 1)
• Peg No. increment - allows the peg number incrementation (default 1) to be altered (e.g. to 10,
20, 30,...)
• Peg No. Prefix – add a prefix to the peg numbers e.g. RH530, RH531, RH532…
• Peg No. Suffix – add a suffix to the peg numbers e.g. 34 west, 35 west, 36 west
• Peg numbers can be set to increase up one line, then follow back down the net line (i.e. zig-zag)
• Alternate grid lines can be offset, allowing the creation of triangular/diamond grids. To accomplish
this, specify an offset of half the Peg Spacing.

A triangular grid created using the Offset option under Advanced Options

WORKING WITH
MAP OBJECTS
IN THIS SECTION
Objects and layers 204
Creating objects from a table 204
Creating and editing objects from the keyboard 206
Create and Clean Lines into Polygons 210
Creating Voronoi polygons 225
Managing and applying object styles 227
Selecting objects 227
Copying, moving and transforming objects 229
Manipulating lines, polylines and polygons 233
Using polyline and polygon attributes 241
Colouring map objects by RGB values 246
Formatting vector objects 247
Cloning object styles 249
Linking objects to external documents 250
WORKING WITH MAP OBJECTS 204
OBJECTS AND LAYERS

Before creating and editing objects in a map, the layer on which it is stored must be selectable and
editable. Use the MapInfo Pro Layer Control window to manage the properties of layers in a map.
Use the QUERY>Map Object>Location Info tool to display the browser entries for objects in the
selected table continuously as the cursor moves over the objects in the map window.
See also
Displaying map coordinates, distances and bearings
CREATING OBJECTS FROM A TABLE

Related tools Object Builder
Use the MODIFY>Create>Object Builder tool to create MapInfo Pro objects from descriptions
stored as coordinates in MapInfo Pro tables or text files.
If you have object descriptions other than points in a text file (in general a list of X and Y coordinate
pairs), the only way MapInfo Pro can import these objects is if the data is initially converted to a MapInfo
Interchange Format (MIF) or Drawing Exchange Format (DXF) file. In most cases this is impractical.
Datamine Discover provides the ability to create objects from a variety of coordinate types.
In order to use coordinate data with Datamine Discover, the text file should be opened as a table in
MapInfo Pro. For large files, save the coordinate table to a native MapInfo Pro table for quicker
processing.
For all import formats the coordinate system of the coordinate data must be known. When importing
polyline descriptions, there is the option to convert closed polylines to regions for appropriate formats.
Regions are then created with the current pen and brush styles.
Note To build objects from Geographical or Longitude/Latitude coordinates, the data structure must
be in a decimal degree format. The Build Objects from Table tool will not accept Degrees,
Minute, Second (DMS) data format. To quickly reformat the DMS data, use the Degree
Converter tool located on the Registered tab of the MapInfo Pro Tool Manager
(HOME>Tools).
For details of table structures, see:
• Row delimited polylines
• Column delimited polylines
• Endpoints in one row
ROW DELIMITED POLYLINES

Polyline descriptions must have a delimiter to enable Datamine Discover to determine when the last
node in an object has been read. The delimiter may be either a line between the objects (blank or
otherwise), a change in attribute (such as polygon code) or a value such as “start” or “end” entered into
another column. For each of these cases it needs to be specified which columns contain the X and Y
coordinate information.
If the polylines are delimited by row then Datamine Discover must know whether to expect a blank line
or a line with a different value in the X or Y coordinate column. Use the Row delimited Polylines to
import objects in the Arc Line format, where the start delimiter line is a sequential record number and
the end delimiter line is “END”.

317822 6994520
317911 6999620
309400 7001427
309400 6994833
233410 7665412
236410 7665499
236410 7668390
233410 7668211
Example of polylines without attributes delimited by a blank line
Import Polylines using row delimiters options dialog
COLUMN DELIMITED POLYLINES

If the polylines are delimited by column, Datamine Discover must know which column contains the
delimiter and in what form the delimiter takes. Choose the Unique Attribute option if each node in a
polyline is identified by the same attribute value. Use Start Keyword if the start of each polyline is
identified by a word such as START, or use the Start and End Keywords if both the start and end of
each polyline are identified. If using the start/end keyword options, enter the appropriate keywords for
Datamine Discover to search for.
EL877 317822 6994520

EL877 317911 6999620
EL877 309400 7001427
EL1234 309400 6994833
EL1234 233410 7665412
EL1234 236410 7665499
EL1234 236410 7668390
EL1234 233410 7668211
Example of polylines delimited by a unique identifier in column 1

Import Polylines using column delimiters options dialog
Datamine Discover provides the option of importing data either as normal X and Y coordinate pairs or
as distance, bearing and elevation triplets. For the latter, the distance is taken to be measured in the
current coordinate system units, the bearing is between 0º and 359º, and the inclination is between
+90º (uphill) and –90º (downhill). If angular elevations have not been measured then Datamine
Discover assumes the traverse is flat.
For both import options, Datamine Discover attempts to include any other values found on the first line
of the object description as attributes in the MapInfo Pro table.
ENDPOINTS IN ONE ROW

The Line on 1 row ASCII import format contains line descriptions with the coordinates of the two
endpoints of the line in one row of the import file/table, as X1, Y1, X2, Y2. For example:
805600, 8475240, 805600, 8475260
If there are any attributes in the ASCII file, they are not carried across to the MapInfo Pro table.
CREATING AND EDITING OBJECTS FROM THE KEYBOARD

Related tools Build Object
Use the MODIFY>Create>Build Object tool to create map objects by entering node coordinates
from the keyboard and to edit the node coordinates of a selected object.
Usually when creating map objects, you can draw them using a digitizer or mouse. However, in some
cases you may have an object description in coordinates (such as a property or tenement boundary)
or you may wish to create a polyline or region from a distance/bearing/elevation traverse.
Using Datamine Discover, you can enter coordinates directly from the keyboard and build simple
objects, such as ellipses, points or lines, or more complex multi-node polylines and polygons. You can
also edit the shape of existing objects by altering the node coordinates.
If you have a list of coordinates already in a text file, use the Build Object tool to create objects
automatically from these coordinates.
If the object that you have defined lies outside the map window extents, the map window is panned to
show the object.

SELECTING THE OBJECT TYPE

In the Objects from Coordinates dialog, select which map layer in which you wish to create the new
object (choose from any layers in the map window or choose to create a new table). Datamine Discover
then uses the projection of the current map window to draw the objects. You can easily change
projection by selecting a projection with the Favourite Projections option.
Drawing objects by coordinates dialog
You should then nominate the type of object to draw, the units to use and how to specify nodes for
polylines and polygons. If the map window is in a lat-long projection, the XY Units control is set to
Degrees and disabled. If you are entering coordinates in degrees, select between decimal degrees and
degrees, minutes, seconds (DMS). DMS format is dd.mmss, for example 47º 17’ 23.45” would be
entered as 47.172345.
The dialog for entering the coordinate information depends on what type of object you have nominated
to draw.
• Draw a point
• Draw a line
• Draw a polyline/polygon
• Draw an arc, ellipse or rectangle
You can also edit the nodes of a selected object with the Build Object tool:
• Edit node coordinates
DRAW A POINT
Select Point as the Object Type and use the Object Style button to select an appropriate point
symbol. Click on the Enter Coordinates button and key in the X and Y coordinates into the Draw Point
dialog. Click OK to create new point.

DRAW A LINE
Select Line as the Object Type and use the Object Style button to select an appropriate line style.
Two options are available for drawing line objects: Enter Nodes by Coordinates enables a user to
enter the start and end coordinates of the new line. Enter Nodes by Distance, Bearing enables the
user to specify a starting coordinate for the line and then a distance, bearing and inclination to the end
point of the line. Choose the Enter Coordinates button to enter the line information into the Draw Line
dialog:
DRAW A POLYLINE/POLYGON
Select Polyline or Region as the Object Type and use the Object Style button to select an
appropriate line/region style. Two options are available for drawing polyline or region objects: Enter
Nodes by Coordinates and Enter Nodes by Distance, Bearing. Once the appropriate option has
been selected, click on the Enter Coordinates Button.
DEFINE NODES BY COORDINATES

Enter Nodes by Coordinates enables a user to enter a coordinate pair for each polyline or region
node. Use the Add button to add a coordinate pair to the list, and the Edit/Delete buttons to modify the
Current Nodes list. When you have entered all the nodes for the object, click the Done button and the
object is constructed in the appropriate map layer.

The dialog for entry of metric polyline/polygon nodes
DEFINE NODES BY DISTANCE AND BEARING

Enter Nodes by Distance, Bearing enables the user to specify a starting coordinate for the polyline
or region and then a distance, bearing and elevation to the next node. Click the Add button, and the
coordinates of the first two points are placed into the Current Nodes list.
Leave or enter the next distance/bearing/elevation value and click Add to place the coordinates of the
next point in the list. If you do not have measured elevations, then leave these as zero. Otherwise,
Datamine Discover uses negative elevations for down and positive elevations for up.
The dialog for entry of metric polyline/polygon nodes using Distance/Bearing/Elevation
DRAW AN ARC, ELLIPSE OR RECTANGLE

Select Arc, Ellipse or Rectangle as the Object Type and use the Object Style button to select an
appropriate line/region style. Click on the Enter Coordinates button.

To draw an ellipse or rectangle, the diametrically opposed corner coordinates of the object need to be
entered. To draw an arc, the diametrically opposed corner coordinates of the arc need to be entered,
along with the start and end angles for the arc.
EDIT NODE COORDINATES

If you have an object selected when you choose Build Object, Datamine Discover allows you to edit
the existing node coordinates with the same methods described above. When editing a polyline or
polygon, the Add button allows you to add a node at any position within the object. You are asked
where to place the new node, and the coordinates are then added to the node list. You cannot create
or edit multi-section polylines or regions using this tool in Datamine Discover.
CREATE AND CLEAN LINES INTO POLYGONS

MODIFY>Create>PolyBuilder
The PolyBuilder tool is designed to simplify the conversion of digitized linework (representing
regions) into polygon vector objects. A common use is the digitization of lithological units or land
use areas from a scanned and georeferenced image (e.g. open file report) as series of lines or
polylines. This linework dataset is then converted into an attributed dataset of polygon regions.
The PolyBuilder tool has the following functionality:
• Check Linework
To create polygons from linework datasets, the linework must be free of any lines which are
duplicated, extend past or fall short of other lines. The Polybuilder tool 'flags' all such errors.
• Fix Linework
The linework dataset is "cleaned", removing all identified errors. All the overlapping linework is
broken down into individual line segments. This tool can be run in either automated and manual
mode.
• Create Polygons
All cleaned line segments that enclose an area are joined together, creating polygons.
• Attribute Polygons with Text
Once polygons have been created, they can be attributed (as a browser attribute) using text
located within the polygons.
The Polybuilder tool also has the following tools:
• Digitize Linework
The digitzing tool allows source linework to be created from scratch. This tool enables the storage
of feature linestyles to aid in consistent data capture. It also allows features to be added as
attributes during the linework creation process.
• Additional Linework Tools
In addition to the streamlined polybuilder process tools, additional tools to break, join and filter
linework datasets can be run separately.
The Polybuilder tool is only compatible with data in a projected coordinate system (e.g. UTM, MGA,
etc.). It is not compatible with geodetic (latitude- longitude) data.

In each of the PolyBuilder processes the original files are always maintained. Any new files created
contain the results of each procedure/tool plus any unprocessed data from the original file, leaving the
original files intact. In this way the PolyBuilder output files can be checked and re-processed if
necessary before saving the final linework file. The projection of the original file is also retained in any
new files created.
Note Polybuilder cannot edit read-only tables, and these cannot be selected. Save a native copy
first using HOME>File>Save>Save Copy As. Polybuilder will also automatically save any
changes on an unsaved input table.
POLYBUILDER DIALOG
PolyBuilder dialog
The PolyBuilder dialog contains pull-down menu options combined with a series of toolbar buttons
which provide access to the various PolyBuilder functions. The dialog can be closed using the
Close button in the top right-hand corner of the dialog or selecting Exit from the Configure menu.
The dialog can be expanded using the Arrow button. It is necessary for the dialog to be expanded
to view the results after cleaning data or to view available digitizing styles.
Expanded PolyBuilder dialog showing Check Linework results
LINEWORK LAYER
The Linework pull-down list displays the current layers in the active map window. Select the linework
layer to check and clean or the polygonized layer to attribute from this pull-down list.

TEXT LAYER
The Text pull-down list displays the current layers in the active map window. The text layer which
contains annotations to be used to attribute polygons is selected from this pull-down list.
MENUS
The PolyBuilder dialog is comprised of two pull-down menus:
• Configure
Contains options to set various Preferences for detecting and cleaning linework along with the
ability to Import and Export digitizing line styles.
• Help
Provides access to Help.
POLYBUILDER TOOLBAR
The PolyBuilder Toolbar contains the following buttons:
• Digitize Linework
Select a line style and manually digitize linework into a MapInfo window. Linestyles can be
selected from predefined styles and feature names can be automatically added to a column in the
table.
• Check Linework
Check digitized linework for free endpoints, overlaps and duplicates according to options set in
the Preferences dialog. Errors are flagged in the map window and reported in the PolyBuilder
dialog.
• Extend and Break
This process extends all lines which have free endpoints by the distance specified in the
Preferences dialog. All intersecting linework is then broken into segments and overlaps,
overshoots and duplicates removed.
• Create Polygons
Join together all adjacent line segments which form continuous enclosed boundaries to create a
series of polygon objects.
• Attribute Polygons
Use labels from a separate text or annotation table to add attribute data to the newly created
polygon map objects.
• Linework Tools
Additional line tools that can be run separate to Break all existing linework at
intersections, Join adjacent linework together or Filter to simplify complex linework
and reduce file size and processing time.
• Previous Error Flag
Move to the previous error flag in the map window to manually find and fix linework
errors.
• Next Error Flag
Move to the next error flag in the map window to manually find and fix linework errors.

• Fix Linework
Used in conjunction with the View Previous/Next error flags this tool enables linework errors to be
fixed manually by extending lines.
• Delete Error Flag
Used to delete all error flags or only those of a selected error flag type in the map window. Also
contains option to delete error flags when moving through and fixing them using the Previous/
Next Error Flag buttons.
PREFERENCES
Configure>Preferences
The PolyBuilder Preferences dialog contains options which can be customized while working within the
PolyBuilder tool.
LINEWORK
The Linework controls are primarily used when running the Check Linework
process to initially detect problems in the linework dataset.
• Endpoints
Check to flag all free endpoints (lines which do not intersect with another line)
• Overlaps
Check to flag all lines which overlap each other
• Duplicates
Check to flag all instances of multiple lines at the same location
• Gaps smaller than
Check and enter value to flag all free endpoints that lie within the specified distance of another
line.
• Gaps larger than
Check and enter value to flag all free endpoints which lie outside the specified distance from
another line.
Note When Gaps Smaller than or Gaps Greater than is selected for use, the options to manually
select Overlaps and Duplicates is greyed out. Therefore, when checking linework using
these options, only Free End Points are flagged.

• Extend Distance
Value used in the Extend and Break Linework process to extend free endpoints the specified
Extend Distance. End points which are extended and make contact with another line will be
broken whereas end points which do not make contact with another line will be restored to their
pre-extension distance once the process is complete.
Note The units used in the Gaps smaller than, Gaps larger than and Extend Distance are taken
from the current map window distance units. To change the units click on the map window,
select MAP>Options>map Options from the MapInfo ribbon change the Distance Units in
the displayed dialog.
• Close
Check to convert closed polylines to polygons when using the Join Linework tool.
• Honour Symbology
Check to only break or join lines which contain identical symbology (line styles) when using the
Break Linework or Join Linework tool.
• Filter Distance
Tolerance distance used to remove vertices from complex linework when using the Filter
Linework tool.
POLYGONS
• Place Polygon Centroids
Check to create a new file containing polygon centroids when using the Create Polygons tool.
FIELD INFORMATION
• Allow Duplicate IDs
Check to enable an attribute to be assigned to multiple polygons when using the Attribute
Polygons with Text tool.
DIGITIZE LINEWORK
The PolyBuilder utility enables linework to be screen digitized directly into a MapInfo table. Usually a
linework table is created by digitizing (drawing a map object on the screen) which traces an underlying
linear feature on a scanned map.
TO DIGITIZE USING THE POLYBUILDER DIGITIZING TOOL:
1. Select the layer to digitize the new linework into from the Linework Layer pull-down list. The new
linework table must already be created in MapInfo and added to the active map window to be
available for selection in this list. The table must contain a Character column to contain the
digitized feature name. The Digitize Linework button will not be active if this column is not
present.
2. Select the Digitize Linework button from the PolyBuilder toolbar.
LINEWORK STYLES
Before digitizing linework using the PolyBuilder tool a linework Style must be selected. A Style is a
predefined line style, colour and thickness combination which represents a linear feature. e.g.
Drainage, creeks, roads, faults, folds, etc. These Styles can be saved and re-used in the future when
digitizing future linework to ensure consistent data displays between similar linear features.

The Style name can also be added into a designated field in the digitizing table as attribute information.
For example, all lines digitized using a linework style called River will have "River" added as an attribute
into a specified column in the table.
3. When the Digitize Linework button is selected in Step 2 the Field pull- down list becomes
available. Choose a field (columns) from the linework layer to store the name of the linework Style
used for each digitized line as an attribute.
Note Linework Styles can only be stored in fields which are of a Character data type.
Make sure that the field selected is wide enough to store the Style name otherwise it will be
truncated without warning. Use the MapInfo TABLE>Maintenance>Table>Modify Structure tool
to add or modify fields in the linework table if necessary.
4. To select linework Styles from a previously saved list select the Import Styles option from the
Configure menu. The saved Styles are listed in the window at the bottom of the PolyBuilder
dialog. To create a new linework Style go to Step 5.
5. To add a linework Style to an existing list or to create a new Styles list right-mouse click in the
window at the bottom of the PolyBuilder dialog and select Add from the pop-up menu.
6. In the Digitizing Style dialog enter a name for the new Style.
7. Click on the Line Style button. Choose a line style, colour and thickness for this Style. Click
OK to add the new Style to the PolyBuilder dialog window. Repeat steps 4 to 6 to add more
linework Styles to this list.
8. To edit a linework Style highlight it in the list and then right-mouse click and select Edit from the
pop-up menu. Alternatively, to delete a linework Style select Remove from the pop-up menu.
9. To save a new or edited Styles list, select the Export Styles option from the Configure menu and
enter a file name and location. Linework Styles are stored in an ASCII file with a .DAT extension.
To reuse saved linework Styles see Step 4.
DIGITIZING
10. To digitize linework highlight the appropriate Style from the Styles list in the window at the bottom
of the PolyBuilder dialog. PolyBuilder should automatically make the selected layer editable.
11. Choose the Polyline drawing button from SPATIAL>Create>Insert>Polyline and digitize the
line in the map window.
CHECK LINEWORK
Check Linework is usually the first process to be run on line data when it is going to be used for polygon
creation or to create a linear network. The purpose
of this procedure is to check all the linework in a table and flag all instances of the following:
• Free Endpoints
Lines which do not intersect with any other lines

• Overlaps
Lines which overlap each other
• Duplicates
Two or more lines at the same location
The reason this process is required is that if free endpoint, overlapping or duplicate lines remain in a
linework table which is then converted into polygons or used as a linear network, the resulting dataset
may be incomplete. It is therefore strongly recommended that all linework is checked and cleaned prior
to being polygonized or joined in a linear network.
The Check Linework utility will only process lines and polyline strings. Other elements such as arcs will
be ignored and multi-segment elements will report an error. The Check Linework process will therefore
flag a line as a free endpoint where it joins an arc element. It is recommended that all multi-segment
linework is disaggregated into individual elements and to avoid using arc elements before running the
Check Linework procedure.
The Check Linework utility will also return an overlap error when a line string or shape contains multiple
vertices that are the same. This problem can be fixed by removing the offending vertex.
1. Open the linework dataset into a map window.
2. In the PolyBuilder dialog, select the Linework Layer from the pull-down list.
3. Click on the Check Linework button on the PolyBuilder toolbar.
4. To see the Check Linework results, expand the PolyBuilder dialog.
ERROR FLAGS
After the Check Linework process is run all endpoints, overlaps and duplicates are marked using a
different type of flag for them to be easily distinguished in the map window. The PolyBuilder window
displays the total number of line segments (elements) in the table, the number of flags created for Free
Endpoints, Overlaps and Duplicates and the time it took to process the table.
These error flags are placed in a temporary file called PolyBuilderErrors and is added to the original
linework map window. This error table is continually overwritten during the various processes in the
PolyBuilder tool and is permanently deleted upon exiting MapInfo.
In the map window Free Endpoints are denoted by a circle, Overlaps where two lines intersect are
marked by a square and Duplicates are indicated by a thick red line defining the extent of the
duplication.

Linework Checking Error Flags
To fix the flagged errors follow the steps outlined in Fix Linework. When the errors are corrected rerun
the Check Linework process to ensure that all the linework problems are fixed. It is not unusual for the
Check Linework process to be run multiple times before a dataset is free from errors.
When checking linework in a linear dataset e.g. a road or drainage network, free end points may be
legitimate and not just lines which have fallen short of intersecting with other lines. The user may first
check the dataset for Overlaps and Duplicates before controlling the method of checking for free end
points.
This is done by modifying the Configure>Preferences settings to only flag those errors with a gap
smaller than or larger than a calculated distance.
For example, If the Gaps Smaller than option in the Configure>Preferences dialog is selected and the
desired distance is set to 10m, PolyBuilder will only flag the free end points with a gap smaller than
10m from another line. In a road network where roads often stop short of another road, selection of the
correct distance will result in error flags being created only for those roads which are intended to
intersect another road. See Preferences for more information on setting these Check Linework options.
Note The units used in the Gaps smaller than, Gaps larger than and Extend Distance are taken from
the current map window distance units. To change the units click on the map window, select
MAP>Options>Map Options from the MapInfo ribbon and change the Distance Units in the
displayed dialog.
CORRECT LINEWORK
To correct lines which have been flagged as being erroneous in the Check Linework utility there are
two processes available in PolyBuilder:
• Extend and Break Linework
An automatic process which can extend linework to intersect other lines and break overlapping
linework into individual elements.
• Fix Linework
Manual process which enables flagged errors to be stepped through and corrected one by one.
Generally used to fix any remaining errors after the Extend and Break Linework process has been
run.

EXTEND AND BREAK LINEWORK

Extend and Break Linework combines several of the core PolyBuilder processes to fix linework errors
that have been flagged as End Points, Overlaps and Duplicates in the Check Linework utility.
During the Extend and Break Linework process duplicate line segments are removed, undershoots are
extended, overshoots are removed with all intersecting linework broken down into separate line strings
ready for use in the Create Polygons utility.
The corrected linework data file is named using the original linework file with a "_clean" extension. i.e.
if the original file is Linework.TAB, the file containing the corrected linework will be named
Linework_clean.TAB. The new file is created using the same projection as the original linework table
and is added to the map window. The original linework table is removed from the map window and
closed and the cleaned table is added as the Linework Layer into the PolyBuilder dialog.
UNDERSHOOTS AND OVERSHOOTS

An Undershoot error occurs where a line does not quite reach the point intended on a nearby line
whereas an Overshoot (or dangle) is the result of a line extending too far past a line when it should be
terminated.
To correct undershoot and overshoot errors the Extend and Break utility extends all Free Endpoint
lines by a user-defined distance and then a linework break process is run to cut all intersecting
linework. The aim of this process is to leave the clean linework free of undershoots with only a possible
small overshoot as a result of the initial extension distance being slightly too large.
After all the Free Endpoint lines are extended all lines now have a length which is less than the Extend
Distance are deleted and all Free Endpoint lines that are longer than this distance will be reduced by
the Extend Distance. This should result in the removal of any small overshoots created in the extend
process and the return of all lines that did not overlap any other linework to their original length. See
Extend Distance for more information.
Finally, the process which deletes lines with a free endpoint of length less than the original user defined
distance is repeated to account for any overshoots in the original data. Upon completion of this
procedure all undershoots and overshoots should have been removed and the data should be free of
overlaps and duplicates.
Extend and Break Process

Re-run the Check Linework utility as the Extend and Break Linework process does not fix all errors and
some manual correction is generally required. See Fix Linework for more information. One of the most
common errors is where two parallel or near-parallel free end point lines remain and must be corrected
manually as they will not join when extended by the nominated distance.
EXTEND DISTANCE
The Extend Distance option is set in the Preferences dialog and is used to automatically control the
extend search distance. The Extend Distance needs to be chosen carefully and with a good
understanding of the data. The distance should be large enough to fix as many undershoots/
overshoots as possible but not so large as to cause a lot of unwanted intersections. Any errors that
remain will be identified and need to be corrected manually using the procedure outlined in Fix
Linework.
FIX LINEWORK
The Fix Linework correction utility is used in conjunction with the View Previous/ Next Error Flags
buttons and the Delete Error Flag option. It has been developed to assist in the correction of errors
flagged during the Check Linework process and not corrected using the automated Extend and Break
Linework process.
Error flags may be sequentially viewed, corrected and deleted or optionally disregarded and deleted.
Various combinations of errors will require the application of different logic to achieve a satisfactory
solution.
VIEW PREVIOUS/NEXT ERROR FLAG

After running the Check Linework tool, any errors not automatically fixed will be marked with an error
flag. To manually find and fix these errors, it is necessary to
scroll through the dataset using the View Previous/Next Error Flag buttons.
The map window will centre the error flag in the view and make it available for correction. As each error
is corrected, the user can proceed to the next error flag by selecting View Next Error Flag. It is also
possible to view the previous error flag by selecting View Previous Error Flag.
NoteIt is only possible to view the previous error flag if the Automatic Error Flag Deletion option is
unchecked in the Delete Error Flag menu.
DELETE ERROR FLAG

These options can be used to delete the currently selected error flag, any particular type of error flag
or all error flags. The flag deletion type is selected from the Delete Error Flag menu.

Delete Error Flag list
To delete single or multiple error flags select them in the map window and click on the Delete Error
Flag button.
To delete all error flags of a particular type e.g. intersections or endpoints select the appropriate option
from the Delete Error Flag list.
The Automatic Error Flag Deletion option will automatically delete flags as they are moved through for
correction using the View Next Error Flag button.
FREE END POINT ERRORS

If after running Check Linework two lines intending to finish at the same point overshoot by a small
distance this will result in two free end points and an overlap as shown below.
If the Extend and Break Linework utility is run on this data the overlap error will be automatically fixed
and only the free end point errors will remain.
Overlap and free end points
There are two types of Free End Point errors which are flagged:
• Overshoot/Dangle
A line overlaps the line it was intended to finish and an overshoot or dangle results. Dangles are
lines that do not contribute to the boundary of a polygon and should be removed.

Free End Point Dangle - Before and after deleting the dangle
In the example above the Free End Point error flag is placed on the line segment which is the
dangle. This short line segment was created after going through the PolyBuilder processes
(Check Linework and Extend and Break Linework). The original line has been broken, correcting
the overlap error and the Free End Point error flag placed at the end of the dangle.
To correct this dangle, the line segment should simply be deleted using the keyboard Delete
button. Click on View Next Error Flag to move to the next error flag.
Note It is only possible to view the previous error flag if the Automatic Error Flag Deletion option
is unchecked in the Delete Error Flag menu.
• Undershoot
A line falls short of its intended finish position and a gap is present. Gaps within linework used to
create polygons restrict the creation of areas and must be repaired.
Free End Point Undershoot - Before and after extending the undershoot
In the example above the Free End Point error flag is placed on the line which requires extending
to remove the gap. Using the MapInfo Selection tool fromthe Main Toolbar, highlight the line to
intersect. Then select the Fix Linework tool from the PolyBuilder toolbar. The line will
automatically be extended to the selected line and close the gap. The selected line is also
automatically broken at the point where the lines intersect.
Click on View Next Error Flag to move to the next error flag.
Note It is only possible to view the previous error flag if the Automatic Error Flag Deletion option
is unchecked in the Delete Error Flag menu.

OVERLAP
The error flag and overlapping linework are highlighted. This error is automatically fixed using the
Extend and Break Linework utility and should not require manual intervention.
DUPLICATES
The error flag and the elements that contain the duplicate section are highlighted. This error is
automatically fixed using the Extend and Break Linework utility and should not require manual
intervention.
CREATE POLYGONS
Create Polygons is a procedure that joins line segments which enclose an area and then converts the
closed linework strings to a region or polygon object. The
new polygon data file is named using the clean linework file with a "_polygon" extension. i.e. if the clean
file is Linework_clean.TAB, the file containing the polygons will be named
Linework_clean_polygons.TAB. The new file is created using the same projection as the clean
linework table and is added to the map window.
1. In the PolyBuilder dialog select the cleaned linework from the Linework Layer pull-down list.
2. Click on the Create Polygons button on the PolyBuilder toolbar.
3. To see the Create Polygons results expand the PolyBuilder dialog.
The polygon table generated by PolyBuilder has a standard structure:
• POLY_ID - Character (1)
• AREA - Float
• CENT_X - Float
• CENT_Y - Float
The POLY_ID field for each polygon is populated with "*" until it is attributed using the Attribute
Polygons with Text utility. The AREA field is populated with the area of the polygon and the CENT_X
and CENT_Y are populated with the X and Y coordinates of the centroid of the polygon.
To create an additional table that contains the centroids of each newly created polygon make sure that
the Place Polygon Centroids option is checked in the Preferences dialog.
POLYGON ERRORS
When creating polygons it is possible to get a polygon loop error. This error occurs when the line loops
back on itself while tracing out a polygon. The error is flagged by a red triangle symbol and it may be
difficult to determine the cause of the loop.
Generally a polygon loop error may indicate unnecessary or missing linework. For example, in the
figure below a possible line is missing which is need to divide the larger polygon into two regions a and
b. PolyBuilder will create polygons irrespective of polygon loop errors but it is important to later locate
the cause of these errors and either delete unnecessary linework or add linework until all the errors
have been corrected.

Another error that may be encountered in this process is the centroid error which will occur if a polygon
is too small to contain the calculated centroid. It is possible to construct shapes that are so small that
no possible centroid point falls inside them. This normally indicates extreme circumstances such as
'sliver' polygons, which are usually small and safe to ignore. Later processing is not normally inhibited.
DONUT POLYGONS
Where a polygon is created that falls entirely within another polygon it will be excised (or donuted) from
the larger polygon.
ATTRIBUTE POLYGONS WITH TEXT

Attribute Polygons with Text enables polygons created from a linework file to be assigned an attribute
from a piece of text which is located within the enclosed
polygon object. The text is added as an attribute in the browser for each polygon object into a column
named POLY_ID.
The location of the text used to attribute a polygon is always the bottom left hand corner irrespective
of its justification. The text can be any size and length provided that the bottom-left corner of the text
label is located within the designated polygon. When the text is added to the polygon table the
POLY_ID column will automatically be adjusted to the width of the longest text string in the text file.
TO ATTRIBUTE POLYGONS USING TEXT:
1. Make sure the cleaned linework dataset is open in a map window.
2. Open the table that contains the text data into the same map window.
3. In the PolyBuilder dialog select the cleaned linework from the Linework Layer pull-down list.

4. Select the text layer from the Text Layer pull-down list.
5. Click on the Attribute Polygons with Text button on the PolyBuildertoolbar.
6. To see the Attribute Polygons with Text results expand the PolyBuilderdialog.
After running the Attribute Polygons with Text process a number of possible error conditions can result
which are displayed in the PolyBuilderErrors layer which added to the map window.
• No Node
Polygon does not contain any text strings and a red hollow diamond shaped symbol is placed at
the centroid of each polygon for identification in the map window.
• Multiple Node
Polygon contains more than one text string. A red filled diamond shaped symbol is placed at the
centroid of each polygon for identification in the map window.
• Node Outside
Text strings which do not fall within a polygon. A red circle is placed at the text centroid for
identification in the map window.
All polygons that are properly identified will have their POLY_ID field updated in the polygon table. Any
polygons which fall into any of the above error categories will have an attribute entry of "*****" in the
polygon table.
If there are polygons which are to be attributed with the same text make sure that the Allow Duplicate
IDs option is checked in the Preferences dialog. If this option is unchecked and there are multiple
instances of the same attribute in the text table a large number of entries and symbols are added to
the PolyBuilderErrors table and a message such as "114 duplicate text id's" will be displayed. Check
this option in the Preferences dialog and rerun the process to correct.
ADDITIONAL LINEWORK UTILITIES

The PolyBuilder module contains additional linework utilities to aid in the creation of linear networks.
These include:
• Break Linework
Break overlapping linework into individual segments and remove duplicates
• Join Linework
Join adjacent line segments together to create a series of polylines
• Filter Linework
Reduce the number of vertices in polylines to simplify complex linework and reduce file size
All of these processes create a new file containing the results of each procedure plus any unprocessed
data from the initial file, leaving the original files complete. This enables the output files to be checked,
corrected and re-processed if it is found to be unsatisfactory before finally saving the new file to the
original file name.
BREAK LINEWORK
Break Linework takes linework from the selected linework file and breaks it into individual line
segments where an overlap occurs. Any duplicated lines are removed and the resulting lines are saved
to a new file. The new broken data file is named using the original linework file with a "_break"
extension. i.e. if the original file is Linework.TAB, the file containing the broken linework will be named
Linework_break.TAB. The new file is created using the same projection as the original linework table.

Unlike Extend and Break Linework, the original file is not closed and the new file is added to the current
mapper window. After the Break Linework is completed the Check Linework process is run on the new
linework file. This should produce no errors other than free endpoints, if applicable.
The Break Linework utility can only be used with line and polyline data and does not support arc or
multi-segment elements. Any arc or multi-segment elements will be copied to the output file so that this
file will look the same as the original linework table except that all the linework errors, other than free
endpoints, will be removed.
If the Honour Symbology option is checked in the Preferences dialog only lines with the same
symbology (line style, colour and thickness) will be broken. If this option is unchecked then overlapping
lines with different symbology will be broken. All linework must be in the same file for it to be broken.
JOIN LINEWORK
Join Linework takes linework from the selected linework file and joins it into continuous line strings
where elements are adjacent. Joining lines can significantly reduce the number of elements in a file
and result in a reduction in file size.
The new joined data file is named using the original linework file with a "_join" extension. i.e. if the
original file is Linework.TAB, the file containing the joined linework will be named Linework_join.TAB.
The new file is created using the same projection as the original linework table. The Join Linework
process does not introduce any new linework errors.
The Join Linework utility can only be used with line and polyline data and does not support arc or multi-
segment elements. Any arc or multi-segment elements will be copied to the output file so that this file
will look the same as the original linework table except that all the linework errors, other than free
endpoints, will be removed.
All the joined linework will be open even if the strings have a common start and end vertice. To convert
closed polylines to polygons check the Close option in the Preferences dialog.
If the Honour Symbology option is checked in the Preferences dialog only lines with the same
symbology (line style, colour and thickness) will be joined. If this option is unchecked then adjacent
lines with different symbology will be joined. All linework must be in the same file for it to be joined.
CREATING VORONOI POLYGONS

Related tools Voronoi Polygons
Use the MODIFY>Create>Voronoi Polygons tool to generate Voronoi polygons from a set of
input points.
Voronoi polygons are polygons that enclose one point with the border of each polygon. The polygon
boundaries are located at the midpoint between neighbouring points. Voronoi Polygons are the
“inverse” of a triangular irregular network and cover an area that may be thought of as the “area of
influence” for that data point. The area within the Voronoi polygon boundary is closer in distance to the
central Voronoi polygon data point than any other data point in the table.
Voronoi Polygons provide a method for creating a surface without interpolation and gridding. In many
cases, for example when analysing coal or mineral sands drillholes, creating a surface of voronoi
polygons based on the drillhole locations may be preferable to gridding.
Datamine Discover uses the same Voronoi algorithm as MapInfo Pro's standard Voronoi tool;
however, rather than extending polygons to the minimum bounding rectangle of the input points,
Datamine Discover can automatically clip the resulting polygons to either the convex hull, or an
extended buffer distance past the convex hull, or clipped to a selected polygon region.

Example of Voronoi Polygons generated from sample locations
Datamine Discover generates Voronoi polygons from selected points in the front map window. By
default, the created Voronoi polygons extend no further than the outer boundary of the group of
selected points (the convex hull). However, the Voronoi polygons may be extended by any distance
outside of the convex hull by specifying the distance in metres or degrees.
A bounding polygon may also be used to contain the extent of the Voronoi polygons. Select the
bounding polygon region, and then also ensure the points are opened in the same map window. Then
select the Voronoi Polygons tool, and a boundary select will be applied to the polygon to select the
objects in the next layer underneath the boundary polygon, regardless of whether the next layer is
selectable/visible or not.
Create Voronoi Polygons dialog
When the polygons are created, they have the same table structure as the points table on which they
were based. This enables the polygons to be easily coloured, queried or thematically mapped.

MANAGING AND APPLYING OBJECT STYLES

Related tools Picklist Manager
Use the DISCOVER>Data Entry>Setup>Picklist Manager tool to create picklists and manage
object styles. For more information, see:
• Creating and managing picklists
• Applying a single style from a picklist
• Applying multiple styles from a picklist
SELECTING OBJECTS
Datamine Discover provides additional methods for selecting map objects:
• Selecting objects by proximity
• Selecting objects by graphical style
SELECTING OBJECTS BY PROXIMITY

Related tools Proximity Search
Use the QUERY>Distance>Proximity Search tool to identify map objects by their spatial
relationship to other map objects. For example, a proximity search could be used to identify
geochemical samples that are located within 2 km of an old mine site. The search can be further
refined to only identify samples that have a gold grade greater or equal to 2 ppm. Alternatively, perform
a proximity search for all significant copper occurrences that fall with 2 km of a selected fault(s).
Create a proximity search for mineral occurrences around a selected fault

1. Select the map object or map objects to search around, e.g. faults.
Note You can choose more than one object to perform the proximity search around. To quickly
select all map objects in a layer highlight the layer in the Layer Control and choose Select
All from the right-mouse click pop-up menu.
2. Select the QUERY>Distance>Proximity Search tool. The Proximity Search dialog box is
displayed.
3. Choose the layer in the map window that is to be returned in the proximity search (e.g. mineral
occurrence layer). Enter a search buffer Width and appropriate Units to use. The Resolution
value relates to the number of segments used to create the buffer. The higher the resolution, the
smoother the appearance of the buffer. To view the buffer check the Show buffer box and choose
an appropriate Line Style.
The Proximity Search will only select map objects that are located within this buffer zone. If a
number of adjoining map objects are selected one search buffer is created that covers all the
adjoining objects.
4. To refine the selected map objects further check the Where box and use the column and operator
pull-down lists to create an expression similar to that used in an SQL “Where” condition. This
expression informs Datamine Discover to only select map objects located within the buffer that
meet the specified selection criteria. For example, where the copper grade is greater than or
equal to 2 ppm the mineral deposit type equals Au, etc.
5. The search results may be saved to a user defined file name and location. Otherwise the results
will automatically be saved to a temporary table named PROXSRCH. Selected records may be
displayed in a browser and/or added to the current map window.
Specify a unique map object style to display the selected objects in the map window.
6. Click OK to commence the Proximity Search.
If the Show buffer box is checked, the search buffer is placed into the Cosmetic layer and may be
removed at any time. Existing buffers are not erased by Datamine Discover when the Proximity Search
is run again.
In the example shown above, each fault is made up of 5 to 10 separate polylines. When they are all
selected, a buffer is created around all adjoining lines.
Use the QUERY>Map Object>Line Orientation tool to insert the fault orientation as an attribute
for each fault line and then create proximity searches to find mineral deposits or samples close
to specifically oriented fault lines, e.g. 40º - 60º.
See also
Selecting objects by graphical style
SELECTING OBJECTS BY GRAPHICAL STYLE

Related tools Select by Style
Use the QUERY>Map Object>Select by Style tool to select all objects from a table that have the
same graphical style attributes as the selected object.
The Select by Style Dialog Box displays the style of the selected object and allows the selection criteria
to be altered. By default, Datamine Discover selects all objects with exactly the same style from the
same layer as the selected object. You can refine the selection criteria to request Datamine Discover
to select, for example, symbols of the same colour but of any shape or size, or regions of a particular
fill colour regardless of the fill pattern or line style.

To all objects of the same style from a table:

1. With the Select by Style dialog box open, select a graphical object from the map window - all
object types are supported including symbol, lines, polygons and text. An object in the cosmetic
layer may also be selected.
2. Click Get Selected Object Style. The object's properties are displayed.
3. Select which properties to select by. By default all available properties will be used.
4. Now choose which table to search for matching objects from the pull-down list. This can be the
same as the selection table or different table, but not the cosmetic layer.
5. By default the output selection will be named the table name plus "_selection" but this can be
altered. The resulting selection can be opened in a new browser and/or map window.
See also
Selecting objects by proximity
COPYING, MOVING AND TRANSFORMING OBJECTS

• Offsetting copies of an object
• Moving, scaling and rotating objects
• Aligning objects

OFFSETTING COPIES OF AN OBJECT

Related tools Offset Object
Use the MODIFY>Move>Offset Object tool to create multiple copies of a selected object at
nominated offsets in the X and Y directions. The selected object can be of any type. Attributes
can be copied from the base object to the offset objects.
Create up to 10,000 objects offset from the selected object by specific distances in the X and Y
directions. Enter X and Y offsets (positive values are up and to the right, negative values are down and
to the left) and the number of objects to create in the X and Y directions (up to 100 in each direction).
Datamine Discover then creates a matrix of objects.
Check the Retain attributes from selection box to populate the new object records with the browser
attributes from the seed object.
Offset
Duplicating an object (left) by offsetting it in both the X and Y directions (right)
For example, to quickly create a table of mapsheet boundaries:

1. Use the Build Object tool to create the base sheet by keying in the exact coordinates for
corners of the mapsheet.
2. Use Offset Objects to then create a full set of mapsheet boundaries offset from the base
sheet by the X and Y dimensions of the mapsheet.
3. The mapsheet boundary objects can then be used in Scaled Output to quickly produce a
hardcopy map for a specific mapsheet.
Note You can offset an object by degrees by setting the map units to degrees.
MOVING, SCALING AND ROTATING OBJECTS

Related tools Transform Object
Use the MODIFY>Move>Transform Object tool to transform one or more objects by applying
shift, scale and/or rotation.

The Object Transform tool provides a simple method to transform multiple objects. This could be used
in circumstances such as rescaling map annotation for a different output scale or shifting and rotating
all map annotation for a different map projection.
Datamine Discover allows you to perform up to three transform procedures together – for example
rotation followed by a scale and a shift.
Note The order in which scaling and rotation operations are carried out may produce differing
results.
• Shifting – Specify the distance in the map projection units in the X and Y direction to move each
object by. Similar to map units, positive values increase the eastings and northings.
Move
Moving an object by shifting it on both the X and Y directions
• Scaling – Specify the scaling factor for each object. Choose equal scaling in X and Y to retain the
object aspect ratio. You also need to specify the basepoint position for each object, where the
scaling is to be anchored.
Scale
Base
Scaling an object uniformly by specifying equal X and Y axis ratios

• Rotation – Specify the angle to rotate each object by, in degrees anticlockwise from North (use
negative angles to rotate clockwise). You also need to specify the basepoint position for each
object, about which the rotation is performed.
Rotate
Base
Object rotation
The following points should be considered when using Object Transform:

• Transformation of each object is relative to a basepoint in each object.
• If you want to scale and rotate objects relative to one common point, use the
DISCOVER>Projection>Custom Transform tool.
• Scaling of points is not meaningful.
ALIGNING OBJECTS
Related tools Align Objects
Use the MODIFY>Move>Align Objects tool to align two or more map objects. For example,
you can use this tool to create professional looking legends by aligning legend map objects and
text descriptions.
Any type of map object or combinations thereof including points, lines, polylines, polygons/regions or
text may be aligned. To align map objects, select the map objects using any of the standard selection
tools and select the MODIFY>Move>Align Objects tool. The Align Objects dialog box is displayed:
Align Object dialog

Map objects can be aligned with respect to each other vertically or horizontally. When aligning map
objects all selected objects will be aligned with the map object that has the greatest extent according
to the alignment selected. For example, a Left Vertical alignment will align selected map objects with
respect to the selected map object which is located the furthest to the left/east in the map window. The
opposite applies for the right/west of the map window for a Right Vertical alignment. Vertical Centre
alignment will align selected map objects with respect to the centre of the selected map object with the
greatest horizontal extent in the selection.
Align
Applying Vertical Centre and Horizontal Centre alignment options to map objects (left) results in the smaller object aligning
itself to the larger map object (right).
Map objects can also be aligned with respect to each other in a horizontal direction. Top Horizontal
alignment will align selected map objects with respect to the selected map object which is located the
furthest to the top/north in the map window. The opposite applies for the bottom/south of the map
window for a Bottom Horizontal alignment. Horizontal Centre alignment will align selected map
objects with respect to the centre of the selected map object with the greatest vertical extent in the
selection.
To equally distribute a group of map objects along the Vertical or Horizontal axes, use the Disperse
Vertical and Disperse Horizontal options. For example, if five objects are selected to be dispersed
horizontally, the three intermediary objects will be distributed evenly between the X coordinates of the
two end objects.
Note that for the Disperse options, coincident points (where the centroids of multiple objects are
identical) can either be treated as:
• Separate points (default), or
• As a single point so they are not separated. This is enabled by the Keep coincident points
coincident when dispersing option.
If the position of the aligned map objects is not correct use the Undo button to return the map objects
to their original position. The Undo button will only undo the last alignment and only if the original
selection has not changed.
MANIPULATING LINES, POLYLINES AND POLYGONS

• Smoothing
• Thinning
• Cutting
• Joining
• Inserting nodes
• Reversing line direction
• Creating donut polygons
• Clipping

SMOOTHING
Related tools Smooth Lines
Use the MODIFY>Edit>Lines>Smooth Lines tool to improve the appearance of digitized
linework by smoothing abrupt changes in direction.The line smoother works by interpolating a
spline curve through the selected polylines and adding nodes where necessary.
Note This is in contrast to MapInfo Pro smoothing which is a running average type smoothing and
operates on-the-fly. Datamine Discover stores extra nodes for a smoothed polyline.
Smooth Lines tool: the original polyline (green) and the smoothed polyline (red).
Poor results are obtained when a minimum number of nodes define a polyline. For example, if a
polyline in the shape of a rectangle is defined by only four nodes, the line smoother modifies the
fundamental shape and produces an elliptical shaped polyline.
The polyline smoother can be used to overwrite a polyline with the smoothed line or write the smoothed
line to a separate table. If the smoothed polyline is written to a different table, then data attributes are
only carried across with the polyline if the structure of the two tables is identical.
Datamine Discover does not smooth polygons, because of the danger of destroying topology
relationships between adjacent polygons that share boundaries. In general, if such polygons are
smoothed, then the resulting boundaries have small areas of gaps and overlap.
THINNING
You may wish to use the thin polyline options when you are using detailed data at a much smaller scale
than it was digitized at. For example, you may wish to make a less detailed copy of a complex piece of
coastline. Datamine Discover provides two methods of thinning polylines and polygons:
• Removing every nth node
• Removing nodes in flat segments
For more thinning options, see the SPATIAL>Edit>Fix/Clean>Snap/Thin tool.
REMOVING EVERY NTH NODE

Related tools Thin Node Number
Use the MODIFY>Edit>Nodes>Thin Node Number tool to decrease the number of nodes in the
selected polylines or regions by removing every nth node.

Node Thinning dialog
Select the polylines or regions to thin (use any of the MapInfo Pro selection methods) and then
nominate a node thinning factor. Datamine Discover allows you to discard from 5% (1 in 20) to 95%
(19 out of every 20) of the nodes in the selected objects.
This method of thinning polylines and regions may not produce acceptable results on some data sets
such as geological boundaries and you may need to use the second thinning method described below.
Datamine Discover allows you to calculate statistics on the selection of polylines before you nominate
a thinning factor. If you wish to retain the original, more detailed, data set make sure to save the
processed data under a different name. Use the MapInfo Pro HOME>File>Save Copy As tool.
Note Do not thin regions that have adjoining regions as common boundaries will not necessarily
remain the same.
REMOVING NODES IN FLAT SEGMENTS

Related tools Thin Node Position
Use the MODIFY>Edit>Nodes>Thin Node Position tool to decrease the number of nodes in the
selected polylines or regions by removing those nodes that lie within a tolerance angle of
adjacent nodes.
Use this method of thinning nodes in a polyline or region for most natural and geological map objects
such as contours or geological boundary lines.
Node thinning by scale or size
You define the sub-sampling to be carried out on the selected objects by specifying either a thinning
width or a thinning scale. For a nominated thinning width, Datamine Discover examines the first three
nodes in the object. If the second node lies within the thinning width of a line joining the first and third
nodes, then it is discarded, otherwise it is kept and the second to fourth nodes are examined.
For the thinning scale, the same process is carried out with a thinning width implied by the specified
scale. The thinning width is calculated as 1 thousandth of the specified map scale, so that for a map
scale of 1:10,000 a thinning width of 10 m (or whatever current units are in use) is implied.
Use the Thin for scale option when you know what scale you are viewing your data at. Otherwise, use
the Thinning width option if you know what size features and level of detail you need to retain.

CUTTING
Related tools Line Cut
Use the MODIFY>Edit>Lines>Line Cut tool to cut line, polyline and polygon objects (not points
or text) with a line that crosses the objects.
Selected the objects to cut, then select MODIFY>Lines>Line Cut. Datamine Discover then prompts
you to select the line to perform the cutting operation. As soon as you have selected a line, Datamine
Discover carries out the cutting operation.
If Datamine Discover displays a message such as “An error occurred overlaying nodes”, the cutting
operation is not completed and you should check the results.
For more splitting and cutting options, see:
• Clipping
• Creating donut polygons
• The MapInfo Pro tools under SPATIAL>Edit>Split
JOINING
Related tools Line Join
Use the MODIFY>Edit>Lines>Line Join tool to join lines within a specified distance and angle
of each other.
Line or polyline data such as drainage, roads/tracks, pipelines or other utilities can sometimes be
received as a series of disjointed line segments whereby it is necessary to combine them into single
objects. The Line Join tool enables line segments which are located within a specified distance and
within a specified angle from each other to be combined into a single continuous linear object.
The lines or polylines to be concatenated must be selected in the map window prior to choosing Line
Join from the MODIFY tab.
Line Concatenate options
In the Concatenation Parameters enter a maximum distance in which to join lines. Enter a maximum
angle between line segments to join. Lines will be joined where the start or end node is within the
entered distance and angle to the start or end node of another line segment. Options are available to
stop joining lines where multiple line options are found within either the entered search distance or
angle. This will prevent incorrect joins being automatically created but may require some manual
editing using the Line Join tool at a later stage.

Another way of filtering the lines to join is to use an attribute field. Lines will only be joined which are
within the entered search distance and angle and which have the same attribute value; e.g. drainage
classifications or tool types. To use this option check the Join lines by value in column box and select
the attribute field from the pull-down list.
The resulting concatenated lines may be created in the original line table or check the Operate on
copy of data box to create a new table containing the joined linework.
Line segments to concatenate
Resulting concatenated lines
Note If the joined lines are created in the same table, the TABLE>Selection>Revert tool can be used
to return to the original segmented line work so long as the table has not been saved. If it looks
like there are still joined lines after using this menu option, zoom in the map window to refresh
the view. To remove deleted (grey) rows from the browser of the original table select
TABLE>Selection>Save and then TABLE>Content>Table>Pack Table.
INSERTING NODES
Related tools Insert Nodes
Use the MODIFY>Update>Nodes>Insert Nodes tool to insert nodes at specified intervals from
the beginning of a line or into polylines/polygons at regular spacings between existing nodes.
Note that the MapInfo Pro Add Node tool only allows one node to be added at a time to an object.
Whereas the Datamine Discover Insert Nodes tool enables multiple nodes to be added to line, polyline
or polygon objects in a single pass.
In certain situations it may be necessary to increase the density of nodes within a polyline or polygon
object. For example, when gridding contour or other line data and when performing detailed object
editing whilst digitizing. Aside from increasing node density between nodes in existing polyline or
polygon objects, nodes can also be inserted at specific intervals along a straight line object. This option
could be used to plan geochemical sampling programs or ground geophysical surveys.

Nodes can be inserted into a map window selection or in all objects in a table. If a map window
selection is used, select the objects prior to choosing Insert Nodes tool.
Once you have selected the objects into which the nodes are to be inserted, the Insert Nodes dialog
is displayed.
Two Insert Node Options are available:

• Insert Nodes at fixed intervals from start of line
Use this option for line objects (lines with start and end nodes only). Enter the desired interval into
the Enter Maximum Node Spacing window and choose the appropriate units from the pull-down
list.
• Insert Nodes at regular intervals between existing nodes so interval does not exceed maximum
node spacing
This option will initially measure the distance between the existing nodes and if the distance
between these nodes exceeds the distance entered into the Enter Maximum Node Spacing
window then a new node will be inserted mid-way between these nodes. If the distance between
the newly inserted node and the nodes either side still exceed the maximum node spacing then
another node is inserted mid-way between the nodes. This process will continue until the distance
between all nodes in the object is equal to or falls below the maximum node spacing.
To view the nodes once they have been created make sure the table it editable in the map
window. Select a single object and use the Reshape button to view all the nodes in a table.
Note To create point objects from nodes within a map object, use the Extract Nodes tool. This is
particularly useful for creating points from nodes inserted along line at regular intervals.
REVERSING LINE DIRECTION

Related tools Reverse Line
Use the MODIFY>Edit>Lines>Reverse Line tool to reverse the drawing direction of selected
polylines or regions.
Use this tool to ensure that polyline coverage for drainage, roads etc. have a consistent line direction.
This is important for providing indications of direction of flow, or when creating worm diagrams for
stream sampling data.
To use, select the polylines or regions you want to change the direction of, and then select Reverse
Line.

CREATING DONUT POLYGONS

Related tools Donut Polygons
Use the MODIFY>Edit>Donut Polygons tool when a polygon map contains overlapping or in-
lying polygons to cut-out or excise the smaller polygons from the larger ones.
Geological maps commonly show geological units occurring within or cutting across other geological
units. For example, a dolerite dyke may cut across a sandstone unit or a conglomerate may lie within
a greywacke unit. In MapInfo Pro, you must be careful that this situation is handled correctly.
For example, consider there are two geological boundaries in a layer, one inside the other. The outer
one is a Cainozoic unit, the inner one a granite intrusion. If you use the MapInfo Pro Select tool to click
on the Cainozoic unit, the selected region includes the area of the granite. This inner boundary needs
to be cut out or excised from the outer boundary, so that the outer boundary appears like a donut.
When this is achieved and you report on all mineral occurrences within the Cainozoic unit, it correctly
ignores those occurrences that fall within the in-lying granite polygon.
Datamine Discover allows you to cut out all overlapping polygons for an entire polygon table in one
step. All the attributes that have previously been associated with the polygons are preserved. The
cutting is performed on the basis of polygon area with smaller polygons always being excised from
larger polygons.
All you need to specify are the names for the input and output files. As Datamine Discover processes
the polygons, it may come across some cases that cannot be satisfactorily cut out. In this case a
message is written to the file DONUT.ERR in the temporary files folder.
The processing may take quite some time to complete. The more polygons and the larger the polygons,
the longer it takes to process the table. To decrease processing time, you should ensure that the table
to be processed is not open in a map window (so that MapInfo Pro does not spend extra time redrawing
the window each time an object is modified).
Note If the data being processed has not been accurately digitized (for example, polygons overlap
many times along a common boundary) then Datamine Discover may take a lot longer than
expected as it attempts to ensure that no overlapping polygons remain in the map.

CLIPPING
Related tools Vector Clip
Use the QUERY>Map Object>Vector Clip tool to discard data that lies outside a selected
region, clipping the retained data at the region boundary. The clipped data may be written to new
tables in the same folder or to a new folder.
Note Vector Clip does not clip objects contained in the Cosmetic layer.
You can use Vector Clip to create subsets of data from larger data sets. For example, you may wish
to keep all data for a particular tenement in one folder. You can display all your data in a map window
and select the required tenement boundary. Datamine Discover can then discard all data that doesn’t
lie within the tenement. This allows you to easily distribute the data for just that tenement or produce
maps showing only the relevant data. This can also be a great way of producing vector data subsets
for relinquishment reports.
Whilst this can be fairly straightforward to do in MapInfo Pro with one layer, it is very time consuming
to do for multi-layered data sets. Datamine Discover works with an unlimited number of layers, allowing
unsupervised clipping to be performed with just a few mouse clicks.
Note To clip raster images, use the IMAGES>Image Tools>Clip Image tool.
POLYGON CLIPPING OPTIONS

Choose between clipping outside and clipping inside the selected polygon. Clipping outside
removes all data lying outside the polygon, whilst clipping inside removes data lying within the polygon.
Datamine Discover uses a combination of techniques to discard the data that is to be clipped.
For clipping outside, objects that lie totally outside the selected polygon are discarded. Similarly,
objects that lie totally within the polygon are kept without editing. For lines, polylines and regions that
lie across the boundary of the selected polygon, these objects are simply split. Other objects such as
arcs, rectangles and ellipses are converted to polylines or regions and then split. For text objects, if the
centroid of the text lies within the selected polygon, the text is retained, otherwise it is discarded (text
objects cannot be split).
POLYGON CLIPPING DATA TABLES

Datamine Discover lists all of the tables displayed in the map window that can be clipped. Raster
images and thematic layers are ignored. If you wish to leave a table out of the clipping operation
uncheck the checkbox to the right of the table name. The table name is greyed out to show that it is
not to be clipped.
By default, Datamine Discover suggests that you do not edit your existing data, but copy the clipped
data to new tables with similar names to the original tables. The clipped tables contain the original file
name followed by a “_CLIP” or user-defined suffix.

Clip Layer Dialog showing clipping options and default clip suffix
When you click OK, Datamine Discover asks which folder to save the new tables to (if operating on a
copy of the data). When the clipping operation is carried out, all tables are packed and saved, and
removed from the map window. Any thematic layers in the original map window are discarded, so you
should ensure that you have a workspace saved prior to re-running the Clip to Polygon command.
You cannot undo a Clip to Polygon operation, and for this reason we recommend that you operate on
a copy of the original data.
USING POLYLINE AND POLYGON ATTRIBUTES

• Assigning values to and from polygons
• Calculating line orientation
• Extracting nodes
• Calculating area change
ASSIGNING VALUES TO AND FROM POLYGONS

Related tools Assign Values
Use the ANALYSIS>Statistics>Assign Values tool to assign aggregate values using data
attributes from map objects in one table to the containing polygon map objects in another table.
For example, assign the median Au rock-chip sample value to the surrounding geological unit
polygon from which a number of rock chip samples are taken.
Alternatively, use the Assign Values tool to assign polygon data attributes in one table to contained
map objects in another table. For example, assign the underlying mapped geological unit to all soil
samples that are taken within this boundary.
Note Assign Values is a more intuitive version of TABLE>Browser Tools>Update Column.
Specify the Assignment relationship between the two tables. Choose the From Table and from
column via the pull-down lists for the table that contains the value to assign. Choose the To Table and
to column via the pull-down lists for the table that is to be updated with the assigned value. The
method of operation is chosen in the Assign Direction control. Choose to assign from Contents to
Container or from Container to Contents.

Assigning values from one table column to another with a selectable operator
The data to be aggregated or assigned does need to be in the selected data column but may be
specified using an Expression similar to that used in various other MapInfo Pro functions. Select
Expression in from column or to column pull-down and enter in the correct syntax.
The chosen Assign Direction method will influence the Assignment operators available for
selection.
CONTENTS TO CONTAINER
If the Contents to Container assign direction is selected a number of aggregate Assignment
operators are available:
• Frequency
• Minimum
• Maximum
• Sum
• Mean
• Median
• Weighted Mean (mean weighted by the value of another column in the contents table)
• Standard Deviation
• Mean weighted by area (multiplied by a scale factor from 106 to 10-6)
The Contents to Container method can be used calculate the mean assay value of stream sediment
samples weighted by catchment area or to construct a simple density map by assigning the number of
mineralized samples within grid squares to the grid squares.
CONTAINER TO CONTENTS
Use the Container to Contents method to assign a data value such as catchment ID or lithology from
polygons to the points or map objects that lie within the polygons. Datamine Discover assigns the
individual value from each polygon to the contained objects. The individual value may be created from
an Expression.

CALCULATING LINE ORIENTATION

Related tools Line Orientation
Use the QUERY>Map Object>Line Orientation tool to store the orientation of selected lines as
an attribute.
This feature is useful when analysing tables containing linear map objects such as faults, fold axes or
creeks where no directional attributes exist. The Line Orientation tool can be used to obtain the
orientation of a line or polyline and add the direction as an attribute into a selected column in the table.
Line Orientation dialog
Select the column to add the line orientation attribute from the Add Line Orientation to Column pull-
down list. The direction is generally the average orientation for each polyline although options to record
the orientation of the First segment or Last segment are available. In the Use Angles in Range
choose the desired angle range from 0-360, 0-180 or 180-360 for recording the line orientation
attribute. Select a Round By interval from the pull-down list.
Click OK to update the table with the line orientation data.
Use the MODIFY>Edit>Lines>Reverse Line tool to reverse the direction of lines if necessary.
EXTRACTING NODES
Related tools Extract Nodes
Use the MODIFY>Update>Nodes>Extract Nodes tool to extract nodes or line segments from a
polyline or polygon. For example, extract nodes from contour lines and reprocess the three-
dimensional point data to create a new interpolation grid. Extracted node coordinates from
polylines or polygons are added to a new table as attributes with the option to display the node point
objects in a map window. Extracted line segments are automatically displayed in a map window.
Select the polyline or polygons to use in the extraction and choose the Extract Nodes tool. The Node
Extraction dialog is displayed:

Node Extraction dialog.
Select the Extraction Type. If the Extract Points option is selected the Extraction Options will
become available, so you can select an appropriate symbol style. The extracted node points are
created in the same projection as the base polyline or polygon table. All columns in the base table will
be added to the extracted node table.
For detailed linework, it may not be necessary to extract every node as a point. In this case enter a
number greater than 1 in the Extract every n nodes control. For example, Extract very 4 nodes will
extract every 4th node in the selected objects. Enter a file name and location to store the extracted
nodes.
Note Nodes cannot be extracted from map objects in the Cosmetic layer.
CALCULATING AREA CHANGE

Related tools Area Change
Use the QUERY>Distance>Area Change tool to quantify and map changes in area or linear
features between successive tables of data. For example, the Area Change comparator can be
used to examine polygon changes between two mapped tables representing data from different
time periods.
The area change comparison is based on the polygon attributes contained in a column specified by the
user. This column may contain data such as vegetation type, habitat ID, soil class, erosion level, etc.
Datamine Discover groups all the polygons in a table by this attribute and identifies differences
between polygons of the same code in the different map layers. The area change calculator is primarily
designed for polygon data; however it can also report differences in overall length of linear data and
the number of point objects between two tables. Select Compute Area Change from the Data Utilities
menu option to display the Compute Area Change dialog:

Area Change dialog set-up to perform a detailed comparison between the two areas. Regions that have changed in size and
shape is displayed in different patterns as areas gained and lost
Select the two tables to compare from the Table1 and Table2 pull-down lists. Select the polygon (line
or point) attribute column to compare. Datamine Discover automatically assigns a default report table
and map table name and destination. Use the Report Table and Map Table buttons to assign new
names and locations if desired. A tab-delimited text file export option is also available: the text file is
saved to the same directory as the Report Table, with the same name.
The report produced by Datamine Discover lists for each unique attributed code:
• the old and new areas
• the area change (actual and percentage)
• the old and new polygon perimeter
• the perimeter change (actual and percentage)
• the number of old vs. new polygons/areas
If the Show codes lost to/gained from box is checked, a Change field will additionally report on which
attribute codes have either lost or gained in area.
In order for Datamine Discover to display the area change information visibly in a map, the Lost area
style and Gained area style should be set. Datamine Discover can use the original colour of the
polygons and apply a different pattern to show whether area has been lost or gained. Alternatively,
Datamine Discover can retain the original pattern of the polygons and use a different colour to show
area change. With either of these two options, the display of the changed area retains some of the
display attributes of the original data. The user can also specify a new style to show all gained areas
and a different style to show all lost areas. In this case, all lost areas are displayed in the same style,
regardless of their map code.

Map window is opened on completion of Area Change computation. Note area gained or area lost displayed in different
patterns
COLOURING MAP OBJECTS BY RGB VALUES

Related tools RGB Colourizer
Use the MODIFY>Edit>RGB Colourizer tool to colour map objects based on RGB colour
schemes entered as attributes in a table. The RGB Colourizer can also be used to extract RGB
values from point, line or polygon map objects and save them into a table as attribute data.
RGB Colourizer single column and multi-column options
1. Select the table containing the map objects from the Select Table pull-down list.
2. Select the RGB Update Method:
• Update Object Colours – colour map objects based on RGB values stored in the table

• Update Column Values - extract the RGB colour values from each map object and save
them back to the table
3. The Colour Mapping options determine the RGB format to be used. The Datamine Discover
RGB Colourizer can read colour values stored in either single or multi column format. The
columns that store the RGB values can be numeric or character data types. Datamine Discover
can also read or store colour values in BGR format.
• Multi Column format - Red, Green and Blue values are each stored in a separate column,
e.g. Red (199) Green (181) Blue (181).
• Single Column format - Red, Green and Blue values have a formula applied to them to
create a single number string. Using the above example, the corresponding single RGB value
is as follows:
Red (199) * 65536 + Green (181) * 256 + Blue (181) = 13088181
Note When extracting the RGB values from map objects the single or multiple RGB columns
must already exist in the table. If the table does not contain these column(s) use the
TABLE>Maintenance>Table Structure tool to add the required columns to the table.
4. The default output option is to create a new table with the updated coloured map objects or
extracted RGB values. The new table is named using the original source table with a
“_Colourized” extension. To change the output table name or location, click on the Save button.
The map objects or columns in the original table may be directly updated by selecting the Change
Source Table output option. This option will cause the map objects in the table to be permanently
coloured according to the Colour Mapping column or columns selected.
Note The Change Source Table option is irreversible. Make sure that the RGB column or
columns selected for colouring map objects are correct as map objects can be coloured
according to any numerical values in the selected columns. It is recommended that a copy
of the source table be saved prior to using this tool or the Create New Table output is
used.
FORMATTING VECTOR OBJECTS

Related tools Plot Vectors
Use the ANALYSIS>Display>Plot Vectors tool to display velocity or flow data as oriented
vectors with either a fixed vector length or with a length proportional to a magnitude attribute in
the point source table.
The Plot Vectors tool provides quick visualization of vector (magnitude and orientation) data in map
view. For example, water flow, soil creep, erosion rate, dune movement or any surface measurement
which has a magnitude and direction component can be represented in this way. To use the Plot
Vectors tool, a table must contain mapped point locations, with attribute columns for the position
coordinates (Easting and Northing) and the vector azimuth. An optional column can also be added to
control the length of the vector magnitude.

Plot Vectors dialog
1. Select ANALYSIS>Display>Plot Vectors. The Plot Vectors dialog box is displayed.

2. Select the table to create the vectors from the pull-down list.
3. Select the appropriate columns for Easting, Northing, Azimuth and Magnitude (optional).
4. From the Vector Type control, choose Vector to create vector arrows that will be proportional in
length to the magnitude of the selected data column or Scalar to create vector arrows of the
same length.
5. Select a vector Scale and Arrow Style. Adjust the length and aspect ratio of the Arrow Head and
adjust the distance units, to suit the map scale in which you are working.
Datamine Discover will create orientated arrows at each point location according to the column
information specified. You can elect to output the vectors to either the Cosmetic layer (default option),
create a New Table to hold the vectors or to overwrite the existing points in the current vector table. If
the original point symbols are overwritten and you wish to restore them, re-run Plot Vectors and select
the Re-create Points option. Adjust the vector scaling by again re-running the tool on the same data.
The soil creep data is displayed as oriented arrows, the arrow length being proportional to the soil creep magnitude

CLONING OBJECT STYLES

Related tools Clone Style
Use the MODIFY>Edit>Clone Style tool to copy the style of a selected point, line, polyline,
region or text object. This style can then be applied to selected map objects in the current or
another mapper window.
Clone Style dialog
Open the Clone Style dialog. In a map window. select the object to copy the style from, and press the
Copy Style button. The Clone Style tool will automatically detect and display all style attributes for the
selected object.
To apply the style to other objects, check or uncheck the parameters to apply in the Paste Style
Options pane. Select the target object/s to apply the style to (in the same or another map window),
and press the Paste Style button.

Clone Style dialogs for line, region, symbol, and text objects
LINKING OBJECTS TO EXTERNAL DOCUMENTS

Note Datamine Discover provides a number of tools and shortcuts to assist with setting up and using
Mapinfo Pro hotlinks within TAB file layers. For more information on using hotlinks, see
“Specialized Topics in MapInfo Pro” in the Mapinfo Pro User Guide.
You can hotlink external documents to map objects so that they are displayed when the object is
seloected in a map window. For example, you can link drillhole core photographs to drillhole collar.
When the collar is selected in the map window the core photo is displayed. Or you might link a
tenement report to a tenement boundary polygon.
Hotlinking documents or files to map objects can be used to integrate spatial data in your GIS system
with data stored in other external file formats. A map object may have one or more linked documents.
When there is more than one document to display a list of linked documents is available for selection.
Some of the more common linked document file types include:
• MapInfo table or workspace – If the document is a MapInfo Pro workspace or a MapInfo Pro
table, the table is opened within the current instance of MapInfo Pro.

• Text files – Files with the extension .TXT are opened using Notepad. Larger text files will be
opened using WordPad.
• Word/Excel/Access, etc – These files are opened if there is a recognized application registered
with the operating system. Therefore a .DOC file is opened using Microsoft Word, an .XLS file is
opened with Microsoft Excel, etc., provided this application is present on the operating system. If
there is no application registered with Windows for the linked document, Datamine Discover will
display an error message.
Note Each time a document is requested to be displayed, a new instance of the associated
application is started.
• Raster Images - If the document to be displayed for the selected object is in a recognized raster
format (such as BMP or TIF), the image is automatically registered and displayed as a MapInfo
Pro image file. Georeferenced images will be displayed as geographically registered images.
If the linked document is an image that has not been registered, Datamine Discover will automatically
register the image in a non-earth projection and then display it in a new map window. This feature can
be used to display photos of mineralization, thin sections or field sketches by clicking on sites of interest
in the map window.
If the image is registered in an area that lies within the current map window, then the image is loaded
into this map window. If this occurs, the projection of the map window may change as MapInfo Pro
adjusts the map window projection to the image base projection. The projection of an image overrides
any other file type projections within the map window. Therefore any vector data present within the map
window will be warped to fit the image projection.
If two or more images are displayed in the same map window, the projection of the larger image will
take precedence. If an image has already been registered, but does not fall within the map window
(such as a location photo already registered into a non-earth projection), the image is opened in a new
map window.
Using Datamine Discover with registered images allows the creation of a graphical imagery index. For
example, the outlines of a series of remote sensing images may have been saved as polygons. Each
of these polygons can be associated with the name of the image file that it represents. When a polygon
is selected, the associated image can be displayed in the map window.
Any number of images can be linked to one map object and these can all be displayed simultaneously.
The images can then be added to the layout window and printed out alongside the map objects to
which they are associated.
Hotlinking involves the following steps:
1. Set up the Hotlink field in the object table (see Setting up hotlinks).
2. Associate map objects with external documents (see Creating a hotlink).
3. Display linked documents (see Opening hotlinked documents)
SETTING UP HOTLINKS
Related tools Setup Hotlink
Note Alternatively, use the Hotlink options in the MapInfo Pro Layer Control.
To link a document with a map object the full document file path must be entered into a field in
the table next to the corresponding map object record. Select the
DISCOVER>Manage>Tables>Setup Hotlink tool and in the Setup Hotlink dialog, choose the
table and the column(s) to store the file path information.

The hotlink field may be created prior to entering the file path details using the
TABLE>Content>Table>Modify Structure menu option. Alternatively, click on the New Field button
to add a new hotlink field to the selected table. By default the new field is named Hotlink and is 255
characters in size although these parameters can be changed if desired. Make sure all hotlink fields
are checked and click OK to proceed.
CREATING A HOTLINK
Related tools Create Hotlink
Select one map object from the table in the map window to enter the linked document details.
Choose DISCOVER>Manage>Tables>Create Hotlink. The Select document to associate
with map object dialog is displayed.

Browse to the desired directory and select the document to link to the map object and click Open. In
the Hotlink Selection dialog choose the hotlink field to store the document file path.
Click OK to finish. To permanently save the linked document file path, use the HOME>File>Save
Table tool.
To link multiple documents keep the map object selected, choose Hotlink Documents and browse to
the location of the new document to link. Choose a different Hotlink field to store the file path details.
The only limit to the number of documents that can be linked to an object is the maximum number of
columns that a MapInfo Pro table can contain (240). The same document can be linked to any number
of map objects.
Note You can also manually enter document names into appropriate record fields.
OPENING HOTLINKED DOCUMENTS

Related tools Open Hotlink
Note Alternatively, use the Hotlink options in the MapInfo Pro Layer Control.
Select a map object in the map window and select DISCOVER>Manage>Tables>Open Hotlink.
If there is only one linked document, the document will be opened into MapInfo Pro or a separate
application. If there is more than one document linked to the map object, select the desired
document and the Preferred View from the list in the Display Document dialog.

MAP MAKING
IN THIS SECTION
Creating scaled maps 255
Add a map grid 265
Add a scaled frame to a layout 268
Add a title block and scale bar 268
Add a map legend 271
Add and format text and labels 275
Apply transparent fill patterns 281
Apply geological line styles and line annotations 283
MAP MAKING 255
CREATING SCALED MAPS

Related tools Scaled Output
The Scaled Output tool simplifies the creation of scaled hard-copy output from a map window.
To produce an accurately scaled map using Datamine Discover, firstly open the map window,
add all the required layers and change layer settings as appropriate, and then select
DISCOVER>Output>Scaled Output>Scaled Output. The Scaled Output dialog box is displayed, from
which you can set the map scale and frame size, position the map in the frame, and add or remove
components, such as a map grid, title block, and a scale bar, and then create the scaled output layout.
The following tools are provided in Datamine Discover (available under DISCOVER>Output>Scaled
Output) to create and manage your scaled output layouts:
• Scaled Output starts a new scaled output session for the current mapper window.
• Accept Parameters creates or re-creates the layout using the current scaled output settings.
• Modify Parameters re-opens the Scaled Output tool so that you can modify the scaled output
settings.
• Restore restores the scaled map view after zooming and panning.
• Close ends the scaled output session.
The steps involved in creating scaled output are:
1. Select the map scale and size
Select the output map scale and size, and paper size required
1. Select the page size and frame
Select the paper size and page frame required
2. Choose a map grid, title block and scale bar
Select the extra components to include: map grid, title block and scale bar
3. Position the scaled output map
Refine the map position, scale and size
4. Accept output settings and create the layout

MAP MAKING 256
Specify the map grid and title block parameters and create the layout
5. Print a scaled output layout
Save or print the map
A scaled map inserted into a Layout window by Datamine Discover Scaled Output
See also
Print a scaled output layout
Modifying a scaled output layout
Preserving the linked, source map window
Creating additional scaled output maps
Standard map sheets
Scaled output hints
SELECT THE MAP SCALE AND SIZE

A range of pre-set map scales are available, or a custom scale can be specified. Selecting a pre-set
scale will modify the Map Size dimensions (real world extents) displayed in the Actual Map Size box
(the units of measure are defined by the Options>Preferences>System Settings parameters). The
Map Size value will also be altered by the frame size (see Select the page size and frame) selected.
If a custom scale is specified, the Map Size will not update until the Preview button is clicked.
See also
Select the page size and frame
Position the scaled output map
Standard map sheets

MAP MAKING 257
SELECT THE PAGE SIZE AND FRAME

Selecting a frame size from the Frame Setup list defines the size and position of the frame that
Datamine Discover places into the layout window. This frame contains the map window and the size
(in centimetres) is shown in the Actual Map Size box.
Note The frame size and orientation set here (for example, A3 Landscape) does not change the
Printer Setup. Select HOME>Output>Page Setup to alter printer settings. When the Layout
window is opened, it will be apparent whether the Print setup matches the selected frame size.
Alternatively, if a rectangle is selected in the Map Window before opening Scaled Output, this rectangle
is used as the frame size.
Note The page size for the Layout window can only be altered after the Layout window has been
created. If you would like to set a preferred printer and page size, select
PRO>Options>Devices>Printer.
Datamine Discover is shipped with a set of standard frame settings for all the common page sizes (see
Standard map sheets). You can view, edit and add to the list of page settings by choosing the
Configure button on the Scaled Output dialog. The Scaled Output Configuration dialog box is displayed.
When creating a new frame setting, select the page size on which you wish to base the frame and then
alter the margins and frame positions. Datamine Discover allows you to base the frame on any page
size in the groups A0-A5, B1-B5, C1-C5, and A-F.
You generally need to adjust your frame size to account for non-printing margins (which are different
on different printers and different page layouts).
The Non-Printing Margins define the area around the page edge which your printer cannot use (refer
to set-up information for your printer). In the layout window, these are the light grey margins. The Map
Frame Position offsets define the position of the lower left corner of the map frame within the printing
area. Choose Save Settings and give your new settings a name (for example, A4 Top), then choose
OK to return to the Scaled Output dialog.
Note The Non-Printing Margins settings are separate from the Map Frame Position. Therefore, if
you increase the margin size, you will need to reduce the corresponding frame height/width to
maintain a total frame size/position that fits within the paper size.

MAP MAKING 258
To remove a Frame Setting from the list, click Remove under the Maintain Frame Settings List
control and select the frame to delete from the pull-down list.
Note The Printer Setup is not stored with the Datamine Discover Page Setup list.
The Maintain Titleblock List control enables custom title blocks to be available for selection when
using Scaled Output. Custom title blocks are configured to user-defined specifications and may contain
company logos. Click on the Add button to add a new title block to the title block list. Use the Remove
button to delete a title block from the list. See Add a title block and scale bar and Customizing title
blocks for more information on creating your own title blocks.
During the Scaled Output process the map window is re-sized relative to the layout window. Depending
on the screen resolution of your computer the resulting map window may appear very small or parts
may even appear off screen. To change the dimensions of the scaled output map window enter new
width and height values into the Max Windows Dimensions.
See also
Standard map sheets
Add a title block and scale bar
Customizing title blocks
CHOOSE A MAP GRID, TITLE BLOCK AND SCALE BAR

By default, the Draw Grid option is selected. To produce a map with no map grid, clear the check box.
When Datamine Discover draws a map grid, the grid is sized to fit the frame, and grid text labels are
sized appropriate for the output scale. You will be prompted to configure the map grid later when you
accept the scaled output parameters.
From the Title Block list, select the title block style you want to use in the map. The list of available title
blocks can be maintained using the Configure option. You will be prompted to configure the title block
later when you accept the scaled output parameters.
The Add frame border option places a frame border around the selected title block in the Layout
window. This can be useful if the title block linework is obscured by the edges of the mapper window.
From the Scalebar list, select the scalebar style you want to use in the map. If no title block has been
selected, the Scalebar is displayed separately and saved to the default Datamine Discover temporary
directory. For details on how the different scalebars appear, see Add a title block and scale bar.
See also

MAP MAKING 259
POSITION THE SCALED OUTPUT MAP

Click the Preview button to display a rectangle in the current map window showing the position of the
map. This rectangle (called MapSize) shows the area that is covered by the map, and is always drawn
in the centre of the window. You can zoom and pan the map window as required, and drag the map
size rectangle to the exact position required by selecting it. You cannot change the size of the MapSize
rectangle as this will alter the predefined map scale. Alternatively, click Set Map Position to specify
the coordinates of either the centre or one of the corners of the map. If the page size or scale are
unsuitable, you can change these settings and click Preview to redisplay the MapSize rectangle.
When you are satisfied with the size and position of the map, click OK.
To redisplay the Scaled Output tool without losing your current settings, select
DISCOVER>Output>Scaled Output>Modify Parameters clicking the Scaled Output tool now will
start a new session and initialize the settings).
See also
Select the map scale and size
ACCEPT OUTPUT SETTINGS AND CREATE THE LAYOUT

Related tools Accept Parameters
When you are satisfied with your selections, click DISCOVER>Output>Scaled Output>Accept
Parameters. Datamine Discover then creates the layout and prompts for the map grid and title
block settings (see below). When the settings have been entered, the scaled output layout is
drawn.
Note If you change the view (pan or zoom) in any of the map windows after accepting the map
position, the map scale and the appearance of the map in the Layout window is altered.
While in a Scaled Output session, use DISCOVER>Output>Scaled Output>Restore to
restore the map window to the correct aspect ratio and scale.

MAP MAKING 260
MAP GRID SETTINGS

The Map Grid dialog box is displayed, from which you can set the grid spacing, the grid style, the grid
labels, and other options. See Add a map grid for details on how to use this tool. When you have
finished making your selections, click OK to continue.
TITLE BLOCK SETTINGS

The Title Block and Scale Bar Options dialog box is displayed, from which you can enter the title block
details, select the position and scale of the title block, select whether the scale bar is displayed inside
the title block or separately, and other options. See Add a title block and scale bar for information on
using this tool. See Customizing title blocks for more information on creating your own title blocks.
When you have finished making your selections, click OK to continue. To cancel adding the title block
and continue creating the output map, click No Title.
Note The title block (and optionally scalebar) is created as an individual map window and added to
the layout as a frame. This means you can switch to the title block map window and edit the
details as required. Be careful not to zoom in or out or resize the title block map window as this
could change the size of the scale bar drawn on the hard copy map.
See also
Choose a map grid, title block and scale bar
Add a map grid
PRINT A SCALED OUTPUT LAYOUT

The completed layout can then be printed with the standard print tools on the HOME tab.
See also
MODIFYING A SCALED OUTPUT LAYOUT

Related tools Modify Parameters
To modify the settings of a scaled output layout, click DISCOVER>Output>Scaled
Output>Modify Parameters and make the necessary adjustments.
After modifying the settings, click DISCOVER>Output>Scaled Output>Accept Parameters to
apply your changes.
You can also change the positions of the title block and map window frames in the layout window. Use
the MapInfo Pro Select tool to select the frame and drag to a new position. To realign the title block
frame with the map frame, select both frames with the Select tool while holding down the SHIFT key,
and use the align tools on the LAYOUT tab to align the frames. This is useful when the title obscures
required details on the map. You can also Add a scaled frame to a layout.
See also
Add a scaled frame to a layout
Scaled output hints

MAP MAKING 261
PRESERVING THE LINKED, SOURCE MAP WINDOW

Related tools Restore
Standard Views
Mapper State
The frame object in a layout window is dynamically linked to its source map window. Zooming, panning
or resizing the map window will have a direct impact on the frame object and vice versa. If you want to
change the map window scaling or extents (for example, to zoom in and resize labels or change object
styles), choose one of the following options to preserve the linked view:
• If the Scaled Output session for the layout is still active, use DISCOVER>Output>Scaled
Output>Restore to restore the map window to its original scale and extents.
• Use DISCOVER>Windows>Standard Views to permanently save the mapper state before
making any changes and then restore the mapper state with the same tool.
• Use the DISCOVER>Windows>Mapper State to do a one-off save and restore of the
mapper state.
For further tips, see Scaled output hints.
CREATING ADDITIONAL SCALED OUTPUT MAPS

Related tools Modify Parameters
If you want to make a map of the same area, but using different data to that currently displayed in the
map window, any changes to the map window extents, scale, layers and object styles will be reflected
in the current layout.
If you want to make a map for a different area or at a different scale, without closing the current
scaled output session, select DISCOVER>Output>Scaled Output>Modify Parameters . The
size and position of the frames in the layout are not changed, but the map window is zoomed to
fit the new scale.
Note If you alter the size, position or zoom width of the map window at any time, the scale of the
map in the layout window changes.
See also
Scaled output hints
STANDARD MAP SHEETS

Datamine Discover ships with MapInfo Pro tables containing the 1:100,000 and 1:250,000 mapsheet
boundaries over Australia. These tables can be found in the Program
Data\Encom\Discover\Discover_Tutorial\Other Data directory. Each sheet is a discrete, attributed,
transparent polygon. You can use these boundaries, or other standard sheet boundaries that you
create yourself (e.g. using DISCOVER>Move>Object Offset); to have Datamine Discover produce
correctly scaled standard map sheets.
Open the appropriate mapsheet table and display it in your map window with the data that you wish to
print. Then select the mapsheet you wish to use, using any of the MapInfo Pro selection techniques,
and open Scaled Output.

MAP MAKING 262
A standard 1:250,000 mapsheet ready to plot
Datamine Discover displays the same dialog as that shown above for User-Defined Output, however
Datamine Discover detects and estimates an output scale. Because the aspect ratio of the map is
defined by the selected map boundary, you cannot change the frame height and width in the frame
settings configuration, but you can alter the position of the frame on the page, and change the scale
that you wish to print at.
Ensure your printer set-up has the correct paper size, and then click OK. Datamine Discover correctly
scales the map, and insert both the map name and number, if available, into the title block. If you wish
to create your own standard mapsheet layers, ensure that they have fields called Name and Number
so that the mapsheet name and number is recognized by the title block.
The scale that Datamine Discover suggests for your selected polygon is based on the area that it
covers. You should always check the scale to ensure that it is what is required.
See also
Select the map scale and size
SCALED OUTPUT HINTS

• If any polygon is currently selected in the front map window when Scaled Output is run, the
dimensions of this polygon are used to size the map window. The selected polygon does not need
to be a regular shape like a map-sheet.
• You can use the MapInfo Pro SPATIAL>Set Clip Region command with Scaled Output to quickly
produce a plot of just that map data which lies within a given tenement.
• Use the LAYOUT>Move>Align Objects tools to re-align the scalebar/title block frames if you
have moved them.

MAP MAKING 263
• Use the DISCOVER>Output>Map Grid tool to overwrite or add to the map grid.
• Use the HOME>Output>Tools>Registered>North Arrow tool to quickly add a north arrow
to your map or layout.
• Using the DISCOVER>Output>Map Output>Scaled Frame tool to add extra frames to the
layout. This allows you to add an accurately scaled frame to an open layout window, but
does not provide map grid or title block options.
• When printing out drillhole cross-sections, use the DRILLHOLES>Section Output tool, which
provides much of the functionality of Scaled Output.
• When running Scaled Output on a data set that takes a long time to redraw the screen, use the
ESC key to interrupt the MapInfo Pro redraws. Be careful not to cancel from dialogs for map grid
and title block details. Alternatively, set complex or large layers to invisible until ready to print.
• Use the Page Settings dialog to define other frame sizes such as oversized A0 for large maps, or
wide margin A4 and A3 for printing small maps on large format printers (with large non-printing
margins).
• If you need to make changes to the map window after it has been inserted into a layout, then you
must use the pan/zoom functions with great care, otherwise the positioning and scaling of the
frame in the layout is not correct..
Scaled Output map with additional layout frames

MAP MAKING 264
EXIT SCALED OUTPUT

Related tools Close
To exit Scaled Output, select the DISCOVER>Scaled Output>Close. You are then prompted
to save the title block, scale bar and map grid (if these tables are open) and a workspace that
includes the layout, for future use. The title block, scale bar and map grid tables need to be
saved under new names or they will be overwritten the next time that Scaled Output is used.

MAP MAKING 265
ADD A MAP GRID

Related tasks Map Grid
Draw a map grid in any projection to the front map window. To use, select
DISCOVER>Output>Map Grid>Map Grid. The Map Grid dialog box is displayed, from which you
can select the grid projection, grid style, grid spacing and other options.
The Map Grid dialog box
To configure the map grid, see:

• Map grid projection
• Grid spacing
• Map grid styles
• Save the map grid
• Overlay multiple map grids
When you have finished configuring the map grid, click Preview to display a temporary grid (without
saving). If you adjust any grid settings, click Preview again to apply the changes to the preview grid.
When you are satisfied with the grid, click OK. The grid is then saved and drawn in a layer in the front
map window.
This function is also available as part of the Scaled Output map-making wizard (see Creating scaled
maps).

MAP MAKING 266
MAP GRID PROJECTION

By default (Auto option) the map window projection is automatically detected and used to construct the
grid. To change the projection of the map window, use the DISCOVER>Projection>Favourite
Projection tool (see Map projections).
If you wish to draw a map grid in another projection from the current map window projection, choose
the User Defined option. A list of projections from the Datamine Discover favourite projection list is
displayed. Select the projection that you wish to use from the list or use the pull-down list to select
another projection. The map window projection is not changed, however the grid is drawn in the
selected projection.
You can also display local (non-earth) grids and real world grids together. To display local and real
world grids together, you should define and store a grid transformation setting (see Coordinate
transformations.)
With one or more grid transformation settings saved, choose the Custom Coordsys option from the
Projection control and select the appropriate transformation setting.
GRID SPACING
Datamine Discover suggests a rounded grid spacing based on the width of the map window. The grid
spacing is in the coordinate units of the grid projection - usually metres, but degrees for Lat/Lon
coordinate systems.
You can override the Datamine Discover suggested grid spacing by typing in your preferred value. For
Lat/Lon grids, choose between grid spacing in decimal degrees or degrees, minutes, seconds by
clicking the checkbox.
MAP GRID STYLES

The grid is drawn in one of three basic styles:
• Lines
• Points
• Edge ticks
These basic styles may be altered by changing the line, symbol type and colour. Additionally, you may
choose to have grid labels placed in a mask outside the map frame.
For a grid drawn as lines, each grid line is a polyline with normally one node placed at each grid line
intersection. Where the grid lines show substantial curvature (for example, when a Lat/Lon grid over a
large area is displayed in a projected coordinate system) you may need additional nodes for each grid
line. Set this value in the Other Label Options button.
Grid line labels are, by default, drawn at the left and top margins of the map window. In a map window
with metres labels, choose a small font size (9 or less) so that the labels do not appear too intrusive.
The grid label font size is relative to the current map window scale.
You can also draw grid labels to the bottom and right margins of the map window. You may wish to use
this option when overlaying grids in different projections, for example so that labels for a UTM grid are
drawn at top and left, whilst labels for a Lat/Lon grid are drawn at right and bottom.
Other options available allow you to control the frequency of grid lines labels (choose from no labels,
every line labelled or an intermediate setting), and what prefix or suffix to add to the coordinate label
(for example, choose to label as E5000 or 5000 mE etc). You can simply re-order the arrangement and
add spaces or characters in between them, or remove the value altogether.

MAP MAKING 267
<coords> = The coordinate value of the line

<units> = units of the coordinates
<eorn> = an 'E' or 'N' for the Easting or northing axis.
When you choose to have the grid labels drawn in a mask around the edge of the map, Datamine
Discover creates an extra table (called AUTOGRID_MASK) to hold the mask. The map window is
enlarged slightly so that the visible area of the map window (inside the mask) remains the same. In
some cases the page margins accessed via Print Setup may need to be adjusted for the map to fit
correctly on the page.
To save the Map Grid Style settings as default, tick Save as default settings, and when Preview or
OK is clicked the style settings will be saved as default.
The three basic styles of map grid that can be generated by Datamine Discover
SAVE THE MAP GRID

By default, the map grid will be saved to the AUTOGRID table in the Discover Temporary directory. If
there is an AUTOGRID table open but not in the front map window, you will be asked to save this table.
If there is an existing grid in the map window, select Append to existing map grid to preserve the
existing grid. To prevent the grid from being overwritten when the Map Grid tool is used later, click Save
As to save the map grid to a different table.
OVERLAY MULTIPLE MAP GRIDS

If you wish to overlay another grid with a different projection, choose the Overlay another AutoGrid
option. After drawing the first grid, Datamine Discover displays the map grid dialog again and you
should choose different parameters (different projection and probably different grid style).

MAP MAKING 268
ADD A SCALED FRAME TO A LAYOUT

Related tools Scaled Frame
Add a scaled frame to the layout window of the front map window. A layout window is created if
one is not currently open. Select the window you want to add to the layout and then select
DISCOVER>Output>Map Output>Scaled Frame. The Scaled Frame dialog box is displayed,
from which you can select the scale, size and position of the new frame.
Use this tool in conjunction with DISCOVER>Output>Map Output>Legend (see Add a map legend) to
add legend and DISCOVER>Output>Map Output>Title Block (see Add a title block and scale bar) to
add a title block and scale bar to a layout.
ADD A TITLE BLOCK AND SCALE BAR

Related tools Title Block
Use the Title Block tool to create a title block window from a custom title block template, add
details to the title block, and optionally add a scalebar. The title block map window is sized to fit
the extents of the title block so that it can be easily added to a layout window. The Titleblock
dialog box is displayed, from which you can select the title block template, scale bar type, and map
scale. See Select title block and scale bar for details.
When you have made your selections, click OK to display the Title Block and Scale Bar Options dialog
box, from which you can enter the title block details, its position and other display options. Click OK to
draw the title block in the title block map window. See Configure the title block and scale bar for details.
Use DISCOVER>Output>Map Output>Scaled Frame to then add the title block as a scaled frame to
a layout. For more information, see Add a scaled frame to a layout.
This function is also available as part of the Scaled Output map-making wizard (see Creating scaled
maps).
SELECT TITLE BLOCK AND SCALE BAR

MAP MAKING 269
Select the title block template to edit and the scalebar and scale to use. For information on adding and
removing custom title blocks from the list, see Customizing title blocks.
The title block shipped with Datamine Discover contains a range of scalebars to choose from. Both
metric and imperial measurement system scalebars are available. The scale bar can be drawn in one
of the six selectable formats.
Alternatively, create a scale bar so that it is displayed in a separate map window that can be moved in
the layout independently of the title block. This scalebar can be saved and re-used in later layouts. To
enable the correct scale to be displayed in a layout make sure the scalebar map window is displayed
at a 1:1 zoom and that the scale bar frame in the layout window is scaled at 1:2 for page sizes up to
50 cm in width or at a 1:1 scale for layouts larger than 50 cm.
The main scale bar formats that can be selected from the initial dialog are:
SCALEBAR 1
SCALEBAR 2
SCALEBAR 3
CONFIGURE THE TITLE BLOCK AND SCALE BAR

The title block is stored as a template in a non-earth “cm” based table and can be customized. The
dialog displayed for data entry of title block details depends upon how the title block table is
customized. See Customizing title blocks for details on customizing the title block.
The default title block shipped with Datamine Discover presents a dialog similar to that shown below.
The five Title Lines are concatenated (and centre justified). The details (Author, Reference etc.) are
placed in the appropriate positions within the title block. The font styles used are defined in the title
block template table on disk.

MAP MAKING 270
TITLE BLOCK OPTIONS

Titleblock Position defines where in the layout window the title block frame is placed. The default is
in the lower right corner of the main map frame. Normally, the title block is displayed in the layout as a
frame on top of the map window frame. However, for customized title blocks, you may wish to have the
title block behind the map and you should check the Send Titleblock to Back check box.
By default, the title block is saved in the Discover temp folder as TITLEBLK.TAB. If you are going to
use this title block in the future (as part of a workspace) you should use the Save As button to save the
title block to a new table.
When entering title block information, you can specify a scale for the title block. By default, if the map
to be printed is more than 50 cm wide, the title block is displayed at a scale of 1:1; otherwise the display
scale is 1:2. Use this control to enter the scale required for the title block.
SCALE BAR OPTIONS
By default the Scalebar in the format that was selected on the initial dialog will be displayed embedded
in the title block.
Show ScaleBar Seperately will display the Scalebar in a separate window. By default this will be
saved ot the Discover temp folder as SCALEBAR.TAB If you are going to use this title block in the
future (as part of a workspace) you should use the Save As button to save the scalebar to a new table.
If you choose Don’t Show Scalebar the scale bar will not be opened.
OTHER OPTIONS
Open layout template from workspace enables a workspace for a layout to be opened with a pre-
defined format instead of opening a new empty layout. For example, the layout could contain extra
annotation (such as north arrows, extra legends, fixed logos and legends) as well as other map
windows such as an overview window for the state or country that the map is part of.

MAP MAKING 271
When creating a layout template to be used in this way, be careful that only those tables and windows
required for your layout are actually open when you save the workspace. You may also need different
workspaces for each different map format (paper size, orientation etc) that you wish to produce.
Display list of layers in map will display a list of the various layer names of the source map at a
selectable location. Note that by default this list is produced, but you can select the No List option if
preferred.
ADD A MAP LEGEND

Related tools Map Legend
Create a customizable legend for up to 10 layers in a multi-layered map. The order of items
within the legend may be altered. The legend is created in a map window for easy insertion into
a layout
The DISCOVER>Output>Map Output>Map Legend tool is used to create detailed legends where
individual map objects contain attribute data in one or more columns. For example, a geological
polygon map may contain attribute columns for geological unit, group or formation and age. The Map
Legend tool can create a legend using up to three of these attribute column entries in the map legend.
As the Map Legend tool requires the map objects to contain attribute data which can be grouped
according to graphical styles it is not suitable for use with some tables. For example, a collar table may
contain collars with the same graphical style but attributed with the Hole ID. The Map Legend tool will
create a legend with every Hole ID listed as an individual entry. If there was a second attribute column
which contained an entry for each collar such as “Drillhole” then this column could be used to create a
legend with only one entry.
The Datamine Discover legend is created into a map window in Non-Earth (centimetres) projection.
This allows Datamine Discover legends to be edited and scaled. Datamine Discover legends can be
added to a layout using the DISCOVER>Output>Map Output>Scaled Frame tool.
You can also create a simple legend for map objects based purely on map object style regardless of
attribute data, use the MAP>Content>Add Legend tool. The legend window created using this
method is not a true MapInfo Pro table and can only be edited by double-clicking in the legend window.
LEGEND TABLES AND COLUMNS

To create a Datamine Discover legend, the active or front map window must contain the layers to
include in the legend. Select the tables to display in the legend from the Create Legend dialog box.
The selected tables are displayed in the Map Legend dialog box.

MAP MAKING 272
Dialog for legend creation. The user has already selected 4 layers to incorporate into this legend.
The tables selected are displayed in map layer order. Legend items from each table are displayed in
the legend according to record order within the table. To alter the order of the legend items in a table
check the Specify Order option. This will enable legend items to be sorted alphabetically or by a user-
defined order such as geological age.
Choose the primary column from each table to be used for legend creation from the Legend Column
1 pull-down list. The column (or field) that you nominate for each table from the Legend Column 1
defines what objects are drawn on the legend. For example, if the nominated column is “RockCode”
then Datamine Discover will create a legend entry for each unique RockCode. If then nominated
column is “Age” then a unique legend entry is created for each Age grouping. The data held in Legend
Columns 2 and 3 is added as supplementary text.
The legend tool only produces sensible results if the data is structured appropriately. That is, all records
containing a specific value in Legend Column 1 should have the same graphic style. In the above
example, all polygons having RockCode = “Czc” should have the same colour. If this is not the case,
the legend may be not be created properly as the legend graphical style is obtained from the first record
in the table that has each value.
Two additional columns containing text may be displayed in the legend. Make sure the text in these
columns is structured correctly in relation to the column specified in Legend Column 1. The text
selected for columns 2 or 3 may be obtained from a related lookup table. Select Lookup from the list
of available columns and browse to the location of the look-up table. Match the column in the look-up
table with the corresponding column from the Legend Column 1.
LEGEND STYLE
By default, Datamine Discover generates the Legend in one column with the title at the top and legend
items at 2 cm spacing. Datamine Discover provides the option of creating the Legend in 2 columns with
a user-defined line spacing. Legends can be easily edited once they are created using the MapInfo Pro
and Datamine Discover editing tools. The font style for legend titles and each text column can be set
by clicking the Style button. The option to display a Legend Box Border is also available.

MAP MAKING 273
By default legend items will only be created for map objects that are currently visible in the map
window. To include all map objects from the selected tables uncheck the Legend from objects within
map window only option.
LEGEND ORDER
The order of individual items in the legend can be specified in one of the following ways:
• No ordering - items are placed into the legend in the same order that they are read from the
table.
• Custom - manually order the individual items in the legend by moving them up or down the list.
• Alphabetic order - order items in ascending or descending.
• Lookup code from table – order items according to a value in another column in the same table.
• Lookup code from lookup table - order items according to a value in external look-up table.
For each layer that the Specify order option has been checked, the Legend Order dialog box is
displayed. A list of the legend items for that layer is displayed. For Custom, use the Up, Down and
Delete buttons to alter the list. Alternatively, set the Re-order mode to Alphabetical, either ascending
(A-Z) or descending (Z-A).
When using a Lookup code to re-order legend items the Legend Order from Column Values dialog
box is displayed, from which you can select a column from either the same table or a different one. In
this instance the legend item is matched to a numeric value which Datamine Discover can use to
determine the order of the legend items. These options could be used to re-order geological units by
Age.

MAP MAKING 274
Dialog for changing the order of legend items
A map legend created by Datamine Discover

MAP MAKING 275
ADD AND FORMAT TEXT AND LABELS

Datamine Discover provides a range of tools to label map objects for professional quality map
production:
• Adding text labels
• Formatting text
• Modifying label angles
• Updating labels stored in tables
• Adding line and point labels
ADDING TEXT LABELS

Related tools Label Creator
Label Creator is a powerful tool for creating text labels at a specified scale (i.e. labels at a fixed
size) for professional quality map production. With this tool you can label:
• An entire table dataset
• A selection (spatial or attribute query)
• Individual objects as they are selected
TO USE THE LABEL CREATOR TOOL:

1. Ensure the target dataset to label (e.g. a polyline table of survey lines or a polygon table of
boundaries) is open in the current map window. This table requires an attribute field from which
the labels will be created (e.g. 'Line' or 'Zone').

MAP MAKING 276
2. If a subset of the dataset is to be labelled (recommended initially for larger datasets to finesse the
labelling parameters) make a selection with the appropriate tool. For example, to label only lines
within particular Map Sheet polygons, ensure the Map Sheet series is open in the same window
as the polyline table, and then SPATIAL>Selection>Boundary Selection to select one or more
map sheet polygons (hold down SHIFT to multi-select). The lines contained by these polygons will
be selected.
Note A selection is not required for adding labels dynamically to individual objects using
the Labelling Object button.
3. Select DISCOVER>Output>Labels>Label Creator.
4. Select the target table or *Selection* in the Label Source Table pull-down list. If using the
Labelling Object button, specify the source table instead of <Selection>.
5. Select the attribute field to create labels from in the Label Source Column pull-down list.
6. Set the desired Style options (colour, font and size, etc). Labels are sized according to scale. This
can be either by the scale of the current Window Scale, or a user-defined Map Scale
(recommended)
7. For polylines and polygons, labels can be either centred on the Object, or aligned with the First or
Last point (Object node) using the Options Label control. The Angle of the label can also be set
as either Parallel to the object (recommended for polylines) or Fixed. A fixed angle allows the
user control over the label display angle. A number of Advanced labelling options are available for
more precise label control.
8. Labels can be output to either the MapInfo Pro Cosmetic Layer or a defined Table. If finessing
your labels in terms of size, scale, density, etc, it is recommended to operate on only a small
subset initially (see step 2 above), and utilize the cosmetic layer for output. The Clear Cosmetic
Layer button allows its contents to be quickly deleted with the dialog still open, so that another
variation of label parameters can be regenerated.
9. If labelling an entire table or existing selection, click Generate to create your labels. If
dynamically adding labels to individual objects, click the Labelling Object button so
that it indicates ON, and select the objects to label.
ADVANCED LABELLING OPTIONS

The Advanced button on the Label Creator tool allows the following options:

MAP MAKING 277
• Control the Vertical position of the label with respect to the object. The vertical position of the
label can be positioned Above, Centered and Below the object centroid. If set to either Above or
Below, the Perpendicular Offset can be set (in mm) from the map object centroid.
• Offset Labels East and North (in mm) of their initial position. Use negative values for West and
South displacements
• Change the Case of labels to:
• <Proper> to apply title-style (capitalize the first letter in each word).
• <UPPER> to apply uppercase to all letters.
• <lower case> to apply lowercase to all letters.
• Control how labels are wrapped along polyline with Label Splitting:
No splitting Word splitting Letter splitting
• When processing features (e.g. a road) comprising of multiple line or polylines with coincident
end/start points, you can Allow Duplicates for joined lines. Each line or polyline will have a
separate label. Disabling this option will label the first line or polyline (in any collection of identical
attributed objects, if they have coincident start/end points).
• Allow Overlapping Labels allows labels to over-print.
• Filter the size of Line and polygon Region objects that are to be labelled.
• To only label line objects over a certain length select the Process Lines option and specify a length
in metres.

MAP MAKING 278
• To only label polygons 'less than' or 'greater than' an area, select the Process Regions option and
specify an area in metres squared.
FORMATTING TEXT
Related tools Format Text
Use DISCOVER>Output>Labels>Format Text to set the text font size for a specified output
scale. You can also resize any selected text objects to prepare a map for printing at a new scale.
Often you want to change the font size of existing text to prepare it to be displayed at a different scale.
With the standard MapInfo Pro text tool, you must have the window at the correct scale in order to get
the text size correct. Using the text formatting tool in Datamine Discover you can adjust the text size
by entering the font size that you want and the map scale that this size refers to. Additionally you can
change the angle at which the text is displayed.
You should have a map window open and active. If you have selected text, it is altered to the style that
you select. The Format Text dialog box is displayed.
Specifying text size, style and angles
Enter the Font Size and angle and the map scale at which this size is correct. The map scale defaults
to a rounded value of the current Map Window scale.
The Font Size defaults to 10 point at the current Map Window scale, but accepts any valid numeric
input. The Text angle defaults to 0º, i.e. left to right horizontal (normal text orientation).
Note MapInfo Pro text angles increase anticlockwise from this direction so that 90º is vertically up
and 270º is vertically down. Also, when you change the scale/zoom of the map window, you
need to reset your text size using this menu option.
MODIFYING LABEL ANGLES

Related tools Label Angles
This feature alters the label angle for a specified map layer.
MapInfo Pro labels are drawn horizontally. There is no way to change the label angle for more
than one label at once. Use the DISCOVER>Output>Labels>Label Angle tool to set the label angle
to a value other than zero for all objects in the layer.
Datamine Discover uses the current label settings (such as label column, zoom layering and font) for
the specified layer, but alters each label so that it displays at the required angle. If the labels for this
layer are not already displayed, then Datamine Discover causes them to be displayed. If you wish to
store the labels for later use, you must save a workspace for the map.
Note This feature is not available with query layers.

MAP MAKING 279
UPDATING LABELS STORED IN TABLES

Datamine Discover provides two complementary tools for modifying text labels that are already on your
map:
• Updating text labels from a table
• Updating a table from text labels
Commonly, text labels are stored in a table used just for map annotation purposes, and it does not
contain data. Once the label has been created, the link between the data and the label is based on
location only.
You may wish to alter the text labels for a number of reasons, such as:
• Having adjusted the position of sample labels to avoid over posting, you want to change the label
text from the Pb assay value to the Zn assay, but keep the new label positions.
• Sample numbers have been provided as labels in a DXF file with a corresponding spreadsheet
with no coordinates. You need to be able to create a MapInfo Pro table with sample values joined
to the location of the samples.
• Colour code sample assay labels using the same colour patterns as in the drillhole display
module.
UPDATING TEXT LABELS FROM A TABLE

Related tools Labels from Table
Use DISCOVER>Output>Labels>Labels from Table to update the text in text objects according
to the values in a nominated column. This column can be in the same table or a different table.
When updating with values from a different table, Datamine Discover joins the two tables simply by
record number in the two tables. If the record order in the two tables is not appropriate then you need
to join the two tables using SQL.
See also
Updating labels stored in tables
Updating a table from text labels
UPDATING A TABLE FROM TEXT LABELS

Related tools Table from Labels
Use DISCOVER>Output>Labels>Table from Labels to update the table from text labels. This
provides a simple method of adding the text label string into a column in the browser window.
This feature is especially useful when dealing with DXF files containing sample number labels.
See also
Updating text labels from a table
COLOURING TEXT LABELS WITH A LEGEND

Related tools Colour Labels
Use DISCOVER>Output>Labels>Colour Labels to recolour text labels with colour patterns
defined in the drillhole display module. Datamine Discover allows you to use any colour pattern
that has been defined in the drillhole display module, and to colour the text objects based on the
text string or alternatively, based on the value in a column.

MAP MAKING 280
If you want to colour the text objects using the colour definitions stored in a Datamine Discover colour
table, then use the MODIFY>Edit>RGB Colourizer tool (see Colouring map objects by RGB values).
See also
ADDING LINE AND POINT LABELS

Related tools Line/Point labels
The DISCOVER>Output>Labels>Line/Point Labels tool enables a user to apply text labels to
point data that has been collected along lines such as soil geochemistry samples or ground
geophysical readings. This function can be very useful for annotating detailed survey data i.e. a
survey of ground magnetic readings collected at 1m intervals can be annotated at 10m intervals
(display every 10th reading).
Each line number and selected point locations can be annotated at the same time. Line labels can
automatically be placed at the start and end of each line and sample points can be labelled with a value
from a selected column at a user specified interval.
The Line and Point Labels dialog box is displayed:
Line and Point Annotation dialog
Select the table to use as the base for the line and point annotations from the pull-down list. The table
must contain a text column that stores the line number or line name for each sample point. Select this
column from the Select Line column pull-down list. Select the column to use that contains the sample
point number (must be a numeric field) from the Select Point column pull-down list.

MAP MAKING 281
The line and point labels may be added to the cosmetic layer, to another open table or into a new table.
By default, the start and end of every line is labelled with the line name or number. Uncheck the
relevant box to only display line labels at the start or end of a line, or to not display any line labels at
all. The Label points box is also checked by default. Enter the desired point annotation spacing (for
example, label every 10 points to annotate every 10th sample).
Use the Sort point column to make sure the point data column is sorted so the sample numbers are
listed in numerical order in the original data table. Select to either filter by Row Order or Point Column.
Datamine Discover automatically determines the Line label size and Point label size based on the
scale displayed in the map window or you can enter your own label parameters.
Note Datamine Discover annotates the first and last sample in each line irrespective of the sample
point annotation spacing defined.
Example of annotated soil sample lines with selected points labelled
APPLY TRANSPARENT FILL PATTERNS

Related tools Custom Patterns
Use the MODIFY>Edit>Custom Patterns tool to apply a standard shade pattern to selected
polygons. The shading is created as linework or points and (if the polygon has a transparent fill
pattern) does not obscure underlying map layers such as rasters. The shading is created in a
separate table.
The custom patterns are composed of lines, stripes or points that fill a polygon at a nominated spacing.
Once a custom shade has been defined, it can be saved as a named Pattern.
You can easily select an existing pattern from the list. You should specify a map scale to apply this
pattern. This allows you to use the same pattern at a variety of display scales.

MAP MAKING 282
Custom Pattern selection dialog
PATTERN TYPE
Choose between a Line, Point or Stripe Pattern Type. A line, brush or point style can be selected
from the normal MapInfo Pro range of line, brush and point types and colours.
You can select symbol styles from any of those available, including custom bitmaps. If you have used
a custom bitmap to fill a region, then note that the bitmaps are placed as the bottom layer in the map
and may be obscured by other non-transparent region fill styles.
Stripe patterns are made up of equal width stripes in alternating brush styles. Choose the stripe brush
styles from the full range of MapInfo Pro brush colours and fill patterns.
PATTERN DENSITY AND ORIENTATION
For line and stripe patterns, choose an orientation between 0 and 180 degrees for the line to be drawn
at (0º is vertical, 90º is horizontal). For point patterns, this option is unavailable.
You should then choose a Pattern Density or Width. The value suggested by Datamine Discover
depends upon the current scale level of the map window, and is specified in the distance units of the
map window. The closer the spacing, the longer time the pattern takes to generate.
You should also note that the pattern is suitable only for the current scale of the map. If you zoom in
or out, the pattern spacing remains the same in map units, so that the pattern appearance changes (it
becomes more dense as you zoom out, and vice versa).
By default, Datamine Discover places the shading in a new layer called SEETHRU, stored in the
Discover Temporary folder. When you run Custom Patterns, the existing SEETHRU table is
overwritten. If a table named SEETHRU is in the front map window, you may append the new shading
to it.
Use the Save As button to save the shading to a table that can be used later with a workspace.
PATTERN LIBRARY
You can easily store custom pattern definitions in the Datamine Discover Pattern Library. Click on the
Add button from the main dialog to store a new pattern, or select an existing pattern to edit or delete.

MAP MAKING 283
For added flexibility, you can combine line and point patterns to provide a polygon fill of complex
appearance. Simply select a different pattern style and click the Add button.
Note If you combine stripes with other pattern types, the appearance of the pattern is unpredictable
as Datamine Discover cannot control the order in which MapInfo Pro draws the different
elements in the pattern. To display these patterns together, select 2 custom pattern layers, the
lower one containing stripes, and the upper containing the other pattern.
APPLY GEOLOGICAL LINE STYLES AND LINE ANNOTATIONS

Related tools Line Annotation
Line Annotation Select
The MODIFY>Edit>Lines>Line Annotation tool is specifically for adding geological annotation
to linework for map output. Annotation for a variety of styles is added at a user-specified spacing
and size, for a specific output scale. Similar to the Datamine Discover text labelling function, the
annotation appears at a different size if output is at a different scale to that specified.
Line Annotation Dialog Box

Line annotations may be displayed at a specified interval by checking the Place Every control
and entering a distance. Alternatively, check the Place with Cursor control to use the
MODIFY>Edit>Lines>Line Annotation Select tool to position the line annotation along the line
selected by the cursor in the map window.
Select an Annotation Type. A Non-Text annotation may be selected from the line annotation pull-
down list and includes entries such as fault, folds and shear zones. Text Annotation refers to
placement of any defined text character selected from a list of all available characters (ASCII codes 32
to 255). Other attributes such as text size, colour, etc. can be selected using the Text button. The
Symbol Annotation Type enables any special symbol fonts, such as ET Structural, to be selected as
a line annotation. See Styles and symbol fonts for a list of structural and geological symbols.
For selected annotations such as Unconformities or Faults the placement of the annotation in relation
to the boundary lines is important as it may be used to denote age differences between the two
geological units. Datamine Discover provides two methods to use when determining placement for
these types of annotations. If the Left/Facing Up box is checked, the annotation will be placed on the
line and facing out towards the side or top of the map window.

MAP MAKING 284
Alternatively, check the Use Line Direction box to place the annotations on the left or right according
to the direction in which the line has been digitized. To place the annotations on the left make sure the
Left/Facing Up box is checked as well.
A selection of line annotation types available
STRUCTURAL LINE STYLES
Datamine Discover appends a number of line styles to be used to represent structural or geological
linear features to the standard MapInfo Pro Line Styles list.

MAP MAKING 285
For example, linestyles which are used to display geological unconformities or thrust faults can be
selected for use prior to creating linear map objects or to modify the appearance of existing linestyles
in a table. The appended linestyles and their general use are as follows:
Geological and structural linestyles added to the MapInfo Pro Line Styles
If the younging direction for a selected linestyle is displaying incorrectly, select the line(s) in the
map window and use the MODIFY>Edit>Lines>Reverse Lines tool to reverse the current line
direction. The younging direction should now be displayed on the correct side of the line.
Note If the structural or geological linestyle spacing is not appropriate for the map scale at which the
map is to be plotted, use the Line Annotation tool to create your own custom spaced line
annotations.

CAPTURING MAPS AS
IMAGES AND
MOVIES
Additional tools for creating registered raster images are described in
Importing and exporting images. For information on editing, reprojecting,
registering and other image functions, see Working with images.
IN THIS SECTION
Saving a map window as a registered raster image 287
Making movies and animations from a map window 288
CAPTURING MAPS AS IMAGES AND MOVIES 287
SAVING A MAP WINDOW AS A REGISTERED RASTER IMAGE

Related tools Map to Image
The Map to Image tool will convert the select map window view into a raster image in a number
of compressed formats at the selected level of detail and resolution.
To convert any data into a registered raster, open a new map window in MapInfo Pro that contains the
required tables or make an existing map window the active window.
1. Set the window dimensions and scale so the map window contains the information to save.
Whatever is visible within the map window will be saved as the raster image.
2. Select IMAGES>Image Tools>Map to Image to display the Map to Image dialog box:
3. Select the window you to wish to convert to a raster image from the Select Window to Save list.
4. Select the raster format from the Image Type drop down list. Available formats include .PNG,
.BMP, .JPEG, .TIF, .GEOTIFF (note though that Discover Mobile does not support .PNG). For
compatibility, GEOTIFFs are recommended as they contain an embedded EPSG code for the
projection system.
5. Use the Detail drop-down list to increase the level of detail in the image from the fixed screen
resolution (96 dpi). By default Datamine Discover will save an image which is double (2x) the size
(width and height) of the map window on the screen.
Note This tool will only work on a default normal text size (96 dpi).
6. Enter a value into the Transparency box to apply a transparency to the entire image (enter 0% for
an opaque image).
Note Transparency is applied only in the MapInfo Pro TAB file.
7. Check the Set background transparent box to change the white background default.
Note Background transparency only applies to PNG and TIFF format images and is embedded
in the image file.
8. Check the Create World File box to create an associated world file for the image which contains
the registration information – this is useful for opening in programs without using the TAB file.

9. Click OK for the conversion to raster image to proceed.

See also
Supported file formats
MAKING MOVIES AND ANIMATIONS FROM A MAP WINDOW

Related tools Window Animator
The Datamine Discover Window Animator tool is designed to capture a series of different map
window or data views which can be then be viewed as a continuous animation sequence within
MapInfo Pro. Alternatively, the animation sequence can be exported as a movie file which can
be replayed through software such as Microsoft Windows Media Player. The tool can be used to
enhance presentations by adding new data layers to a map window to show the exploration history of
a project area, to highlight temporal trends within an environmetal dataset, or to show the relationship
between local and regional exploration features.
Note An animation file can only be created from a single mapper window.
1. Select DISCOVER>Output>Window Animator to display the Window Animator dialog box.
Note Do not adjust the extents or size of the mapper window while creating the animation.
2. From the Window Animator, you can:
• Create an animation file
• Play an animation file
• Edit an animation file
• Create a movie file
CREATE AN ANIMATION FILE
The Create/Edit tab is split into two sections:

• The Frames section displays the created frame records (captured window layers) along with
buttons to capture, update, delete and save an animation or movie file.
• The Preview section displays a preview of the captured mapper window. The Lock Window Size
box should be checked after creating the first frame so that the map window dimensions are the
same for all subsequent frames in the animation.
TO VIEW A FRAME IN THE PREVIEW WINDOW:
• Select the frame in the Frames section, and click Preview Selected Frame.
TO CAPTURE FRAMES AND CREATE AN ANIMATION:
1. Open a mapper window and adjust the window dimensions to the desired size. Arrange the data
layers in the map window to display the first capture view.
2. Click New to capture the current mapper window view. This view is added to the Frame
list and is assigned the default name of ‘Frame 1’ and a default timing of 2.0 seconds.
• To change the default frame name, click in the Name cell and overwrite with the new name.
• The Timing value entered is how long the captured mapper window view will be displayed in
the animation or movie playback. If the animation is to move rapidly through a series of views,
a short time frame should be selected. Alternatively, for an animation to change between
views more slowly, longer timing values should be selected. A different timing value can be
entered for each frame.
Note Do not adjust the mapper window dimensions while creating the frame views as this will
adversely affect the animation or movie file generation.
3. In the map window set up the view for the next frame capture. You can zoom, pan, add new map
layer(s), turn on a thematic layer, and annotate map objects. Once the view is ready for capture,
click New again and modify the frame name and timing values. Continue to update the map
window view and create animation frames as required.
To change the order of the frames as they appear in the animation sequence use
the buttons to the right of the Frame list. These options include; Move to First, Move
to Last, Move Before and Move After.
4. Once the created animation is completed, select Save and navigate to a selected folder
to save the animation. The animation file is suffixed with an .ANI extension.
Note The animation file created is similar to a traditional MapInfo Pro Workspace. The
animation file stores information such as the map window dimensions, full file paths for all
layers open in the map window, zoom parameters, amount of time each view is displayed
along with details relating to thematic map layers, labels, style overrides, etc. When the
animation file is first loaded Datamine Discover opens each of the tables from the file path
listed when the animation was created. Therefore, if any of the tables referenced in the
animation file are moved or delete, the animation will not load correctly.
TO ITERATE THROUGH MULTIPLE TABLES:
The Tables button allows the selection and ordering of multiple tables to be consecutively
displayed in your animation. Any tables not selected in this dialog, but present in the map
window, will be displayed statically as the 'base map' layer.
This is a quick and easy way of automatically configuring many tables for display, such as tens or
hundreds of gridded surfaces depicting salinity variation over time.
On clicking OK in the Table Series dialog, the tables are added as individual frames to the Window
Animator dialog.

TO ITERATE THROUGH FIELD VALUES:

Instead of iterating through tables, the Fields button allows the user to specify a field
within one vector dataset to create a series of groups: the animator can then sequentially
display these groups. For instance, this may be a company or mesh size within a
geochemical dataset, a date or time field within environmental monitoring data, or a
lithology field in a geological map.
Field Value Series diallog box with numeric field
The Field Value Series dialog requires a Table, Field and grouping Method to be specified. This
functionality supports numeric, character, date, time and date/time field types; the available Methods
will depend on the selected field's format. For instance, numeric data (assay values, sample counts,
etc) will have a range of statistical methods listed, as well a custom option (see numeric example
above). Character fields will present a list of unique entries (see character example below). Date, time
and date/time fields will present a range of temporal options (see date example below) as found in
many other Datamine Discover tools, such as grouping by year, month, day of the month, day of the
week, etc.
Field Value Series diallog box with character field

If a date or date/time field is present in the dataset, a date range of interest can additionally be set
(regardless of what field was set as the primary grouping field). In the example below, data grouped by
day of the week has been limited to a date range of interest, set as illustrated below. Note that all the
components of the Start and End range dates can be typed directly into the interface (for example,
select the month, and type '11' to set November).
Field Value Series diallog box with date field
Defining the date range
On clicking OK in the Field Value Series dialog, the groups are added as individual frames to the
Window Animator dialog.
See also
Making movies and animations from a map window
Play an animation file
Edit an animation file
Create a movie file
PLAY AN ANIMATION FILE

Animation files can be loaded and played in order to review the final animation sequence, perform
modifications to an existing animation e.g. adding new layers, adjusting timing or to save the animation
as a movie file.
To load an animation Browse the Play tab of the Windows Animator dialog, select the Browse
button and navigate to the folder where the animation file is stored. Once the animation file is
loaded, use the following Playback Controls to review the animation:

• Play – Play animation file from start to finish. Note that the animation file will play from whichever
frame is highlighted in the Create/Edit tab. If this is not the first frame then the animation may not
be played in full.
• Stop – Halt the animation playback.
• Pause – Suspend the animation playback. Click Play to resume.
Windows Animator Play tab
Note If the Hide dialog during playback option is selected, the Stop and Pause buttons will not be
accessible.
See also
Create an animation file
Edit an animation file
Create a movie file
EDIT AN ANIMATION FILE

Animation frames can be modified during creation or after the animation file has been saved and re-
loaded into the Windows Animator tool.
1. In the Create/Edit tab click on the frame to be modified in the Frames list.

2. With the frame selected, click Preview Selected Frame. The frame view is displayed in the
current map window.
3. Modify the data display to the desired map window view.
4. Click Update to update the selected frame with the current mapper window view.
Alternatively, click Delete to delete the selected frame.

5. Once the modified animation is satisfactory, click Save.
See also
Play an animation file
Create a movie file

CREATE A MOVIE FILE

The Window Animator tool can save an animation (.ANI) as a movie file (.AVI). Movie files can be
viewed in a number of different media software applications, e.g. Microsoft Media Player.
To generate a movie file click Create Movie and type a name for the movie file and
location. A video compression dialog is then displayed. It is recommended to
choose a compression option when saving a movie file, as even simple animations
can have an uncompressed size of ten to hundreds of megabytes.
AVI MOVIE FILE FORMAT

One of the oldest and still most commonly found video file formats available today is the AVI format.
This was the early Microsoft file format that allowed content producers to combine audio and video into
a single file. The acronym AVI stands for Audio/Video Interleave-Microsoft video format. Microsoft has
since given up development of the AVI format, instead preferring to develop its own video compression
technology in the form of Windows Media Video (WMV).
The AVI format has a simple architecture which means it can be run on many different systems like
Windows, Macintosh, Linux and Unix. In fact many media players such as WMP, Real and QuickTime
can play AVI files. As the AVI format is not suited for Internet playback, AVI files are downloaded to a
PC and then played locally rather than trying to ‘stream’ the content.
Since the AVI format is so simple, many vendors and individuals have created a Codec that can work
with AVI files. Codec stands for COder/DECoder. It is a small piece of software that allows you to
create or play compressed movie/audio files. MPEG-1, MPEG-2, MPEG-4, DivX ... are all examples of
a Codec. AVI, ASF, WMV are file formats that can be used with a Codec. AVI is also a container format,
meaning it can be made using many different codecs. MPEG-4 is a new international standard from
the International Organization for Standardization (ISO). The MPEG-4 Video is closely related to ISO
H.263.
Note After creating a movie file (*.avi) the playback may appear distorted or pixelated. This may be
due to incorrect Codec’s loaded on your computer. If you require a CODEC update, many
resources are available on the Internet.
See also

VIEWING DATA IN
THREE DIMENSIONS
With Datamine Discover 3D you can rapidly visualize, model and analyse
your drillhole and related datasets in 3D, and then dynamically plan follow-
up drilling to test your theories.
IN THIS SECTION
Datamine Discover 3D 296
Viewing data in 3D 296
VIEWING DATA IN THREE DIMENSIONS 296
DATAMINE DISCOVER 3D
Datamine Discover 3D is designed to work seamlessly with Datamine Discover and requires an
upgraded license to activate its full functionality. Users without a Datamine Discover 3D license can
nevertheless access the viewer mode of this application. The viewer mode allows you to drape map
windows views over gridded surfaces in 3D and existing 3D sessions from other users can be viewed.
Datamine Discover 3D enables data to be viewed interactively with zooming, panning and fly-through
capability. View orientations can also be taken from Datamine Discover 3D back into MapInfo Pro and
displayed in a layout for presentation purposes.
DISCOVER VIEWER
Sessions and models created with Datamine Discover 3D can also be shared with non-Discover users
by installing the free Discover Viewer from http://www.pitneybowes.com/pbencom/products/location-
intelligence-and-gis/encom-discover-3d-viewer.html.
VIEWING DATA IN 3D
A full Datamine Discover 3D license allows surfaces representing topography, geochemistry and
geophysics, drillhole sections containing assays or lithological data, or any other mapped data
combinations created using Datamine Discover to be displayed in the Datamine Discover 3D
interactive three-dimensional environment. Additional objects such as 3D DXF files, grid surfaces and
raster images, plus point and line data can be added to the 3D displays via MapInfo Pro or directly into
Datamine Discover 3D. Drillhole projects can be viewed in 3D, with multiple downhole data displayed
on the drillhole trace.
DATAMINE DISCOVER MAP WINDOW

From any Datamine Discover map window you can:
• Right-click in the map window and select View in 3D to drape the map over a topographic DEM in
Datamine Discover 3D.
DATAMINE DISCOVER DISCOVER 3D TAB

From the DISCOVER 3D tab in Datamine Discover you can visualize your GIS data in 3D, via options
such as:
• Select Open 3D Window to open a new 3D session.
• Select 3D Points to show a point dataset (such as collar or soil sampling locations) as an
attributed point cloud in 3D.
• Select Drillhole Traces to visualize an open drillhole project in the 3D environment
• Select Surfaces to view terrain/DEM and geochemical grid surfaces/rasters in 3D.
Open PRO>Add Ins>Datamine Discover>3D Help for information on using these and the many
other 3D display tools available on the DISCOVER 3D tab in Datamine Discover.
See 3D Help for more information on preparing data for viewing and working within the Datamine
Discover 3D environment.

VIEWING DATA IN THREE DIMENSIONS 297

GRAPHS AND
PROFILES
IN THIS SECTION
General purpose graphs 299
Stacked profiles 304
GRAPHS AND PROFILES 299
GENERAL PURPOSE GRAPHS

The GrapMap tool provides interactive data display and analysis functionality using an
extensive range of 2D and 3D graphical visualization and analysis techniques. Data exploration
is a fundamental component in understanding complex patterns and relationships which may
exist in your datasets, whether the data is geochemical, demographic or sales-orientated. GraphMap
provides a powerful and intuitive way to identify these relationships and examine their interactions.
The GraphMap tool can provide solutions to a diverse range of industries and their datasets. Some
examples of use include:
• Structural geology (stereograms, rose diagrams)
• Exploration geochemistry (probability plots, scatter diagrams, ternary diagrams, box graphs)
• Sales, demographics and marketing (histograms, pie charts, line & bar graphs such as age vs.
income or expenditure)
• Hydrogeological and environmental monitoring (scatter, line, box and bar graphs)
• Crime analysis (histograms, line and pie graphs)
The GraphMap tool being used to examine a structural dataset
The GraphMap tool incorporates the following key functionality:

• Extensive graph display modes, including Scatter, 3D Scatter, Bar, Histogram, Bubble, Lines, Box
& Whisker, Pie, Scatter Matrix, Probability, Ternary, Stereogram and Rose.
• Linked selections between multiple graph windows
• Ability to link selections between GraphMap graphs and MapInfo Pro mappers and browsers.
• Add background reference images to graphs to help identify relationships amongst datasets.

• Add a graph to an existing map window.

• Extensive symbology management including the ability to modify the colour, size and symbol
properties using a discrete grouping variable, a continuous variable or a selection and apply
these across multiple graphs.
• Create and examine relationships between multiple tables, such as collar and assay files, or
stream sampling sites and temporal water quality data.
• View summary Statistics such as Median, Variance, Standard Deviation, Kurtosis, etc for an entire
dataset or selection.
• Create complex derived fields using an extensive range of mathematical functions and operators.
• Save selections to either a Boolean field (i.e. attributed True or False) and apply these as a filter
to subset your data. Alternatively save selections to a Group field.
• Create and import reusable selection regions for identifying groups of data.
• Export graphs as MapInfo Pro tables.
• Export graphs as raster images.
• Export dataset, including derived fields and selection filters to a MapInfo Pro table or a comma
separated value (.CSV) file.
• Save and reload GraphMap workspaces.

GETTING STARTED WITH GRAPHMAP

GraphMap can be started with or without a dataset open in MapInfo Pro. If an appropriate
dataset is already loaded in MapInfo Pro when GraphMap is started, a selection dialog will be
displayed for you to choose a dataset to load into the tool. Alternatively, if no dataset is open in
MapInfo Pro, then you can load a data file directly using the ANALYSIS>Display>Graphing>Graph
Overlay tool.
Quick Access toolbar Graph tabs
File menu Menu tabs Ribbon bar
Data window Table window Graph window
Legend window
Various components of the GraphMap user interface
The GraphMap user interface consists of several key components. These are summarized below and
described in detail later in this chapter.
• File Menu - provides facilities to load and export data
• Quick Access Toolbar – customisable toolbar of commonly used tools
• Menu Tabs – a range of menu specific ribbon bars containing the main graphing utilities
• Sidebar Windows – a number of dockable sidebar windows are available to display selected
dataset fields, legends for graph selections, dataset statistics and graph data in tabular format
• Graph Windows and Tabs – main graph area to display graph windows. Graph Tabs across the
top enable the individual graph windows to be brought to the front

GraphMap has been designed to work with either spatial or a spatial datasets of a univariate or multi-
variate nature. Spatial datasets are represented internally in GraphMap as point locations, however
these can be linked back to more complex objects (such as lines and polygons) that are open in
MapInfo Pro through the use of selections.
The following exercise explains the basics of using GraphMap. The GraphMap module contains
significantly more functionality, which is described in Using the GraphMap tool.
TO CREATE A GRAPH WITH THE GRAPHMAP TOOL:
1. Select ANALYSIS>Display>Graphing.
2. Select a file or query to load into GraphMap from those open in MapInfo Pro. Alternatively,
choose None and open datasets from directly within GraphMap from the File Menu. This menu
contains options for opening, saving and exporting graph data along with a list of recently used
graph files.
3. On the Create tab, click the Builder button to open the Graph Builder dialog.
4. The bottom portion of the dialog will change to display the required axis assignments (X, Y
and/or Z) appropriate to the graph type. Use the pull-down menus to assign the required
data fields (e.g. X and Y fields for Scatter and Stereogram graphs, Y field for Probability graphs, X
or Y fields for Bar, Histogram and Rose graphs, etc).
5. Additionally, a Group field can be assigned for any graph type, allowing the data displayed to be
separated based on each unique attribute in this designated field. If required, set this using the
Group pull down list on the right of the dialog. Within the following Select Groups dialog, the user
can choose to display either:
• Single graph window for all the data with each group coloured separately
• Multiple graph windows, each representing a unique attribute or
• A Layout window of a matrix of graphs, each relating to a unique attribute.
• A Geo Located window in which all the graphs are arranged geographically next to the
corresponding sample site.

The user must also select which groups to display from the list provided, allowing only those
groups of interest to be plotted. Examples of the use of groups include separating geochemical
data by geology, sampling or assay method or date; analysing sales data by suburb or product; or
assessing demographic data by age group, occupation or salary levels. It is not generally
recommended to use a numeric field as a Group field.
6. Press OK to generate the graph: a new graph window (or windows) will be displayed. Experiment
with the graph types to create a number of graph windows.
7. To pan around a graph window, hold down the right mouse button whilst moving the
mouse (or activate the Pan button on the Quick Access toolbar at the top of the
GraphMap window). Use the Zoom buttons to control the view level, or the mouse wheel.
8. To make a selection from the graph window, use one of the three selection tools on
the Quick Access toolbar at the top left of the GraphMap window.
9. Once a selection is made, change to the View Menu tab, and press the Statistics button.
This will open a new window displaying the statistics for the current selection, which will
update with each new selection.
10. If multiple graphs based on the same dataset are open, a selection made in one will be
highlighted simultaneously in all graph windows. This is an excellent way to visualize different
aspects of the same selection easily.
11. To change the symbology of the current selection, change to the Modify Menu tab and select
new display options from one of the Colour, Size or Symbol pull-down menus. The selection will
adopt this new style in all open graphs. Multiple selections in multiple graphs can thus be
identified with user-defined symbology.
Set colour
Set size
Set symbol

STACKED PROFILES
Related tools Stacked Profiles
The Stacked Profiles tool creates a linegraph of a nominated field displayed along a traverse
base line. Stacked profile presentations of line oriented data are frequently used in geophysical
and geochemistry data analysis. Advantages offered by stacked profiles over imagery or point
displays include:
• Trends and anomaly correlation between lines can be subtle and easier to identify or display in
profile data compared with contouring or imagery
• Multiple data channels can be displayed at the same time with identical or varying scaling
• Various filter operators can be applied to line data and the results optimally displayed in stacked
profile form
• Stacked profiles created within Datamine Discover offer the following features:
• Control over clipping (high and low) thresholds
• Filling of a profile above or below a definable baseline (a variable area presentation)
• Linear or logarithmic scaling
In order to generate a stacked profile the data table must contain a column with a unique line identifier
attribute (e.g. line number) and at least one numeric data column on which to create the profile. Open
the data table to use in the stacked profile generation in a map window.
TO CREATE A STACKED PROFILE:
1. Select ANALYSIS>Display>Stacked Profile.

2. Select the table to use for the stacked profile from the Dataset pull-down list. Select the data
column to display in the profile from the Field pull-down list. Select the column containing the
unique line identifying information from the Line pull-down list.
Note Stacked Profiles assumes that the data points grouped by Line field are sorted linearly
along the line (e.g. by northing and easting).
3. Check the Draw Across Nulls box to enable Datamine Discover to continue to draw a profile
when a blank data field is encountered. In the event of larger gaps in the sampling interval within
the one sample line, check the Distance Threshold box and enter a distance. When the distance
between two sample points is greater than the value entered as the distance threshold, Datamine
Discover starts a new profile on the same sampling line. If a distance threshold is not entered, a
continuous profile for the line is displayed.
4. Select formatting options:
• Scaling of the field data can be linear or logarithmic and comply with the Scale Factor of the
map in which the stacked profiles are displayed or in units per centimetre.
• The baseline or x-axis may be displayed with the profile. Use the Baseline pull-down list to
select from the range of baseline options. A baseline may be created according to the
minimum, maximum, average or median value of the data column. A user-specified baseline
value can also be entered.
• In the Line Style control check the Show Base Lines box to display the base line or x-axis of
the profile. Check the Show Field Lines to display the profile for the selected data column.
Use the line style buttons next to each option to select the desired line style and colour.
• A profile may be filled with a solid colour to denote samples with values above or below the
baseline or a user specified value. Click on the colour buttons to change the fill colour. The
minimum and maximum values in the data column are automatically inserted into the Clip
control. Check the Above or Below box to enter another value in order to clip the data range
used to the specified data range.
The stacked profiles are output to a single table and added as a new layer to the mapper containing
the source data. If you have elected to fill above or below the baseline, the fill is written to a separate
layer as a series of polygon objects.

USING THE
GRAPHMAP TOOL
See Graphs and profiles for an overview of the GraphMap tool and other
graphing tools.
IN THIS SECTION
Starting GraphMap 307
GraphMap menus and toolbars 307
Creating graphs 314
Preconditioning data 321
Creating derived columns 323
Viewing data values 325
Arranging and modifying graph displays 326
Selecting data in graphs 331
Multi-table relationships 334
GeoLocated graphs 335
Displaying statistics 341
Changing the style of graph objects 342
GraphMap settings 348
USING THE GRAPHMAP TOOL 307
STARTING GRAPHMAP
• On the ANALASYS tab, under Display, click Graphing.
If a suitable dataset is already loaded in MapInfo Pro when GraphMap is started, a selection
dialog is displayed, from which you can select a dataset. If no dataset is open, then you can load
a data file directly using the GraphMap File menu.
GRAPHMAP MENUS AND TOOLBARS

• File tab
• Quick Access toolbar
• Menu tabs
• Sidebar windows
FILE TAB
• Open From MapInfo – allows datasets already open in MapInfo Pro to be loaded into GraphMap.
• Open from File – opens a MapInfo Pro .TAB, Comma Separated Value .CSV, SQL Express
.MDF, or MS Access database file directly from the file system.
• Open Workspace – open an existing GraphMap Workspace .GMW file.
• Save Workspace – the current GraphMap session (graphs, symbology, legends, etc) can be
saved as a GraphMap workspace (.GMW). Alternatively, all datasets open in the session can also
be saved into the .GMW file using the Save Workspace and Data option.
• Print – print one or more graph windows to a Printer or installed PDF Printer.
• Export Graph As - outputs one or more graph windows as MapInfo Pro TAB files (and opens
them within MapInfo Pro) or the current graph window as a raster image in .PNG or .XAML
formats.
• Save Data As - outputs the current dataset to a new MapInfo Pro TAB file or a comma-delimited
text file (.CSV), including user defined filter fields and derived-columns
• Save Legend to MapInfo – outputs the Legend window (see Load and save styles from legend)
to a MapInfo Pro TAB file, and opens it into MapInfo Pro.
• Close - closes selected datasets and all associated graphs.
• Options – displays the GraphMap Global Options dialog.
• Exit – exits the GraphMap tool.
• Recent Documents – For convenience GraphMap maintains a list of recent files in a panel to the
right of the main File menu. Selecting a file from this list will load it automatically.
QUICK ACCESS TOOLBAR
The Quick Access toolbar is automatically docked at the top of the GraphMap dialog. The toolbar
contains a number of icons relating to the selection of sample points in a graph window and general
graph navigation functions as follows:

SELECTION
Select by Rectangle allows a selection rectangle to be created by pressing and holding the left-
mouse button and dragging the mouse. All graph point samples within the rectangle are
highlighted in the graph window.
Select by Region allows a freehand selection region to be drawn around a number of graph point
samples by pressing and holding the left-mouse button. Releasing the mouse button will close
the region.
Select Live Rectangle - as the selection rectangle is drawn, all graph sample points within the
selection region are highlighted within all graph windows automatically.
Create overlay selection region creates a permanent selection region which can be saved and
reused with other datasets.
NAVIGATION
Zoom In and Zoom Out by either left-mouse clicking within a graph window or draw a
rectangle to zoom to the contents.
Pan enables the graph view to be moved by clicking and dragging with the left-mouse button
3D Navigation enables rotation in graphs such as 3D Scatter and Bubble plots. Hold the left
mouse button down whilst moving the mouse to rotate the view.
CUSTOMIZE TOOLBAR
The Quick Access Toolbar can be customized by selecting the pull-down menu at its right end,
and selecting Customize Quick Access Toolbar from the drop-down menu.
The Customize Quick Access Toolbar dialog contains four customization options:
• Select the User Customize option, and populate/reorder the right hand window with the desired
tools from the left-hand pull-down list of categories. Note that some tools are mouse-button
specific. Press OK to apply.
• Select either the Wheel Mouse, Laptop Pad or All Tools (default) Preset options and press OK
to apply

The Quick Access Toolbar can also be placed below the Menu Tab ribbon bar by selecting the
appropriate option either from this dialog, or from the Quick Access Toolbar drop-down menu.
The Menu Tab ribbon bar can be minimized so that it only appears when a menu tab is selected (e.g.
Create, Modify, etc). Select the pull-down menu at the right end of the Quick Access Toolbar, and
select the Minimize the Ribbon option.
MENU TABS
The menu tabs provide access to the main toolbars:
CREATE TAB
The Create tab ribbon bar contains buttons for all the different available graph types, a simple graph
builder wizard and the ability to assign fields in the source data table as graph axes, group or filter
fields. For more information, see User Guide: Creating graphs.
MODIFY TAB
The Modify tab ribbon bar contains buttons for enhancing the appearance of graph selections with a
range of colour, size and symbol options. For more information, see Changing the style of graph
objects.

DATA TAB
The Data tab ribbon bar contains buttons for making and saving graph selections. Selections can be
made and viewed in both the graph window and in the source data table in MapInfo Pro. Buttons for
creating derived columns to graph from existing columns, data preconditioning to remove nulls or
negative numbers and set up table relationships to link data in one table with another are also
available. For more information, see Selecting data in graphs.
SETTINGS TAB
The GraphMap settings ribbon bar contains options to enable the programming of mouse buttons for
various graph functions and modification of global settings for general and selected graphs and axes.
VIEW TAB
The View menu tab ribbon bar contains buttons to control how individual graph windows are displayed
and also the ability to view graph windows outside of the GraphMap module. Visibility of the side bar
Data, Legend, Statistics, Relations and Properties windows can also be toggled on and off.
CURRENT GRAPH TAB
The Current Graph menu tab contains buttons for customizing the graph display and modifying axis
lines and labels,

SIDEBAR WINDOWS
DATA WINDOW
The Selecting and tranforming data columns displays the properties of the current dataset including
field names and current field assignments. It allows switching between multiple datasets.
Preconditioning data to remove nulls or replace below detection level samples will result in the creation
of new transformed columns. Mathematical calculations can also be performed on existing data fields
to created new derived columns (see Creating derived columns). The visibility of this window is toggled
on/off via the View Menu tab.
LEGEND WINDOW
The Legend Window displays the currently assigned symbol, colour and size for graph selections (see
Load and save styles from legend). The visibility of this window is toggled on/off via the View Menu tab.

TABLE WINDOW
The Table Window displays the attribute data of the current dataset in a tabular format (see Selecting
data in graphs). The visibility of this window is toggled on/off via the Data Menu or Create Menu tabs.
STATISTICS WINDOW
The Selection Statistics Window displays various standard statistics for the current graph selection
(see GraphMap settings). The visibility of this window is toggled on/off via the View Menu tab.
RELATIONS WINDOW
The Table Relations Window displays the relationships between linked tables which enable graph data
to be selected from one table and the associated records in a linked table will automatically be
highlighted in another graph (see View menu tab). The visibility of this window is toggled on/off via the
View Menu tab.

PROPERTIES WINDOW
The Graph Properties Window contains options to set the font, colour, scale, offset and styling options
applicable to each parameter of the graph (i.e. each axis as well as the graph background area). For
more information, see Selecting data in graphs. This visibility of this window is toggled on/off via the
View Menu tab or the Current Graph tab.

CREATING GRAPHS
The Create Menu tab provides the tools for creating an extensive range of Graph Types. Most graph
types have a number of compulsory Axis/Field Assignments (e.g. a Y field for a Probability plot): if
these fields are not assigned, the user will be prompted to assign them before the graph can be
created. Graphs are created by setting the required Axis/field assignments and then pressing the
desired Graph types button. Alternatively, the Graph Builder presents an intuitive wizard-style dialog
to guide the new user through graph creation
GRAPH BUILDER
The Builder button on the Create tab opens the Graph Builder dialog, which provides an intuitive
wizard-style interface to guide the user through graph creation.
1. Graph buttons are presented on the side of the dialog. Select a Graph Type.
2. The main area of the dialog will display the compulsory (dark blue) and optional (light blue) Axis/
Field Assignments (X, Y and/ Z) for the selected graph type as pull down lists. Use these pull-
down lists to assign the required fields, and a preview of the graph will be displayed.
3. If satisfied with the graph type and field assignments, set a Group field if required. See the end of
the Axis/Field Assignments section for information on the options available within the Select
Groups dialog. Selecting either a Multi- or Layout Window display type will update the preview
screen accordingly.
4. Press OK to generate the output graph/s.
AXIS/FIELD ASSIGNMENTS
Each Graph types button has a tooltip (hover the cursor over the relevant graph button) to detail the
axis/field assignments required for that graph type. If unnecessary fields are assigned (e.g. Z field for
a Histogram graph), then they will be ignored during graph creation.
To assign a field either:
• Select the desired assignment button from the Axis Assignment control on the Create tab and
from the pop-up list, choose the required field or
The Axis/Field Assignment controls on the Display tab.
• Select/highlight the field in the Data window and then press the appropriate keyboard shortcut:
e.g. the X key for the X axis, the G key for the Group assignment or the O key for the data
Ordering field.
• Select/highlight the field in the Data window and then press the right mouse button within the Data
window to display the data pop-up menu; select the Axis Assignment option and choose the
appropriate assignment

The Axis/Field Assignment controls on the Data window pop-up menu.
• The Order field can additionally be specified by dragging the target field in the Data window onto
the Order area at the Data window’s base. This area will then indicate the Order field assignment
until it is cleared/reset.
Order field indicator area
Note It is possible to select multiple fields (by holding down the left mouse button and dragging over
multiple items) or by using the normal SHIFT/CTRL key combinations, and assign them the
same Axis/Field Assignment (e.g. to assign multiple Y fields, or to clear existing assignments)
The following axis/field assignments are available:

Axis/Field Keyboard Description

Assignment shortcut
X Axis X Sets the selected field as an X axis parameter. Multiple X field assignments are
possible.
Y Axis Y Sets the field as a Y axis parameter. Multiple Y field assignments are possible.
Z Axis Z Sets the field as the Z axis parameter. Only one field at a time can be assigned
as a Z field.
Group G Sets the selected field as a Group field. Data will be grouped based on each
unique attribute. This is most appropriate for string fields such as company
name, sample type, mesh size, lithology, etc (not for numeric data such as
assays). Only one field can be assigned as the Group field at a time.
Filter F Sets the selected field as a Filter. The field must be a Boolean field (True or
False) in order for it to be assigned. Filter fields can be created using the Save
Selection as Filter Column icon (at the top of the Data window) or from the
Data tab. Assigning a Filter field will enable you to create graph displays for
only those entries marked as true in the filter. Only one field at a time can be
assigned as a Filter.
Order by O Set the selected field as the Ordering field – a field can be set as both an axis
[only assignment and an ordering field.
applicable to By default a Line graph is drawn in the row order of the table (the _key field). If
Line Graphs] an Ordering field is set, points will be drawn and connected in the increasing
order of this field. An example of use would be plotting a Line plot of Cu vs.
Pb- set the Cu field as both the X Axis and the Order field.
Clear Space bar Clears the selected field’s current assignment.
Note For many graphs requiring for example a single Y field assignment, assigning multiple Y fields
will result in the creation of multiple separate graphs, one for each Y field assignment.
If a Group field is assigned (whether manually or via the Graph Builder), a Select Groups dialog will
be presented when a graph is created. This dialog allows the user to select one or more group items
and display the graphs using one of three display options:
• Multiple Windows - a separate graph window is created for each selected/highlighted group
• Single Window - a single graph window incorporating all selected groups is created for the
selected/highlighted groups. This display mode includes an option to colour each group uniquely
to assist in identification.
• Layout Window - multiple plots are created in a single graph window, with plot representing one
of the selected groups.
• A Geo Located window in which all the graphs are arranged geographically next to the
corresponding sample site.
The Groups to be displayed must be highlighted in the list before pressing OK. The graph(s) will then
be created for only those items which are selected.

The Select Groups dialog displayed when a non-compulsory Group field is assigned.
GRAPH TYPES
The following table lists the available graph types and their compulsory field assignments:
NORMAL GRAPHS
• Map – opens the dataset as a map using the existing mapped fields (either the fields
assigned using the MapInfo Pro Table>Create Points menu option, or the Obj_X and
Obj_Y fields if the data has spatial objects but no spatial columns). Alternatively, different X
and Y fields can be assigned (e.g. for an Access table or for unmapped data) using one of
the X & Y field assignment methods.
• Scatter – scatter plots produce an XY point plot and require an X and Y field to be
assigned. If only one field is assigned, the opposing unassigned axis will default to the
‘Key’ or record index field (row ID of each data entry) of the dataset. This graph type allows
a Regression line to be plotted, and therefore a Residuals graph to be created; see
Selecting and tranforming data columns.
• Line – line plots produces a continuous line profile using either an X and/or Y field
assignment. If the opposing axis is unassigned it will default to the ‘Key’ or record index
field (row ID of each data entry).
• Bar – this utilizes only an X or Y field assignment, setting the unassigned axis as the Key
field. It produces a series of individual vertical bars representing the X or Y field value of
each data entry. Its output is comparable to setting only the same field in either the Scatter
or Line graphs.

• 3D Scatter – produces a 3D scatter plot, requiring X, Y and Z axis assignments. Once the
3D scatter plot is created, hold down the middle mouse button and move the mouse to
rotate the 3D view. If either the X or Y axes are unassigned, they will be set to the ‘Key’ or
record index field.
• Bubble – produces bubble plot requiring X and Y assignments, with an optional Z
assignment. Similar to output to a Scatter plot.
• Table – opens a browser view of the current dataset. See Viewing data values for further
information.
GROUPED GRAPHS
• Lines – allows multiple line plots to be displayed on a single graph, using multiple Y field
assignments. The following prompt will be displayed allowing each line to coloured
separately. A simple legend indicating the field/colour association will be displayed at the
top left of the graph to assist in identification.
Individual line colour and legend for a Lines graph.
• Histogram – displays a graph of the count of records that fall within a predefined bin.
The unique attributes are displayed as bins along either the X or Y axis, and the count
is displayed on the unassigned axis. The bin size can be modified through the Graph
Properties dialog (see Selecting data in graphs).
• Box – produces a Box plot of the assigned Y field. If an optional X field is assigned, the
dataset will be separated along the X axis based on each unique attribute within this field
(e.g. sample type or lithology). Box plots display a summary of the important aspects of a
distribution. The central box extends from the lower hinge (25th percentile) to the upper
hinge (75th percentile) and therefore represents the middle half of the data spread. The line
across the middle of the box represents the median. If the median is not positioned in the middle
of the box it indicates that the data distribution is skewed. The vertical bars or whiskers which
extend from the box represent the spread of the data (the minimum & maximum data points)
unless outliers are present, in which case they extend to the nearest data point within a maximum
of 1.5 times the inter-quartile range. Points outside the fence (or whiskers) are outliers or
suspected outliers in the distribution. Points outside 3.0 times the inter-quartile range are drawn
with smaller points to delineate the extreme outliers.
• Pie – creates a multi-segment pie chart, where each segment represents a unique
attribute within the assigned X or Y field. The arc of each segment represents the
proportion (count) of that attribute in the total population. For numerical data, the bin size
of each pie slice can be modified through the Graph Properties dialog

STATISTICS GRAPHS
• Scatter Matrix – uses multiple X and/or Y fields to create multiple scatter plots in a
matrix pattern, allowing multi-element analysis/comparison. This graph type allows
Regression lines to be plotted, and therefore Residuals graphs to be created; see
Graph window tools (see Selecting data in graphs).
• Probability - produces a normal probability plot of the assigned Y field(s). A normal
probability plot (also known as a Q-Q plot) is a graphical technique for assessing
whether a data set is approximately normally distributed. The normal probability plot is
constructed by plotting the ordered normal response values for the assigned field
against the normal ordered statistic medians if a theoretical normal distribution. If the data set is
normally distributed the resulting plot should represent a straight line. Deviations from a straight
line represent deviations from normality. This is labeled as N Scores, which is the same as
"Standard Scores" or "Normal Theoretical Quantiles". This can easily be converted to a log-
normal probability graph by converting the Y axis to log under the Current Graph menu.
OTHER GRAPHS
• Ternary - creates a normalized scatter plot of three fields on a triangular diagram. The
assignment of X, Y & Z fields is required in order to produce a Ternary plot. In order to plot
a point on the triangular axes the X,Y,Z data for each row is normalized such that X+Y+Z =
1. If your data is not normalized then GraphMap will do this for you automatically.
• Stereogram - displays structural measurements using dip direction (X) and dip (Y)
fields. This graph type has options to display either Equal Area or Equal Angle
projections, as well as plotting the data as either Lineations or Poles to Planes. These
options can be accessed via the Graph Properties dialog (see Selecting data in graphs),
and changing the Data Display or Projection options at the bottom of the list.
• Rose – uses an azimuth/bearing field assigned as either an X or Y field to create a Rose
diagram. The radius of each petal or bin indicates the number of data values that fall within
that range. The bin size (default of 30 degrees) can be modified through the Graph
Properties dialog (see Selecting data in graphs). Examples of use include evaluating
regional structural trends, wind direction, fluid migration patterns (e.g. water or hydrocarbon), etc.
Bin data ranges are set as greater than or equal to the lower bin value and less than the bin upper
value. For instance, the 330° to 360° bin would have the following data range:
330° ≤ Azimuth < 360°
This means that azimuth/bearing measurements of 360° will not be plotted: these need to be
converted to a value of 0°.
• Clock - uses a two-axis display within a circle, with the X field bins incremented on the
outside segments of the circle, and the Y field bins incremented within the circle as
concentric rings. Sections within the circle are coloured accoridng to their frequency.
• Rectangular Clock - uses X and Y fields to display time-series data in a matrix. Use this
graph type to show frequency as day-of-the-week vs hour-of-the-day or month-of-the-
year vs year and such. Grid cells are coloured according to their frequency.
SELECTING AND TRANFORMING DATA COLUMNS

The Data window on the left off the GraphMap window lists all fields in the current dataset. Its primary
function is to display the variables from the current dataset and to set Axis/field assignments for the
various graph types. The pull-down list at the top of the Data Window allows the user to switch between
open datasets.

The Data window is subdivided into sections depending on the field type:
• Numeric – lists all numeric fields (e.g. float, integer, decimal). It is not recommended to numeric
fields as a Group assignment.
• String – lists all character fields
• Date – lists all date, time or date-time fields
• Derived Columns – lists any Derived Columns
• Transformed Columns – lists any Preconditioned Data
• Selection Columns – lists any fields created from a saved selection, whether they are a filter or
group.
• Ranged Columns – lists any ranged columns derived from other fields.
It also contains the following options:
• The Show Table button opens a browser or table view of the dataset. See Selecting data in
graphs for further information on this view type.
• Add Derived Column allows the creation of a new field based on calculations performed on
existing fields; e.g. the addition of the values of two fields to produce a new field. See
Creating derived columns for further information.
• Save Selection as Filter Column this will save the current selection to a new Boolean field
with a user-specified name. The Boolean field records the selection with a True flag, whilst
the unselected data is flagged as False. The selection fields can be assigned as a Filter field,
allowing graphs to be created for only the filtered portion of the data set. For more information,
see Axis/field assignments.
• Setup Multi-Table Relationships allows the creation of relationships/joins between multiple
parent and daughter tables. See Multi-table relationships for further information.
• The Views button provides a number of options for visualizing the data fields. Options
include Tiles, Icons, List and Details. The Details view display a full range of summary
Statistics for each field in the dataset.
• The Data window can be moved by clicking and dragging its title bar, or by double-clicking
on the title bar to undock it. To return the Data window to its default location, select the
Reset Layout option on the Settings tab. The AutoHide icon at the top-right of the
window allows the Data window to be toggled between a window view and tab in the left
margin.
The Data window pop-up menu

Right mouse clicking in the Data window will open up the data pop-up menu. This contains the
following functionality:
• The Axis Assignment option discussed in Axis/field assignments.
• If an existing derived column (see Creating derived columns) is selected, the Edit Derived
column option enables the column’s expression to be edited.
• Create Ranged Column requires two existing columns of the same type to be selected. It then
creates a new Ranged column based on setting the first selected coulmn as the minnimum
bounds of the range, and the second selected column as the maximum bound for each row. This
is useful for a start and end time or date, or the minimum and maximum value measured over a
time or sample range. This Ranged column can then be used in graphs or exported back to
MapInfo Pro.
• The Preconditioning data option allows null and negative data in the selected field to be handled
correctly
• Break Date/Time into parts allows a selected Date and/or Time column to create a new column
base don chronological groupings, such as Month of Year, Day of Week and time of Day. A user
can select to construct the new column on a combination - for example grouped by both the
Month of year, then the Day of Week, as well as any user entered text.
• Update Column Statistics forces the statistics for all columns to be updated (viewable via either
hovering the mouse over the column in the Data Window, or via the Details option of the Views
button).
• To remove an existing column, use the Delete Column option. Note this does not alter the
underlying MapInfo Pro table, but simply removes it from view within GraphMap.
• Duplicate Column will create an identical copy of the selected column.
The Data window at the left of the GraphMap tool will display all fields present within the current
dataset. Use the pull-down menu at the top of the Data window to change between open datasets.
PRECONDITIONING DATA
The Precondition Data option allows the effective handling of negative, non-numeric and zero values.
It can be accessed either:
• by right-clicking on the target fields in the Data Window and selecting from the pop-up menu or
• via the Precondition Data button in the Data tab. This opens a list of the current datasets fields -
select the target fields from this.

The Data Handling Options dialog, accessed via the Precondition Data option
Either option will open the Data Handling Options dialog. The default new output fields will utilize the
source field name and apply a ‘_PC’ suffix; this can be altered in the top text window. The following
options are provided:
• Negative Values - To ignore negative assay values in a data table check the Set negative
values to box and leave the default “Null” entry. Alternatively, set all negative values to a single
user-specified value.
• Check the Multiply negative values box by -0.5 to convert each negative value to a new positive
assay value which is half the detection limit. Alternatively, multiply all negative values by a single
user-specified value.
• Non-Numeric Values – To ignore non-numeric values in a data table check the Set non-numeric
values to box and leave the default “Null” entry. Alternatively, set all non-numeric values to a
single user-specified value.
• Zero Values - To ignore zero values in a data table check the Set all zero values to box and
leave the default “Null” entry. Alternatively, set all zero values to a single user-specified value.

• Custom Template – To apply different replacement values for element data in a table or for
multiple replacements within the same element field a custom template can be created. The
template must contain three fields which contain the element name, the original assay value and
the new replacement assay value. The template must be open in MapInfo Pro in order to select it
for use in the Data Handling Options dialog.
• Data Type Conversion - To convert the data type of the columns, tick the box and select the target
data type from the list. For example, converting dates in a string column into a date column will
improve their display in graphs.
Once the required preconditioning is applied, the new fields will appear in the Data Window under the
Transformed Columns section. Set this as the required field assignment rather than the original
source field for graph creation to utilize the applied preconditioning. To save the new column, use the
To save this table, use the File>Save Data As>MapInfo table menu option
CREATING DERIVED COLUMNS

The Add Derived Column tool in either the Data Window or the Data Menu tab enables a new
column to be created and populated based on mathematical and/or logical operation on existing
columns. It opens the following dialog:
The Add Derived Column dialog

Formulae for a derived column are entered in the Expression pane. A name for the new derived
column can be entered in the Column Name control above (if no column name is assigned, it will
default to the expression syntax).
To enter an expression, place the cursor at the required insertion point within the Expression pane, and
type the formula. To assist in the construction of a formula, items can be chosen from the Function,
Operator, Value or Column assignment lists in the bottom half of the dialog. The expression pane also
provides colour syntax highlighting and ‘intellisense’ to assist with the construction of valid formulas,
enabled with the Auto Complete option.
Each field in the dataset can be inserted into a formula as either a Value or Column parameter by
selecting them from the appropriate pull-down lists:
• A Value parameter references an individual cell value in the data set and must be surrounded in
the Expression pane by square brackets (e.g. [Value]). A value parameter is used in functions
that operate on individual values e.g. [Cu]+[Zn] or Log10([Pb]).
• A Column parameter references an entire column of cell values, and must be surrounded the
Expression pane with curly brackets (e.g. {Column}). Column parameters are generally required
in the statistical functions e.g. Mean({Cu}).
Both Values and Columns can be referenced in a formula in the expression pane. For example to
compute the Z score for a given field you would enter the following expression, where ‘theValue’ is the
field you are interested in.
([theValue]–Mean({theValue}))/StDev({theValue})
A range of mathematical and statistical functions are also available in the Functions list. Some of
these functions accept Value parameters (such as the Log([value]), Sqrt([value]) and Tan([value]))
whilst others require Column parameter assignments (i.e. statistical functions such as
HarmonicMean({value}), Kurtosis({value}) and Count({value})). A brief summary of each Function and
its required parameters is displayed at the base of the derived column dialog when each function is
highlighted. Some functions may also require the insertion of another function inside them (e.g.
ZScore([value], Mean({value}, StDev({value})). Assignment of the wrong parameter type for a function
will result in an invalid expression error (e.g. Log10({Cu}) will return an error message, whereas
Log10([Cu]) would be valid).
The ZScore function description, including required parameters and other functions
A range of Operators are available, both mathematical and logical. Logical operators (e.g. <, >=) are
only applicable when the Expression type is changed to Conditional using the pull-down option to the
right of the Expression window.
Creating a derived column using a Conditional Expression
Some examples of valid expressions:

[Cu]/Mean{Cu}
[Pb]+[Zn]
ZScore([Zn],Mean({Zn}),StDev({Zn}))
Once a new derived column is created, it will be listed within the Data Window. An existing derived field
can be edited by right-clicking on the icon, and selecting the Edit Derived Field option form the pop-
up menu. This will reopen the Add Derived Column dialog and the expression for the column will be
displayed.
To save derived fields permanently, use the GraphMap File>Save Data As>MapInfo table menu
option
VIEWING DATA VALUES

The Table Window is similar to a MapInfo Pro browser; it displays each record as a row of
attributes in a browser format. The Table window can be displayed using either:
• the Table button on the Create Menu tab
• the Show Table button within the Data window or
• the Table button on the Data tab
The Table window also incorporates any derived columns or Saved Selection columns that have been
created, as well as a “Selected” column. The Selected column indicates any currently selected
records with a tick mark. Pressing the Show Selected Only option at the top of the Table window, will
show only the selected entries in the list. This is an excellent way of viewing the browser records for a
graphical selection.
Individual records can be selected within the Table window by ticking the appropriate row within the
Selected column. To select multiple records, highlight the records of interest (using SHIFT or CTRL
key combinations) right-click in the window and choose the Assign Selection option from the pop-up
menu. Deselect multiple records by highlighting them and use the Clear Selection option (right-click
menu in the Table view).
The Table window Assign Selection menu
The Show Background Colour option will shade rows in the Table view using the current colour
scheme (as applied using the Colour controls and displayed in the Legend window ).
A column can be sorted in ascending or descending order by clicking on the column title. The displayed
field list can be customized (similar to the MapInfo Pro Pick Fields option) by right clicking in the
column title area: this will open a field selection list, with displayed fields highlighted. Select and
deselect fields as required.

Field customization within the Table window
Multiple columns can be filtered using the Filter button. This adds a row of filter controls above the
table. Multiple fields can be filtered simultaneously.
• Numeric fields will have an operator and value control. Select an operator and enter a value: the
table window will update to display only data matching the specified criteria. The asterix *
functions as an exact match operator; it will convert the data and search values into strings and
try to find an exact match.
String fields will have a single string control; type a search string in this to filter the table view. This is
a dynamic operation: the view will be refiltered with each successive character entered. The asterix *
functions as a wildcard e.g. *zoic will find entries of Cainozoic and Mesozoic.
ARRANGING AND MODIFYING GRAPH DISPLAYS

• Closing graphs
• Hide and show windows
• Arranging graphs
• Adding a graph to a map window
• Zoom, pan and rotation
• Axis, scale, background, and other display options
• Displaying legends
The View tab provides options for the display and positioning of graph and other windows. By default
individual graphs are created as floating windows which can be identified by name in the graph titlebar
or via tabs along the top of the main graph display area. These tabs can be hidden using the Show
Tabs toggle (below). Individual graphs can be selected using these tabs or via the Window List. The
arrangement of graph windows can be controlled using the Tile, Cascade or AutoTile menu options.
CLOSING GRAPHS
Graphs can be closed in a number of ways:
• Using the Close All option will close all graph displays,

• Using the Windows option under the Windows List button will present a dialog listing all the open
graphs. Multiple graphs can be selected in the list and closed at once.
• The Close option under the File menu allows selected datasets to be closed. All graphs
associated with a selected dataset will be closed.
• Using the individual close button at the top right of each graph
The following controls are available on the View Menu tab:
HIDE AND SHOW WINDOWS

GRAPH WINDOWS
• Tile all open graph windows in the GraphMap window.
• Cascade all open graph windows
• Automatically retile all graph windows after each new graph created. This is a toggle
button.
• Toggle the display of the current graph window inside or outside the GraphMap
application. Graph windows can also be toggled in and out by pressing “I” on the keyboard
when the mouse is placed over a graph window.
SIDEBAR WINDOWS
• Toggle the Data Window On or Off
• Toggle the Legend Window On or Off
• Toggle the Selection Statistics Window On or Off.
• Toggle the Table Relations Window On or Off
• Toggle the Graph Properties Window On or Off

GRAPH WINDOWS
• Toggle whether the Graph tabs are displayed or not. If not select from the available
open graphs using the Window List option (below). This option helps increase the
available space for graph window display.
• Close all open graph windows
• Open a list of all open graph (and table) windows. Selecting a list item will bring that
graph window to the front.
MAPINFO PRO
• Toggle the GraphMap application between displaying inside the MapInfo Pro window
and displaying outside of it. The latter option is useful when running dual monitor
screens.

ARRANGING GRAPHS
Multiple graphs can be opened into the graph window display area. Each graph has a tab which, when
selected, enables the corresponding graph to be displayed at the front of the other graphs. Graph
windows can be dragged to new locations by clicking on the titlebar of the graph window and dragging
the window to a new location.
Use the icons on each graph window to Minimize, Restore or Close respectively.
The View Menu Tab contains additional window arrangement options as follows:
• Tiles all open graph windows in the GraphMap window.
• Cascades all open graph windows
• Automatically retiles all graph windows after each new graph created. This is a toggle
button.
• Toggles the display of the current graph window inside or outside the GraphMap
application. Graph windows can also be toggled in and out by pressing “I” on the keyboard
when the mouse is placed over a graph window.
• Toggles whether the Graph tabs are displayed or not. If not select from the available
open graphs using the Window List option (below). This option helps increase the
available space for graph window display.
• Closes all open graph windows
• Opens a list of all open graph (and table) windows. Selecting a list item will bring
that graph window to the front.
The GraphMap settings also contains two Multi-Window Creation options:
• In Separate Windows – this option will display multiple graphs in a separate window for each

• In Tabbed Window – this option will display all graphs in a single window with tabs to switch
between the individual graphs
ADDING A GRAPH TO A MAP WINDOW

Right-click inside a graph window to display the graph shortcut menu.
View in MapInfo – Add a graph to an existing map window. In the Show in MapInfo dialog select
the map window to add the graph. Enter in an X and Y origin for the graph in map window
coordinates or click on the Select on Map button and click the desired location in the map window.
Alter the Scaling for the graph as required and select a base output file name.
This process may add a number of layers to the map window.
ZOOM, PAN AND ROTATION

PANNING
• Hold down the right mouse button and move the mouse to reposition the graph content
• Use the arrow keys on the keyboard to pan the view in the direction of the arrow.
• Select the Pan button from the top customisable Quick Access Toolbar. Depress the left
mouse button in the graph window whilst moving the mouse to pan the view.
ZOOMING
Two methods are available:

• Use the middle mouse wheel to increase or decrease the zoom level. Rolling the mouse wheel in
a forward direction will increase the zoom and rotating the wheel in a backwards direction will
decrease the zoom level.
• Alternatively, select the appropriate button Zoom from the top customisable Quick
Access toolbar, and either left click within the graph window, or draw a rectangle to
zoom to its extents.
3D GRAPH ROTATION
(e.g. 3D Scatter graphs)
• Depress and hold the middle mouse wheel and move the mouse to rotate the view.
• Hold down the SHIFT button and use the keyboard arrows to rotate the view around each of the
axes.
• Select the 3D Navigation button on the top customisable Quick Access Toolbar. Click and
hold the left mouse button whilst moving the mouse to rotate.
To continuously spin the graph around a fixed axis hold down the CTRL key while using the
keyboard keys. Pressing the “T” key on the keyboard whilst part of the dataset is selected will re-
center the rotation point on the center of the selection, rather than the center of the dataset.
AXIS, SCALE, BACKGROUND, AND OTHER DISPLAY OPTIONS

The following options are provided for changing individual graph windows:
Click in a graph window and use the arrows on the X and Y axes to increase, decrease and
restore the axis extents.
Right-click inside a graph window to display the graph shortcut menu.
• Reset Graph – resets the graph view to the full data extents
• Set Background Image – a MapInfo Pro map window can be added as a background
reference image for the current graph. Note: it is important that the spatial coordinates (data
range) of the MapInfo Pro window is the same as coordinates of the graph in which the
background is being added.
• Set Selection Overlay – previously defined selection overlay regions can be added to the current
graph. These regions need to be created using the Create overlay selection region tool on the
main toolbar. The selection overlay regions are stored on a per user basis in the “My
Documents\Encom GraphMap” directory.
• Show Regression Line :– adds a Regression line to Scatter and Scatter Matrix graphs.
This option is not available for any other graph types.
• Create Residuals Graph :– if the graph has a Regression Line plotted, this option creates a new
Residual graph.
CURRENT GRAPH CONTROLS

The Current Graph tab contains the following controls for customizing the current graph:
• Grid Lines – toggles the display of grid lines for either the X or Y axes
• Log Axis – applies a logarithmic scale to either axis
• Axis Label – toggles labels on the axes

• Graph Titles – inserts the graph tile into the graph window (useful when exporting the graph as
an image or MapInfo Pro table)
• Colouring – Numerous controls for the colour of axes, grid lines, labels, tick marks and
backgrounds
The Properties window of the current graph is displayed on the right side of the GraphMap
display, and can be accessed via two options:
1. Right-clicking in the graph window and selecting Properties from the pop-up menu.
2. Selecting the Properties option from the Current Graph Menu ribbon bar
This window contains a multitude of font, colour, scale, offset and styling options applicable to each
layer of the graph (i.e. each axis as well as the graph background area). The last layer listed (named
after the source dataset) also contains controls specific to the graph type: for instance Stereograms
have options for dataset plotting (PoleToPlanes or Lineations), whilst Rose & Histograms graphs allow
control of the Bin size.
SELECTING DATA IN GRAPHS

GraphMap provides real time selection and visualization functionality; data selected in a graph window
is immediately highlighted in all graph windows relating to the same dataset (links between different
datasets can also be setup using Multi-table relationships). This is an excellent way of examining
different aspects of a subset of data, for example the various geochemical ratios (scatter plots, ternary
diagrams) and statistical analyses (box and probability plots) of soil samples sourced from a basalt
terrain vs. those from doleritic terrain.
To make a graph selection use one of the selection tools on the top customisable Quick Access toolbar:
• Select by Rectangle allows a selection rectangle to be created by pressing and holding the
left-mouse button and dragging the mouse.
• Select by Region allows a freehand selection region to be drawn by pressing and holding
the left-mouse button. Releasing the mouse button will close the region.
• Select Live Rectangle - as the selection rectangle is drawn, all data within the selection
region is highlighted within all graph windows automatically.
• Create overlay selection region creates a permanent selection region. See Permanent
selection regions below
Additional selection tools are available in the Data Menu tab menu ribbon:
SELECTION TOOLS
• Selects all records in the entire dataset
• Deselects all records in the entire dataset
• Selects all data points not currently selected (i.e. inverts the selection)
SAVING SELECTIONS
The current GraphMap selection is selected in MapInfo Pro (providing the same dataset is open
and a primary Key has been assigned).

Whenever a selection is made in GraphMap, it can be saved to a new field in the dataset and assigned
as either a Filter or Group field. To save a selection, select either the Save Selection as Filter
Column button in the Data tab or in the Data Window after making a selection (these buttons will be
inaccessible if there is no current selection).
• When a selection is saved as a Filter, each record is assigned a Boolean field to record a true or
false value: thus every record selected will be marked as True, whilst those not selected will be
marked as False. In the Save Selection dialog set the Type as Filter, and either choose an
existing column from the Selection pull-down list or type in the name for a new column. Press
OK; the field will now appear within the Data Window under the Selection Columns section. This
field can now be used to Filter the dataset (by assigning it as a Filter), thereby enabling graphs to
be created using only the specified subset.
• Saving a selection as a Group allows it to be attributed. In the Save Selection dialog set the
Type as Group, and in the adjacent GroupName window enter an attribute (e.g. ‘Anomaly 1’).
Either choose an existing field from the Selection pull-down list or type in the name for a new
field. Press OK; the field will now appear within the Data Window under the Selection Columns
section. Repeat this process for additional selections, giving each a unique attribute (e.g.
‘Anomaly 2’, ‘Anomaly 3’, etc) and utilizing the same Selection field. This field can now be used
to Group the dataset (by assigning it as a Group), allowing graph output to be separated by each
unique attribute.
You can reuse these Filter and Group columns in a future session by saving them to a new dataset.
Use the GraphMap File>Save Data As>MapInfo table to save the dataset, including Filter fields and
any derived columns permanently.
VIEWING SELECTIONS IN MAPINFO PRO AND GRAPHMAP

The currently assigned selection in MapInfo Pro (e.g. a spatial or SQL selection) is
selected in GraphMap (providing the same dataset is open in GraphMap and a primary
Key has been assigned).
The current GraphMap selection is selected in MapInfo Pro (providing the same dataset
is open and a primary Key has been assigned).
DISPLAYING OBJECT INFORMATION

The attributes for an individual graph object can be viewed by right-clicking in the graph window
and enable the Object Info option. Place the cursor over the target object: a pop-up dialog will
appear displaying the object’s attributes. An Object Info toggle is also in the Current Graph tab.
CLEARING SELECTIONS
The current selection can be removed from Map, Scatter and 3D Scatter graphs using the Remove
Selection option under the Current Graph tab. This will not affect the records in the dataset.
CREATING PERMANENT SELECTION REGIONS

Using the Create overlay selection region button (on the top customisable Quick Access
toolbar or the Current Graph tab), multiple selection polygons can be created and saved for a
particular graph. This tool functions in a similar manner to the Select Region tool; once activated, each
vertex of the selection region can be added by left-mouse clicking at the desired coordinate. A double
mouse-click will complete the region (or press the keyboard ESC key to cancel the region)

The New Overlay dialog displayed when a polygon selection region is created
Upon completion of the polygon, the New Overlay dialog will be displayed. The graph name is
assigned as the default Overlay Name; this is the file into which the polygon will be saved. It is not
recommended to use the same overlay between different graphs, unless the axes values (and the type
of graph) are the same, as it will result in the incorrect display of data and selection polygons. Individual
polygons can be assigned a unique name using the Polygon Name field (e.g. ZoneA, ZoneB, etc). A
boundary line Colour for the region can also be set.
The X and Y coordinates for each vertex can be viewed and modified in the dialog before saving the
polygon. Extra vertices can be added by entering their coordinates in the last blank row. Unwanted
vertices can be deleted by highlighting the required rows (by selecting their marker cell - grey cell to
the left) and pressing the keyboard DEL key.
Pressing OK will complete the selection polygon definition and display it in the graph window.
If an Overlay region file already exists with the same name, a dialog will be presented to either
Overwrite or Append to the existing overlay file. Overlays are stored as .xml files on a per user basis
in the C:\Documents and Settings\username\My Documents\Encom GraphMap folder.
To select all data points that fall within a selection overlay region, enable the Select Rectangle
tool on the main toolbar, and click once within the polygon. Clicking within the overlap of two or
more overlapping regions will select the contents of all those regions. Holding down the SHIFT button
allows the selection of multiple regions.

Pre-existing overlays can be added to a graph via the graph pop-up menu Set Selection Overlay
option. Choose an appropriate overlay for the current graph and press OK.
Note It is recommended that you do not mix overlays created in different graphs due to possible
differences in axes range and scales and the potential for it to distort the graph. To remove an
overlay from a graph, choose the None option from the Set Selection Overlay pop-up menu.
IMPORTING SELECTION REGIONS
MapInfo Pro polygons can be imported into GraphMap as Selection regions, provided they are in the
same projection as the destination graph. A geological example would be importing half a dozen
polygons representing prospective host rock as selection regions, in order to alter the symbology of
any point samples within these units, examine the statistics of these samples, and graph these
samples as a scatter matrix separately to the entire dataset (Saving selections as a Filter Column, and
then setting this new field as a Filter field when creating the Scatter Matrix).
With the polygon map open in MapInfo Pro (it can also be a selection, but cannot be polygons in
the cosmetic layer), select the Graph Overlay option from the GraphMap dropdown on the
Analysis tab.
The GraphMap Overlay dialog will open. Ensure the source table is selected in the Input MapInfo
Table pull-down list (or *Selection* if appropriate). If required, assign a field to name individual selection
regions using the Polygon Details pull-down list (e.g. lithology). Ensure the GraphMap XML Output
Option is enabled, rename the output if required, and press OK.
Switch to the destination graph in GraphMap, and use the Set Selection Overlay option (pop-up menu
or Current Graph tab) to choose the newly created selection overlay. If it doesn’t appear, check that
the projection of the polygon table matches the dataset and that the output region colour set is visible
(i.e. not a white region on a white graph background).
MULTI-TABLE RELATIONSHIPS
GraphMap allows relationships to be created between multiple tables. This allows graph data to be
selected, and the associated records in a linked table will automatically be highlighted in another graph.
Examples of use:
• An environmental monitoring program may have a table of 35 sample sites, and an associated
table of temporal data comprising water quality measurements taken at each sample site at
weekly intervals over 3 years. Plotting of all the measurements of total suspended solids (TSS)
vs. flow rate as a scatter plot may indicate an anomalous grouping (e.g. high TSS and flow rates).
With a Multi-Table Relationship created for these two tables, selecting the anomalous samples in
the Scatter plot will automatically highlight the relevant sample sites in a Map graph of the sample
site data.
• Similarly, by creating a Multi-Table Relationship between a drillhole collar and downhole data
tables, various anomalous groupings of assay ratios (e.g. Cu vs. Zn) can be selected and the
associated collar locations will be highlighted in a Map graph of the collar locations. Alternatively,
selecting a number of collars in the Map graph will highlight all related downhole samples in any
open graphs.

Multi-Table Relationships setup between drillhole data tables and a parent collar table.
To create relationships between a number of datasets:

1. Ensure that all required datasets are already open within GraphMap.
2. Select the Setup Multi-Table Relationships button either from the Data Window or the
Data tab. The Table Relationships dialog will open.
3. Assign the Parent Table from the pull-down list (e.g. the drillhole collar or sample site
table). Then set the Parent Key, the identifier allowing a single record to be linked to multiple
records in the Child Table. This might be a Hole_ID or Sample_Site field.
Note The Parent-Child relationship must be one-to-many (not many-to-many, or many-to-one).
Also, multiple relationships can be created with the same Parent table by adding each in
a new row; e.g. Collar-Assays, Collar-Lithology and Collar-Geophysics.
4. Assign the Child Table from the pull-down list (e.g. downhole_assays or water_quality), and the
associated Child Key field.
5. The Description field will be automatically populated based on the field assignments; this can be
overwritten if required.
6. Ensure the Active tick box is enabled. This turns the selected relationship on; a GraphMap
session can contain a number of Multi-Table Relationships, but these do not have to be all active
at any point. Activating table relationships after they have been created is possible, either by re-
entering the Table Relationships dialog, or via using the Table Relations window (accessed via
the Relations button on the View tab).
7. The Must Match tick box is an optional data validation routine; enabling it will check that every
Child record has an associated Parent record, and return a warning if this is not valid.
8. Press OK to close and apply the created table relationships.
GEOLOCATED GRAPHS
The GeoLocated graph functionality in GraphMap enables graphs to be created and displayed next to
the geographic location of their data source. For example, downhole data can be displayed adjacent
to a drillhole collar location or water monitoring data next to a sample site.

To create GeoLocated graphs the following steps are performed:

• Define graph type
• Create GeoLocated Graphs Wizard
• View GeoLocated graphs
• Global options
DEFINE GRAPH TYPE

As there are likely to be many analytical values per location the data is generally stored in two separate
tables. The point or sample site locations are stored in one table while the associated analytical data
values are stored in another table.
You will firstly have to select the table and fields and graph type for each geolocated graph by the
following steps -
1. Open both the point location and analytical data tables into the GraphMap module using the File
menu.
2. Choose the table which contains the analytical data from the Data window pull-down list.
3. Select the Graph Builder from the Create menu. In the Graph Builder, choose the type of graph
from the sidebar to use for each geolocated graph. GeoLocated graphs can be created for the
following graph types:
• Scatter Plots
• Line Graphs
• Bar Charts
• Histogram
• Pie Charts
• Probability Plots

4. Select the columns to be used for X and/or Y axes for the desired graph type.
5. In order to create a Geo Located graph a Group field must first be assigned. The Group field
should be assigned to primary key column in the analytical table that was used to join it to the
point locations, e.g. Hole_ID, Site_ID or similar. See Axis/field assignmentsfor more information
on setting axis and group assignments.
6. The Select Groups dialog is displayed. This dialog will list each individual entry in the selected
Group column and the number of analytical records associated with each location. Geo Located
graphs can be created for a selection or all of the groups in the list.
Select Geo Located as the Display Type and click OK to create the graphs. A message
dialog will appear prompting you to setup geolocated graphs. Click Yes.

CREATE GEOLOCATED GRAPHS WIZARD

The Geolocated Setup dialog will open. This will setup the necessary relationships between the Parent
or Map Location table, and the Child or Attribute data tables.
The Map location is the table which contains the geographic point location information for each
sample. This table must be a mappable table and have a primary key column such as Sample_ID,
Site_ID or similar which directly matches an identical column in the Attribute table.
Select the location table from the Map Table pull-down list and choose the X and Y location column
from the Map X and Map Y Location pull-down list.
The analytical data table is referred to as the Attribute Table. Select this table from the Attribute Table
pull-down list.
The primary key columns in both the Map Location and Attribute tables must match exactly for the
geolocated graphs to display correctly. Select the primary key from the Map Key pull-down list, and
choose the matching primary key column from the Attribute Key pull-down list. See Multi-table
relationships for more information.
Click OK to close the Geolocated Setup dialog.
Note To view the current table relationships select Relations from the View tab of the ribbon. A
separate Table Relations window will be added to the GraphMap interface.
Click OK to close the Group selection dialog. A message dialog may appear with an option to colour
each individual Geolocated graph using a different colour. Select Yes or No on this dialog as desired.

VIEW GEOLOCATED GRAPHS

The individual graphs are displayed on a larger graph which is based on the X and Y coordinates of
the point location table. The Axis names reflect the analytical fields chosen for display at the Obj_X
and Obj_Y location of the points.
Use the Zoom and Pan tools on the Quick Access Toolbar to zoom in on a particular graph for viewing
or to move about the window. Alternatively use the middle mouse wheel to zoom in or out. When the
zoom level becomes high relative to the individual Geo Located graphs, a set of axis labels will
automatically become visible. These axes are displayed for reference only and cannot be disabled.

To view individual graphs in more detail, place the cursor over a graph so that it is highlighted and then
right-mouse click and select Zoom from the menu to zoom to the extents of the selected graph. To view
the selected graph in a separate graph window, select the Show in Separate Display menu option.
To view the GeoLocated graphs with additional information it is possible to use either of the Set
Background Image or View in MapInfo Pro options from the right-mouse-click pop-up menu in the
graph window (see Axis, scale, background, and other display options). These options enable a map
window to be added to the graph window as a background image or the graphs to be added to a map
window in MapInfo Pro respectively.
GLOBAL OPTIONS
When working with GeoLocated graphs a number of options can be set in the GraphMap Global
Options dialog. This dialog is accessed via the Global button on the Settings tab of the ribbon
bar. Alternatively the Global Options can be accessed via the File>Options button. The default
Size of the GeoLocated graphs (in Pixels), the relative Graph Positioning and the Offset in map
units can all be set from this dialog.

DISPLAYING STATISTICS
The Selection Statistics window automatically generates and displays a range of data
statistics (e.g. Min, Max, Mean, Standard Deviation, Kurtosis, Variance, etc) for each field in the
current selection. It is displayed via the Statistics button on the View tab.
The Selection Statistics window can be undocked from its default position on the main window so
that it floats above the main GraphMap window by clicking on and dragging its title bar. The window
can be resized in the normal way or docked to any sides of the main application using the onscreen
docking control. The AutoHide icon at the top-right of the Selection Statistics window allows it to be
toggled between an always open window and an auto hiding window which is accessible via the
Selection Stats tab in the margin of the application.
A field can be sorted in ascending or descending order by clicking on the column name. A customized
field display is available by right clicking in the column name area (similar to the MapInfo Pro Pick
Fields option): this will open a field selection list, with displayed fields highlighted. Select and deselect
fields as required.

Field display customization within the Selection Statistics window
CHANGING THE STYLE OF GRAPH OBJECTS

The Modify tab contains controls for modifying the Colour, Size and/or Symbol type of graph points/
objects. Modifications can either be homogenous (e.g. a uniform symbol for the entire dataset) or
heterogeneous (e.g. a colour scheme applied to a assay field using user-defined data ranges). To
change the display symbology, the target data must be selected (use either the selection tools on the
top customisable Quick Access toolbar or on the Data ribbon bar). The display options will only be
applied to the selection. To select the entire dataset, use the Select All button on the Data tab ribbon
bar.
Note The Modify tab will only affect raw data objects, such as scatter and line graphs. It will not affect
graphs of grouped data, or statistical bins.
• Colour
• Size
• Symbol
• Visibility
• Load and save styles from legend
• Displaying legends
• Apply RGB colours from table
COLOUR
• To apply a single colour to a selection, click on the Set Colour palette and select the
required colour. Custom colours can be created via the More Colours option at the base
of the Colour palette dialog.
• To colour a selection using unique attributes within a field (e.g. Company or sample type),
press the Group button and choose the appropriate field from the pop-up list to apply
colour by.

The Colour tab of the Displaying legends (bottom left of GraphMap dialog) will be populated with
each group’s description and its corresponding colour. These colours can be changed by double-
clicking in the appropriate colour box and selecting a new colour from the colour palette.
• To create a continuous linear colour range based on a numeric field (e.g. a numeric assay
field), press the Linear button and choose the appropriate field from the pop-up list. The
data will be divided into 10 continuous ranges using a linear scale and coloured
individually.
• The Advanced button allows colour to be applied using a variety of custom or statistically-
determined data mapping techniques (e.g. standard deviation, log, and percentile etc) or
creation of a user designed scheme. This option is detailed further under Advanced colour
options.
ADVANCED COLOUR OPTIONS

Both the Colour and Size control panels on the Modify ribbon bar contain Advanced buttons which
open an Advanced Display Options dialog. These options provide a means to apply a number of
custom or statistically-determined symbology schemes (e.g. standard deviation, log, and percentile
etc) or creation of a user designed scheme. The Size and Colour dialogs have only minor differences
so only the Colour option will be used as the example in this section.
The Advanced Colouring Options dialog, displaying a Log-derived data range
The Colour Column pull-down list allows selection of the field on which to base the Colour range. The
Colour Method pull-down list contains an extensive number of colour mapping methods (and a
custom option) to apply to the chosen data field:

• Custom – allows the creation of a custom series of data ranges. Using the Add
controls at the base of the dialog, new rows can be added by clicking the Add
button, or deleted by selecting the row(s) and clicking the Remove button. All Remove
rows can be removed in one pass by clicking the Remove All button. The
description, data range and colour can be edited directly in each rows grid Remove All
cells by double clicking in the appropriate cells. The Count and % columns are
computed automatically from the range values in the >= and < cells.
Note Entering a ranges >= and < values prior to using the Add button ensures that the new row
automatically populates it’s >= value from the previous row’s < value.
• Linear - creates colour using a linear colour scheme, with each colour encompassing a data
range of approximately equal magnitude i.e. the difference between the lower and upper values in
each range is similar. By default this creates 10 data ranges.
• Rank - creates a colour scheme based on the Rank (relative position) of each data value with the
dataset. By default the Rank method creates 32 colour ranges.
• Group – assigns a unique colour to each unique group within the selected field. This replicates
the functionality of the Group button in the Colour panel. It is not recommended for continuous
numeric fields (e.g. assay fields) unless a unique colour is required for each numeric value.
• Log – applies colour using a logarithmic scale, where each colour encompasses a data range of
approximately equal magnitude i.e. the difference between the lower and upper values in each
range is the same. By default this creates 10 data ranges.
• Exponential - applies colour using an exponential scale, where each colour encompasses a data
range of approximately equal magnitude i.e. the difference between the lower and upper values in
each range is the same. By default this creates 10 data ranges.
• Mean – creates two data ranges, separated by the mean data value (the second data range is >=
the mean value).
• Standard Deviation (3 steps) – creates 3 data ranges distributed about the mean:
Minimum -> (Mean – 1 Standard Deviation)
(Mean – 1 Standard Deviation) -> (Mean + 1 Standard Deviation)
(Mean + 1 Standard Deviation) -> Maximum
• Percentile 4, 5 or 10 Ranges - creates a colour scheme based on the specified number of
percentile breaks i.e. Percentile 5 Ranges will result in five 20% steps.
• Percentile Adjustable Ranges – allows modification of the number of
Add Row
percentile ranges by using the Add or Remove Row buttons at the base of
the dialog. The lower and upper values of each range will be automatically Remove
recalculated after each change. It is not recommended to manually alter
these values.
• Upper Tail (6 steps) - creates six percentile ranges designed to emphasize data in the upper
portion of a distribution. The ranges are set at 0->60%, 60->80%, 80->90%, 90->95%, 95->98%,
98->100%. This method can be especially useful for geochemical data.
• Upper Tail (8 steps) - creates eight percentile ranges designed to emphasize data in the upper
portion of a distribution. The ranges are set at 0->30%, 30-60%, 60->80%, 80->90%, 90->95%,
95->98%, 98-99%, 99->100%

The colour scheme displayed by each method can be modified by selecting a Look-Up Table (LUT)
from the list at the bottom right of the dialog. Individual data range colours can also be modified by
double-clicking on the colour cell for that range, and choosing a new colour from the displayed colour
palette.
SIZE
• To apply a single symbol size to an entire selection, select the required size from the Set
Size pull-down list.
• To apply a different size for each unique attribute within a field (e.g. Company or sample
type), press the Group button and select the field from the pop-up list.
• The Size tab of the Displaying legends (bottom left of GraphMap dialog) will be populated
with each group’s description and its corresponding size. These sizes can be changed by
double-clicking in the appropriate size column and selecting a new size from the list
displayed.
To create a continuous size range based on a linear scale (e.g. assay field), press the Linear
button and select an appropriate numeric field from the pop-up list.
• The Advanced button allows symbol size to be applied using a variety of custom or
statistically-determined data mapping techniques (e.g. standard deviation, log, and
percentile etc) or creation of a user designed scheme. This option is detailed further under
Advanced sizing options.
ADVANCED SIZING OPTIONS

The Advanced Sizing Options dialog replaces the Colour LUT list with Size Minimum, Maximum
and Step controls. These can be used to control the symbol Size scheme across a series of data
ranges. Alternatively, the symbol size for an individual data range can be altered by editing the
corresponding size cell.
The Advanced Sizing Options dialog, displaying a 5 Range Percentile-derived data spread

SYMBOL
• To apply a unique symbol type to an entire selection, select the required symbol from the
pull-down Set Symbol list. Note: in order to view the newly assigned symbol in the graph it
may also be necessary to increase the symbol size.
• To apply a different symbol for each unique attribute within a field (e.g. Company or
sample type), press the Group button and select the appropriate field from the pop-up list.
The Symbol tab of the Displaying legends (bottom left of GraphMap dialog) will be
populated with each group’s description and its corresponding symbol. These symbols can
be changed by double-clicking in the appropriate symbol box and selecting a new symbol from
the list displayed.
• The current display settings can be removed using the Clear button within the Modify tab.
This allows removal of either individual display attributes or all attributes. The Clear button
can also be accessed in the Displaying legends.
VISIBILITY
To apply visibility filtering based on a field, firstly select a field from the
Field drop-down list. This will automatically sort the unique values in the
selected field.
Then use the + and - buttons control to scroll through various groups in
the field. The current visibility group value will be displayed below the slider bar.
By default, only the values that match the current value set on the scroll bar will be displayed.
Alternatively, all values below or above the current value can be displayed by selecting the
left or right arrows.
ADVANCED VISIBILITY OPTIONS

The Advanced Visibility Options dialog replaces the raw field values displayed on the Visibility slider
bar, with processed values depending on the Group Method selected. For example, selecting a
numerical Column to Group on will provide the option to use Percentile method grouping. These
percentile groups will then be displayed on the Visibility slider bar.

LOAD AND SAVE STYLES FROM LEGEND

• The Load Legend option allows you to browse for and load a previously saved GraphMap
legend file (.gml). Loading and applying a legend file will override any existing styling that is
applied to the current graphs.
• The Save Legend menu saves the current legend scheme to a file so that it can be
subsequently reused. The legend files are saved in a .gml format.
These options are duplicated within the Advanced colour options and Advanced sizing options
dialogs.
DISPLAYING LEGENDS
The Legend window displays the current point symbol, size and colour options. Individual style
attributes can be edited by opening the appropriate tab, selecting the appropriate cell and choosing
from pull-down palettes/lists for the colour and symbol fields, or using the sizing arrows.
If editing within the Custom tab of the Legend Window and the required attribute
field is not displayed, use the Display Description, Colour, Size or Symbol
buttons.
To assign a random colour to legend items click on the Random Colour Generator button.
To remove a style option from all data points, press the Remove Styling button and choose from
the available options:

The Remove Styling options within the Legend window
The Legend window can be moved by dragging its title bar, or by double-clicking on the titlebar. To
return the Legend window to its default location, select the Reset Layout button under the Settings
tab. The AutoHide icon at the top-right of the window allows the data view to be toggled between a
window view and tab in the left margin.
APPLY RGB COLOURS FROM TABLE

The Load Colour from Column option provides a means to colour data points using an RGB colour
value. An RGB colour value is an integer value which represents a specific combination of Red, Green
and Blue colours. RGB colour values can be extracted from existing MapInfo Pro data (see Colouring
map objects by RGB values) or computed manually from individual RGB colours values using the
following formula:
RGB = ( R x 65536 ) + ( G x 256 ) + B
To apply colour by column, open the Modify tab; choose Load Colour from Column from
the Column Operations menu and select the field containing the colour values you wish to
colour by.
GRAPHMAP SETTINGS
• Mouse buttons settings
• Global settings
• Reset layout
• Graph window settings
MOUSE BUTTONS SETTINGS

The functionality of the various mouse buttons (Left, Middle and Right) can be customized using the
appropriate buttons under the Settings menu.

GLOBAL SETTINGS
The Global button on the Settings tab opens the GraphMap Global Settings dialog. This has
both General and Axis-specific controls, as well as controls applicable to All Graphs and
specific graph types. Making changes within this dialog will affect all open and new graphs.
The Global Options dialog
GENERAL OPTIONS
Under General options a number of settings are available:
• Use Hardware Acceleration will enable utilitization of a graphics card (GPU) which supports
DirectX 9.0c hardware accleration.
• Use Pure Device is only applicable if hardware acceleration is enabled. This will force only GPU
hardware accelerated to be used. Tick this for maximum performance with a suitable graphics
card.
• Directories defines the location for general Selection Overlays to be stored.
• Interface Theme will change the GraphMap window colour

• Automatically create cache file will enable faster performance in graphmap, but slower initial
loading.
• Incremental Updates of Graphs will enable redrawing of sub-segments of large datasets.
RESET LAYOUT
The Reset Layout button on the Setting tab resets all windows (Data, Legend, etc) and the
Quick Access Toolbar to their default layout configurations.
GRAPH WINDOW SETTINGS

The following options are available from the Settings menu:
• In Separate Windows – this option will display multiple graphs in a separate windows.
• In Tabbed Window – this option will display all graphs in a single window with tabs to switch
between the individual graphs

WORKING WITH
IMAGES
IN THIS SECTION
Processing images 352
Using the Image Tool 353
Registering and rectifying raster images 353
Reprojecting an image 360
Clipping an image 362
Displaying image properties 363
Enhancing an image 364
Applying image filters 365
Rotating an image 367
Converting an image to another format 369
Setting image transparency 370
Geotagged Imagery 371
WORKING WITH IMAGES 352
PROCESSING IMAGES
• Supported image formats
• Memory size
• Multi-image processing
SUPPORTED IMAGE FORMATS

Tool PNG BMP GIF TIF TIFF JPEG JP2 ECW
Rectify Image     
Reproject Image        
Clip Image        
Properties Image     
Enhance Image     
Filter Image     
Rotate Image     
Convert Image     
Modify Image     
MEMORY SIZE
The Reproject Image and Clip Image tools can process unlimited size images. They also support
processing of ECW files.
The Rectify Image and Image Tool tools (see Using the Image Tool) require at least four times the
uncompressed (i.e. bitmap) image file size in free memory in order to process an image. For example
if an image is 200 MB in size (uncompressed), at least 800 MB of free memory is required to process
the image.
Memory is consumed by both running applications and Windows operating systems. As a rough guide,
Windows 7 utilizes about 1 GB. Therefore the Images module should be able to process a 250 MB
(uncompressed .bmp) image on a 2 GB Windows 7 machine (assuming no other applications are
running).
Recommended workarounds for images with borderline file sizes:
1. Close all other running applications (including Datamine Discover 3D).
2. Ensure that no other large files are open in MapInfo Pro (including images, grids and tabular
data). Try closing MapInfo Pro down, reopening and then opening just the image to be processed.
Note The Rectify Image and Image Tools decompresses all images prior to processing. Many
file types such as PNG, TIFF and JPG utilize extensive compression algorithms; their
uncompressed file size is likely to be significantly larger than the compressed size. You
can check the uncompressed size of an image with IMAGES>Image Tools>Properties Image.

MULTI-IMAGE PROCESSING
All image tools except Rectify Image can process multiple images. Use the Select option at the top of
the various dialogs to highlight the target raster images.
USING THE IMAGE TOOL

Whereas the Rectify, Reproject and Clip tools are independent and have separate dialog boxes, the
Properties, Enhance, Filter, Rotate, Convert, Modify tools are provided as tabs on the Image Tools
dialog box with a common set of options and controls:
• Raster images must have an associated TAB file and be open in MapInfo Pro to be available for
selection.
• All open raster images are listed in the Select Image pull-down list. The selected image is
displayed in the preview window on the right of the dialog. The image is displayed by default in
the preview window using the image height/width aspect ratio. To fill the entire preview window
with the image, clear the Match Aspect check box.
• As changes are made the preview window image is automatically updated. To turn off the
automatic update, clear the Auto Update check box. If any changes are made in manual mode,
click the Update Preview button to update the changes to the preview window image
• Changes can be made in one or more tabs and then saved. Prompts to enter a saved image
name and location are displayed when the OK button is clicked.
For information about the function of each tab on the Image Tool, see:
• Properties – Displaying image properties
• Enhance – Enhancing an image
• Filter – Applying image filters
• Rotate – Rotating an image
• Convert – Converting an image to another format
• Modify – Setting image transparency
REGISTERING AND RECTIFYING RASTER IMAGES

Related tools Rectify Image
The Rectify Image tool is a powerful tool that enables the registration of raster images in
geographic real-world coordinates. Unlike image registration using MapInfo Pro, the Datamine
Discover Rectify Image tool can register and modify images that have been stretched, skewed
or rotated. This process, known as “warping”, enables portions of an image to stretched or warped to
fit the entered control points. The tool determines an averaged best-fit transformation (projection) to
match image pixel X-Y coordinates to the target Map X-Y coordinates.
Note See Processing images for the processing capabilities and restrictions of this tool.
TO REGISTER AND RECTIFY A NEW IMAGE:
1. Select an image.
2. Select the Image projection.
3. Enter image and map Control points.

4. Select the Interpolation method method.

5. Synchronize and note the residual errors.
6. Rectify the image.
7. Review Accuracy and, if necessary, modify the Transformation method.
8. Repeat until satisfied with the transformation.
TO RECTIFY AN EXISTING IMAGE WITH A TAB FILE THAT HAS BEEN REGISTERED BY
MAPINFO PRO:
1. Open the TAB image in MapInfo Pro.
2. Select an image.
3. Check the control points in the map window and note the residual errors.
4. Rectify the image.
SELECT AN IMAGE
1. Select IMAGES>Image Tools>Rectify Image. The Rectify Image dialog box is displayed.
2. To select an image:
• Either select an image from the Current Image list of open raster images. For an image to be
in this list it must already have an associated TAB file.
• Or click the Load an Image File button within the dialog to browse for the raster image to
be rectified.
Note See Supported image formats for the file types supported by this tool.

When an image is selected using the Load an Image File button, Datamine Discover will search for
an existing TAB file related to the selected image. If a TAB file is found (i.e. the image has been
opened and/or registered using MapInfo Pro), the Rectify Image dialog will be automatically
populated with this registration information. Similarly, if an open image file is selected, Datamine
Discover will automatically populate the Rectify Image dialog with the existing registration
information.
If the Load an Image File button is used to open an image without an existing TAB file, the
Loading Control Points dialog is displayed.
Click Yes to automatically create a control point at each corner of the image. This option is only
useful if the real earth coordinates of these corner positions are known. To create custom control
points, click No. The Rectify Image dialog is updated with either no control points listed or control
points listed in non-earth coordinates.
IMAGE PROJECTION
Use the Projection button to specify the rectified image projection. The projection is displayed
at the top of the Ground Control Points list. The image projection can also be specified when
using the Map button to capture Map X and Y values using an existing data table in an open
map window.
Note Ground control points can be captured in either geographical (lat-long), projected (e.g. UTM)
or non-earth coordinates. If a lat-long projection is selected, the default lat-long format
expected is decimal degrees.
To enter lat-long ground control points in DMS (degrees-minutes-seconds), select a lat-long projection
and then check the DMS box which is displayed next to the Projection button.
CONTROL POINTS
The Ground Control Point list details the Image XY coordinates and Map XY coordinates for each
control point along with the resulting RMS and Residual values. Additional Control Point tools are
included such as control point creation and deletion buttons, positioning options and control point file
tools.

Rectify Image dialog showing entered control points
At least three control points with both image and map coordinates are required to rectify the image.
The more control points specified, the more accurate the rectification process will be.
ADD OR EDIT IMAGE CONTROL POINTS

To add a new blank row to the control point list, click New Point. Image X and Y coordinates can be
either typed or selected from the image.
TO MANUALLY ENTER IMAGE COORDINATE VALUES
• Click in the Image_X or Image_Y cell and enter the image pixel coordinate. Note that the image
pixel X coordinates increase to the right, whilst the Y coordinates increase downwards from the
origin (0, 0) in the top left of the image.
TO SELECT CONTROL POINT FROM IMAGE
• Click on the control point row to be edited. An arrow is displayed to the left of the row to
indicate the selected row.
Click the Image button and move the cursor to the map window containing the image to
rectify. The cursor is now displayed as a cross-hair (+). Click on the control point location
in the image map window. The location of the X and Y pixel coordinates in the image are
automatically updated in the control point Image_X and Image_Y cells.
TO AUTOMATICALLY MOVE TO THE NEXT CONTROL POINT WHEN INTERACTIVELY
SELECTING POINTS
• Click Options and select the Automatically move to next record box.
ADD OR EDIT MAP CONTROL POINTS

To specify the Map (real-world) X and Y coordinates for a control point two options are available:
TO MANUALLY ENTER MAP COORDINATE VALUES
• Click in the Map_X or Map_Y cell and enter the map coordinate. The map coordinate is the real-
world projection coordinates for the corresponding image pixel XY location.

TO SELECT CONTROL POINT FROM MAP

• Use an existing table in an open map window to locate control points. This map table may be a
TAB file containing a simple polygon whose vertices correlate to the corners of the image or other
vector data such as roads or features which can be used to locate the image control points.
Click on the control point row to be edited. An arrow is displayed to the left of the row
to indicate the selected row.Click on the Map button and move the cursor to the map
window containing the image to rectify. The cursor is now displayed as a cross-hair (+).
Click on the control point location in the map window. The location of the X and Y
coordinates in the map window are automatically updated in the control point Map_X and
Map_Y cells.
If this is the first coordinate information to be captured from the map window for an unregistered
image and no projection has been specified in the Rectify Image dialog box, the following
message is displayed with a request to use the current window projection. Select Yes to use the
current map window projection for the rectified image.
If the image is already registered, and the current map window is in a different projection to the
image registration, the following warning message will be displayed.
TO AUTOMATICALLY MOVE TO THE NEXT CONTROL POINT WHEN INTERACTIVELY

SELECTING POINTS
Click Options and select the Automatically move to next record box.
DELETE OR UNDO CHANGES TO CONTROL POINTS

TO DELETE A CONTROL POINT
Select the row and click Delete Point.
TO UNDO THE LAST CHANGE APPLIED TO A CONTROL POINT ROW
Click the Undo Change button.

SAVE AND LOAD CONTROL POINTS

TO SAVE IMAGE AND MAP CONTROL POINTS TO A SEPARATE TAB FILE
Click the Save Control Points button. By default, the output file name is the image name with a
“_gcp suffix”. Saving control points is recommended especially when a large number of control
points are used to rectify an image.
TO LOAD A SAVED CONTROL POINT TABLE
Click the Load Control Points button.
VIEW GROUND CONTROL POINTS IN THE IMAGE OR MAP

To view the location of either loaded or newly created ground control points in the Image or Map
windows, select the ground control points you want to view, and click View GCP.
SYNCHRONIZE CONTROL POINTS

TO SYNCHRONIZE MODIFIED GROUND CONTROL POINTS
If you have performed any modifications on the existing ground control points such as updating Image
or Map X and Y coordinates, click Sync GCP->Map to update the modifications on either the
unregistered Image or existing Map layer.
TO SYNCHRONIZE MODIFIED MAP/IMAGE CONTROL POINT LOCATIONS
If you have moved any of the control point locations in either the unregistered Image or existing Map
layer, click Sync Map->GCP to update the ground control point coordinates.
INTERPOLATION METHOD
To change the interpolation method, click Options and select from the available Interpolation
methods:
• Bilinear – the value of a grid cell in the new image is assigned the weighted value of the four
surrounding image cells in the original image.
• Bicubic (recommended) – uses the weighted value of 16 surrounding image cell values in the
original image to interpolate the value a grid cell in the new image. This method requires more
processing but is more accurate than bilinear interpolation. Bicubic interpolation also produces a
smoother image.
• Nearest Neighbour – simple interpolation whereby the new image cell value is taken from the
closest image cell in the original image.
RECTIFY THE IMAGE

When the projection and (at least three) control points have been specified,
1. Click Rectify to start the rectification process.
2. The Save As dialog is displayed. Select the output file name and location. By default, the output
rectified table will contain the original image file name with a “_rectified” suffix and is saved to the
same folder as the original image. Click Save.
3. A status bar is displayed at the bottom of the Rectify Image dialog box showing the rectification
progress status. When the rectified processing is completed, the rectified image is displayed in a
new map window.

ACCURACY
The RMS, residuals and standard deviations are dynamically calculated based on the best-fit
transformed set of Map XY compared to the target MapXY at each pixel (Image XY) location. However,
you cannot see the transformed Map XY used for these residuals.
The standard deviation for X and Y, indicate the dispersion between the set of transformed Map X/Y
coordinates.
Note You cannot actually see the transformed Map XY coordinates in the dialog. These change
depending on the transformations method and Image XY control points used.
TRANSFORMATION METHOD
Rectify Image Transformation methods
By default Datamine Discover has an internal <Auto select best method> when determining the
optimum projection transformation method during image rectification. Use the Transformation pull-
down list to select a specific transformation from the following options:
• Conformal
Conformal transformation is a special case of Affine projections. Conformal transformations
preserve shapes and angles and may include a rotation, a scaling and a translation. Straight lines
and parallel lines remain straight and parallel in the transformed image. A minimum of three
control points are required for a conformal transformation.
• Affine
Affine transformations enable the x and y dimensions to be scaled or sheared independently and
may also include a translation. Straight lines and parallel lines remain straight and parallel in the
transformed image but rectangles become parallelograms. A minimum of three control points are
required for an affine transformation.
• Projective
Projective transformations map lines to lines. Straight lines remain straight but parallelism may
not be preserved. A minimum of four control points are required for a projective transformation.
• Polynomial Transformations
Polynomial transformations are higher-order non-linear transformations which can handle more
complex local distortions. Polynomial transformations are smooth and are also known as ‘rubber-
sheet’ transformations as they enable parts of an image to be stretched or warped to fit the
control points. A minimum of six control points for 2nd order polynomial and ten control points for
3rd order polynomial transformations is required.
In all cases the transform is attempting to map the location of the source control points to their
equivalent position in the chosen target projection.

A Ground Control Point table provides the source control points in both the non-earth (Image Pixel X/
Y) and a known projection space (Map X/Y). The method will use these to determine a set of
transformation parameters which are the best fit for the given control points, using a Least Squares
method to minimize the misfit for these control point locations.
Note that the <Auto select best method> option will choose the best transformation method based on
the number of control points provided. The current auto-selected transformation is displayed at the
bottom of the Rectify Image dialog.
When the Rectify button is pressed, the image is reprojected based on the custom best-fit
transformation method currently selected/displayed. Any residual/misfit errors are removed from the
output image file registration.
REPROJECTING AN IMAGE
Related tools Reproject Image
The Reproject Image tool reprojects one or more images registered in one coordinate system
into a new coordinate system. For example, images registered in Australian AGD84 coordinates
can be reprojected into GDA94 coordinates. Images can be reprojected between projected (e.g.
UTM), geographic (e.g. lat-long) and custom coordinate systems. A range of interpolation methods are
provided to adjust the pixel locations in the image between the two coordinate systems.
Reproject Image tool

In the .TAB file associated with a registered image, the coordinates for the image extents are stored
as both real-world coordinates and image pixel coordinates, along with the coordinate system details.
When an image is reprojected to another coordinate system, a new image and .TAB file is created
containing the real-world coordinates in the new projection and the new coordinate system details.
The following example demonstrates how to reproject a scanned geological image from UTM
projection AMG Zone 54 (AGD84) into MGA Zone 54 (GDA94) projection.
1. Open the images to be reprojected in a map window.
2. Select IMAGES>Image Tools>Reproject Image to open the Reproject Image dialog box.
3. In the Image Tables box, select the images to be reprojected. The projection of the selected
image is displayed in the Current Projection box (under Reprojection Options).
4. The pixel dimensions of the selected image is shown in the Size box. If the input image is very
large, e.g. hundreds of gigabytes, the input can be resampled. The Resample Input value (default
100%) will automatically adjust on large images to speed up processing.
5. Under Reprojection Options, click the Projection button to display the Choose Projection
dialog box. Select the new projection from the Category and Category Members options.
The selected projection is displayed in the New Projection box.
6. The Projection Method toggles between the default and NTv2 Grid Shift methods of
reprojection. If the MapInfo default method is selected, the reprojection will be either a three- or
seven-parameter translation. If the NTv2 Grid Shift method is selected, the NTv2 grid shift method
is used.44
Note The Datamine Discover projection list is stored in a separate file to the MapInfow.prj file.
To reproject images into a custom coordinate system in the MapInfow.prj file, copy the
custom projection line into the Encom.prj file located in the
C:\Users\USERNAME\AppData\Roaming\Encom\Common\Projections folder. For more
7. Select an Interpolation Method:
• Nearest Neighbour – simple interpolation whereby the new image cell value is taken from the
closest image cell in the original image.
• Bilinear – the value of a grid cell in the new image is assigned the weighted value of the four
surrounding image cells in the original image.
• Bicubic (recommended) – uses the weighted value of 16 surrounding image cell values in the
original image to interpolate the value a grid cell in the new image. This method requires
more processing but is more accurate than bilinear interpolation. Bicubic interpolation also
produces a smoother image.
8. Select a Background colour from the palette. This colour is used for all null image cells around
the reprojected image.
9. Under Output Options, select Source Folder to save the reprojected images into the same folder
as the input tables. Or select Custom Folder and type the new location in the Folder box.
By default, a reprojected image file and .TAB file are created using the original image name and a
"_reproject" suffix. To change the suffix modify the File Suffix option.
The image file type will default to PNG. To change the output image type, select from the
extension drop-down box.

10. Click OK to create the reprojected image files.

Note Image Reprojection requires control points to be located at the image corners, as occurs with
the Rectify Image tool. Images registered with the MapInfo Pro Image Registration tool will not
necessarily result in corner control points and may be blocked (with an appropriate error
message) from image reprojection. Resolve by rectifying the image first.
CLIPPING AN IMAGE
Related tools Clip Image
The Clip Image tool clips one or more raster images to a region, such as a project area or
tenement boundary. The clipping boundary is defined by a polygonal map object, such as one
or more polygon or rectangles in an existing table or in the cosmetic layer. The clipping map
object can also be a multi-polygon—one polygon comprised of two or more non-contiguous polygons.
The image can be clipped either inside or outside the polygonal map object.
Clip Image tool
TO CLIP AN IMAGE TO A SELECTED POLYGON MAP OBJECT:

1. Open the images to be clipped in a map window.
2. Open or create the polygonal clipping object in the map window and select the object.
3. Select IMAGES>Image Tools>Clip Image to open the Clip Image dialog box.
4. In the Image Tables box, select the images to be clipped.

5. The pixel dimensions of the selected image is shown in the Size box. If the input image is very
large, e.g. hundreds of gigabytes, the input can be resampled. The Resample Input value (default
100%) will automatically adjust on large images to speed up processing.
6. Under Clip Options, in the Polygon Table box, select *Selection* to use the selected clipping
object.
7. Select to Clip outside polygon or Clip Inside Polygon. The image contained inside or outside the
selected polygon will be displayed in the clipped output image.
If an irregular shaped polygon is used as the clipping object, the image is clipped to the minimum
bounding rectangle of this polygon. This will result in a rectangular clipped grid with portions of the
image masked along the polygon boundary. The colour of the mask can be selected from the
Background Colour palette.
8. Under Output Options, select Source Folder to save the clipped images into the same folder as
the input tables. Or select Custom Folder and type the new location in the Folder box.
By default, a clipped image file and .TAB file are created using the original image name and a
"_clipped" suffix. To change the suffix modify the File Suffix option.
The image file type will default to PNG. To change the output image type, select from the
extension drop-down box.
9. Click OK to create the clipped image files.
Note Clip Image requires control points to be located at the image corners, as occurs with the
Rectify Image tool. Images registered with the MapInfo Pro Image Registration tool will not
necessarily result in corner control points and may be blocked (with an appropriate error
message) from image reprojection. Resolve by rectifying the image first.
DISPLAYING IMAGE PROPERTIES

Related tools Properties Image
The Properties Image tool displays the properties of a raster image. To use this tool, the image
must have an associated TAB file and be open in MapInfo Pro.
TO DISPLAY THE PROPERTIES OF AN IMAGE:
1. Open the image in MapInfo Pro.
2. Select IMAGES>Image Tools>Properties Image.
3. Choose the image from the Select Image pull-down list if it is not already displayed.
4. The properties of the selected image are displayed on the Properties tab, including:
• Size
The number of rows (X) and columns (Y) in the image are recorded along with the Total
number of pixels in the image. The Compressed Size of the image on disk and the approximate
Uncompressed Size of the image in memory. The image Type (PNG, JPG, etc) is also
displayed.
• Registration
The name of the raster image coordinate system and the parameters as listed in the MapInfo
Pro projection file are displayed along with the minimum and maximum image X and Y
coordinate extents.
• Metadata

Some images may contain metadata or information about the image which is hardcoded into
the image file. If a raster image contains this type of metadata it will be displayed in the
Metadata in Image window. Note that this feature does not read metadata which has been
entered into the .TAB file of the image.
5. Click OK to save the image.
For information about the other controls available on the Image Tool, see Using the Image Tool.
ENHANCING AN IMAGE
Related tools Enhance Image
Use the Enhance Image tool to enhance the appearance of a raster image. To use this tool, the
image must have an associated TAB file and be open in MapInfo Pro.
Enhance Image tab
TO ENHANCE AN IMAGE:
2. Select IMAGES>Image Tools>Enhance Image.
4. Use the controls on the Enhance tab, to enhance the appearance of the selected image:
• Contrast/Brightness
Adjust the lightness of an image by changing the Contrast and Brightness levels. The original
image contrast and brightness level is set to 0. Positive values will lighten and increase the
contrast whereas negative values will darken an image and decrease the contrast.

• Grey Scale
Convert a coloured image to black, white and 254 shades of grey.
• Invert Colours
Each RGB pixel value is subtracted from 255 and replaced with the corresponding colour to
create a negative image.
• Colour
Add or subtract a value to each RGB colour.
• Gamma
Adjust the overall brightness of an image using the individual red, green and blue channels.
Positive gamma values will lighten each channel of the image and negative gamma values will
darken each channel of the image.
For information about the other controls available on the Image Tool, see Using the Image Tool.
APPLYING IMAGE FILTERS

Related tools Filter Image
Use the Filter Image tool to remove extreme values or enhance linear features by applying one
or more filters. To use this tool, the image must have an associated TAB file and be open in
MapInfo Pro.
Filter Image tab

TO APPLY IMAGE FILTERS:

2. Select IMAGES>Image Tools>Filter Image.
4. Use the controls on the Filter tab to select and apply filters:
• Select from the available Sharpness filters, Edge detect filters or Other filters. When a filter is
selected, it is added to the Apply Order window.
• To change the order in which a filter is applied, select the filter in the Apply Order box
and use the Up and Down arrow buttons. To remove a filter from the list, click the
Remove button.
• For selected filters, a weighting or threshold value can be applied.
For information about the controls available on the Image Tool, see Using the Image Tool.
SHARPNESS FILTERS
• Smooth
Apply a mean smoothing filter over an image to reduce noise or high pixel values. Each pixel is
replaced by the RGB mean values of the central and surrounding pixels using a 3x3 kernel. To
increase smoothing, add a selected Smooth Weight value to the central pixel value.
• Sharpen
Enhance the difference between pixel colours by applying a 3x3 kernel with a high central value
and zero and negative surrounding values. The degree of sharpening can be increased by adding
a Sharpen Weight to the central kernel pixel.
• Gaussian Blur
Remove significant changes in colour in an image by graduating the colours of the intermediate
pixels. A higher weighting is applied to the central pixel with less weighting given to surrounding
pixels in the 3x3 kernel the further they are from the edge. To increase smoothing, add a selected
Smooth Weight value to the central pixel value.
EDGE DETECT FILTERS

Enhance contrast in an image by applying one of the following edge detection filters:
• Quick
This applies a vertical and horizontal edge detection over an image and then merges the two
resulting images together to create the final filtered image.
• Vertical and Horizontal
These filters have 3x7 and 7x3 kernels designed to enhance vertical and horizontally trending
edges.
• Sobel, Prewitt and Kirsh

These are all horizontal filters which apply a negative weight along one edge of the 3x3 kernel and
a positive weight on the other edge with the middle pixels with no or negative weighting (Kirsh).
Using the difference between the central pixel value and its surrounding pixels in the kernel a
Threshold Value can be applied whereby a pixel with a value less than the threshold will be
assigned the threshold value. This enables greater contrast between edges by displaying below
threshold pixels in the same colour.
OTHER FILTERS
• Mean Removal
This is another sharpen filter with a 3x3 kernel which filters in a diagonal direction as well as the
horizontal and vertical direction. The degree of sharpening can be increased by adding a Mean
Removal Weight to the central kernel pixel.
ROTATING AN IMAGE
Related tools Rotate Image
Use the Rotate Image tool to rotate a raster image. To use this tool, the image must have an
associated TAB file and be open in MapInfo Pro.
Rotate Image tab
TO ROTATE AN IMAGE:
2. Select IMAGES>Image Tools>Rotate Image.

4. Use the controls on the Rotate tab to rotate the selected image:
• Select a preset rotation angle: 0, 90, 180 or 270 degrees.
• Alternatively, select Custom Rotation and select the desired rotation angle using the Rotation
slider bar or type a rotation angle between 0 and 360 degrees.
5. Click Background Colour to change the colour of the null space around the image. Click More
Colours to enter specific RGB or HSL values.

For more information about the controls available on the Image Tool, see Using the Image Tool.

CONVERTING AN IMAGE TO ANOTHER FORMAT

Related tools Convert Image
Use the Convert Image tool to convert an existing raster image to another raster image format.
To use this tool, the image must have an associated TAB file and be open in MapInfo Pro.
Convert Image tab
Note By default, an image that has been modified by the other image tools is saved in the same
format as the original image.
TO CONVERT AN IMAGE TO ANOTHER FORMAT:
2. Select IMAGES>Image Tools>Convert Image.
4. Use the controls on the Convert tab to convert the selected (modified or unmodified) image to a
PNG, JPG, JPEG, BMP, or TIF format:
• Choose the desired raster format from the Convert image to pull-down list.
• If a JPEG format is selected use the Quality slider to determine the degree of compression in
the output image. The lower the quality the more compressed the output image will be
resulting in a loss of image detail.
• To create a World File for the converted image, select the Create World File When Saving
check box.
• To create a World File for the selected (unconverted) image, click Create World File For
Current Image. The world file is saved to the same directory as the current image.


WORLD FILE
A world file is a six-line text header file that contains information relating to the image pixel size in X
and Y direction, rotation of row or columns and the X and Y coordinates of the centre of the image top
left pixel. Depending on the raster type selected for the registered raster image, a world file may have
one of the following file extensions: .PGW, .JGW, .BPW or .TFW. Third party software programs can
read and use this information along with an entered projection to view the raster image in the correct
geographical location.
SETTING IMAGE TRANSPARENCY

Related tools Modify Image
The Modify Image tab enables a transparency level to be set for an entire image or the selection
of a single colour in the image to be set to transparent. To use this tool, the image must have an
associated TAB file and be open in MapInfo Pro.
Single colour transparency is generally used for images that are surrounded with coloured null areas
that obscure underlying data layers when the image is added to a map window. This tool does not alter
the original image file. Transparency is only applied when displayed in MapInfo Pro via its TAB file.
Modify Image tab
TO SET IMAGE TRANSPARENCY:

2. Select IMAGES>Image Tools>Modify Image.

4. Drag the slider to the desired transparency level between 0% (no transparency or opaque) to
100% (transparent or invisible).
TO SET A TRANSPARENT COLOUR:
1. Open the image into MapInfo Pro.
2. Select IMAGES>Image Tools>Modify Image.
4. Click on the arrow next to Transparent Colour and select from the colour palette. Click More
Colours to enter specific RGB or HSL values to create a custom colour to make transparent.

Note Image transparency can also be modified with the TABLE>Maintenance>Raster>Adjust
Image Styles tool. It can also be adjusted by the Layer control.
GEOTAGGED IMAGERY
The Image GeoTag tool allows the user to import and view georeferenced images taken from a
camera, smartphone or computer.
The GeoTag tool is separated into two tools:
• GeoTag Setup
Enables the user to import georeferenced image links into a MapInfo Pro table.
• GeoTag Viewer
Used to view the linked images in MapInfo Pro within a docked or floating window.

GEOTAGGED IMAGES
Many modern devices are equipped with some sort of location sensor or GPS, this enables many
features to be geocoded or referenced, in photos. The images use a standard called EXIF
(Exchangeable Image File Format) which writes header information about the device and spatial
location into the image. The EXIF standard allows for a large amount of information to be collected, the
GeoTag tool will only extract a fraction.
The EXIF information used includes the following:
• GPSLatitude
Latitude of location image was captured, projected into Latitude/Longitude WGS 84 EPSG:4326
• GPSLongitude
Longitude of location image was captured, projected into Latitude/Longitude WGS 84 EPSG:4326
• GPSImgDirection
Bearing or direction image was captured in degrees
• GPSAltitude
Elevation in meters image was captured
• GPSTimeStamp
Date and time in UTC (Coordinated Universal Time) image was captured
• Make
Manufacturer of the image input equipment
• Model
Model of the image input equipment
SETTING UP AND IMPORTING IMAGERY

The GeoTag tool works by selecting a point image in a map window, the table which the point is
saved to needs to have a certain structure. The MapInfo Pro TAB file will need to have the
following fields present, the naming conventions are not important with certain field types
required. The table can contain additional fields to help describe the image.
The mandatory and optional fields used by the GeoTag tool are listed below:
Field Field Type Required

Path Character (254 max) Mandatory
Filename Character (254 max) Mandatory
Longitude Float Mandatory
Latitude Float Mandatory
Elevation Float Optional
Bearing Float Optional
Make Character (254 max) Optional
Model Character (254 max) Optional
Date Time Date/Time Optional
Note To create a new table in MapInfo Pro navigate to TABLE>Content>New Table, you will need
to make a new mappable table projected into Longitude/Latitude (WGS 84) EPSG:4326.
Note MapInfo Pro TAB used as the GeoTagged table will contain file links, if you change the image
name or path to the image the image will not be correctly referenced by the GeoTagged tool.

The GeoTagged table will need to be projected into Longitude/Latitude (WGS 84) EPSG:4326, this is
the native to projection of the EXIF spatial information.
TO IMPORT GEOTAGGED IMAGERY:
1. Navigate to IMAGES>GeoTag Setup to begin importing the images.
2. From the GeoTag Table dropdown select the MapInfo Pro table you wish to use or open a
table from the adjacent File open button.
Note To make the process of creating a GeoTagged table easier a Create Table button is
location on the dialog. Simply click the button and save a new MapInfo TAB File. This table
will have the standard fields required and will be projected into Longitude/Latitude (WGS
84) EPSG:4326.
3. Select the fields from the GeoTag Table you want the EXIF information from the image to
populate. The Path, Filename, longitude and Latitude fields are mandatory and must be selected.
The remaining fields are optional but contain valuable information you may wish to reference.
Note Next time you import images the field mapping will be remembered, these are stored as
metadata keys in the MapInfo Pro TAB file.

Note Each field needs to be of a certain type to be selected such as Character or Float, if you
need to modify the fields type or add additional fields navigate to
TABLE>Maintenance>Table Modify Structure.
4. Click the Next button, you will now need to select the folder containing the georeferenced images.

5. Click on the Browse button and select the folder containing your geotagged images. By
default all the images will be selected to import. If you scroll to the right of the list box you will
observe addition EXIF attributes about the images.
Note If an image is not georeferenced there will be no Latitude and Longitude information, it is
best to deselect this image so it does not get imported. To select/deselect multiple images
hold down either the SHIFT or CTRL keys and click on the images you wish to select/
deselect.

6. If you wish to view the image as a thumbnail you can click on each image in the list, a thumbnail
image will appear.

7. Once you have selected all the images you wish to import click Finish button. You will be informed
if the import was successful. A successful import will create a series of point objects in the
selected MapInfo Pro TAB file located in Longitude/Latitude (WGS 84) EPSG:4326.

8. If you continually use this image folder to load up new images, to prevent import duplication
images already imported will be deselected by default and displayed in red text with a
strikethrough. Any images which have not been imported will be selected and displayed as black
text.
VIEWING GEOTAGGED IMAGERY

To view GeoTagged imagery you will need to have imported the images into your GeoTagged
MapInfo Pro Tab as previously outlined. Viewing the image is as simple as opening the GeoTag
Viewer window and selecting a point object in a map window.
TO VIEW GEOTAGGED IMAGERY:
1. Navigate to IMAGES>GeoTag Viewer to open the GeoTag Viewer window.
Note The viewer window can be either docked or floating and is fully resizable. To modify the
window state right click on the title bar of the window and select from the options Floating,
Dockable or Tabbed.
2. To display the geotagged image use the MapInfo Pro Select tool and click on a point object from
the geotagged table. The linked image will appear in the GeoTag Viewer window. Continue to
select other point objects to display other images.

3. If you imported the bearing information from the image you can display the orientation the image
was captured from by toggling the Bearing button on the viewer.
• Bearing visibility off
• Bearing visibility on
With the bearing enabled the orientation is displayed in the map window by a red arrow in
the direction the image was captured.

4. Additional information about the image can be observed by clicking the expansion button on the
top left of the viewer dialog, click again to contract.

GEOTAGGED IMAGE DATA ENTRY

To make the process of entering additional information easier a shortcut to the Single Record Entry
tool is located at the bottom left of the viewer dialog.
TO MODIFY GEOTAGGED IMAGE DATA:
1. Click the Single Record Entry button, the Single Record Entry dialog will open. Select the
geotag table from the Table dropdown list. The information about the selected image will be
displayed.
2. To edit the information simply click the field and modify. To further enhance data entry you can
setup dropdownlists. Refer to the Digitizing and data entry section for additional information on
how to setup.
Note The Single Record Entry window can be either docked or floating and is fully resizable. To
modify the window state right click on the title bar of the window and select from the options
Floating, Dockable or Tabbed. Alternatively, you can drag the window into the desired location.
OPENING THE IMAGE

If you wish to view the geotagged image into your default image viewer in Windows simply double left
click on the image in the GeoTag Viewer to open.

VIEWING MULTIPLE IMAGES

GeoTagged Images can be viewed as either a single image or as multiple images.
TO VIEW MULTIPLE IMAGES:
1. To view multiple images select multiple points from the geotagged table, you will be presented
with a tiled view of the selected images.
2. Click on one of the images to display as a single view.

3. On either side of the image are Previous and Next buttons to scroll through the selected
images. You will notice within the map window the display image will have a location pin
displayed on the corresponding image selected.
4. To exit from the multiple image view click the Close button.

INVALID IMAGE OR BROKEN REFERENCE

If you delete, move or change the name of an image or folder where the geotagged images are located
you will be presented with a image indicating 'No Image Available'.

WORKING WITH
DRILLHOLES
Datamine Discover provides a comprehensive environment for processing
and visualizing drillhole data.
IN THIS SECTION
Drillhole data workflow 386
Project Database 386
Drillhole source data formats 387
Trench Source table formats 393
Importing drillhole data from other drillhole applications 399
Creating and managing drillhole projects 399
Desurveying method 420
Creating sections and plans 422
Managing and analysing sections and plans 429
Displaying downhole data 441
Displaying downhole logs 457
Creating and editing legends 462
Creating section legends 468
Adding sections to a layout 469
Adding a map grid to sections 472
Creating a section collar plan 473
Interrogating drillholes 473
Downhole compositing 474
Merging downhole tables 483
Clipping drillholes by 3D solids or surfaces 485
Generating 3D coordinates 489
Calculating maximum and EOH values 490
Converting alpha-beta core angles 494
Calculating sectional resources 497
WORKING WITH DRILLHOLES 386
DRILLHOLE DATA WORKFLOW

A drillhole database is typically constructed from a series of tables containing information such as
drillhole collar location and geometry, downhole survey measurements, downhole geochemical,
geological or geophysical data and/or other related information.
To create drillhole sections and plans, use the following steps as a guide:
1. Format all drillhole data and import into MapInfo Pro. File formats such as Access, Excel, and
CSV should be first imported into MapInfo Pro to create .TAB files (see Importing and exporting
and Drillhole source data formats and Trench Source table formats).
2. Ensure the collar table is mappable using SPATIAL>Create>Create Points (or right click on the
collar table in the Explorer>Tables list, and choose Create Points).
3. Create a new drillhole project and assign the correct table and columns as required (see Creating
a new drillhole project).
4. Perform data validation to check for drillhole name mismatches, missing data, sample overlaps
and end of hole depth discrepancies (Validating a drillhole database). A project geopackage
database will then be created.
5. Create a collar plan (see Creating a section collar plan).
6. Create cross-sections using selected section lines or drillhole selections (see Creating sections
and plans).
7. Format and display downhole data on sections (see Displaying downhole data and Displaying
downhole logs).
8. Add sections and plans to a layout window at the correct scale with section grids and title block
ready for printing (see Adding a map grid to sections and Adding sections to a layout).
9. Save project for future use with the Session Manager.
Note It is recommended to disable MapInfo Pro's Ribbon Tab Switching (default option is
<Automatic>) when using the Drillholes module. Select PRO>Options>System>Application,
and set Ribbon Tab Switching to <None>.
PROJECT DATABASE
Upon creating and validating a drillhole project, Datamine Discover will import your Source tables into
a new 3D Project Database, in the form of a permanent Geopackage Database (.GPKG). This is the
process you may notice occurring at the bottom right of the screen on bigger projects. This project
database allows efficient data access, manipulation and handling; calculates and stores the 3D
coordinates for all of the input data, and optimizes section generation and downhole data display
functionality.
This permanent Project Database will be located at
..\Users\username\AppData\Roaming\Encom\Discover\projectname and will be directly read each
time the project is opened (via DRILLHOLES>Manage>Open Project).
GeoPackages (.GPKG) are an open, standards-based, platform-independent, portable, self-
describing, compact format for transferring geospatial information, and provide many benefits,
including:
• Larger dataset support: SQL Server CE (Datamine Discover 2017) has a 2GB limit, whereas
GeoPackage can be as large as 100TB.
• NativeX Tab file support: data in a NativeX TAB file can be saved into GeoPackage.

• For certain datasets (e.g. those lots of empty field values), significant space saving and faster
processing.
Note Once a project geopackage database is opened, the source tables will automatically close
(and vice versa). The source tables cannot be open at the same time as the project database.
This project database will be Refreshed (i.e. updated from the source tables) at the following times:
1. By enabling the Refresh Project Data option at the bottom of the Open Project dialog (set 'On' by
default).
This is recommended if your Source data tables are updated regularly (e.g. automated acQuire
database replication to MapInfo tables overnight), and for small source tables. However, if your
source data tables are only updated infrequently/on-demand, and/or for very large source
datasets, only enabling this option when required is recommended: the Refresh process can take
some time with large datasets.
2. User-instigated by selecting DRILLHOLES>Manage>Manage Project>Refresh. This is very
useful when the source tables have been updated mid-way through a Datamine Discover
drillhole session.
3. After the Validation tool has been run (DRILLHOLES>Manage>Manage Project>Validate).
4. After using the Modify button in Manage Project (which will also trigger automatic
compulsory re-validation of data): for instance when adding new downhole data tables to
the project.
5. After the Edit Data tool has been run to make changes to the MapInfo Pro source tables
p
(e.g. fixing/resolving validation errors) (DRILLHOLES>Manage>Edit Data).
6. When the 'Add output to current project' option is enabled in certain analytical tools, such as
Composite, Downhole Clip & Downhole Merge.
Note Being a 3D database, the project geopackage is read-only and cannot be edited by the user
within Datamine Discover. If the source tables are MapInfo Pro tables, use the Edit Data
function to make changes to the project and refresh the project database.
DRILLHOLE SOURCE DATA FORMATS

The Drillholes module in Datamine Discover can use source data captured in a number of different
formats including Access and other ODBC linked databases. Datamine Discover does not need to
make any alterations or additions to the source data.
When a Datamine Discover drillhole project is created, the 3D coordinates are automatically
computed,and stored in the project database; the source tables do not need to contain these
coordinates, and if present, they will not be used.This improves ease of use with Microsoft Access
database tables and read-only tables (such as Excel spreadsheets).

The project collar, survey, and downhole tables must contain a Hole ID field, which is the primary key
between these tables. The following data tables can be used to define a drillhole project:
• Collar table (mandatory)
• Downhole survey table (optional)
• Downhole interval and point data tables (optional)
• Downhole structural data tables (optional)
• Grid and contour surfaces (optional)
• Surface geology (optional)
• Section lines (blank table is created automatically)
COLLAR TABLE
The collar location table must be a mappable table (use SPATIAL>Create>Create Points) containing
point objects for each drillhole collar. The collar table must include the following columns:
Note The field name and order of the mandatory columns is not important. These columns are
specified during project setup.
Field Field Type

HoleID Character
Easting Float
Northing Float
Elevation Float
Total Depth Float
Azimuth (optional) Float
Dip (optional) Float
If a separate downhole survey table is not present, the collar table must contain two additional numeric
columns for the drillhole collar; Azimuth and Dip. Dips can be expressed as positive or negative values,
e.g. –90° or 90°, and are measured from the horizontal: a 0 degree dip represents a horizontal hole,
and 90 or –90 will result in a vertical drillhole.
All mandatory columns must be numeric, aside from the HoleID must be a character field. For native
MapInfo Pro tables it is recommended that coordinates are stored in columns with a Float (Floating
Decimal) data type to preserve the precision of the coordinate values.

DOWNHOLE SURVEY TABLE

The downhole survey table is an optional, non-mappable table that contains a list of downhole depth,
dip and azimuth inflections for each drillhole; for example, as measured with a downhole survey
camera. The table must contain the following columns:
Note The field name and order of the mandatory columns is not important; the columns are specified
during project setup.
Field Field Type

HoleID Character
Depth Float
Azimuth Float
Dip Float
All mandatory columns must be numeric, aside from the HoleID, which must be a character field.
Depth, Azimuth and Dip columns must be numeric; dip values can be positive or negative.
Note Drillholes with no downhole survey table are displayed as straight lines using the Dip, Azimuth
and Total Depth values from the Collar table.
DOWNHOLE INTERVAL AND POINT DATA TABLES

Downhole data tables are optional, non-mappable tables that can contain sampled and logged interval
information such as geochemical, geological, regolith, alteration or geophysical data values. A drillhole
project can contain multiple downhole data tables. Downhole data tables must contain the following
columns:
Field Field Type

HoleID Character
Depth From Float
Depth To Float
All mandatory columns must be numeric except the HoleID, which must be a text field. Depth From and
Depth To columns must be numeric. For point (non-interval) data, such as structural measurements,
the Depth From and Depth To values for a measurement should be equal. You can also specify a
single depth field if the point dataset only contains one depth field.
Note The position and name of the mandatory HoleID, From, and To columns do not need to be in
the same position. In previous versions of the Drillholes Module you were required to have all
mandatory fields in the same position. You can select the HoleID, From, and To fields from
each selected downhole table. Most importantly, the data type of the mandatory fields must
match. Use the Structure Manager (see Multi-table, multi-field editing) to compare and modify
the structures of multiple downhole data tables.
Other data columns such as sample number, rock type, grades etc. can be present, if required.
Sample intervals must not overlap within a downhole data table: see Validating a drillhole database.
Thus, if lithology and assays have been logged with differing intervals (e.g. regular 1m intervals for
assays, versus only rock-type changes for lithology), these should be provided as separate downhole
data tables.

DOWNHOLE STRUCTURAL DATA TABLES

Structural data tables are a special type of downhole data that define the intersection of structure
planes, such as bedding, faults, shears, and joints. Structural data can be displayed on drillhole
sections using the Structure display option.
To display structure ticks, downhole structural data tables must contain the following columns:
Field Field Type

HoleID Character
Depth Float
Dip Float
Dip Direction Float
Like a geophysical point measurement, the Depth To and Depth From values can be equal, or a signle
Depth field can be used. This defines the point (depth down the hole) at which the structure intersects
the drillhole trace. This defines structures of zero thickness, such as joints and bedding. If the Depth
To value is greater than the Depth From value, the structure is located at the midpoint. This defines
infilled zones, such as shears and faults.
The Dip values must be between 0° and 90°. If not recorded, the Dip field must be null—a zero value
is read as horizontal.
Dip Direction values must be between 0° and 360°. For non-oriented (dip only) core, the Dip Direction
is left null—a zero value is read as 0° north.
If the structural data file contains alpha-beta core angles, they must be converted to dip and dip
direction before plotting as structure ticks (see Converting alpha-beta core angles), before the table is
added to the drillhole project.
The requirements for structural downhole data tables are otherwise the same as Downhole interval and
point data tables.
GRID AND CONTOUR SURFACES
Datamine Discover can extract sectional profile information from raster and contoured surfaces (such
as surface topography, soil geochemistry or pit profiles) to display in the drillhole section.

The topographic surface (created with MapInfo Pro Raster, third-party products, or the Surfaces
module) can also be used to extract elevation values for trench collar and survey tables.
A surface grid can be in any raster grid format supported by Datamine Discover such as ER Mapper,
Surfer or MRR (multi-resolution raster) format. Contour maps must have polylines, lines, polygons, or
points with the appropriate numerical attribute. See Supported file formats for more information.
SURFACE GEOLOGY
Mappable table containing attributed polygons such as surface geology or regotlith. The polygons are
draped over the topographic profile (if displayed) in cross-section displays. The polygon surface table
is optional.
SECTION LINES
When creating a drillhole project, Datamine Discover automatically creates a mappable table (in the
collar table projection) as a permanent repository for section lines, from which cross-sections can be
easily created and regenerated. This table is named SectionLines_Projectname and contains the
following attributable fields:
Field Field Type

Section Name Character
Envelope Width Float
Reverse View Direction Float
Description Character
This table can be populated in a number of ways, and provides significant time savings for multiple
section generation and automatic naming in the Generate Sections tool, as well as minimizing section
duplication and regeneration issues:
• For new projects, it is strongly recommended to pre-create and attribute the section lines in this
table, before generating any sections. The following tools may be helpful:
• Use Traverse Lines tool (see Generating traverse lines and peg coordinates) to generate
systematically spaced section lines.

• Name the sections incrementally with Unique Identifier tool (see Adding unique identifiers to
table records) if not manually.
• Attribute the sections with the required envelope widths (e.g. the TABLE>Edit>Update
Column tool).
• Any sections defined manually with the Generate Sections tool are automatically added to the
SectionLines_ProjectName table during section generation, including all specified names and
envelopes.
• The user can import an existing attributed table of lines into this SectionLines_ProjectName
table. This is performed via the SectionLine (last) tab of the Project Manager New or Modify
sequence (with name and envelope field matching options).
• For existing or imported legacy (pre-2012) drillhole projects for which you have no section lines,
go to Section Manager>Administrative Tools>Synchronise Section Lines. This will automatically
populate the SectionLines_ProjectName table with lines/polylines (and associated attributes)
for all existing sections within that project (i.e. whatever is listed in the Section Manager).
Legacy project with empty SectionLines_projectname table
Legacy project after running the Sync Section lines option
The biggest benefit of the SectionLines_ProjectName table is in the Define tab of the Generate
Sections tool. Two options are provided on this tab:

• Manual presents the traditional interface, including the Populate from Selected Lines button.
• Table mode directly references the SectionLines_projectname table, allowing section
generation only from the contents of this table, but automatically using all contained attributes.
Section selection can either be from the presented list (for smaller projects) or via graphical
selection. This greatly simplifies the section creation process, removing section naming issues
and incorrect parameters, as well as facilitating easy section re-creation.
Creating sections automatically from the SectionLines_ProjectName using the Table option of the Generate sections dialog
TRENCH SOURCE TABLE FORMATS

The source tables required to create trench/costean views are very similar to those required for
drillholes:
• Trench collar tables (compulsory)
• Trench survey tables (compulsory)
• Trench downhole data tables (optional—same as drillholes)
• Trench grid and contour surfaces (optional—same as drillholes)
Typically Trench data is received in a surveyor’s spreadsheet file and needs to be adjusted to fit the
conventions used in Datamine Discover's Drillhole Project:
1. Collar position
The start point must be stored in a separate “collar” file. This can be done by opening the map
survey file and copying the first row of each trench into a new file (see Trench collar tables).
2. Bearing and inclination
The “distance” field is not the interval length. It is the distance along the trench from its “collar”.
This defines the position at which bearing and inclination is measured along the trench. This can
be done by massaging the bearing/distance vector data in the map survey and shifting the
distance values down one row (see Trench survey tables).
Pre–2012 version Discover drillhole projects containing a costean/trench dataset required a Drillhole
collar table present. Costean/trench dataset can now be used independently or within a drillhole
project. When both drillhole and costean/trench datasets are used in the same project they must be
spatially mapped to the same projection system.

TRENCH COLLAR TABLES

The trench collar file must be mappable (as with drillhole collar files) using the MapInfo Pro
SPATIAL>Create>Create Points tool, and requires the following fields:
Field Field Type Notes

Trench ID Character
Easting Float
Northing Float
Elevation Float Optional.
Bearing Float Not required if a survey table is present.
Total Length Float Not required if survey table is used.
The Elevation field can be populated from an RL field in the trench collar table, or alternatively
elevation data can be captured from a topographic grid associated with the drillhole project. If no
topographic grid is present and no Z field has been selected, the Z value will default to zero for all
survey points.
The Bearing field is compulsory if no survey table is present (i.e. for a straight trench). It is not required
for XYZ or Bearing and Distance Segment survey tables. If a Bearing and Distance Cumulative survey
table is used, the bearing field is optional (the collar bearing can be incorporated into either the collar
file or the survey file).
The Total Length field is optional if a survey table is provided. For a Distance and Bearing derived
trench, if the total length specified in the collar is greater than the survey length another survey
segment with the same bearing as the last survey segment will be created to the total length specified.
If no Total length field is specified the last survey segment will complete the Trench trace.
TRENCH SURVEY TABLES

If the trench is not linear i.e. it has a number of azimuth changes/inflexions along its length, a survey
table is required. This requires a Trench ID field matching that in the Trench Collar Table.
The Trench survey table can be constructed in the following three formats:
• XYZ survey
• Bearing and distance cumulative survey
• Bearing and distance segments survey
XYZ SURVEY

The table for an XYZ survey contains the following additional compulsory fields that define the
locations of inflexion points along the trench. This table must include the trench endpoint X/Y
coordinates.

Trench ID Character
Order Float
X Float Easting
Y Float Northing
Z Float Elevation (optional)
The Order field requires numeric values that list/control the order of the survey points: for example, 1,
2, 3, 4… An excellent alternative is to use a cumulative trench length field (equivalent to a drillhole
survey depth field): for example with values of 0, 22.5, 65, 89.1, etc.
Elevation data can either be supplied in a Z field, or z values can be captured from a topographic grid
associated with the drillhole project at each defined survey point (by setting the Elevation pull-down to
None: (Zero/Topo grid)). If no topographic grid is present and no Z field has been selected the Z value
will default to zero for all survey points.
Note When using an XYZ survey table the Total Length and Bearing fields in the Trench Collar table
are not used to define the Trench trace, and should be set to 'None'.
Note The Z specification can be different to that in the collar file; it is possible to assign a Z field in
the collar file, whilst Z values in the survey table setup are captured from a DEM grid file (or
vice versa). If XYZ information for the collar itself is specified in both the collar and survey files,
the survey file information will be utilized preferentially.
An example of XYZ trench collar and survey tables. These include elevation data (but if this information is not present, a DEM
grid could be utilized). RP0132 has one inflexion point, whilst RP0133 is a straight trench. Note the Order field in the survey
file stipulating the order in which the inflexion points are handled: a cumulative trench length field could just as easily be used.
BEARING AND DISTANCE CUMULATIVE SURVEY

The table for a Cumulative Survey contains the following additional compulsory fields that define the
locations of inflexion points along the trench.

Trench ID Character
Bearing Float Orientation of segment
Distance Float Length of segment
Inclination Float Dip of segment
It is optional to have the cumulative trench survey contain a zero distance or survey origin.
If no zero survey is contained in the survey table the trench collar Bearing will be used as the first
survey segment and the Distance from the first survey table segment.
A dip of zero will be used for the first survey segment when no zero survey is contained in the survey
table.
If a zero distance is contained in the survey table the Distance from the second survey table segment
will be used, along with the Bearing and Dip from the first survey segment.
If the Total Length in the Trench collar exceeds the cumulative length specified in the Trench survey
table a trench segment with the same bearing and inclination as the previous segment will be created.
BEARING AND DISTANCE SEGMENTS SURVEY
The table for a Segment Survey contains the following additional compulsory fields that define the
locations of inflexion points along the trench.

Trench ID Character
Order Float
Bearing Float Orientation of segment
Distance Float Length of segment
Inclination Float Dip of segment
The Order field requires numeric values that list/control the order of the survey points: for example, 1,
2, 3, 4….
The segment trench survey doesn't need to contain a zero distance or survey origin, the origin is
extracted from the Trench collar.
The Trench Bearing, Distance and Inclination are sequentially extracted from the Trench Survey table.

If the Total Length in the Trench collar exceeds the segmentlength specified in the Trench survey table
a trench segment with the same bearing as the previous segment will be created with an inclination of
zero.
The Inclination field allows a inclination (slope or dip) of the distance measurement to be specified—
for example, the slope of section of the trench bottom which the distance was measured on, or
alternatively if the distance was measured on the topographic surface then the slope of the ground
surface. If no inclination field is available, set this to None (Horizontal Distance). The trenches will
assumed to have a distance measured on a horizontal plane. Negative values are downwards slope
(declining), positive values are upwards dip (inclining).
The Inclination value is only used to define the elevation of the inflexion when no topographic grid is
available. If a topographic grid is present the Z value will be obtained from this, at the XY location
defined by the the combination of Distance, Inclination of Distance measurement, and the Bearing of
the Distance measurement.
Note Elevation data will only be captured for each measurement point in a Trench Survey table, as
well as the Trench collar location. This may be insufficient for regions of undulating
topography; trenches composed of solely a start and end point will not follow the topographic
profile. To rectify this, assign extra survey points to increase the frequency of elevation
measurements.
An example of Bearing and Distance trench collar and survey files. Note that trench MCS0025 will plot as a linear horizontal
trench as it has no survey information. Also, there is no elevation information in the collar file, thus collar elevation data will
need to be automatically captured from a DEM grid associated with the drillhole project. The Distance field in the Survey file
will need to be set as a Cumulative distance.

TRENCH DOWNHOLE DATA TABLES

Trench data such as assay, magnetic susceptibility and lithological data need to be in the same table
format as required for drillholes. They are also shared between both Drillholes and Trenches, such that
a Downhole table can contain data for both Drillholes and Trenches. They require the following fields:

Trench ID Character Matching collar and suvey tables
From Float
To Float
Fields Character or Float e.g. Cu, RQD, Lithology
Note The position and name of the mandatory HoleID, From, and To columns do not need to be in
the same position. In previous versions of the Drillholes Module you were required to have all
mandatory fields in the same position. You can select the HoleID, From, and To fields from
each selected downhole table. Most importantly, the data type of the mandatory fields must
match. Use the Structure Manager (see Multi-table, multi-field editing editing) to compare and
modify the structures of multiple downhole data tables.
An example of a trench assay table.
Interval data (e.g. composite chip samples, lithological units) must have a To value greater than or
equal to the From value. The trenching tool (as with the drillhole module) cannot handle overlapping
downhole data intervals within the same field (e.g. zinc chip samples over the intervals of 121–125 m
and 124–130 m in the same trench will cause display errors). For point (non-interval) data, such as
structural measurements, the Depth From and Depth To values for a measurement should be equal.
You can also specify a single depth field if the point dataset only contains one depth field.
TRENCH GRID AND CONTOUR SURFACES

As indicated previously in the collar and survey sections, elevation data for trench “collar” points as well
as any inflexion points can be captured from a topographic grid (created with MapInfo Pro Raster or
with the Surfaces module in older versions of Datamine Discover) associated with the drillhole project
(as opposed to having elevation data supplied in RL/Z fields in the collar and/or survey files).

IMPORTING DRILLHOLE DATA FROM OTHER DRILLHOLE APPLICATIONS

Datamine Discover provides specialized tools for importing data from the gINT and WinLoG borehole
logging applications, which automatically build a Datamine Discover drillhole project during the import
process.
Additionally, you can import drillhole datasets from other databases or formats using the extensive
array of import tools available, and manually build the drillhole project as required. You can also import
a wide variety of surface grids, raster images, and other spatial data.
For information on importing and exporting data for drillhole projects, see Importing and exporting.
You can also import a complete Datamine Discover Drillhole Project from another location. For more
information, see Sharing Datamine Discover drillhole projects.
CREATING AND MANAGING DRILLHOLE PROJECTS

Drillhole projects are created and managed with the Project Manager and other tools in the Manage
group on the DRILLHOLES tab:
• Creating a new drillhole project
• Validating a drillhole database
• Sharing Datamine Discover drillhole projects
• Modifying and deleting drillhole projects
• Associating costean/trench tables with the project
• Opening drillhole projects
• Creating a subset of a project
• Packaging drillhole projects
CREATING A NEW DRILLHOLE PROJECT

The New Project wizard steps you through defining a new project's parameters and selecting,
importing and validating it's source data tables.
TO CREATE A DRILLHOLE PROJECT:
1. Select DRILLHOLES>Manage>New Project. The Drillhole Project Setup – General dialog is
displayed.

2. Under Project Definition, type the Project Name and Description.

Note The project name and folder name must not contain any special characters, such as *, %,
$, #, @ ', “, or ?.
Note The user must have write permission to the drillhole project folder. Set the necessary
permissions in Windows before proceeding.
3. Next to the Path box, click the Browse button and navigate to the folder containing the
source tables. Click OK to save the project path. All drill sections, plans and log displays will
be saved to this folder.
4. Select the Project Units for the elevation and downhole units. The Depth/Length Units are the
units of measurement for all downhole depth and from-to fields, collar elevations, and surface
topograhic DEM.
5. Select the Project Type:
• Project only contains drillholes will display a wizard for drillhole data only.
• Project only contains trenches will display a wizard for costean/trench data only.
• Project contains drillholes and costeans/trenches will display a wizard for drillhole data and
costeans/trenches.

Trenches can be added and removed from any existing Drillhole project by modifying the
project. Trenches or costeans can be added at any time to an existing "drillholes only" project.
A warning is displayed next to any undefined, mandatory settings. These must be
defined before proceeding to the next dialog.
6. Click Next. The Drillhole Project Setup – Drillhole Location dialog is displayed.
7. Select collar and (optionally) survey tables to include in the project:

• Click the Open Tables button and select the collar table and/or survey tables.
• Select the required field mappings for the collar table and/or survey table.
Note The collar table must be mappable with points already created for the easting/northing
fields in the correct projection. To do this, use SPATIAL>Create>Create Points.
Note The HoleID field for both Collar and Survey tables must be of type Character.
Note The collar table must be packed. If an unpacked row is found in the collar table, an error
message is displayed. Click Yes to pack the table, or Cancel to abort opening the project.

• Select the Check dip fields orientation button to automatically assign the down dip
to the appropriate convention.
Note If both negative (down holes) and positive (up holes) dips are used in the project, select
the Down dip is negative option and ensure that dip values are correctly signed in the data
tables.
8. Click Next. The Drillhole Project Setup – Downhole dialog is displayed.
9. Specify downhole tables to include in project:

• Click the Open Tables button and select the downhole data tables.
• Select the required field mappings.
• To choose downhole tables, select the table from the Downhole Table dropdown and click the
Add button
10. When all downhole tables have been selected, for each table define the HoleID, From and To
columns.
Note You will be prompted if your selection is valid or not.
11. If you wish to define a Point table either select the From and To columns with the same number
values or click the Point Table options and select a single field.

12. If you need to delete a downhole table from the project click the delete button.
13. Click Next. The Drillhole Project Setup – Surfaces dialog is displayed.
14. Specify surface and polygon tables to include in project:

If required, click the Open Tables button and select the surface and polygon tables and field
mappings:
• Topographic Surface – Topographic raster grids or contour table used to construct the
sectional profile surface. Contours must have a numeric column containing the Z-value
attribute. If a topography surface table is not specified, a surface profile can be auto-
generated by joining the drill collars together.
• Surface Drape – Display surface or outcrop mapped geology in section profile. Upon vertical
section creation the surface line will display a segmented line by geological unit colours. The
Polygon Code field mapping will attribute each line segment from the polygon table.
• Subterranean Surfaces or contours – Display subsurface grid or contour files.
Note The multi-resolution raster format (.MRR) is supported by both the Topographic and Other
grid surfaces options. If a multi-banded MRR is selected, a Raster Band Selector will be
presented, allowing selection of the requisite Field and Band.

15. Click Next. The Drillhole Project Setup – Section Line dialog is displayed.
16. Choose to create an empty section line table or import an existing section line table:
• Create New Section Line Table – Creates empty SectionLines_Projectname table with the
column structure shown below. When sections are created using the Generate Sections tool
(see Creating sections and plans), the section defintions are stored in this table.
• Import Section Line Data from Existing Table – Imports an existing table with section line
data (created with, for example, Traverse Lines) into the SectionLines_Projectname table.
This import process can be run either during project creation or later when modifying a
project. The imported table can only contain attributed lines or polylines.

The following field mapping options are provided for custom attribute fields in the imported
section line table (if they are exist):
• Section Name
• Envelope Width
• Description
Note The column format of the section line table to be imported must be:
Section Name – Character
Envelope Width – Float/Integer
Description – Character
Note The section line table has no mandatory fields; however it is strongly recommended that
all section lines are labelled with a section name to help with organizing data.
17. Click OK to complete the configuration of the drillhole project files.
VALIDATING A DRILLHOLE DATABASE

Once the source tables have been selected and imported into the project they are automatically
validated. Data validation options can highlight data that can cause problems later, when creating
drillhole sections and plans. Some of the main sources of the failure to plot all downhole data
successfully on a section can be attributed to drillhole name or total depth mismatches and overlapping
sample intervals within the collar and downhole data tables.
The following validation options are provided.
• Automatic validation
• Validate collars
• Validate surveys
• Validate downhole samples
Note During the validation process, all available options must be defined before the validation can
proceed.
Use the Filter button to restrict the validation to a subset of drillholes in the project. The validation
will otherwise be performed on the entire project. This is particularly useful for large already
validated projects when additional drillholes or drillhole extensions are added, allowing the validation
to be targeted on only the new data.

AUTOMATIC VALIDATION
Your drillhole source tables, will be automatically validated, and the project database refreshed, upon
the following actions:
• Upon New Project creation
• After project Modification (for example: adding a new table or changing a field assignment)
• When an existing project is Refreshed from its source tables.
• When a legacy project is Imported (.XML)
• When a existing project is Opened, it will by default be refreshed (and therefore validated). This
automatic refresh can be disabled via the 'Refresh Project Data' checkbox at the bottom of the
Open Drilhole Project dialog (it is recommended to disable this for larger projects and/or when the
source tables are only updated irregularly).,
The following compulsory checks will be run (see following sections for more details):
• Table structure – all mandatory fields are present and appropriate datatypes etc
• Collars – Duplicate collar IDs
• Collars – Missing, misplaced or non-point objects
• Collars – Special characters in Hole ID column
• Collars – Easting, Northing or Length (EOH) attributes are zero
• Survey – Duplicate depth values
• Survey – Survey EOH depth greater than Collar EOH
• Survey – Dip out of range
• Survey – Azimuth out of range
• Downhole data – Overlapping sample
• Downhole data – Samples beyond EOH depth

VALIDATE COLLARS
The Validate Collars dialog provides the following validation options:

• Duplicate collar IDs – Checks for duplicate hole IDs in the collar table (compulsory).
• Missing, misplaced or non-point objects – Compares coordinates of mapped items in the collar
table with where the collar is mapped to in the map window. It can also create a mapped point of
non-mappable points in the collar table (compulsory).
• Special characters in Hole ID column – Looks for apostrophes (') in the Hole ID column
(compulsory).
• East, north, elevation, length (EOH) attributes are zero – Checks coordinate fields for zero values
(compulsory).
• Rows with duplicate locations – Checks that no two collars have the same location (optional).
On clicking Next, the collar validation is run. If any errors are detected, a Validation report is displayed.
If there are no errors, the Validate surveys dialog is displayed.

VALIDATE SURVEYS
Validate drillhole surveys dialog
The Validate Surveys dialog has the following validation rules:

• Duplicate depth values – Checks that no two survey entries for the same drillhole/trench have the
same depth value (compulsory).
• Survey EOH depth greater than Collar EOH – Matches the survey file EOH and the collar file
EOH, and makes sure that the survey file isn’t longer. If downhole data exists below the total
depth specified in the collar table, it will not be displayed in section. This can occur due to data
entry errors or if the collar data was entered before the drilling was complete (compulsory).
• Collar name mismatch – Checks the survey file collar names match the names in the collar file.
Common problems occur where the drillhole name is specified differently in the collar table and
the downhole tables (e.g. DDH007 and DDH7 are considered by Datamine Discover to be
different drillholes). Drillhole project files linked to Excel spreadsheets might contain spaces
before or after entries, which causes drillhole name mismatches (optional).
• Dip sign discrepancy – Checks if dip values differ from the dip value positive/negative selected in
the drillhole project setup (see Creating and managing drillhole projects) (optional).
Note Dip sign discrepancy assumes that all holes have been drilled downwards. If the project
contains up-holes (as in an underground array), the dip sign discrepancy check will
assume that these holes are erroneous.
• Dip out of range – Checks that dips are in the range -90 to +90 degrees (compulsory).
• Azimuth out of range – Checks that azimuths are in the range 0 to 360 degrees (compulsory).

• Large dip curvature changes – Data entry errors in survey readings can cause significant
problems that are difficult to pick up. This validation test will detect abrupt changes of dip between
consecutive survey readings. The default degree change tolerance is 5 degrees (optional).
• Large azimuth curvature changes – This validation test will detect abrupt changes of azimuth
between consecutive survey readings. The default degree change tolerance is 5 degrees
(optional).
Note Validation is stricter than in pre-2013 versions. This might cause drillhole projects
produced in previous versions that had passed validation to fail in Datamine Discover
2013 or later.
On clicking Next, the survey validation is run. If any errors are detected, a Validation report is
displayed. If there are no errors, the Validate downhole samples dialog is displayed.
VALIDATE DOWNHOLE SAMPLES
Validate drillhole downhole tables dialog
• Overlapping sample – Sample intervals should not overlap in the same downhole data table and
any such intervals must be identified and resolved. (Compulsory)
• Samples beyond EOH depth – Checks sample depth of downhole tables to the EOH value in the
collar table. If the sample depths are deeper than the EOH in the collar table an error will be
reported. (Compulsory)

• Collar name mismatch – If collar names in the downhole table don’t match collar names in the
collar table an error will be reported. Common problems occur where the drillhole name is
specified differently in the collar table and the downhole tables (e.g. DDH007 and DDH7 are
considered by Datamine Discover to be different drillholes). Drillhole project files linked to Excel
spreadsheets may contain spaces before or after entries causing drillhole name mismatches.
(optional)
• Sample interval gaps – Although many drillholes do not have contiguous sample intervals from
top to bottom, it is often very useful to list out where the gaps are located to ensure these are not
attributed to data entry errors. The size of the sample interval gap that is deemed acceptable can
be set by the user. The default value is > 0 (optional)
• Duplicate sample numbers – In some instances duplicate sample numbers are an indication of
data entry errors and need to be identified. The sample ID field that the user wants to check is to
be manually selected from the table in this dialog. Duplicates are only searched for in the column
that has been selected.
On clicking Next, the downhole validation is run. If any errors are detected, a Validation report is
displayed. If there are no errors, the message “Project Validation is Complete” is displayed.
Pressing OK will now create the Drillhole Database, and open the drillhole project. The project is now
ready for sectional creation and analysis.
VALIDATION REPORT
The status of the validation, including the number of errors detected, is displayed at the top of the
Project Validation dialog. If errors are detected at any and each of the three stages, a validation report
is produced:
• Collar validation report
• Survey validation report
• Downhole validation report
A status of “Pending” indicates that the validation report is being generated.
All three validation report types have the same table structure:
• Error – Reports the error type produced by a validation rule being broken.
• Table – Reports which table the error has been found in (collar, survey or a downhole table).
• Collar – Reports which drillhole collar the error is associated with.
• From – For collar and downhole file errors, refers to the downhole distance the error occurred at.
For survey table azimuth and dip change errors, refers to the initial azimuth and dip before the
change is made.
• Amount – The value (distance, azimuth, dip) the error occurred at—e.g. sample interval amount
is the distance of the sample interval.
Note All compulsory validation errors are shown in red.
To view and correct an error, click the Show button. The corresponding table is opened and the
rows that contains the error are selected. Edit the table values as required and save using
HOME>File>Save Table. You can also auto-fix errors.
After corrections have been made and saved, click the Refresh button to rerun the validation and
regenerate the report. If the error has been fixed, it will be removed from the new report.

All three validation report types can be filtered by Error or Table type by using the pulldown menus at
the top of the table.
To export a report (to show to a database administrator or external party, for example), click the
Report button. The report is saved as a CSV file into the project folder. The report has the
following columns.
• Type
• Table
• Collar
• Rows
• Date Time
• Automatic Fix Action
All three validation reports (collar, survey and downhole) are appended to the one file.
Note If the report CSV file is open and another validation report is run, an error will be reported and
you will be asked to close the file.
Click the Auto Fix button to display errors that can be automatically fixed by Datamine
Discover:
The error types and table they occur in can be filtered with the pulldown menus at the top of the dialog.
Select the errors that you want to autofix, or click Select All to fix all errors. On the Auto Fix dialog, click
Auto Fix to fix the selected errors.

COLLAR VALIDATION REPORT
The collar file validation can produce the following error types (see Validate collars).
• Mismatched collar object
• Duplicate collar location
• Duplicate collar
• Field null
• Special characters in Hole ID field
Click Autofix to fix following errors:
• Mismatched Collar Object – Moves a mapped point to match the coordinates in the
Browser table data. If a table entry has no associated mapped point a point will be created.
SURVEY VALIDATION REPORT

The survey file validation can produce the following error types (see Validate surveys):
• Dip sign mismatch
• Large dip change
• Large azimuth change
• EOH longer than collar
• Field outside range

• No collar file/record entry

• Duplicate depth value
• No survey records
• Dip sign mismatch – This will check that the dip sign selected in the project setup +/- (see Check
dip fields orientation button) will match what is in the survey file. If the user has indicated that the
downhole dip is assigned (-) negative. The autofix will look for any (+) positive dip values and
change them to negative.
• EOH longer than collar – This checks if depth values in the survey file are longer than the total
depth in the collar file. Autofix is available if the error is less than a meter. What will be fixed can
be set with the Gap Check precision. If Gap precision is set at one any error smaller than one will
be fixed. If Gap precision is set as 0.1 any error less than 0.1 will be fixed, etc. When autofix is
clicked the values is the survey table will be adjusted to the EOH value in the collar table of the
associated drillhole.
Note Dip sign discrepancy assumes that all holes have been drilled downwards. If you project has
holes drilled upwards (as in an underground array) the dip sign discrepancy check will assume
that these holes are erroneous.

DOWNHOLE VALIDATION REPORT

The downhole file validation can produce the following error types (see Validate downhole samples):
• Sample gap
• EOH longer than collar
• No downhole records
• No collar file/record entry
• Overlapping sample
• Duplicate sample number

• EOH Longer than Collar -- This checks if depth values in the survey file are longer
than the total depth in the collar file. Autofix is available if the error is less than a meter. What will
be fixed can be set with the Gap Check precision. If Gap precision is set at one any error smaller
than one will be fixed. If Gap precision is set as 0.1 any error less than 0.1 will be fixed, etc. When
autofix is clicked the values is the downhole table will be adjusted to the EOH value in the collar
table of the associated drillhole.
When the validation process is complete, you are now ready to use your new drillhole project.
SHARING DATAMINE DISCOVER DRILLHOLE PROJECTS


Datamine Discover Drillhole Projects can be shared with other users using these functions in the
Manage group:
• The Import Project option (under the Open Project dropdown)
• The Export option on the Manage Project dialog
These options incorporate all the metadata generated during project setup. as well as any legends
utilized, allowing project to be shared either by:
• Importing or Exporting a Drillhole Export (.DHPROJECT) file for sharing between Datamine
Discover 2016 and above users
• Importing a legacy (v2015.2 and older) drillhole project (.XML)
IMPORT DRILLHOLE PROJECT

DRILLHOLES>Manage>Open Project>Import Project
This will import either an existing (unexported) project, or an exported project: importing an exported
project will give the user a choice of legends to import. Two import options are available; select the
appropriate format from the bottom right of the selection dialog:
• Select the Drillhole Project (.DHPROJECT) option for current version projects (Datamine Discover
2017).
• Select the Drillhole Project Legacy (*.setup.xml) option for older version projects (version 2015.2
and older).
Importing projects from an earlier version of Datamine Discover might produce validation errors
because of changes to validation rules between versions. If a validation error occurs, correct the error
in the corresponding data table.
EXPORT DRILLHOLE PROJECT

DRILLHOLES>Manage Project>Export

Export a drillhole project, including legends, to a folder for sharing with users. This will create a
.DHEXPORT format export, for sharing/consumption by other Datamine Discover 2016 and above
users.
1. Select an output path to save the drillhole project files.

2. Select the Legends you wish to export with the drillhole project.
3. If you are going to email or FTP the drillhole project you can automatically zip the files by
checking the Zip exported project folder option.
4. Click OK to export.
For information about importing and exporting drillhole (and other types of data) in other formats, see
Importing and exporting.
MODIFYING AND DELETING DRILLHOLE PROJECTS

Use the Manage Project to modify and delete existing drillhole projects.
1. Select DRILLHOLES>Manage>Manage Project.
2. Click the Drillhole Project dropdown, select the project, then:
• To add or remove tables, modify field assignments or modify the project settings, click
Modify.
• To delete the project, click Delete. The project tables and sections are preserved–only the
project references are removed.
ASSOCIATING COSTEAN/TRENCH TABLES WITH THE PROJECT

To generate a trench/costean section or plan, the relevant trench tables need to be associated with a
drillhole project. A drillhole project requires at least a Drillhole collar table, in addition to the Trench
Collar table. This will generally be an existing Drillhole Collar file; however, a copy of the Trench Collar
file can be created and used as the Drillhole collars if there are no drillholes associated with the project.

Trench collar and survey tables are assigned to any existing drillhole project from the Project Setup
menu.
1. Open the Manage Project dialog and select the Modify button.
2. Open the collar and/or survey table by using the Open Tables button on the
bottom of the Drillhole Project Setup dialog.
3. Select the collar table from pull-down list. Set the various required and optional fields in the Field
Mappings, as detailed in the Apply Downhole Trench Data section.
4. Select the survey table from pull-down list. Tick either the XYZ or Bearing & Distance format
option as detailed in the Trench survey tables section, and set the required Field Mappings.
5. For both the collar and survey tables, if elevation data is to be captured from a DEM/DTM, set the
appropriate fields to “None: (Zero/Topo grid)” rather than the collar Elevation field.
6. An offset z value can be specified as a (negative) value below the surface at which the trench
trace will be plotted in section views. This is appropriate when assay samples have been
collected a constant depth below surface e.g. 1.5m. The units used will be those specified in the
Project Setup dialog on the Drillhole Location tab.
The Z offset will only apply to the Z/RL value sourced from the topographic surface grid. If the
values are set to table fields, they will not be offset.
If downhole trench data tables and/or a topography grid needs to be added to the project continue
with the next section, otherwise press OK to complete the trench setup.
7. To add downhole trench data navigate to the Downhole tab on the Drillhole Project Setup dialog
and open the respective assay, lithology etc tables using the Open Tables button. Populate the
downhole tables and assign the correct field assignments.
8. To add a topographic gridded surface, navigate to the Surfaces tab on the Drillhole Project Setup
dialog and open the grid using the Open Tables button. Select the grid under the Topographic
Surface option.
9. Press OK to complete the setup of trench data.
OPENING DRILLHOLE PROJECTS

Related tools Session Manager
The recommended method of opening drillhole projects is to restore a saved drillhole session
with the Session Manager. This will load the drillhole project and all layouts, legends, title blocks,
sections and plan windows saved with the session.
Datamine Discover drillhole projects cannot be saved and reopened as MapInfo Pro workspaces, due
to the various complex metadata links handled by the Drillhole module between the project datasets
(such as the field assignments in the survey, collar and downhole data tables).
TO CREATE A DRILLHOLE SESSION:
• Select DRILLHOLES>Manage>Manage Project>Session Manager, and then click New to create
a new session. This will create a .DWOR file with the specified Name in a new Sessions
subdirectory under the current drillhole project data folder, along with a standard MapInfo Pro
workspace. Descriptive and comment fields can also be saved in this session file.

TO RESTORE A SAVED DRILLHOLE SESSION:

• Select the DRILLHOLES>Manage>Open Project>Session tab, select the project and saved session
file, and then click Open. This will load the drillhole project and all layouts, legends, title blocks,
sections and plan windows saved with the session.
TO UPDATE AN EXISTING SESSION WITH THE CURRENT WORKSPACE IN MAPINFO PRO:
• Navigate to DRILLHOLES>Manage>Manage Project>Session Manager, select the project and
session, and then click Save. Existing sessions Description and Comments can also be edited by
selecting the Modify button. A session can be removed from the project, using Delete.
Drillholes sessions are the only way to preserve and reopen the following customisations:
• Specific section layer ordering (in the Explorer Window), for instance when multiple Custom
Layers involved, such as lithology, alteration and faults.
• Custom section labels and symbols, for instance derived from the Section Point or Pierce Point
layers.
• Thematic layers created in sections, for example derived from the Section Point or Pierce Point
layers.
Note All existing open tables within MapInfo Pro must be closed before you can open an existing
session. Make sure to save any cosmetic layer objects etc before using the tool.
Note Project sessions are not currently supported when importing or exporting a drillhole project.
ALTERNATIVELY, TO OPEN A DRILLHOLE PROJECT FROM THE PROJECT MANAGER:
1. Select DRILLHOLES>Manage>Open Project.
Note By default, Open Project will Refresh the Project Data each time it is opened. For larger
datasets, or if you source tables are not updated regularly, you may wish to disable this
option (bottom left of the dialog) for faster opening.
2. Select the project, and then click Open.
3. Use the Section Manager to view sections and plans defined in the project.
CREATING A SUBSET OF A PROJECT

Related tools Subset Project
Use the DRILLHOLES>Manage>Manage Project>Subset Project tool to create a subset of an
existing open drillhole project based on a selection of drillholes. This will create copies of all the
relevant drillhole tables (collar, survey, downhole data, topography, etc) subsetted to the
drillhole selection, automatically adding a new drillhole project using these new tables to the Open
Project list.

The Subset Drillhole Project dialog.
The Subset Drillhole Project dialog displays a list of the open project’s drillholes, with the current
selection highlighted. Holes can be selected manually from this list (use the CTRL keyboard button in
combination with the left mouse button to select non-adjacent holes). Alternatively a selection can be
made in MapInfo Pro prior to opening this dialog, using tools such as graphical selection, an SQL query
or the QUERY>Text>Select by Attribute tool (see Selecting records by attribute). This selection will
then be automatically highlighted when the Subset Drillhole Project dialog is opened.
A new Drillhole Project will be automatically created by adding a “_Subset” suffix to the current project’s
name; this name will be also be used to create a new subdirectory under the current Project directory,
into which the subsetted tables will be placed. This New Project Name can be changed in the
appropriate window; the tool will automatically alter the output directory name, which can also be
manually specified using the browse button. A “_subset” suffix is also attached by default to the
subsetted output tables; this can also be altered in the Suffix to append to tables window.
The Optional Files list allows selection of project files to incorporate into the new project (by default
all tables are selected). For example, if the current project included 10 downhole data tables, this option
could be used to select only three tables of interest. If a survey table is associated with the current
project, it is recommended to ensure that this is selected.
Note Grid and Image files associated with the current project will not be subsetted, but simply copied
in their entirety to the output directory with the “_subset” (or other user-defined) suffix attached.
Once this dialog has been configured, press the Subset button. When completed, a text report will be
displayed detailing each table created and any issues that may have arisen.

The Subset Project Report indicating the success of each table subset.
Note After creating a subsetted project, ensure you run Open Project on it before using any further
tools (such as Export).
PACKAGING DRILLHOLE PROJECTS

Drillhole projects can be imported and exported to allow transfer of projects to other computers or for
archiving of projects. This process supports not only the project source data, sections and plans, but
also the all metadata required to automatically reopen the project on the destination computer. For
more information, see Sharing Datamine Discover drillhole projects.
DESURVEYING METHOD
Datamine Discover does not plot the raw survey data. Instead an interpolation method known as “mid-
point tangential averaging”or “back calculation” is used. This is the only method offered in Datamine
Discover and is the default method in Datamine Discover 3D. Although it is a simple method, it does
produce reasonable results.

Each survey point is considered to lie in the middle of a drillhole segment which has the dip and
azimuth of the survey location. The dip and azimuth of the hole changes automatically halfway
between each survey point. This has the affect of intersecting a midpoint in between the actual survey
points, and may not actually intersect a survey point. It also means that the first and last interval of the
trace will be half their expected length.
Note If there is no survey measurement at the start (0 m depth), the first record's Azimuth and Dip
values are used for the initial segment. Similarly, at the end of hole, the last measured azimuth/
dip is continued for the final segments.
Put simply, if your collar is at 0 m and finishes at 40 m and you have down hole surveys at depth
intervals of 10 m, 20 m and 30 m, then Datamine Discover will compute the the end X,Y,Z coordinate
of the first line segment using the midpoint distance between each depth interval (e.g. 0 m to 5 m). It
then uses corresponding dip and azimuth values from the surveys (10 m measurement), to project the
second line segment (5 m to 15 m). At this point it then uses the next Survey dip and azimuth record
(20 m) to generate the next segment.
Note If a record exist is in both the Collar and Survey tables for 0m, the Survey table data is used
preferentially.
This has the effect of making “curved” holes more curved and a hole will diverge further from the
“straight line” (called segments in Datamine Discover 3D) location at increasing depth. If you have a
high frequency of survey data (1 m intervals or less), then the effect of the interpolation will be
negligible.

CREATING SECTIONS AND PLANS

Related tools Generate Sections
The DRILLHOLES>Create>Generate Sections tool can create a cross-section for a vertical
plane at any location and in any orientation. A plan can be generated for a horizontal plane at
any elevation.
A vertical section or plan is defined on the Generate Sections dialog. All the parameters for selecting
the drillholes to plot, the downhole data tables to use, displaying other grid surfaces, annotating with
collar name and depth ticks, drawing topographic profiles, creating multiple sections and applying
downhole display settings are available in this dialog.
• Horizontal plan
• Vertical section
HORIZONTAL PLAN
It is advisable to firstly create a horizontal plan of all collars you wish to display in vertical section to
assist in defining appropriate parameters for vertical section production. The entire length of each
selected collar will be displayed on the horizontal plan.
TO CREATE A HORIZONTAL PLAN:
1. Select DRILLHOLES>Create>Generate Sections. The Generate Sections dialog is displayed.
2. Select Plan from the Display Type on the Define tab. Type in an appropriate name for the plan
section under the Plan name text box.

3. Select the collars in the collar map window to include in the horizontal section and click the Load
MapInfo Selection button to load selected collars. Otherwise leave the default option to display all
collars in the drillhole project.
Note Collars can be selected either graphically from the map window or using a textural attribute
query. For example an SQL query of all RC drillholes, or using QUERY>Text>Select by
Group tool. Alternatively, collars can be manually selected from the Holes to Show in Plan
control.
4. Navigate to the Annotate tab and select the appropriate options for displaying text labels and
depth ticks.
5. Click the Generate button to create the horizontal section.
6. If any immediate changes are required to the section such as text label size etc. simply modify
and click the Generate button.
TO CREATE A BENCH PLAN:
2. Select Plan from the Display Type on the Define tab.
3. Select the collars in the collar map window to include in the flitch section and click the Load
MapInfo Selection button to load selected collars. Otherwise leave the default option to display all
collars in the drillhole project.
Note Collars can be selected either graphically from the map window or using a textural attribute
query. For example an SQL query of all RC drillholes, or using QUERY>Text>Select by
Group tool. Alternatively, collars can be manually selected from the Holes to Show in Plan
control.
4. To activate the flitch plans check the Elevation height option and specify a central elevation and
envelope height. The elevation plan will display only the portion of any drillholes that are
intersected by the horizontal section envelope.

5. If multiple section levels are required, navigate to the Offset Multiple tab. Options for controlling
the number of plans, offset distance and direction along with plan naming conventions are located
on this tab.
Creating multiple flitch plans.
depth ticks.
7. Click the Generate button to create the horizontal section.
VERTICAL SECTION
Vertical sections are categorized into two main types; envelope and long. Envelope sections are
defined by specifying a width from a section plane and display all downhole traces contained within the
envelope. Long sections display the entire drillhole project from a defined section plane (i.e. they have
an infinite width).
TO CREATE A VERTICAL ENVELOPE SECTION:
2. Select Section from the Display Type on the Define tab.
3. Select Envelope section from the Define Section options.
4. Type in an appropriate name for the vertical section under the Section name text box.

Creating a vertical section
5. Select a method for defining the sections to be produced:

• Manual – Produces sections by selecting lines drawn in the collar map window, such as the
cosmetic layer or other table external to the drillhole project. After selecting the lines, and
click the Populate from Selected Line(s) button. Section envelope parameters will be
automatically populated from the line including start E and N, orientation length and view
direction. Specify an Envelope Width as well as a Section name.
Note The Section name and/or Envelope width can be specified from a field within a MapInfo
Pro table. The Section name column in the table must be of field type character. This is
useful when selecting multiple section lines and/or wishing to display variable envelope
widths.
• Table – Create sections directly from the SectionLines_Projectname table (see Section
lines), automatically using its contained section spatial information, attributed names and
envelope widths. Sections in the SectionLines_Projectname table can be selected (a)
manually by name from the displayed list, or (b) graphically in the collar map window and then
pressing the Populate from Selected ... button.
6. Under the Select Collars to Display option on the Define tab, observe the collars which will
participate in the section production. To refine this selection you may need to adjust the Envelope
width to encompass more collars, or filter collars in the envelope you wish not to display.
Note When defining a section envelope a temporary MapInfo Pro layer is presented on the
collar map window called _envelopePreviewOverlay. This layer will assist creating a
section to encompass the desired collars.
7. If you wish to display drillholes intersecting at depth to the envelope check the Show holes
intersections at depth option. If you wish to display the drillhole traces which extend beyond the
envelope check the Display complete hole traces option.
depth ticks. A particularly useful option Show distance infront/behind of section plane, defines
the distance a depth interval is infront or behind the section plane. Enable this option to give the
drillhole trace a depth perspective.

9. Navigate to the Downhole Data tab, if a downhole data setting has been previously saved from
the DRILLHOLES>Create>Downhole Data tool, select the appropriate setting to apply during the
section creating.
10. To configure any surface or sub-surface grids or contours, navigate to the Surfaces tab. If any
additional surfaces such as water table height, geochemical, geophysical etc have been included
in the drillhole project, select and specify an absolute or relative position. Use the Absolute
Position for height based surfaces and Relative Position for surfaces such as geochemical or
geophysical.
11. Click the Generate button to create the vertical envelope section.
12. If any immediate changes are required to the section, such as text label size, adjust the required
parameters in the dialog and click the Generate button.
TO CREATE POLYLINE ENVELOPE SECTIONS:
As well as creating sections produced from single segment lines, polyline sections can be
produced from lines with multiple nodes. This functionality is ideal for the hydrological, geological
and environmental engineering industries, who often need to analyse data along non-linear
sections such as pipe lines, roads, tunnels and subsurface palaeochannels or aquifers. The multi-
node polyline section can be created with the same procedures as creating an envelope section.
This functionality is designed primarily for vertical drillholes such as water bores and engineering
drilling.
TO CREATE MULTIPLE VERTICAL ENVELOPE SECTIONS:
3. Select Envelope section from the Define Section options. Envelope sections can be define by
three methods:
• By selecting a line and propagating numerous sections from this line (the method discussed
in this example).
• By selecting multiple lines from the collar map window.
If selecting multiple lines, the View direction towards option will indicate a Left or Right view
direction, based on the drawing direction of the selected line.
• By selecting the Table option on the Define tab and defining the sections from
SectionLines_Projectname table.
4. Select a line from the collar map window and click the Populate from Selected Line(s) button.
Section envelope parameters will be automatically populated from the line including start E and N,
orientation length and view direction.
5. To configure multiple sections navigate to the Offset Multiple tab and check the Create multiple
offsetted sections option. Select the number of sections you wish to create and offset direction.
Select a Section name suffix and Suffix name prefix if required. After configuring the multiple
section options, observe the multiple section envelopes displayed in the collar map window.

depth ticks. A particularly useful option Show distance infront/behind of section plane defines
7. Navigate to the Downhole Data tab, if a downhole data setting has been previously defined under
section creation.
in the drillhole project select and specify an absolute or relative position. Use the Absolute
geophysical.
9. Click the Generate button to create multiple vertical envelope sections.
TO CREATE A LONGITUDINAL (LONG) SECTION:
3. Type in an appropriate name for the long. section under the Section name text box.

Creating a vertical long section
4. Select a line from the collar map window and click the Populate from Selected Line(s) button.
Section envelope parameters will be automatically populated from the line including start E and N,
orientation length and view direction.
5. Under Select Collars to Display option on the Define tab observe the collars which will participate
in the section production. To refine this selection you may need to filter collars you wish not to
display.
depth ticks. A particularly useful option Show distance infront/behind of section plane defines
7. Navigate to the Downhole Data tab, if a downhole data setting has been previously defined under
section creation.
in the drillhole project select and specify an absolute or relative position. Use the Absolute
geophysical.
9. Click the Generate button to create a vertical long section.

MANAGING AND ANALYSING SECTIONS AND PLANS

Related tools Section Manager
The DRILLHOLES>Manage>Section Manager is designed to assist with the management and
analysis of cross-sections and plans. It enables the hassle-free management of all associated
MapInfo Pro tables for drillhole project sections. All vertical sections, plans, polyline sections
and trenches defined in a project are listed in the Section Manager dialog.
Section Manager dialog.
Note All sections and plans created for a drillhole project can be managed using the Section Manager. Refer
to Creating and managing drillhole projects section for Section Manager configuration.
By default, when a drillhole section is created, it is catalogued in the Section Manager, with all the
parameters automatically populated.
All sections and plans created for the drillhole project are displayed in the list of Available Sections and
Plans. The properties of each section are displayed in the list (see Section and plan properties). The
list can be sorted by clicking a column name. The section manager tools are displayed below the list
of available sections and plans:
Select the sections you want to open and click the Open button to display previously created
sections or plans. Alternatively, select the check box in the Open column or double-click the
section in the list.
Select the sections you want to close and click the Close button to close the selected
sections and associated tables. Alternatively, clear the check box in the Open column.
The Regenerate option is a time-saver when new drillholes or hole extensions and splays
have been added to a drillhole project. This tool automatically regenerates and updates the
selected sections with any new drillholes that fall inside its spatial envelope. The
Regenerate sections and plans dialog bo is displayed, from which you can select an alternative
Downhole Display template. This can be useful if the original display settings have been updated—for
example, with display preferences for new downhole data (such as new magnetic susceptability
readings).

Sections can also be regenerated with more customizations using the SectionLines_Projectname
table via the Table option of the Generate Sections dialog in tandem with the Downhole Data tab.
Click the Analytical tools button to select from the available tools.
Click the Administrative tools button to select from the available tools.
WORKING WITH THE SECTION MANAGER

The Section Manager is a floating window, so it can be left open throughout your entire session. It can
also be docked to the side of the application window, allowing customization/optimization of your work
area.
TO DOCK THE SECTION MANAGER:
• Drag the Section Manager window by the title bar, towards the edge of the screen, until the
mouse cursor is over one of the small directional icons, and a blue shadow indicates the window's
docked position. Then release the mouse button to dock the Section Manager.
• Alternatively, double-click on the Section Manager title bar to return it to it's last docked location (if
available).
TO UNDOCK THE SECTION MANAGER:
• Double-click the Section Manager window title bar, so that it floats. You can then move it to
another location in the application window.
An example of the Section Manager docked, with the Layer Control and Table list windows tabbed below, ensuring a more
efficient drillhole work environment.

SECTION AND PLAN PROPERTIES

SECTION TYPE
Vertical drillhole section
Vertical drillhole section with digitized boundary layer
Vertical drillhole section defined by polyline (non-linear)
Horizontal or plan view drillhole section
OPEN
Open sections are marked with a tick.
NAME
User specified name of the drillhole section.
ORIENTATION
Orientation or bearing of the drillhole section.
WIDTH (+/-UNITS)
The Envelope width of the section. Note that the width is symmetric about the centre, and the total
envelope width is twice the value displayed.
EASTING
Start easting for the section line.
NORTHING
Start northing for the section line.
Z
The maximum elevation in a Vertical cross-section, or the central elevation in a horizontal plan/section.
LENGTH
Length or distance of the drillhole section line, the units of measure are determined by the collar table
projection system.
MODIFIED
Date of last modification/update of the section/plan.
VIEW
View direction of the section in degrees (as set in the Define New Section dialog).

ANALYTICAL TOOLS
The following tools are available from the Analytical Tools menu. These tools are also
available from the context menu displayed when right-clicking in the Section Manager with
one or more sections selected.
Display 3D Vector Models – Load DXF or Feature database vector models and display
intersection polygons or polylines on the selected sections.
Create Pierce Point Layer – Convert downhole intervals into Pierce Points, for precise labelling,
thematic mapping and even sectional gridding.
DISPLAY 3D VECTOR MODELS

Note Polyline sections are not supported by this option.
The Display 3D Vector Models button allows you to load DXF or Feature database vector
models and display intersection polygons or polylines on the selected sections and plans. The
3D Vector to Section dialog is displayed. Click the Open 3D Vector Model button to select one
or more 3D vector files. On the Open dialog, select the 3D vector file type. You can load either DXF or
Feature database (.FDB) files but not both.
Note If you have a 3D vector file in other formats, such as Vulcan, Surpac or GoCAD, many of these
can be converted to a 3D DXF using DISCOVER>File>Vector Transform.
For each 3D vector model, click the Style button and select the line colour and style of the
corresponding intersection lines. Click OK to apply to the selected sections and plans. The format of
the displayed intersection depends on the types of objects contained in the 3D vector file:
• 3D polyhedrons are displayed as a closed, pattern-filled polygons.
• 3D wireframes are displayed as coloured, patterned lines.
Note Any embedded colour styles in the 3D Vector files are discarded and overwritten by the
selected style.
3D Vector to Section dialog.
The intersection lines and points created by this option are stored in MapInfo Pro TAB files in the
Section folder in the drillhole project. These TAB files are named Sectionname _Modelname. Any
attributes in the model file are carried over to the intersection table.

To modify or remove 3D vector models displayed on a section, in the Section Manager dialog, select
the section and click the Display 3D Model button. The loaded models are displayed in the 3D Vector
to Section dialog. Select the model and either click the Delete button to remove or click the Style button
to change the line style and colour.
CREATE PIERCE POINT LAYER

The Create Pierce Point Layer tool will convert downhole intervals into fully-attributed MapInfo
Pro Point symbols. Intervals can have different from-to depths or can be coincident giving a point
depth.
This significantly enhances the display and analytical options for this data on long- and cross-sections,
such as:
• A range of label positions for composited intervals, such as created with the
DRILLHOLES>Analyze>Downhole Clip tool (see Clipping drillholes by 3D solids or surfaces).
Pierce points can be created at the top, mid-point, or bottom of an interval; the shallowest of
deepest RL; or the location closest to or furthest from the viewer.
• Use of MapInfo Pro symbols to highlight and reinforce particular intercepts (for instance, locations
where boreholes have intercepted an aquifer/watertable).
• Thematic mapping or geochemical data classification (see Classifying data by colour, size, and
symbol) of pierce points (derived from clipped to 3D volume and/or composited intervals) allows
for the powerful and effective display of high grade (or grams per metre) intercept values.
• Surface gridding of pierce points values (such as grade or gram/metre values) extends the
advanced analysis and trend interpretation options, including resource calculations.
Some examples of the various pierce point outputs, and the display and analysis options they provide:
(1) Using a source file of downhole assays clipped to an orebody volume and then Composited by Cut-Off Grade, resulting
in discrete high-grade intercepts.

(2) Converting (1) into pierce points located at the top of each high-grade intercept for long-section display and labelling of
the intercepts.
(3) Thematically mapping the mid-point pierce points of the same high-grade intervals by Cu% provides a visually powerful
and informative summary of the drilling results.

(4) Grid interpolation of the pierce points extends the analytical and interpretation options.
It is recommended that the source downhole data table contains a limited number of intervals per
drillhole, otherwise the resulting table may contain a large number of points, which may not be easy to
display effectively. Some suggested input downhole table types:
• Borehole intercepts with an aquifer or water table (with From = To depths).
• Drillhole intercepts within a vein system.
• High-grade composites.
• Downhole assays that have been clipped to an orebody volume using the Downhole Clip tool
(see Clipping drillholes by 3D solids or surfaces), then composited by cut-off grade (see
Downhole compositing) to generate a limited number of intervals per hole through the orebody.
• Single intercept (or a very limited number of intercepts) per hole, by first compositing using a very
low cut-off value (such as 0.0001).
The output pierce point layers will be automatically handled by the Section Manager each time the
parent section is opened or closed.
Note Any derivatives from Pierce Points, such as custom labels, thematic layers, and custom
symbols, will not be preserved via the Section Manager. Ensure these are saved (and
reopened) using the Session Manager.
TO GENERATE PIERCE POINTS FOR A SECTION OR PLAN:
1. Open a drillhole project.
2. Open the Section Manager, and select one or more sections to create pierce points for.
3. On the Analytical Tools menu, click Create Pierce Point Layer.
4. In the Create Pierce Point Layer dialog box, select the source downhole data table, the
intervals for which will be converted into pierce points.
5. Choose the Position along each interval where the resulting pierce point will be located. Available
options are:
• Mid Point (of the interval)
• Highest RL (i.e. shallowest absolute depth)

• Lowest RL (i.e. deepest absolute depth)

• Top of Interval (i.e. closest to the collar location)
• Bottom of Interval (i.e. furthest from the collar location)
• Closest to view position (when viewing the long/cross-section)
• Furthest from view position (when viewing the long/cross-section)
6. Unless manually refining the closest/furthest view position options (see Handling complex
drillhole projects), leave the Pierce point invert column set to <None>.
7. The Output Table is automatically named SectionnameP. Edit the “P” suffix, if required.
8. If required, customize the Symbol Style.
9. Click OK.
HANDLING COMPLEX DRILLHOLE PROJECTS

When attempting to display pierce points on either the hangingwall or footwall of an orebody, the
various pierce point location options above may not satisfactorily do so for all drillholes. This will be
particularly noticeable when drilling has been conducted in multiple orientations (from both the footwall
and hangingwall), as well both downwards (from surface) and upwards (underground drilling).
The pierce point Invert Column option allows you to manually override or flip specific intervals.
TO MANUALLY INVERT PIERCE POINTS:
1. Experiment with the various pierce point locations to identify the option which correctly positions
the most pierce points on the required side of the orebody or 3D solid.
2. Write down the specific drillhole IDs for which the pierce point needs to be inverted—i.e., need to
be positioned at the other end of the interval.
Note If you have Datamine Discover 3D, using the 3D Points menu option is very effective at
identifying problems by visualizing the pierce point layer in 3D together with the drillholes and
3D solid.
3. Open the source downhole data table with the Table Structure tool (right-click on the table in the
Table List) and add a new field of type Logical. Name the field to indicate the pierce point location
option (identified in step 1) and the word “invert”—for example, 'ShallowRL_Invert'. Click OK.
4. Open the table as a Browser.
5. For each drillhole noted in step 2, set the value in the new field (e.g. ShallowRL_Invert) to T(rue).
When all noted drillholes have been edited, save the changes.
6. Open the Create Pierce Point Layer tool, select the preferred location option, and set the Pierce
point invert column to the new logical field created in step 3. Click OK to regenerate the pierce
points.
Note Pierce Points are automatically attributed with their actual XYZ coordinates. This means they
can be easily visualised in Datamine Discover 3D using the 3D Points menu option—a
powerful way to highlight points of interest.

ADMINISTRATIVE TOOLS
The following tools are available from the Administrative tools menu. These tools are also
available from the context menu displayed when right-clicking in the Section Manager with
one or more sections selected.
Copy Selected Section
Rename Section
Delete Section
Add Section Layer
Delete Section Layer
Add Section Point Layer
Synchronize Section Lines
Preview Section Lines
Section Image Preview
COPY SELECTED SECTION

The copy option is useful for making duplicates of a series of existing sections with a user-
specified suffix. This can be a powerful way of creating different displays of the same sectional
data, for instance a geochemical vs geophysical focused sections using the Display Downhole
Data tool.
RENAME SECTION
Rename the selected section including all component tables and metadata.
DELETE SECTION
This will permanently delete the selected section and associated tables from the Section
Manager and the project folders.
ADD SECTION LAYER

The Add Section Layer button allows the addition of new layers to sections. Once section layers
are created, geological or ore boundaries can be interpreted visually. Add Section Layer allows
the following functionality:
• Saving and preserving of geological, structural and mineralization interpretations and trends with
the section. These are automatically reopened when the associated section is opened using the
Section Manager.
• Section layers can be automatically exported into 3D space for use in Datamine Discover 3D (or
other 3D applications) for solid generation.
• Section layers can also be used to restrict the area over which sectional resource calculations are
interpolated.

The table structure of the added table contains three columns:

• ID
• Feature Code
• Resource
Note Custom fields can be added or removed using DISCOVER>Manage>[Tables]>Structure
Manager.
Layers can be added simultaneously to all sections that are highlighted in the Section Manager. As
many layers can be added as desired.The produced layer can be suffixed with text defined by the user;
however, the default suffix is a B to produce a B layer.
The new table will be saved into the section folder(s) that are stored in the drillhole project folder.
Note The DRILLHOLES>Analyze>Resource Calculator and DISCOVER 3D>Drillholes>Section
Layer tools will only use layers from a section suffixed with a B.
DELETE SECTION LAYER

The Delete Section Layer button allows the deletion of layers that have been added to sections
with the 3D Object to Section tool, Add Section Layer tool or any other layers created within a
section.
To delete layers, select the sections you want to delete layers from in the Section Manager, and then
click the Delete Section Layer button.The Delete Section Files Dialog is displayed. Expand each
section and select the layers to be deleted. Click Delete.
ADD SECTION POINT LAYER

Enrich the impact of your drillhole sections, with fully customizable collar symbols and labels.
These point layers contain all the collar file attributes, allowing a rich range of cartographic
refinements and enhancements on long- and cross-sections, such as:
• Custom collar and EOH symbols, using all MapInfo Pro symbol types, colours and sizes.
• Custom collar and EOH labels, using the full range of MapInfo Pro capabilities, such as: label
position, colour, font, offset distance, etc.
• Create detailed and informative labels, by using MapInfo Pro expressions to combine and format
multiple fields.
• Thematically map collar symbols, allowing the clear visual differentiation or identification of collars
by an important attribute field, such as drilling type (e.g. RAB/RC/DDH), drilling contractor, or year
drilled.

Enhance the value and effectiveness of your cross- and long-sections, with the new Point Layer allowing professional and
informative labels and collar symbols.
TO CREATE A SECTION POINT LAYER:

1. With one or more sections selected in the Section Manager, select the Add Section Point Layer
tool from either:
• Administrative Tools drop-down menu, or
• Right-click context menu.
2. Select the point position at which the section layers will be created for the selected sections:
• Collar – drillhole start points
• End of hole (EOH) – drillhole end points
• Entry point of envelope – points where drillholes enter a section envelope at depth, if
applicable.
• Exit point of envelope – points where drillholes exit a section envelope at depth, if applicable.
3. Select the default Point symbol style.
4. Click OK to generate a point layer for the selected sections, with a suffix reflecting the Point
position selected:
• “Col” for collar
• “EOH” for end of hole
• “En” for entry point
• “Ex” for exit point

These point layers will contain all data fields in the project's collar file, as well as an extra
“Distance_To_Env” numeric field, indicating the distance each point location is from the section's
defining plane. These fully attributed section point layers allow numerous powerful labelling and
symbol customization options to enrich your cross-sections, such as:
• Thematic mapping of collar symbols to indicate drilling type (e.g. RAB/RC/DDH).
• Precisely positioned and oriented EOH labels in your desired colour/font/size.
• Informative multi-part collar labels using MapInfo Pro's label expression builder.
Note that while Section Point Layers are handled natively and preserved by the Drillhole Project
Manager and the Section Manager, the following derivatives are not:
• Custom labels
• Custom symbols
• Ordering of multiple Point Section Layers within a section
• Thematic layers
To ensure these customisations are preserved for later viewing and refinement, ensure that the current
drillhole environment, including open sections and their labels, are preserved (and reopened) using the
drillholes Session Manager.
SYNCHRONIZE SECTION LINES

This will automatically populate the SectionLines_Projectname table with all existing sections
and plans within the project (as listed in the Section Manager), including the section lines/
polylines, their names, and envelope widths.
Sections (or plans) already in the SectionLines_Projectname table with the same name will be
overwritten.
This option is recommended when importing pre-2012 projects to initially populate the
SectionLines_Projectname table. It can also be useful if the SectionLines_Projectname table
has become “messy” with user-added lines that aren’t being used for section creation. To clean up the
table, delete all records, and then run the Synchronize Section Lines option.
New (empty) SectionLines_Projectname table

SectionLines_Projectname table after synchronizing with the Section Manager
PREVIEW SECTION LINES

This shows the location of selected sections on the collar map window.
SECTION IMAGE PREVIEW

This automatically displays a thumbnail when a section is selected, allowing the section to be
previewed (without opening). This can be particularly useful for large or imported projects.
DISPLAYING DOWNHOLE DATA

Related tools Downhole Data
Once section and/or plans have been created (Creating sections and plans), you will want to start
visualizing your downhole data graphically. This might include data such as assays, geology, regolith,
geophysics, water table depths and structural measurements.
The DRILLHOLES>Create>Downhole Data tool allows these detailed downhole datasets to be
effectively visualized (even in complex sections or plans) using a number of display types,
including Text, Linegraph, Trace Shade and orientated Structure.
Additionally this tool can:
• Display up to 16 different data attributes (or variables) for each drillhole.
• Display data from any appropriate column in any downhole data table.
• Colour and pattern modulate display types with user-created legends.
• Create editable data attribute legends.
• Save your downhole display settings as templates. These can then be applied to new sections or
plans, or reapplied after the sections or plans have been regenerated, or shared with other users.

A drillhole cross-section displaying geochemical assay values as both text labels and a bargraph plot, as well as geology
presented as a trace shade.
TO CREATE A DOWNHOLE DISPLAY SETTING:

Note If you experience problems with missing downhole tables or if downhole data isn’t displayed,
see Resolving problems with missing downhole data tables.
1. Open a drillhole project (see Opening drillhole projects), and open one or more cross-sections or
plans (see Managing and analysing sections and plans).
2. Select DRILLHOLES>Create>Downhole Data to open the tool.
The Downhole Data dialog.
3. Ensure that the Global Map Scale at the bottom of the dialog is set to the intended output scale.
This will generally be the same as the Preferred Scale as set in the Generate Sections tool under
the Annotate tab.

4. Choose a display type from the icons at the top of the dialog:
Text is useful for displaying exact values or attribute codes, but can result in a cluttered
view if over-used. Ideal for assays. These can be colour coded to help discern trends.
Linegraph is an useful way of visualizing numeric datasets, particularly for identifying

and assessing trends along and between drillholes and sections. They are very
effective for high density downhole datasets such as decimetre- or even centimetre-
scale geophysical measurements.
Bargraph is another useful way of visualizing numeric datasets. They clearly indicate
both the sample interval widths, as well as the sample values (i.e. samples are
represented discretely as individual 'bars'). Bargraphs (unlike linegraphs) can be colour
and pattern modulated.
Trace Shade is a powerful way of visualizing attribute information, such as geology and
regolith logging. These utilize custom colour legends to control the trace colour and/or
pattern.
Structure allows structural measurements such as bedding, foliation, veining, etc to be
correctly displayed using either true or apparent dip directions. These can be colour
modulated.
Depth Label allows previously set annotation settings to be modified and saved as part
of a downhole data display. The annotation settings are initially imported from the
annotation settings set in the Generate Sections tool of any active sections, and
displayed as the first row on depth label display.
5. In the settings dialog, select the source Table and Field to use for the display type, e.g.
DH_geology and LithCode for trace shades, or Assays and Cu for a linegraph.
6. Each display type can be positioned precisely where the user wants it, either to the left or right of
the drillhole trace. This is important to prevent different display types overprinting each other (e.g.
multiple text labels). The Offset parameter in each setting dialog controls this positioning in
millimetres:
• a negative offset value places the display type to the left of the hole trace
• a positive offset value positions it to the right
• The Set Offset button has a number of preset options to get you started (Near Left, Far Right,
etc).
Note The offset of each display type can also be controlled in the main dialog by altering the values
in the Offset column
7. Populate the remainder of the dialog as necessary: each display type's setting is discussed in
relevant section below. All display types (except the Linegraph) can also be colour and/or pattern
modulated using legends created using the Creating and editing legends. Press OK when
finished with the setting dialog.
8. Back in the main Downhole Data dialog, repeat steps 4-8 for each additional data field to be
displayed.
Note Although up to 16 attributes may be displayed at the same time on a section or plan this may
not be practical due to drillhole spacing or plot scale. To create a well-presented section map,
limit the display to a suitable number of data attributes.

9. Existing display types listed in the main dialog can be easily modified and edited:
Note Once satisfied with your display settings, it is worth saving this
• To reopen an existing display type's settings for modification, click on the Settings button
on it'd far right. Alternatively, double click in any static part of the row entry (e.g. the table
or field cells)
• The listing order of display types can be rearranged by selecting a row (click once in
a static cell) and then use the reorder buttons. Note that this does not affect the
actual display type offsets on the section/plan: it is only of use visually to reorder display
types to match their offsets.
• Existing display types can be deleted from the listing by selecting one or more row
entries (click once in a static cell; use in combination with SHIFT or CTRL for multiple
selections) and pressing the delete button
• The Offset of each display entry can be altered from the listing by modifying the values in the
Offset column. This is a powerful way of 'tweaking' display positioning to prevent overlaps,
practically once the listings have been reordered (i.e. from -ve to +ve offsets).
• Save display settings as a Setting Template (see Using setting templates). Press the
Save Downhole Settings button, enter an appropriate name (typically project-specific)
and press OK. This ensures that your customized settings can be reused or modified at a
later date.
10. In the Sections listing on the right of the main dialog, highlight a section to apply your display
settings to. Press the Apply button. Your downhole display settings will now be applied to the
selected section/plan. The time taken by Datamine Discover to render your settings will be
controlled largely by the following:
• the number of sections/plans selected
• the number of drillholes in the sections/plans
• the length of the drillholes
• the number of display settings selected
• the size of the sample intervals (1m assays decimetre-scale geophysics measurements)
• text labels are significantly slower to render than other display types
11. Once the section/plan has been rendered, zoom and pan within its map window to check offsets,
scaling, text sizes, etc. If any issues are apparent, simply modify the necessary parameters in the
Downhole Data dialog (either in the main display listing, or in individual settings dialogs). Then
resave the setting template (e.g. overwrite the previously saved template), and reapply to the
target section.
Note It is strongly recommended that when first creating a setting template for a drillhole
project, work only with one section ( to minimize the rendering time: see the first bullet of
step 12 above), and choose one of the more complex sections (typically in the core of the
orebody / mineralization). This section will likely have the highest density of drilling, scissor
holes, splay/daughter holes, etc. If your downhole display scaling/offsets/text sizes can be
configured satisfactorily for this section, the resulting template is likely to be viable for most
other sections in the same project. Of course, a complex section will be slower to render
than an emptier section, so a compromise may be necessary here.
12. The downhole settings applied to your section/plan are now saved with that section: next time you
open the section/plan (using the Section Manager), the last display settings applied to it will be
displayed.

RESOLVING PROBLEMS WITH MISSING DOWNHOLE DATA TABLES

Downhole display settings can only be applied to downhole data that was associated with the cross-
section/ plan during the process of Creating sections and plans. If the downhole data table/s were not
selected during this step, Datamine Discover will not have included these tables in the section data.
Some indications of this issue:
• An error such as "Error plotting data for section - Table not found in the section. Regenerate the
section to include missing data" is displayed
• The selected downhole display settings do not appear in the output section/plan window when
applied
The three primary situations where downhole data tables may not be associated with your cross-
section/plans (and how to resolve them) are:
• For drillhole plans, the "Plot survey traces only" option is by default disabled in the Generate
Sections tool to help speed up plan generation time for typically larger datasets (often all holes in
the drillhole project). If you wish to display downhole data on your plan, regenerate the plan (i.e.
rerun the Generate Sections tool) with this option disabled.
• If new downhole tables have been added to a drillhole project after its creation (e.g. downhole
geophysics conducted a month after drilling, or assays composited to 5m intervals), open the
Project Setup menu option, select the Modify button for the target project, and ensure that under
the Downhole tab the new downhole table/s are on the Selected side of the dialog.
• If new downhole tables have been added to a drillhole project after cross-sections or plans were
created, first check options 1 and 2 above. The sections/plans will also need to be regenerated to
desurvey the new data tables. Rerun the Generate Sections tool, but first check that the new data
table/s are selected under the Downhole Data button of this dialog.
DOWNHOLE DISPLAY TYPES
TEXT
The Text display option displays data in numeric or character attribute fields as labels for
each sample or interval down the drillhole. The Text Labels Settings dialog contains options
to modify the data range displayed, text styling, positioning, orientation and formatting of
the labels on the drillhole section or plan.

Entering parameters for text labelling of drillhole data.
SOURCE DATA
As with all downhole data setting dialogs, the Table and Field pull-downs need to be first populated
with desired targets.
DATA HANDLING OPTIONS

The Data Handling Options dialog enables the capping of values and sample decimation.

The Cap to minimum... and maximum values will be auto-populated with the selected data
field's minimum and maximum values (these will be greyed out if a character field has been
selected). If this data range is modified, intervals with values outside the new range will not have a text
label displayed. (e.g. an initial data range of 5 -> 5000, modified to 100 -> 5000 will only display labels
for this new range). These values can be reset using the adjacent reset buttons, which provide options
for using either the data range of the entire table (i.e. the whole drillhole project) or just the selected
section/s.
Select the Decimation option and specify the sampling input. Data can be decimated, by using only
every nth sample. For example, to use 1 in 10 samples (10%), set the nth sample value as 10. This
can be useful when processing massive datasets of very small-scale data, such as centimetre or
decimeter-scale geophysics.
STYLE
When configuring the appearance of text labels on sections or plans, the primary parameter is the Size
(pts). As with many Datamine Discover tools, text labels are created as map objects at a specified scale
to facilitate professional-looking hardcopy/printed output. By default the drillhole text labels utilize the
Global Map Scale set in the main Downhole Data Display dialog.
Note Do not override the Map Scale between different display settings.
Generally the label size will need to be smaller when downhole intervals are smaller to prevent
overprinting over adjacent intervals. For instance, text labels for 3m assay intervals may display
without issues with a font size of 5pts for a map scale of 1:1000, but 1m assay intervals will likely
require a font size of 3pts or smaller at the same scale to prevent overprinting issues.
Alternatively, enable the Autoscale labels to fit intervals option to create text labels scaled to the
smallest downhole interval.
The Font Style button provides additional text formatting options such as colour, font type, background
and effects.
A powerful way of visualizing text labels is by colour modulation using a legend available from the
Colour by Legend list. For instance, this can help highlight anomalous regions in assay values not
immediately apparent in uniformly coloured text labels. Numeric and character (i.e. attribute) legends
can be created and edited using the adjacent Creating and editing legends button.
Note Legends are applied to the same field used for the text labels. Note that the field type must
match the legend type, e.g. numeric legend can be applied to float and integer fields, and text
legends can be applied to string or date fields.
POSITION AND ORIENTATION

The position of your text labels is controlled by the Offset parameter in millimetres:
• a negative offset value places text labels to the left of the hole trace
The Set Offset button has a number of preset options to get you started (Near Left, Far Right, etc).
• The Vertical Position of the text labels within their intervals can be controlled by
selecting from Top, Centre or Bottom icons.
The Orientation of text labels can also be modified in a number of ways:
• Perpendicular (default): labels are upright on a vertical drillhole (top of the label is always 'up-
hole').

• Horizontal: text labels are uniformly horizontal with respect to the map window (i.e. independent
of hole trace orientation)
• Parallel: text labels are aligned parallel to hole trace
• Custom angle: labels are aligned at a user specified angle with respect to the map window (i.e.
independent of hole trace orientation), with positive values rotating the labels anticlockwise. Thus
0 degrees is identical to the Horizontal option above, and 45 degrees angles labels towards the
top right of the map window.
FORMAT
Assay laboratories will often return null values such as “sample not received / (SNR)”, or “<0.01 /
(BDL)”. In order to keep the assay values in a numeric format (rather than a character field), many
databases will therefore store these null values as a negative value (in the numeric assay field) to
clearly indicate their status (e.g. -9999 or -0.01).
The user may not however want to see these negative values displayed as text labels in their cross-
sections, but instead replace them with a more meaningful text string. Datamine Discover allows the
user to build a list of their database's null values, and their related text strings in the d_abbrev table,
accessed via the browse button to the right of the option.
Enabling the Replace numbers with alias from d_abbrev option in the Text Labels Settings dialog will
then replace any occurrence of a value in the Number_Code field with the Alpha_Code field value in
the d_abbrev table. For example -5 may be replaced by BDL. The entry in the description field is for
user comments only (it is not used by Datamine Discover).
D_abbrev browser for replacement codes.
Datamine Discover will (by default) present numeric data to the number of significant figures in each
data value. The user can however specify the number of Decimal Places displayed by enabling this
option. This can be set to between 0 and 5 decimal places. For example, 0.08 displays as 0 when
formatted to 0 decimal places, and as 0.1 with 1 decimal place.
LINEGRAPH
Linegraph finds the mid-point of each interval, and assigns this location the interval's data
value. The size of the linegraph at this position is then a function of both the data value and
a user-defined scale (below). A linegraph / profile is then created by joining these mid-point
size locations. Linegraphs are therefore very effective for high density downhole datasets
such as decimetre- or even centimetre-scale geophysical measurements. They work best with regular/
homogenous downhole interval sizes; if there is a large variation in downhole interval sizes (e.g. 1m
vs. 10m), linegraphs can misrepresent the data as the actual interval thickness is not represented
graphically.


The Data Handling Options dialog provides a range of options for dealing with null values, missing
intervals, extreme values, and dense data.
HIGH AND LOW CAP VALUES

The Cap to minimum value and Cap to maximum value options cap the linegraph at the specified
minimum and/or maximum values. A line is drawn at the cap value, unless the Cut option is
selected, which leaves gaps.
The default cap values are auto-populated with the selected data field's minimum and maximum
values.
The cap values can be reset using the adjacent reset buttons, which provide options for
using either the data range of the entire table (the whole drillhole project) or just the
selected sections.

NULL VALUES AND MISSING INTERVALS

For interval data (From < To), null values and missing intervals are shown as gaps. To fill in gaps,
select the Use max gap option and set the max gap value. A line is drawn between the values either
side of the gap if the gap length is less than the max gap value.
For point data (From = To), null values are shown as gaps. Select the Continuous line option to
ignore all nulls. A line is drawn between the non-null values either side of the gap.
LOG SCALE
The Log(10) transform option changes the linegraph plot scale to log10. This can be useful when
the sample population includes occasional very large values, which would obscure the rest of the
data (plotted along the trace).
REDUCING DENSE DATA
The Decimation option reduces the number of values displayed by using every nth sample. For
example, set the nth sample value as 10 to use every 10th sample (10% of all samples are
displayed). The values between the nth values are ignored (no averaging is performed). This can
be useful when processing massive datasets of very small-scale data, such as centimetre or
decimeter-scale geophysics.
Example of every 4th samples deicmation applied in Red
If the drillhole contains null values or missing intervals, a gap in the line occurs between the last
nth point before the null interval and the first non-null interval after the null interval.
If the Cut to minimum value or Cut to maximum value options are also selected, a gap in the line
occurs between the last nth point before the cut interval and the first non-null, uncut interval after
the cut interval.
NULL VALUE
The Numeric null value option treats a specified numeric value (e.g. -999) as null.
BARGRAPH
Bargraph presents each downhole interval as a separate bar with the same size as used in
the linegraph, but with the bar 'thickness' correlating with the interval length. As each bar is
a polygon, bargraphs can also be colour and/or pattern modulated using a legend. Thus
bargraphs can be very useful for datasets with variable interval lengths, but can get
cluttered for very small interval lengths. Bargraphs are also slower to render than linegraphs.

Specifying bargraph display parameters.
SOURCE DATA

The Data Handling Options dialog enables the capping of values and sample decimation. Linegraphs
and Bargraphs have a number of options for source data handling:
The Cap to minimum... and maximum values will be auto-populated with the selected data
field's minimum and maximum values. If this data range is modified, intervals with values
outside the new range will be capped to the appropriate limiting value; this can be used to visually “cut”
high grade assays (e.g. removing nugget values). These values can be reset using the adjacent reset
buttons , which provide options for using either the data range of the entire table (i.e. the whole drillhole
project) or just the selected section/s.
Datamine Discover can also Log(10) Transform the raw data.
Numeric input data can be decimated, by using only every nth sample. For example, to use 1 in 10
samples (10%), set the nth sample value as 10. This can be useful when processing massive datasets
of very small-scale data, such as centimetre or decimeter-scale geophysics.
Note that Decimation can misrepresent the data and should be used with care.
SCALE
The scale section of the dialog allows the width of your linegraph/bargraph to be controlled. This is
important for ensuring that linegraphs/bargraphs do not overprint other data displays and adjacent
drillholes, whilst having sufficient width to discern subtle trends.

The width can be controlled either via specifying the:

• Maximum display width (in millimetres) in your eventual layout window, for the Global Map Scale
specified in the main dialog. This is a precise way of controlling multiple downhole displays, in
order to synchronize the various offsets correctly (e.g. 3 adjacent linegraphs for Au, As & Mo,
each 30mm wide maximum, each offset by 35mm to prevent overlapping).
• A precise Scale in millimetres per data unit (e.g. 1:200 or 1:0.001 mm/ppm), for the Global Map
Scale specified in the main dialog. This is generally of most use when wanting to simultaneously
compare the absolute values of multiple data fields (for instance, setting Cu, Pb & Zn linegraphs
to all have a scale of 1: 0.001). It also allows the accurate measurement of downhole values from
the graphical display on a print-out using a scale ruler. This option can take some
experimentation to get right with respect to the actual resulting width of the displays and offset/
overlap issues.
STYLE
Linegraphs can have their line style, width and colour modified using the provided buttons; this is
particularly useful for displaying and identifying multiple linegraphs per hole.
The style of bargraphs can be either a:
• homogenous colour and pattern using the left-hand style button
• colour and/or pattern modulated by selecting an existing legend from the available list.
Legends can be created and edited using the adjacent Creating and editing legends button.
Note Legends are applied to the same field used for the bargraph. Note that the field type must
Note Note that applying a legend to a field with the log(10) transform option (see Source Data)
enabled will utilize the transformed values, not the raw data. Therefore the legend will need to
be built using appropriate log(10) values.
A linegraph cannot be coloured using a colour pattern since the linegraph is created as one continuous
polyline for each drillhole. Linegraphs display much faster than bargraphs as there is just one map
object per drillhole.
POSITION
The position of your linegraph or bargraph is controlled by the Offset parameter in millimetres:
• a negative offset value places the display to the left of the hole trace
The Set Offset button has a number of preset options to get you started (Near Left, Far Right, etc).
Clever use of offsets and scales can allow multiple linegraphs and bargraphs to be placed adjacent to
each other, or even coincident.
The Facing or direction the linegraph/bargraph is orientated towards can be controlled
with the left/right buttons.

If the dataset being displayed involves valid negative values (e.g. magnetic susceptibility or EM
(electromagnetic) data), the facing option will control the orientation of positive data. Therefore setting
a linegraph or bargraph to display to the right of the hole trace will display positive values (if any) to the
right of the trace, and negative values to the left of the trace. When displaying datasets encompassing
both valid negative and positive values, it is recommended to not apply any offset (i.e. set the offset to
0mm), as this position effectively acts as the origin for the display.
If displaying a dataset of only valid negative values (i.e. no positive values), an offset can be applied,
but opposite to it’s normal parameters. For instance, a 5mm geological Trace Shade is to be applied
to the right of the drillhole trace, with a linegraph of a valid negative value (only) dataset offset to the
right of this. In the Linegraph setup dialog, set it’s position as ‘Left of trace’, and apply an offset of -7mm
(giving a 2mm clearance between the trace shade and the linegraph origin).
TRACE SHADE
The Trace Shade display type is designed for displaying downhole data such as lithology or
regolith attributes. This is achieved by displaying a polygon of set width for each downhole
interval shaded by a specified colour legend.
Trace Shade settings dialog
The Width of the trace shade polygons are specified in mm relative to the Global Map Scale specified
in the main dialog. By default the trace shade polygons are centred on the hole traces; therefore a 2mm
wide trace shade will display 1mm either side of the hole trace.
The Default Style options allows the user to select what is the default style for a trace shade if it isn't
contained within the bounds of a Legend. The default setting for this is transparent which will make the
object appear invisible.
The position of the trace shade can also be specified as an Offset from the drillhole trace. The offset
is relative to the centre of the trace shade, so that a trace shade 2mm wide, offset 1mm to the left of
the drillhole (i.e. -1mm) is displayed with its right margin flush with the drill trace.

Colour and/or pattern modulate the trace shade by selecting a legend from the list available.
Legends can be created and edited using the adjacent Creating and editing legends button . If the
attribute value for an interval does not match any of the values in the legend, no trace shade polygon
is displayed for that interval.
Note Legends are applied to the selected field for the trace shade. Note that the field type must
STRUCTURE
The Structure Tick display type enables downhole structural data measurements to be
displayed on a drillhole section. Datamine Discover generates a line that crosses the drill
trace at the appropriate dip angle. The structure measurement may be displayed with either
true or apparent dips.
Use the DRILLHOLES>Analyze>Alpha/Beta tool to convert downhole structural observations
into true dip/dip direction values.
Displaying downhole structural data using true dip and azimuth information. Tick marks in this example will be coloured by a
legend using the Type field.
First populate the Table and Dip Field pull-downs as appropriate.

The structure measurements may be displayed with either a:
• True Dip for oriented core: this requires a Dip Direction (e.g. azimuth) field to be specified.
Note To convert core alpha-beta values to dip and dip direction, see Converting alpha-beta core
angles.

• Apparent Dip for unoriented core. This will display two structure ticks symmetrical about the drill
trace. Zero dip can be set either as measured parallel or perpendicular to the core axis.
Note Apparent dip is only valid for displaying data on cross-sections, not plan views.
DISPLAY
Enter an appropriate Tick Length (mm) for the Global Map Scale the drillhole section is to be viewed
or plotted.
Structure ticks can be placed at the top, centre or bottom of the measured structural
interval.
Structure ticks can be coloured according to entries in another column in the structure table. For
example, a type field containing entries such as bedding, foliation, cleavage, etc. This enables
different types of structural data measurements to be displayed using different line colours and styles.
Specify the Colour by column from the list available, and then select the appropriate legend. Legends
can be created and edited using the adjacent Creating and editing legends button.
Note Note that the field type of the colour by column must match the legend type, e.g. numeric
legend can be applied to float and integer fields, and text legends can be applied to string or
date fields. If a legend is not used, the default tick display can be modified using the Line Style
button.
DEPTH LABEL
A Depth Labels display type is automatically populated (as the first row entry) for any new
section in the Downhole Data dialog. It will display all depth/EOH/collar label styles and tick
mark spacings as specified in the Annotate tab during section creation.
Opening this display type's Settings dialog allows the user to easily customize these styles and
parameters, particularly to prevent issues such as bargraph/trace shade overprinting of these primary
labels.
The Settings dialog presents the exact same options as available in the Generate Sections>Annotate.
Refer to Creating sections and plans for further information.
USING SETTING TEMPLATES

Downhole display parameters can be saved as a Setting Template, preserving the time and work
invested in finessing your potentially complex display parameters. Saved settings templates can be:
• Quickly applied to other new sections.
• Selected during the Generate Sections process, making section plan creation a one-step
process.
• Easily reapplied after cross-sections or plans have been regenerated with new drilling (e.g. infill
drilling or diamond tails/splays).
• Edited at a later date to include new downhole data, or resolve issues (such as overlaps, text
labels too large, etc).
• Duplicated and the duplicate modified to display a different series of display characteristics.
• Applied to other drillhole projects.
• Easily shared between users, allowing uniformity of drillhole section display output within an
organization.

SAVING A SETTING TEMPLATE

When all of the display settings have been configured in the Downhole Data dialog, and you are
satisfied with the resulting section/plan display, press the Save button in the Settings area. Enter an
appropriate setting template name, and press OK.
Setting templates are saved by default in a user settings directory. If you are creating multiple setting
templates per drillhole project (e.g. the Challenger and Titania prospects each have a number of
project-specific settings templates being used, such as geochemistry, regolith, etc), templates can be
stored in sub-directories (e.g. named by project) using the New Folder button. These sub-directories
are coloured blue, whilst the settings templates are black.
The user settings folder is located at .\Discover\Config\Downhole Data Display Settings
(default path specified from PRO>Options>Datamine Discover>Configuration). Saved templates are
stored as .XML files with a .downhole suffix.
Existing settings templates and sub-directories can also be Renamed and Deleted from within this
dialog.
USING AN EXISTING SETTING TEMPLATES

1. To use an existing template, whether it is to be applied to new or regenerated sections, or
modified, press the Open saved setting button.
2. From the list of settings available select the required setting and either:
• Double-click on the required setting to populate the main dialog with its parameters and auto-
close the Load Settings dialog, or
• Select the required setting and press the Apply button to populate the main dialog but keep
the Load Settings dialog open. This is a useful way of quickly previewing the parameters of
each existing setting to find the precise one you are after.
In addition to the User Settings saved by the user (see Saving a setting template), you can select
from two additional setting template types:
• Last Settings Applied: Datamine Discover automatically saves the last settings applied with
the Downhole Data Display dialog with this template name (overwriting it), regardless of
whether they were manually saved to a user-specified name or not. This allows you to easily
recover the last session's work
• From Open Section: Datamine Discover automatically saves the display settings applied to
each section or plan with that section or plan in it's project subfolder as an .XML file with a
.downhole suffix. Therefore for any open cross-section you can load its display settings (if
applied), and then apply these settings to other sections, save the settings as a setting
template, or edit the settings and re-apply to the source section.
3. Once the setting template is loaded (and modified if required), select the section/s to apply it to
from the Sections list in the main dialog and press Apply.
4. If an existing setting template is modified/edited, simply resave it (overwrite the existing template)
or save it as a new template to preserve the changes.
Note that as soon as a user-named setting template is modified, or a template is loaded from an open
section, the Current Settings name is listed as Custom Settings.
SHARING SETTINGS TEMPLATES WITH OTHER USERS

As discussed in the Saving a setting template section above, setting templates are stored in your
.\Discover\Config\Downhole Data Display Settings (default path specified from
PRO>Options>Datamine Discover>Configuration) as .XML files with a .downhole suffix.

Simply copy and paste the templates to be shared between the different user's Downhole Data
Display Settings subdirectories (e.g. via a shared network or portable storage device).
ADDING TEMPLATES TO EXPORTED DRILLHOLE PROJECTS

When drillhole projects are exported (see importing and exporting Datamine Discover Drillhole
Projects), only the section-specific setting templates are exported (i.e. those auto-created in each
section subfolder, as detailed Using an existing setting templates). Any settings templates in the user
settings directory applied to the project are NOT exported.
To add user-saved settings templates to an exported drillhole project, either:
• Share the setting templates as discussed in Sharing settings templates with other users
(recommended).
• Or, on the destination computer:
• Import and open the project.
• Open its cross-sections. Load the setting template from a representative section using the
From Open Section option (see Using an existing setting templates).
• Save these settings as a user-named setting template.
• Repeat this for as many representative sections as required.
DISPLAYING DOWNHOLE LOGS

Related tools Generate Logs
The DRILLHOLES>Create>[Generate Sections]>Generate Logs tool can display up to 24
columns of downhole data for one drillhole in a plain log style display.
The drillhole log style display is a valuable means of displaying detailed relationships between multiple
downhole variables such as a geochemistry assays, lithology and geophysical readings within a
drillhole.
To create a Log Display select one or more drillholes from the collar map window. If multiple drillholes
are selected a separate drillhole log is created for each drillhole. The drillhole log is saved to a
mappable table in a Non_Earth (cm) projection and named according to the selected drillhole. The
drillhole log table can be further annotated and added to the layout window for printing.

Drillhole data displayed in log style.
For details on using the Generate Logs tool, see:

• Define log display
• Log display parameters
• Global settings

DEFINE LOG DISPLAY

The log display is defined by choosing a downhole data table, selecting the columns from the table to
display and selecting how each of these columns is to be displayed. The log can display up to 24
columns, with column 1 being at the left of the log, and column 24 at the right.
Defining the tables, columns and Display Type in the Drillhole Log Display dialog.
Select a downhole table containing attribute data columns from the Select columns from Data Table
pull-down list. The log display may be made up of attribute data from more than one data table. For
each downhole table select the attribute columns and the assigned column positions from the
Columns to Display in Log dialog.
Select columns to display in Log Plot.
To change the column position for an attribute column click on the Reorder Columns button. Use the
Up and Down buttons to move the attribute columns to their correct positions. Remove an attribute
column using the Delete button.

LOG DISPLAY PARAMETERS

Choose a Display Type for each data attribute column. Click the Settings button in either the
Columns to Display in Log or Generate Logs dialog. The following Log Types are available:
• Text – Numeric and non-numeric data. By default the Text Style scale box is checked to
autoscale text within drillhole log intervals. To modify text size and colour click on the Text Style
button. Display text using a Legend or check the Replace numbers with alias from table
d_abbrev box if required.
• Trace Shade - Numeric and non-numeric data. Trace shades must be displayed using an
associated Legend.
• Bargraph – Numeric data only. Bargraphs may be displayed using a Legend or select a Pen
style and Brush style to apply to all bargraph bars.
• Linegraph – Numeric data only. Linegraphs may be filled with plain colour using the Brush style
colour or from a Trace Shade Legend displayed in another drillhole log column.
The width of each log is set to a 2 cm default but can be modified for each log column. Numeric data
can be displayed as log values or between selected minimum and maximum data values. Logs can be
scaled by a defined Horizontal Scale. Numeric data options are also available to show or ignore
negative values, set negative values to 0 or multiply negative values by -0.5.
When displaying linegraphs or bargraphs of valid negative value datasets (e.g. magnetic susceptibility
or EM data), enable the Show negative values data handling option, as well as the Scale log from
minimum value option. This will ensure that the X axis starts at the minimum (negative) dataset value,
rather than the default 0 value.
When the log display settings have been setup for each data attribute they can be saved and re-used
for other drillhole log displays. Click the Save button and enter a name for the setting. To use a saved
setting select the setting from the Saved Settings pull-down list. Use the Remove button to delete a
saved setting from the list. By default the Last Settings Used are automatically displayed whenever
the Drillhole Log Display dialog is opened during a current work session.

Columns and settings for Generate Logs.
GLOBAL SETTINGS
Defining Global Settings.
A number of log display parameters can be set up as global settings and defaults. Many of these
settings, such as the column width and graphic styles, can be overridden in the individual log settings
either when the data attribute column is first selected or from the Generate Logs dialog. The following
Global Settings and Default Style may be set:

• Log Dimensions - column width, vertical scale, horizontal scale, column spacing, minimum and
maximum log depths
• Annotation settings – linegraph scale, column labels, depth ticks, depth lines, axis style and
label styles
• Data Handling – negative data value options, replace numbers using alias from the d_abbrev
table
• Default Log Styles - numeric and character default log styles, linegraph fill, text style, linegraph
pen style, fill style, Log(10) transform, log scale from minimum value
Default Style in the Drillhole Log Display dialog.
CREATING AND EDITING LEGENDS

Related tools Legend Editor
Drillhole legends are created and modified with the DRILLHOLES>Create>Legend Editor tool
(also ANALYSIS>Manage>Legend Editor). Downhole numeric and textual data can be
displayed using pre-defined legends. For example, assay values displayed as text labels or
bargraphs coloured by specific data ranges can allow the easy identification of high or low values and
trends. Lithological data displayed in a trace shade can have standard colours and/or patterns
assigned for each lithological unit. Legends can also be applied to textual data displayed as text labels
or structure ticks.
Available legends are listed in the Legends window on the left hand side of the Legend Editor dialog.
When a legend is highlighted in this window the Legend name, Description, Filename and Data
Type are populated with the associated legend entries displayed in the main legend window.

Legend Editor dialog showing assigned properties, colours and patterns.
Three operational buttons are located at the base of the Legends List:
• New - Create a new legend
• Import – Import a selected setting from a Datamine Discover xs_colr.tab to available legends
• Delete – Permanently delete an existing legend file
To save a new or modified legend click on the Save button on the right-hand side of the
Legend Editor dialog.
To save legends with another name use the Save As button.
Use the Close button to exit the Legend Editor dialog.

CREATE A NEW LEGEND

Create new legend from downhole table.
1. Click New button to display the New legend dialog.

2. To use an existing field in a drillhole downhole table as the basis for the new legend check the
Populate legend from dataset or feature database box. Select the downhole table from the
Dataset pull-down list and the data attribute column from the Field pull-down list.
If an existing field is not used to create the legend, the number of rows and data range will need to
be selected manually.
To create a legend with an even colour spread, select the option Use histogram equalization.
Note The option for creating a legend from a feature database is only available from within the
Datamine Discover 3D application.
To condition or filter data from the automatic assignment select the Data Conditioning
option.
3. Select the legend Data Type from the following options:
• Text – Individual textual categories
• Numeric – Numeric ranges whereby the upper limit of one range is continuous with the lower
limit of the next range. Only values that are less than the maximum value for each range are
displayed using the range colour. If using the Populate legend from dataset option the
maximum value will need to be increased in order for the maximum value in the dataset to be
coloured.
4. Select the Number of rows to display in the legend. If a text field is selected as a Data source
the Number of rows is automatically populated with the number of unique data entries. (It is
recommended to not alter the number of rows in this case).

5. Enter the Data range to use for numeric legends. The data range determines the minimum and
maximum data values to display in the legend. The data range is divided by the number of rows to
create the initial legend from and to values. If a numeric field is selected from a downhole table as
a Data source the Data Range is automatically populated although this value can be changed
manually.
6. Enter a Legend name for the output table. If a field is selected from a downhole table as a Data
Source the Legend name is automatically created by concatenating the downhole table and
attribute field name together. This name can be overwritten with a user-defined name.
7. Click OK to display the legend in the Legend Editor dialog.
MODIFYING LEGEND ENTRIES

Each legend is composed of a number of properties that can be modified at any time. To modify a
legend select the legend from the list. The existing legend properties will be automatically displayed in
the Legend Editor window. For each legend entry the following legend properties are available:
• Row – Incremental legend row number
• String – Text legend entry field. Double-click with the mouse in the string column to modify entry
(Only available for Text Data type).
• From (>=) – Numeric legend minimum range value. Double-click with the mouse in the From (>=)
column to modify the entry (Only available for Numeric continuous Data type).
• To (<) - Numeric legend maximum range value. Double-click with the mouse in the To (<) column
to modify the entry (Only available for Numeric continuous Data type).
• Fg (Foreground colour) – Colour used for solid or pattern fills. Left-mouse click in the Fg colour
box in the legend entry to display the colour palette.
Select from any of the standard colours available or press Custom to create a new colour. In the
Colour dialog select a colour from the Basic Colours palette. Click in the colour spectrum
window or enter RGB or HSL values until the desired colour is created. Use the Add to Custom
Colours button to add the colour to the Custom Colours palette. The Fg colour can also be set
to Transparent to display data with this legend entry see-through.
Colour palette
• Bg (Background colour) – Colour displayed as solid background fill if a pattern is selected.

Selection of background colours is identical to selection of foreground colours (see above)
• Pattern – Pattern displayed for a legend entry. Left-mouse click in the Pattern box in the legend
entry to display the available patterns. The pattern selected is displayed with the colour of the
nominated Fg Pattern styles are stored in bitmap files located in the Encom\Common\Patterns
folder.

MapInfo Pro patterns.
• LCol (Line colour) – Line colour used for trace shade or bargraph boundaries and structure ticks.
Left-mouse click in the LCol box in the legend entry to display the colour palette. To copy the
Foreground colours to use as the line colours highlight the Fg column entries and press Ctrl-C.
Highlight the corresponding lines and press Ctrl-V.
• LStyle (Line style) – Line style used for trace shade or bargraph boundaries and structure ticks.
Left-mouse click in the LStyle box in the legend entry to display the available styles.
Line styles.
• LThick (Line thickness) – Line thickness used for trace shade or bargraph boundaries and
structure ticks.
• Comment – Descriptive text entry for each legend row can be stored with the legend.
Note The Auto-populate “From” fields option selected will automatically populate the From (>=) field
with the To (<) value for modified or newly entered data values
ADDITIONAL LEGEND EDITING TOOLS

• RGB Interp - Interpolate RGB (Red:Green:Blue) shades in colour columns across rows of
selected cells.
RGB interpolations can be used with any of the legend colour columns Fg, Bg or LCol. To select
the rows to shade either left-mouse click in the first colour cell and drag the mouse cursor to the
last colour cell or left-mouse click in the first colour cell and hold down the Shift or Ctrl keys to
select the last colour cell. Click the RGB Interp button. The intermediate rows show continuous
shading between the first and last selected colour cells.

• HSL Interp - Interpolate HSL (Hue:Saturation:Lightness) shades in colour columns across rows
of selected cells.
HSL interpolations can be used with any of the legend colour columns Fg, Bg or LCol. To select
the rows to shade either left-mouse click in the first colour cell and drag the mouse cursor to the
last colour cell or left-mouse click in the first colour cell and hold down the Shift or Ctrl keys to
select the last colour cell. Click the HSL Interp button. The intermediate rows show continuous
shading between the first and last selected colour cells.
• Step Patterns - Automatically assign patterns across rows of selected cells. To select the rows to
pattern either left-mouse click in the first pattern cell and drag the mouse cursor to the last pattern
cell or left-mouse click in the first pattern cell and hold down the Shift or Ctrl keys to select the last
pattern cell. Click the Step Patterns button. Each row is displayed in a different pattern according
to the order in the available pattern
• Duplicate - Copy a colour, pattern or line style across rows of selected cells. Select the cell to
copy and drag the mouse cursor to the last cell or hold down the Shift or Ctrl keys to select the
last cell. Click the Duplicate button and all selected cells will be updated with the same
parameter as the selected cell.
• Insert row - Insert an empty row above the selected row.
• Add row – Add an empty row to the end of the legend.
• Delete rows - Remove single or multiple rows. Select a row to delete by clicking in the legend
row column. Use the Shift and Ctrl keys to select multiple rows. Any cell selection that is
highlighted is removed with this operation. A confirmation message is displayed before the rows
are deleted.
Note The columns in the Legend Editor can be automatically sorted by clicking the column name.
The sort can be toggled between ascending and descending (successive clicks).
Note If rows are deleted from a legend they cannot be restored once the modified legend is saved.
EXPORTING LEGENDS
Legends can be included when exporting a Drillhole Project (see Sharing Datamine Discover drillhole
projects). Ensure to include the legends used so that other users who share the project can regenerate
and recreate the drillhole cross-sections.
LEGEND CONFIGURATION
Use the Settings button to view the current file path for the legend and pattern directories.
Legends are stored as .LEG files in the Encom\Common folder. The Settings dialog also
displays the MapInfow.pen path.
Note Datamine Discover automatically installs a custom Mapinfow.pen file to MapInfo Pro. This
includes additional line styles, as listed in Styles and symbol fonts.

CREATING SECTION LEGENDS

Related tools Create Section Legend
The Create Section Legend tool allows a legend to be created on demand for any existing
section, polyline section or plan for both trenches and drillholes. It displays a schematic key of
a drillhole trace with text showing the location of each data display attribute, including a legend
for each colour pattern used in the downhole display. The legend created is section specific and is
automatically stored in the section's subdirectory. This therefore allows the creation of multiple legends
for a series of sections with differing data display settings.
Example drillhole legend

ADDING SECTIONS TO A LAYOUT

Related tools Print Sections
Use the DRILLHOLES>Output>[Section Output]>Print Sections tool to add one or more
sections to the layout window. Select the scale and layout page size for a section and add a
section grid, title block and scalebar. Create a section collar plan and add to the layout in a
separate frame.
An example of a detailed cross-section and plan of a proposed road tunnel generated using the Print Section tool,
incorporating a titleblock, scalebar and legend.

Select drillhole section, map scale and page size.
The Add Section to Layout dialog enables a user to specify a map scale and page size frame for a
drillhole section in the same way as Creating scaled maps.
1. Select the section to add to a layout from the Select Section window. Only one section can be
selected from this window and the layout frame parameters will be based on this section and
applied to any additional sections selected in the next dialog.
2. Choose a scale from the Map Scale pull-down list. If the desired scale is not available then
choose Custom Scale at the bottom of the list and manually enter a map scale.
3. Select a page size and orientation from the Frame Setup list. To add a new page size see Select
the page size and frame for more information on creating and saving page frames. The page
dimensions and map window area covered by the chosen frame are displayed at the base of the
dialog.
4. Click the Preview button to check the Map Size frame in the selected section's map window.
Adjust the paper and scale size if necessary, and click OK once satisfied.
5. Whatever is displayed within this frame in the section map window is what will appear in the
layout. If the frame does not appear in the correct location then select the frame in the map
window and drag to cover the desired window contents. Do not resize the MapSize frame as this
will affect the map scale in the layout. When the MapSize frame is correctly positioned select
DRILLHOLES>[Section Output]>Accept Parameters.
6. If the MapSize frame is too big or too small for the section map window contents then select
DRILLHOLES>[Section Output]>Modify Parameters and select a different Map Scale or
Frame Setup. Continue this process until an acceptable MapSize frame is created and choose
DRILLHOLES>[Section Output]>Accept Parameters.

SECTION LAYOUT OPTIONS

Related tools Print Sections
Adding scaled sections to the layout window, ready to print.
Once the section map position is accepted the scale, frame width, height, top RL and frame left
details are displayed under Frame Parameters in the Add Section to Layout dialog. Click the
Preview button to re-size the section map window to frame parameters. The frame parameters
can be modified manually if required.
7. To create multiple layouts based on the same frame parameters, highlight additional sections
from the Choose Sections to Add window. To view how an additional section will be displayed in
the layout, select the section from the list and click the Preview button. If necessary modify the
frame parameters to accommodate the additional section dimensions.
8. The Add Plan of Collars to Layout box is automatically checked to include a plan of the
drillholes displayed in the cross-section in the layout. The collar plan is opened into a new map
window and displayed in a separate frame in the layout above the cross-section. The collar plan
can be edited and additional layers such as surface geology added to enhance the layout.
Note Raster and Grid Images and Structural Symbols are not supported by default in the collar
plan.
Note Drillhole collars projected using a custom affine coordinate system (see Affine
transformation) cannot be displayed using the Add Plan of Collars to Layout option.
Note Collar plans are added to the top of the map frame in the layout which may result in a
layout bigger than the original page size selected. Select larger page size or create custom
map frame as a workaround.
A layout frame can be added to an existing layout if one is already open and multiple sections can
be placed in one layout (with multiple pages) or a separate layout can be created for each
section. Check the Show section info text in layout box to include information such as scale,
section origin X, Y and RL and section orientation on the layout.

9. A section grid is created automatically as part of the section layout. See Adding a map grid to
sections for more information. A title block and scalebar can be added to the layout window for
each section in a similar method to using the Datamine Discover map making tools such as
Scaled Output. See Creating scaled maps and Customizing title blocks for more information on
title blocks and creating a customized title block.
Note This menu option is specifically for cross-sections. If there are multiple plans to print use the
DISCOVER>Output>[Map Output]>Scaled Frame tool. With either of these functions, frames
can be added to existing layout windows, enabling a user to add accurately scaled frames for
sections and plans together in the one layout.
ADDING A MAP GRID TO SECTIONS

Related tools Section Grid
Use the DRILLHOLES>Output>[Section Output]>Section Grid tool to draw a map grid on the
front-most drillhole section map window. The grid drawn will reflect the real easting and northing
coordinates along the X axis, and also the correct vertical exaggeration. If you wish to draw a
map grid using the non-earth in-line distance coordinates, use DISCOVER>Output>Map Grid.
Drillhole Section Grid dialog.
Select an appropriate X and Elevation Grid Spacing. The section grid may be displayed as Lines,
Points or Edge Ticks. Use the style buttons to modify grid linestyles, point symbols, colour and font.
Make sure the Label Size is appropriate for the Scale at which the section is to be viewed or plotted.
Section grid labels may be displayed in a polygon mask outside of the map frame and at the top,
bottom, left and right in the map window. Use the Other Label Options to modify the text displayed in
the grid label or to label only selected grid intervals. The grid file is automatically written to section
directory and named using the section name with a “G” extension. To save the grids to a different
location or under a different name use the Save As button.
Click on the preview button to preview the map grid and make changes as necessary. Click OK to
produce the final map grid.
See Add a map grid for more information on Datamine Discover grids.

CREATING A SECTION COLLAR PLAN

Related tools Collar Plan
Use the DRILLHOLES>Output>[Section Output]>Collar Plan tool to create a section collar plan
without having to run the Print Sections tool.
Section collar plan.
Note If you experience issues generating section collar plans, see this troubleshooting Knowledge
Base article http://encomkb.encom.com.au/questions.php?questionid=21.
INTERROGATING DRILLHOLES
Related tools Downhole Info
Select the DRILLHOLES>Analyze>Downhole Info tool and click on a collar in a section or plan
to display the collar and downhole survey data. To view information from any downhole tables
select the table from the downhole data pull-down list.
Drillhole information from the graphically selected hole.

DOWNHOLE COMPOSITING
Related tools Grade
Depth
Attribute
The Datamine Discover drillhole compositing tool composites downhole data in a number of ways:
Composite by cut-off grade – Composite data using a minimum cut-off grade for a specified
downhole length or vertical thickness interval. Include internal dilution parameters.
Composite by downhole depth or elevation – Composite data using regular downhole elevation
intervals such as mining bench RL or downhole depth from surface.
Composite by attribute – Composite data using a unique-value attribute such as lithology or
alteration. All contiguous intervals with the same attribute value are grouped together and
assays composited for each contiguous group.
For descriptions and general settings that are common to all three compositing tools, refer to:
• Selecting drillholes for compositing
• Data handling options
SELECTING DRILLHOLES FOR COMPOSITING

The drillholes selected for compositing are displayed in the Drillhole box. By default all drillholes in the
project are selected.
To composite a selection of drillholes choose the drillholes in the collar map window prior
to running the compositing tool. Alternatively, click the Unselect All button below the
Drillhole box and select individual drillholes using the left mouse button. To select
consecutive drillholes hold down the SHIFT key and for non-consecutive drillholes holes hold down the
CTRL key. To reselect all drillholes, click the Select All button.
Note The composite tool does not support Trenches. Only Drillhole collars will be listed.

Downhole assay data is often received in a format that requires some manual manipulation before the
data can be used in downhole analysis—for example, zero values or negative values representing null
or below detection limit values.The Data Handling Options tool provides a number of standard data
transformations to deal with the most common data exceptions.

Data Handling Options dialog
• Numeric null value – Use this option to set a “Null” data value, e.g. -999.
• Set negative values to – Use this option to set all negative values to zero (multiply by zero) or to
a positive value (multiply by a negative number). For example, if the detection limit (DL) is 0.01
and assay values below the DL are entered as -0.01, multiplying all negative values by -0.5 will
convert each DL value to 0.005 (half the DL).
• Set all zero values to – Zero values can be set to a single value—for example, to half the
detection limit.
• Custom assign values from template table – To apply different replacement values for element
data in a table or for multiple replacements within the same element field, a custom template can
be created. The template must be a TAB file containing three fields: the column name, the original
value and the new replacement value. The template must be opened in a browser window before
selecting the compositing tool.
COMPOSITE BY CUT-OFF GRADE

Related tools Grade
Use the DRILLHOLES>Analyze>[Composite]>Grade tool to composite downhole data by cut-off
grade. Compositing by cut-off grade is commonly used to summarize assay data into intervals
above a specified value. A minimum interval length can also be specified along with internal
dilution constraints.
The composited interval is calculated using a downhole running weighted average of consecutive
samples that conform to the cut-off grade parameters. Cut-off grade composites can only be calculated
for one assay column at a time.
Note Composite by cut-off grade does not support assay tables with 'gaps' in the interval data (i.e.
non-continuous From-To intervals)

Compositing by cut-off grade
project are selected. To change the selection, see Selecting drillholes for compositing.
When compositing by cut-off grade, the following settings and options are displayed:
TABLE INPUT
TABLE
Select the input table containing the grade data that will control compositing (the “primary”
column). All downhole tables in the drillhole project are displayed in the drop-down.
COLUMN
Select the primary column containing the sample values by which the cut-off grade is determined.
All numerical columns in the input table are displayed in the drop-down.
By default, only the selected primary column will be composited. To composite additional
numerical columns (e.g. other grade values), click the Filter button to select the columns to
be processed and included in the output table. Ensure that the primary column and the
compulsory HoleID, From and To columns remain selected.
If the assay data needs to be conditioned before compositing (contains zero and negative
values), see Data handling options.

COMPOSITE GRADE
MINIMUM GRADE
This parameter has two functions:
• Any sample grades below this value are excluded from the downhole running average grade.
• Unless internal dilution has been specified, if the downhole running average grade is falls
below this value, the current composite terminates.
HIGH CUT GRADE
Any sample grades higher than high cut grade are cut to the high cut grade.
COMPOSITE DISTANCE
• None – The full length of all drillholes are composited, including short holes and short
composites.
• Drill trace length – Composites (above the cut-off grade) shorter than this downhole length
are excluded.
• Minimum Vertical Thickness – Composites (above the cut-off grade) shorter than this vertical
height are excluded.
INTERNAL DILUTION
INTERNAL DILUTION
Samples above the cut-off grade are often separated by samples with low grade assay values. Due
to restrictions such as minimum mining width, it can be necessary to include this material as part
of a composite interval.
An internal dilution length and grade can be set so that low grade material can be included in a
composite under specified conditions. If the low grade material is above the internal dilution grade,
it will be included as part of the composite as long as it's cumulative length (for the current
composite interval) is less than the specified internal dilution thickness (downhole length). Low
grade material is not added to the end of a composite interval.
Internal dilution can be assessed as either an average (default) or as a minimum dilution grade.
For example, if internal dilution is set to 5 m @ 50 ppb with the Average option selected, an
interval of 5 m @ 63 ppb would be valid regardless of the actual sample values making up this
interval. However, if the Average option is cleared and the 5 m @ 63 ppb segment contained 1 m
@ 30 ppb, the interval would not be valid.
If a subgrade interval is encountered, the following logic is applied:
• If interval grade is below cut-off but above internal dilution grade, add the interval length to
the total contiguous internal dilution length and calculate the diluted composite grade.
• If the diluted composite grade is above the cut-off and the total contiguous length of dilution
does not exceed the maximum dilution length, add to the current composite. Get the next
interval.
• If total contiguous internal dilution length exceeds the maximum dilution length or the diluted
composite grade is less than the cut-off, terminate the composite and discard intervals back
to last interval above cut-off grade.
• Start the next composite at the next interval above the cut-off grade.

The Running Grade (GR) is the grade of a composite as its being composited down the hole. If the
running grade falls below the minimum grade, the composite is cut back to the last intercept of
minimum grade. For example, if:
Minimum Grade (GM) = 1 g/t
Internal Dilution Grade (GD) = 0.5 g/t
Internal Dilution Thickness (TD) = 5 m
Interval (m) Grade (g/t) GR (g/t)

0–1 1.1 1.1
1–2 1.2 1.2
2–3 1.1 1.1
3–4 1 1.1
4–5 1 1.1
5–6 0.6 1.0
6–7 0.6 0.9
7–8 20.2 20.2
8–9 0.45 10.3
In this example, a 5 m @1.1 g/t composite is created because the internal dilution (5–7 m) is not
included—the running grade GR dropped below the minimum grade at interval 6–7 m.
EDGE GRADE
Specifying an edge grade allows the application of edge padding when downhole compositing.
The Edge Grade value (GE) should be set between the Internal Dilution Grade (GD) and Minimum
Grade (GM) values. Edge Grade can only be used when Internal Dilution is applied. The
maximum Edge Grade thickness TE uses the value set for the Internal Dilution thickness.
Edge padding allows a composite ending in a valid internal dilution interval to be carried through
to a sample >=GM if the intervening interval meets the Edge Grade requirements and the overall
running grade >= GM throughout.
For example, if:
GM = 500 ppb
GD = 50 ppb
GE = 250 ppb
TE = 5 m
Assuming that the running grade is >= 500 ppb across the composite, the following interval would
be treated as a continuous composite:
Depth (m) Grade (ppb) Interval length

105-120 702 15
120-125 89 5 valid internal dilution
125-127 400 2 valid edge padding
127-130 550 3
The following interval would finish the composite at 120 m:

Depth (m) Grade (ppb) Length (m)

105-120 702 15
125-127 230 2 invalid edge padding
127-130 550 3
The following interval would also finish the composite at 120m:
Depth (m) Grade (ppb) Length (m)

105-120 702 15
125-131 300 6 length>internal dilution
width
131-134 550 3
TABLE OUTPUT
INTERVAL COLUMN
A new column (default name “Interval”) is added to the output table containing the downhole
length of each composited interval. An existing field cannot be specified.
TABLE SUFFIX
Composite data is stored in a new table. The new composite table is named using the original
downhole table name with a default suffix of “_comp”. The suffix can be changed to any user-
specific name.
By default, only the selected “primary” column will be composited. Use Filter option on the input
table Column selection (above) to add extra columns to the output table. If additional fields are
composited, modify the table suffix to show the primary compositing field, e.g. “_comp_Cu”.
ADD OUTPUT TO CURRENT PROJECT
Select this option to automatically add the composite table to the current drillhole project.
Composite data can then be viewed on a section using the Downhole Data tool (see Displaying
downhole data).
COMPOSITE BY DOWNHOLE DEPTH OR ELEVATION

Related tools Depth
Use the DRILLHOLES>Analyze>[Composite]>Depth tool to composite downhole data by
downhole depth or elevation. Compositing by downhole depth (From–To), elevation or RL (Z) is
useful to normalize downhole data tables to a consistent sampling interval or mining bench
height. For example, a hole collared at RL 257.9m and composited at 10 m RL intervals might have
downhole intervals of 0–10.09 m (257.9–247.9 m RL), 10.09–20.206 m (247.9–237.9 m RL), etc. The
same hole composited at 10 m downhole depth intervals has intervals of 0–10, 10–20, etc. from
surface. In the case of vertical holes, these composite intervals and grades will be identical. For
inclined holes, the Downhole depth and Elevation (RL) composite options will produce different
composites: the downhole interval is at the angle of the drillhole whereas the RL interval is measured
vertically.

In both instances, the composite is calculated using a weighted average based on samples that fall
entirely and partially within the designated composite interval. If a composite interval contains no
samples or missing samples, then a zero value is inserted and used in the final calculation.
Compositing by elevation
project are selected. To change the selection, see Selecting drillholes for compositing.
Downhole depth composites are calculated using the From and To intervals in the downhole table.
Elevation and RL composites are calculated by converting the From and To intervals in a drillhole to
the corresponding downhole XYZ coordinates and using the Z value for each sample to determine
which composite interval it falls within or intersects.
When compositing by depth or elevation, the following settings and options are displayed:
TABLE INPUT
Select the input table containing the data that will be composited. All downhole tables in the
drillhole project are displayed in the box.
By default, all numerical columns will be composited. To change the selection, click the
Filter button to select the columns to be processed and included in the output table. Ensure
that the compulsory HoleID, From and To columns remain selected.

ELEVATION PARAMETERS
COMPOSITE INTERVAL
Type the composite interval.
DOWNHOLE DEPTH
Select this option to composite down the drillhole trace.
To limit the depth range of the composites, type a Start Depth (max) and/or End Depth (min). If
no start or end depths are specified, the first composite will start at the collar of each drillhole and
the last composite will end at the end of each hole.
ELEVATION (RL)
Select this option to composite vertically.
To align composites in all drillholes to a specified elevation or RL, type a Start RL (max) and/or
End RL (min). These values will also limit the depth range of the composites. If no start or end
values are provided, the first composite will start at the collar elevation of each drillhole and the
last composite will end at the end of each hole.
TABLE OUTPUT
INTERVAL COLUMN
TABLE SUFFIX
specific name.
Select this option to automatically add the composite table to the current drillhole project. This is
needed to subsequently calculate 3D coordinates for the table. Composite data can then be
viewed on a section using the Display Downhole Data tool (see Displaying downhole data).
To display the Z coordinate for each composite interval:
1. Navigate to DRILLHOLES>Manage>Open Project, select the current drillhole project, and click
Open.This is required to make sure the drillhole project registers the new composite table in the
list of available downhole tables.
2. Select DRILLHOLES>Analyze>3D Coordinates and choose the newly created composite table.
Click OK to calculate the 3D coordinates and redisplay the composite table in a browser window.
This adds six new columns to the composite table with the corresponding XYZ for the From value (XF
columns) and To value (XT columns). The XFR and XTR columns contain the RL values for the upper
and lower composite interval.

COMPOSITE BY ATTRIBUTE
Related tools Attribute
Use the DRILLHOLES>Analyze>[Composite]>Attribute tool to composite downhole data by
attribute value. Compositing by unique attribute is generally used to merge contiguous drillhole
intervals together that contain the same attribute, e.g. lithology, alteration, etc. A table can be
composited using the intervals generated from compositing a column in another table, e.g. assay
grades can be composited based on lithology composite intervals. Numeric values are composited with
a weighted average.
Note the composite by attribute does not support downhole tables with gaps in the interval data
(From To intervals)
Compositing by attribute using assay data in one table with lithology data in another table.
When compositing by attribute, the following settings and options are displayed:
ATTRIBUTE TABLE
TABLE
Select the input table containing the attribute data that will control compositing. All downhole
tables in the drillhole project are displayed in the drop-down.
COLUMN
Select the column containing the attribute values by which the composite intervals are
determined. The attribute column must be a text field (alphanumerical).
DATA TABLES
Select the downhole tables containing the assay data that will be composited (length-weighted
average). All downhole tables in the drillhole project are displayed in the box.

By default, all numerical columns will be composited. To change the selection, click the
Filter button to select the columns to be processed and included in the output table. Ensure
that the compulsory HoleID, From and To columns remain selected.
TABLE OUTPUT
INTERVAL COLUMN
TABLE SUFFIX
specific name.
Select this option to automatically add the composite table to the current drillhole project. This is
needed to subsequently calculate 3D coordinates for the table. Composite data can then be
viewed on a section using the Downhole Data tool (see Displaying downhole data).
MERGING DOWNHOLE TABLES

Related tools Downhole Merge
Use the DRILLHOLES>Analyze>Downhole Merge tool to combine multiple downhole data into
a single table with From-To intervals derived from all the input tables. For example, you can
merge an assay table with a lithology table, which will apply the lithology to each assay interval.
For example, the following downhole tables have different From-To intervals:
Assay table:
From-To Mo
105-110 m 702
110-115 m 89
115-120 m 400
120-125 m 550
Lithology table:
From-To Lith_code
98-106 m GNS
106-115 m PEG
115-178 m SUL
Which, when merged, produce the following From-To intervals and values in the combined output
table:
Merged table:

From-To Mo Lith_code
98-105 m – GNS
105-106 m 702 GNS
106-110 m 702 PEG
110-115 m 89 PEG
115-120 m 400 SUL
120-125 m 550 SUL
125-178 m – SUL
To merge two or more downhole tables:

1. Open the drillhole project with DRILLHOLES>Manage>Open Project.
2. Select the DRILLHOLES>Analyze>Downhole Merge tool.
3. The downhole tables available in the current project are displayed in the Downhole Data Table
box. By default, all downhole tables are selected. Select or clear tables as required.
4. The available columns (in the selected downhole tables) are displayed in the Unselected Fields
box. Use the controls provided to move the required columns to and from the Selected Fields box,
as shown below:
Merging downhole tables
5. By default, the output is saved to a TAB file named Downhole_Aggregated. To change the output
table, edit the file name in the Output File box, and click the save button.
6. Click OK to merge the tables.
7. The merged table is displayed in a browser window:

Merged downhole tables
CLIPPING DRILLHOLES BY 3D SOLIDS OR SURFACES

Related tools Downhole Clip
Use the DRILLHOLES>Analyze>Downhole Clip tool to intersect and clip downhole data tables
with 3D solids (volumes) or surfaces. This allows the generation of new downhole data subsets,
displaying either:
• Only those downhole intervals (such as assays and geology) within an orebody, alteration or
aquifer volume; or
• The point intersection (i.e. From = To depth values) of downhole intervals with modelled 3D
surfaces, such as fault planes, unconformity surfaces and planar vein systems.
Downhole object clip allows all downhole intervals contained within a 3D volume (left) to be converted and displayed as a new
subset downhole data table, for further display and analysis (right).
These new downhole tables allow for some powerful analytical and display options, particularly for
creating rich and informative long- and cross-sections:

• The detailed display of only those downhole intercepts contained within an orebody volume.
• Isolating and displaying only the intercepts within an orebody volume using trace shade/bargraph/
linegraph display options.
Note that the green outline is solely the intersection of the sectional plane with the orebody volume, onto which the entire
drillhole project is displayed; thus the contained intercepts do extend outside this sectional outline.
• Compositing (see Composite by cut-off grade) the intervals contained within an orebody to show
and label long-section intercepts.
The same intercepts have been composited by a very low cut-off grade (such as 0.000001g/t) to create a reduced
number of intercepts per drillhole. Labelling these provides an informative summary of high-grade intercepts across the
orebody.
• Converting these composited intercepts into pierce points (see Create Pierce Point Layer),
enabling even more advanced display and analytical options, such as precise positioning of
intercept labels, thematic mapping, and sectional gridding.

Converting (composited) downhole intercepts into Pierce Points allows (a) the precise positioning of the label points,
such as top, middle or bottom of the intercept, and...
(b) size and/or colour modulation by for example grade or gram metre value, providing a powerful and effective visual,
and...

(c) sectional grid interpolation, again using for example the grade or gram-metre values.
TO CLIP DOWNHOLE DATA TABLES TO EITHER 3D VOLUMES (SOLIDS) OR SURFACES:

2. Select DRILLHOLES>Analyze>Downhole Clip.
3. Move the desired downhole data tables to the Selected list.

4. Click Open to browse for the 3D vector file (.DXF or .FDB) containing the 3D volumes or surfaces.
5. The resulting (subsetted) downhole table has the suffix _clipped added to the to the source table
name. Edit the suffix, if required.
6. If you intend further process the resulting tables (such as compositing, creating pierce points,
etc.), Select the Add output to current project option. This will require a little extra time to refresh
the project cache.

7. Click OK.
NOTES
• This tool allows the selection of only one 3D vector file (.DXF or .FDB format), which can contain
either volume (solid) vector objects, or surface vector objects, but not both.
• This tool supports intersecting volumes; an interval occurring within two overlapping volumes will
be output as a single interval.
• When intersecting downhole intervals with 3D surfaces, the output will be downhole point
locations i.e. with identical From and To values per intercept. Convert these to pierce points (see
Create Pierce Point Layer) for more advanced display and analysis options.
GENERATING 3D COORDINATES
Related tools 3D Coordinates
Use the DRILLHOLES>Analyze>3D Coordinates tool to convert a drillhole downhole table (such
as a lithology or assay table) directly into a mappable table, calculating and using either the
downhole table interval's top, middle or bottom locations.
Note This tool does not support trenches.
3D Coordinates dialog
The resulting mappable MapInfo Pro table can also be queried (e.g. with Select by Attribute or SQL
Select) to select a subset such as only fault intercepts or copper values above 10,000 ppm).
TO GENERATE 3D COORDINATES:
2. Select DRILLHOLES>Analyze>3D Coordinates.
3. Select the target Downhole Data table from the top pull down list.

4. Select the interval position on each downhole sample interval to calculate 3D coordinates, either:
• Top
• Midpoint (the midpoint of a straight line between the top and bottom positions; this should be
used cautiously for longer intervals such as when logging by stratigraphic unit)
• Bottom
5. The output file is automatically placed into the Drillhole Projects root directory, and includes a
suffix indicating which interval position was selected in step 4.
6. Press OK.
7. The new table will be auto-opened into MapInfo Pro, with the following components:
• XYZ coordinate fields will be created and populated within the table for each intervals:
Top (FromX/FromY/FromZ)
Midpoint (MidX/MidY/MidZ) and
Bottom (ToX/ToY/ToZ) locations
• The table will be automatically mapped on the selected interval positons coordinates.
• Both the populated coordinates and the table mapping utilize the drillhole collar table's
projection.
CALCULATING MAXIMUM AND EOH VALUES

Related tools Max/EOH
Use the DRILLHOLES>Analyze>Max/EOH tool to extract the maximum downhole grade and
end-of-hole (EOH) data values for selected holes. The Maximum and EOH values are saved to
new tables which can be added to a drillhole project for analysis e.g. enrichment zones or
mineralized trends, or subsequently analysed.
• Analyse maximum downhole grades
• Analyse EOH data values
Note This tool does not support trenches.

ANALYSE MAXIMUM DOWNHOLE GRADES

Analysis of maximum downhole grades for selected elements, for each individual drill collar, is
achieved by selecting the Max Values tab. Maximum downholes grades will only operate on numerical
data fields.
Maximum Values dialog.
Define the Downhole Table to analyse the maximum values from the dropdown list available under the
Input option. By default a Hole ID and maximum downhole grade will be displayed in a MapInfo Pro
Browser format. To display the respective interval where the maximum grade exists select the Display
From and To values option.
To prevent numerous entries when the maximum value is zero, check the option Only one max value
when it is zero. Numerous options exist for selecting elements to interrogate.
The unique field attributes will initially populate the Unselected pane. Move the
Select
required attributes to the Selected pane using the selection buttons. To select
consecutive attributes hold the left-mouse button and drag or use the SHIFT key Unselect
in combination with the mouse control. To select non-consecutive attributes use
the CTRL key in combination with the mouse control.
Additional element columns can be selected to interrogate the respective
data values and the maximum value for the primary maximum element
values. The data values for the additional elements will be displayed, note
that these are not the maximum values for these elements downhole.

Select additional element columns dialog.
The Output table for the maximum values analysis will automatically be saved into the drillhole project
folder; and alternate path can be defined if desired.
ANALYSE EOH DATA VALUES

Analysis of EOH downhole data for selected elements, for each individual drill collar, is achieved by
selecting the EOH Data tab. EOH downhole data will operate on both numerical and character data
fields.
EOH Data dialog.

Define the Downhole Table to analyse the EOH values from the dropdown list available under the Input
option.
By default a Hole ID, From, To, EOH and selected elements columns will be displayed in a MapInfo
Pro Browser format.
Numerous options exist for selecting elements to interrogate.
The unique field attributes will initially populate the Unselected pane. Move the
Select
required attributes to the Selected pane using the selection buttons. To select
consecutive attributes hold the left-mouse button and drag or use the SHIFT key Unselect
in combination with the mouse control. To select non-consecutive attributes use
the CTRL key in combination with the mouse control.
Two options exist for analysing EOH data; either Use deepest sample/interval
or EOH Check.
When selecting Use deepest sample/interval the values for the selected column report the interval at
which the last downhole data value appears.
When selecting EOH Check the values for the selected columns, by default report an EOH depth as
specified in the collar table. A data value may or may not exist at the reported depth. If no data values
exist at the EOH depth two text boxes No sample string and No sample value are available to
populate user defined null values. The numerical toggle box for the EOH Check option allows a fault
tolerance value to be set. For example, if the total depth for a drill hole was 100m and the last sample
interval was 99m the EOH values would be a null. If a fault tolerate value of 1 was set the EOH routine
would report the EOH value at 99m. The fault tolerance only applies to EOH values which are null or
are not populated with an interval value.
Note The EOH column will be populated with either a T or F indicating if the EOH displayed is the
actual EOH value. A T indicates a true result; therefore the EOH depth is the actual collar EOH.
An F indicates a false result; therefore the EOH depth is either shorter or longer than displayed.
The Output table for the maximum values analysis will automatically be saved into the drillhole project
folder; and alternate path can be defined if desired.

CONVERTING ALPHA-BETA CORE ANGLES

Related tools Alpha/Beta
Use the DRILLHOLES>Analyze>Alpha/Beta tool to calculate the orientation of discontinuities
and geological structures from the alpha and beta core angles of the discontinuity and the
orientation of the drillhole at the location of the discontinuity.
Convert Alpha-Beta Angles dialog
Referring to the diagram below, the discontinuity surface forms an ellipse, referred to as the “apical
plane”, with apices at either end of the major axis of the ellipse.
The alpha angle is the acute angle of intersection between the apical plane and the core axis measured
along the major axis of the ellipse (BB’). The alpha angle is always a positive angle between 0° and 90°.
The beta angle is measured clockwise looking in the direction of drilling (the right-hand thumb rule)
around the circumference of the core from the top-of-core or bottom-of-core reference line (A) to the
apex furthest from (B) or nearest to (B’) the collar.
The measuring convention (bottom or top of core and nearest or furthest apex) must be consistently
applied on all drillholes. The diagram shows the furthest from convention.

Measuring alpha and beta core orientation angles showing bottom-of-core reference line (A) and apex furthest from collar (B).
Note Take care to ensure that the alpha and beta angles are measured as shown and whether the
reference line is scribed at the top or bottom of core. Practice does vary—for example, the
alpha is sometimes measured as the angle between the normal to the apical plane and the
core axis i.e. 90° – alpha.
Before alpha-beta structure data can be displayed on a drillhole trace (see Structure), the file must be
converted into a standard structural data table with dip and dip direction fields (see Downhole structural
data tables).
The DRILLHOLES>Analyze>Alpha/Beta tool converts structural downhole data point defined by alpha
and beta angles into dip and dip direction angles. Before using this tool check that:
• The structure table contains (at least) HoleID, Depth From, Depth To, Alpha, and Beta fields. The
field names in the structure table must match the corresponding field names used in the project.
For more information, see Downhole interval and point data tables. Additional fields in the input
table are preserved.
• The Depth From value must be equal to the Depth To value (forming a surface of zero thickness,
such as a joint or bedding plane) or greater than the Depth To value (forming an infilled structure,
such as a shear or fault). The apical plane is defined at the midpoint of the from and to depths.
• The Alpha and Beta fields must be numeric. If present, Dip and Dip Direction fields must be Float
type.
• The Alpha and Beta values have been measured according to the convention defined above.

Note that zero alpha and beta values are valid and are treated as zero angles (not as null values).
When the file is processed, if zero values are detected, the number of records with zero values is
reported, and the user is asked to confirm before proceeding to process the file.
Note If the data is imported in CSV format from a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet, Excel converts blank
cells into zeroes. To preserve null values, enter –999 in all blank cells before saving as a CSV.
Null dip and dip direction values are output if:
• Either the alpha or beta value is null (-999),
• The alpha value is greater than 90 or less than zero.
• The beta value is greater than 360 or less than zero.
Converted alpha-beta structure table showing zero and null values.
Workflow:
1. Import alpha-beta structure data file as a TAB file.
2. Load the structure table into the drillhole project from Downhole tab on Drillhole Project Setup
dialog box (DRILLHOLES>Manage>Manage Project>Modify). The project must contain at least
the collars and survey tables required to compute the drillhole trace. This associates the HoleID,
Depth From, and Depth To fields with other drillhole tables in the project.
3. Convert the structure table with Alpha/Beta tool (see below). The converted structure table can
be viewed in the table browser.
4. The structure data can then be displayed on drillhole sections using the Structure display option.

To convert alpha-beta structure data into dip and dip direction:

2. Select DRILLHOLES>Analyze>Alpha/Beta. The Convert Alpha/Beta Angles dialog box is
displayed.
3. In the Structure Table box, select the structure file.
4. Under Source Columns, select the Alpha Angle and Beta Angle fields from the input file.
5. Under Output Columns, if the structure table already contains dip and dip direction fields (from a
previous conversion, for example), select the Dip and Dip Direction fields. Otherwise select
<New Column> and, when prompted, type the name of the new column.
6. Under Orientation Mark, choose if the reference line is marked at the bottom (default) or top of
core.
7. Under Beta Angle Measurement, choose if the beta angle is measured from the apical plane
point furthest from or nearest to the collar.
8. Click Apply. When processing is complete, close the dialog box.
CALCULATING SECTIONAL RESOURCES

Related tools Resource Calculator
Datamine Discover provides a simple method for interpolating resources from cross-sections or
level plans. The DRILLHOLES>Analyze>Resource Calculator creates a grid based on the
selected section's assay data points which are contained in the section's 1, 2, 3.. layers. It then
uses the Top and bottom nodes/points of each assay interval segment, and then uses a Inverse
Distance Weighted interpolator method to create a grid.
Section grids are created over the entire section, and can be clipped to within a digitized section
Boundary layer (must be a layer with _B suffix). The Resource Calculator then calculates a tonnage
(metric tonnes) based on the formula:
• If no boundaries are used:
(Area of valid grid cells) x (Width) x SG (tonnes/m3) = Tonnes
• If boundaries are used:
(Area of boundary polygons) x (Width) x SG (tonnes/m3) = Tonnes
The Tonnes or Area is recorded with "@ value", where the value is the mean (average) of the valid grid
cell values.
Note Ore resource values generated by the Resource Calculator are approximation only and
should be used in conjunction with other resource calculation applications.
The resource grid is stored as a table named with the section (or plan) name plus a suffix to show it is
a resource grid, and stored in the section folder.
The Resource Calculator requires a drillhole project and either a cross-section or plan of the drillhole
results to be used for the calculations. In order to ensure that all drillhole assay results which intersect
the cross-section are included in the interpolation check the Show holes intersecting at depth box
in the Drillholes Generate Sections dialog. This option will ensure that any drillholes that is collared
outside of the section envelope but intersects the section envelope at depth are included in the cross-
section.

Drillhole plotting dialog with show holes intersecting at depth option.
Once the resource grid has been generated it may be contoured, queried or re-coloured using the
functions in the MapInfo Pro Raster module.
The sectional resource will generally be contained within a boundary that has been interpreted based
on geological or geochemical restraints. Drillhole assay results that lie within the selected boundary
are used in the resource interpolation.
SET UP RESOURCE PARAMETERS

1. Select the DRILLHOLES>Analyze>Resource Calculator tool.
Drillhole Sectional Resources Step 1 of 3 dialog.

2. Select the section to be used in the sectional resource calculation and click OK.
Drillhole Sectional Resources – Step 2 of 3 dialog.
3. Use the From Table pull-down list to select the assay table to use in the resource calculation.
Highlight the appropriate assay column in the From Column list.
4. If there is a section boundary in the section map window the options to Use Data Bounds or Use
Section Layer are available. The Use Section Layer option will restrict the sectional resource
calculation to within the interpreted ore boundaries by excluding all assay results that lie outside
the computed boundary.
Note The calculation is only made with boundaries on the B layer.
5. Check the Convert area to tonnes box to more accurately calculate the resource tonnage. The
Width value is the total distance from the section line in either direction to include in the resource
calculation. For example, a resource calculation width of 20 m is comprised of a +/-10 m envelope
either side of the section line. Effectively this value is twice the envelope width specified in the
Drillholes Generate Sections dialog.
Enter a Specific Gravity (SG) or density for the ore specified in
tonnes/m3. The section volume is multiplied by this value to calculate the resource tonnage.
If the Use Section Layer option is selected the Store Resource in column becomes active.
Check this box to store the results of sectional resource calculation in a new column named
Resource in the digitized boundary table (cross-section table with “B” extension).

Drillhole Sectional Resources – Step 3 of 3 dialog.
6. The Grid Cell width/height is automatically populated but can be changed to a more appropriate
size if required. The minimum and maximum X and Y extents for the output grid are also
displayed and may be changed manually if no ore boundary is selected. Enter a Null cell value
for any blank grid cells created (default -999999).
The interpolation used by Datamine Discover in the sectional resource calculation is a simple two
dimensional Inverse Distance Weighted (IDW) algorithm similar to that used in the MapInfo Pro
Raster module. A search ellipse of fixed size and orientation can be defined and a grid cell value
is then calculated from the weighted average of all data points that lie within the ellipse centred on
each grid cell. If the input data points are not evenly distributed then using an oriented search
ellipse may produce a more representative grid.
7. Uncheck the Ignore zero data values or Ignore negative data values boxes to include zero or
negative data values in the section resource calculation.
8. The Weight power determines the rate at which the influence of each data point declines with
increasing distance from the grid cell being interpolated. Increasing the weighting power reduces
the influence distant points have on the calculated value of each grid node. The weighting value
defaults to 2 (i.e. the weight of any data point is inversely proportional to the square of its distance
from the grid cell) which is appropriate for most situations. If required, the weighting value can be
altered to any positive value.
9. Enter a Min points per cell value. This value represents the minimum points required within the
search ellipse before a grid cell value can be interpolated and controls the appearance and
smoothness of the output grid.
Note If the minimum number of points is set greater than 1, some cells may report a null value
as they do not contain sufficient data points within the search ellipse.
10. For a simple search with no bias in the search orientation use the default Search Ellipse
Orientation of 0 degrees. Set the Ellipse Long Radius and Ellipse Short Radius to the same
value to create a circular search ellipse.

When the mineralization orientation such as the dip or plunge of the ore body is known, alter the
search ellipse parameters accordingly. The search ellipse orientation may be between –90° and
90°, where 0° is vertical and -90° and 90° orientations are horizontal search orientations in the left
and right hemispheres respectively. For example, a section with the mineralization plunge/dip 50°
to the right on section requires a search orientation of –40°. The long axis (major) and the short
axis (minor) define the search ellipse used by the grid algorithm.
11. The sectional resource grid is saved by default with the section name plus “Resource” suffix in the
drillhole section directory. The grid can be saved with a different name and location if required.
Choose a colour look-up table to shade the new sectional resource grid from the Image Shading
pull-down list.
12. Click OK to create the sectional resource grid. The grid is automatically added to the section map
window and the tonnage and grade displayed in a message window. The tonnage and grade is
also written to the Resource column of the boundary table if this option was selected.

WORKING WITH
SURFACES
The SURFACES module provides a rich suite of functions and tools for
creating, modifying and analysing gridded surfaces. The SURFACES module
has been designed to integrate seamlessly with gridded data created
externally from MapInfo Pro and with other Discover modules that use
gridded data such as Drillholes.
For information about the grid types supported and grid handlers, see
Introduction to Surface Gridding. For information on importing and exporting
grids, see Importing and Exporting.
IN THIS SECTION
Surfaces module 503
Introduction to Surface Gridding 504
Supported Grid Formats 510
Creating Grids 511
Converting Vector Files to Grids 564
Importing Grids 566
Exporting Grids 567
Interrogating a Grid 569
Modify Grid Colours and Shading 570
Contouring a Grid 583
Creating Polygonal Regions by Selection Criteria 586
Creating Grid Profiles 588
Calculating Surface Properties and Volumes 593
Computing Cell Values by Expressions 593
Using Grid Tools 596
WORKING WITH SURFACES 503
SURFACES MODULE
The Surfaces module provides the following additional functions:
CREATE GRIDS
• Interactive Gridding
Interpolate gridded surfaces from point, polyline or polygon objects using a variety of methods:
Inverse Distance Weighting, Kriging, Triangulation, Spatial Neighbour, Minimum Curvature,
Density or Distance. Dynamically preview the output grid and adjust the interpolation parameters
on-the-fly.
• Multi-File Gridding
Interpolate multiple large data sets with millions of points or polylines to build a massive grid using
methods such as minimum curvature, inverse distance weighting, and triangulation.
• Converting Vector Files to Grids
Create a 2D surface grid from a 3D vector file, such as a continuously triangulated surface e.g.
DXF or Datamine wireframe files.
IMPORT GRIDS
• An extensive range of industry formats are supported. For more information about importing grids
and other data types (for example, points and polylines that you can then grid).
CHANGE THE APPEARANCE OF GRIDS

• Modify Grid Colours and Shading
Adjust grid display with various colour schemes and stretching options, view data histogram and
apply sun-shading to a grid.
• Display a Colour Legend
Display a colour-value legend for a grid.
CREATE CONTOURS, PROFILES AND POLYGONS FROM GRIDS

• Contouring a Grid
Create, format and label contours from a surface grid.
• Creating Polygonal Regions by Selection Criteria
Create colour-filled polygons bounding regions of a grid that meet selection criteria. Criteria can
be set by value ranges or surface properties, such as slope and aspect.
• Outline
Outline grid bounds or non-null regions as polygons.
• Creating Grid Profiles
Generate sectional profiles across a grid or contour plan including draped vector layers.
• Creating Voronoi Polygons
Create Regions from point sample data with option to be bounded by a selected boundary.
INTERROGATE AND ANALYSE GRID SURFACES

• Interrogating a Grid
Interactively query grid cell values and report summary statistics for the entire grid or within
polygonal bounds.

• Calculating Surface Properties and Volumes

Calculate the surface area, roughness, slope, curvature, and aspect of a grid. Calculate the
volume between a surface and a horizontal plane, or between two surfaces, or the cut-and-fill
volumes.
• Hydrological Surface Analysis
Extract stream networks and catchment regions from a topographic grid surface.
• Classify, Viewshed
Classify grid regions by data ranges. Determine line of sight (view shed) regions.
MODIFY AND TRANSFORM GRIDS

• Manipulating Grids
Clip grid extents to a region or the bounds of another grid. Reproject into a different projection.
Convert between formats. Any manipulation is possible including flip, merge, replace, resample,
rotate, shift, split, fill holes, and more.
• Filtering Grids
Apply Convolution smoothing, enhancement, sun-angle or geophysical FFT filters to a surface
grid.
• Edit, Overlay
Edit individual grid values or overlay a region of grid cells with a new value.
• Computing Cell Values by Expressions
Perform complex grid arithmetic, statistical and Boolean calculations on one or more grids.
• Dividing Grids into Tiles
Large grids can be 'tiled' (i.e. subdivided) into a number of smaller grids without needing to open
the source grid into MapInfo Pro.
POPULATE MAP OBJECTS FROM GRIDS

• Assigning Values from a Grid to Map Objects
Add grid cell values as attributes to overlying point, polyline and polygon objects.
OTHER GRIDDING TOOLS

• Computing Grid Statistics
Precalculate the grid statistics for grid files located in a directory, creating a summary statistics file
(.GHX). This process can be reapplied to 'out-of- date' statistics files or used to increase the
statistics sampling density for larger grid files.
• Grid Options
Set the default grid loading preferences, including the grid appearance and density of
precomputed statistics. Also enable/disable available Grid and Raster handlers.
INTRODUCTION TO SURFACE GRIDDING

• What Is a Surface Grid?
• Creating Grids and Interpolation
• Grid Geometry
• Interpolation Methods

WHAT IS A SURFACE GRID?

A surface grid is a rectangular array of points that have one or more assigned values. Often the
attribute values are referred to as the "Z" value. When rendered on screen, the points are the centre
point in a filled rectangular area, called a cell (or pixel). Generally the cells are square (equal in X and
Y dimensions). If viewed in a 3D window, they would appear as a smooth continuous 2D surface with
varying elevation (Z values), hence the name "surface".
The Z values for a grid can represent any type of numerical data, such as elevations, assays, rainfall,
integer class codes for vegetation or lithology types, solar flux, trace element concentration, etc.
Although surface grids cell values are assigned to the entire cell area in a map, generally when using
the various processing tools in the SURFACES ribbon, only the cell centre is used to determine if the
cell is within or outside of a vector object that transects the cell area-for example, when clipping or
assigning cell values.
Square grid cell centres and their corresponding cell edges. Using the colouring metadata, in a map each square would be
colour relative to their attributed value.
Note In MapInfo Pro, the grid cells must be square and orientated parallel to the coordinate system
(projection) grid north axis.
The colour of each cell is calculated based on the value of the cell, and a colour look-up table (see
Modify Grid Colours and Shading). Note that the colour information is not stored in the grid file itself,
but in separate metadata files.
If there is more than one value or attribute per cell, these are called "bands", and it forms a multi-
banded grid. Some grid file formats include names for each band.
Surface grids are also known as TINs (triangulated irregular networks), grid images, or raster images.
They can contain a wide variety or numerical data, either in floating point (decimal) or integers.
Datasets that are commonly stored in surface grids include:
• Elevation data (DEM or DTM)-this may be raw or interpolated data.
• Interpolated geochemical or geophysical data.
• Remotely sensed data-includes multi-banded spectral satellites, such as LANDSAT or SPOT).

Raster images (such as photographs, JPG, BMP, ECW, etc.) are a special type of grid, where
there are three bands (red, green, blue) and each contain integer values between 0-255. This
means that the colour lookup RGB values are contained in the file, but importantly, there is no
quantitative measured data in the file. Because they do not contain meaningful numerical
attributes, and already contain embedded colour information, they are generally not opened or
treated as surface grids.
Alternative display methods for grids are as vector polygons (see Vectorize); or as contours,
which are interpolated lines between cell centre points (see Contouring a Grid).
CREATING GRIDS AND INTERPOLATION

A number of interpolation methods are commonly used to create surface grids from attributed points.
Some methods are suited to relatively equally spaced data with smooth changes between points
values, but other methods are designed to handle disperse and clustered points, with outliers (jumps)
in data values.
Input data points with a surface grid mesh overlayed. An estimate (interpolation) is calculated at each
centre from the surrounding input data. Note that when the value from the nearest point is assigned,
the process is called "stamping" (see Converting Vector Files to Grids).
In general, the steps in creating a surface grid are:
1. Read input data points.
2. Setup a surface grid geometry (also known as a "mesh"), so the centre XY points are known for
each cell.
3. At each cell centre, apply the interpolation (gridding) method to determine a value. This usually
involves finding data points that are closest to the cell centre and then applying the interpolation
(the estimation function).
4. Save the grid file containing the interpolated (estimated) values at each cell centre.
The interactive gridding tool will automatically estimate or default many of the parameters for the grid
geometry and interpolation method.

GRID GEOMETRY
The three parameters required for this are:
• Cell size
• Grids bounds
• Number of rows and columns (automatically calculated by dividing the bounds by cell size)
As a rule of thumb, the cell size for evenly spaced data should be half the mean distance between data
points. This will, on average, put one data point in each cell, and so preserves the resolution of the raw
data. For clustered or dispersed data, the cell size value requires careful consideration.
INTERPOLATION METHODS
• Triangulation
• Minimum Curvature
• Inverse Distance Weighting
• Spatial Neighbour
• Kriging
• Density Grid
• Distance Grid
TRIANGULATION
This method is relatively simply, and joins input data points by lines to other neighbouring points,
thereby creating triangles. Note that this is similar in concept to Voronoi polygons, but Voronoi assigns
the point value to a polygonal area, whereas triangulation (TINs) assigns the value only at each corner
of the triangles by the points the triangle joins to. The triangles therefore form a flat plane in 3D with
different elevations at each corner.
This illustrates the TIN (triangulation) of the same points compared to Voronoi. The solid triangles have
different attributes at each corner, whereas the Voronoi has one value for the entire region.

This closely honours the data, but it is still unlikely that a cell value will exactly match an input data point
that is within the cell. This is because there is generally always a small separation distance between
the exact centre of the cell (where the value is taken from the TIN).
This illustrates the conversion of the triangulation (TIN) to the surface grid mesh. The only value used
to calculate each cell is the "height" of the triangle exactly underneath the cell centre point. The height
within each triangle is calculated by the value and location of each of the three corners. If the cell centre
is not inside a triangle, no value will be saved to the grid cell.
MINIMUM CURVATURE
Minimum curvature is the default method but generally is not a good choice. It is designed for smoothly
varying data, such as geophysical surveys measuring an unbounded potential field.
It works by fitting a smooth elastic curve through the data points and attempts to "touch" each data
point, but without bending the surface too much. At the edges of the data it tapers to the mean value
of the data points, around the grid bounds.
Between the data points, the Interior Tension controls how taught or loose the elastic surface is. High
values are a "tighter" surface, so will create a smooth surface but less closely matching the input data
points.
Outside of the data, when tapering to the mean value, the Boundary Tension controls how quickly or
smoothly it reaches the mean value (boundary condition).
The minimum curvature algorithm works by repeatedly applying the calculation to attempt to improve
the fit (known as the least squares method). But because of the tension parameter limitations, a perfect
fit will generally not be achieved. The Maximum Iterations set a limit to stop the estimation.
The smooth surface is then calculated at each grid cell centre (as it is a surface defined by equations
at any XY) and saved in the grid.
INVERSE DISTANCE WEIGHTING

Inverse Distance Weighting (IDW) is a universal technique that can be applied to a wide range of
spatial data. IDW uses weighted average interpolation to estimate grid cell values and can be used as
either an exact or a smoothing interpolator. Each grid cell value in an output surface is calculated using
a weighted average of all data point values surrounding the grid cell that lie within a specified search
radius.

The IDW method is optimal when the data has a fairly uniform distribution of input points across the
area to be gridded, and some degree of smoothing is beneficial. With this type of data, a repeat
measurement at a point does not necessarily give the same results as the first measurement. If the
input data points are not evenly distributed then using an oriented search ellipse may produce a more
representative grid.
SPATIAL NEIGHBOUR
This method is similar to the Inverse Distance Weighting method described above but does not use the
search radius to interpolate data values from surrounding cells. For each grid cell, neighbouring input
points are located based on a spatial neighbours selection criterion. The value of the computed grid
cell is the average of the neighbours, weighted such that the closer the neighbouring point, the greater
the influence than points further away.
KRIGING
Kriging is a geostatistical gridding method which has proven popular across a variety of industries due
to its flexibility and data driven approach to surface interpolation.
Kriging is an advanced technique which is based on the assumption that the spatial variability in the
measured property of a data set is neither due to totally random nor deterministic constraints.
The main advantage of Kriging over simpler interpolation techniques such as IDW (Inverse Distance
Weighting) is that it uses a weighting model which is adaptive to the inherent trends in a data set rather
than imposing a set of fixed conditions upon them.
The process of using Kriging in interpolation can be complex and requires an intimate knowledge of
the structure and variability in the data set so that an appropriate sample model and set of gridding
properties can be chosen.
DENSITY GRID
The Density gridding method produces a grid which records a measure of the point density at each grid
node. The density at each grid node is determined independently using an estimator function: Radial
Density Estimator or Kernel Density Estimator (KDE).
The Radial Density Estimator method returns a true measure of the point density at each grid node
(measured as the number of samples per square area unit - usually metres). It is a simple method that
counts the number of input samples within a specified radius of the grid node position and then
normalizes that count by the area of the search.
The Kernel Density Estimator method is a non-parametric density estimator. It uses a similar approach
but it weights the input samples by a kernel function that is normally a function of the normalized
distance of the sample to the grid node.
DISTANCE GRID
The Distance gridding method produces a grid which records the minimum distance to the input data
features at every grid node. A distance envelope can be specified to clip the grid at a maximum
distance from the nearest feature. Any grid node that is outside this envelope will be assigned a null
value.

SUPPORTED GRID FORMATS

Discover adds support to MapInfo Pro for direct reading of numerous standard grid types. Discover's
grid handlers also support opening, modifying, manipulating and editing multi-gigabyte grid files.
Grid formats supported through SURFACES>File>Open Table (set Files of Type to <Grid Image>) are:
• ASEG GXF (.GXF)
• Band Interleaved by Line (.BIL including .HDR) ER Mapper (.ERS)
• ESRI/Arc ASCII (.ASC .TXT)
• ESRI/Arc Binary (.ADF) ESRI/Arc FLT Binary (.FLT) DTED (.DIR, .DTO, .DT1, .DT2)
• Geopak (.GRD) Geosoft (.GRD)
• GeoTIFF with embedded elevation (.TIF) Landmark (.GRD)
• MapInfo Grid (.MIG) Minex (.XYZ)
• Surfer ASCII (.GRD)
• Surfer Binary (.GRD) USGS (.USG) USGS DEM (.DEM) USGS SDTS (.TAR)
• Vertical Mapper (.GRD)
In addition, there are dedicated import tools under the SURFACES>Utilities to import the following:
• ASCII files (.TXT, .CSV, .XYZ) - converts delimited grid coordinates and values into a standard
grid file format which can be subsequently opened
• HGT SRTM files (.HGT) - creates an ERS which can be subsequently opened
• Multi-banded grids are by default opened and displayed by only their first band. Use
SURFACES>Display>Colour Grid to enable multi-banded colouring.
You can define the default appearance of grids, and enable or disable various handlers used by
MapInfo Pro using the Grid Options tool.
MAPINFO PRO AND GRID FILES

To import an existing grid into MapInfo Pro, the standard SURFACES>File>Open Table option can be
used by setting the format file type to Grid Image. This will import most common grid formats. See
Supported Grid Formats for detailed information.
Note Many of the grid formats created in Discover cannot be opened in MapInfo Pro without
Discover installed.
When importing a grid with SURFACES>File>Open Table, you may be asked to select a projection for
the grid file; this should match the registration points embedded in the grid file, if known. If the
registration of the grid is incorrect, you can use Table>Maintenance>Raster>Modify Image
Registration to correct the TAB file registration information.
PREFERRED OUTPUT GRID FORMAT

A preferred default output grid format for all Surface module tools can be set with the Grid Options tool.
Once a grid format has been selected, all grids created from this point use the specified format unless
an interface option exists to override the setting. You can alter the preferred Grid Handler used by
Discover by selecting another at any time.

CREATING GRIDS
The Surfaces module provides two powerful gridding options:
• Interactive Gridding
Interpolate datasets such as geochemical, geophysical or spot height measurements using
methods such as IDW, minimum curvature, kriging or triangulation. Dynamically preview the
output grid and adjust the interpolation on-the-fly.
• Multi-File Gridding
Interpolate single or multiple files encompassing millions of points or contours to build a massive
grid using methods such as minimum curvature, inverse distance weighting, and triangulation.
INTERACTIVE GRIDDING
SURFACES>Display>Interactive Gridding
Datamine Discover provides a high performance, optimized gridding tool to assist with the
creation of interpolated surfaces in MapInfo Pro. The Interactive Gridding tool is set-out in an
easy to use tab dialog to guide you through the entire process. The high level of optimization in
each of the gridding algorithms used in Datamine Discover has made it possible to include a real-time
preview window to assist in choosing the best parameters for the data. This preview window allows
users to experiment with different gridding parameters in real-time and observe the effect they have on
the quality and appearance of the grid.
The Interactive Gridding tool in Datamine Discover has an optimized internal data interrogation system
that automatically analyses the spacing and distribution of the input data and computes an optimal set
of gridding parameters. If the default parameters and gridding method are not acceptable, these
settings can be overwritten by entering a user-defined method, grid cell spacing, search criteria etc.
Create Grid dialog
Define a set of input data points to be included in the gridding process. The points to grid can either be
from a nominated table or from a selection made using the MapInfo Pro selection tools. Irregular or
regular shaped collections of data points can be gridded.

Datamine Discover Interactive Gridding Tool dialog showing grid image and tab options
INTERACTIVE GRIDDING TOOL

The gridding tool is controlled via a series of tab pages to the left of the preview window. The number
of visible tabs in the dialog varies depending on the gridding method selected.
On the bottom left side of the dialog are Save, Close and Help buttons. The Save button creates an
output surface as specified on the Output tab. The preview window does not have to complete drawing
before saving the output grid file. If the initial appearance of the grid is satisfactory click the Save button
and the grid is saved in the same folder as the input data points. The saved grid is then loaded
automatically into MapInfo Pro and placed in the same window as the input data points. The Close
button dismisses the grid tool without creating an output surface and the Help button displays the on-
line help.
Two additional controls at the base of the dialog determine the operational mode of the Gridding Tool.
An Auto Preview mode is set by default; however, this can be deactivated by the checkbox control. In
this mode Datamine Discover automatically updates the appearance of the grid after each parameter
change. The Preview button allows you to manually select when to preview the gridding parameters
changes to the preview grid. The two operational modes are described below:
• Automatic mode
This is specified with the Auto Preview checkbox enabled and is the default behaviour. As
changes to any control parameter are made, the gridding process automatically re-computes and
updates the preview display. The Gridding Tool can detect when a parameter change has been
made and will preview this change when the cursor is moved to another tab page or field in the
dialog.
• On Demand mode
Disabling the Auto Preview checkbox places the gridding tool in manual mode. No grid
processing is commenced until the Preview button is selected or the Auto Preview mode is
enabled. This mode is best used for situations where a number of parameters are to be modified
prior to gridding, or the dataset is very large and the gridding operation may take some time. If the
button is disabled then no changes are pending and no grid computation is performed.
Note The Gridding tool will automatically switch to On Demand mode if a large dataset is
loaded. In this mode, select a field to grid and press the Preview button to display the grid
before proceeding beyond the Input tab page.
A vertical progress bar is displayed next to the preview window in both modes and will show the
percentage progress of the gridding operation. The progress can also be monitored by observing the
grid re-draw in the preview area.

PREVIEW DISPLAY
The appearance of the preview display can be controlled by four toggle buttons and a pull-down list
located above the preview window. Alternatively, a custom colouring setting saved from the Modify
Grid Colours and Shading tool can be used. The appearance of the preview window can then be saved
and applied to the output grid.
These control buttons are:
View input points in the preview window. Click button to remove input points from view.
View search ellipse in the preview window. Only available if Inverse Distance Weighting, Kriging,
Density, or Distance methods are selected.
Apply a Histogram Equalization stretch to the image in the preview window. This button can be
used to distribute colours more evenly across the image and is particularly useful for data with
poor dynamic range.
Display images in the preview window as either coloured or monochrome (eg greyscale from
black to white). This button toggles the image between monochrome and colour.
Apply a sun illumination to the image in the preview window. This can be used to enhance detail
within a gridded image. The sun angle is fixed from the north-east direction.
Select either a colour table or select a custom saved colouring setting created by the
Modify Grid Colours and Shading tool. The chosen colour table will be applied to the
gridded image when loaded into Datamine Discover. For information on look-up tables and legends,
see Display a Colour Legend.
A pop-up menu can also be accessed by right-clicking with the mouse in the preview window:
Preview window right-click mouse options
The Zoom and Pan controls enable the grid to be examined prior to saving. To zoom in (by 4 times
magnification) on an area position the cursor over the area of interest and click the left mouse button.
Click the left mouse button again to zoom out. The zoom factor can be changed by selecting the Zoom
Settings menu option.
Pan a zoomed image by selecting Pan Mode and holding down the left mouse button. The cursor will
change to a hand when in Pan Mode. When the button is released the image redisplays at the panned
location. Other options include Show Value at Cursor when the cursor is placed over a grid cell and
View Input Points to display the original data point locations.
INPUT TAB
The Input tab summarizes the input data and provides a selectable list of all numeric data columns that
are available for gridding in the source Tab file or query.

Numeric data columns from the Input tab file are listed in the Fields (bands) to grid list. To change the
column to be gridded select the column name so it is highlighted. Multiple fields (or bands) may be
gridded at the same time. The data range for the selected column(s) is automatically displayed in the
text boxes to the right and if the Auto Preview option is enabled the grid is regenerated for the new
column. If the Auto Preview option is turned off then click the Preview button to display the grid in the
preview window. To view multiple gridded fields select the field from the pull-down list displayed above
the preview window.
For information about how to use the functions available from this tab, see:
• Data Conditioning
• Grouping
• Breaklines
• Coincident Points
• Statistics Explorer
DATA CONDITIONING
The Data Conditioning button allows the user to either clip the spatial extents of the input dataset, or
remove null values/ranges and implement data capping (e.g. removing outlier effects).
Note Data conditioning in Large and Multifile gridding is applied with OR logic between fields/bands.
This means a null in one field will not cause other fields being gridded to become null.
SPATIAL CONDITIONING
This does not clip the input data; only the output grid is clipped. The X/Y values can be reset to
the initial dataset extents by pressing the Reset extents to input button.
FIELD DATA CONDITIONING
Before selecting the Data Conditioning tool, choose either a field (band) to condition, or
select the Use global data conditioning check box to condition all fields

The Data Conditioning dialog
The central part of the Data Conditioning dialog allows the specification of invalid data and/or
data ranges. All invalid data will be converted to the default null value -1e+032 (-1.0×1032).
To specify an invalid data Value enter the value in the window on the left hand side and use
the Add button to add it to the Invalid Data Value list in the right hand window.
Use the Delete button to remove the highlighted invalid data value from the list.

Specifying individual invalid data values. This is appropriate for removing negative values representing BDL (Below
Detection Limit), SNR (Sample Not Received), etc
In instances where there are a number of invalid data values it may be easier to specify an invalid
data range. For example, for a dataset that contains -9999, - 8888, -5, etc. an invalid range from -
9999 to -5 could be entered instead.
To specify an invalid data Range enter the lower and upper values in the windows on the left
hand side and use the Cross button to add it to the Invalid Data Range list in the right hand
window.
Use the Delete button to remove the highlighted invalid data range from the list.

Specifying an invalid data range to remove a range of negative values in the dataset from the gridding process
The maximum or minimum values of the dataset can be capped to a fixed value by enabling Cap
Values below or Cap Values above options.
Invalid values can be converted to a background value, rather than a null value, by selecting the
Convert null values to a background value option.
The Save and Load buttons at the top of the dialog enable Data Conditioning settings to be saved
and loaded from files. The Statistics button open s the Statistics Explorer (see Statistics Explorer
for details).
GROUPING
Datasets can be split by a selected attribute, defined by the Select Group field option. This allow
multiple grids to be generated based on grouping:
• Unique character/string data - such as Company name, sample group or lithology code.
• Date/Time - This enables multiple grids generated based on the sample date groups, such as
month of year or day of week, or by the hour of day.
• Numeric ranges or unique values - For example sample numbers only in the range of 1000-2000
can be placed in one grid, and another range of 3000-4000 place in a different group and grid. Or
it could be based on unique numeric codes assigned to different sampling groups.
By default "no grouping" field is selected. Once a grouping field is selected from any of the available
fields in the input vector file, a group selection dialog is displayed. This allows defining the grouping
method and/or which groups will be displayed. You can change the grouping options at any time by
clicking the button next to the Select Group field.

Once groups are selected, Multiple Fields are automatically generated based on the the Input Field
prefix with the group name suffix, e.g. Field1_Group1, Field2_Group2, Field2_Group1 etc.
Note When grouping is enabled, you will not be able to edit the output grids name, only the output
folder location. The output grids will be set to the default Input TAB file name, plus the Input
Field and Group name suffix.
An example of generating multiple soil copper grids, grouped by company name.
BREAKLINES
Breakline data can be read from multiple MapInfo Pro TAB, DXF, and ESRI shape files. Break lines
are defined as multi-segment lines in which the slope is monotonically increasing or decreasing along
each segment. Examples of breaklines include stream or river traces, cliff faces, dredged channels,
topographic ridge lines, or roadways. By incorporating break lines into the gridding process the output
grid can be forced to conform to certain slope requirements in critical areas.
Use the Add button in the Breaklines Advanced Options dialog to browse for and select one or
more breakline files (.TAB, .DXF and/or .SHP files).
DXF and .SHP files natively support undulating/variable Z-value breaklines (i.e. with a different Z value
for each node/vertice), and require no extra setup. To utilize MapInfo Pro TAB files for undulating
breaklines, both Line and Z fields need to be specified:

• All vertices from all objects with the same Line identifier will be considered to be a single break
line. In this way a collection of MapInfo Pro point objects can be grouped into polylines for
delineating breaklines with a variable Z component. However, this also means that polylines (with
a single Z value) will each need to have a unique Line identifier if they are to be considered
unique.
• A numeric Z field (e.g. RL) must also be specified for TAB files, whether they are comprised of
points, polylines or polygons. By defining the break lines in MapInfo Pro as a collection of points
with a common Line identifier, it is possible to represent complex 3D geometries such as streams,
slope ridgelines or cliffs.
COINCIDENT POINTS
The Coincident points pull-down list controls the handling of multiple data points at the same location.
Coincident points may be averaged, the first or last point value that does not contain a null value used,
the minimum or maximum point value taken or all points kept.
In the case of a selected subset of a table, the east and north data values indicate the selected data
coverage and not the data range of the original table.
STATISTICS EXPLORER
The Statistics Explorer is a tool for examining and understanding the spatial and statistical aspects of
a data set. It has been designed in a way that allows for intelligent interrogation of a data set to help
identify spatial and frequency relationships which may be important when choosing and configuring an
appropriate gridding method. The operation and functionality of the Statistics Explorer is described in
the Statistics Explorer section later in this chapter.
METHOD TAB
Seven gridding methods are provided by Datamine Discover. The methods can be selected via the
Method tab on the gridding tool dialog. The gridding method chosen will determine the number of
additional dialog tabs and control properties that are displayed along the top of the gridding tool.
Located on the Method tab is an option to save the grid parameters or to apply pre-defined parameters.
The Load Settings button will present you with a list of user-defined grid parameters. The grid
configuration file GridTool.set, containing these settings, is located in the user configuration
folder (refer to Configuring Datamine Discover for further information).
The Save Settings button is used to save numerous settings from the existing Interactive
Gridding session. The grid configuration file GridTool.set is located in the user configuration
folder (refer to Configuring Datamine Discover for further information).
The Load From Existing Grid option is designed to load gridding parameters
from an existing grid file. By default an Datamine Discover created grid will have
an associated XML configuration file located in the same folder as the parent
grid. If you wish to load these settings navigate to the associated XML file. Note that this option should
only be used on the same dataset.
The available methods are described in more detail below:
• Minimum Curvature
• Kriging
• Triangulation
• Spatial Neighbour

Two alternative analytical methods are also available:

• Density Grid
• Distance Grid
MINIMUM CURVATURE
The Minimum Curvature gridding method is widely used in many branches of science and research.
This method creates an interpolated surface similar to a thin, linearly elastic plate passing through each
of the data values defined in the input dataset. An important criterion in creating a surface is that it has
a minimum amount of bending forced upon it to conform to the data points. The degree of bending is
constrained by a tension parameter and this can be specified both within the data area and along the
edges. Minimum curvature gridding generates the smoothest surface possible while attempting to
honour the data as closely as possible. Like all gridding methods, minimum curvature gridding is not
an exact interpolation technique and therefore some error may occur between the input data point
values and the interpolated surface values.
Minimum Curvature Tab
The minimum curvature algorithm attempts to fit a surface through all of the data points without putting
any abrupt kinks in the surface. Between the fixed observation points, the surface bends according to
the Interior tension. This parameter is used to control the amount of distortion on the interior with the
higher the tension, the less the distortion. The Boundary tension controls the amount of distortion at
the edges. By default, the boundary tension is set to 0.
The minimum curvature method produces a grid by repeatedly applying an equation over the data in
an attempt to produce a smoothly varying grid. Iteration is used to describe the number of times the
equation is to be applied to the grid. The Maximum iterations number can be specified in the Minimum
Curvature tab. The grid node values are recalculated until successive changes in the error between
successive iterations are minimized, or the maximum number of iterations is reached.
KRIGING
Kriging is a geostatistical gridding method which has proven popular across a variety of industries due
to its flexibility and data driven approach to surface interpolation. Kriging is an advanced technique
which is based on the assumption that the spatial variability in the measured property of a data set is
neither due to totally random nor deterministic constraints. The main advantage of Kriging over simpler
interpolation techniques such as IDW (Inverse Distance Weighting) is that it uses a weighting model
which is adaptive to the inherent trends in a data set rather than imposing a set of fixed conditions upon
them. The process of using Kriging in interpolation can be complex and requires an intimate knowledge
of the structure and variability in the data set so that an appropriate sample model and set of gridding
properties can be chosen.
Over the past several decades kriging has become a fundamental tool in the field of geostatistics. The
method of interpolating a surface using kriging is generally performed as a two stage process:

1. Analyse the input data to establish the spatial predictability of the measured values in the study
area. This analysis generally focuses on the spatially correlated component of the data by means
of determining the degree of spatial dependence among the sample points. The average degree
of spatial dependence among variables is summarized in a plot known as the semi-variogram.
The semi-variogram is a concise means of representing the average intersample variation
according to sample separation distance and direction. In order to use the sample variance as
part of the interpolator in the Kriging process it is necessary to model the semi-variogram in order
to define a mathematical function which optimally describes the underlying structure in the data.
This process is known as variogram modelling which in itself and can be a very involved and
complex task. Once an appropriate model has been chosen it can then be used to estimate the
semi-variance or weighting at any given sample distance.
2. Interpolation or estimation of values at locations which have not been adequately sampled. This
process is known as interpolation kriging. The simplest technique known as ordinary kriging uses
a weighted average of the neighbouring samples to estimate the unknown value at a given grid
node. The weights are optimized for each node using the variogram model, the distance to the
surrounding samples and the inter-sample variance.
The first step in kriging is to construct a variogram (or semi-variogram) from the input data which
describes the spatial correlation between the sample points. A variogram generally consists of two
parts:
• A sample variogram (experimental).
• A model variogram (a descriptive function which mathematically models the experimental
variogram).
The degree of spatial dependence among sample points is measured by the average semi-variance:
1 n
γ ( h) =  [ z ( xi ) − z ( xi + h)]2
2n i =1
Where h is the distance or lag between sample points, n is the number of samples separated by h and
z is the attribute value of interest. The computation of ?(h) is performed in two steps. First pairs of
sample points are grouped together by distance. For example, if the distance interval (or lag) is 1000
m then pairs of points separated by less than 1000 m are grouped together into a 0-1000 m lag,
samples separated by a distance of between 1000 and 2000 m would be grouped into a lag of 1000-
200 m and so on. Next the average distance h and the average semi-variance ?(h) are calculated for
each group. If spatial dependence exists among the samples, then pairs of points closer together will
have more similar values than pairs that are further apart. The semi-variogram is a plot which has the
average semi-variance ?(h) along the y-axis and the separation distance h along the x-axis.
Note In Discover, you can only specify the range of the lag/h axis. The lag intervals are automatically
set to 1/50th of this range.
Experimental and Model Variogram used in kriging

The semi-variogram can be broken down into thee main components; the Nugget, Sill and Range.
• Nugget
The semi-variance at a distance of zero and represents the degree of sample repeatability or
spatially uncorrelated noise.
• Range
The spatially correlated portion of the semi-variogram that exhibits an increase in the semi-
variance with distance. Towards the limit of the range the semi-variance levels off such that with
additional increases in distance it is indistinguishable from one point to the next. This point of
flattening is called the sill.
• Sill
The point at which the semi-variance (range) levels off to a relatively constant value.
Once an experimental variogram has been computed, the next step is to define a model variogram. A
model variogram is a mathematical function that models the trend in the experimental variogram. Once
the model variogram is constructed, it is used to compute the weights which are used in the kriging
interpolator. The basic equation used in ordinary kriging can be described as follows:
n
F ( x, y ) =  wi f i
i =1
Where n is the number of points in the data set, fi are the attribute values of these points, and wi are
weights assigned to each point. This equation is essentially the same as the equation used for inverse
distance weighted interpolation except that rather than using weights based on an arbitrary function of
distance, the weights used in kriging are based on the model variogram.
The creation and analysis of the Sample Variogram and Model Variogram is done using the Statistics
Explorer as discussed lin Statistics Explorer
Selection of Kriging on the Method tab also opens both the Kriging tab and the Search Tab on the
gridding tool interface. Kriging uses the same searching mechanism as the Inverse Distance Weighting
method.
The gridding tool supports two types of kriging estimation: Point and Block. Point kriging estimates the
values of the points at each of the grid nodes. Block kriging on the other hand estimates the average
value of points which fall within a rectangular block centred on each of the grid nodes. Because Block
kriging estimates the average point value for each block it tends to generate smoother grids. In addition
because block kriging uses an average of the input sample points it is considered an imperfect
interpolator even when an input sample falls exactly on a grid node. The Block Kriging method provides
controls to decimate (or break up) the blocks into a smaller mesh of sub cells, defined by the X and Y
increment values. When a decimation factor is applied in Block Kriging the value assigned to each
block is determined as the average of the sub cells inside the block rather than the average of the entire
block.
In addition to the point and block estimation types the Datamine Discover gridding tool supports two
methods of Kriging: Ordinary and Simple. Ordinary Kriging focuses on the spatial correlation
component between the measured values but ignores drift (drift is a regional trend in the data which
exists is addition to spatial correlation between samples). Simple Kriging is similar to Ordinary Kriging
with the exception that the weights used do not sum to unity and the average of the entire data set is
used in the interpolation of each grid node rather than the local average of points that fall within the
Search Distance of the node. Consequently Simple Kriging can be less precise than Ordinary Kriging
but generally produces smoother grids.


a weighted average of all data point values surrounding the grid cell that lie within a specified search
radius.
The IDW method is optimal when the data has a fairly uniform distribution of input points across the
area to be gridded, and some degree of smoothing is beneficial. With this type of data, a repeat
measurement at a point does not necessarily give the same results as the first measurement. If the
input data points are not evenly distributed then using an oriented search ellipse may produce a more
representative grid.
Selection of the Inverse Distance Weighting method opens both the Search Tab and Inverse Distance
tab.
The weighting value assigned to each point within the search ellipse is determined by the distance from
the data point to the grid node being interpolated. The further away a data point lies from the grid node,
the less the point value will contribute to the final value assigned to that node. The distance weighting
parameters can be adjusted under the Weight Model controls in the Inverse Distance tab.
A search ellipse of fixed size and orientation can be defined in a similar manner to the Kriging method
using the Search Tab; a grid cell value is then calculated from the weighted average of all data points
that lie within the ellipse centred on that grid cell.
Additional information on IDW settings can be found in:
• Weight Model
• Elliptical Weighting
• Density Correction
• Taper Control
WEIGHT MODEL
The weighting of an input data point is (by default) inversely proportional to its distance from the
grid node (a Power weight model). This can be varied by choosing a different Weight Model on
the Inverse Distance tab, and altering the model's parameters where applicable. The following
models are available for selection:
• Linear
Each input point's weight is proportional to its Euclidian distance from the grid node being
interpolated. The linear weight model enables the Nugget and Range parameters to be
adjusted in order to vary the weight assignments. At distances less than the Nugget distance
the weight model will be 1 - i.e. all data will contribute equally. The Range parameter is used
to set the outer distance threshold for which the weight model is applied. Any samples which
exceed the Range and are less than the Search Distance (see Search Tab) will be assigned
an equal weight.
• Exponential
Each input point's weight is proportional to its distance from the grid node being interpolated
raised to the specified power. Increasing the power value will cause smaller weights to be
assigned to closer points and more distant points to be assigned equal but large weights.
Increasing power values will therefore cause each interpolated grid node to more closely
approximate the sample values closest to it. As with the Linear model the Nugget and Range
properties can be modified to constrain that distance over which the exponential weight
model is most effective.

• Power
The default option, each input point's weight is proportional to the inverse of its distance to the
specified Power from the grid node. Increasing the weighting power reduces the influence
distant points have on the calculated value of each grid node. Large power values cause grid
cell values to approximate the value of the nearest data point, while smaller power values will
result in data values being more evenly distributed among neighbouring grid nodes. The
weighting value defaults to 2 (i.e. the weight of any data point is inversely proportional to the
square of its distance from the grid cell) which is appropriate for most situations. If required,
the weighting value can be altered to any positive value.
• Gaussian
The weight assigned to each input value is determined according to a 2D Gaussian function
centred on the grid node. The shape and standard deviation of the Gaussian function is
proportional to the Range with larger values producing a flatter function and a smoother grid.
ELLIPTICAL WEIGHTING
The Elliptical weighting option is only available when the Elliptical Search option is enabled (in the
Search Tab). It adjusts the distance weighting function for data points within the search ellipse
depending on their relative position with respect to the elliptical shell. Points located on the same
elliptical shell will be assigned equivalent weighting even though their distance from the ellipse
centroid may be different.
DENSITY CORRECTION
The Density corrections control dynamically adjusts the search algorithm to optimize grid cell
interpolation in areas of data clustering. Activating density corrections can help to enhance detail
in datasets where sample points are unevenly spaced and may in some cases produce a
smoother or more representative grid. The density correction modifies the weights for each
contributing point based on the sample density at that point.
Note If you have enabled the Use nearest neighbours option (in the Search Tab) in conjunction
with four search sectors then you will have effectively removed clustering from the input
data point distribution. The Density corrections option is not available when the Use
nearest neighbours option is enabled.
The Exact hit distance is a tolerance distance for assigning actual input data values to coincident
grid nodes. As the inverse distance gridding technique is attempting to interpolate a continuous
surface through the data, a certain number of grid nodes coincide with the input data points.
Where grid nodes and data points coincide, the distance between them is zero, so by default the
data value is assigned a weighting of 1.0 and all other data points in the search radius are given a
weight value of zero. This means that grid nodes that are coincident with input data points are
assigned the value of the coincident data point rather than an interpolated (averaged) value
derived from the data points surrounding it.
This effect can produce significant spotting in the output grid, particularly if the data value of the
coincident point/grid cell deviates significantly from the points surrounding it. By adjusting the
exact hit distance it is possible to increase the tolerance distance in which input data values are
assigned to grid nodes.
Assigning this value to a high number can produce unacceptable spotting or concentric banding
in the output grid, while reducing the value below 1 has little or no effect.

TAPER CONTROL
The Taper controls allow you to apply a taper function to the interpolated value of each grid node
based on its distance to the nearest valid sample point. The taper function is applied using a
linear weighting model thereby adjusting the expected grid node values towards the background
value. Between a distance of zero and the FROM distance the taper function is assigned a
constant value of 1 (i.e. no modification is made to the grid node). Between the FROM and TO
distance the taper function is applied as a linear weighting between the grid node value and the
background value. Beyond the TO distance grid nodes are assigned the background value.
SPATIAL NEIGHBOUR
This method is similar to the Inverse Distance Weighting method described above but does not use the
search radius to interpolate data values from surrounding cells. For each grid cell, neighbouring input
points are located based on a spatial neighbours selection criterion. The value of the computed grid
cell is the average of the neighbours, weighted such that the closer the neighbouring point, the greater
the influence than points further away.
Search criteria are only radial in this method but the distance and applied weighting can be specified
in the Spatial Neighbour tab displayed when this gridding method is selected.
Spatial Neighbour weighting and search specification tab
TRIANGULATION
The Triangulation method produces a regular gridded surface through a set of data points by using an
optimized Delaunay triangulation algorithm. The triangular mesh is created by drawing lines between
adjacent input data points and forming an irregular network such that no triangle edges are intersected
by other triangles. A regular grid is then computed from the triangular irregular network and grid cell
values computed using a natural neighbour interpolation process. As the original data are used to
define the triangles, this method is very useful for situations where the data must be honoured very
closely (eg elevation data in a digital terrain model).
The triangulation method is best applied to data that is evenly distributed over the gridded area. If there
are large areas of sparse or missing data distinct triangular facets may appear in the output grid. As
triangulation uses all the input data to construct the triangular mesh, the only parameter that needs to
be adjusted is the grid cell size. Grid cell size can be adjusted to an appropriate value for the dataset.

DENSITY GRID
node. The density at each grid node is determined independently using an estimator function. Two
estimators are available:
• Radial Density Estimator
• Kernel Density Estimator (KDE)
The Radial Density Estimator method returns a true measure of the point density at each grid node
(measured as the number of samples per square area unit - usually metres). It is a simple method that
counts the number of input samples within a specified radius of the grid node position and then
normalizes that count by the area of the search.
The Kernel Density Estimator method is a non-parametric density estimator. It uses a similar approach
but it weights the input samples by a kernel function that is normally a function of the normalized
distance of the sample to the grid node. To achieve a good result with the KDE function it is more
important to choose an appropriate search radius - sometimes referred to as the bandwidth - than to
choose an appropriate kernel function. If the bandwidth is too small the density will be under-smoothed
whereas if the bandwidth is too large the density will be over-smoothed and lacking in resolution.
Given a kernel function K and a search radius (or bandwidth) h, the estimated density at any point x is
given by -
1 n x − x(i )
fˆ ( x) =  K ( )
n i =1 h
where n is the number of samples. The following kernel functions are supported:

Kernel K(u)
Uniform 1 Uniform
I ( u ≤ 1)
2
Triangle
(1 − u ) I ( u ≤ 1) Triangle
Epanechnikov 3
(1 − u 2 ) I ( u ≤ 1)
4
Quartic 15 Quartic
(1 − u 2 ) 2 I ( u ≤ 1)
16
Triweight 35 Quartic
(1 − u 2 ) 3 I ( u ≤ 1)
32
Gaussian 1 1
exp(− u 2 )
2π 2
Cosinus π π
cos( ) I ( u ≤ 1)
4 2
Source: http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Kernel_%28statistics%29
If you have taken multiple samples at each input data location and this information is recorded in the
input data then you can use this information to bias the density estimation. To enable this option, check
the Interpret selected data channel as a count frequency box and on the Gridding Tool Input Tab
ensure the frequency or count field is selected as the input data field.

DISTANCE GRID
The Distance gridding method produces a grid which records the minimum distance to the input data
features at every grid node. A distance envelope can be specified to clip the grid at a maximum
distance from the nearest feature. Any grid node that is outside this envelope will be assigned a null
value.
When the input data is loaded it is classified as either point data or polyline data depending on the
source of the data and the type of object that was loaded. By default the method will consider all input
data as point locations. Optionally, you can add to this the input polyline data. In this case the method
will also check the perpendicular distance to the nearest polyline in addition to looking at all point data.
Distance Tab
In the examples below the first grid has been computed considering all the input data as point locations.
The second grid has added to this the polyline information. In both cases a distance envelope has been
applied.
Left:Distance Grid points only

Right: Distance Grid points and polylines
SEARCH TAB
The Kriging and Inverse Distance Weighting (IDW) methods, when selected, both display the Search
tab, along with their individual control tabs. These methods, if not optimized, can quickly become
unworkable as the number of input data points increases beyond a few thousand. To improve the
performance of these algorithms and to ensure these methods are suitable for large datasets, a search
radius can be used to restrict the number of input points that contribute to each interpolation. This
introduces a number of problems. For example the algorithm may not find a sufficient number of points
within the search radius to make a reasonable estimation or, the spatial distribution of the points within
the search radius may not be uniform so that the estimation becomes directionally biased.

The Search tab using the IDW gridding method
The Search tab provides controls to resolve these issues by determining the shape, size and
orientation of the search ellipse used to locate data points during interpolation. Specifying an
appropriate size and orientation for the search ellipse is important. Setting it smaller than the average
data spacing may result in a large number of the interpolated grid cells being assigned a null value and
therefore displayed as white in the output grid. Conversely, if the search ellipse is set to be too large
then significant edge effects or grid artefacts may result around the edge of the grid.
The Search tab is subdivided into a number of sections:
• Searching
• Anisotropy
• Sample Selection
• Gridding Rule
SEARCHING
By default Datamine Discover uses a circular search with a radius specified via the Search Distance
option. If the node cannot be estimated from the points located within the search radius then the search
radius can be incrementally increased and the searching repeated using Search Expansions. The
increased radius is likely to encompass more input points and consequently the node may be able to
be interpolated. At each stage the actual search radius used will be equal to the stage number
multiplied by the initial search radius. The number of allowable increments is limited because after a
while this process becomes self defeating and it is wiser to specify a larger initial search radius.
To optimize performance, choose an initial search radius that is likely to encompass the minimum
number of required input points most of the time. It can sometimes be very difficult to make this
decision but the tool will always make a suggestion to get started with.
If the spatial distribution of the data points is not uniform (or not uniformly random) then the use of
search expansions may not be enough to populate the grid successfully. For example, a dataset may
have regional data located on two kilometre centres and local data in parts of the study area on 100
metre centres. To produce a suitable grid of the whole region that characterizes the detail in the high
resolution areas would require small search radius in these areas and a large search radius elsewhere.
The solution is to use additional refinement Grid Passes which grid the data multiple times - once for
each pass - at increasingly higher resolution. The gridded results from each pass are then used as
additional input data for the next pass. The grid cell size and search parameters are scaled up by a
factor of two for each additional grid pass - for example if you use three additional passes then the first
pass scales up these parameters by a factor of eight, the second by a factor of 4, the third by a factor
of two. The final pass grids the data at the requested resolution with the specified searching
parameters.

ANISOTROPY
By default the search radius is isotropic creating a circular search area. However directional bias can
be applied by enabling an Elliptical Search.
The dimensions of the search ellipse can be controlled by specifying the length of the major and minor
axes. The major axis is defined by the Search Distance value in the Searching section (above), whilst
the minor axis is governed by the Minor search distance option. The Major axis Orientation control
determines the rotation angle of the major axis.
If elliptical searching is used with the Inverse Distance Weighting method, it also allows the use of the
Elliptical weighting option under the Inverse Distance tab. This option modifies the data point weighting
so that they are isotropic with respect to angle within the search ellipse - in other words it removes the
directional bias from the weighting.
SAMPLE SELECTION
Input points close to the grid node may not be uniformly distributed - eg they may all be on one side of
it. This will introduce a directional bias into the estimation. This can be resolved by using search
sectors.
Datamine Discover provides options for specifying 1, 2 or 4 search sectors. By adjusting the Number
of search sectors and Minimum points required (in each sector), the appearance and smoothness of
the output grid can be varied. If any of the sectors contain fewer than the minimum number of specified
points, the interpolated grid cell value for that node is assigned a null value.
If four sectors are used then each covers 90 degrees of arc (centred about NE, NW, SE, and SW). If
two sectors are used then each covers 180 degrees of arc (centred about North, South). Using only
one search sector effectively turns the option off.
Using 2 or 4 search sectors can significantly improve the appearance of a grid if the input data has
been collected on widely spaced lines. Using a one sector search ellipse may result in grid node values
being estimated from data points from a single direction. This might generate unrealistic or sharp
slopes between the lines producing a rough or stepped grid. Using a two or four sector search with an
appropriate search distance should generally eliminate or reduce this effect. Experiment with the use
of search sectors and examine the difference these can have on the output grid.
Specifying the Use nearest neighbours option enables you to use only the closest Maximum number
of samples found within each search sector in each estimation. Contributions from other points within
the search radius are ignored.
The Use nearest neighbours option controls the Maximum number of samples that are used in each
sector when interpolating each grid node value. When this option is selected Datamine Discover uses
the closest points (up to the maximum specified in each sector) to interpolate each grid cell. Any excess
data points within the search ellipse are ignored in the calculation.
GRIDDING RULE
Enabling the Customize gridding rule option allows a node to be gridded only if a specified minimum
number of sample points are located in at least a specified minimum number of sectors. If a node fails
to meet this rule, it will be assigned a null value.

GEOMETRY TAB
This tab controls the main parameters for determining the geometry of the output grid. The Cell
Parameters control determines the size of each grid cell in the output image and is measured in the
same data units as the input tab file. For most geographic data these units are in metres; however
Datamine Discover supports all of the MapInfo Pro units of measurement. During the loading process,
Datamine Discover automatically computes an optimized grid cell size based on the distribution and
density of the input data. This cell size can be modified and Datamine Discover only uses square grid
cell dimensions.
When a large dataset is loaded the Auto Preview box is disabled and the Compute Default Parameters
button is active. Use this button to calculate an optimal grid cell size.
The extents of the Data coverage to be gridded can be seen in the Min and Max X Y boxes (excluding
any data excluded by the spatial data conditioning).
The Grid bounds parameters control the boundary extents of the output grid and can be used to reduce
the size of the output grid if required.
The Grid Geometry tab indicating the cell size, extent and number of rows and columns
Note When creating a surface, the grid cell size selected is important. As a general rule of thumb
the grid cell size should not be made smaller than approximately one fifth of the average data
spacing. Reducing the grid cell size beyond this limit may cause the grids appearance to
become smoother but can also introduce unwanted irregularities in the output image. Discover
sets a default cell size which is approximately half the average input data spacing.
OUTPUT TAB
The Output tab provides a number of controls for saving the gridded image. The left side of the dialog
provides a summary report for the grid process and lists the primary gridding parameters chosen. This
information may be copied to the windows clipboard by selecting the information with the mouse and
using the Windows Copy and Paste commands. This may be useful for reporting or archive purposes.

The Grid Output showing summary information and clipping options
Below the summary box is a pull-down list containing the Datamine Discover supported grid formats.
Datamine Discover currently creates grids in ER Mapper (.ERS), Surfer Binary (.GRD) uncompressed
grid, Vertical Mapper (.GRD), Geosoft (.GRD), MapInfo Pro MIG (.MIG), BIL (.BIL) and Arc ASCII
(.ASC) formats. To save a grid, select the appropriate format from the list. Click the Save button. The
output grid file is assigned a default name and will be saved in the same directory as the input data. It
is possible to alter the file name and directory path by clicking on the small button at the right end of
the path name box. The Output tab is accessible at any stage during the gridding process so it is not
necessary to wait for the preview window to complete drawing before saving the final grid.
The Clip control provides a number of options for clipping the extents of the interpolated grid, so that it
more closely approximates the distribution of the input data. Enabling this option can improve the
appearance of the output grid for irregular input data where the gridding method (usually Triangulation
or Minimum Curvature) has interpolated the grid over large gaps within the data. Options available
include:
• Creating a Buffer around the input data at a user-specified distance. The gridded data outside the
buffer is then removed.
• The Near value of the Near/Far option is the distance the grid is to be clipped back to from the
convex hull of the data points. The Far distance is the distance between the points to interpolate
between. Areas in the grid which lie between data points greater than the Far distance value grid
will be displayed as null or white.
• The Convex Hull option clips the output grid to the smallest convex region/polygon enclosing the
dataset. This convex region is found conceptually by stretching a rubber band around the points
so that all of the points lie within the band. The convex region can be expanded by a specified
Buffer value.
• The Concave Hull option starts with a Convex Hull region, and then removes/erodes triangles on
its edge that have an outward facing angle greater than a defined tolerance (specified under the
Options button). This new concave region can then be expanded by a specified Buffer value.
If multiple fields have been selected for gridding then three output options are available:
• Separate grids
Each selected field is created as a separate grid which is named using the original source table
with the field name extension.
• Multi-banded grid
Multiple fields are gridded and saved to a single ER Mapper Multi-banded grid.

• Create RGB Image

If three fields are selected for gridding they can be saved as an RGB image. Each field is saved
as a red, green or blue channel in the resulting image. The RGB grid is first loaded into the
SURFACES>Utilities>RGB Grid dialog before the final RGB GeoTIFF image is created.
STATISTICS EXPLORER
The Statistics Explorer is a series of dialogs that enables you to examine any dataset both
statistically and spatially.
The Statistics Explorer is generally accessed via the statistics button in the various Field Data
Conditioning dialogs (see Data Conditioning) and can also be accessed from the Input and Output tabs
of the Interactive Gridding tool.
The components of the Statistics Explorer window
The Statistics Explorer window is divided into two main sections; the upper Spreadsheet window and
the lower Property Page window. The contents of these depend on the view selected; the Statistics
Explorer has four views, selectable from drop list at the top left of the window. These present graphical
and statistical information using different Property Pages, which can be controlled using the Property
Page tabs in the middle of the window.
These views are:
• Univariate
Examines a single field in the input data and presents basic summary statistics and histogram
analysis.

• Bivariate
Examines any two fields in the input data and presents scattergram plots and basic summary
statistics.
• Spatial
Plots the data using its spatial X, Y and Z coordinates and presents basic summary statistics.
• Variogram
Computes a variogram grid and displays directional semi-variogram data. This allows the creation
of sample variograms, and creation and editing of model variograms.
The Statistics Explorer allows data to be selected in the spreadsheet or any of the univariate, bivariate
or spatial views using the Selection Tools at the base of the window. The explorer can then 'collapse'
the dataset to the current selection, and display the statistics for this new data subset.
SPREADSHEET
The Spreadsheet comprises the top half of the Statistics Explorer dialog, and displays the records for
the currently viewed selection.
It uses the following colour codes to highlight records:
• The currently selected data points are highlighted red.
• The currently selected data point is highlighted purple.
• Invalid data is highlighted orange (e.g. coincident data).
• The current key and ancillary fields are highlighted purple.
The spreadsheet shortcut menu can be accessed by right clicking on any column header. This
provides a number of column resizing options (including the various 'Fit to' options). Alternatively,
columns and rows can be resized by clicking on their boundaries and dragging.
The Spreadsheet shortcut menu
The spreadsheet can also be sorted by any column using the Sort menu options. The Statistics option
returns a basic statistical summary of any field.

The statistics summary for an arsenic field

Data points can be selected from the spreadsheet (if valid for the current view) by clicking on the row
header; use the CTRL and SHIFT keys to unselect stations and make multiple selections. A range of
cells can be also be selected by clicking and dragging the mouse. These selection operations are
treated exactly the same way as graphical selections and the undo/redo operations can be applied.
When a single data point is selected in any graph (using the Pointer tool, see Selection Tools)
the spreadsheet will scroll to the appropriate record.
The key field (whilst in univariate mode) or the ancillary field (whilst in bivariate mode) can be changed
by double clicking on the field header in the spreadsheet.
ZOOM, SELECTION AND DISPLAY CONTROLS

Each of the view types incorporates a number of property pages, discussed further under the relevant
view sections. Depending on the view type, some or all of the following controls may be available within
a property page window:
ZOOM CONTROLS
The Zoom controls toolbar
• Use the three buttons in the middle to Zoom In, Zoom Out and Pan.
• The Restrict Zoom button on the left restricts zooming and panning to the horizontal dimension
only.
• The Fit to Data button on the right cancels any zoom and returns to the default view showing all
data.
SELECTION TOOLS
The Selection controls toolbar
The Selection tools provide a powerful data selection capability. The Pointer button displays a
cursor which can dragged through the graph. It may be displayed as either a vertical bar or a
cross hair depending on graph type. In all cases, the pointer 'snaps' to the closest station and this
station is then highlighted purple in the spreadsheet.

Data can also be selected using Rectangle or Polygon selection, although the polygon selection
is not available in all graphs. Selected stations are coloured red unless colour modulation is
enabled in which case they are coloured black. Each selection operation can either select the
enclosed stations (include option) or unselect the enclosed stations (exclude); this is toggled
using the Include/Exclude button.
Each selection operation is placed onto a stack which allows you to Undo and Redo
operations. Buttons are also provides to Unselect All and Select All. The selection can
also be Inverted.
DISPLAY MODULATION
The graph can be also be Colour and/or Size Modulated by any field in the dataset. Select the required
fields from the drop lists at the base of the graph. To cancel colour or size modulation, select <None>.
A simple pseudocolour look-up table is used and a linear colour stretch is employed.
SUBSETTING
Making a selection within a graph (which supports selections) or the spreadsheet view will activate the
Collapse button at the top of the Statistics Explorer window.
This button extracts the selected data points from the dataset to create a new subset. The spreadsheet
and graph views will be redrawn to focus on this subset. Only the subset will be considered in any
statistical computations or graphs. Further selections can be made to examine the data in greater
detail. The Expand button allows a previous level/subset to be redisplayed. If this button is disabled
then the view has returned to the original dataset.
UNIVARIATE
The univariate view examines a single field in the input data and presents basic summary statistics and
histogram analysis. It incorporates three property pages:
• A Scattergram graph of the data point index verses key field.
• Statistical information for the key field.
• A Histogram of the key field. When this is displayed, the spreadsheet will show a detailed
breakdown of the histogram data.
The univariate view requires a key field to be defined. This field is selected from the second drop list
at the top of the dialog. The key field can be changed at any time to examine any field in the dataset.
GRAPH TAB
The Graph page plots the key field versus station index. Graph controls are detailed in Zoom,
Selection and Display Controls above.
The properties of the graph can be obtained by double clicking on an appropriate area of the
graph. For example, click in the bottom and left margins to obtain properties of the X and Y axes.
This property page enables you to change the axis extents and change the axis mapping
between linear and logarithmic. When using logarithmic axes, you must elect to leave some data
space surrounding zero as linear.
Note These axes property pages are not available for univariate or spatial graphs.

Specifying an axis range
Statistics of the chosen field
STATISTICS TAB
The Statistics page presents basic summary statistics for the key field, as detailed below:
Sample Count The total number of samples in the dataset.
Valid Sample Count The total number of valid (non-null/selected) samples in the dataset.
Invalid Sample Count The total number of invalid (null/unselected) samples in the dataset.
Minimum The minimum value of all valid samples.
Maximum The maximum value of all valid samples
Mean The mean (average) value of all valid samples.
Variance The variance of all valid samples.
Standard Deviation The standard deviation of all valid samples.
S/N Ratio The signal to noise ratio of all valid samples.
Coefficient of skewness The skewness of all valid samples.
Skew direction The skew direction (positive/negative) of all valid samples.

Median The value of the centre value in the sorted dataset.

Mode The most frequently occurring valid value in the dataset.
Lower quartile The value of the dataset at the 25 percent quartile.
Upper quartile The value of the dataset at the 75 percent quartile.
Interquartile range The range of the data between the lower and upper quartiles.
HISTOGRAM TAB
Histogram distribution of the selected field
The Histogram page presents an 'equal width' histogram of the key field. An equal width
histogram is one built by dividing the valid data range into a large number of equal width bins and
then computing the frequency of occurrence of key field values in each bin.
To be effective a large number of bins are used and these are grouped together depending on the
scale at which the histogram is viewed. When multiple bins are being grouped together each
consolidated bin is drawn with a back border. When zoomed in sufficiently to see individual bins,
no black border is drawn. Also, the thickness of the bin is no longer equal to the assigned min/
max values of the bin; it now relates to the actual min/max values of the data assigned to the bin.
The cumulative histogram is also displayed as a heavy green line. This indicates the percentage
of data that is below the current value at any point. The upper and lower quartiles are displayed
against the X and Y axes as dotted lines.
The spreadsheet displays the bin information including the bin data range, number of samples in
each bin and the range of the actual data assigned to the bin. It also displays the cumulative
histogram values.
The Selection Tools work normally in this graph. The selections are indicated as a percentage of
stations selected in each bin. This is displayed as a red base. Note that no selections can be
made from the spreadsheet in this mode.

BIVARIATE
Display of Bivariate data distribution with Key and Ancillary selection fields indicated
The Bivariate view requires the user to define two input fields - the key (horizontal) field and the
ancillary (vertical) field. Make these selections from the drop lists at the top of the explorer (indicated
in screenshot above).
Two property pages are presented. The Graph page shows a scattergram of the ancillary field plotted
against the key field. The Statistics page presents summary statistics for the bivariate distribution as
well as a spreadsheet of the conditional expectation. You can copy and paste from this spreadsheet
into Microsoft Excel.
The Graph page displays a linear regression as a blue line. A conditional expectation curve is also
displayed as a green line. It also displays a quantile vs. quantile (q-q) curve as a purple line from 5%
to 95% at steps of 5%.
For both pages, the Spreadsheet displays the complete dataset. A full range of selection tools are
available both graphically and in the spreadsheet.
The following statistical definitions are used:
Sample Count The minimum number of samples in both fields.
Valid Sample Count The total number of valid (non-null/selected) samples in one or both fields.
Invalid Sample Count The total number of invalid (null/unselected) samples in one or both fields.
Valid data range The range of valid common samples in the key and ancillary fields (X,Y).

Minimum The minimum value of all valid samples.

Maximum The maximum value of all valid samples.
Mean The mean (average) value of all valid samples.
Covariance Sum of squares of product of the difference between the field mean and each sample.
Correlation coefficient Covariance normalized by the product of the fields standard deviations.
Inertia Half the sum of squares of difference between the two fields.
Rank coefficient Spearman rank coefficient.
Regression Linear regression fit to all valid samples.
Intercept Value of the ancillary field at the origin.
Slope Slope of the ancillary field versus the key field.
Conditional Expected value of V at any U.
Expectation
Bivariate statistical data ranges and distribution
SPATIAL
The Spatial view does not require the user to define any fields (unless the View Extraction option on
the Statistics page is used). The data will be automatically plotted using its spatial coordinates in an
isotropic view. If the data has less than two spatial dimensions no spatial view will be available.
A Graph page showing the spatial plot is presented. All Zoom, Selection and Display Controls are
available. Data points can be colour or size modulated.

Displaying the Spatial distribution of the data
The Spatial Statistics pages
The Statistics page displays basic summary statistics for the spatial fields. It also has a Regular spatial
extraction export option. This creates a new dataset using multiple regular sized cells covering the
entire spatial extents of the existing dataset. The size of these cells are defined using the X and Y
Extent windows. The Region Overlap control allows cells to overlap adjacent cells by up to 50%.
Regular spatial extraction requires the prior specification of a Key field in order to calculate summary
statistics for each new output cell. The output dataset can be viewed using the View extraction button,
which opens it in a new instance of the Statistics Explorer. The Save Extraction button allows this
output dataset to be saved as a multi-banded ERMapper grid file.

VARIOGRAM
The Variogram view requires the user to define a key field which will be used in tandem with the spatial
coordinates to compute a sample variogram. If the data has less than two spatial dimensions no
variogram view will be available.
A variogram shows the degree of correlation between data in a spatial dataset in different directions
and at different distances.
It can take a long time to compute a variogram and in most cases it will not be possible to compute the
complete variogram for the entire data set unless it is relatively small (< 10,000 samples). Variogram
computations are restricted by:
• Capping the maximum range (distance between points) that will be considered.
• Capping the number of input samples that will be considered.
Display of the calculated variogram
A default spatial variogram is computed using parameters that should ensure that the computation time
is of the order of a few seconds. Thereafter the range and maximum sample number can be modified
and the variogram can be recomputed by hitting the Recompute Variogram button. Note that if the
maximum number of samples is set to minus one, then all samples will be computed. It is not advised
to include all samples in the data set if it exceeds 10,000 samples as the computation time required to
build the variogram could be extremely long. If the number of samples is restricted the algorithm will
look at a sub-set of samples that are evenly distributed spatially within the dataset. In many cases it is
desirable to increase the range and increase the maximum number of samples to improve the
statistical reliability of the variogram.

This procedure generates a radial variogram grid (lower left). The directional variogram can then be
quickly extracted from this grid. The directional variogram is plotted on the right and the source data is
shown in the spreadsheet. Only the zoom tools are available in this graph (no data selection is
possible).
The plot on the left shows the variogram grid. The red sectors represent the area of the grid that was
used to extract the directional variogram. This area is controlled via Direction (0 to 360 degree
clockwise from North) and Width (degrees of arc) controls. If the width is 180 degrees then you have
obtained the omni-directional variogram and direction is irrelevant. Otherwise, you will obtain a
direction dependent variogram. You can change the direction of the variogram from the Direction spin
buttons or simply click and drag you mouse across the variogram grid plot. The width can only be
changed via the Width spin control.
The variogram records several parameters including the moment of inertia (semi- variogram),
covariance and pair count. Both the variogram grid plot and the directional variogram plot display the
parameter selected in the Display drop list.
MODEL VARIOGRAMS
If the Statistics Explorer has been opened via the Variogram button within the Kriging wizard of
the Gridding Tool, a Model Variogram also can be created, edited and displayed. In this case an
option is added to the Sample page to show the model variogram curve in addition to the sample
variogram curve.
A Model property page is also available to manipulate the model variogram. The model variogram
will be automatically initialized to a reasonable model fitting the data. You can press the Initialize
Model button at any time to reset the model to this default.
The model is plotted to a range controlled via the range edit parameter. By default this is equal to
the sample variogram range.
The model variogram is displayed as a grid and also as a directional extraction - just like the
sample variogram. The sample variogram curve can be plotted for comparison. As before, the
extraction direction can be controlled via the edit buttons or by dragging the cursor across the
variogram grid display.
In the upper right the model nests are displayed. Each nest corresponds to semivariogram model.
Individual nests can be edited, added, cloned and deleted via the buttons on the right.
Alternatively, double clicking on a nest in the list allows editing.
Displaying the sample and model variograms

Editing or adding a nest presents the following dialog; if adding a new nest the dialog is presented
as a wizard.
Select the Model Type from the range available
The Model Type page allows you to change or select an appropriate model for the nest. A
description of the model is presented. The coordinates displayed for the model are not
representative of the actual model coordinates.
Controlling the parameters of the variogram
The Parameters page allows the editing of the model parameters. At the top right is a drop-list of
model types.

The graph presents the sample variogram, the model variogram excluding the current nest you
are editing or adding, the current nest and the final model variogram including the current nest.
The model parameters are presented below the graph and can be directly edited. Also, most
model parameters can be edited graphically by dragging the blue tags that are presented on the
graph axes. For example, with the spherical model the left vertical axes allows the editing of the
sill and the bottom horizontal axis allows range to be edited.
The sample variogram grid is displayed in the bottom left. Drag the cursor in this graph to edit the
direction of the model variogram. This will also change the direction for the sample variogram
extraction. Note that the width of the extraction is equal to the width of the extraction on the main
'Sample' page and cannot be modified here.
Editing the variogram nest
The Anisotropy tab controls the range of the model along two axes - the major and minor axes.
The direction of the major axis is shown on the nest grid preview on the left. The final model
preview is shown on the right.
The major axis range will be equal to the range established on the 'Parameters' page. The minor
axis range can be used to introduce anisotropy to the model. If the minor axis range is equal to
the major axis range then the model is isotropic. If it is larger than the major axis range then the
model will have a smaller contribution in the minor axis direction.
The principal parameters of each nest can be altered graphically via the 'model' page. Select the
nest from the model list and manipulate the principal parameters via the blue edit tags in the
variogram plot.

MULTI-FILE GRIDDING
SURFACES>Interpolation>Multi-File Gridding
The Multi-File Gridding tool is a powerful grid interpolator which can construct gridded surfaces
from extremely large datasets. Interpolated grids can be created from a single input file or from
multiple input files of point data or gridded data in any of the following formats:
• ASCII text (.txt, .asc, csv, xyz), including zip compressed ASCII
• ASPRS .LAS
• LizardTech MrSID compressed Lidar (MG4)
• Gridded formats (Arc ASCII, Arc Flt, ER Mapper, BIL, MapInfo Pro, Geosoft, MinEx, Surfer,
Vertical Mapper)
• Geosoft database .GDB
The Multi-File Gridding tool is best suited to gridding very large, closely spaced point datasets, such
as those commonly acquired by airborne Light Detection and Ranging (LIDAR) data surveys. The tool
can also be used to assemble a large number of adjoining grid tiles into a single large contiguous grid.
An example of this use case is assembling multiple Shuttle Radar Topography Mission Arc ASCII grid
files into a single continuous grid. This method of interpolation works best with relatively even spaced
points that cover semi- rectangular survey areas containing minimal internal holes or areas of missing
data.
For moderate-sized point datasets (e.g. < 2 million points) or situations where some experimentation
with interpolation methods is required the Interactive gridding tool is a more flexible and suitable
choice.
• When to Use Multi-File Gridding
• Using the Multi-File Gridding Tool
• Input Data Files
• Gridding Methods
• Interpolation Settings
• Output Grid
WHEN TO USE MULTI-FILE GRIDDING

As a rule of thumb if the number of points in the input dataset exceeds 3 million points or the number
of cells in the output grid is greater than 6,000 columns x 6,000 rows (360,000,000 cells) or there are
multiple input files the Multi-File Gridding tool is the appropriate tool to use. For all datasets which fall
below this size threshold the interactive gridding tool is the most flexible and best tool to use. For
practical purposes the maximum size of the combined input datasets that the Multi-File Gridding tool
can process is 2 billion points and the maximum size of the output grid(s) is 1 terabyte.

USING THE MULTI-FILE GRIDDING TOOL

• Running the Gridding Tool
• Re-running the Gridding
RUNNING THE GRIDDING TOOL
For more information about the settings available from dialog boxes, see Interpolation Settings.
1. Navigate to SURFACES>Interpolate>Multi-File Gridding.
The Multi-File Gridding dialog box is displayed.
2. Under Input, to select input files that are stored in a single directory:
• Press the Browse for files button on the top right of the dialog. On the open file dialog
adjust the file type filter at the bottom to the appropriate type (.TAB, . ASCII, .LAS, .SID, .ZIP
or one of the supported grid formats) and select the files to grid.
Or for input files that are stored in a multiple directories:
• Press the Browse for folder button, second button down on the top right of the dialog.
On the Select file format dialog which appears choose the file type filter which is
appropriate for the type of input data, press OK and select the top level directory from
which to search for files to grid.
3. Depending on the format of the files chosen you may be prompted to assign the column field
order for the input dataset. To do this press the Assign Column order button. On the Select data
fields dialog choose the field for the X coordinate and Y coordinate. If the input dataset(s) are
LIDAR LAS files these fields will be automatically assigned. From the field list select the data
column(s) you wish to grid. If the chosen input files are zip compressed files and the zip file
contain more than one file (e.g. an ASCII data file and a metadata or .PRJ file) you will need to
specify a file name mask to filter out the correct file to grid. Under Input data format enter a file
name mask to uniquely identify the name of the file in the .zip archive that you wish to grid. The
mask can contain characters that are part of the file name and/or the extension. For example *.txt
or myfile.* or *.asc are all valid masks. The mask will be applied automatically and when a valid
file is found you will see a preview of the content in the File preview region.
4. Assign the appropriate projection for the input data files by pressing the Choose Projection button
in the bottom right of the dialog.
Note If you are unfamiliar with the distribution of statistics of your input files you can examine
the spatial statistics of any of the selected input data files using the Statistics Explorer. To
launch the Statistics Explorer select an input file and then press the Statistics Explorer
button.
5. If desired, modify the name that has been assigned in the Group alias property for the group in
the input manager grid control by double-clicking in the cell and typing in a new name.
6. To change the properties of a group of input files, first select the group you wish to modify in
the input manager and then press the File format button on the right of the dialog. On the
format dialog you can add or remove files from a group as well as change the input data
format and projection.

7. If you are familiar with the spatial distribution and coverage of the input data enable the Define
cell size control and change the cell size from <Auto> to an appropriate value that is suitable for
the input data and for your analytical needs. Should you need assistance in choosing an
appropriate cell size you can press the Compute cell size button and the software will attempt to
analyse a small subset of the data and estimate an appropriate value. However it is generally
recommended that if you are not sure what cell size to assign for the output grid that you leave
the Define cell size disabled so the software can compute an appropriate value once it has
completed an analysis of the data distribution.
8. Optional steps:
• Press the Data conditioning button to configure any null values or data ranges you
may wish to exclude during the gridding process.
• Define the grid geometry by specifying the Origin X and Origin Y coordinate of the lower left
corner of the output grid as well as the grid dimension in rows and columns.
• Press the Advanced settings button and modify the Options as necessary. For a large
gridding job you may need to set the Temporary directory path to an alternative hard drive
which has plenty of free space available to store an entire copy of the input dataset. You may
also wish to adjust the Scan data extents control to perform a quick scan of the input data as
well as constrain the maximum memory that will be used by the software during the gridding
process.. Use the Output grid Data type to change the numeric data type that will be used for
the output grid. Choosing an appropriate data type for the output grid could have a large
impact on the size of the output grid file. See Output Grid for more information
9. Press the Save file button and select an appropriate file path for the final grid file(s). Ensure
that you select a location with plenty of free space to store the output files. It is
recommended that for large datasets the output grid(s) are stored on a separate disk drive
to the input data.
10. Press the Projection button and choose an appropriate projection for the output grid file. It
is recommended that the projection of the output grid file is set to the same projection as
the input file(s). By default the output projection will be set to the first input file(s) projection.
11. (Optional) Disable the Auto open output file(s) if you do not want the output grid file(s) to be
automatically opened into MapInfo Pro on completion of the gridding process.
12. Press the Process button to commence gridding.
RE-RUNNING THE GRIDDING
At the completion of gridding a control file containing a complete set of parameters used by the gridding
engine are saved to a text file in the same location as the output grid. The control file is created with
the same name as the output grid file and has .final.txt appended to the end.
Should you wish to create another grid using a different field from the same input data or
recreate the same grid with slightly modify settings you can reload the saved control file. To do
this first open the Multi-File Gridding tool. Next press the load control file button (the last button
at the top right of input manager). When the control file is successfully loaded you can modify the
settings as necessary and then press the Process button to create a new grid.

INPUT DATA FILES

The main features of input files that can be read are:
• One or more input files are supported.
• A range of commonly used input formats can be read including .TAB, .LAS, .CSV, space or tab
delimited text files (including zip compressed files),, MrSID MG4 LIDAR files and a number of
common grid files.
• Input files can be located in a single directory or hierarchically in multiple directories.
• Input files can be specified in groups. A group of input files share common properties such as
format (i.e. file structure) and projection. If the file format or projection of any of the input files is
different they should be separated into their own group.
INPUT FILE FORMATS
Input files can be provided in any of the following formats:
The TAB reader can read simple MapInfo Pro .TAB files which contain mapped objects. The
coordinate and projection information is extracted from the mapped objects and the X,Y point
coordinates are obtained for every node of simple or multi-part objects. The data field information
which is used for interpolation can be obtained from any corresponding attribute field in the .TAB
file.
• ASPRS .LAS
LAS is an industry standard public format used for the interchange of LIDAR data. The file format
is defined and maintained by the ASPRS organization (www.asprs.org). Discover supports
versions 1.0, 1.1 and 1.2 of the LAS specification and can extract "Z" (elevation) as well as RGB
(red, green, blue) and intensity information.
• MrSID MG4 compressed LiDAR
MrSID MG4 LiDAR files are a new version of the MrSID format that supports compressed LiDAR
point data. The files are created using the LizardTech LiDAR Compressor™ software. For more
information on this format please refer to LizardTech (http://www.lizardtech.com). These files
have an extension of *.MG4 and may be loaded directly into the gridding tool.
• Geosoft database (GDB)
Standard geophysical data format.
ASCII DATA READERS
• ASCII Space, Comma or Tab Delimited (Fast)
This is the faster of the two text readers. It expects data to be stored in columns with a space, tab
or comma separating each value in a row. The text reader can skip multiple header lines at the
start of a file but once it starts reading data it expects the remainder of the file to be clean and void
of inline comments or other formatting changes. For well structured, clean data this is the best
method to use.
• ASCII Generic Text (Slow)
This is a general text reader which handles a wider range of delimiters. It can also detect and skip
header lines as well as empty fields (e.g. consecutive commas with no data between them) and
can adjust to formatting changes within the input file(s). It will also read files with unusual
delimiters such as a pipe (|).

GRID FILE READERS

There are several readers available for loading gridded data files (e.g. .ERS, .GRD, .BIL, .ASC)
as input to the Multi-File Gridding tool. All the common industry grid formats that are supported by
Discover can be loaded as input.
INPUT FILE GROUPS
• Projection information can be assigned to each group of input files. The projection information
specified must correspond to the spatial reference the data is stored in. If no projection is
assigned to the input data it will be assigned the projection of the output grid.
• You may modify the group alias name for each group of input files to help distinguish them in
situations where a lot of groups have been added.
GRIDDING WORKFLOWS
The following gridding methods are available:
• Triangulation
• Minimum Curvature (Full)
• Minimum Curvature (Stamped)
• Data Density
• Data Point Separation (Distance)
• Stamp Only
TRIANGULATION
The Triangulation gridding method consists of eight operational phases:
Phase 1. A quick analyse of your computer is performed to establish the amount of RAM and
free disk space available and all input files are validated.
Phase 2. The first 65,000 data stations are loaded to determine spatial statistics of the data.
Phase 3. Each input data file is scanned to determine the data extents and spatial distribution
statistics. Some data will be skipped during this phase if the Scan data extents
property is set to any value other than complete
Phase 4. Preliminary gridding parameters and temporary data storage requirements are
estimated from the spatial statistics obtained during the initial data scan (phase 3)
Phase 5. Gridding properties and memory requirements are established
Phase 6. The entire input data set is read and spatially sorted into a collection of tiles.
Unwanted or null readings are cleansed and coordinates are reprojected into the
output grid coordinate system if required.
Phase 7. The spatially sorted input data is triangulated and the interpolated values are written
to the output file.
Phase 8. The triangulated grid(s) are finalized and corresponding header information and.TAB
files are written to disk. All temporary files an allocated memory is then released.


The Inverse Distance Weighting gridding method consists of seven operational phases:
Phase 3. Each input data file is scanned to determine the data extents and spatial distribution
statistics. Some data will be skipped during this phase if the Scan data extents
property is set to any value other than complete
Phase 6. The entire input data set is read and unwanted or null readings are cleansed and
coordinates are reprojected into the output grid coordinate system if required. The
points are stamped into a spatially indexed file and an inverse distance weighting
algorithm is applied to interpolate new grid values from the set of input points that lie
within the specified search radius (Inverse Distance Weighting Properties).
Phase 7. The interpolated data file is finalized and written to the output grid file along with the
corresponding header information and.TAB files. All temporary files and allocated
memory is then released
MINIMUM CURVATURE (FULL)

The Minimum Curvature (Full) gridding method consists of thirteen operational phases:
Phase 3. Each input data file is scanned to determine the dataset extents and spatial
distribution statistics. Some data will be skipped during this phase if the Scan data
extents property is set to any value other than complete.
Phase 6. The entire input dataset is spatially sorted into a collection of tiles. Unwanted or null
readings are cleansed and coordinates are reprojected into the output grid coordinate
system if required.
Phase 7. The spatially sorted input data is now stamped into the grid.
Phase 8. A multi-resolution grid pyramid is constructed and filled from bottom to top.
Phase 9. The clip mask is built, based on the clipping parameters defined in the minimum
curvature properties dialog.
Phase 10. The source mask pyramid is focussed in each level to allow more grid cells to be
unconstrained in the gridding procedure.
Phase 11. The pyramid is filled and refined from the top down applying minimum curvature at
each level.
Phase 12. The final phase of minimum curvature interpolation is performed upon the output grid.
Phase 13. The output grid(s) are finalized and written to disk along with their corresponding
header information and.TAB files. All temporary files are removed and allocated
memory is released

MINIMUM CURVATURE (STAMPED)

The Minimum Curvature (Stamped) gridding method consists of twelve operational phases:
estimated from the spatial statistics obtained during the initial data scan (phase 3).
Phase 6. The entire input dataset is now stamped into the grid. Unwanted or null readings are
cleansed and coordinates are reprojected into the output grid coordinate system (if
required).
Phase 7. A multi-resolution grid pyramid is constructed and filled from bottom to top.
Phase 8. The clip mask is built, based on the clipping parameters defined in the minimum
curvature properties dialog.
Phase 9. The source mask pyramid is focussed in each level to allow more grid cells to be
unconstrained in the gridding procedure.
Phase 10. The pyramid is filled and refined from the top down applying minimum curvature at
each level.
Phase 11. The final phase of minimum curvature interpolation is performed through the pyramid.
header information and TAB files. All temporary files are removed and allocated
memory is released.
DATA DENSITY
The Data Density gridding method consists of seven operational phases:
Phase 6. The entire input dataset is now scanned and unwanted or null readings are cleansed
and coordinates are reprojected into the output grid coordinate system (if
required).The points are stamped into the grid file and accumulated densities are
computed within the specified search radius using chosen the kernel weighting
function.
memory is released

DATA POINT SEPARATION (DISTANCE)

The Data Point Separation gridding method consists of seven operational phases:
and coordinates are reprojected into the output grid coordinate system (if required).
The points are accumulated and separation distances are computed within the defined
search radius. The interpolated values are stamped into the output grid file.
memory is released.
STAMP ONLY
The Stamp Only gridding method consists of seven operational phases:
free disk space available. All input files are validated. Note depending on the number,
size and type of input files selected this phase can take some time.
and coordinates are reprojected into the output grid coordinate system (if required).
The points are then stamped directly into the output grid file(s).
memory is released.

INTERPOLATION SETTINGS
• Data Conditioning
• Gridding Properties
• Options
DATA CONDITIONING
Data conditioning is a pre-processing operation which is applied to the input data prior to gridding. It
allows you to define a NULL value as well as ranges of data, with upper and lower caps, in order to
exclude them from the gridding process. The data conditioning process only applies to valid input data.
Should any of the fields in the input data set for a given point (i.e. X, Y or the field values) have a NULL
(or missing) value then the entire point is discarded. For more information, see Data Conditioning.
Note Data conditioning in Large and Multifile gridding is applied with AND logic. This means a null
in one field will cause any other fields being gridded to become null.
GRIDDING PROPERTIES
Because the gridding process is relatively autonomous it is possible to leave the gridding properties
set to their default settings and the software will attempt to automatically compute an appropriate set
of parameters for the output grid by examining the field and spatial statistics of the input file(s). If you
are unfamiliar with the distribution or range of the input data sets then leaving the gridding properties
on their default settings is recommended.
If you are familiar with the input dataset and know in advance what the spatial extents and distribution
of the data is like and you have a good understanding of the field range then you can manually adjust
the gridding properties to best suite the input and output data requirements.
DEFINE CELL SIZE
This property controls the size (or resolution) of each cell in the output grid file. The size is
measured in the spatial units of the output grid coordinate system. The default cell value is "Auto"
which indicates that the software will attempt to compute an appropriate cell size for the output
grid by analysing the spatial statistics of the input data. Providing the source data is regularly
spaced and evenly distributed across the entire survey area the automatic cell size estimation
algorithm will choose a reasonable cell size. However if the data distribution is clustered or
skewed then it is strongly recommended that you set the cell size to an appropriate value
manually.
As a general rule of thumb the output grid cell size should not be set to a value that is less than 1/
5 the average spacing of the input data. A cell size of 1/3 the average data spacing is good
starting point. Another important aspect of the cell size which must be taken into consideration,
particularly on large datasets, is that halving its size will have the effect of double the file storage
requirements of the output grid. For example if you set a cell size of 2 m and the output grid
requires 100 MB of disk space, then reducing the cell size to 1 m will increase the storage space
requirements for the output grid to 400 MB.
COMPUTE CELL SIZE
The compute cell size button will compute a default cell size for the input data. It attempts to do
this by analysing the spatial statistics of a small subset (approximately 65,000 stations) of the first
input file. Depending on the regularity and spatial coherence of this small subset of data the
estimated cell size may or may not be assigned an optimal value.

If you are unfamiliar with the dataset and you are not sure what value to set for the cell size then
it is recommended that you leave the property set to "Auto". When configured this way the
software will attempt to adjust the cell size to an appropriate value after it has examined the
complete spatial statistics of the input data.
DEFINE GRID GEOMETRY
The define grid geometry properties control the spatial extent and size of the output grid file. By
default these values will be automatically computed by the software to fully encompass the input
data once it has scanned all the data files and established the spatial statistics and data
distribution. If you need to constrain the output grid to a larger or smaller area than the extents of
the input dataset then you can override the default settings and specify the extents manually. By
configuring the grid extents to an area which is smaller than the extents of the input dataset you
will effectively clip it to the defined grid geometry. If the output grid geometry is smaller than the
input data then any input data that does not overlap with it will be discarded prior to gridding. The
grid geometry is controlled by the Origin X and Origin Y coordinate values, which specify the
centre coordinate of the lower left grid cell and the height and width are specified by the number
of rows and columns measured in grid cells respectively.
ADVANCED SETTINGS
The advanced settings allow you to control a number of properties relating to the memory and
temporary storage location that is used during gridding, the resolution at which the initial data
scan is done, and output grid data type. Details of each of these properties are described below.
OPTIONS
MAXIMUM MEMORY USE
This control is used to constrain the amount of physical memory (RAM) that the software will
attempt to use during the gridding process. The default control setting is disabled and in this state
the software will attempt to use up to 80% of available physical memory (to a maximum of 2 GB)
during gridding. While it is possible to constrain the amount of RAM that is available to the
software during the gridding process; doing so will reduce the gridding performance significantly if
the software has to repeatedly page tiles of data between disk and memory in order to perform
the gridding operation.
To achieve best performance on large datasets it is advisable that you close all running
applications and free up as much physical memory (RAM) as possible before commencing
gridding. For very large datasets (>50 million points) it is recommended that the software is run on
a machine with between 2 and 4 GB of RAM.
SCAN DATA EXTENTS
Controls the resolution at which the software initially scans the input data files to establish the
preliminary spatial statistics during the first phases of gridding. The default behaviour is to scan all
lines of the input data. It is possible to speed up the initial scan of the input files by adjusting the
scan data extents control to one of the following settings:
• Complete
Scans every line of each input data files
• Fine
Scans approximately 12% (1-in-8) of the lines from each input data file
• Course
Scans approximately 3% (1-in-32) of the lines from each input data file
• Overview
Scans approximately 0.75% (1-in-128) of the lines from each input data file

• Bounds
Acquires the data extents from information stored in the files (e.g. LAS or grid formats such
as .ERS and, GRD) if available or performs an Overview scan if unavailable.
For datasets that have a relatively even spatial distribution of input points setting the scan data
extents control to Overview will provide the best compromise between speed and a
representative statistical sample.
TEMP DIRECTORY
The Temp directory is used to temporarily store the spatially sorted input data tiles which are used
during the gridding process. If all of the input data can fit into system memory then no temporary
files will be created and the entire process will occur in RAM. If the input dataset is very large (>10
million points) then it will be necessary to store a copy of the input data on disk during the gridding
process. By default the temporary directory is set to the Windows system temporary directory;
however it may be necessary to map it to an alternative storage location depending on the size of
the input dataset.
Note You should always ensure that you have at least the same amount of free temporary
storage space as the total size of the input dataset. A good rule of thumb is to set the temp
path to a location that has 2x as much storage space as the size of the input dataset.
GRIDDING METHODS
• Triangulation
• Minimum Curvature (Stamped)
• Minimum Curvature (Full)
• Data Density
TRIANGULATION
The triangulation gridding method performs a Delaunay triangulation with linear interpolation. The
method works by first triangulating the input data into a TIN mesh. It then calculates a value at the
centre of each cell in the output grid using linear interpolation from the triangle that overlaps with
coordinate of the centre of each grid cell. In order for the software work with huge datasets that could
potentially contain billions of triangles on PCs with limited available memory, the input data is scanned,
spatially sorted and divided into tiles. Each of the tiles is then triangulated and the resulting TIN mesh
is either stored in memory or if there is insufficient memory available it is stored on disk in temporary
files. Once the dataset has been triangulated into a TIN mesh the output grid is constructed by
interpolating cell values from the triangles.
Because the triangulation process is relatively autonomous it is possible to leave the gridding
properties set to their default settings and the software will attempt to automatically compute an
appropriate set of parameters for the output grid by examining the field and spatial statistics of the input
file(s). If you are unfamiliar with the distribution or range of the input data sets then leaving the gridding
properties on their default settings is recommended.
If you are familiar with the input dataset and know in advance what the spatial extents and distribution
of the data is like and you have a good understanding of the range of values in the field(s) being gridded
then you can manually adjust the gridding properties to suite the input and output data requirements.
TRIANGULATION PROPERTIES
The triangulation properties can be used to influence the geometry of the data structures, the
number of points and memory that will be used to triangulate each tile of input points.

MAXIMUM TRIANGLE SIDE LENGTH

This parameter applies to the triangulation phase of gridding and can be used to minimize or
eliminate long thin triangles that may be created across large holes or gaps in the data or
between widely separated points that lie around the perimeter of the dataset. By default triangles
that are created with a length that is greater than half the diagonal length of a tile will be
discarded. The size of the tiles used during triangulation are determined automatically by the
software after it analyses the spatial statistics of the input points, however you can modify the size
of the tiles by applying a Triangle patch multiplier.
DISTANCE SPECIFIED IN DATA UNITS
This parameter is used to control the units of distance that the Maximum triangle side length
property is measured in. By default this control is disabled and the maximum distance unit is
expressed as a ratio of the tile (or patch) size. If you wish to constrain the Maximum triangle side
length to a fixed value that is measured in absolute data units (e.g. 100 m) then enable this
control and enter in the appropriate value. If the entered value is large and exceeds the size of an
individual tile of data then it may have no effect on the output grid.
Note If the coordinate system of the input data is Longitude/Latitude then the absolute distance
units need to be specified in fractions of a degree (Arc seconds).
TRIANGLE PATCH MULTIPLIER
The triangle patch multiplier can be used to modify the number and size of tiles (or patches) that
the software will segment the input data into before sequentially triangulating it. The tile size is
automatically determined by the software following a detailed analysis of the spatial statistics of
the input data. Under special circumstances the patch size can be modified by applying a Triangle
patch multiplier. Increasing the default value of 1 to a higher number will create larger patches
and may assist in the infilling of large holes or gaps in the dataset, however it will also increase
peak memory usage during the gridding phase. For very large datasets increasing the Triangle
patch multiplier will reduce the number (but not the storage requirements) of temporary files that
are created during the gridding phase. For most datasets a patch multiplier of 1 or 2 will be
sufficient. Increasing the patch multiplier beyond a value of 4 would be rarely necessary.
a weighted average of all data point values that lie within a specified search radius surrounding the grid
cell. The IDW method is optimal when the data has a fairly uniform distribution of input points across
the area to be gridded, and some degree of smoothing is beneficial.
In order for the software work with huge datasets that could potentially contain billions of points on PCs
with limited available memory, the input data is scanned, cleansed and stamped into a temporary grid.
The grid is then divided into tiles and each tile is then interpolated using the IDW algorithm. The
intermediate grids are either stored in memory or if there is insufficient memory available they are
stored on disk in temporary files. Once the dataset has been interpolated the output grid is constructed
by stitching together the interpolating tiles into a continuous grid.
Before commencing a gridding operation it is important that the IDW Properties are appropriately
configured for the input dataset. If you are familiar with the input dataset and know in advance what the
spatial extents and distribution of the data is like and you have a good understanding of the range of
values in the field(s) being gridded then you can manually adjust the IDW properties to best suite the
input and output data requirements.

INVERSE DISTANCE WEIGHTING PROPERTIES

The IDW properties can be used to influence the geometry and smoothness of the output grid file.
MODEL
This parameter controls the weighting model that is used to average the data points that are
located within the search distance radius. The following four weighting models are available:
GAUSSIAN
The weight assigned to each input value is determined according to a 2D Gaussian function
centred on the grid node. The shape and standard deviation of the Gaussian function is
proportional to the Range value. Larger range values produce flatter functions Gaussian functions
and a smoother grid. The Nugget, Range and Distance radius values are measured in increments
of the output grid cell size.
LINEAR
interpolated. The linear weight model enables the Nugget and Range parameters to be adjusted
in order to vary the weight assignments. At distances less than the Nugget distance the weight
model will be 1 (i.e. all data will contribute equally). At distances beyond the nugget value the
weighting factor will be applied according to the selected model. The Range parameter is used to
set the outer distance threshold for which the weight model is applied. Any samples which exceed
the Range and are less than the Distance radius will be assigned an equal weight. The Nugget,
Range and Distance radius values are measured in increments of the output grid cell size.
EXPONENTIAL
interpolated raised to the specified power. Increasing the power value will cause smaller weights
to be assigned to closer points and more distant points to be assigned equal but large weights.
Increasing power values will therefore cause each interpolated grid node to more closely
approximate the sample values closest to it. As with the Linear model the Nugget and Range
properties can be modified to constrain that distance over which the exponential weight model is
most effective.
POWER
The default option, each input point's weight is proportional to the inverse of its distance to the
specified Power from the grid node. Increasing the weighting power reduces the influence distant
points have on the calculated value of each grid node. Large power values cause grid cell values
to approximate the value of the nearest data point, while smaller power values will result in data
values being more evenly distributed among neighbouring grid nodes. The weighting value
defaults to 2 (i.e. the weight of any data point is inversely proportional to the square of its distance
from the grid cell) which is appropriate for most situations. If required, the weighting value can be
altered to any positive value.
DISTANCE RADIUS
It is important to set an appropriate size for the search distance radius. Setting it smaller than the
average data spacing may result in a large number of the interpolated grid cells being assigned a
null value and therefore displayed as transparent in the output grid. Conversely, if the search
distance is set to be too large then significant grid smoothing or artefacts may occur. The search
distance radius is measured in increments of the output cell size.

To optimize performance, choose a search radius that is likely to encompass the minimum
number of required input points most of the time. It can sometimes be very difficult to make this
decision but a good rule of thumb is to keep the search distance to a value less than or equal to
5x the output cell size.
DISTANCE TAPER
Taper controls allow you to apply a taper function to the interpolated value of each grid node
based on its distance to the nearest valid sample point. The taper function is applied using a
linear weighting model thereby adjusting the expected grid node values towards the background
value. Between a distance of zero and the NEAR distance the taper function is assigned a
constant value of 1 (i.e. no modification is made to the grid node). Between the NEAR and FAR
distance the taper function is applied as a linear weighting between the grid node value and the
background value. Beyond the FAR distance grid nodes are assigned the background value.
MINIMUM CURVATURE (STAMPED)
constrained by a percentage change tension parameter. Minimum curvature gridding generates the
smoothest surface possible while attempting to honour the data as closely as possible. Like all gridding
methods, minimum curvature gridding is not an exact interpolation technique and therefore some error
may occur between the input data point values and the interpolated surface values
MINIMUM CURVATURE (STAMPED) PROPERTIES
The minimum curvature (Stamped) properties can be used to influence the geometry and
smoothness of the output grid file.
STAMPING METHOD
This parameter controls the accumulation rules that are applied when multiple data points fall
within a single grid cell. There are several options available:
• Average all (last in weighted): averaged all data points
• First Only: the first point value is assigned to the cell. All subsequent points are discarded.
• Last Only: the last point value is assigned to the cell.
• Average All: averages all coincident point values.
• Average All (inverse distance weighted): averages all coincident points by applying an
inverse distance weighting function.
RADIUS
The radius control defines a distance radius around a grid cell to search for valid input points.
Distance is measured in increments of the output grid cell size.
CLIPPING
The clip control provides a number of options for clipping the extents of the interpolated grid, so
that it more closely approximates the distribution of the input data. Options available include
• None
No clipping is applied to the output grid. With none selected the entire output grid will be filled
with interpolated values.

• Near
The Near value represents the distance, in cell size increments, that the grid is to be clipped
back to from the convex hull of the data points. Areas in the grid which lie beyond the Near
distance will be assigned null.
Note Setting a Near only clip value will have the same effect as setting a buffer clip distance.
• Near and Far
The Far distance is the maximum distance for which interpolation will occur between input
points. Any area in the grid that has data points greater than the Far distance value will be
displayed as null.
MINIMUM CURVATURE (FULL)
constrained by a percentage change tension parameter. Minimum curvature gridding generates the
smoothest surface possible while attempting to honour the data as closely as possible. Like all gridding
methods, minimum curvature gridding is not an exact interpolation technique and therefore some error
may occur between the input data point values and the interpolated surface values
MINIMUM CURVATURE (FULL) PROPERTIES
The minimum curvature (Stamped) properties can be used to influence the geometry and
smoothness of the output grid file.
STAMPING METHOD
This parameter controls the accumulation rules that are applied when multiple data points fall
within a single grid cell. There are several options available:
• Average all (last in weighted)
Averaged all data points
• First Only
The first point value is assigned to the cell. All subsequent points are discarded.
• Last Only
The last point value is assigned to the cell.
• Average All
Averages all coincident point values.
• Average All (inverse distance weighted)
Averages all coincident points by applying an inverse distance weighting function.
RADIUS
The control defines a distance radius around a grid cell to search for valid input points. Distance is
measured in increments of the output grid cell size.
CLIPPING
The Clip control provides a number of options for clipping the extents of the interpolated grid, so
that it more closely approximates the distribution of the input data. Options available include
• None
No clipping is applied to the output grid. With none selected the entire output grid will be filled
with interpolated values.

• Near
TThe Near value represents the distance, in cell size increments, that the grid is to be clipped
back to from the convex hull of the data points. Areas in the grid which lie beyond the Near
distance will be assigned null.
Note Setting a Near only clip value will have the same effect as setting a buffer clip distance.
• Near and Far
The Far distance is the maximum distance for which interpolation will occur between input
points. Any area in the grid that has data points greater than the Far distance value will be
displayed as null.
FULL MINIMUM CURVATURE VS STAMPED MINIMUM CURVATURE METHODS
Although the operational phases for these methods appear to be very similar, there are important
processing and operational differences between the two techniques. It is important to consider
these differences carefully when deciding which gridding method to use. The primary operational
difference between the stamped minimum curvature and full minimum curvature methods is that
the stamped method is faster and requires less hardware resources (disk space memory and
processing power) than the full minimum curvature method. The stamped minimum curvature
method is generally faster because it does not spatially sort or retain a full temporary copy of the
input data during phase 3.
Instead it stamps the input data directly into a temporary grid. In contrast the full minimum
curvature method spatially sorts and stores a complete temporary copy of the input data in
addition to stamping the points into a temporary grid. The two methods also differ during the final
interpolation phase where the full minimum curvature gridding operation loads the spatially sorted
temporary data again to complete the interpolation. Loading the data a second time requires
additional processing time.
The additional performance cost incurred by the full minimum curvature algorithm is often
rewarded in terms of better grid quality and estimation accuracy. The method is able to produce a
better estimation for grid cells that contain one or more input data points. In comparison the
stamped method may simply shift the data values to the centre of each cell (depending on the
data accumulation methodology selected). The full method is able to make a better estimate of
the cell value in these cases by taking into account the actual position of the input data value(s)
rather than just the cell centre which may improve the estimates for all surrounding grid cells.
Due to the potential improvement that the full minimum curvature method offers in output grid
quality it is the recommended method, except where you determine the improvement in the grid
quality will not be detectable or significant, or that the additional processing cost will be too high.
The stamped minimum curvature method may be more appropriate in the following situations:
• Re-interpolating existing gridded data onto a finer mesh. If the fine mesh is carefully designed
so that the centre of the existing grid cells always fall in the centre of the cells of the new grid,
then stamped minimum curvature will return the same result as the full method. However, if
the cells are non-aligned then the full method will produce a better result.
• The output grid cell size is very small compared to the input data spacing. As a guideline if the
grid cell size is 8x to 10x smaller than the input data spacing. In this case the input data value
will be close to the centre of the cell into which it is stamped.
• The output grid cell size is large compared to the input data spacing. As a guideline if the grid
cell size is 2x larger than the input data spacing then you are more likely to want the grid cell
estimation to represent the average value of the observations within the cell.
• Noisy data. If the input data has a high level of noise then there is little reason to more
accurately represent it by using the full minimum curvature method.

• Large data measurement footprint. If the data observations represent an average of a large
footprint (e.g. radar) then stamped minimum curvature may be sufficiently accurate. However,
where the observations represent an accurate point measurement of a smooth continuous
field then full minimum curvature should always be used.
DATA DENSITY
node. The density at each grid node is determined independently using a kernel estimator function
DATA DENSITY PROPERTIES KERNEL
The Kernel Density Estimator method is a non-parametric density estimator. It uses a similar
approach but it weights the input samples by a kernel function that is normally a function of the
normalized distance of the sample to the grid node. To achieve a good result with the KDE
function it is more important to choose an appropriate search radius - sometimes referred to as
the bandwidth - than to choose an appropriate kernel function. If the bandwidth is too small the
density will be under-smoothed whereas if the bandwidth is too large the density will be over-
smoothed and lacking in resolution.
Given a kernel function K and a search radius (or bandwidth) h, the estimated density at any point
x is given by -
1 n x − x(i )
fˆ ( x) =  K ( )
n i =1 h
where n is the number of samples. The following kernel functions are supported:
Kernel K(u)
Uniform 1
I ( u ≤ 1)
2
Triangle
(1 − u ) I ( u ≤ 1)
Epanechnikov 3
(1 − u 2 ) I ( u ≤ 1)
4
Quartic 15
(1 − u 2 ) 2 I ( u ≤ 1)
16
Triweight 35
(1 − u 2 ) 3 I ( u ≤ 1)
32
Gaussian 1 1
exp(− u 2 )
2π 2
Cosinus π π
cos( ) I ( u ≤ 1)
4 2
Radius

To achieve a good result with the Density gridding function it is more important to choose an
appropriate search radius-sometimes referred to as the bandwidth-than to choose an appropriate
kernel function. If the bandwidth is too small the density will be under-smoothed whereas if the
bandwidth is too large the density will be over-smoothed and lacking in resolution. The radius
distance is measured in increments of the output cell size.
NORMALIZE BY AREA
This control converts the data frequency values into spatial density values by dividing the value of
each cell by the area of the search radius.
BIAS BY INPUT FIELD VALUE
When enabled this control interprets the selected input field(s) as a count of the number of
observations at that location. It allows a single point to represent more than one observation.
DATA POINT SEPARATION
The data point separation gridding method produces a grid which records the distance to the
closest input data features to each grid node.
DATA POINT SEPARATION PROPERTIES
The distance radius specifies the maximum distance to search for valid input points. The distance
is specified in increments of the output grid cell size.
OUTPUT GRID
DATA TYPE
The data type control is used to set the numeric storage type for the interpolated values in the
output grid. It is advisable to select the appropriate data type that most efficiently represents the
range of data that will be stored in the output grid. For example a signed 2-byte integer is
generally suitable for storing typical elevation data at 1m vertical resolution. The table below lists
the available options and the valid data range that can be stored by each of the data types.
Data Type Bytes Range of Values

Unsigned byte 1 0 to 255
Signed byte 1 -128 to 127
Unsigned short 2 0 to 65,535
Signed short 2 -32,768 to 32,767
Unsigned int 4 0 to 4,294,967,295
Signed int 4 -2,147,483,648 to 2,147,483,647
Float 4 -3.8e-38 to 3.4e38
The automatic option will set the output format to an appropriate data type based on an analysis
of the input data range.
FILE NAME AND GRID FORMAT
The output grid file(s) can be specified as either a single band ERMapper or BIL format grid.
Although both of these formats support multiple bands in a single file, the grids created by the
Multi-File Gridding tool can be extremely large, so we have chosen to output each band (or field)
to a separate grid file for convenience. If multiple fields are selected for interpolation then multiple
output grid files will be created. The name of each file will be the user specified name (e.g.
MY_DEM) with the field name appended to it in square brackets (e.g. MY_DEM_[elevation].ers).

In addition to the ER Mapper (.ERS) or BIL (.BIL) grid header and data files a MapInfo Pro .TAB
file will also be generated for each output grid if the Auto open output file(s) option is enabled.
GRID PROJECTION
A projection must be assigned to the output grid(s). While it is possible to specify different
projections for the input data and output grid it is not recommended for very large datasets as it
may degrade the performance of the input processing phase significantly as each point will need
to be reprojected into the output grid coordinate system prior to gridding.
AUTO OPEN OUTPUT FILE(S)
When enabled the output grid file(s) will be automatically open into MapInfo Pro.
CONVERTING VECTOR FILES TO GRIDS

SURFACES>File>Vector to Grid
The Vector to Grid tool will convert either of the following vector file types into surface grids:
• 3D vector surfaces (i.e. TIN or meshes).

The Z or elevation value will be assigned to the grid, when viewed "top down".
• 2D TAB files containing points, polylines or polygons.
The Z or elevation value can be assigned to either an attributed field or constant value.
TO CONVERT A VECTOR FILE TO GRID:
1. Select SURFACES>File>Vector to Grid.
2. Select the file type as either 2D (i.e. points, polygons, 'flat' contours already opened in MapInfo
Pro) or 3D (i.e. TIN, Mesh, 3D contours).
3. Click the Open button and select the file.
4. Review Processing Options, the Overlay Value and the Background Value. If there are any
overlapping objects in the vector file, the numeric value from the field can be handled according to
the options:
• First Object
• Last Object
• Minimum value
• Maximum value
• Average (Mean)
• Range
• Sum
• Median
5. Click Create Grid.
6. If necessary, select a Projection for the output grid file.
7. The grid will be automatically opened in MapInfo Pro.

An interpolated DXF fault plane surface in the left image converted into an ERMapper grid in the right image. Images from
Discover 3D.
The following input vector and output grid file formats are supported by this tool:
Input 3D Vector Formats
• 3D Studio .3DS)
• AutoCAD .DXF
• Datamine wireframe (point and triangle) .DM
• ESRI TIN Files .ADF
• Gemcom .BT2
• GOCAD Vector .TS, .PL and .VS
• Surpac wireframe .DTM .STR
• Vulcan triangulation .00T
Input 2D Vector Formats
• MapInfo Pro .MIF

The Vector File to Grid dialog
Note To produce an alternate grid view (other than 'top down' or plan view), use the
DISCOVER>File>Vector Transform tool to first rotate and swap the axes of your model. Once
the axes have been rotated/swapped, running the Vector File to Grid tool will provide a
different aspect view of the model.
IMPORTING GRIDS
HGT CONVERT
SURFACES>Utilities>HGT Convert
NASA Shuttle Radar Topography Mission (SRTM) data is available in a binary height file format
(*.HGT). Datamine Discover's HGT Importer imports both 1 and 3 arc-second HGT files as
ERMapper grids for use in the MapInfo Pro environment.
To import a HGT file:
1. From within the tool, first select the appropriate arc-second size (1 or 3 seconds).
2. Press Process files, and select one or more HGT files to import. Press OK to generate the
necessary ERS header and TAB file/s
3. Close the dialog, and navigate to SURFACES>File>Open Table to browse for the newly created
TAB files.

EXPORTING GRIDS
GRID TO ASCII
SURFACES>File>Export>Grid to ASCII File
There may be instances where a Datamine Discover grid is to be used with other software that cannot
read binary grids. In this case, the safest way to transfer the grid is in ASCII format. Datamine Discover
provides the option of exporting the grid as either XYZ values or Z values only per line. It can also
create an ESRI ASCII grid file.
The following parameters can be set in the Grid to ASCII dialog:
• Grid Origin
specifies the location of the first cell written to the file. The grid will be written sequentially from
this point.
• Cell Origin
sets whether the XY co-ordinates refer to the cell centre or lower-left corner point.
• Export by
sets whether the file will be written row-by-row or column-by-column.
• Delimiter
the value delimiter method used in the file (e.g. tab, comma, etc) .
• Null Cell Value
value written for null cells - this overrides any inherent null value in the grid.
• Precision
precision of numbers written to the file.
Note For ESRI ASCII export format, only the Cell Origin, Null cell value and Precision options are
available.

When exporting to the ESRI ASCII format, only the Cell Origin, Null cell value and Precision options
are available.
EXPORT GRID
SURFACES>File>Export>Export Grid
Datamine Discover can convert (export) any supported grid to an alternative grid format. This
allows a grid created in Datamine Discover to be used with another software package.
This menu option opens the grid Convert Tool; this can also be accessed from
SURFACES>Utilities>Convert.
GRID TO IMAGE
SURFACES>File>Export>Grid to Image
Datamine Discover can export any supported grid to a GeoTIFF image file at a specified
resolution. The colouring and sun-shading in the grid display is preserved in the output image.
The geo-location and projection information is also preserved. This allows a grid created in
Datamine Discover to be used with software packages that do not support gridded file formats.
You can open, close and query grids in this list. At the bottom of the dialog, choose if you want to export
All grids or the Current (selected) grid. The output options are specified separately for each grid.
Select a grid in the Available Files list. Under Output Image, the resolution of the image at 100%
resolution is shown in the Full resolution box. To resample to a lower resolution, click in the Scale box
and type the required resolution between 1% and 100%. The resulting, resampled image resolution is
shown in the Output box.

Choose Output to individual folders if you want to export the grids to separate folders, or choose Output
to one common folder to save all images in the same folder. The output file name and folder location
for the selected grid image is shown in the GeoTIFF File box. Click inside the box to edit. Click the Save
button to save your changes.
Click the Process button to generate the output image files.
INTERROGATING A GRID
• Grid Query
• Grid Info
• Statistics by Polygonal Region
GRID QUERY
SURFACES>Information>Grid Query
To report grid cell values directly to the screen, click the Grid Query button on the Surfaces
toolbar. When the Grid Info tool is selected, place the cursor over the surface grid and click with
the left mouse button. The cell values for the grid cell at the selected location plus the
surrounding eight grid cell values are displayed in the Grid Info dialog box.
Note This is similar to the MapInfo Pro Info tool, but provides higher accuracy as well as the
surrounding grid cells location.
GRID INFO
SURFACES>Information>Grid Info
The Grid Info option enables a user to view a summary of grid information and statistical
parameters. Select the grid using the browse button in the Grid Information dialog and Datamine
Discover will populate the fields with the corresponding grid parameters.
Note For large grid files, the Grid cells sampled for statistics calculations may be less than 100%
and therefore an approximation. This reflects the default sampling settings in
PRO>Options>Grid Options. To increase the accuracy of the statistics sampling for a grid,
use SURFACES>Information> Grid Stats to recalculate the statistics at a higher sampling.
Note The Grid Coords reflects the embedded grid file projection if known. If this is different to the
MapInfo Pro Coords projection, the grid file is registered differently in MapInfo Pro.

Grid Information dialog
STATISTICS BY POLYGONAL REGION

SURFACES>Utilities>Statistics
Reports grid statistics within one or more polygonal regions.
MODIFY GRID COLOURS AND SHADING

SURFACES>Display>Colour Grid
By default, Datamine Discover applies a colour scheme as defined in Grid Options whenever a
surface grid is created or opened.
Use the Colour Grid tool to enhance a grid display.

Grid display colouring options
When the Colour Grid tool is initially opened, the grid settings of the top- most grid in the currently
selected map window is loaded. If no grids layers exist in the current mapper, no grids are loaded by
default.
Use the Select button to choose the surface grid(s) to modify, and also the primary grid to load statistics
and display within the tool's Colour and Histogram tabs.
You can then choose to:
• Modify the display settings with the options on the Colour tab, Sun tab, Histogram tab, or the
Colour Table Editor.
• Load an existing Colour Table.
• Create a new or edited colour table by defining custom breaks, or in the colour table editor.
• Limit or clip the range of colouring for linear and equalized methods.
• Apply sun-shading to a grid from a specified direction and elevation angle or make a grid
transparent.
• Save and Load Customized Grid Display Settings, or load settings used from another currently
opened grid.
Apply any changes to the grids by clicking Apply. These are automatically saved permanently within
the TAB file metadata and associated metadata files, and will look the same whenever/wherever the
TAB file is opened again.
SAVE AND LOAD CUSTOMIZED GRID DISPLAY SETTINGS

Use the Load and Save buttons to the right of the Current settings box to save the current display
settings. All settings except the layer transparency (see Transparency) are saved with this option.
Specifically, this includes (if applicable) the colour method, clip limits; value/percent/percentile breaks,
colours and transparency; the colour table, and sun-shading settings.

On the Colour Tab, if linear or histogram equalization method is used; select the Full Grid check box
to dynamically stretch the colour range (min/max) to grids with different data ranges. If this option is
cleared, the clip values are fixed for all grids these settings are applied to.
TO SAVE THE CURRENT GRID DISPLAY SETTINGS:
1. Make the map window containing the grid you want to save the settings from current, and then
click SURFACES>Display>Colour Grid.
On the Modify Grid Settings dialog box, click the Save button adjacent to the Current settings
box.
2. The currently saved settings are displayed as a tree in the Save Settings dialog box.
3. Type the new name in the New name box or select an existing setting's name to update from the
User Settings branch.
4. Click OK. If you are saving to an existing name, you will be asked to confirm before the settings
are overwritten.
The settings are saved as a .TXT file (e.g. MySettings.txt) in the Discover Config folder, in a grid
colouring folder.
From the Save Settings dialog box, you can also rename and delete existing saved settings.
TO RENAME OR DELETE A SAVED SETTINGS FILE:
• To rename, select the settings from the User Settings branch and click the Rename button. Type
the new name in the New name box and click OK.
• To delete, select the settings from the User Settings branch and click the Delete button. You are
asked to confirm before the settings file is deleted. You can then load the saved settings at a later
time, or you can load the settings directly from another open grid (without previously saving and
naming the settings from that map window).
TO LOAD SAVED SETTINGS:
1. Make the map window containing the grid you want to apply the settings to current, and then click
SURFACES>Display>Colour Grid.
2. On the Modify Grid Settings dialog box, click the Load button adjacent to the Current settings box.
3. Select the settings you want to apply to the current grid from the User Settings (previously saved
settings) branch.
4. Click OK. The settings are displayed in the Colour Grid dialog box.
5. Click Apply.
TO COPY AND APPLY SETTINGS DIRECTLY FROM ANOTHER GRID:
1. Open the grid you want to copy the settings from.
2. Make the map window containing the grid you want to apply the settings to current, and then click
SURFACES>Display>Colour Grid.
3. On the Modify Grid Settings dialog box, click the Load button adjacent to the Current settings box.
4. Select the grid from the From Open Grid branch.
5. Click OK. The settings are displayed in the Colour Grid dialog box.
6. Click Apply.

When you save or load display settings, the name is displayed in the Current settings box. If at any
time you modify the loaded settings, the name in the Current settings box reverts to "Current Settings".
The modified settings can then be saved to a new name or an existing name.
TO DELETE SAVED DISPLAY SETTINGS:
1. Click SURFACES>Display>Colour Grid.
2. On the Modify Grid Settings dialog box, click the Delete button adjacent to the Current settings
box.
3. Select the settings you want to delete in the User Settings branch.
4. Click Delete. You are asked to confirm before the settings are deleted.
5. Click Yes to delete.
6. Repeat as required. Click Close to return to the Modify Grid Settings dialog box.
COLOUR TAB
• Selecting a Colour Table
• Creating and Editing Colour Tables
• Methods
• Transparency
SELECTING A COLOUR TABLE

Datamine Discover ships with a colour table library. Use the Select Colour Table pull-down list on the
Colour tab to choose a different colour look-up table from the library.
The selected colour look-up table is displayed in the preview colour bar on the right side of the Colour
Grid dialog. Click Apply to apply the colour table to the current grid.
When using Histogram or Linear stretch methods, the colour table divisions are automatically equally
spaced across the minimum and maximum values to colour.
When using a Breaks method, the colour table is only applied to rows whose colours are set to
Automatic. When changing the current Colour Table with a Breaks method selected, you will be
prompted to change these to automatic.
CREATING AND EDITING COLOUR TABLES

In addition when a Breaks method is selected, you will be able to automatically create a new colour
table using the Save Colour Table button next to the Edit Colour Table button.
Note This does not save the position (value, percentile or percentage) of the break/colour division,
only the order of the colours and the RGB+A (Red, Green Blue and Alpha-transparency) colour
values.
METHODS
A number of surface grid colouring methods are available:
• Linear Stretch
• Linear Stretch Auto Clip
• Histogram Equalization

• Percentage Breaks
• Percentile Breaks
• Value Breaks
• Multi-banded RGB
LINEAR STRETCH
Apply a linear stretch of the selected colour table to the grid(s) between the minimum and
maximum values.
If you intend to save and apply these display settings to other grids, select the Use full range of
data check box to dynamically apply the colour range to grids with different data ranges.
Data values below the minimum and above the maximum are displayed with the minimum and
maximum colours, unless the Set outside min/max to transparent check box is selected.
For more details on clipping/limiting the colour range, see Linear Stretch Auto Clip and Clip and
Limit Colouring Range.
LINEAR STRETCH AUTO CLIP
Apply a linear stretch of the selected colour table between a defined minimum and maximum
range.
See Clip and Limit Colouring Range for more information on the clip options.
You can also view the data distribution, adjust the current clips, and apply using the controls on
the Histogram Tab.
HISTOGRAM EQUALIZATION
For each grid, a histogram is created by dividing the range of the data into 1024 bins (equally
sized intervals), and determine the count (number of cells) in each bin.
It then applies colours so that there are approximately equal numbers of grid cells displayed in
each colour (this is achieved because all colour tables are based on a maximum of 255 discrete
colours, which are smoothly blended between transitions).
For example for a grid with 1000 non-null grid cells, 1000/255 = 3.9. So for each colour
approximately 4 cells should be colour. If the first colour is pure red, a cumulative count from the
start of the histogram is performed until it is >=4. Then the next colour is taken and the count reset
to 0 and the process continues.
By default the minimum and maximum data ranges are selected but these values can be changed
under Options. See Clip and Limit Colouring Range for more information on the clip options.
When the clips are adjusted, the equalized stretch is recalculated based on the new sub-set of
the histogram (i.e. all cells outside of the min/max clip range are discarded and treated as null for
the purpose of the histogram).
You can also view the data distribution, adjust the current clips, and apply using the controls on
the Histogram Tab.

PERCENTAGE BREAKS
With some data, it can be useful to show the grid coloured into just a few ranges based on
threshold breaks. Each of these ranges would be shown in a different colour to highlight the areas
of interest.
Type a Percentage value (percent of any grid's data range) in the bottom blank row. Alternatively
use the list box below to automatically create:
• Percentage Breaks (5)
Creates 5 equally spaced rows; 20, 40, 60, 80, 100
• Percentage Breaks (10)
Creates 10 rows; 10, 20, 30 etc.
• Percentage Breaks (N)
Enter any desired number of equally spaced breaks.
Note Percentage Breaks (N) generates N rows and break values, however the last values/rows
will be at the maximum grid value, or 100%. Hence it will not be visible in the histogram.
• Clear
Delete all rows
• Automatic colour
Set all colours to Automatically set from the currently selected Colour Table
The breaks ranges can be edited or appended to by simply edited the row(s).
To delete a row, click on the first (grey) column to select the entire row, and press the Delete key.
When editing, the Percentile (percent of non-null grid cells) and count of cells falling in the break
range is automatically calculated and updated.
Note This is a threshold value, so there is no need to enter 0. Any number between 1% and
100% is valid. Any values between the minimum (0%) and the first Percentage break is
coloured the colour of the first break. If 100% is not specified, values above the maximum
value and 100% are automatically set transparent.
Alternatively select the row and then click in the Colour box to display the colour palette. Colours
can be selected from either:
• Automatic (default) to assign a colour automatically from the current colour table
• Transparent to make the range transparent
• Select a Colour from the palette
• More Colours... to create a custom colour
To blend the colours and smooth the breaks select Interpolate, see Interpolate Colours.
You can also view the data distribution, adjust the current breaks and their colours, and apply
using the controls on the Histogram Tab.
PERCENTILE BREAKS
of interest.
Type a Percentile value (percent of non-null cells in any grid) in the bottom blank row.
Alternatively use the list box below to automatically create:

• Percentile Breaks (5)

Creates 5 equally spaced rows; 20, 40, 60, 80, 100
• Percentile Breaks (10)
Creates 10 rows; 10, 20, 30 etc.
• Percentile Breaks (N)
Enter any desired number of equally spaced breaks.
Note Percentile Breaks (N) generates N rows and break values, however the last value/row will
be at the maximum grid value, or 100%. Hence it will not be visible in the histogram.
• Clear
Delete all rows
Set all colours to automatically set from the currently selected Colour Table.
The break ranges can be edited or appended to by simply edited the row(s).
To delete a row, click on the first (grey) column to select the entire row, and press the DEL key.
Note There may be a discrepancy due between entered percentiles and calculated percentiles
in the Count column. This is due to rounding (i.e. you can't have 0.5 of a cell in) and the
nature of the statistics used for grid colouring.
Note This is a threshold value, so there is no need to enter 0. Any number between 1% and
100% is valid. Any values between the minimum (0%) and the first Percentage breaks is
coloured by the colour of the first break. If 100% is not specified, values above the
maximum value and 100% are automatically set transparent.
VALUE BREAKS
of interest.
Note Values are not recalculated for each grid - the same absolute numbers are applied to each
grid, regardless of the original primary grids statistics. In particular the statistical methods
are only valid for applying to one grid and will not be re-usable on grids with different data
distributions, histograms and statistics. Also, if a value falls outside the current grids range,
it will be ignored.

Type a grid value (numeric value of a cell) in the bottom blank row. Alternatively use the Listbox
below to automatically create -
• Value Breaks (N)
Creates N number of rows, equally spaced between the current Primary grid's min and max
value.
Note Value Breaks (N) Generates N rows and break values, however the last value/ row will be
at the maximum grid value, or 100%. Hence it will not be visible in the histogram.
• Mean Breaks (N)
Calculate N number of values, where N=1 is the mean average of the current Primary grid's
min and max. E.g. the second row = Mean + 1*(Mean-min), the third row = Mean + 2*(mean-
min) etc.
If the value is outside the range of the grid, the row/break is automatically removed.
Note If there are values above N*Mean, these are automatically set to transpareIf a value is
outside the range of the primary grid, it will be discarded. Hence you may get less than N
number of breaks generated.
• Std Dev (Standard Deviation) Breaks (N)
Calculate N+1 number of values, where N=2 means that there is automatically calculated
relative to the standard deviation and mean of the current primary grid:
• First row (transparent) = Grid Minimum to -1*Standard deviation
• Second row = -1*Standard deviation to mean
• Third row = mean to +1*Standard deviation
Note If there are grid values below (mean - N*Std Dev), or above (Mean + N*Std Dev); these
are automatically set to transparent.If a value is outside the range of the primary grid, it will
be discarded. Hence you may get less than N number of breaks generated.
• Natural Breaks (N)
Automatically generate N number of break values, or N+1 rows, based on the Jenks Natural
Breaks algorithm1.
Natural breaks are based on natural groupings inherent in the data. The boundaries are set
where there are relatively big differences in the data values. For example, in a multi-modal
distribution with 3 local maxima (or 'peaks' in the histogram), use a range of 3 to classify the
values between the corresponding minimum inflection points.
Below the first natural break and above the last natural breaks are set to colours, and no
transparency is applied.
• Clear
Delete all rows
Set all colours to Automatically set from the currently selected Colour Table
The break ranges can be edited or appended to by simply edited the row(s).
To delete a row, click on the first (grey) column to select the entire row, and press the Delete key.

CLIP AND LIMIT COLOURING RANGE
To assist in quickly removing outlier values, buttons are provided to automatically set the min/max
to either 99/99.9% (percent of full grid's data range), or 99/ 99.9%ile (percentile - percent of data
or the count of cells divided by the total cell count).
The 100% button can be used to reset all values to the primary grid's Full data range.
Regardless of the clip type used, all values on the dialog are updated with corresponding data
value, percentage and percentile (data count) for the current primary grid.
You can choose to define between:
• Full Grid (100% button)
The full range of each grid is used, and the stretch is determined on a per-grid basis
• Value
Specify a data value, which may be outside the current grid's data range, the stretch the
colour table between
Note In this mode the full range of colours in the colour table may not be visible on some or all
of the grids.
• Percentage (99%/99.9% button)
For each grid, the range of the data (Grid maximum - grid minimum) is determined and a
percentage of this is removed. For example if a grid had a range of 0-500, then a 0%-90% clip
would set the colour min/max to 0-450.
• Percentile (99%ile/99.9%ile button)
In this mode, based on the histogram for each grid, the top or bottom n% of data is clipped.
This is calculated on a per-grid basis.
For example if there is a total of 1000 non-null grid cells in a grid, but only 10 cells have a value
greater than or equal to 500. Then a 0-99%ile clip will set the upper colour limit to 500.
MULTI-BANDED RGB
When you have opened a multi-banded grid, select the Multi-banded RGB option. This will
enable the ability to set the red, green and blue colour bands, which are then stretched across the
data range. Areas with high values (relative to their band) in all 3 bands will be light or white, and
low values will be darker colours.
Choose between a Linear or Histogram stretch for the bands.
Optionally you can define a Intensity Band which is used for sun-highlighting and sun-shading, via
the Sun Tab controls.
Note In Multi-banded RGB mode, the Histogram tab is disabled. Also colour table editing/
selecting is disabled as it is not compatible.

INTERPOLATE COLOURS
Under the Options box, select the Interpolate between colours check box to smooth the
transitions from one colour band to the next. This is a similar effect as when colour tables applied
with the linear or histogram stretch. This does not affect transparent bands-the boundary between
a transparent band and a colour band is not smoothed.
TRANSPARENCY
You can apply transparency in several ways:
• Set the transparency of the entire layer.
Note Layer transparency is not saved with the grid display settings or the TAB file - stored within the
MapInfo Pro Workspace file (.WOR)
• Set individual colour levels in the range to transparent.
• Display all values outside a user-defined colour limits to transparent.
Note Intrinsic Null values in grids are always rendered as transparent-to check the NULL value.
However, when assign values or interrogating the NULL value is ignored, whereas
transparently colour values will still be used in all calculations and processing.
TO ADJUST THE TRANSPARENCY OF THE ENTIRE GRID:
• Use the Transparency slider to set a transparency level for the grid. Transparencies can be set
between 0% (opaque) through to 100% (not visible).
TO SET THE TRANSPARENCY OF A RANGE LEVEL TO TRANSPARENT:
• Click the colour box on the range and select Transparent. This option is only available with user-
defined breaks (percentile, percentage and value breaks).
Note The Interpolate Between Colours option will not applying any blending of colour across
any ranges set to transparent.
TO SHOW VALUES OUTSIDE THE MAXIMUM AND MINIMUM AS TRANSPARENT:
• Under Options, select the Set outside min/max to transparent check box. This option is only
available with auto-stretch methods (linear stretch and histogram equalization).
SUN TAB
Datamine Discover provides the option of adding real-time sun-shading and sun- highlighting to a
gridded surface to improve the appearance of relief in 2D. Sun- shading works by darkening (more
black) areas those areas that face (slope) away from the sun, or are in shadow as they are obscured
by higher areas. Sun highlighting works by brightening (more white) areas which are facing (aspect)
the sun.
The source sun position used for shading and highlighting are independent, however you cannot
enable sun highlight without enabling sun shading.
To view sun shading and highlight modifications automatically in the grid check the Auto Apply box.
Otherwise enter the sun details and click the Apply button when complete to change the grid display.

Sun-Shading tab
SUN SHADE
Check the Sun Shade box and enter a sun Angle (bearing or azimuth) between 0 and 360°. Enter a Sun
Elevation (inclination angle) between 0 (horizon) and 90° (overhead). The position of the sun is
displayed in the preview window as a sun icon. Alternatively, click on the Sun icon in the preview
window and drag to the desired sun angle and elevation.
The Saturation is used to compensate for the overall darkening of a lower sun position. For example
with a overhead sun position, a Saturation = 0 will match a non-shaded grid. At a sun elevation of 45°,
and shadow set to 0 to remove shadow affect, a Saturation = 33 will match a non-shaded grid. And at
a elevation of 0° then Saturation = 100 will compensate and flat areas will look the same as a non-
shaded grid.
Note For an overhead sun (90), increasing the saturation from 0 will result in the grid being brighter
and more white than the non-sun shaded grid file. Hence the default value is 0.
Intensity affects the compensation for the overall darking of a lower sun elevation, similar to
Saturation. However where saturation is applied globally across the grid, Intensity is only applied to
areas that are facing the Sun Shade position.
Note That with a Saturation of 0 to remove this effect, even a Sun Shade Intensity of 100 (by itself)
cannot make any particular cell brighter/whiter than the non-sun shaded grid file. Hence a
default value of 100 is used. However using a value of Saturation larger than 0 may create
areas actually brighter, effectively adding sun highlighting in addition to sun shading.
Shadow level controls the amount of darkening applied to areas facing away from the sun. A value of
100 will make a cell with a slope = (sun Angle +/- 180) completely black, regardless of intensity and
saturation settings.

SUN HIGHLIGHT
Check the Sun Highlight box and enter a sun Angle (bearing or azimuth) between 0 and 360°. Enter a
Sun Elevation (inclination angle) between 0 (horizon) and 90° (overhead). The position of the sun
highlight is displayed in the preview window as a light globe icon. Alternatively, click on the light globe
icon in the preview window and drag to the desired sun angle and elevation.
The Sun intensity controls how bright or "white" areas facing the sun's position. Unlike the Sun Shade's
Intensity, this intensity will make areas bright and whiter than the non-sun shaded grid file.
However the sun highlighting intensity still is relative/interdependent with the Sun Shade's Saturation.
HISTOGRAM TAB
The Histogram tab provides an interactive easy-to-use interface to visualize the data ranges and colour
scheme applied to the selected grid. The grid Histogram visually represents the distribution contained
in the grid dataset. The grid Histogram enables you to instantly view the effects of changes to the grid
using the various colour methods available.
Note The Histogram and Colour tabs are directly linked so when values are changed on one tab they
are directly reflected on the other tab.
The current colouring method is displayed in the top left hand corner and it can be changed by selecting
it from the Generate list box. See the Colour Tab for more information on the grid colour Methods
available.
To view the value, percent and percentile at any place in the histogram move your cursor over the
histogram and it appears in the top left hand corner.
When in Linear or Equalization mode, the Histogram is composed of a movable mapping line used to
adjust either the min/max clip colour values. To move the trend line, a drag handle is docked on both
ends of the line. Place your mouse cursor over the handle, hold down the left mouse button and drag
the handle to the desired location.
Note Although data values can be altered using the trend line, manual inputs can be specified using
the text boxes located beneath the Histogram.
When in a Breaks or Ranges mode, Histogram graphically displays the position of data and percentile
breaks relative to the histogram data populations. To adjust the positions of the percentile or data
breaks, place the mouse cursor over the break line until the cursor appears as a double arrow and then
drag the break line to a new position by dragging with the left mouse button held down.
To add a new break, double left click the mouse at the desired location in the histogram. It can then be
dragged and repositioned.
To delete or remove a break, drag the break line to the very left or right edge of the histogram and
release it. It will automatically be removed.

Histogram tab showing data breaks
As the method changes and the clips/breaks altered, the colour distribution will be altered
automatically.
To manually adjust the colour scheme when in breaks mode, right click anywhere on the histogram to
expand a selectable colour palette.
STATISTICS USED FOR GRID COLOURING

When a grid is initially opened or created in Datamine Discover, statistics are calculated and stored in
a .GHX file along with the file. This includes a histogram with the data range (max-min) divided into
1024 bins, and the count (number of cells) in each bin range determined.
This in then used through the Modify Grid Colouring tool to apply the statistical colouring information
to all grids - for example for Histogram equalization calculations and for quickly determining the min/
max value of a grid.
Note For a large file, only a subset (1 in every nth row) maybe used to generate the histogram. You
can check this under SURFACES>Grid Information, by the number of cells sampled for
statistics. Throughout the Colour Grid tool the grid cell counts are all "scaled" by the sampling
factor (100%/n%) to correct for the sub-sampling
GRID TOGGLE
SURFACES>Display>Grids Toggle
The Grid Toggle tool allows the selected grid to be converted between a Discover Surfaces grid
and a MapInfo Pro Raster grid format.

GRID LEGEND
SURFACES>Display>Grid Legend
Display a legend relating the grid colours to data values. A legend appropriate to the display style
is generated and may be added to a layout window for printing. The legend is created as a table
in the same directory as the original grid. The grid legend annotations are displayed in a
separate Labels table.
Note If the grid display has been modified using the MapInfo Pro MAP>Content>Add Theme tool,
the Datamine Discover legend will only display the original grid colour parameters. To create
an updated grid legend, select the SURFACES>Display>Grid Legend tool again.
Grid Legend map window
CONTOURING A GRID
• Creating Contours
• Contour Smoothing
CREATING CONTOURS
SURFACES>Display>Contour
Datamine Discover's Grid Contouring tool can rapidly contour gridded surfaces of any file size
(including multi-gigabtye sized grids). It will generate a MapInfo Pro vector table of polylines,
each attributed with a Z values. The Grid Contouring tool can process:
• All Supported Grid Formats.
• Very large (multi-gigabyte) input grid file sizes.
• Source gridded surfaces do not have to be open in MapInfo Pro.

The Grid Contouring dialog
WORKFLOW
1. Open the source gridded surface/s into MapInfo Pro (optional)
2. Select the SURFACES>Display>Contour option
3. Three methods of input grid selection are available:
• If contouring a single grid open in MapInfo Pro, select the grid from the top pull-down list.
• If contouring multiple tiled grids open in MapInfo Pro, press the File Open button at the far
right of the Input area. In the following dialog, select each source grid from the pull-down list
and press the adjacent Add (or Add All) button to build a list of grids. Press OK when finished
to return to the main dialog
• If contouring one or more grids not open in MapInfo Pro, press the File Open button at the far
right of the Input area. In the following dialog, select the Open button and locate and open the
required gridded surfaces. This is recommended in particular for large input grid file sizes.
4. Specify the Contour Intervals. Two options for contour interval specification are available:
• By specifying Minor and Major contour values; the Major value will be automatically limited
to multiples of the set Minor value.
The grid data range to be contoured can be restricted by enabling and setting the Minimum
and/or Maximum contour values. This can be extremely useful when contouring data with
outliers (extremely high or low values), as it prevents Datamine Discover from spending extra
time generating unwanted contour lines.
• By explicitly listing the desired contour values in a text file, either in a row-, tab-, comma- or
space-delimited format, and selecting this file using the Load contour control. The text file
should the list the contour levels in increasing order, with a normal separator (e.g. space,
comma, row, etc) such as:
5, 10, 15, 20, 30, 40, 60, 80, 100, 150, 200, 250, 500

A contour level file is very useful when the sample data is a non- normal distribution.
Contours can be created to show more detail in one part of the data range than others. For
example, a soil grid with gold values in the range of 0.01 to 25 ppb could have closely spaced
contours in the range 10-25ppb, but be contoured using more widely spaced values below 10
ppb.
5. Datamine Discover can Colour the resulting contours with the options presented in the Colour
section (far right):
• Colour by linestyle
Allows the selecting of line style/colour/ thickness for the Minor and Major contour values.
Click on the Style control adjacent to the respective contour interval value, and set the
required styles.
Colour by linestyle option
• Colour from Source Grid

This till use the input grid's colour scheme (as set by SURFACES>Display>Colour Grid) for
the resulting contours. If multiple input grids are selected, this option will be disabled.
• Custom Colour Modulation
This enables both Colour Scale and Colour Mapping Transform buttons, allowing various
colour mappings and interpolations to be applied from the related sub- controls (e.g. HSL
interpolation with Bandpass truncation). In particular, the Colour Scale button allows the
application of user- created Legend (see Legend Editor), with a discrete series of specified
data sub-ranges and associated colours; this can be invaluable when contouring tiled grid
datasets.
6. Select a Smoothing option. See Contour Smoothing for more information.
7. The output contour file defaults to the input grid location with a '_contours' suffix; these can be
modified the Save As button
8. The output contour file's projection can change from the input file/s, allowing easy reprojection for
massive datasets.
9. Press the Process button.
10. A detailed process log will open, indicating the status and time remaining of the contouring
process. This can be paused or stopped at any time. Upon contouring completion, the contour file
will open into a new MapInfo Pro mapper window.

CONTOUR SMOOTHING
There are three options available for smoothing contour:
• None
No smoothing interpolation appied
• Interpolate
Contour lines are smoothed by sub-dividing the grid using bicubic interpolation This can greatly
improve the appearance of the contours, though the size of the contour table is increased due to
a higher density of nodes. Three levels of interpolation are available; Low subdivides each cell
into 4 sectors (2x2), Medium subdivides each cell into 16 sectors (4x4) and High subdivides each
cell into 64 sectors (8x8)
• Decimate
This reduces the density of the input grid, which can significantly speed up processing for very
large input datasets, at the expense of reduced resolution. Low decimation reduces groups of 4
cells (2x2) into 1 cell, Medium decimation reduces groups of 16 cells (4x4) into 1 cell and High
decimation reduces groups of 64 cells (8x8) into 1 cell.
CONTOURING TIPS
• When very large output contour files are generated (exceeding MapInfo Pro's table file limits), the
Grid Contouring file will generate a series of contour files numerically suffixed. These will not be
automatically opened, but a prompt will indicate these files need to be manually opened.
• When processing very large input files, the Grid Contouring tool requires a significant amount of
free memory for processing. If the source file drive has insufficient available space, a prompt may
be displayed requesting a different drive to utilize for processing operations.
CREATING POLYGONAL REGIONS BY SELECTION CRITERIA

A range of tools are provided on the Discover>SURFACES>Grid Query menu for creating polygons that
bound regions of a grid based on selection criteria:
• Select Cells by Surface Property
• Select Cells by Multiple Value Ranges
SELECT CELLS BY SURFACE PROPERTY

SURFACES>Utilities>Value Query
The grid query tools provide a convenient method of creating MapInfo Pro polygons that cover
the areas of the grid that meet the grid query criteria.
The Value Query tool can be used to select all grid cells greater or less than a nominated value or
between two selected values. Grid cells that match the selected criteria are combined into a single
polygon with non-contiguous grid cells combined into a multi-polygon (a polygon that is made up of
individual polygon components but contains only one browser record).

Value Query dialog
The fill and line style for the created polygons can be selected using the Regions Style buttons. Select
an appropriate name and location for the grid query polygon table. If no name is selected the grids will
be named consecutively GridQuery1, GridQuery2, etc and stored in the default directory location.
SELECT CELLS BY MULTIPLE VALUE RANGES

SURFACES>Utilities>Range Query
Create coloured vector polygons from selected areas in a grid based on grid cell data ranges or
percentiles.
The Range Query tool can be used to select all grid cells which fall within entered percentile or data
ranges. Grid cells that match the selected criteria are combined into a single polygon with non-
contiguous grid cells combined into a multi-polygon (a polygon that is made up of individual polygon
components but contains only one browser record).
The created vector polygons may represent percentile ranges from a geochemical grid or areas from
a DTM grid which correspond to selected elevation intervals.
Open the Range Query dialog and select the input grid from the Select Grid pull-down list.
Select by Multiple Value Ranges dialog

Vector polygons may be created from the following multi-value range methods:
• Percentile
Create and colour vector polygons from grid cells values according to the percentile range that
each grid cell value falls within. A percentile is a value on a scale of 100 that represents the
percent of a distribution that is equal to or less than the entered value. For example, gridded
geochemical data may be extracted to regions using percentile ranges of 30, 60, 80, 90, 95, 98
and 100%. Each of these percentile ranges would be shown in a different colour to highlight the
areas of interest.
Enter a percentile into the Levels window and left-mouse click in the Colour box to display the
colour palette. Select a colour and repeat process for each percentile.
• Value
Create and colour vector polygons from grid cells values according to the data range that each
grid cell value falls within. The data values entered will be used to create polygons from grid cells
whose values are equal to or less than the entered value.
Enter a data value and left-mouse click in the Colour box to display the colour palette. Select a
colour and repeat process for each data range.
OUTPUT OPTIONS
By default the output vector polygon table is named using the original input grid name with a "_query"
extension and saved to the same folder. To modify the new table name or location click on the Save
button.
Left: Original input grid

Right: Percentiles vector polygon layer
CREATING GRID PROFILES

SURFACES>Utilities>Profile
The Grid Profile tool provides a powerful tool for identifying and analysing trends or spatial
relationships between gridded surfaces. Profiles for one or more lines or polylines can be generated
across multiple gridded surfaces or contour plans.
Profiles over multiple surfaces may be displayed together to show, for example, topographic relief
together with magnetics and soil geochemistry, allowing relationships between the surfaces to be
examined. Additionally, vector data such as surface geology polygons and fault lines can be draped
over the profiles, further enhancing the analysis.
TO CREATE A PROFILE:
1. Open a number of coincident gridded surfaces (e.g. geophysics, geochemistry and DEM) into the
same map window.

2. Make the cosmetic layer editable in this map window, and draw one or more lines/polylines
across the grid regions of interest
3. Open the Profiler tool (SURFACES>Utilities>Profile)
4. Select a line in the cosmetic layer: the dialog will refresh, displaying the profile of the selected line
across each underlying grid surface.
Note If the display does not automatically refresh, ensure that the Auto Update from Selected
Line option is enabled under the Grid Profile>Options>Data tab (accessed via the Options
button).
5. If multiple lines/polylines are available, use the SHIFT key to select multiple lines: the tool will
refresh to include a profile for each selected line and each grid.
6. If multiple grids are open, their display in the Profiler can be controlled by pressing the Options
button at the bottom right if the dialog. In the Profiler Options>Data tab, press the Select Grids to
Profile button. The following controller allows the current mapper's grids to be unselected/
selected by moving them left and right.
7. To colour code the profiles (in order to differentiate for example between a profile of
aeromagnetics versus gravity), select the Profiler Options>Legend tab. Use the browse button to
the right of each grid to set a different colour for each grid.
Note By default, the X:Y axis scaling ratio is automatic, which fits the minimum and maximum
values to the display window. To override this, navigate toOptions>Display, and clear the
X:Y axis scale Auto check box.
8. Note that the Profiler Options>Legend tab also provides controls for Scaling and Offset of each
individual grid. This is useful when trying to control the magnitude and positioning of geochemical/
geophysical profiles with respect to a DEM/topographic profile.
Note The X axis units are determined by the distance units set under the Map window's settings
in MAP>Options>Map Options.
9. Click in the Profiler preview area: a marker will be placed on each profile relating to this horizontal
position in the preview. Simultaneously a symbol (default star) will be placed in the mapper
window on the selected line/s indicating the associated location. This is a dynamically updated
interface, allowing you to easily relate features on the previewed profile to spatial locations in the
mapper window.
10. To create a permanent profile, press the Export button in the main Profiler dialog. Select a TAB
file name and location, and press Save. The profile as previewed in the dialog will be opened into
a new MapInfo Pro map window.
DATA SELECTION
PROFILE LINES
• One or more lines or polylines need to be selected
• These can be in a table, or the cosmetic layer
• They can be selected before opening the Profiler tool, or once it has been opened
• If multiple lines/polylines are selected, the profile preview will be drawn so all lines are drawn from
the origin (left), regardless of their actual spatial positions.

• By default the profile preview is automatically updated when new lines are selected. This can be
disabled via the Auto Update from Selected Line option in the Profiler Options>Data tab. To
update the preview manually, press the Update Profile button
GRIDDED SURFACES AND CONTOURS

• Ensure that the required gridded surfaces or contour layers (topographic, geochemical,
geophysical, etc) are open in the mapper window (they do not have to be visible)
• To control grids from within the Profiler tool, select the Options button, and press the Select Grids
to Profile button in the Profiler Options>Data tab. In the following dialog, ensure that the required
grids are listed under the Selected list; move grids not required to the Unselected list. If you are
selecting a contour layers, you may be prompted to select the Z field to use in the profile.
POLYGON AND POLYLINE INTERSECTIONS

Profiles can be coloured with coincident polygons, such as surface geology, regolith mapping, land use
or vegetation maps, etc. Profiles will be coloured with the foreground colour of the overlying polygon.
1. Ensure that the polygon vector map is open in the map window (does not have to be visible)
2. In the Profiler Options>Data tab, enable the Show Layer Intersections option, and press the
Select layers button.
3. Move the required polygon vector layer to the Selected list.
The intersection of profiles with coincident polyline data such as faults, drainage, tracks/roads,
lineations, etc, can also be displayed:
1. Ensure that the polygon vector map is open in the map window (does not have to be visible)
2. In the Profiler Options>Data tab, enable the Show Layer Intersections option, and press the
Select layers button
3. Move the required polyline vector layer/s to the Selected list.
4. Intersections will be marked on profiles as square symbols coloured using the intersecting
polyline's colour. Therefore using a table of blue drainage polylines, and another of red lineations,
will display the relevant intersections as blue and red squares.
INTERROGATING PROFILES
Profiles can also be visualized in a tabular spreadsheet format, by selecting the spreadsheet
button at the bottom left of the Profiler dialog. This view provides
the following information for each point of a profile: Distance from the profile start, Value, and X/Y
coordinates. Clicking in the profile preview area will highlight the corresponding point's entry in the
spreadsheet view.
The Info tab of the Profiler Options dialog includes a Show Info tool option. With this enabled, the
cursor will report the profile's Distance, Value and X and Y coordinates at that point. This report can be
either continuous (enable the Mouse Moves option in the Info tab), or only upon Button Clicks.
Simultaneously, the profile points location in the mapper window can be displayed if the Show position
in MapInfo Pro option is enabled.
To permanently mark a point's location in the mapper window, right click on the location in the preview
window, and choose Mark Point. A symbol will be placed in the mapper window using the style set
under the Display tab>MapInfo mark symbol control.

NAVIGATING THE PREVIEW WINDOW
The preview window profile can be zoomed in using either the mouse scroll wheel or by
selecting the zoom buttons.
It can be panned by using by holding and dragging the right mouse click, or selecting the pan
hand button.
You can reset the position of the preview window by clicking the reset button.
You can change back to the normal mouse pointer by selecting the button - this can display the
mark within MapInfo Pro and/or show the profile info at theselected point.
COLOURING AND CONTROLLING PROFILES

The initial colour of profiles is controlled by the colour of the selected line/polyline, which can be a
useful way of distinguishing between multiple profiles over a single gridded surface.
If creating profiles over multiple grids, each profile/grid combination can be coloured individually using
the controls in the Grid Profile>Options>Legend tab. Select the button to the right of the desired profile;
the Base Colour can be changed in the following dialog.
The Scaling and Offset of each profile/grid combination can also be controlled from this dialog. This
can be useful when trying to display multiple grids with large differences in the magnitude of their data
ranges. For example, base metal soil sampling grids often have values in the tens of thousands: to
display these over a topographic grid may require a scale factor of 0.1 or 0.05. An offset may then be
applied to ensure that the profiles are presented in the same Y axis range.
Profiles can also be Smoothed in the Grid Profile>Options>Legend tab. This filters the line by applying
a weighted average algorithm across the line. Note that point values will not necessarily be honoured
when smoothed.
LINE-OF-SIGHT
The line-of-sight function allows you to determine which areas of profile surface will be visible from the
start of a straight-line profile.
TO GENERATE A LINE-OF-SIGHT PROFILE:
1. Select a straight line to profile in the Map Window, along with any grids/ contours surfaces you
wish to view.
2. Select the Options buttons. Under the Data tab, select the Line of Sightoption.
3. Enter a height above the start of each profile to view from e.g. The top of a view tower or building.
4. Each profile will now be coloured, where green is visible and red is not visible.
Note Only single line profiles are supported. Polyline profiles will not be coloured by Line of Sight.

CUSTOMIZING THE PREVIEW APPEARANCE

The Display and Axis tabs of the Profiler Options dialog provide controls for the following:
• Axis display
• Axis bounds and tick spacing
• Grid line display
• Background colour
• Zero value line display
• Y axis value scaling (linear or log10)
• X:Y axis ratio scaling
• MapInfo Pro position and mark symbol styles
By default, the X:Y axis scaling ratio is automatic, which fits the minimum and maximum values for the
display window. To overriide this, navigate to the Options>Display, and clear the X:Y axis scale Auto
check box.
Note The X axis units are determined by the distance units set under the Map Window's settings in
MAP>Options>Map Options.
OUTPUT
The Profile Preview can be saved permanently as a MapInfo Pro table, using the Export button. This
table will reflect any customized colours, scaling, offsets, polygon and polyline intersections, etc
displayed in the preview.
Profiles can also be visualized and exported in a tabular spreadsheet format, by selecting the
spreadsheet button at the bottom left of the Profiler dialog. This view provides the following
information for each point of a profile: distance from the profile start, value, X and Y coordinates,
intersecting layers, and the selected attributes from any intersecting layers. Clicking in the profile
preview area will highlight the corresponding point's entry in the spreadsheet view.
The spreadsheet can be exported either as a MapInfo Pro browser or a .CSV file using the options at
the bottom of the spreadsheet view.
An output map window from the Draw Grid Profile tool

CALCULATING SURFACE PROPERTIES AND VOLUMES

• Calculating the Volume Between Two Grids
• Calculating Volumes by Level
• Calculating Curvature
• Calculating Cut-and-Fill Volumes
• Calculating Surface Areas
CALCULATING THE VOLUME BETWEEN TWO GRIDS

SURFACES>Utilities>Volume
Use the Volume tool to calculate volumes between two grids.The Grid tool also provides options
for calculating volumes above or below an elevation (by level) and reporting cut-and- fill volumes
between two surfaces.
CALCULATING VOLUMES BY LEVEL

To calculate volumes between a grid and a horizontal plane. The Grid Tool provides options for
calculating volumes and reporting cut-and-fill volumes between two surfaces.
CALCULATING CURVATURE
SURFACES>Utilities>Curvature
Use the Curvature tool to calculate the curvature of a grid.
CALCULATING CUT-AND-FILL VOLUMES

SURFACES>Utilities>Cut/Fill
Use the Cut/Fill tool to calculate the volume added and removed between two grids.
CALCULATING SURFACE AREAS

SURFACES>Utilities>Surface Area
Use the Surface Area tool to calculate the.non-planar area, planar area and roughness of a grid.
COMPUTING CELL VALUES BY EXPRESSIONS

SURFACES>Utilities>Calculator
The Datamine Discover Calculator can apply arithmetic operations, logic, comparative and
Boolean operations directly to grids or between grids in any supported grid format. It performs
the operations directly writing to the disk file, and does not require the grid to be loaded into
memory or opened in MapInfo Pro.

Grid Calculator dialog
Available grids are displayed in the scrollable list at the top of the dialog. This list is
initially populated by all grids currently open. Further grids can be added to the list using
the Load Grid button, and removed from the list using the Delete Grid button. Use the Information
button to obtain details of a selected grid.
Grids can be assigned an alias name to enable the shortening of complex file names for ease of use
in the expression line. For example, the grid file Rockchip_samples_As_210503 can be simplified to
the alias name X. This enables the following simple expression output=X/(X*2) to be entered into the
expression line rather than full grid name. To create a grid name alias, double click on the relevant cell
in the Alias Name column and type the desired alias name.
Note In the Grid Open dialog a range of supported grid formats are available. The Grid Calculator
can be used to convert grid formats if required. Grid to grid computation can also be performed
irrespective of the input formats or requested output format.
The Grid Calculator requires a formula to be specified in the Expression line in the middle of the dialog.
Complex grid operations such a Boolean and decision functions can also be applied. These grid
operations are described in detail in Creating an Expression and Grid Calculator Syntax.
If the input grids cells are not co-incident, the data is interpolated to create the same grid geometry
between each input grid.
If the input grids have different cell sizes, the largest cell size will be used during the computation and
output grid.
Use the Resample tool to make the cell size of each input grid the same. Use Grid to Grid Clip tool to
make the bounds coincide. If grids have a differing cell size, they will be resampled using a nearest
neighbour method, to the largest cell size.
Note The Grid Calculator may require up to two-times the input grid file size in available memory on
the destination drive.

CREATING AN EXPRESSION
The Grid Calculator expression line and button controls are shown below.
Grid Calculator button layout and command line control
Note In the above example, a new grid (named Regolith_Grid) is to be created from subtracting an
existing grid from another (Spot_Heights - Basement).
To add a grid to the expression line, place the cursor at the desired location in the expression (if
not already there), highlight the grid in the grid list and press the Add Grid button.
An expression must be a 'correct' arithmetic formula of the format:
output = function(input)
A new grid file alias must be entered on the left-side of the expression. By default this is "output". This
alias is automatically used by default for the output grid file name when the output grid is generated.
Click the individual operation buttons to enter the operation into the expression line. Formulas can be
entered directly into the expression line by keyboard entry or by selecting the appropriate fields and
buttons via the Grid Calculator.
The Recently Used Expression button opens a drop down list of functions last used in the Grid
Calculator.
The Save As button enables an expression to be saved to a text file. Use the Load button to
re-load the saved expression into the Grid Calculator dialog.
The Insert Function button enables the construction of complex formulae. A wide range of arithmetic,
logic and Boolean operations are available from within the Grid Calculator. When a function is selected
from the Insert Function pulldown list a definition of the function and the syntax required is displayed
in the Grid Calculator dialog.

The actual output grid file name can be to be specified when the expression is computed in the Output
section or using the file Save As button. If the output file name is not changed, the alias name is
automatically saved. The Output grid file type can also be selected from the Format drop down list. The
Compute Summary Statistics option enables the calculations of grid statistics which are used by
Datamine Discover's Grid Handlers to display the grid in MapInfo Pro.
When the expression is completed, press the Compute button. If the syntax is correct, a progress
window is displayed as the Grid Calculator processes the expression. If there is a syntax error in the
expression line the following dialog is displayed:
Incorrect expression line syntax dialog
Once the calculation is finished the new grid will automatically be opened in a map window.
Note To use the Grid Calculator for a simple grid format conversion, use an expression in the form
Newgrid=Oldgrid, and specify the new file format in the output section. An easier alternative is
to use the SURFACES>Utilities>Convert tool.
USING GRID TOOLS
Grid Tools dialog

The upper portion of the Grid Tools dialog displays all available open grids. Use the Browse
button to add a grid to this list. If you wish to apply operations to a new flat grid, use the Create
New Grid button.
The Utilities button displays a pull-down list of the available grid utility tools. Select a utility to display
a description and the control parameters in the main portion of the Grid Tools dialog.
Depending on the grid utility selected, a range of parameters and options may be required to be
entered, altered or selected.
Note Grid Tools that operate on multiple grids (e.g. Volume, Grid to Grid Clip, Merge) require all
source grids to be in the same projection and have the same cell size. Use the Reproject tool
to change the projection of a grid and the Resample tool to change the cell size.
The Information button displays the registration and statistics for the selected full input grid, and the
current preview tile before and after grids.
PREVIEW WINDOW
The two grid windows on the right side of the Grid Tools dialog display Before and After views of the
selected grid. As the grid selection or function is changed, the After preview window is redrawn and
updated with the changes. Note that the visual changes occur in memory only and are not permanently
saved until you specify and save an output grid using the Save As button.
To modify the appearance of a grid in the preview window click the Use Colour Look-Up table
button to toggle between a grey-scale or colour grid display. To toggle between a linear or
equal area histogram colour stretch use the Histogram Equalization button.
A number of preview window navigation options are available:
• Pointer mode
Change the cursor to this mode to select a position or cell value in a grid. The corresponding
coordinates and cell value will be displayed in the bottom left of the dialog.
• Zoom In/Out
Select a zoom mode and click in one of the preview panes. The zoom-in tool will halve
the preview window zoom width, and the zoom-out tool doubles the preview window width.
• Pan
Position the cursor in the preview window, and then (holding down the left mouse button)
dragging to a new location. The redrawn image is centred on the new location.
• View Extents
View the extent of the grid in either Before or After preview pane windows.
• 1:1 zoom ratio
Set zoom ratio so that 1 grid cell equals 1 pixel on screen.
• Reload
If the Before preview window has panned or zoomed outside the currently previewed
bounds, and is not automatically reloaded the Reload button will reset the view.
The Column and Row position of the cursor in the preview window is displayed underneath the
navigation tools.
At any time in the processing of a grid, the Stop button can be used to halt computation and return to
the previous state.

CHANGING THE SETTINGS FOR THE GRID TOOLS

To change the Grid Tools settings, click the Settings button on the Grid Tools dialog. From this dialog,
you can:
• Display crosshairs in the After window when using the Edit grid utility.
Cross hair cursor display enabled via 'Show selected cell in preview' Setting
• Display the "Full Input Grid", "Before" and "After" text in the preview windows.
• When the input and output data are scaled differently, and it is necessary to apply a new colour
stretch to the output grid, select the Use separate colour stretch for "After" preview check box.
• Automatically load the first grid opened in MapInfo Pro into the Grid Tools dialog by select the
Load default grid without prompting for grid selection check box. If there is not a grid in the front
Map window, the user is prompted to select a grid file.
• When panning and zooming outside the bounds of the currently loaded preview area, select the
Automatically load new tile when preview panned or zoomed to update the Before preview from
the full input grid.
• To change the maximum grid size that can be loaded into memory, review the Maximum size of
grid for limited utilities setting, in millions of cells, that can be processed by memory restricted
tools. The default 200 million limit is the upper limit of what can be processed on a typical modern
computer.
SAVING THE OUTPUT GRID

Once a grid utility has been applied to a grid and an acceptable output presented in the After preview
screen, click the Save As button to create an output grid file. By default the output grid is named using
the original grid with an appropriate suffix based the grid utility applied and saved to the original file
directory.
To automatically display a new grid in a map window after saving to the nominated output file, check
the Auto open grid when saved box.
If the input grid file does not have an associated TAB file or an embedded projection with an EPSG
code, a dialog will be displayed with a prompt to choose a projection for the output grid. This will be
used to display the grid within MapInfo Pro, and if it is a compatible file type, embedded in the grid file
for automatic display in third party applications.

The projection selected must be the same as the original source grid, otherwise the grid will not display
correctly. The only utility which allows the conversion of grid projections is the utility.
GRID TOOLS
• Classify
Classify each grid cell into one of a number of ranges.
• Grid to Grid
Clip a grid to the non-null area of another grid.
• Clip
Define a region using an irregular polygon or rectangle and remove the portion of the grid that lies
within or outside this region.
• Convert
Input a data grid in one format and save to another grid format.
• RGB Grid
Combine separate grids having red:green:blue colour signatures to a single, multi-banded RGB
grid file.
• Curvature
Compute curvature of each cell in a grid.
• Cut/Fill
Compute the differential volume of material added/removed between two grids.
• Edit
Display and edit a selected grid cell. View surrounding grid cell values.
• Fill Holes
Replace nulls within or around a grid by minimum curvature interpolation using the surrounding
call values.
• Flip
Invert the rows or the columns of a grid in their location either horizontally or vertically.
• Merge
Merge several grids with different extents to form a new grid.
• Outline
Create attributed polygons outlining the bounds of multiple grids.
• Overlay
Modify grid cell values based on vector object attributes in a specified TAB vector file.
• Replace
Replace grid values within a specified range (such as nulls or nominated values) with another
value or null.
• Reproject
Reproject a grid into a new coordinate system.
• Resample
Re-interpolate a grid to a new cell size using one of three available interpolation schemes.
• Rotate
Rotate a grid about its origin or centre.
• Shift
Apply an easting or northing offset to the origin of a grid.

• Slope
Calculate the slope angle or aspect (dip direction) of each cell in a grid.
• RGB Split
For multi-banded grids, split the bands into separate, component grids.
• Statistics
Compute statistics for a grid, or the cells contained by one or more overlying vector objects, or by
regions in a classified grid.
• Surface Area
Compute the 3D surface area, planar area, and roughness of cells ina grid.
• Vectorize
Convert a grid into polygons defining individual cells, non-null regions, regions of discrete values,
or the grid bounds.
• Viewshed
Compute the view-shed of one or more towers of a specified height above the grid to an observer
at a specified height above the grid.
• Volume
Calculate the volume between two grids or the volume of a grid above or below an elevation (Z).
CLASSIFY
SURFACES>Utilities>Classify
The Classify grid utility enables an input grid to have the value of each cell classified into one of
a number of ranges. By default, the input grid is automatically classified into 5 bins. Each bin
represents an equal data range spread between the minimum and maximum grid values. The
output cells are assigned a bin value of 1 to 5 based on the input cell value range.
Click the Auto button to modify the Input classification range and the Number of classifications or bins
in the output grid. By default, the bin or classification values start at 1 and increase by 1, but can be
changed by setting a new Output value start and Output value step. These settings are saved in the
registry and are used as the defaults next time the Classify utility is run.
You can also define the bin ranges manually:
• To edit a bin range, click the From, To, or Value box and type or edit. To specify a null value, type
"null".
• To append a new row, click Add row.
• To insert a new row, select the row after where you wish to insert, and click Insert row.
• To delete a row, select the row and click Delete row. Hold down the SHIFT or CTRL keys to select
multiple rows for deletion.
• If the grid has been coloured by range breaks, click the Load ranges from grid's colouring breaks
button to populate the From, To, and Value boxes so each bin falls into pre-existing data breaks
ranges.
CLIP TO GRID
SURFACES>Utilities>Clip to Grid
Clip a grid to the extents of an overlapping grid.
Note Both input grids must have the same projection and grid cell sizes.

TO CLIP A GRID TO THE BOUNDS OF ANOTHER GRID:

1. Select the main grid (i.e. the grid to be clipped) from the listing of available grids at the top of the
Grid Tools dialog.
2. Select the secondary grid to clip against (i.e. the grid whose extents the source grid will be clipped
to) in the Clip to Grid pull-down list. If this is a multi-banded grid, select the appropriate band from
the adjacent pull- down.
3. Select a clipping Action:
• Select the Clip to extents of secondary grid action to remove the portion of the main grid that
lies outside of the secondary grid.
• Select the Blank grid underneath secondary grid action to remove the overlapping portion of
the main grid.
4. The output grid is displayed in the Preview window. Click Save As to generate the output clipped
grid.
CLIP
SURFACES>Utilities>Clip
Clip a grid to a bounding polygon or rectangle.
Note The input grid and vector file (if specified) must have the same projection.
When a grid is clipped, where possible, the size of the grid is minimized and nulls and unused whole
rows or columns removed. This can substantially reduce the size of a large grid if only a small portion
is extracted.
Clipping is based on the grid cell centre. Hence, cells that are intersected by the boundary are not
necessarily included. To increase the clipping accuracy, use the Resample tool to reduce the cell size.
TO CLIP A GRID BY A BOUNDING POLYGON:
1. Select the grid to be clipped from the listing of available grids at the top of the Grid Tools dialog.
2. Under Clipping region, select Polygonal.
3. To define the polygon, either:
• Select the MapInfo Pro table containing the polygon to clip against (a tenement boundary or
project area, for example).
• Select a polygon in the grid map window from an existing layer or the cosmetic layer.
4. Select a clipping action:
• Select the Clip grid to region action to remove the portion of the main grid which lies outside
of the clipping region.
• Select the Blank grid underneath region action to remove the overlapping portion of the grid
that lies outside the clipping region.
grid.
TO CLIP A GRID BY A A RECTANGLE:
1. Select the grid to be clipped from the listing of available grids at the top of the Grid Tools dialog.

2. Under Clipping region, select Rectangular.

3. To specify the rectangle, either:
• Adjust the polygon displayed in the After preview window by clicking the + and - buttons next
to the grid Min and Max X and Y corner extents.
• Select the Pointer mode tool and, in the After preview window, click at any corner of the
desired rectangle and drag the cursor to the opposite corner.
4. Select a clipping action:
• Select the Clip grid to region action to remove the portion of the main grid which lies outside
of the clipping region.
• Select the Blank grid underneath region action to remove the overlapping portion of the grid
that lies outside the clipping region.
grid.
CONVERT
SURFACES>Utilities>Convert
Selected grids can be converted (or exported) to an alternate grid format.
The formats available are:

• Arc/ESRI ASCII
• Arc/ESRI FLT binary BIL
• ERMapper Geosoft ASEG GXF
• MapInfo MIG Minex
• Surfer
• Vertical Mapper
Note The projection will usually be preserved in the output format if it is supported. But the colouring
and appearance will not be preserved in third-party software.
TO CONVERT A GRID TO ANOTHER FORMAT:
1. Select the grid to be converted from the listing of available grids at the top of the Grid Tools dialog.
2. From the Save as type box, select the output grid format.
3. (Optional) The output grid can be changed. Selecting a smaller Datatype (therefore resulting in a
reduced range) will result in a smaller output file size, but truncation of data may occur. Truncated
data will be capped to the minimum or maximum value of the data type's range. This option
should therefore be used carefully.
4. (Optional) Change the output grid Null value, if required.
5. Click Save As to export the file.

RGB GRID
SURFACES>Utilities>RGB Grid
The Create RGB tool allows three grids (assigned to the primary colour bands Red:Blue:Green) to be
combined to produce a single RGB image. These images are generally used to display multi-
component data such as spectrometry (for example, Potassium, Uranium and Thorium).
The input grids can be Range Clipped by either a single percentile, multiple percentiles or multiple
value ranges. Data within the specified range will be assigned a value of between 0 and 255. Input data
below the bottom clip will be assigned a value of 0, whilst data above the top clip will be assigned a
value of 255.
The Thresholding option assigns an output value of 255 to all input data within the specified clipping
range. All data outside this range is assigned a value of 0. This will produce an image of up to 8 colours
(black, white, red, green, blue, yellow, cyan and magenta).
Note Each input grid must have the same projection, data extents, and grid cell sizes.
CURVATURE
The Curvature utility calculates the curvature of a surface at each cell centre. Three types of
curvature grids are available:
• Profile curvature is estimated along the direction of maximum slope
• Plan curvature is estimated across the direction of maximum slope
• Surface curvature is computed as the difference between the Profile and the Plan curvatures.
The method used to create the curvature grids is as follows.
Curvature is computed for the centre cell (e0) within a 3x3 kernel such as:
e1 e2 e3
e4 e0 e5
e6 e7 e8
The first step is to estimate the coefficients D through H of a quadratic polynomial equation that fits the
3x3 window.
z = Ax2y2 + Bx2y + Cxy2 + Dx2 + Ey2 + Fxy + Gx + Hy + I
where
D = [(e4 + e5)/2 - e0] / CellSize2 E = [(e2 + e7)/2 -e0] / CellSize2
F = (-e1 + e3 + e6 - e8) / 4 x CellSize2 G = (-e4 + e5) / 2 x CellSize
H = (e2 - e7) / 2 x CellSize
The Profile Curvature is estimated along the direction of maximum slope and is computed as:
Profile Curvature = -2 [(DG2 + EH2 + FGH) / (G2 + H2)]
The Plan Curvature is estimated across the direction of maximum slope and is computed as:

Plan Curvature = 2 [(DH2 + EG2 - FGH) / (G2 + H2)]
The Surface Curvature is the difference between the Profile and Plan and is computed as:
Surface Curvature = -2 (D + E)
A positive curvature indicates that the surface is upwardly convex at that point, whilst a negative
curvature indicates that the surface is upwardly concave. A value of zero indicates that the surface is
flat.
CUT FILL
The Cut/Fill tool calculates the volume difference between two grid files, and creates a new grid
file in which each cell represents the volume difference.
It also classifies the areas where material has been added or removed. For two grids of the same area
at different time periods (i.e. temporally related), a grid or vector file can be created representing the
regions where material has been added, removed or remained unchanged.
The volume between the two grids is calculated by subtracting each bottom grid cell Z value from the
corresponding top grid cell Z value and then multiplying by the top grid cell width (X) and height (Y).
Note Both input grids must have the same projection and grid cell sizes.
TO CALCULATE THE CUT AND FILL VOLUMES BETWEEN TWO GRIDS:
1. Select the first/initial grid in the top grid list - it will be populated in the Before grid area.
2. Select the final grid from the After Grid pull down list (if a multi-banded grid is selected, choose
the appropriate band from the adjacent pull- down).
3. Set the Output Type:
• Cut/Fill Classes
An output Grid or Vector file will be created. Each grid cell or vector region will have a value
indicating the change type:
0 > no change in volume
1 > material has been added (Fill)
2 > material has been removed (Cut)
The output vector file (.TAB, .MIF or .SHP) will also be attributed with the cell Count, Area and
Volume change for each region. The option Make generated regions hollow will produce
uncoloured vector regions.
• Volume Differences
An output grid will be created, with each grid cell indicating the volume difference (negative
for volume cut/ removal, positive for volume fill/addition) between the Before and After grids
4. Press the Save As button and select the output file name, location and type.
The following additional values will be displayed within the Cut/Fill dialog when the Before and After
grid is selected:
• Fill Volume (1)
The volume where the After grid is above the Before grid.

• Cut Volume (2)

The volume where the After grid is below the Before grid.
• Volume Change
The volume difference between the two grids (the Fill Volume minus the Cut Volume).
EDIT
SURFACES>Utilities>Edit
Select and modify individual data values in a grid. The Edit utility displays all the grid cell values
in spreadsheet row and column format.
Select the Pointer mode button in the preview area and move the cursor over a grid cell in the preview
window. The spreadsheet is automatically re-displayed to show the data values of the selected grid cell
and the surrounding grid cells. If the level of zoom is inappropriate, select the magnifying glass zoom
in or out buttons and adjust the view.
To enable more accurate selection of a grid cell check the Show selected cell in preview box in the
Settings dialog. The cursor location in the preview window is now displayed as a large cross-hair.
To modify a selected grid cell, double-click inside the spreadsheet cell and enter a new value.
Selected grid cell and displayed data value available for editing
Right-click on a cell to display the shortcut menu: Copy Selection, Paste, and Fill Selection. The Fill
Selection option allows the currently selected cells to be populated with either a constant user-defined
value or null value.

Fill value dialog
FILL HOLES
SURFACES>Utilities>Fill Holes
The Fill Holes tool is used to replace nulls in a grid by interpolating the surrounding data values.
Two Fill Holes options are available:
• Fill internal holes only
Only internal holes or null grid cells which are not connected by nulls to the outer edge of the grid
are given a new interpolated value.
• Fill internal holes and nulls surrounding grid
All null grid cells in the grid are replaced with interpolated values.
The method used to fill holes is based on interpolation the surrounding cell values by the minimum
curvature algorithm, similar to the method used in Interactive Gridding, to populate the hole's cells.
Note that this does not support large grids.
FLIP
SURFACES>Utilities>Flip
Flip a grid horizontally and/or vertically.
Two flipping options are available:

• Flip horizontally
The order of the columns in the grid is reversed to produce a horizontal flip.
• Flip vertically
The order of the rows in the grid is reversed to produce a vertical flip.
No change is made to the number of rows or columns of a grid in this operation and the extent and
origin of the grid in unchanged.
MERGE
SURFACES>Utilities>Merge
The Merge grid tool allows multiple grids (overlapping or non-overlapping) to be combined into
a single output grid. A number of data handling options are provided for overlapping cell values.
Note Both input grids must have the same projection. For best results, the grids should also have
the same cell size.
Within the Merge grid dialog area, select the source grids from the pull-down list and use the Add (or
Add All) button to add these to the Grids to merge window below. Selecting grids from this pull-down
list will not force a refresh of the preview screen each time a grid is selected, which is useful when
dealing with large grids. The preview screen can be manually refreshed using the Update button. Grids
can be removed from the Grids to merge window using the Remove button.

A primary grid must be highlighted in the Grids to merge window; the Merge tool will use this grid's cell
dimensions for the output grid.
A range of Overlap combining methods are provided for handling of overlapping grid cells:
• Minimum
• Maximum
• Average
• Sum
• Grid order
GRID ORDER
To adjust the ordering of layers, use the Up and Down arrow buttons next to the list. The first grid
in the list will be the top-most value used if it overlaps with other grids. The last grid in the list
value will only be used when no other grids overlap it.
Interpolation will be used to resample any differing grid cell sizes to the largest cell size, select
from:
• Bilinear
The value of a grid cell in the new grid is assigned the weighted value of the four surrounding
grid cells in the original grid.
• Bi-cubic
Uses the weighted value of 16 surrounding grid cell values in the original grid to interpolate
the value a grid cell in the new grid. This method requires more processing but is more
accurate than bilinear interpolation. Bicubic interpolation also produces a smoother grid.
Simple interpolation whereby the new grid cell value is taken from the closest grid cell in the
original grid.
OUTLINE
SURFACES>Utilities>Outline
The Outline tool allows the bounds of multiple grids to be outlined as polygons in a single output
vector file. Each bounding polygon is attributed with the source grid file name, and its minimum
and maximum X and Y coordinates.
This is a useful way of visualizing the extents of multiple regional airborne surveys, such as
aeromagnetic and gravity surveys.
Note Each input grid must have the same projection.
OVERLAY
SURFACES>Utilities>Overlay
The Overlay tool enables grid cells to be classified using points, polygons, and polylines from a
specified MapInfo Pro TAB or MID/MIF vector file. The dialog is enabled once an appropriate
vector file is opened using the Browse button.
Note The input grid and vector file must have the same projection.
The Overlay tool allows both the Overlay value (cells overlayed by the vector file objects) and the
Background value (non-overlayed cells) to be specified to:

• Null (blank)
• Input grid
• Constant value
In addition the Overlay Value can be set to a numeric field from the selected TAB file, by selecting the
Overlay Field. If there are any overlapping objects in the vector file, the numeric value from the field
can be handled according to the options:
• First Object
• Last Object
• Minimum value
• Maximum value
• Average (Mean)
• Range
• Sum
• Median
The method used to determine if a grid cell is located within a polygon, is whether the centre point of
the cell is located within the polygon. Note that some partially covered cells may not be included due
to this. To increase the accuracy you can use the Resample utility to decrease the cell size.
A Buffer zone may be specified by the user to control how wide these objects appear in the overlay
output. The default buffer zone of 0 means that a polyline will create an overlay that is approximately
one grid cell wide. e.g. A buffer value of 15 will create a line overlay with a width of 30 metres (15
metres each side of the line). Points will result in a circular coverage with a radius equal to the buffer
zone. Polygon boundaries are also extended by the buffer amount.
REPLACE
SURFACES>Utilities>Replace
Replace all instances of a specified grid cell value with a new value.
This operation is especially useful when manipulating null values within grids. The value of a Null
may differ with different grid formats but the Grid Tools compensates for this.
Use Replace From...To...With to replace nulls or values, such as negative values.
REPROJECT
SURFACES>Utilities>Reproject
Surface grids can be reprojected between projected (e.g. UTM), geographic (e.g. lat-long) and
custom coordinate systems. This operation relocates the various pixel locations in the grid
through an interpolation method to match the requested output coordinate system.
In the .TAB file associated with a registered grid the coordinates for the grid extents are stored as both
real-world coordinates and grid pixel coordinates along with the coordinate system details. When a grid
is reprojected to another coordinate system, a new grid and .TAB file is created containing the real-
world coordinates in the new projection and the new coordinate system details. The following example
details how to reproject an elevation grid from UTM projection AMG Zone 55 (AGD84) into MGA Zone
55 (GDA94) projection.

1. Select the source grid from the list of available grids at the top of the Grid Utility dialog. This will
populate the Source coordinate system with the grid's projection.
Note If the tool cannot recognize the grid projection, use the Choose button to select the
appropriate source projection. Alternatively, ensure that this grid is in the front mapper
window before opening the Reproject tool to automatically populate this projection.
2. Use the Choose button under the Target coordinate system window to select the output projection
using the Category and Category Members options.
Note The projection list available in the Datamine Discover Grid Reproject tool is stored in a
separate file to the MapInfow.prj file. Therefore not all the projections in the MapInfow.prj
will be available for selection in this utility. If you wish to reproject grids into a custom
coordinate system which has been added to the MapInfow.prj file then copy the custom
projection line into the Encom.prj file located in
C:\Users\USERNAME\AppData\Roaming\Encom\Common\Projections.
3. Select an Interpolation Method from the following:
• Bilinear
The value of a grid cell in the new grid is assigned the weighted value of the four surrounding
• Bi-cubic
Uses the weighted value of 16 surrounding grid cell values in the original grid to interpolate
the value a grid cell in the new grid. This method requires more processing but is more
accurate than bilinear interpolation. Bicubic interpolation also produces a smoother grid.
original grid.
4. Click Update after selecting an interpolation method.
5. Select a name for the reprojected grid file by clicking on the Save Asbutton.
By default, a new reprojected grid file and .TAB file are created using the original grid name and a
"_reproject" extension. To change the output file name, click on the new name and modify. Click
Save to create the reprojected grid files.
Note Check the Use NTv2 grid-shift method if available box when reprojecting grids between
NAD27 and NAD83 Canadian coordinate systems or AGD66 and AGD84 Australian systems.
RESAMPLE
SURFACES>Utilities>Resample
The Resample tool enables new grid cell dimensions to be calculated for a grid. Specify a New
cell Height or a New cell width for the interpolated cells. The height and width are the same
because Datamine Discover can only use square grid cells.
To create a resampled grid three interpolation methods are available:
• Bilinear
The value of a grid cell in the new image is assigned the weighted value of the four surrounding
• Bi-cubic
Uses the weighted value of 16 surrounding grid cell values in the original grid to interpolate the
value a grid cell in the new grid. This method requires more processing but is more accurate than
bilinear interpolation. Bicubic interpolation also produces a smoother grid.

original grid.
After a cell size and method have been chosen, click the Update button to force the preview processing
to proceed and review the result in the preview pane.
ROTATE
SURFACES>Utilities>Rotate
Rotate a grid a specified angle. An angle that is positive causes the rotation to be clockwise and a
negative angle will rotate the grid anticlockwise. Grids may be rotated about the grid centre or the
bottom-left hand corner. Three interpolation methods are available for the rotated grid cell values:
• Bilinear
The value of a grid cell in the new image is assigned the weighted value of the four surrounding
• Bi-cubic
Uses the weighted value of 16 surrounding grid cell values in the original grid to interpolate the
value a grid cell in the new grid. This method requires more processing and is more accurate than
bilinear interpolation. Bicubic interpolation also produces a smoother grid.
original grid.
SHIFT
SURFACES>Utilities>Shift
The Shift tool enables the origin of a grid to be moved horizontally and/or vertically. Specify an
Offset from the original grid X or Y origin or enter New grid origin X and Y coordinates manually
Once the shift parameters are entered click the Update button to display the new grid origin in
the After preview pane.
SLOPE
SURFACES>Utilities>Slope
The Slope tool analyses the eight cells surrounding each grid cell and determines the slope
angle in degrees or the slope direction for each grid cell. The slope angle or direction is then
stored as the cell value for the output grid.
The slope direction is measured in degrees clockwise from the grid Y (north) axis. The slope direction
indicates the downwards direction of the maximum gradient (slope) of the cell.
The direction is calculated by
(180/pi) x atan2(dz/dy,-dz/dx)
Where dz/dy is the rate of change from above to below the cell (vertically) and dz/dx horizontally across
the cell's left and right neighbours.

The rate of change in the x direction for cell 'e' is calculated with the following algorithm:
dz/dx = ((c + 2f + i) - (a + 2d + g)) / 8
The rate of change in the y direction for cell 'e' is calculated with the following algorithm:
dz/dy = ((g + 2h + i) - (a + 2b + c)) / 8
The slope is the maximum value of slope across the cell, where a percentage value of 100% is equal
to 45 degrees gradient. the algorithm calculates this by comparing each of the 8 neighbour cells, and
then
(180/pi) x atan(sqrt([dz/dx]^2 + [dz/dy]^2))
To convert the slope direction into a driectional aspect-e.g. N, NE, and so forth-use the Classify tool to
classify each cell by its slope direction.
RGB SPLIT
SURFACES>Utilities>RGB Split
The Split utility enables the individual bands of a multi-banded grid (including RGB grids) to be
output to single band grids.
STATISTICS
This tool calculates a range of standard Statistics for either:
• The entire grid.

• Grid cells enclosed or intersected by any objects in a vector file, either totally or partially overlying
a grid. The vector file can be composed of a mixture of object styles.
• Grid cells within classified regions in another classified (i.e. integer) grid.
The grid statistics which are computed include:
• Number of cells
• Number of valid (non-null) cells
• Number of null cells
• Minimum cell value
• Maximum cell value
• Mean (average) cell value

• Range (minimum to maximum cell value)

• Variance (average of the square of the difference between the cell value and the mean)
• Standard deviation (a measure of the "spread" of cell values equal to the square root of the
variance)
• Sum of all grid cell values
• Percentage of null cells
For large grids, only the preview tile area statistics will be displayed until the Save As button is used to
process the full grid and save the results.
Any statistical values which can be computed, for example due to no valid cells in the region or
negative values, will be written as -9999.
INTEGER GRID
An "integer grid" is a grid which has been classified into a set of discrete values,
i.e. by using the Classify tool. Typically these will be integers, but it may also be decimal numbers
and can contain null areas.
The regions used for statistics will be area of the integer/classified grid which have the same
value (including null value).
One selected output property (statistical value) can be created.
When Save As is clicked, or the batch process run, a grid will be created containing cells
attributed by the select property.
Note Each input grid must have the same projection, cell size, and should overlap.
VECTOR FILE
If a unique identifier field exists for each vector object (e.g. sample number, rock code, etc), this
field can be set as the ID Field. The attributes in this field will be used as an identifier in the output
file for each vector object., The Objects to process option allows the user to either create
statistical output for all object types in the vector file, or one style in particular (points, lines or
polygons).
If an object lies partially or entirely outside the grid file extents, this portion of the object will
ignored for the statistics. For example, a polygon which is half area outside the grid, will still be 0
or 0% null cells, provided there are no null cells in the grid. Averages etc will be calculated based
on the cell count, not the polygon area.
Clicking the Save As button will create a new MapInfo Pro vector file named
vectortablename_stats), with each input object attributed with its calculated statistics (as well as
the ID Field if specified). These statistics can also be exported to either a Comma delimited
(*.CSV) or Tab delimited (*.TXT) file using the Export Statistics button.
The method used to determine if a grid cell is located within a polygon, is whether the centre point
of the cell is located within the polygon. Note that some partially covered cells may not be
included due to this. To increase the accuracy you can use the Resample tool to decrease the cell
size.

SURFACE AREA
The Surface Area utility calculates the total 3D surface area and 2D planar area for a grid. It also
calculates the roughness of the surface, which is the surface area divide by the planar area. A
perfectly flat grid (i.e. where every grid cell has the same value) will have a roughness of 1.
The values for the total grid are reported in the dialog in the same units the grid is defined in. Individual
grid cell surface area or roughness values are saved to the output grid.
The algorithm calculates the 3D area by diving each cell into 8 triangles, and calculating the side length
of the triangles by accounting for the slope of the cell edges. It then calculates the area for each
triangle. This is similar to creating a vector TIN and calculating the surface area of this.
Usage examples of this tool include:
• Comparing the relative roughness of different DEM/DTMs.
• Calculating the actual topographic surface area of a catchment/drainage basin, for 'run-off'
studies.
• Analysing the effects of different filters or gridding techniques on the 'topography' of the grids.
Note The preview for either the surface area or roughness will look almost identical with histogram
equalization applied, but the value of the grid cells will be different.
VECTORIZE
SURFACES>Utilities>Vectorize
The Vectorize tool will convert a single grid into a vector file of one or more polygons, using one
of the following modes:
• Generate one rectangular region for each grid cell
Each grid cell of the input grid is converted into a square polygon in the output MapInfo Pro TAB
or MID/MIF file, attributed with the grid cell value. Each output region cell is assigned a grey-scale
colour value based on the input cell value using a simple linear stretch on the data range.
• Generate a region for each discrete grid value
Each unique value in the grid is analysed for contiguous areas and a polygon boundary drawn
around these. This will produce a vector map with polygons bounding areas of homogenous grid
values, each attributed with the unique region valuer. Each output region is assigned a grey-scale
colour value based on the input cell value using a simple linear stretch on the data range.
• Generate a region for each group of non-null values
This produces a separate polygon for each contiguous area of valid (non- null) grid data. For
instance, a series of polygons outlining coastlines could be generated from a DEM by first using
the Classify tool to set all grid cells with sea level heights (and lower) as 'Nulls', then Vectorizing
the resulting grid using this mode.
• Generate a region for the grid extents
Produces a polygon outlining the area covered by the grid cells. This creates the same result as
using the Outline tool, except only for a single grid.
The appearance of the output polygons are controlled by the following options:
• Select the Outline regions check box to display the polygon outline (black).
• Select the Fill regions check box to colour fill each polygon. The colour fill is determined by:

• If the Match output vector colouring to input grid colour check box is cleared or not
available, a grey-scale colour fill is applied based on the data range.
• (Discrete cell polygons only) Select the Match output vector colouring to input grid colour
check box to assign the grid cell colour (see Modify Grid Colours and Shading to set grid
colours) to each polygon fill.
• Select the Make generated regions hollow check box to produce "empty" vector regions without
any fill colour or pattern.
Note It is recommended that large grids are resampled (see Resample) to a larger cell size prior to
using the Vectorize tool to reduce the number of vector polygons.
VIEWSHED
SURFACES>Utilities>Viewshed
The Viewshed tool computes the view-shed from one or more locations of a specified height
above the grid to an observer at a specified height (terrain offset) above the grid. The areas of
the grid that lie within the line of sight are saved to a new grid. This is a useful tool when
considering, for instance, the spatial coverage provided by a series of telecommunication or repeater
towers, or the positioning of fire observation platforms.
Grid Tools Dialog showing Viewshed options

The Viewshed origin is the location from which the line of sight is to be calculated. The X and Y
position of the Viewshed origin can be manually entered or selected by clicking the arrow tool and
selecting a location in the "Before" or "After" preview windows. Alternatively, one or more viewshed
origins or tower positions can be specified by using a MapInfo Pro TAB or MIF file containing point
locations. This TAB/MIF file may optionally include the following fields: sweep azimuth, sweep angle,
height, maximum distance and ID field. These optional fields can be specified for the appropriate
parameters (below) allowing each viewshed origin to have differing values (e.g. different tower heights
and ID's) instead of a single Constant value.
The Height or z-value is the height of the view-point origin above the specified grid; this may represent
a structure such as a transmission tower.
The Maximum distance is the radial extent around the viewshed origin or tower. The line of sight is
calculated for each grid cell within this radius.
Sweep Angle and Azimuth controls are available, limiting the view from a Viewshed Origin to the
specified bearing range.
Setting a Terrain offset adds the specified value to each grid cell (e.g. the height of a receiver or
person) and is incorporated into the line of sight calculation.
The curvature of the earth can also be taken into account when calculating the view-shed by specifying
a Curvature Model. If this option is selected, the grid distance unit needs to be selected to allow the
scaling of the earth's radius to the correct units.
A Gaussian smoothing filter can be applied to the line-of-sight grid to eliminate spurious lines caused
by small irregularities in the input grid. The calculated line- of-sight grid values may also be classified
into one of two options:
• 2 (in/out)
Denotes whether a cell is visible or not from the viewshed origin.
• 3 (in/fringe/out)
Denotes whether a cell is visible, not visible or on the fringe when viewed from the viewshed
origin.
Two Output types are available:
• Grid
If multiple viewshed origins are used (via a .TAB or .MIF file), the tool can Create a separate
coverage grid for each viewshed origin. The output grids will be suffixed with the ID Field (if
assigned), otherwise a 1, 2, 3, etc suffix will be used.
• Polygons
Can only be selected if the Perform Gaussian Smoothing option is enabled. This will produce a
polygon outlining the extent of the viewshed (or combined viewsheds). The polygon table
incorporates a Coverage field, indicating the percentage of the total input grid (null and non-null
cells) covered by the polygon. If multiple viewshed origins are used (via a .TAB or .MIF file), the
tool can Create a separate coverage polygon for each viewshed origin. The output table will
incorporate an ID field, which will be populated with either the specified ID Field (if assigned), or
an integer value (1, 2, 3). The Compress polygons option reduces the number of nodes in the
output polygons by applying Tomek compression (removing details which are smaller than the cell
width). This option is only available for the 2 (In/out) Value Classification.
Note For best results with this tool, it is recommended to enable the Histogram Equalization and
Look-Up Table options.

VOLUME
The Volume tool computes the volume between two grids, or between one grid and a constant
Z value. Examples of use include calculating the volume between:
• The water table and a mining surface.
• A DEM (top surface) and the same DEM after open-cut mining (Overlay a series of attributed
polygons representing mining benches) (bottom surface).
• Upper and lower depth surfaces for a heavy mineral layer in mineral sands
• A DEM and the DEM modified with a new airstrip.
Note Each input grid must have the same projection, cell size, and should overlap.
For large grids, only the preview tile area statistics will be displayed until the Process button is used to
process the full grid.
The volume between the two grids is calculated by subtracting each bottom grid cell Z value from the
corresponding top grid cell Z value and then multiplying by the top grid cell width (X) and height (Y).
Each individual grid cell volume is then added together to compute the final volume. If a constant Z
value is used, this is subtracted from each cell Z value in the grid and used to calculate the volume.
The following volume calculation options are available:
• Compute volume of main grid above secondary grid
Only those cells where the main grid lies above the secondary grid are used to calculate the
volume
• Compute volume of secondary grid above main grid
Only those cells where the secondary grid lies above the main grid are used to calculate the
volume
• Compute total volume between the two grids
All overlapping cells are utilized to calculate the volume, regardless of which grid in is top. The
difference between cell values is treated as absolute i.e. all values are positive.
• Compute volume of main grid above constant Z value
• Compute volume of main grid below constant Z value
The planar area calculated for the main grid selected is also displayed. This can also be calculated
using the Surface Area tool.
Note To save a calculated volume grid, where each cell represents the volume difference at the cell,
use the Cut/Fill tool.
DIVIDING GRIDS INTO TILES

SURFACES>Utilities>Tile Grid
The Grid Tiler allows large grids to be sub-divided or tiled into a number of equally sized smaller
grids. This is useful when a grid file is either too large to open or import into MapInfo Pro, or too
large to modify or interrogate with the SURFACES Ribbon tools.

Grid Tiler dialog
TO SUBDIVIDE A LARGE GRID:

1. Open the Grid Tiler (the source grid does not have to be open within MapInfo Pro)
2. Using the File Open button at the top right of the dialog, select the source grid file (if the grid is
already open within MapInfo Pro, select it from the top pull-down list). A preview of this grid is
displayed along with the grid size information
3. In the Tile Layout section, set the number of tiles to divide the source grid into in both the East-
West and North-South orientations. See Tile Layout for further information.
4. Ensure that the Create .TAB option is enabled in order to automatically create a MapInfo Pro .TAB
file for output tiled grid. It is also recommended to enable the Create .GHX option, to allow the
precalculation of grid statistics for more efficient grid handling (see Computing Grid Statistics for
more information)
5. By default the output grid tiles will be created in the same directory as the source grid: this can be
modified in the Tile Naming section.
6. The output tiles will be named by adding a suffix to the input file name. A number of suffix options
exist - see Tile Naming below for more information.
7. Select the output Tile Format (formats available are ERMapper, BIL, Encom or Surfer grid formats
and press Create Tiles. The grid tiles will be automatically registered in the same projection
system as the input grid file.

TILE LAYOUT
In addition to setting the number of tiles to create along the X and Y axes, you can instead define
the size of the tiles by the distance (width or height) or the number of cells (rows or columns). An
Overlap can also be defined between adjacent tiles as a percentage of the distance (width or
height), or by a number of cells (rows or columns). The overlap interval is applied to both sides of
each tile (east and west or north and south).
If the size of tiles does not divide evenly into the input grid dimensions, the edge tiles will extend
slightly past the source grid bounds. The Crop to grid option will crop these tiles to the extents of
the input grid. The Origin can be set to the Top left or Bottom left so that these edge tiles will be
located at the Bottom or Top row of the grid. Cropped are always located at the right side of the
grid.
TILE NAMING
The suffix applied to the output tiles can either be a Name-Column-Row or Name- Row-Column
format. For either format, the initial tile Origin (i.e. 01x_01y) must be specified as either the
bottom left or the top left corner tile.
The E-W or N-S components (i.e. Column and Row suffixes) of the output tile suffix can each
independently have either a numeric or character format.
Additionally each component can have individual prefixes and/or suffixes. The preview of the
entire Tile name suffix is shown in the example box.
ASSIGNING VALUES FROM A GRID TO MAP OBJECTS

SURFACES>Utilities>Assign Values
The Assign Values menu option assigns grid cell values from the grid to map objects that overlie
them. Grid values can be assigned to both line and region object types. This function could be
used to assign elevations to sample points or to drillhole locations from a digital elevation model
or to assign mean geochem values from a geochemistry grid to overlying geology polygons.
To Assign Values to point objects select a column in the table to store the assigned values.
Assign Values dialog
To Assign Values to overlying polygon or polyline objects, select the map objects from the map window
first. In the Assign Values dialog select the column or columns to store the grid values from the pull-
down lists. Datamine Discover can assign the mean, minimum or maximum grid cell value to each
object.
As well as assigning the values to columns, the values can be reported to the screen.

COMPUTING GRID STATISTICS

SURFACES>Information>Compute Grid Statistics
When a grid file is first opened by Datamine Discover, a summary statistics file (.GHX) is
automatically created. Summary statistics files allow Datamine Discover to handle larger grids
(1GB+) efficiently, and also significantly improve the speed of grid visualization (i.e. colour /
sunshading modification via the Colour Grid tool).
Compute Grid Statistics dialog
The automatically created .GHX file calculates the summary statistics for a specified percentage of the
grid file (as set under PRO>Options>Grid Options). For smaller grids the entire grid is analysed by
default (i.e. 100%), whilst for larger grids a smaller default percentage is used to allow rapid .GHX file
creation. These default sampling percentages should allow.GHX files to be created for most grids
(regardless of size) in less then a couple of minutes.
If more comprehensive statistics are required for larger grids, it is NOT recommended to significantly
increase the default sampling percentages in the Grid Options, as this will impact on the grid loading
time into MapInfo Pro. GHX file creation time is proportional to the sampling percentage: multi-gigabyte
sized grids may take tens of minutes to a few hours when sampled at 100%.
Instead, use the Compute Grid Statistics tool to precalculate detailed GHX files for one or more large
grids prior to opening in MapInfo Pro (e.g. perhaps overnight)
TO CALCULATE STATISTICS FOR ONE OR MORE GRID FILES:
1. The Input for the Compute Grid Statistics tool can be either a single grid file or a directory path (+/
-any subfolders). Use the browse button (top right of dialog) to select a single grid file. If all files in
a directory are to be sampled, enable the All in Directory option (plus the Subdirectories option if
required), then use the browse button to select the target directory.
2. If specifying a directory to sample, a number of Criteria can be set. These include limiting the
target grids to a particular grid format, a minimum file size (MB or column/row count) or age.

3. Sampling sets the proportion of the grid dataset for which summary statistics will be calculated:
the calculation time is proportional to the percentage set. The sampling is done on a row-by-row
basis, for example 50% will sample every second row in the grid file and calculate statistics based
on this. Use Defaults will load the default sampling settings from the Grid Options. All 100% will
set complete (100%) sampling regardless of the grid size. A linear interpolation of the sampling
value is used for grids in each size category. For example a grid with 7500 rows will have a
sampling percentage half way between the Medium and Large sampling percentages
4. When ready, press the Compute Statistics button. The Progress table will display for each grid
being sampled relevant information whilst the statistics processing is in progress.
Note Files will only be added to the progress list once processing has started on the file.
5. Once the .GHX file/s have been created, the grid file/s can be opened into MapInfo Pro/Datamine
Discover rapidly - the automatic .GHX creation process has been bypassed.
GRID OPTIONS
PRO>Options>Grid Options
Grid Options dialog for reading grid files
The Grid Options dialog provides the following:
• Initial visualization options when a grid is first loaded into MapInfo Pro/ Datamine Discover
• Sampling proportions used to calculate the summary statistics file (.GHX) when a grid is first
loaded into MapInfo Pro/Datamine Discover
• Toggles for the various Grid Handlers.
• Default output grid format used by the tools in the SURFACES Ribbon.

INITIAL DISPLAY
This section controls the initial visualization of a loaded grid:
• Colour
Defines what colour table (LUT) is applied: select from any available colour table in the
Datamine Discover LUT directory
• Stretch
The colour method applied, either histogram or linear.
• Sun Angle and Highlights
Enables Sun shading and Sun highlighting.
• Preload Zoom
loads the higher resolution view for one pyramid level of the current grid view. This makes
zooming in and out quicker but increases memory usage.
STATISTICS SAMPLING
When a grid file is first opened by Datamine Discover, statistics sampling is performed to
automatically create a Summary Statistics file (.GHX). Summary statistics files allow Datamine
Discover to handle larger grids (1GB+) efficiently, and also significantly improve the speed of grid
visualization (i.e. colour/sunshading modification via the Colour Grid tool).
Statistics Sampling sets the level of statistics sampling performed based on the grid size (as
defined by the number of rows in the grid). The sampling is done on a row-by-row basis, for
example 50% will sample every second row in the grid file and calculate statistics based on this. A
linear interpolation of the sampling value is used for grids in each size category. For example a
7500 row grid will have a sampling percentage half way between the Medium and Large sampling
percentages.
If more comprehensive statistics are required for larger grids, it is NOT recommended to
significantly increase the default sampling percentages in the Statistics Sampling section, as this
will impact on the grid loading time into MapInfo Pro. To precalculate more accurate .GHX files for
larger grid files, utilize the Compute Grid Statistics tool.
DEFAULT OUTPUT GRID FORMAT
This option sets the default grid format to write when using tools in the SURFACES Ribbon
GRID HANDLERS
A grid file can be read using either a:
• Grid handler (.GH* file)
Allows query and modification of a grid's colour scheme and statistics to be performed on the
grid.

• Raster Handler (.RH* file)

Displays data as a static layer. Grid data cannot be queried or modified dynamically. However
data rendering is slightly faster than when using Grid Handler.
Note Specific handlers should only be disabled if you experience problems loading or
visualizing particular grid formats. We recommend contacting technical support before
doing so.
Note The Encom Grid handlers use a pyramid method to display large grids at a lower resolution
for different zoom levels. The initial single low resolution view of the grid has a fixed size.
When you zoom in, the grid is divided into 4 regions which are loaded at twice the
resolution. This process is repeated until the full resolution of the grid is displayed by many
'tiles'. A limited number of 'tiles' will be cached in memory.

HYDROLOGICAL
SURFACE ANALYSIS
The generation of stream network and watersheds from a topographic grid
surfaces (e.g. DEM or DTM) is required in many disciplines including mineral
exploration, environmental monitoring, hydrology and engineering. The
Hydrology tool in Datamine Discover can be used to assist with the planning
of new stream sediment sampling programs, or determine if previous
conducted surveys have satisfactorily sampled an area. They can also be
used to normalize the analytical results of a survey to stream basin area,
slope and aspect to determine likely source location for dispersion. In
addition these tools can be used to identify erosion prone areas, wetness
indices, potential fuel accumulation for managing forest fire risk and many
other terrain based analysis.
IN THIS SECTION
Hydrology workflow 624
Extract drainage features from a DEM 625
Pit fill options 629
Flow direction options 631
Surface derived drainage 634
Custom outlet derived drainage 636
HYDROLOGICAL SURFACE ANALYSIS 624
HYDROLOGY WORKFLOW
The Hydrology workflow follows several steps starting from a raw topographic grid surface. Each step
can be run independently or as part of a continuous process. The workflow steps are summarized
below:
1. Source digital elevation model (DEM) 2. Calculation of a flow direction grid surface
3. Generation of a Flow Accumulation grid surface 4. Applying a threshold contributing area value to
generate a Flow Threshold grid surface
5. Vectorization of steam networks, with hierachial 6. Delineation of watershed boundaries as polygonal

stream order attributes regions
This workflow can result in the following attributed TAB vector files:
• Stream outlets and stream junctions points.
• Stream network polylines attributed with their hierarchical stream order, stream segment length
and junction nodes.

• Watershed/catchment polygon boundaries for each stream segment or each stream outlet.
• Custom Watershed/catchment polygon boundaries for user-specified outlet locations
In addition to outputing vector TAB files, alternatively output can be generated in grid format, including -
• Stream networks with value corresponding to their hierarchy.
• Watershed/catchments attributed by their ID number.
• Distance to the nearest stream.
Note A watershed is the upslope area contributing flow to a given location. Such an area is also
variously referred to as a basin, catchment, sub-watershed, or contributing area. A sub-
watershed is simply part of a hierarchy, implying that a given watershed is part of a larger
watershed.
The workflow is controlled from the Hydrological Analysis tool, which analyses the watersheds and
streams in a topographic DEM and extract as vectors. The basic operation of the tool is described in
Extract drainage features from a DEM.
The Hydrology module supports topographic models in the following grid file formats (whether created
with the MapInfo Pro Raster module, or imported from a 3rd-party product):
• Arc ASCII • GeoTIFF

• Arc Binary • Landmark
• Arc Gridfloat • MapInfo
• ASEG GXF • Minex
• BIL • MRR (including multi-banded)
• DTED • Surfer
• Encom • USGS
• ERMapper • USGS DEM
• Geopak • Vertical Mapper
• Geosoft
EXTRACT DRAINAGE FEATURES FROM A DEM

Related tools Hydrology
The ANALYSIS>Raster>Hydrology tool will automatically extract drainage features from a DEM
grid and output these as vector files. Streams and their corresponding watersheds can be
delineated from a DEM based on a minimum catchment area threshold and watersheds can be
created for each outlet or stream segment in the network. Catchment areas can also be determined for
custom outlet locations, for example river bed stream samples.
The Hydrological tool has four major functions:
• Pit fill options: Use an existing stream network vector file to burn-in streams (optional). Remove
pits and depressions to ensure hydraulic connectivity within the watershed.
• Flow direction options: Compute flow direction (slope aspect) and slope (gradient) grids.Generate
the contributing area (flow accumulation) grid. Generate a threshold flow grid, based on a defined
minimum catchment area.

• Surface derived drainage: Automatically generate stream network vectors, stream junctions and
watersheds for each stream outlet and/or segment. Generate a Distance to the nearest stream
grid (optional).
• Custom outlet derived drainage: Use Custom outlet points (steam samples) to generate per-outlet
catchments (watersheds) including point attributes. Optionally generate stream networks,
junctions and outlets for the custom outlet points.
Each function produces a number of processed grids or vectors, which are used as input to the next
step. You can re-run each step, without needing to re-run steps prior to this.
Within each step, each output file is marked with Done, Run and Open check boxes. Each of these are:
• Done indicates the file is already present, and is not required to be re-run (If parameters have
changed in previous steps, you will need to re-run to update the results)
• Run will process the output when the Process button is clicked.
• Open will automatically open the output file in MapInfo Pro once it is completed.
By default, all required steps are selected to Run, but only the Drainage output vectors will be
automatically opened when processing is complete.
Once the Process button is selected, the status will be displayed in the execution log.
TO PRE-PROCESS A DEM FOR HYDROLOGICAL ANALYSIS:
1. In the Hydrology tool select the source topography DEM from the Surface drop-down list of
open grids (under Input Surface).
2. Select the correct Elevation unit for the DEM (XY units are automatically determined form the
DEM's Projection).
3. Select the Pit fill options button.
4. For the Pit Fill grid, select the Run and Open check boxes.
5. (Optional) If you have any existing stream vectors, select the Stream Centering check box.
a. Browse for and select the Stream Center vector file (a range of formats are supported).
b. Enter the desired Buffer Width and Drop (elevation offset or 'burn depth') values.
6. (Optional) The elevation range to be pit filled can be limited by selecting the Exclude pits if check
box. For example, to exclude areas below sea level in a coastal DEM, set Elevations < to 0. By
default these are set to the minimum and maximum values for the DEM.
7. (Optional) To preserve any lakes or dams in the DEM, select the Exclude pits if check box, and
enter a Pit depth and/or Pit Area value. Ensure the appropriate area unit is set at the far right.
This defines the minimum depth or area of a pit to preserve as a lake or dam. Then also select
Insert NULL cell at the bottom of any unfilled pits. This will preserve the pits as a drainage point
for the DEM.
8. (Optional) If any grid regions are to be excluded from the pit-filling process (such as lakes, dams,
etc), tick the Polygon Exclusion Mask box. Select the polygon table via the Open button. This will
clip the areas within the polygon(s) from the input grid file before processing starts.
9. Click OK to close the Pit Fill Options dialog.
10. Click Process. Progress will be displayed in the Execution Log and progress bars. The pre-
processed, pit-filled grid, including stream “burning”, will be opened in MapInfo Pro.

TO PERFORM FLOW ACCUMULATION AND THRESHOLDING:

1. From the Hydrology tool select the topographic grid from the Surface drop-down list of open
grids (under Input Surface).
2. Select the Flow direction options button.
3. Select the Run and Open check boxes for the Flow Direction, Slope (drop), Accumulate,
and Threshold grids.
4. Enter the appropriate Minimum Catchment Area. Ensure the appropriate area unit is set at the far
right.
Note It is important that the minimum catchment area is appropriately defined for your DEM and
analysis needs. Specifying smaller values will result in more detailed streams and smaller
watersheds; however the processing time will be significantly increased.
5. (Optional) For comparison against more accurate drainage directions, enable the Run options for
the DInfinity Direction and Slope grids.The output units for these grids can also be configured.
6. Click OK to close the Flow Options dialog.
7. Click Process. Progress will be displayed in the Execution Log and progress bars. The Flow grids
will be opened in MapInfo Pro.
TO GENERATE STREAMS AND WATERSHEDS (CATCHMENTS):
2. Enable the Surface derived drainage option (default on), and select it's adjacent options
button.
3. Select to generate Watersheds for each stream 'Segment' (stream junctions), or for each 'Outlet'
(where a stream exits the DEM).
4. Either 'Ignore' or 'Remove' Edge Contamination. Remove will discard watersheds clipped/
truncated by the edge of the DEM.
5. 'Smooth' the Watershed perimeter for more visually appealing results, or leave as 'Square' to
accurately honor the grid calculations.
6. Select the 'Strahler' or 'Shreve' Stream classification (ordering) method.
7. Select the 'Run' and 'Open' check boxes for the Stream polylines, Junction points and
Watershed polygons vector files.
8. (Optional) Select to generate Stream Grids for the stream network, watersheds and/or distance to
stream. These require the Watershed perimeter to be set to 'Square'.
9. Click OK to close the Stream Options dialog.
10. Click Process. Progress will be displayed in the Execution Log and progress bars. The Streams
and Watersheds will be opened in MapInfo Pro.
TO GENERATE WATERSHEDS (CATCHMENTS) FOR CUSTOM OUTLETS (SAMPLES):
2. Enable the Custom outlet derived drainage option.
3. Browse for and select the Outlet Table containing sample/outlet points.
Note Only point objects from the custom outlets file are used.

4. Select the Options button.

5. Select to generate Watersheds for either:
• each 'Outlet' (where a stream exits the DEM),
• 'Nested' (any overlapping watersheds are "clipped" to remove the overlap),
• each stream 'Segment' (stream junctions), or
• 'Anywhere' .
6. Either 'Ignore' or 'Remove' Edge Contamination. Remove will discard watersheds clipped/
truncated by the edge of the DEM.
7. 'Smooth' the Watershed perimeter for more visually appealing results, or leave as 'Square' to
accurately honor the grid calculations.
8. Select the 'Strahler' or 'Shreve' Stream classification (ordering) method
9. (Optional) Under Custom Outlets, select the 'Snap outlet to D8 stream centerline' option, and
specify the 'Tolerance': this is the distance an outlet point can be moved during processing to
coincide with a stream network. Any outlet points that do not coincide with a stream polyline after
snapping has been applied will be ignored during the catchment generation process.
10. (Optional) Also under Custom Outlets, enable the 'Copy source attribute fields to...' option to
include any attributes for the custom outlets in the output custom watersheds. This is useful to
identify the sample number and any sample measurements for each catchment (watershed) area.
11. (Optional) Select to generate Surface grids for the Stream Network and Watersheds.
12. Click Process. Progress will be displayed in the Execution Log and progress bars. The Custom
Watersheds will be opened in MapInfo Pro.
The processing steps involved (some steps have been omitted for clarity) are shown graphically below:

PIT FILL OPTIONS

• Stream centering (burn-in)
• Pit fill
STREAM CENTERING (BURN-IN)

Stream centering is a pre-process step to "burn-in" an existing stream network vector file to the raw
topographic surface. The algorithm will overlay the stream network polylines onto the raw DEM. In
addition it also applies a buffer width around polylines.
Note Only polyline vectors are used. Points, polygons and lines are omitted from the burn-in
process.
Grid Cells that intersect a stream polyline exactly will be offset by the subtracting Smooth Drop and
also subtracting the Sharp Drop value.
Grid cells that fall within the buffer are offset by a linear interpolation across the Smooth Drop range.
For example:
• DEM Grid cells are 25 m wide
• Buffer Width is 100 m
• Smooth Drop is set to 10 m
• Sharp Drop is 5 m
The cell which a polyline stream intersects will be offset by (- 10m - 5m).
For a 100 m buffer, either side of this intersecting cell a total of 4 cells either side will fall within the
buffer.
The first cell either side of the centre cell will be offset by (- (1/4) *10m). The second cell either side is
then offset by (- (2/4) * 10m), and so forth,
PIT FILL
Pits or depressions areas in a topographic grid surface that are completely surrounded by higher
terrain and can be a relatively common artefact of the interpolation methods used to create them. Pits
are rare in nature, but do occur (e.g. lakes or dams), so a pit filling tool must have the capability of filling
“unnatural” pits or depressions as well as leaving natural ones. Unnatural pits or depressions must be
removed from the topographic grid surface prior to the creation of drainage networks because they are
dead ends to flow and result in a disconnected drainage network.

A 2D representation of the pit fill routine. The pit is filled to the level of the lowest adjacent cell.
The pit fill process involves 'flooding', or filling up, depressions in the topographic grid surface by
detecting cells, or groups of cells, that are lower than all surrounding cells. These cells are then raised
to the elevation of the lowest surrounding cell (known as the 'pour point').
NATURAL PITS AND DEPRESSIONS

True pits and depressions, such as lakes and dams, can be processed by inserting a NULL value cell
in the centre of them, which acts as an outlet point for the grid (typically null cells and outlets will only
occur on the edge of the grid).
A typical topographic grid surface. The grid contains numerous pits (as artefacts of the grid surface interpolation) which would
disrupt the drainage network if not filled. Several pits are nested inside each other.

The topographic grid surface after pit fill. All the pits are now filled in and drainage can now flow smoothly through the network..
FLOW DIRECTION OPTIONS

• Flow direction and slope (D8)
• Flow accumulation
• Define flow threshold
• Flow direction and slope (DInfinity)
FLOW DIRECTION AND SLOPE (D8)

This step takes a topographic grid surface as input and outputs a new grid which represents the flow
direction from each cell to one of its 8 neighbours (either adjacent or diagonally). The most common
and simplest methodology for representing the flow direction is to divide each cell into eight segments
and compute the vector of maximum slope to determine the direction of flow into one of the eight
adjacent cells. This approach is generally referred to as the single flow direction or the 8-direction (D8)
flow model. The direction of flow is determined by finding the direction of steepest slope from each cell.
This is calculated as the change in height value divided by the distance.
An encoding scheme used to represent the flow directions in the output grid. Each cell is attributed with a code representing
the adjacent cell that is in the direction of steepest slope.

A pit filled topographic grid surface prior to flow direction processing.
The flow direction grid created from the topographic grid surface. The value in each cell represents an adjacent cell in the
direction of maximum slope.
There are several limitations to the D8 model, namely that it produces coarse drainage networks
because of the discretization of flow directions at each cell into only one of eight possible directions.
The method is also unable to accurately represent divergent flows (e.g. on a hill slope with convex
curvature) due to the assumption that each cell can drain to only a single neighbour. These simplifying
assumptions make the process more efficient, so D8 is still the most common methodology used in
GIS applications.

FLOW ACCUMULATION
This step calculates the accumulated flow (upslope or contributing area) as the accumulated weight of
all cells flowing into each downslope cell in the output grid. The accumulated flow area of each cell is
taken as its own area (one) plus the area of upslope neighbours that have some fraction of their flow
draining into it. This is usually calculated recursively starting at each outlet point. The flow from each
cell either drains entirely to one neighbour (if the flow angle falls along a cardinal or diagonal direction)
or proportionally between two cells, according to how close the flow direction angle is to the direct angle
to the upslope cells.
The flow accumulation grid. The value in each cell represents the number of cells that flow into it.
DEFINE FLOW THRESHOLD

Stream channels are determined from the flow accumulation grid as cells which have a large number
of upslope cells. Because there can be many cells which have upstream cells it is standard practice to
apply a threshold value to the flow accumulation grid tracing the stream network to eliminate small or
unwanted streams. Determining an appropriate threshold value for extracting stream channels is highly
dependent on terrain morphology and factors such as contributing area climate, slope, soil
characteristics etc.
The level of detail for which streams are delineated is controlled by the minimum catchment area
threshold. Specify a value which represents the minimum contributing area you require for your stream
network. If you choose to create one catchment per outlet then no catchment will be smaller than this
value. If sub-catchments are being generated for each stream segment in the network then the
minimum catchment area will only be guaranteed for the source catchments. Some sub-catchments
may be smaller than the threshold in areas where they enclose downstream junctions.

FLOW DIRECTION AND SLOPE (DINFINITY)

The DInfinity method can optionally be used to generate a Flow Direction and Flow slope grid.
Note Currently DInfinity Flow grids cannot be used to calculate an accumulation or flow threshold
grids. Calculating DInfinity grids will not improve the stream or watershed vector results from
the Hydrology tool.
DInfinity can produce a more accurate Direction and Slope grid, as it produces a continuous slope and
also supports cells out flowing into 2 neighbour cells.
SURFACE DERIVED DRAINAGE

• Stream classification
• Watershed processing
• Distance grid
STREAM CLASSIFICATION
Stream classification (ordering) is a method of assigning a numeric order to links in a stream network.
This order is a method for identifying and classifying types of streams based on their number of
tributaries. The most common systems used to determine ordering are the methods proposed by
Strahler and Shreve.

Strahler method
Shrieve method
In both methods, the most upstream stream segments, or exterior links, are always assigned an order
of one. In the Strahler method, stream order increases when streams of the same order intersect.
Therefore, the intersection of two first-order links will create a second-order link, and the intersection
of two second-order links will create a third-order link. The intersection of two links of different orders,
however, will not result in an increase in order. For example, the intersection of a first-order and
second-order link will not create a third- order link, but will retain the order of the highest ordered link.
The Strahler method is the most common stream ordering method in use. However, because this
method only increases in order at intersections of the same order, it does not account for all links and
can be sensitive to the addition or removal of links.
The Shreve method accounts for all links in the network. As with the Strahler method, all exterior links
are assigned an order of one. For all interior links in the Shreve method, however, the orders are
additive. For example, the intersection of two first-order links creates a second-order link, the
intersection of a first-order and second-order link creates a third-order link, and the intersection of a
second-order and third-order link creates a fifth-order link.
Because the orders are additive, the numbers from the Shreve method are sometimes referred to as
magnitudes instead of orders. The magnitude of a link in the Shreve method is the number of upstream
links.

WATERSHED PROCESSING
The default automatic stream outlets are placed in two locations, either:
• Watershed per stream ‘Outlet’ —simply where a stream exits the edge of the DEM.
• Watershed per stream ‘Segment’ —the outlets are placed at each stream junction, as well as
where the stream exits the DEM.
The watershed polygons are defined for each outlet, and it also exceeds the minimum catchment area
defined for the Flow Threshold grid (see Define flow threshold).
Watersheds (Catchments) which are truncated or clipped by the edge of the DEM grid can be removed
by selecting the Edge Contamination ‘Remove’ option.
The edges of the Watersheds can be smoothed by selecting the Watershed Perimeter ‘Smooth’
option.
DISTANCE GRID
The Distance gridoption will generate a grid attributed by the flow distance to the nearest stream. This
distance is based on the results of the Flow Direction (D8) and the Flow Threshold grids. This can be
useful or analysing rain run-off area/distance, and time.
CUSTOM OUTLET DERIVED DRAINAGE

Customized catchments can be generated based on Catchment Outlet points provided by the user.
The input locations for catchment outlets can be a river mouth, dam or lake, or any sample points that
may or may not occur near streams.
Note To generate custom watersheds, you need to firstly generate automatic watersheds for the
entire DEM. This will define the resolution of the streams and watersheds generated for your
custom outlets.
There are four types of watersheds that can be generated from custom outlets:
• Watershed per Outlet – simply generate one complete watershed for each custom outlet.
• Nested – the watershed are identical to those as Watershed per outlet, however any overlapping
watersheds are ‘clipped’ to remove the overlap. This is useful to separate catchments for when
there is multiple stream samples along the same stream.
• Watershed per Stream Segment – the watersheds are generated for each outlet, and then sub-
watersheds generated for any stream segments within them.
• Anywhere – The watersheds generated represent to "run-off" area for each point, which may or
may not coincide on a existing stream. This is useful for points taken on a alluvial plain or a hill
slope, that you wish to know the potential flow, for example proposed drainage channels.
Note Only the Anywhere mode will allow non-stream based samples. For all other modes the
custom outlet points must occur close to an actual stream, as automatically calcualted by the
tool.
In both cases, the same Watershed processing options are available as for automatic Watershed
processing.

WORKING WITH
STRUCTURAL DATA
Datamine Discover enables geoscientists to record structural data from
structural mapping (linear dip-strike and point features) and oriented drillhole
core (alpha-beta angles) and display the data on maps as annotated
features with industry-standard structural symbology.
Datamine Discover allows the geoscientist to graphically display accurate
structural observations and measurements (whether bedding dip and strike
measurements from outcrop, an unconformity trace across a hillside, or
downhole alpha/beta measurements of quartz veins in diamond core) in
several ways:
IN THIS SECTION
Creating orientated structural symbols from point table data in a map 638
Digitizing orientated structural symbols into a map window 638
Dip and Dip Direction 638
Strike and Dip (Right Hand Rule) 638
Applying structural styles to linear map features 639
Dip and plunge angles 639
Discover structure codes 639
Oriented structural symbols 640
WORKING WITH STRUCTURAL DATA 638
CREATING ORIENTATED STRUCTURAL SYMBOLS FROM POINT TABLE

DATA IN A MAP
Structural measurements can be read from columns in a native MapInfo Pro table. This method
provides a simple method for creating as many symbols as necessary in the one pass.
DIGITIZING ORIENTATED STRUCTURAL SYMBOLS INTO A MAP WINDOW

Structural measurements can be digitized into a map window one at a time. This is useful when there
are measurements on a map that have not been transcribed to a file. In this case, the measurement
location is taken from the digitized point (using a digitizing table or from the screen) and a dialog box
is displayed requesting input for structural data for that location.
The Data Entry module has two methods of digitizing structure symbols using either the
DISCOVER>Data Entry>Capture>Record Entry or DISCOVER>Data Entry>Capture>Enter Data:
DIP AND DIP DIRECTION

Using Dip and Dip Direction is a convenient method of describing a structural measurement, as there
is no confusion with the orientation the bedding plane dips. You do not need to define the direction the
bedding plane dips with characters such as E, NW, S etc.
When digitizing using this method, you have two values a Dip and Dip Direction. The Dip Direction
value ranges between 0 to 360 and describes the azimuth/bearing for example a bedding plane is
dipping. The Dip value ranges between 0 to 90 and describes the angle of the dipping plane. Dip
Direction/Dip is normally written in the following format 180/65, this would be a for a bedding plane
which dips to 180 degrees or south and has a dip angle of 65 degrees.
STRIKE AND DIP (RIGHT HAND RULE)

Using Strike and Dip method can be an ambiguous way of defining structural measurements.
Depending on the person who has recorded the structure there can be confusion to the direction the
bedding plane is dipping. Traditionally you would define the direction of dip with characters such as E,
NW, S etc. This may be a good method visually by is not easily defined mathematically.
For this reason the Right Hand Rule (RHR) can be used, there are numerous implementations of the
RHR, two commonly used are the British and American methods. Datamine Discover uses the
American method, this implementation of the RHR works by the person recording the strike of the
structure such as a bedding plane by looking along the strike of the bedding plane with the dip direction
on the right hand side of your body. For example if you wanted to record a strike of 180 and dip of 65
degrees you would stand along strike looking South (180 degrees), the bedding plane would dip to the
West (270 degrees) at 65 degrees.

Another way to record using the RHR is to lay your right hand with your fingers pointing down the dip
of the bedding plane, orientate your thumb at 90 degrees to your fingers. Your thumb should then point
in the direction of the strike
When digitizing using this method, you have two values a Dip and Strike. The Strike value ranges
between 0 to 360 and describes the azimuth/bearing for example of a bedding plane strike direction.
The Dip value ranges between 0 to 90 and describes the angle of the dipping plane. Strike/Dip is
normally written in the following format 180/65, this would be a for a bedding plane which strikes to 180
degrees or south and has a dip angle of 65 degrees.
Note Be very careful when recording your structural measurements to take note of the method you
have used. If you define the incorrect method your will have your structures orientated 90
degrees in the wrong direction.
APPLYING STRUCTURAL STYLES TO LINEAR MAP FEATURES

Discover can annotate lines with a range of structural symbol as either preset or custom spacings, such
as fold axes (e.g. overturned synclines), normal faults and shear zones. See Apply Geological Line
Styles and Annotations [hyperlink] for more information.
DIP AND PLUNGE ANGLES

A dip or plunge value may be entered for most of the structural types that Datamine Discover supports.
Selected structural types such as wrench faults, trend lines, monoclines, etc. cannot have a dip value.
Datamine Discover expects a value to be entered for dip between 0 and 90. However, there are
instances where a dip has not been measured for a variety of reasons. As dip values are stored in
numeric columns blank dip measurements are stored as zero, indicating a horizontal structure.
When digitizing structure measurements, leave the dip entry blank to indicate no dip measurement was
taken. Datamine Discover will store a value of -99 in the dip column for blank entries. If processing
structural measurements from a table, ensure that values of -99 have been inserted into blank entry
cells in the correct fields. If Datamine Discover finds a null dip value, no dip label is displayed.
DISCOVER STRUCTURE CODES

Structure symbols are based on those described in the Australian Geological Survey Organisation
(AGSO) mapping style guide with the addition of extra symbols such as schistosity, L1-L3 lineations
and general trend lines. A full table of symbols for the Australian, US and Canadian symbol sets,
together with Discover structural codes and keyboard codes, is given in Styles and symbol fonts.
These codes are provided in both a numerical and alphabetical order.
Note For several structure types, such as bedding or cleavage, Datamine Discover uses different
symbols to indicate horizontal and vertical dip.

For the correct display of Structural Symbols (using a Structural Picklist in the Data Entry module, see
Applying structural styles from a picklist), the structural dataset will need a column populated with the
appropriate Discover Codes (see Structural symbol font).
For instance, 'bedding' measurements will require a field with a '1' attribute, whilst 'foliation'
observations would need a '17' code. For existing datasets, this can be accomplished with a
combination of Queries and Update Column operations or, for advanced users, see the Updating
multiple columns.
An example of field descriptions (the 'Type' column) converted into Discover Structure Codes (the 'Code' field) for use with
the Data Entry module.
ORIENTED STRUCTURAL SYMBOLS

The structure symbols are stored in a TrueType font that is available from the MapInfo Pro Symbol
Styles libraries along with the other TrueType symbol fonts that ship with MapInfo Pro and Datamine
Discover. If the symbol font is unavailable, Datamine Discover will plot normal text instead of the
structure symbols. The True Type fonts are installed during the Datamine Discover installation
procedure. If the fonts are unavailable in MapInfo Pro, check the Windows Control Panel>Fonts
directory to see if the fonts are installed.

TENEMENTS
IN THIS SECTION
Tenements module 642
Apply for an Australian mineral tenement 642
Displaying graticular state reference grid 647
Searching Australian tenements 648
TENEMENTS 642
TENEMENTS MODULE
The Tenements module provides an interactive interface for searching existing tenement data and
creating new applications.
• Query tenements by date, licence type and holder information.
• Create applications with interactive State and Datum selection.
• Create polygonized block and sub-block reference grids.
• Create new or modify existing applications by selecting sub-blocks manually or interactively,
including sub-block counter, limit and area checks.
• Generate application reports automatically for entry into standard statutory application forms.
The Tenements module consists of the following tools, which can be accessed from the ANALYSIS tab
in Datamine Discover:
Apply for an Australian mineral tenement
Displaying graticular state reference grid
Searching Australian tenements
APPLY FOR AN AUSTRALIAN MINERAL TENEMENT

Related tasks Create Application
Create new or modify existing applications by interactive sub-block selection, and generate
application reports automatically for entry into standard statutory application forms.
TO MAKE AN APPLICATION:
1. Select ANALYSIS>Tenements>Create Application. The Australian Tenement Application
2. Under Select State, select a state from the map. When a state is selected the corresponding
datum is also selected. For example, selecting WA will select the GDA 94 datum.

TENEMENTS 643
If a datum is selected that does not comply with the current state legislation, then the application
may be invalid.
3. If not previously configured, click Configure to set a workspace or table. On the Configure dialog
box, select Load base table or workspace and type a path for either a MapInfo Pro Table or
Workspace. Click OK to save and return to the main dialog.
Note This is the same as using FILE>Home>Open>Open Workspace.
4. From the Australian Tenements Application dialog box, click OK. The table or workspace
specified in step 3 is opened, and the Define Application dialog box is displayed, from which you
can define the method of application and the tables to be used for application (see Application
tables).
5. In the Application directory box, click the Save button to select (or type the folder path name)
where the application files will be saved. The tables created during the application process
include Application Table, Block Table and Label table.
6. For a new application, under Application region, select Create new and type the application
region name. For example, typing Darlot creates a MapInfo Pro table named Darlot.TAB.
To modify an existing application, select Modify existing, and click the browse button to select the
application table in the adjacent box.
7. Under Application method, select either:
• Define interactively: select sub-blocks from a mapper window.
• Manually define: select sub-blocks manually. This method is not available for Victoria,
Tasmania and South Australia applications.
8. Click Settings to turn on and off the auto-labelling of blocks and sub-blocks.
9. Click OK to create the application. The application tables are created or updated and placed in
the current map window.
For Victoria and Tasmania applications, which use a Universal Transverse Mercator (UTM) Map
Grid of Australia (MGA) grid system, the UTM Zone dialog box is displayed to select the correct
UTM Zone.
10. Depending on the Application method selected, select blocks and sub-blocks. See Interactive
block selection or Manual block selection.

TENEMENTS 644
11. At completion of block selection, for all states except WA, a summary text report is displayed. The
summary report includes the map sheet, block number, sub-block letter, bounding coordinates,
datum, state, total area, and total subblocks/graticules. These details can be copied and pasted
onto the official application forms, which are typically PDF or Microsoft Word formats.
For Western Australia, the forms (Form 21 Attachment 1 and Form 21 Attachment 2) are
presented as MapInfo Pro tables.
All tables required for the tenement application are stored in the Discover tenement directory, which is
defined with PRO>Options>Configuration>Directories, typically C:\Users\All
Users\Encom\Discover\Tenements.
APPLICATION TABLES
APPLICATION TABLE
The application table contains the following fields:
• SubBlock: Block Identification method (BIM) letter
• Map: Map Sheet name either 1:1,000,000 or 1:100,000
• Block: Block Identification Method (BIM) block number
• Merged: Defines the record status, N denotes a single sub-block, Y denotes a merged polygon of
all the sub-blocks
• Area: Area or sub-block in km2

TENEMENTS 645
BLOCK TABLE
The block table stores application block polygons and gridlines for blocks and sub-blocks. The block
table contains the following fields:
• BlockNumber: Block number for selected application
• RecType: Type of gridlines
LABEL TABLE
The label table stores application corner points for the total application area. The Label table contains
the following fields:
• PointID: Number of point
• Latitude: Y coordinate or point
• Longitude: X coordinate or point
• AreaName: Application Region Name
• Map: Blank field for user to update with mapsheet if required
INTERACTIVE BLOCK SELECTION

This selection method is enabled when Define interactively is selected on the Define Application
dialog box. The Select Application Area dialog box is displayed, which displays the current sub-block
selection, sub-block limit and area selected for the selected state.
Click the selection tool and then select or deselect blocks and sub-blocks in the map window. The
selection information is dynamically updated with the selected sub-block count and total area selected.

TENEMENTS 646
Click OK to finish block selection. A number of checks are performed for sub-block count, total area
and non-contiguous blocks. Warning messages are displayed if conditions applicable in the selected
state are not met by the selection.
MANUAL BLOCK SELECTION

This selection method is enabled when Manually define is selected on the Define Application dialog
box. The Manually Define Sub Blocks dialog box is displayed, from which you can select blocks and
sub-blocks on a map sheet.
Click the 1:1 million mapsheet box and select the map sheet, type the block number in the Block
number box, and then select the sub-blocks from the matrix. Click All to select all subblocks in the
selected block. Selected sub-blocks are shown in the Selected sub-blocks box. To add sub-blocks from
other sheets repeat the process until all the desired sub-blocks appear in the Selected Sub-Blocks box.
To delete a block, select the block in the Selected sub-blocks box and click Delete Block.
Click OK to finish block selection. A number of checks are performed for sub-block count, total area
and non-contiguous blocks. Warning messages are displayed if conditions applicable in the selected
state are not met by the selection.

TENEMENTS 647
DISPLAYING GRATICULAR STATE REFERENCE GRID

Related tools Create State Grid
Create polygonized block and sub-block reference grids.
TO DISPLAY THE STATE GRATICULAR REFERENCE GRID:
1. Select ANALYSIS>Tenements>Create State Grid. The State Grid dialog box is displayed.
2. Under Select State, select a state from the map. When a state is selected the corresponding
datum is also selected. For example, selecting WA will select the GDA 94 datum.
If a datum is selected that does not comply with the current state legislation, a warning message
is displayed.

TENEMENTS 648
3. Under Region, in the Name box, type the name of the region.
4. In the Folder box, click the Save button to select (or type the folder path name) where the grid
files will be saved.
5. Click Settings to turn on and off the auto-labelling of blocks and sub-blocks.
6. Click OK to draw the graticular grid.
For Victoria and Tasmania, which use a Universal Transverse Mercator (UTM) Map Grid of
Australia (MGA) grid system, the UTM Zone dialog box is displayed to select the correct UTM
Zone.
Gridline, Block, and Sub-Block layers are created and drawn in the current map window. The tables
created are prefixed with the Region Name and suffixed with either _Grid, _Block, or _SubBlock.
SEARCHING AUSTRALIAN TENEMENTS

Related tools Tenement Search
Tenement data can be searched with the Tenement Search tool.
TO SEARCH AUSTRALIAN TENEMENTS:
1. Select ANALYSIS>Tenements>Tenement Search. The Tenement Search dialog box is
displayed.

TENEMENTS 649
2. In theTenement Table box, select the tenement table to be searched. The tenement layers
available in the Tenement folder are listed. The Tenement folder is defined by
PRO>Options>Datamine Discover>Configuration, typically the C:\Users\All
Users\Encom\Discover\Tenements folder.
3. Under Select holder, select the type of holder search:
• None: Do not restrict search by holder.
• Individual search: Search by tenement holder name.
• Keyword search: Search by keyword or text string. In the Holder column box, select the
search field in the tenement table, or select <All>.
• Alias search: Search by holder group alias. Click Configure to view or define alias groups
(see Manage tenement tables and holder aliases).
4. Under Select date select the type of date search (application date, granted date, or expiry date)
and the date range.
• Under Licence type option select one or more types of licence to be searched (application,
granted and moratorium).
• Under Selection display select how the results of the search will be displayed:
• Browse Selection: display in browser.
• Map Selection: display in map window.
• Zoom map to Selection: zoom map window to the selected search results.
• Selection Statistics: display search summary in browser, including number of tenements
records returned, total area of tenement polygons in km2, area of smallest tenement polygon
in km2, and area of largest tenement polygon in km2.

TENEMENTS 650
5. In the Name Selection box, type a name for the search.

6. Click Search to start the search.
MANAGE TENEMENT TABLES AND HOLDER ALIASES

On the Tenement Search dialog, click Configure to display the Configure dialog box, from which you
can create, edit and delete tenement tables and holder aliases.
TENEMENT TABLES
TO CREATE A NEW TABLE:
• Click New to display the Tenement Table dialog box, from which you can select the folder location
and table name.
TO EDIT A TABLE:
• Select the table in the Tenement tables box, and then click Edit. The Tenement Table dialog box is
displayed, from which you can edit the folder location and table name.
TO DELETE A TABLE:
• Select the table in the Tenement tables box, and then click Delete.
HOLDER ALIASES
A holder alias allows the selection of multiple holder values from a tenement table with an alias name.
TO CREATE A NEW ALIAS:
1. Click New to display the Define Holder Alias dialog box, from which you can select the folder
location and table name.
2. Select the alias in the Holder alias box, and then click Edit.
3. In the Tenement table box, select a tenement table.
4. In the Holder field box, select the field containing holder names.
5. In the Holder alias box, type the holder alias name.
6. Under Select holders, use the controls to move holders from the Available box to the Selected
box, and vice versa.
7. Click OK to save.
TO EDIT AN ALIAS:
1. Select the alias in the Holder alias box, and then click Edit. The Define Holder Alias dialog box is
displayed, from which you can edit the alias settings.
2. The alias settings are displayed, which can be edited.
3. Click OK to save changes.
TO DELETE AN ALIAS:
• Select the alias in the Holder alias box, and then click Delete.

TENEMENTS 651

TOOLS
DATAMINE
DISCOVER TOOLS
This section contains an alphabetical list of all the tools in Datamine
Discover with a short description. To locate a tool, click the tool name to
view the full tool description. Each tool description provides the navigation
path, links to associated task descriptions, and descriptions of dialog boxes
opened by the tool.
IN THIS SECTION
Datamine Discover tools 654
DATAMINE DISCOVER TOOLS 654
DATAMINE DISCOVER TOOLS

Icon Tool Description
3D Coordinates Calculate X, Y and Z interpolated coordinates from

downhole data intervals.
3D Coordinates Display X, Y and Z interpolated coordinates from downhole

data intervals in 3D.
3D Lines Display interactive line objects in 3D.
3D Points Display interactive point objects in 3D.
Toggle Update the 3D window to display selected objects.
Accept Parameters Accept the map scale and page size parameters to create
scaled map.
Accept Parameters Accept the section scale and page size parameters to
create scaled map.
acQuire Import Import tables from an acQuire database into MapInfo Pro.
Align Objects Align selected map objects vertically or horizontally.
Alpha/Beta Convert drillhole alpha and beta measurements into true

dip and direction values.
Apply Picklist Apply multiple picklist styles to MapInfo Pro table.
Apply Style Apply individual picklist style to existing map object or

newly created object.
Area Change Display changes in area or distance for polygonal or line

datasets.
ASCII Import Import ASCII text files into MapInfo Pro.
Assign Values Assign text values from one map object into another map
object

Attribute Composite downhole data by attribute.
Build Object Create map objects from manually coordinate input.
Capture Setup Contains all the required options for setting up the GPS
data capture and default object styles.
Clip Image Clip image file with polygon map object.
Clone Style Copy and paste object styles to map objects.
Close Close the session of scaled output.
Close Close the session of section output.
Close All Close unused, queries or selected MapInfo Pro tables.
Collar Plan Create a collar strip plan for sections.
Colour Labels Colour text objects from a Legend colour pattern.
Colour Table Editor Create and modify colour tables from drillhole data and
features.
Configure Setup DBMS auto-refresh session.
Contour Label Positioner Position contour labels where the contours lines intersect
custom path lines.
Contour Labels Add Z value labels at user-specified intervals to contour

lines.
Convert Image Save image into another file type.
Correlation Matrix Display variance or correlation between selected elements.
Create Application Create and relinquish tenement parcels.

Create Hotlink Create link between selected object and selected file.
Create Section Legend Create a legend for sections or plans.
Create State Grid Create tenement blocks and graticules over a map window.
Cursor Off Disable map window cursor position location.
Cursor On Enable map window cursor position location.
Cursor Setup Select map windows to synchronise the cursor location.
Custom Patterns Create custom region fill styles and apply.
Custom Transform Custom define parameters for transforming coordinates or

map objects.
Data Classification Classify point data by colour, size and style.
Data Normalisation Normalise selected data fields to display trends and

patterns in data.
Data Statistics Display statistics for selected MapInfo Pro table fields.
Datamine Studio Export Export vector, surface and image files to Datamine Studio
DM file format.
DataSight Import Import data from a DataSight database into a MapInfo Pro
table.
Default View Set the default table location and scale for opening a
MapInfo Pro table.
Delete Delete linked MapInfo Pro tables from DataSight database.
Depth Composite downhole data by elevation or downhole depth.

Display Window Open the Select Map Window dialog which displays all
thee open map windows in Datamine Discover.
Display Wizard Display data in 3D with a wizard interface.
Distance Calculator Calculate the distance between map objects matched by

unquie value.
Donut Polygons Excise smaller and overlapping polygons from larger

polygon map objects.
Downhole Clip Clip downhole data with 3D volumes or surface objects.
Downhole Data Create and manage downhole data displays and

templates.
Downhole Info Display downhole data and survey information for a

selected collar.
Downhole Merge Merge multiple downhole data tables to smallest interval.
Drape Image Drape an image over a surface grid to create an EGB file in
3D.
Drillhole DXF Export Export interpolated drillhole traces to a 3D DXF file.
Drillhole Layers Export drillhole project section layers into Datamine Studio
DM file format.
Drillhole Sections Export drillhole project section plane and envelope into
Datamine Studio DM file format.
Drillhole Tables Export drillhole project tables into Datamine Studio DM file
format.
Drillhole Traces Export drillhole project drillhole traces into Datamine Studio
DM file format.
Dynamic Grid Create a dynamic map grid over the current map window.
ECW/JP2 import Import ECW, ECWP and JPEG2000 files into MapInfo Pro.

Edit Data Edit the source native MapInfo Pro tables of a drillhole
project.
EGB Export Export map window as geo-referenced EGB image.
EGB Import Import geo-located EGB file into MapInfo Pro.
Enhance Image Modify image colour, contrast and brightness properties.
Enter Data Enter valid data into a MapInfo Pro table in multiple record
view.
Extract Nodes Extract map object nodes as point symbols.
Extrusion Wizard Extrude 2D planar objects into 3D solids in 3D.
Favourite MapBasics Create a list of favourite MapInfo Pro MBX applications.
Favourite Projections Create a list of commonly used projections for quick

access.
Favourite Tables Create a list of favourite MapInfo Pro tables.
Favourite Workspaces Create a list of favourite MapInfo Pro workspaces.
Filter Image Apply filters to enhance image definition.
Format Text Format text size, scale, angle and style for text objects.
Generate Logs Create log graphs for selected collars.
Generate Sections Create vertical and plan view drillhole sections.
Geophysical Filters Apply geophysical Fast Fourier Transform filters, remove

edge effects, and remove internal holes.
Geosoft Import Import tables from a Geosoft database GDB file into
MapInfo Pro.

GeoTag Setup Setup and import geotagged images.
GeoTag Viewer View geotagged images from point object in map window.
gINT Import Import gINT drillhole database into a project.
GPS Setup Contains all the required options for setting up GPS.
Grade Composite downhole data by grade, distance or internal

dilution.
Graph Overlay Create and manage GraphMap vector selection overlay

files.
Graphing Display and interactively analyse data in graph plots.
Grid Toggle Toggle support between Surfaces and Raster Modules.
Hydrology Create and analyse drainage surface grid data.
Insert Nodes Insert nodes into map objects at user specified distance.
ioGAS Import Import ioGAS GAS file into MapInfo Pro.
Label Angles Modify the angle of automatic labels displayed in MapInfo

Pro.
Label Creator Create advanced scaled labels for a MapInfo Pro table.
Labels from Table Update text labels from data in a selected column.
LAS Import Import LAS 1.2 and 2.0 files into a drillhole project.
LAS Template Create and manage templates to import and append LAS
files.
LAS Viewer View LAS 1.2 and 2.0 files in tabbed display.

Leapfrog Export Export vector, surface and image files to Leapfrog file
format.
Legend Editor Create, modify and import legend patterns to apply to

downhole data templates.
LIDAR LAS Import Import LIDAR LAS files into MapInfo Pro.
Line Annotation Create and define custom line styles for selected line
objects.
Line Annotation Select Manually place line style annotations at mouse cursor
location.
Line Cut Cut a map object with a selected line object.
Line Join Join selected line map objects together based on distance
and search angle.
Line Orientation Calculate and display the orientation of selected line

objects.
Line/Point labels Create labels for point data along traverse lines.
Location Info Interactively display coordinates, field values, distance and

bearing between map objects.
Logs Display downhole log charts as images in 3D.
Manage Project Manage, export and delete drillhole projects, including

modifying source table and column assignments.
Map Grid Create a map grid over the current map window.
Map Legend Create a legend from map window objects.
Map Linking Link multiple map windows to display the same field of
view.
Map Size Resize linked map windows to same dimensions.

Map to Image Save the current map window display to an image file.
Map Window Display map window contents as image in 3D.
Mapper State Save and restore map window to previous size and scale.
Max/EOH Calculate values for the maximum and EOH for each
drillhole.
Micromine Import Import Micromine DAT or STR files into MapInfo Pro.
Minesight Export Export vector table as MineSight SRG file.
Modify Bounds Modify the coordinate bounds for a vector table.
Modify Image Modify image and color transparency.
Modify Parameters Modify the map scale and page size parameters.
Modify Parameters Modify the section scale and page size parameters.
Mulit-Column Update Update multiple fields in a MapInfo Pro table joined by a

unique value.
Multi-Append Append multiple MapInfo Pro tables to another table.
Multi-File Open Open multiple MapInfo Pro tables from several folder
locations.
Multi-MIF Export Export multiple vector tables as MIF files.
Multi-MIF Import Import multiple MIF files into MapInfo Pro.
Multi-Section Register and display multiple cross-section images in 3D.
Multi-Table Reproject Reproject multiple MapInfo Pro vector tables

simultaneously.

New Project Create a new drillhole project
Object Builder Automatically create objects from coordinate data in

selected column.
Object Manager Create and display topographic objects into a 3D display

window.
Offset Object Offset and duplicate a map object by specified distance

and number.
Open Open DataSight data using a query template.
Open 3D Window Open the Datamine Discover 3D application.
Open 3D Workspace Open files from MapInfo Pro and Datamine Discover 3D as
a workspace.
Open Hotlink Open the defined Hotlink file.
Open Project Open an existing drillhole project.
Open Session Load drillhole project sessions.
Pause Temporarily stop the data capture.
Picklist Manager Create, delete and modify picklist libraries.
Plot Vectors Plot velocity or flow vectors to indicate direction and

magnitude of data.
Point Create a point object at the current GPS receiver location.
Point Trace Create a series of point objects at the specified time or

distance intervals from the Capture Setup Settings tab.
Polybuilder Clean and create polygons from polylines.

Polyline Create a polyline object with nodes at the specified time or

Polyline Label Positioner Position contour labels where the contours lines intersect
custom path lines.
Polyline Labels Add Z value labels at user-specified intervals to contour

lines.
Print Sections Create a scaled section display in the Layout Designer for
printing.
Projection Info Display projection information for the map window.
Properties Image Display image type and registration information.
Proximity Search Perform search around selected vector object by specified

distance.
Recenter Manually center the live GPS position on the selected map
window.
Record Entry Enter valid data into a MapInfo Pro table in single record
view.
Rectify Image Register and rectify image file into the specified geographic
projection.
Refresh Refresh linked MapInfo Pro tables from DataSight

database.
Refresh Refresh changes to ioGAS GAS file in MapInfo Pro.
Refresh Manually update DBMS linked table.
Refresh 3D Data Refresh changes made to data in MapInfo Pro in 3D.
Refresh Off Stop DBMS auto-refresh session.
Refresh On Start DBMS auto-refresh session.

Region Create a region object with nodes at the specified time or

Reproject Coordinates Reproject vector objects to a defined projection system.
Reproject Image Reproject image file into another projection.
Resource Calculator Estimate a commodity resource for a section.
Restore Restore the map scale after zooming or panning.
Restore Workspace Open the last automatically saved workspace.
Resume Resume a paused data capture session.
Reverse Line Reverse the drawing direction of a selected line map

object.
Revert Table Revert edits or modifications in a MapInfo Pro table.
RGB Colourizer Colour map objects from a column containing RGB or BGR
values.
Rotate Image Apply defined or custom rotation to image.
Save 3D Workspace Save files from MapInfo Pro and Datamine Discover 3D as
a workspace.
Save Table Save edits or modifications in a MapInfo Pro table.
Scaled Frame Create a scaled layout frame.
Scaled Output Create a scaled frame in a layout with grid and titleblock
adornments.
Search and Replace Search and replace selected string values from a selected
column.

Section Grid Create map grid for drillhole section.
Section Image Export Export geo-referenced image to 3D.
Section Layer Display section layers in 3D.
Section Layer Export Export layers from a section to registered 3D DXF file.
Section Manager Manage drillhole, trench and plan drillhole sections.
Sections Display drillhole sections as images in 3D.
Seismic Sections Display SEGY velocity and depth models in 3D.
Select by Attribute Query a table by unique field text attributes.
Select by Style Query map objects by selected object style.
Session Manager Open and save drillhole project session workspaces.
Setup Connect and configure to a DataSight database.
Setup Hotlink Setup the field for defining the object Hotlink.
Setup Table Setup tables with validation rules for data entry.
Smooth Lines Smooth polyline objects by adding new nodes.
Split by Attribute Split MapInfo Pro table into several tables based on a field
attribute.
Stacked Profiles Display graphical trends in select data on grid line

datasets.
Standard Views Save and apply user defined map location views.

Stop End the data capture session.
Structural Symbols Apply structural point symbols to a point table.
Structure Manager Modfiy the structure, field types and order of MapInfo Pro
vector tables.
Subset Project Subset a drillhole project by collar HoleID.
Surfaces Display surface grid file in 3D.
Table from Labels Update selected column from text labels.
Table Sort Sort designated fields in MapInfo Pro table.
Tenement Search Search for tenement parcels in MapInfo Pro table.
Thin Node Number Reduce nodes in lines by specified number.
Thin Node Position Reduce nodes in lines by specified distance value.
Title Block Create custom titleblock with user defined scale.
Transform Object Transform map objects by move, rotate and scale

operations.
Traverse Lines Create traverse lines and pegs from a baseline for a
sampling campaign.
Trench Traces Display trench traces in 3D.
Trivariate Classification Classify point data by three field multi-variate relationships.
Unique Identifier Assign a unique number/alphanumeric value to each

record in a MapInfo Pro table.
Update Coordinates Update X and Y coordinate values for map objects or into a
browser.

Vector Clip Clip vector objects in a map window with a polygon map
object.
Vector Export Export vector table files into another file type.
Vector Import Import vector files from numerous data sources into
MapInfo Pro.
Vector Transform Transform and/or reproject a vector file(s) into another file
format.
Vectors Display vector data as DXF file in 3D.
Vectors Display vector data as DXF file in Discover 3D.
Voronoi Polygons Create voronoi polygons from selected point map objects.
Vulcan Export Export vector table as Vulcan Archive file.
Vulcan Import Import Vulcan Archive ARCH_D files into MapInfo Pro.
Waypoint Create a waypoint.
Window Animator Create a movie or animation of changes from a map

window.
Window to Object Resize the map window to the selected map object. Map
window must be floating to resize.
WinLoG Import Import WinLoG drillhole database into a project.
Workspace Advanced Open and analyse corrupt MapInfo Pro workspace file.
Workspace Editor Modify workspace table paths and settings.
Workspace Export Package MapInfo Pro tables into a workspace for export.
Zoom to Object Zoom map window to the selected map object bounds.


PRO TAB
The PRO tab provides access to the tools and resources needed to manage
your Datamine Discover installation.
IN THIS SECTION
Add-Ins 670
Options 671
Tool Search 674
PRO TAB 670
ADD-INS
PRO>Add Ins>Datamine Discover
LICENSE MANAGER
Related tasks Licensing Datamine Discover
Opens the License Manager to enable licence activation and transfer.
HELP
Related tasks Getting help
Opens Datamine Discover Help. Datamine Discover Help is a comprehensive and accessible
reference and contains all topics found in the Datamine Discover User Guide.
KNOWLEDGE BASE
Opens Datamine Discover Knowledge Base. The online Knowledge Base contains useful
information that is regularly updated, including how-to articles, tips and tricks, error messages
and their resolutions and video tutorials.
UPDATES
Related tasks Checking for Datamine Discover updates
Click to check for product updates. Maintenance Releases are released regularly to resolve
critical issues identified by our development and technical support teams, as well as clients.
3D HELP
Related tasks Viewing data in three dimensions
Opens Datamine Discover 3D Help. Datamine Discover 3D works seamlessly with Datamine
Discover and MapInfo Pro to display mapped data in an interactive three-dimensional
environment.
VIDEOS
View Datamine Discover video tutorials. Tutorial videos are a great way to learn about some of
the advanced features our products have to offer, whether you are a new or experienced user.
PRODUCT IMPROVEMENT
Related tasks Product Improvement Initiative
Choose to participate or stop participating in the Product Improvement Initiative (PII). The PII
helps Datamine to better understand user workflow and interaction with Datamine Discover.
ABOUT
Related tasks Introducing Datamine Discover

PRO TAB 671
Display information about the installed version of Datamine Discover.
MANUALS
Related tasks Viewing and printing the electronic manuals
Opens the Documentation folder, which containing PDFs of Datamine Discover documentation,
such as User Guides and Quick Start Guides.
OPTIONS
CONFIGURATION
PRO>Options>Datamine Discover>Configuration
Related tasks Configuring Datamine Discover
The install program configures each installation to the default settings, including Datamine
Discover directory locations, status bar settings, and autosave interval. You can customize
these settings at any time. Displays the Configuration Dialog Box.
CONFIGURATION DIALOG BOX

Related tasks Viewing and changing Datamine Discover directory locations
DIRECTORIES TAB
Set the locations of directories used by Datamine Discover to store your configuration settings and
other installation-specific information.
FILE PATHS
Related tasks
By default, the Datamine Discover configuration folders [defaults are shown in brackets] are
created under the shared data location
[disk:\Users\username\AppData\Roaming\Encom\Discover]. By default, these folders are
hidden and read-only. The Datamine Discover install automatically elevates permissions for All
Users to read/write to these folders.
CONFIGURATION FILES
[.\Discover\Config] folder containing tables and text files used to store a variety of system and
user-defined settings. Users require read-write access to this folder. Click the browse button to
display the Configuration Directory Dialog Box.
TEMPORARY FILES
[.\Discover\Temp] folder containing temporary tables. Can be set same as the MapInfo or
Windows temp folders. Users require unrestricted access to this folder. Click the browse button to
display the Configuration Directory Dialog Box.
During a Datamine Discover 3D session various files are created for display and management of
the 3D displays. By default, this is the same directory as the Datamine Discover Temp directory.
HOTLINK FILES
[ ] folder containing hotlink files. Click the browse button to display the Configuration Directory
Dialog Box.

PRO TAB 672
TENEMENT FILES
[.\Discover\Tenements] folder containing tenement tables. Click the browse button to display the
Configuration Directory Dialog Box.
PICKLIST FILES
[.\Discover\Picklists] folder. Click the browse button to display the Configuration Directory
Dialog Box.
ENCOM.PRJ PATH
[.\Discover\Common\Projections] folder containing Encom projections file. Click the browse
button to display the Configuration Directory Dialog Box.
LEGEND/LUT PATH
[.\Discover\Common\Legends_LUT] folder containing legends and lookup files. Click the browse
button to display the Configuration Directory Dialog Box.
VIEW MANAGER FILE
[.\Discover\Common\ViewManager\viewmananger.set] View Manager settings file. Click the
browse button to display the Configuration Directory Dialog Box.
REMOVE 3D TEMPORARY FILES
When the Datamine Discover 3D window is closed, any files present in the nominated Temporary
Directory are removed if this option is enabled.
TITLE BLOCK TAB

Related tasks Customizing title blocks
Set the default entries displayed on title blocks.
NAME OPTIONS
COMPANY NAME
Displays your company name. Click to edit.
OFFICE NAME
Displays your office location. Click to edit.
USER NAME
Displays your user name. Click to edit.
DISPLAY TAB
Related tasks Controlling the interface
Overriding the default map status bar display
Autosaving and restoring the workspace
Organizing your MapBasic tools
Set Datamine Discover display options, including user level, Status Bar, Tool Search and auto-save
interval.

PRO TAB 673
MAPINFO PRO/DISCOVER OPTIONS

USER LEVEL
Choose either <Standard> or <Advanced> level.
Note The advanced level allows the user to simultaneously run multiple tools. However, this may
result in data loss when concurrent operations are performed on the same data table.
STATUS BAR
Overrides the MapInfo Pro Status Bar display (Zoom) default when a new Map window is opened.
Select a display option:
• Cursor Position: Displays the cursor position in map coordinates.
• Zoom (Window Width): Displays the width of the Map window in map units.
• Map Scale: Displays the map scale.
• Cartographic Scale: Displays the cartographic scale.
WORKSPACE SAVE (MINS)
Set the workspace auto-save interval in minutes.
DISCOVER 3D OPTIONS
IMAGE RESOLUTION
Raster images are used to show draped pictures over surfaces or at defined elevations etc. The
amount of detail used in these images impacts on the drawing speed of Datamine Discover 3D. If
the detail of an image is increased the redraw speed is decreased but the information provided in
the images is increased. If you select a value of 2x, Datamine Discover 3D creates an off-screen
bitmap that is 2x the size (in width and height) and 4x the size in pixels of the selected Map window.
IMAGE TRANSPARENCY
Set default transparency to % for all located images
POINT SIZE
Sets a default size for 3D Point symbols in Datamine Discover 3D displays (measured in map
distance units)
LAYOUT DESIGNER IMAGE
The desired width and height (in pixels) of images created in Datamine Discover 3D.
NOTIFICATIONS TAB
Select when Datamine Discover sends or displays notifications.
NOTIFICATION OPTIONS
DISPLAY PROGRAM TIPS
Select to display tips and tricks from the Datamine Discover Knowledge Base.
CHECK FOR PROGRAM UPDATES
Select to automatically check when an update (maintenance release) is available for Datamine
Discover.

PRO TAB 674
SEND USAGE STATISTICS

Select to send anonymous usage statistics to Datamine.
RIBBONS TAB
Related tasks Controlling the interface
Select from a range of variant ribbon interfaces, such as workflow versus data-orientated ribbons.
Additionally, control which tabs are displayed for the selected ribbon.
RIBBON LAYOUT SETTING
RIBBONS
Select a preferred ribbon interface.
TABS
Hide and show tabs on the selected ribbon.
CONFIGURATION DIRECTORY DIALOG BOX

Related tasks Viewing and changing Datamine Discover directory locations
Select Discover folder settings:
• All users: All users on the same machine share the same Discover configuration folders, using
the installer template folder - C:\ProgramData\Encom\Discover.
Note This option is not recommended as it requires Administrator permissions, and you will lose the
ability to reset settings to the defaults.
• Current user: Users with separate logins on the same computer have separate Discover
configuration folders. Creates the selected configuration folder under
C:\Users\username\AppData\Encom\Discover.
• Custom: User-defined path on a local or network drive. By default this is set to either the MapInfo
Pro or Datamine Discover program folder or sub-folders.
TOOL SEARCH
Related tasks Organizing your MapBasic tools
Tool Search lets you search for tools available from the Datamine Discover ribbon layout by name or
keyword. To change Tool Search settings, click the Options button in Tool Search to display the Tool
Search Options Dialog Box.
TOOL SEARCH OPTIONS DIALOG BOX

TEXT SIZE
Set the font size in pts.
MAXIMUM TOOL LIST
Limit the size of the recently used list of tools.
TRANSPARENCY
Change the transparency of the results list (0 = opaque).

PRO TAB 675
CLEAR TOOL LIST

Reset the list of recently used tools.

DISCOVER TAB
Tools are listed in left-to-right order as they appear on the DISCOVER tab in
the default ribbon layout. If you are using a customized layout, you can
locate a tool name in Datamine Discover tools, which gives an alphabetical
list of all tools.
TOOLS IN THIS SECTION

FILE
Open Table 679
Save Table 679
Revert Table 679
Close All 679
Vector Import 679
Multi-File Open 679
Multi-MIF Import 680
ASCII Import 680
acQuire Import 684
DataSight Import 685
EGB Import 688
ECW/JP2 import 689
Geosoft Import 690
ioGAS Import 691
LIDAR LAS Import 692
Micromine Import 693
Vulcan Import 693
Multi-MIF Export 694
Vector Export 694
Datamine Studio Export 694
Leapfrog Export 695
Minesight Export 695
Vulcan Export 695
EGB Export 696
Vector Transform 697
MANAGE
Structure Manager 697
Modify Bounds 697
Default View 697
Open Hotlink 698
Setup Hotlink 698
Create Hotlink 698
Configure 698
Refresh On 699
Refresh Off 699
Refresh 699
Workspace Export 699
Workspace Editor 699
Workspace Advanced 699
Restore Workspace 700
Favourite Tables 700
Favourite Workspaces 700
Favourite MapBasics 700
OUTPUT
Scaled Output 700
Map Legend 703
Scaled Frame 705
Title Block 706
Map Grid 707
Dynamic Grid 710
Label Creator 711
Line/Point labels 712
Polyline Labels 714
Polyline Label Positioner 714
Format Text 716
Label Angles 717
Colour Labels 717
Labels from Table 718
Table from Labels 718
Window Animator 719
PROJECTION
Projection Info 721
Favourite Projections 721
Update Coordinates 722
Custom Transform 723
Reproject Coordinates 727
Multi-Table Reproject 727
Reproject Image 728
Reproject surface 728
WINDOWS
Mapper State 728
Standard Views 728
Cursor Setup 729
Map Linking 730
Map Size 731
DATA ENTRY
Picklist Manager 731
Setup Table 731
Record Entry 731
Enter Data 731
Structural Symbols 731
Apply Picklist 732
Apply Style 732
MODE
Tablet Mode 732
Desktop Mode 732
DISCOVER TAB 679
FILE
OPEN TABLE
DISCOVER>File>Open Table
Open a MapInfo table.
Related tasks Opening and closing tables
SAVE TABLE
DISCOVER>File>Save Table
Save an open table.
Related tasks Opening and closing tables
REVERT TABLE
DISCOVER>File>Revert Table
Undo changes to a table.
Related tasks
CLOSE ALL
DISCOVER>File>Close All
Closes unused tables, query tables, selected tables, or all open tables.
Related tasks Closing all tables
VECTOR IMPORT
DISCOVER>File>Import>Vector Import
Imports a wide range of 2D and 3D vector formats into a MapInfo Pro table.
Related tasks Import vector files
MULTI-FILE OPEN
DISCOVER>File>Import>Multi-File Open
Opens multiple tables from different folders into one map window, separate map windows, an
open map window, a browser windows, or as no view.
Related tasks Opening multiple tables

DISCOVER TAB 680
MULTI-MIF IMPORT
DISCOVER>File>Import>Multi-MIF Import
Import multiple MID and MIF files from different folders.
Related tasks Importing multiple MID/MIF files
ASCII IMPORT
DISCOVER>File>Import>ASCII Import
The Datamine Discover Advanced ASCII Import tool is designed to import external multi-
column ASCII data files into a MapInfo Pro .TAB file.
Displays the ASCII Data Import dialog box.
Related tasks ASCII data
ASCII DATA IMPORT DIALOG BOX

Imports a columnated (fixed column width) or delimited ASCII data to a MapInfo Pro table (.TAB) file.
After you have made your selections on the dialog box, click the Import button to import the selected
input file. You will then be asked to select the name of the TAB file that is created to contain the
imported data, and to select a projection.
EXPAND/CONTRACT
Show and hide advanced import settings.
OPTIONS
Click to display the ASCII import options, from which you can display and edit import options,
including:
• Save path name of import template file.
• Rename easting and northing fields to X and Y.
• Auto-classification options.
• Output null value.
FIELD SUMMARY
Displays a list of all the assigned column names and field data types.
SAVE FORMAT
Save the ASCII import settings for later use. Enter a name for the template. Make sure to save the
import template before you start importing the data or the format information will be lost.
LOAD FORMAT
Reload a saved template. Choose the template file (.i3) from the Open dialog box.
INPUT FILE
Displays the ASCII file to be imported.

DISCOVER TAB 681
OPEN
Click to browse for the input file.
SHOW HEADER
Show and hide header lines in the Data preview area.
IGNORE CHARACTERS
To pre-process or filter out unwanted characters from the ASCII dataset, type the characters to
ignore (such as *, %, $, #, @ or ?). Once defined, the Data preview is updated, and the characters
will not be imported.
LINE NUMBERS
Files may contain a line field or a separate line that specifies the start of each new survey line.
IMPORT THE LINE/HOLE FIELD
Select if the file contains a column containing a line or hole identifier.
HAS INTERSPERSED LINE NUMBERS (GEOSOFT XYZ FORMAT)
Select iif the file contains interspersed line numbers. When selected, there is no need to select a
Line field.
LINE NUMBER PREFIX
Type the line number prefix.
INCLUDE LINE PREFIX IN OUTPUT
Select to include the line prefix in the output. For example, if the prefix is “Line,” the line number is
“Line 1020” with the prefix or “1020” without the prefix.
HEADER
If available, column names can be read from the header lines. Header lines are displayed in the
Data preview area as green text and are separated from the data by a horizontal line.
To manually define column names, right-click on the column label in the Data Preview area and
select from the Fields shortcut menu.
NUMBER OF LINES IN HEADER
Click or type to change the number of header lines.
FIELD NAMES ARE IN HEADER ON LINE
Select if the header contains field names and click or type the line number that contains the field
names.
STARTING AT CHAR
Skips leading characters in each field name.
GET FIELD NAMES
Click to update the field names assigned in the Data preview.
COLUMN FORMAT
When first loaded, the type of file (fixed width or delimited) is determined automatically. Use the
following options to modify the file type and column format settings.

DISCOVER TAB 682
• Fixed width: Select if field values are confined within the same character positions on every
line.
• Delimited: Select if field values are separated by spaces, tab characters, or other delimiters.
• Comma delimited: Select if file is a CSV (comma separated values).
COLUMNS
When first loaded, the columns are determined and are displayed in the Data preview area with
vertical separator lines. With fixed-width data, you can add and edit columns in the Data preview
box:
• To add a column break, click the position.
• To delete a column break, move the cursor over the vertical line until the cursor shape
changes, and then double click.
• To move a column break, drag it to a new position. Hold the CTRL key to move all columns to
the right of the current column.
RESET WIDTHS
Click to return columns to their original widths.
CLEAR NAMES
Click to remove all column names. Names are reset to Skip.
AUTO-NAME
Click to name all skipped columns with a sequentially numbered prefix. Before auto-naming, you
can set columns to Skip, by either right-clicking on the column label and selecting Skip this field
from the shortcut menu, or clicking the Clear Names button to reset all field names to Skip.
COMMENT LINES
IGNORE LINES STARTING WITH
Type the character or text string used at the start of the unwanted lines. Enclose each entry in
double quotation marks and separate multiple entries with commas. For example: “#”,”//”, “/”
DATA PREVIEW
Displays the first 100 data records of the file specified for import. If the data is not suitable for
import (e.g. binary file or an unsupported text file), a warning message is displayed. If no data is
loaded the message “No data loaded” is displayed in the data preview area.
Right-click on a column heading to display the Fields shortcut menu, from which you can assign
field names, select the field type, and add or delete column labels.
Refer to Header, Column format and Columns sections for information on setting column widths
and field names.
EDIT
Click to display the entire file in an external text editor. The default editor is WordPad. To change
the editor, click Options.
FIELDS SHORTCUT MENU
Displayed from the Data preview box on the ASCII Data Import dialog box.

DISCOVER TAB 683
PROPERTIES
Displays the Properties dialog box, from which you can display, edit and create fields names, edit
field properties, and the treatment of null values.
SKIP THIS FIELD
Set field name to Skip. Column is not output.
SET AS X (EASTING/LON) FIELD
Set the X coordinate field.
SET AS Y (NORTHING/LAT) FIELD
Set the Y coordinate field.
SET AS Z (ELEVATION) FIELD
Set the Z coordinate field.
SET AS STATION FIELD
Set the Station field.
INSERT COLUMN LABEL
Insert a new field name and shift the existing labels to the right.
DELETE COLUMN LABEL
Delete a field name and shift the existing labels to the left.
PROPERTIES DIALOG BOX

Display, edit and create fields names, edit field properties, and the treatment of null values.
FIELD PROPERTIES
NAME
Click to select a standard field name (X, Y, Z, Depth, Azimuth, Fiducial, and such), or type a name
in the box.
DATA TYPE
Click to select the field data type. Types include: Floating point, Integer, String, Deg Min Sec, Time,
Date and DateTime.
<DEG MIN SEC>
The Deg Min Sec data type has a format of dddmmss.sc or ddmmss.sc, e.g. 334510.05N =
33 deg north, 45 min, 10.05 sec. The fractional seconds part (.s) is optional. To discriminate
which hemisphere the input coordinates are located in, a suffix of E or W will determine which
hemisphere from the Greenwich Meridian the input coordinates are located in. A suffix of N or
S will determine which hemisphere from the Equator the coordinates are located in. The
coordinate values will be prefixed with either a + or -.
NULLS
Input data fields containing an asterisk, a single minus sign or blank are automatically treated as
null values. Nulls are written to the .TAB file as blanks for text (string) fields or zeros for numerical
fields.

DISCOVER TAB 684
STRING INTERPRETED AS NULL INPUT VALUE

Type a different null specifier string, for example –999.
APPLY TO ALL FIELDS
Apply the null specifier to all input fields.
OPTIONS DIALOG BOX

FORMAT FILES
USE LAST FORMAT FILE (*.I3) BY DEFAULT
When an import template is loaded, the path name of the last loaded or saved template will be
used. Clear to load the template from the same folder as the input data file.
X AND Y FIELDS
RENAME SELECTED EASTING FIELD TO X AND SELECTED NORTHING TO Y
Select to rename easting and northing columns to X and Y.
AUTO-CLASSIFY BEHAVIOUR
HIDE HEADER WHEN CLASSIFIED
Select to hide the header lines in the Data preview when the file is classified.
SHOW DIALOG COMPACTED
Select to hide advanced options on the ASCII Data Import dialog box when the file is classified.
NULLS
OUTPUT NULL VALUE
Null value inputs can be specified under the Properties dialog when right clicking on a particular
field. To specify the output value of a defined null value, type in for example -9999 into the Output
null value dialog box. Subsequent to importing the ASCII file, the defined null values will populate
the MapInfo Pro Browser.
EDITOR
EXTERNAL EDITOR
The input file can be previewed with an external editor of the user’s choice as set under the Editor
option. By default this is set to WordPad.exe.
ACQUIRE IMPORT
DISCOVER>File>Import>acQuire Import
Imports drillhole or geochemical data from an acQuire database into MapInfo Pro tables. This
tool uses the acQuire database API to select and query an acQuire database.
Displays the Import from acQuire dialog box.
Related tasks acQuire

DISCOVER TAB 685
IMPORT FROM ACQUIRE DIALOG BOX

MODE
Select either Drillholes or Point samples.
COMMANDS
SELECT DATA FROM ACQUIRE
Click to display the Select Data from acQuire dialog box, from which you can create an SQL query
and select the data from the acQuire database.
CHOOSE MAPINFO PROJECTION
Click to select a MapInfo Pro projection for the collar data.
IMPORT
Click to start the import.
OPEN DATABASE
Select to open a browser window during the import.
CREATE MAP
Select to display spatial data in a map window.
LOAD ACQUIRE PARAMS
Click to re-load a saved acQuire database query.
SAVE ACQUIRE SETTINGS
Click to save the acQuire database query settings.
SELECT DATA FROM ACQUIRE DIALOG BOX

Connects to an acQuire database and creates an SQL database using the acQuire API interface. Click
Connect to select a connection. Refer to the acQuire documentation for information about creating
database connections and how to use the acQuire API interface to select the data you want.
CHOOSE OUTPUT FILES DIALOG BOX

Select a path name and a file name for each of the imported drillhole or geochemical data tables. When
the path name of the first data table is selected, default names are created for each of the remaining
tables. You can edit the default names. Clear the Import check box to prevent importing unwanted
tables. The collar data is always imported.
DATASIGHT IMPORT
DISCOVER>File>Import>DataSight Import
Setup a database connection, select and import tables from a DataSight database, and manage
open tables.
Related tasks DataSight

DISCOVER TAB 686
SETUP
DISCOVER>File>Import>DataSight Import>Setup
Sets up the connection to a DataSight database on an SQL Server.
Displays the Setup Database Connection dialog box.
SETUP DATABASE CONNECTION DIALOG BOX

Related tasks Server authentication
Access methods
SQL SERVER
Type the name of a SQL Server instance hosting one or more DataSight databases
BROWSE
This dialog allows you to choose from a list of SQL Server instances detected on the network
AUTHENTICATION
Choose either Windows Authentication or SQL Server Authentication. Refer to your SQL Server
administrator to determine which option to use.
USER NAME AND PASSWORD
If using SQL Server Authentication, type valid login for that SQL Server. (Disabled if using
Windows authentication)
REMEMBER PASSWORD
Check this to save the password for future sessions.
SELECT DATABASE
Type the name of a DataSight database in SQL Server.
BROWSE
This dialog allows you to choose from a list of databases detected on SQL Server (requires a valid
login)
TEST CONNECTION
Confirms that the login details are valid, and a connection to the database can be achieved.
OPEN CONNECTIONS
Shows the connection string for any open database connections.
IMPORT
DISCOVER>File>Import>DataSight Import>Import
Creates an SQL query for an available DataSight database connection and opens the data in a
MapInfo Pro table.
Displays the Import from DataSight - Step 1 of 2 dialog box.
Related tasks Prerequisites for using the DataSight import tool
Using the DataSight import tool

DISCOVER TAB 687
IMPORT FROM DATASIGHT - STEP 1 OF 2 DIALOG BOX

Related tasks Using the DataSight import tool
SELECT DATABASE TABLE
DATABASE
Choose a DataSight database from the current database connection
AVAILABLE TABLES
Choose a table from the database to import into MapInfo Pro
ADVANCED TABLE FILTER
Click to filter the list of tables displayed in the Available tables box. The Advanced Table Filter
SELECT FIELDS AND CRITERIA
You may pick which columns to return from the DataSight table by moving them from the Available
to the Selected box.
REFINE SELECTION CRITERIA
Select to display the Simple and Advanced tabs, from which you can create an expression to filter
table records.
SIMPLE TAB
Define a row filter for the imported table by selecting a Field, Operator and Value to create a
WHERE condition for the query. Additional criteria can be added by AND or OR in the Join box.
ADVANCED TAB
Allows you to edit the SQL statement for the query.
NEXT
Displays the Import from DataSight - Step 2 of 2 dialog box.
ADVANCED TABLE FILTER DIALOG BOX

Choose to show tables, views or system tables.
IMPORT FROM DATASIGHT - STEP 2 OF 2 DIALOG BOX

Related tasks Using the DataSight import tool
MAPINFO TABLE OPTIONS
Choose either linked tables, live access, or live access with cache.
MAPINFO OUTPUT TABLE
Specify the file name and path for the imported table. If linked tables was selected a copy of the
SQL data will be placed here. If live access was selected, only a .tab file pointing to the database
table will be created.
TABLE IS MAPPABLE
Point objects will be created in MapInfo Pro if this box is checked. This option requires that Latitude
/ Longitude (or Easting and Northing) data exists in the DataSight table / query.

DISCOVER TAB 688
SYMBOL
Allows you to choose a symbol style for the point objects.
PROJECTION
Allows you to specify the projection in which the DataSight coordinates were created.
MAKE PROJECTION DEFAULT
Checking this will cause the currently selected projection to be the default.
OPEN
DISCOVER>File>Import>DataSight Import>Open
Opens a table from a list of previously imported DataSight tables.
REFRESH
DISCOVER>File>Import>DataSight Import>Refresh
Refreshes a MapInfo Pro table from a DataSight table through the SQL Server.
DELETE
DISCOVER>File>Import>DataSight Import>Delete
Deletes open DataSight tables.
EGB IMPORT
DISCOVER>File>Import>EGB Import
Imports EGB (Encom georeferenced bitmap) files created in Discover PA or Datamine Discover
3D. EGB files are text header files that are used to open and display image files such as .BMP,
.JPG and .PNG in 3D geo-referenced space.
Displays the EGB Import dialog box.
Related tasks EGB
EGB IMPORT DIALOG BOX

Related tasks EGB
Imports an EGB (Encom Georeferenced Bitmap) file into a MapInfo Pro table.
FILE DETAILS
INPUT EGB FILE
Click the browse button to select the EGB file to be imported.

DISCOVER TAB 689
OUTPUT TAB FILE

Click the browse button to select the output folder and the output TAB file name.
USE TRANSPARENT COLOUR FROM EGB
If defined, select to import the transparent colour setting from the EGB file.
SET PROJECTION
Click to select a MapInfo Pro projection. The projection defined in the EGB and the selected
projection are displayed.
COORDINATE TRANSFORM
Select the fields in the EGB file that you want mapped to the X and Y coordinates fields in the
output table. For example, you can map the Z field in a vertical section as the Y field in the map
window.
ECW/JP2 IMPORT
DISCOVER>File>Import>ECW/JP2 Import
Imports ECW and JP2 format, located, raster image files from either the local disk or from an
Image Web Server.
Displays the ECW/P/JP2 Import dialog box.
Related tasks ECW/JP2
ECW/P/JP2 IMPORT DIALOG BOX

Related tasks ECW/JP2
OPEN
• Open ECW or JP2 file: Open a file from the local disk or network.
• Open file from Image Web Server (ECWP): Open a file from an Image Web Server.
FILE
Click the Open button to select the input file and location. When selected, the image is displayed
under Preview, and its properties are displayed under Image properties.
IMAGE PROPERTIES
The properties of the selected image file are displayed.
COLUMNS X ROWS
Displays the number of columns and rows in the raster grid. Click to display additional
information about the grid.
GRID INFORMATION
Click to display information about the raster grid, including the coordinate range, number of
columns and rows, and other data.
IMAGE PROJECTION
If available, the projection defined in the input file is displayed.

DISCOVER TAB 690
MAP PROJECTION
To change or set the image projection, click the browse button and select a MapInfo Pro projection.
Note Do not override the image projection. To reproject an image after it has been imported, use
Images>Reproject Image.
TOP LEFT
Displays the top-left coordinates registered in the input file.
PREVIEW
The imported image is displayed.
PREVIEW TOOLBAR
Use the controls to zoom in and out, zoom to extents, zoom to true scale, and restore previous
view.
GEOSOFT IMPORT
DISCOVER>File>Import>Geosoft Import
Imports data from a Geosoft Oasis montaj database into a MapInfo Pro table.
Displays the Import Geosoft Database dialog box.
Related tasks Fusion import
IMPORT GEOSOFT DATABASE DIALOG BOX

INPUT FILE
Click the browse button to select the Geosoft database (.GDB) file to be imported.
HAS X AND Y FIELDS
Select if database contains spatial data.
• X field: Select X coordinate field from the available input fields.
• Y field: Select Y coordinate field from the available input fields.
SELECT SUBSET OF LINES
Click to restrict the lines imported. The Line Selection Dialog Box is displayed.
CHOOSE PROJECTION
Click to select a MapInfo Pro projection.
OPEN IN MAP
Select to view spatial data in a map window or clear to import the data into a browser only.
LINE SELECTION DIALOG BOX

Use the arrow control buttons to add and remove lines from the Selected lines box.

DISCOVER TAB 691
IOGAS IMPORT
DISCOVER>File>Import>ioGAS Import
Import and refresh an ioGAS file and associated thematic map in a MapInfo Pro TAB file.
Related tasks ioGAS
IMPORT
DISCOVER>File>Import>ioGAS Import>Import
Imports an ioGAS file directly into a MapInfo Pro table.
Displays the ioGAS Importer Dialog Box.
Related tasks ioGAS
IOGAS IMPORTER DIALOG BOX

Related tasks ioGAS
INPUT FILE
Click the browse button to select the GAS file to be imported.
Note Keep ioGAS file names under 31 characters. If the ioGAS file name is greater than 31
characters, it will be truncated in MapInfo Pro and some windows may not open automatically.
These windows can be viewed by selecting Window>New Map Window.
FIELD ASSIGNMENTS
Review and select the field assignments. The Key is the sample or drillhole ID, and the Easting
and Northing columns contain the X and Y coordinates.
KEY
Select the field containing the sample or drillhole ID
EASTING
Select the field containing the sample X coordinate.
NORTHING
Select the field containing the sample Y coordinate.
NULL VALUE
Type the value that will be inserted into any blank cells found when importing the GAS file.
Otherwise, MapInfo Pro inserts a zero value.
FIELD SELECTION
Field in the Selected data box will be imported with the fields selected under Field assignments.
Use the control buttons to add and remove attribute fields in the Available data and Selected data
boxes.
DISPLAY OPTIONS
• All data: Import all data from the GAS file.
• Visible only: Import only data rows that are set as visible in the GAS file.

DISCOVER TAB 692
OUTPUT OPTIONS
FILE
Click the browse button to select the output folder and output TAB file name.
PROJECTION
REFRESH
DISCOVER>File>Import>ioGAS Import>Refresh
Refreshes an imported ioGAS file, including the ioGAS thematic map. The existing MapInfo Pro
table is overwritten.
Related tasks ioGAS
LIDAR LAS IMPORT

DISCOVER>File>Import>LIDAR LAS Import
Imports ASPRS standard LAS files into MapInfo Pro TAB files, creating the associated attributed
points.
Displays the LAS Import Dialog Box.
Related tasks LIDAR LAS
LAS IMPORT DIALOG BOX

FILE DETAILS
INPUT FILE
Click the browse button to select the LAS file to be imported.
OUTPUT FILE
Click the browse button to select the output folder and output TAB file name.
SET PROJECTION
Click to select the projection that the data was recorded in.
CHOOSE OPTIONAL FIELDS
Click to display the Select dialog box, from which you can choose additional fields in the input file
that you want to import into the output table.
AUTOMATICALLY OPEN ON IMPORT
Select the check box to display the imported table in a map window at the selected projection.
Transform the X, Y, and Z coordinates in the form of the equations X’=aX+b, Y’=aY+b, Z’=aZ+b.
For each coordinate, type the constant a in the Multiply by box and the constant b in the Add/
Subtract box. To import the coordinates untransformed, set a=1 and b=0.

DISCOVER TAB 693
MICROMINE IMPORT
DISCOVER>File>Import>Micromine Import
Imports Micromine data and string files into MapInfo Pro tables. Datamine Discover reads the
Micromine file, creates an appropriately structured table and inserts the data.
Displays the MicroMine Import dialog box.
Related tasks MicroMine
MICROMINE IMPORT DIALOG BOX

MICROMINE FILE TYPE
• Data file: Select if the file contains sample and drillhole information, including survey and
downhole data files.
• String file: Select if the file contains string (polyline) data. The Micromine String Import dialog
box is displayed.
MICROMINE STRING IMPORT DIALOG BOX

GET X COORDINATES FROM COLUMN
Click to assign an input field as the X coordinate.
GET Y COORDINATES FROM COLUMN
Click to assign an input field as the Y coordinate.
GET ID FROM COLUMN
Click to assign an input field as the ID column.
CONVERT CLOSED POLYLINES TO REGIONS
Select to convert closed polylines (polygons) to regions.
LINE STYLE
Click to select the line style.
VULCAN IMPORT
DISCOVER>File>Import>Vulcan Import
Imports a Vulcan archive file into a MapInfo Pro table.
Displays the Vulcan Import dialog box.
Related tasks Vulcan
VULCAN IMPORT DIALOG BOX


DISCOVER TAB 694
FILE DETAILS
INPUT FILE
Click the browse button to select the Surpac file to be imported.
OUTPUT FILE
Click the browse button to select the output folder and type the output TAB file name.
CREATE OBJECT TYPE
• Auto Select: Create either point, polyline or polygon objects depending on whether there are
single or multiple line entries per block of data.
• Points Only: Create points for each vertex in the string file. Use this option if you wish to
import the string vertices only and preserve the original string file X, Y, Z coordinate
information.
SET PROJECTION
MULTI-MIF EXPORT
DISCOVER>File>Export>Multi-MIF Export
Export multiple MID and MIF files.
Related tasks Exporting multiple MID/MIF files
VECTOR EXPORT
DISCOVER>File>Export>Vector Export
Exports a MapInfo Pro table as 2D or 3D vectors in a range of different formats.
Related tasks Export vector data
DATAMINE STUDIO EXPORT

DISCOVER>File>Export>Datamine Studio Export
Bulk reproject and export MapInfo Pro .TAB files to Datamine Studio .DM format file.
Related tasks Datamine Studio

DISCOVER TAB 695
LEAPFROG EXPORT
DISCOVER>File>Export>Leapfrog Export
Bulk reproject and export MapInfo Pro .TAB files to Leapfrog Geo project.
Related tasks Leapfrog Geo
MINESIGHT EXPORT
DISCOVER>File>Export>MineSight Export
Exports a MapInfo Pro table as a MineSight SRG file.
Displays the MineSight Export dialog box.
Related tasks MineSight
MINESIGHT EXPORT DIALOG BOX

Related tasks MineSight
FILE DETAILS
INPUT TABLE
Click the browse button to select the MapInfo Pro table to be exported.
OUTPUT SRG FILE
Click the browse button to select the output folder and the output file name.
FLIP XY
Select to reverse the order of the X and Y coordinate fields in the output file.
ELEVATION
Z VALUE FROM COLUMN
Select the column assigned to the Z coordinate in the output file.
DEFAULT Z VALUE
If the Z value is not assigned, type a default Z value.
ATTRIBUTES
Select columns from the input table to be exported as attribute fields. Hold the CTRL or SHIFT key
to select multiple columns.
VULCAN EXPORT
DISCOVER>File>Export>Vulcan Export

DISCOVER TAB 696
Exports a MapInfo Pro table as a Vulcan ARCH_D file.

Displays the Vulcan Export dialog box.
VULCAN EXPORT DIALOG BOX

FILE DETAILS
INPUT FILE
Click the browse button to select the MapInfo Pro table to be exported.
OUTPUT FILE
Click the browse button to select the output folder and the output file name.
OUTPUT TYPE
Select from the available options: Auto select, Points only, or Labels only.
NAME FIELD
Select the column assigned to the Name field (HoleID, for example) in the output file.
VALUE FIELD
Select the column assigned to the Value field in the output file.
Z FIELD
Select the column assigned to the Z coordinate in the output file.
USE FIXED Z VALUE
If the Z field is not assigned, select the check box and type a Z value.
ATTRIBUTES
Select columns from the input table to be exported as attribute fields. Hold the CTRL or SHIFT key
to select multiple columns.
EGB EXPORT
DISCOVER>File>Export>EGB Export
Exports the selected map window as a PNG file with an associated EGB (Encom georeferenced
bitmap) header file, which can be read into Discover PA or Datamine Discover 3D.
Displays the EGB Export dialog box.
Related tasks EGB

DISCOVER TAB 697
EGB EXPORT DIALOG BOX

Related tasks EGB
WINDOWS AVAILABLE FOR EXPORT
Select the map window to be converted.
HEIGHT FOR Z AXIS
Type a Z value.
VECTOR TRANSFORM
DISCOVER>File>Vector Transform
Imports, converts, transforms, and reprojects a wide range of vector format files.
Related tasks Transform vector formats
MANAGE
STRUCTURE MANAGER
DISCOVER>Manage>Tables>Structure Manager
Add, remove, rename or modify data type for multiple fields across multiple tables.
Related tasks Multi-table, multi-field editing
MODIFY BOUNDS
DISCOVER>Manage>Tables>Modify Bounds
Adjust the map bounds for a mappable table.
Related tasks Changing the map bounds of a mappable table
DEFAULT VIEW
DISCOVER>Manage>Default View
Changes the MapInfo Pro default view for each layer in map window. When a new map window
is opened for a table, the layer is displayed in this default view. This feature is not applicable for
raster tables. Set the default table view to display an entire data layer or to only display a
selected area for large data tables.
Displays the Default View dialog box.
Related tasks Setting the default map view
DEFAULT VIEW DIALOG BOX

Related tasks Setting the default map view

DISCOVER TAB 698
Select the layer in the active map window for which you want to change the default view.
OPEN HOTLINK
DISCOVER>Manage>Tables>Open Hotlink
Displays documents linked to a map object.
Related tasks Opening hotlinked documents
SETUP HOTLINK
DISCOVER>Manage>Tables>Setup Hotlink
Enables hotlinks to map objects.
Related tasks Setting up hotlinks

Linking objects to external documents
CREATE HOTLINK
DISCOVER>Manage>Tables>Create Hotlink
Defines the path name to a linked document for a map object.
Displays the Create Hotlink dialog box.
Related tasks Creating a hotlink
CREATE HOTLINK DIALOG BOX
HOTLINK SELECTION DIALOG BOX

Related tasks Creating a hotlink
SELECT COLUMN
Select the column that specifies the hotlink file name.
CONFIGURE
DISCOVER>Manage>Tables>Configure
Automatically refresh the data in a table linked to a remote database at set time intervals.
Related tasks Refreshing tables with database connections

DISCOVER TAB 699
REFRESH ON
DISCOVER>Manage>Tables>Refresh On
Start auto-refresh of DBMS linked table.
REFRESH OFF
DISCOVER>Manage>Tables>Refresh Off
Stop auto-refresh of DBMS linked table.
REFRESH
DISCOVER>Manage>Tables>Refresh
Manually update DBMS linked table
WORKSPACE EXPORT
DISCOVER>Manage>Workspaces>Workspace Export
Save all tables and associated workspace to a new folder.
Related tasks Preparing a workspace for sharing and archiving
WORKSPACE EDITOR
DISCOVER>Manage>Workspaces>Workspace Editor
Edit workspace tables and pathways.
Related tasks Checking and modifying table locations in a workspace
WORKSPACE ADVANCED
DISCOVER>Manage>Workspaces>Workspace Advanced
Open complex workspaces which contain missing, renamed or hidden tables.
Related tasks Fixing problems in a workspace

DISCOVER TAB 700
RESTORE WORKSPACE
DISCOVER>Manage>Workspaces>Restore Workspace
Restores the last autosaved workspace (DISCOVER.WOR) from the Discover Configuration folder.
Related tasks Opening the last auto-saved workspace
FAVOURITE TABLES
DISCOVER>Manage>Favourites>Favourite Tables
Maintains a list of frequently used tables so that they can be opened quickly and identified by an
alias.
Related tasks Favourite tables
FAVOURITE WORKSPACES
Maintains a list of frequently used workspaces.
Related tasks Favourite workspaces
FAVOURITE MAPBASICS
Maintains a list of frequently used MapBasic programs.
OUTPUT
SCALED OUTPUT
DISCOVER>Output>Scaled Output>Scaled Output
Inserts a correctly sized and scaled frame of the front map window with a map grid) into a layout.
Additional frames for scale bar and title block are added to the layout. When applied, the map
scale, map size and paper size are displayed in a text box.
Displays the Scaled Output dialog box.
Related tasks Creating scaled maps
SCALED OUTPUT DIALOG BOX

Related tasks Select the map scale and size
Choose a map grid, title block and scale bar

DISCOVER TAB 701
Select the map scale, page frame, map grid, title block and scale bar for the scaled output map layout.
MAP SCALE
SCALE
Select a map scale for the frame, or select <Custom scale> and type the scale in the box below.
FRAME SETUP
FRAME
Select from the available map frame settings. This defines the frame size, position and orientation
in the layout window, and margins. Note that you may also need to change the printer settings on
File>Print Setup before printing.
CONFIGURE
Standard frame settings for A0-A5, B1-B5, C1-C5, and A-F page sizes are shipped with Datamine
Discover, which define the frame size, position, orientation, and margins. Click the button to display
the Scaled Output Configuration dialog box, from which you can modify, save or create a new
frame setting.
MAP EXTRAS
DRAW GRID
Select to display a map grid. The grid and labels are sized to suit the current frame.
TITLE BLOCK
Select a title block from the list of available title blocks, or select <No title block>. To maintain the
list of title blocks, under Frame setting, click Configure. See Customizing title blocks for information
on creating new title block tables.
ADD FRAME BORDER
Select to display a border around the title block, if selected.
SCALE BAR
Select a scale bar from the list of available scale bars. For information on scale bar styles and how
to create a custom scale bar, see Add a title block and scale bar.
ACTUAL MAP SIZE
Displays the frame size in page coordinates and the map size in real world coordinates for the
selected map scale and frame setting. If you selected a custom scale, click the Preview button to
update.
SET MAP POSITION
Displays the Scaled Output Map Position dialog box, from which you can set the coordinates of
any corner or the centre of the frame. If a frame has previously been displayed, you can also select
the frame in the map window and drag it to a new position.
PREVIEW
Click to preview the frame settings in the map window.
SCALED OUTPUT CONFIGURATION DIALOG BOX

Related tasks Select the page size and frame

DISCOVER TAB 702
Select, edit and save standard frame settings. After you have modified the frame setting, click OK, and
then you will be asked to save the settings or create and name a new frame setting.
FRAME SETTING
Select the frame size from the list of standard page sizes, and then select either a Portrait or
Landscape frame orientation. The frame width and height is displayed.
NON-PRINTING MARGINS
The left, right, top and bottom printer margins (which your printer cannot use). These are shown
shaded grey in the layout window. Changing the left or bottom margins will also move the map
frame position.
MAP FRAME POSITION
The porition of the lower-left corner of the map frame relative to the printing area (within the non-
printing margin).
MAINTAIN FRAME SETTINGS LIST
Click Remove to select and remove a named frame setting.
MAINTAIN TITLE BLOCK LIST
Click Add to add a new title block to the list of available title blocks. See Customizing title blocks
for information on creating new title block tables.
Click Remove to remove a title block from the list.
SCALED OUTPUT MAP POSITION DIALOG BOX

Related tasks Position the scaled output map
Reposition any corner or the centre of the frame to an exact coordinate.
DEFINE MAP POSITION
Select top-left, bottom-left, top-right, or bottom-left corner or centre of the frame, and then type the
coordinates in the East/Longitude and North/Latitude boxes.
ACCEPT PARAMETERS
DISCOVER>Output>Scaled Output>Accept Parameters
Accepts the scaled output frame settings made for the map window and displays or updates the
output scaled map in a layout window.
Related tasks Accept output settings and create the layout.
MODIFY PARAMETERS
DISCOVER>Output>Scaled Output>Modify Parameters
Redisplays the Scaled Output dialog box, from which you can modify the frame settings,
including the frame position, scale, margins, map grid, title block, and scale bar.
Related tasks Modifying a scaled output layout
RESTORE
DISCOVER>Output>Scaled Output>Restore

DISCOVER TAB 703
Restores the map window to its original scale and extents.
Related tasks Preserving the linked, source map window
CLOSE
DISCOVER>Output>Scaled Output>Close
Exits scaled output mode and asks you to save the title block, scale bar, and map grid tables, if
open. You can also save a workspace that includes the layout, for future use. The title block,
scale bar and map grid tables should be saved under new names or they will be overwritten the
next time that Scaled Output is started.
Related tasks Exit scaled output
MAP LEGEND
DISCOVER>Output>Map Output>Map Legend
Creates a customizable legend for up to 10 layers in a multi-layered map. The order of items
within the legend may be altered. The legend is created in a map window for easy insertion into
a layout. The legend is created from up to three columns from one or more tables. You can also
use lookup tables. To get the best results, ensure that the tables are properly structured:
• Records with the same value in the primary column have the same graphic style.
• Text in the supplementary columns relates to the primary column.
Displays the Create Legend dialog box.
Related tasks Add a map legend
Legend tables and columns
CREATE LEGEND DIALOG BOX

Related tasks Add a map legend
Select the tables that you want to create legends from. You can create legends for up to three
attribute column in each table. When you have selected the tables, click OK to display the Map
Legend dialog box.
MAP LEGEND DIALOG BOX

Related tasks Legend tables and columns
LEGEND TABLES
Legends tables are displayed in map layer order.
SPECIFY ORDER
Legend items are displayed by record order in the table. Select the check box to allow legend items
to be sorted alphabetically or by a user-defined order, such as geological age. The Legend Order
dialog box is displayed when each selected legend is created.
COLUMN 1
Select the primary legend column. This column defines which objects are drawn on the legend. For
example, if the nominated column is “RockCode” then Datamine Discover will create a legend
entry for each unique RockCode.

DISCOVER TAB 704
COLUMN 2 AND 3
Supplementary text fields.
To use a lookup table, select <Lookup> from the list of available columns and browse to the
location of the lookup table. Match the column in the lookup table with the corresponding column
from Column 1.
LEGEND STYLE
• One column: Creates a single column vertical legend.
• Two columns: Creates a two-column legend.
LEGEND BOX WIDTH
Type the box width in centimetres.
LEGEND BOX HEIGHT
Type the box height in centimetres.
LINE SPACING
Type the vertical spacing of legend items in centimetres.
LEGEND TITLE
Type the main title.
SUBTITLE
Type the subtitle.
LEGEND FROM OBJECTS IN MAP WINDOW ONLY
Select check box to restrict legend items to map objects that are visible in the map window. Clear
to include all map objects from the selected tables.
STYLES
Click to select text style for title, sub.title and legend items, and the legend border style. Displays
the Legend Styles dialog box
LEGEND STYLES DIALOG BOX

Related tasks Legend style
LEGEND TEXT STYLES
Select the text styles for each line type.
LEGEND BOX BORDER
Select the legend border style.
LEGEND ORDER DIALOG BOX

Related tasks Legend order
Displays the legend items and their order.
RE-ORDER MODE
The order of individual items in the legend can be specified in one of the following ways:
• Custom: Select an item and use the Up, Down, and Delete buttons to reorder and delete.

DISCOVER TAB 705
• Alphabetical order: Order items in ascending (A-Z) or descending order (Z-A).

• Lookup code from table: Order items according to a value in another column in the same
table. Displays the Legend Order from Column Values dialog box.
• Look-up code from lookup table: Order items according to a value in another table. You are
asked to select a table, and then displays the Legend Order from Column Values dialog box.
LEGEND ORDER FROM COLUMN VALUES DIALOG BOX

Related tasks Legend order
When using a Lookup code to re-order legend items select a column from either the same table or a
different one. In this instance the legend item is matched to a numeric value which Datamine Discover
can use to determine the order of the legend items. These options could be used to re-order geological
units by Age.
LEGEND CODE COLUMN
Select the column containing the lookup code.
LEGEND ORDER COLUMN
Typically, a column containing numeric values to set the order.
ASCENDING, DESCENDING
Order the legend order column in ascending or descending order.
SCALED FRAME
DISCOVER>Output>Map Output>Scaled Frame
Adds the active map window as a scaled frame to the layout window. A new layout window is
created if one is not currently open.
Displays the Scaled Frame dialog box.
Related tasks Add a scaled frame to a layout
SCALED FRAME DIALOG BOX

Related tasks Add a scaled frame to a layout
FRAME PARAMETERS
SCALE
Type the scale for the new frame
FRAME WIDTH
Type the frame width in centimetres
FRAME HEIGHT
Type the frame height in centimetres
POSITION IN LAYOUT
OFFSET FROM LEFT
Type the horizontal offset in centimetres.

DISCOVER TAB 706
OFFSET FROM TOP

Type the vertical offset in centimetres.
ADD FRAME TO EXISTING LAYOUT
If a layout is open, select this check box to add the new frame to the existing layout.
POSITION IN MAP
Select a position relative to the map border (Centre, Top-left, Bottom-left, Top-right, or Bottom-
right), or type the map coordinates of the top-left corner of the frame (Easting and Northing).
TITLE BLOCK
DISCOVER>Output>Map Output>Title Block
Creates a custom title block in a map window, which can then be added to a layout.
Displays the Titleblock dialog box.

Related tasks Add a title block and scale bar
TITLEBLOCK DIALOG BOX

Related tasks Add a title block and scale bar
Select a template, scale bar and map scale, and then click OK. The Title Block and Scale Bar Options
dialog box is then displayed.
SELECT CUSTOM TITLE BLOCK TEMPLATE
Click to select a template. For information on adding and removing title block templates, see
Customizing title blocks.
SELECT SCALE BAR TYPE
Both metric and imperial scale bars are available. Click to select a scale bar style:
SCALE BAR MAP SCALE
Type the scale bar scale.
TITLE BLOCK AND SCALE BAR OPTIONS DIALOG BOX

Related tasks Configure the title block and scale bar
Type or select the options for the title block placeholders defined in the title block template. The font
styles are also defined in the template table.
TITLE LINES
Type the text for the title line placeholders.
TITLEBLOCK
POSITION
Click to select the position of the title block when it is added to a layout.

DISCOVER TAB 707
TITLEBLOCK SCALE
Type the plot scale of the title block. At a scale of 1:1 the default template creates a 50 cm wide
title block.
SAVE AS
Click to save the title block to a new table. By default, the title block is saved in the Discover temp
folder as TITLEBLK.TAB.
SEND TITLEBLOCK TO BACK
Select to display the title block behind other frames in the layout.
OTHER TITLEBLOCK DETAILS
SCALEBAR
Displays the ScaleBar scale. Select the display option:
SHOW SCALEBAR IN TITLE BLOCK
ScaleBar is created in the title block map window.
SHOW SCALEBAR SEPARATELY
ScaleBar is created in a separate map window.
DON’T SHOW SCALEBAR
ScaleBar is not shown.
OTHER OPTIONS
LAYOUT
Click to open a workspace for a layout with a pre-defined format (instead of an empty layout). For
example, the layout might contain north arrows, legends, logos and other map windows such as
an overview window for the state or country that the map is part of.
When creating a layout template to be used in this way, be careful that only those tables and
windows required for your layout are actually open when you save the workspace. You may also
need different workspaces for each different map format (paper size, orientation etc) that you wish
to produce.
DISPLAY LIST OF LAYERS IN MAP
Click to select the position where the list of layers is displayed, or select No List.
NO TITLE
Cancel addition of title block.
MAP GRID
DISCOVER>Output>Map Grid>Map Grid
Adds a map grid to the current map window in any of the MapInfo Pro standard projections or in
a user-defined custom projection. The style of the map grid is fully customisable and you can
overlay multiple grids on one another (for example a Lat-Long grid on a UTM grid). The map grid
is drawn into a temporary table called AUTOGRID, which is located in the Discover temporary directory
unless you nominate a different table name and location.

DISCOVER TAB 708
Displays the Map Grid dialog box.

Related tasks Add a map grid
MAP GRID DIALOG BOX

Related tasks Add a map grid
MAP PROJECTION
The map window projection is displayed. To change the map window projection, see Map
projections.
PROJECTION
• Auto (current map window): Draw a map grid using the current map window projection.
• Custom coordinate system: Draw local and real world grids using a custom transformation.
To create a custom transformation coordinate system, see Coordinate transformations.
• User defined: Draw a map grid in a different projection by selecting the projection from the list
of Datamine Discover favourite projections.
GRID SPACING
The default grid spacing is calculated from the width of the map window. Type a new grid spacing
in the units of the map window projection (typically metres or degrees).
GRID STYLE
Choose Lines, Points, or Edge Ticks grid style. If grid lines have significant curvature, you can
smooth the grid lines using Label Options.
AA (TEXT STYLE)
Displays the MapInfo Pro Text Style dialog box, from which you can change the label font, font
size, colour, background style and colour, and ornamentation.
SYMBOL STYLE
(Point style grids) Displays the MapInfo Pro Symbol Style dialog box, from which you can change
the grid point symbol, colour, size, and other effects.
LINE STYLE
(Line and edge-tick style grids) Displays the MapInfo Pro Line Style dialog box, from which you can
change the line style, colour and line width.
LABEL SIZE
Displays the grid label font size. Type a new value in pts, or select the text style (Aa) button. Text
size will change with the scale of the cuurent view.
MAP SCALE
The map scale at which the label text size is correct.
PLACE LABELS IN MASK POLYGON OUTSIDE MAP FRAME
Select to draw grid labels in a mask outside the map frame. Clear to draw grid labels in the map
window margins.

DISCOVER TAB 709
DISPLAY LABELS AT
Select or clear check boxes to show and hide labels at the top, bottom, left, and right of the map
window.
LABEL OPTIONS
Displays the Label Options dialog box, from which you can smooth curved grid lines, add a label
suffix and prefix, set the frequency of grid labels, and change the number of decimal places.
SAVE AS DEFAULT GRID
Select to save the settings and use as the default for new grids. This will cause the AUTOGRID
table to be overwritten.
OPTIONS
APPEND TO EXISTING AUTOGRID
If there is already a grid drawn in the active map window, select the check box to add the new grid
to the existing grid. Clear the check box to replace the existing grid.
OVERLAY ANOTHER AUTOGRID
Select to overlay a second grid with a different projection and style. After you click OK, the first grid
is drawn, and then the Map Grid dialog box is displayed again so that you can define the second
grid.
SAVE AS
Click to save to a user-defined table instead of the default AUTOGRID table. You can also save
the AUTOGRID table to a new table later using File>Save Copy As.
PREVIEW
Draws or redraws the grid in the active map window using the defined settings without overwriting
the existing grid.
LABEL OPTIONS DIALOG BOX

Smooth curved grid lines, add a label suffix and prefix, set the frequency of grid labels, and change the
number of decimal places.
NODE PER GRID INTERVAL
Add nodes between grid points to smooth curved grid lines.
X-AXIS LABEL
Define label suffix and prefix using the following building blocks:
<coord> map projection coordinate
<units> map projection units
<eorn> map projection X-axis label (E or N)
For example, the label string “<coord> <units><eorn>” will display a label in the form “140000 mE”.
Other fixed characters can be used in the label string.
Y-AXIS LABEL
Define label suffix and prefix using the following building blocks:
<coord> map projection coordinate
<units> map projection units
<eorn> map projection Y-axis label (E or N)

DISCOVER TAB 710
For example, the label string “<coord> <units><eorn>” will display a label in the form “52000 mN”.
Other fixed characters can be used in the label string.
LABEL EVERY N GRID LINES
Change the frequency of grid labels. Type a value of 2 to label every second grid line.
RESTORE DEFAULT
Restores grid label option defaults.
DECIMAL PLACES
Number of decimal places of grid labels.
DYNAMIC GRID
DISCOVER>Output>Map Grid>Dynamic Grid
Displays a dynamic map grid in the current map window in any of the MapInfo Pro standard
projections or in a user-defined custom projection. The map grid coordinates are updated
whenever the map window is zoomed and panned. The style of the map grid is fully
customisable and you can overlay multiple grids on one another (for example a lat-long grid on a UTM
grid).
Displays the Dynamic Grid dialog box.
Related tasks Add a dynamic map grid to a map window.
DYNAMIC GRID DIALOG BOX

Related tasks Add a dynamic map grid to a map window.
MAP PROJECTION
The map window projection is displayed. To change the map window projection, see Reprojecting
coordinates.
PROJECTION
• Auto (current map window): Draw a map grid using the current map window projection.
• Custom coordinate system: Draw local and real world grids using a custom transformation.
To create a custom transformation coordinate system, see Coordinate transformations.
• User defined: Draw a map grid in a different projection by selecting the projection from the list
of Datamine Discover favourite projections.
GRID SPACING
The default grid spacing is calculated from the width of the map window. Type a new grid spacing
in the units of the map window projection (typically metres or degrees).
GRID STYLE
Choose Lines, Points, or Edge Ticks grid style. If grid lines have significant curvature, you can
smooth the grid lines using Label Options.
AA (TEXT STYLE)
Displays the MapInfo Pro Text Style dialog box, from which you can change the label font, font
size, colour, background style and colour, and ornamentation.

DISCOVER TAB 711
SYMBOL STYLE
(Point style grids) Displays the MapInfo Pro Symbol Style dialog box, from which you can change
the grid point symbol, colour, size, and other effects.
LINE STYLE
(Line and edge-tick style grids) Displays the MapInfo Pro Line Style dialog box, from which you can
change the line style, colour and line width.
LABEL SIZE
Displays the grid label font size. Type a new value in pts, or select the text style (Aa) button. Text
size will change with the scale of the cuurent view.
MAP SCALE
The map scale at which the label text size is correct.
Place labels in mask polygon outside map frame
Select to draw grid labels in a mask outside the map frame. Clear to draw grid labels in the map
window margins.
DISPLAY LABELS AT
Select or clear check boxes to show and hide labels at the top, bottom, left, and right of the map
window.
LABEL OPTIONS
Displays the Label Options dialog box, from which you can smooth curved grid lines, add a label
suffix and prefix, set the frequency of grid labels, and change the number of decimal places.
OPTIONS
APPEND TO EXISTING AUTOGRID
If there is already a grid drawn in the active map window, select the check box to add the new grid
to the existing grid. Clear the check box to replace the existing grid.
OVERLAY ANOTHER AUTOGRID
Select to overlay a second grid with a different projection and style. After you click OK, the first grid
is drawn, and thenthe Map Grid dialog box is displayed again so that you can define the second
grid.
LABEL CREATOR
DISCOVER>Output>Labels>Label Creator
Adds text labels to objects selected in a map window, with text size scaled to the map scale.
Label Creator has many “smart” features that will assist with creating professional maps.
Related tasks Adding text labels

DISCOVER TAB 712
LINE/POINT LABELS
DISCOVER>Output>Labels>Line/Point Labels
Apply text labels to every Nth point recorded along regular lines, such as soil geochemistry
samples or ground geophysical readings. Line number and point locations can be annotated at
the same time. Line labels can automatically be placed at the start and end of each line and
sample points can be labelled with a value from a selected column at a user-defined interval.
Displays the Line and Point Labels dialog box.
Related tasks Adding line and point labels
LINE AND POINT LABELS DIALOG BOX

Related tasks Adding line and point labels
ANNOTATION TABLE
LABEL POINTS WITHIN SELECTED POLYGON
If selected, label points that lie within a polygon.
SELECT TABLE
The table containing the line data you want to annotate.
SELECT LINE COLUMN
Select the column containing the line number or name.
SELECT POINT COLUMN
Select the column containing the point number.
CREATE LABELS
SAVE LABELS TO TABLE
Select the layer the labels are stored in. The line and point labels can be added to the cosmetic
layer, to another open table or a new table.
LABEL LINE START
Select to label the start of each line.
LABEL LINE END
Select to label the end of each line.
SORT POINT COLUMN
Sort points by point number.
LABEL POINTS
Select to add labels to points.
LABEL EVERY N POINTS
Type the point label interval. The first and last point in each line are always labelled.
FILTER BY
Click to select to filter by Row order or Point column.

DISCOVER TAB 713
LABEL STYLE
MAP SCALE
Type the map scale. The text size is correct when printed at this scale.
LINE LABEL SIZE
Type the text size in pts.
OFFSET FROM LINE START
Type the offset distance from the line start in mm at the specified map scale.
AA (TEXT STYLE)
Set the line text style. Displays the MapInfo Pro Text Style dialog box.
POINT LABEL SIZE
OFFSET FROM POINT
Type the offset distance from the line start in mm at the specified map scale.
AA (TEXT STYLE)
Set the point text style. Displays the MapInfo Pro Text Style dialog box.

DISCOVER TAB 714
POLYLINE LABELS
DISCOVER>Output>Polyline Labels
Add Z value labels at user-specified intervals to contour lines.
The labels are created as MapInfo Pro text objects in a chosen layer, such as the cosmetic layer.
Datamine Discover adds labels to any attributed contour plan that has a column for contour level value.
This option can also be used to add line-parallel labels to other linework such as rivers or roads.
Specifying contour labelling parameters
The contour labels are placed parallel to the contour lines as normal text objects. If the contour plan
and labels are then viewed at a different scale to that specified in this dialog, the Z value labels appear
at a proportionately different size.
The distance between labels along each contour line is controlled via the Place Annotation every
option. The number of labels on any individual polyline can also be capped to a maximum number.
POLYLINE LABEL POSITIONER

DISCOVER>Output>Polyline Label Positioner
Position contour labels where the contours lines intersect custom path lines.
Contour labels can be custom positioned using a discrete number of intersecting polylines (generally
perpendicular to the contour lines). Contour labels are placed at the intersection of these label path
lines and the contour lines.

DISCOVER TAB 715
The Contour Label Positioner dialog, configured to only create labels for the 5m and 10m contour levels.
Using the Contour Label Positioner. The left hand image displays the source contour lines (coloured) and 3 intersecting label
path lines (blue), the intersection of which will control label placement. The right hand image shows the resulting labels. Note
that only specified contours were labelled, using the Minor and Major Label Intervals (illustrated in the dialog image)
This tool requires two tables to be specified: the Contour Lines table (created using the
Surfaces>Contour Grid option) and a Label Path Lines table. The Label Path Lines table must be a
separate table to the contour lines table and contain one or more lines or polylines that intersect the
contours. Label path lines drawn in the Cosmetic Layer cannot be used (use Map>Save Cosmetic
Objects to save them to a new table).

DISCOVER TAB 716
• Label path lines should generally be drawn at a high angle to the contour lines; this will create
labels that are approximately parallel to the contour lines.
• The output labels will be orientated perpendicular to the label path line: a vertical line will result in
horizontal labels). The label path line start point is used as the label ‘up’ direction. Drawing label
path lines from left to right, and from top to bottom of the mapper window, will therefore generally
result in logically orientated labels (i.e. upright). Note that line directions can be reversed using
the Discover>Object Editing>Change Line Direction tool.
• To orientate all labels horizontally (i.e. ignore label path line directions), select all labels, and
select the Discover>Map Making>Format Text menu option. Tick Alter text labels, and set the
New Angle to 0. All labels will be rotated so that they are horizontal.
• A small number of label path lines can be quite effective, particularly when placed along major
features such as ridge lines and gullies.
The Contour Label Positioner will label all intersecting contour lines by default. This option can be
disabled, allowing only specific contour levels to be labelled (the examples pictured label only the 5m
and 10m contours). These labels can be saved to a new or existing table. If a new table is created, it
will include a Cont_Label field attributed with the appropriate contour value.
Note As with all Datamine Discover labelling tools, it is recommended to first create labels in the
cosmetic layer in order to refine their size (using the font size and scale controls). These can
be easily cleared using Map>Clear Cosmetic Layer. Once a satisfactory label size has found,
either specify a new table to create the labels into (from within the tool), or save the cosmetic
layer to a new table. Note however that labels saved to the cosmetic layer do not store the
contour value as an attribute.
FORMAT TEXT
DISCOVER>Output>Labels>Format Text
Sets the current font style or, if objects are selected, reformats text for a specified output scale.
Use this tool to reset text size when you change the scale of the map window.
Displays the Format Text dialog box.
Related tasks Formatting text
FORMAT TEXT DIALOG BOX

Related tasks Formatting text
FONT SIZE
MAP SCALE
AA (TEXT STYLE)
Set the text style. Displays the MapInfo Pro Text Style dialog box.
CHANGE TEXT ANGLE
Select to change the text angle.

DISCOVER TAB 717
ANGLE
Type the text angle in degrees anticlockwise from horizontal. An angle of 90 is vertically up and
270 is vertically down.
LABEL ANGLES
DISCOVER>Output>Labels>Label Angles
Changes the angle of labels of all objects in a map layer.
Displays the Label Angles dialog box.

Related tasks Modifying label angles
LABEL ANGLES DIALOG BOX

Related tasks Modifying label angles
LAYER
Select a layer from the active map window.
ANGLE
Type an angle in degrees anticlockwise from horizontal. An angle of 90 is vertically up and 270 is
vertically down.
If the labels for this layer are not displayed, they are displayed. To store the labels for later use,
you must save a workspace for the map.
COLOUR LABELS
DISCOVER>Output>Labels>Colour Labels
Recolour text labels with colour patterns defined in the drillhole display module. You can use
any colour pattern that has been defined in the drillhole display module, and colour the text
objects based on the text string or on the value in a column.
Displays the Colour Objects dialog box.
Related tasks Colouring text labels with a legend
COLOUR OBJECTS DIALOG BOX

Related tasks Colouring text labels with a legend
COLOUR LABELS IN TABLE
The table containing the text column.
COLUMN
The column containing the text that you want to colour.
COLOUR PATTERN
Colour pattern (defined in drillhole display module).

DISCOVER TAB 718
LABELS FROM TABLE

DISCOVER>Output>Labels>Labels from Table
Update the text in text objects with text from the same table or a different table. When updating
text from a different table, the two tables are joined by record number. If the record order in the
two tables is not appropriate, then join the two tables using SQL.
Displays the Labels from Table dialog box.
Related tasks Updating text labels from a table
LABELS FROM TABLE DIALOG BOX

Related tasks Updating text labels from a table
UPDATE LABELS IN TABLE
The table containing the text column that you want to update.
COLUMN
The column containing the text that you want to update.
USING TEXT FROM TABLE
The table containing the update text column.
COLUMN
The column containing the update text.
TABLE FROM LABELS

DISCOVER>Output>Labels>Table from Labels
Adds text labels to a column in the browser window. This feature is especially useful when
labelling files.
Displays the Table from Labels dialog box.
Related tasks Updating a table from text labels
TABLE FROM LABELS DIALOG BOX

Related tasks Updating a table from text labels
ADD LABELS FROM TABLE
The table containing the text column.
COLUMN
The column containing the text that you want to add.

DISCOVER TAB 719
WINDOW ANIMATOR
DISCOVER>Output>Window Animator
Captures a series of map window views which can be then be viewed as a continuous animation
sequence within MapInfo Pro. Alternatively, the animation sequence can be exported as a
movie file, which can be replayed through standard video software such as Microsoft Media
Player. The tool can be used to enhance presentations by adding new data layers to a map window to
show the exploration history of a project area or to show the relationship between local and regional
exploration features.
Related tasks Making movies and animations from a map window
Displays the Window Animator dialog box.
Follow these guidelines to get the best results when creating animations:
• Make sure that the map window containing the data to be used in the animation is not maximized.
If the map window is maximized, click the Restore Down button to float the window.
• An animation file can only be created from within a single mapper window.
• Do not adjust the extents or size of the mapper window at anytime during the animation creation.
For instructions on creating, editing and viewing animations, see Making movies and animations from
a map window.
WINDOW ANIMATOR DIALOG BOX

The Windows Animator has two dialog tabs:
• Create/Edit tab: Create new and edit existing animation files.
• Play tab: Load a saved animation file or play the animation file through a mapper window in
MapInfo Pro.
CREATE/EDIT TAB
FRAMES
Lists the created frame records (captured window layers).
FRAMES LIST
NAME
To rename the frame, click the frame record to edit.
TIMING
The time interval the frame is displayed in an animation. Click the controls to increase or decrease.
NEW
Captures the active mapper window and adds the frame to the Frame list.
Note Do not adjust the mapper window dimensions using the cursor while creating the frame views
as this will adversely affect the animation or movie file generation.

DISCOVER TAB 720
UPDATE
Replaces the selected frame from the active map window.
DELETE
Deletes the selected frame.
FRAME ORDER CONTROLS
Click a frame and then use the controls to change the frame order.
SAVE
Saves the frames in the defined order and with the defined timings as an animation (.ANI) file.
CREATE MOVIE
Saves the animation in AVI movie file format, which you can replay in most Windows movie
players. Displays the Video Compression dialog box, from which you can choose a video
compression option.
PREVIEW
Displays a preview of the captured mapper window
LOCK WINDOW SIZE
Select after creating the first frame so that all subsequent frames are the same size.
PREVIEW SELECTED FRAMES
Click to display the selected frame.
Note The animation file is similar to a MapInfo Pro Workspace. The animation file stores information
such as the map window dimensions, full file paths for all layers open in the map window, zoom
parameters, amount of time each view is displayed along with details relating to thematic map
layers, labels, style overrides, and such. When the animation file is first loaded, Datamine
Discover opens each of the tables from the file path listed when the animation was created.
Therefore, if any of the tables referenced in the animation file are moved or delete, the
animation will not load correctly.
PLAY TAB
Loads and plays an animation file. Use this tab to review the animation sequence.
LOAD ANIMATION FILE
FILE
Click the Open button to locate and select the animation (.ANI) file.
PLAYBACK CONTROLS
Use the playback controls to review the loaded animation file.
PLAY
Plays the animation file starting from the frame selected on the Create/Edit tab.
STOP
Stops the animation playback.

DISCOVER TAB 721
PAUSE
Suspends the animation playback. Click Play to resume.
HIDE DIALOG DURING PLAYBACK
Hides the Window Animator dialog box during the playback.
Note If the Hide dialog during playback box is enabled, the Stop and Pause buttons are not
available during the playback.
VIDEO COMPRESSION DIALOG BOX

Select a compression option when saving a movie file. Even simple animations can have an
uncompressed size of ten to hundreds of MB.
PROJECTION
PROJECTION INFO
DISCOVER>Projection>Projection Info
Displays coordinate system details for the active map window. You can use the information in
this window, together with the MapInfo Pro Help and User Guide documentation on Working with
Coordinate systems to understand more about how MapInfo Pro uses coordinate systems and
to create your own custom coordinate systems.
Related tasks Displaying mapper projection details
FAVOURITE PROJECTIONS
DISCOVER>Projection>Favourite Projections
Maintains a list of frequently used map projections, which you can apply to the active map
window. Projections in this list are displayed whenever a Datamine Discover tool requires a
projection to be assigned.
Displays the Favourite Projections dialog box.
Related tasks Saving and applying map projections
FAVOURITE PROJECTIONS DIALOG BOX

PROJECTIONS
Displays the list of favourite projections.
UP AND DOWN
Use the up and down buttons to reorder the projections in the list.
ADD
Adds a new projection to the favourites list. Displays the Choose Projection dialog box, from which
you can select the projection category and member.

DISCOVER TAB 722
REMOVE
Removes the selected projection from the favourites list.
APPLY
Applies the selected projection to the active map window.
CHOOSE PROJECTION DIALOG BOX

CATEGORY
Select a projection category.
CATEGORY MEMBERS
Select a member from the selected category.
UPDATE COORDINATES
DISCOVER>Projection>Update Coordinates
Adds or updates map object coordinates in either a browser or a map window using coordinates
from either a map window or a browser. For example, you can place the coordinate positions of
sample points or collar locations into X and Y data columns in the same MapInfo Pro table.
Alternatively, if new survey data has become available, update the position of existing map objects with
new coordinates from X and Y data columns in the browser.
Displays the Update Coordinates dialog box.
Related tasks Updating coordinates
UPDATE COORDINATES DIALOG BOX

Related tasks Updating coordinates
TABLE TO UPDATE
Select the table that you want to update.
PROJECTION
• Auto: Calculate coordinates using the native projection of the table, that is, the projection in
which the original map objects were created.
• Other: Calculate coordinates in a projection that is different from the table. The Choose
Projection dialog box is displayed, from which you can select a projection category and
member. For example, you can use this option to add Lat/Lon coordinates to points in AMG
coordinates, or to update points using data recorded in a different coordinate system.
UPDATE MODE
• Mapper -> Browser: Update coordinates in a table from map object positions in the map
window.
• Browser -> Mapper: Update object locations in the map window with new coordinates from a
table.

DISCOVER TAB 723
FIELD ASSIGNMENT
X COORDINATE
Select the column in the table that contains the X-coordinate. If this column does not exist, select
<New Column> to display the New Column Name dialog box.
Y COORDINATE
Select the column in the table that contains the Y-coordinate. If this column does not exist, select
<New Column> to display the New Column Name dialog box.
Note This tool is best suited to updating point data, but coordinates for polyline and polygon map
objects can also be calculated using the centroid X and Y coordinates.
NEW COLUMN NAME DIALOG BOX

Related tasks Update Coordinates dialog box
Type the name for the new column. Names must not contain spaces.
CUSTOM TRANSFORM
DISCOVER>Projection>Custom Transform
Converts coordinates from one coordinate system to another based on various coordinate
transformation parameters. The transformed data is stored in a new table with a suffix “_trans”.
and displayed in map or browser window.
Displays the Custom Transform dialog box.
Related tasks Coordinate transformations
CUSTOM TRANSFORM DIALOG BOX

Note This tool does not support transforming to or from a lat-long projection.
Note Raster images and grid surfaces cannot be transformed with the Custom Transform tool. For
image reprojection, use IMAGES>Image Tools>Reproject Image.
TRANSFORMATION TABLE
Select a table from the list of all open tables. Only native MapInfo Pro or TAB files connected to an
editable source table can be transformed. TAB files connected to read-only files (Excel or text files,
for example) will not be displayed and must be first saved to a native MapInfo Pro table.
TRANSFORMATION TARGET
• E, N data columns: Transform X and Y coordinate columns into new columns in the same
table.
Note The new X and Y columns must be created before the transformation is performed. To add
new data columns to the table use TABLE>Maintenance>Table Structure before running
Transform Coordinates.
• Map objects: Transform map objects (including complex regions and polylines) from one
coordinate system to another. Transformed map objects are saved to an output table with a
“_trans” suffix.

DISCOVER TAB 724
TRANSFORMATION TYPE
• Plane – A simple, linear transformation defined by a scaling factor and two pairs of common
coordinates or one pair of coordinates and a bearing difference. The plane transformation can
provide only rotation and shift.
• Affine – A linear transformation with separate scaling, rotation and shift along the X and Y
axes. This is an extremely useful transformation and can be used where you need to adjust
from an unknown coordinate system such as a local mine grid to UTM. For example,
transform a non-earth local grid to MGA94 (GDA94) Zone 54.
• Projective – Projective transformations map lines to lines. Straight lines remain straight but
parallelism may not be preserved. A minimum of four control points are required for a
projective transformation.
• Conformal – Conformal transformations preserve shapes and angles and may include a
rotation, a scaling and a translation. Straight lines and parallel lines remain straight and
parallel in the transformed image. A minimum of three control points are required for a
conformal transformation.
• Polynomial Transformations – Polynomial transformations are higher-order, non-linear
transformations which can handle more complex local distortions. Polynomial transformations
are smooth and are also known as ‘rubber-sheet’ transformations as they enable parts of an
image to be stretched or warped to fit the control points. A minimum of six control points for
2nd order polynomial and ten control points for 3rd order polynomial transformations is
required.
CONTROL POINT TABLE
Click to load the control point table.
SIMPLE AFFINE PROJECTION
The control point table for a simple affine data transformation must contain four columns, which
read from left to right are Local_Easting, Local_Northing, UTM_Easting and UTM_Northing.
CUSTOM AFFINE PROJECTION
The control point table for a custom affine projection transformation must contain four columns,
which read from left to right are UTM_Easting, UTM_Northing, Local_Easting and
Local_Northing.
The naming convention of the column headings is not important, but the order of the columns is
critical.
The control table must contain at least 3 points located in both local non-earth grid and real-earth
projected coordinates. The greater the number of control points provided, the more accurate the
final transformation (depending on the precision of the control points).
The affine transformation method is based on using a Ground Control Point table with a set of
known points in both the non-earth and a known projection space. The method will use these to
determine a set of affine transformation parameters which are the best fit for the given control
points, using a least squares method to minimize the misfit.
CALCULATE PARAMETERS ONLY
Select to display the calculated transformation coefficients without transforming the data.

DISCOVER TAB 725
SHOW TRANSFORM PARAMETERS

Select to display the transformation coefficients, residuals and standard deviation information.
These parameters are saved to a text file named MAPTRAN.LOG in the Discover temporary
directory.
MAKE AFFINE COORD. SYSTEM
Create a custom affine projection, which is available for selection when creating and saving tables
or setting the projection of a map window.
The custom projection transformation parameters relate the local grid to real-world coordinates,
enabling MapInfo Pro to overlay UTM or lat-long data with data collected in the local grid system.
To create a custom affine projection, make sure that the following options have been selected:
• Under Transformation Target, select Map Objects.
• Select a control point table suitable for a custom affine projection (see above).
Datamine Discover will create the affine transformation and add the custom coordinate system
description to the MAPTRAN.LOG file.
For information on adding an affine projection to the MAPINFOW.PRJ file, see Affine
transformation. For information on applying the projection in MapInfo Pro, see Using a custom
affine projection in MapInfo Pro. For more information on creating custom projections, refer to the
MapInfo Pro User Guide.
TRANSFORM COORDINATES DIALOG BOX

CHOOSE A GRID TRANSFORM
Click to select an existing transform, or select <Add new transform>. Existing transform settings
cannot be edited.
TRANSFORM COORDS NOW
In addition to transforming coordinates from table columns or map objects, single sets of
coordinates can be entered for immediate transformation. Check the Transform coords now box.
Enter the current X and Y coordinate to transform into the appropriate windows. Click the
Calculate button to run the transform calculation. The new coordinates are displayed in the dialog
box.
DEFINE TRANSFORMATION BY
• Origin, bearing: Specify the coordinates of the origin in the current and new coordinate
systems and a rotation angle.
• Two sets of coords: Specify the coordinates of two points in both coordinate systems.
TRANSFORM COORDINATES
(Available when the Transform coords now option is selected)
Type the current X and Y coordinates that you want to transform.
CALCULATE
Click to calculate the transformed coordinates.
TO
Displays the transformed X and Y coordinate values.

DISCOVER TAB 726
TRANSFORM COLUMNS
(Available when the E, N data columns option was selected in the Custom Transform dialog box)
Select the X and Y data columns containing the current coordinates.
INTO COLUMNS
(Available when the E, N data columns option was selected in the Custom Transform dialog box)
Select the X and Y data columns in which the new coordinates will be stored.
Note To add new data columns to the table use Table>Maintenance>Table Structure before
running Transform Coordinates.
ORIGIN AND BEARING METHOD
SCALE FACTOR
Type the scale factor. The scale factor is typically used to correct for curvature or a change in the
units of measurement. To convert feet to metres type a scale factor of 0.3048.
COMMON COORDS OF POINT
Type the current origin coordinates in the Current coords boxes and the new origin in the New
coords boxes.
BEARING OFFSET
Type the rotation angle between the two coordinate systems. Angle is positive clockwise from the
current coordinate system.
TWO POINT METHOD
POINT 1
Type the current coordinates of the first point in the Current coords boxes and the new coordinates
in the New coords boxes.
POINT 2
Type the current coordinates of the first point in the Current coords boxes and the new coordinates
in the New coords boxes.
ADD
Click to name and save the transformation settings, which you can load from the Choose a grid
transform box. Plane transformation settings are saved to the LGTRANS table (located in the
Discover configuration folder). Transformations can also be modified from the LGTRANS browser
window.
Note Saved transformation settings can also be used with the DISCOVER>Map Grid and
DISCOVER>Scaled Output tools to display a local (non-earth) grid and a map (projected real-
world) grid in the same map window.
DELETE
Click to delete the transformation settings selected in the Choose a grid transform box.

DISCOVER TAB 727
REPROJECT COORDINATES
DISCOVER>Projection>Reproject>Reproject Coordinates
Reprojects data captured in one coordinate system in a new coordinate system. For example,
vector data captured in Australian AGD84 coordinates can be reprojected into GDA94
coordinates. Vector data can be reprojected between projected (e.g. UTM), geographic (e.g. lat-
long) and custom coordinate systems. The tool works in the same way as the MapInfo Pro Save Copy
As tool but has been designed specifically to incorporate the NTv2 grid shift transformation parameters
for selected Canadian and Australian projections.
Displays the Reproject Coordinates dialog box.
Related tasks Reprojecting coordinates
REPROJECT COORDINATES DIALOG BOX

Related tasks Reprojecting coordinates
INPUT FILE
FILENAME
Select the table from the list of open tables.
PROJECTION
Displays the native projection of the selected input table.
Note If the projection is not recognized, copy the projection from the MapInfow.prj to the Encom.prj
file, which is located in the
OUTPUT FILE
FILENAME
By default, the reprojected table is named by adding “_reprojected” to the input table name. Click
the box to edit, or click the Open button and select a new name and location for the reprojected
table.
PROJECTION
Click Choose to display the Choose Projection dialog box, from which you can choose a projection
category and member.
USE NTV2 GRID SHIFT
Select when reprojecting images between NAD27 and NAD83 Canadian coordinate systems or
AGD66 and AGD84 Australian systems. If you are not familiar with this method see NTv2
transformation for more information about this option.
MULTI-TABLE REPROJECT
DISCOVER>Projection>Reproject>Multi-Table Reproject
Reproject multiple tables to a new coordinate system.
Related tasks Reprojecting multiple vector tables

DISCOVER TAB 728
REPROJECT IMAGE
DISCOVER>Projection>Reproject>Reproject Image
Reproject raster images into a new coordinate system.
Also available from IMAGES tab.
Related tasks Reprojecting an image
REPROJECT SURFACE
DISCOVER>Projection>Reproject>Reproject Surface
Reproject surface raster grids into the new coordinate system.
Also available from SURFACES tab.
WINDOWS
MAPPER STATE
DISCOVER>Windows>Mapper State
Saves the position, size, centre point and zoom width of the active map window and restores
saved states. Use to restore a map window that is used in a layout window after you have
zoomed or panned across the map window.
Related tasks Saving and restoring the mapper state
STANDARD VIEWS
DISCOVER>Windows>Standard Views
Saves the current map window geographic extents and window dimensions and restores saved
views to the current map window. By storing the geographical extents over a project area or area
of interest the current map window view can be quickly re-positioned over the location defined
by the selected view. Standard Views can be used with any open datasets and are independent of the
current map window projection.
Displays the Standard Views dialog box.
Related tasks Saving and applying view settings
STANDARD VIEWS DIALOG BOX

VIEW DESCRIPTION
Displays the list of saved views.
RESTORE VIEW
Restores the geographical extents of the selected view to the active map window.

DISCOVER TAB 729
RESTORE VIEW & SIZE

Restores the geographical extents and amp window dimensions of the selected view to the active
map window.
UP AND DOWN
Use the up and down buttons to reorder the view list.
ADD
Adds the view extents in the active map window. Displays the Add View dialog box from which you
can name the view.
DELETE
Deletes the selected view.
ADD VIEW DIALOG BOX

DESCRIPTION
Type a name for the saved view.
CURSOR SETUP
DISCOVER>Windows>Link>Cursor Setup
Use Cursor Setup to display the same geographic location in separate mapper windows by
placing a symbol at the same position as selected in one linked window. If the cursor position is
not visible in a linked map window the mapper can be panned to show the selected location.
Displays the Cursor Position dialog box.
Related tasks Linking map windows
CURSOR POSITION DIALOG BOX

SELECT MAPPERS
Select the map windows to display the cursor locator symbol.
SYMBOL
Click to select the symbol style. Displays the MapInfo Pro Symbol Style dialog box.
SELECT ALL
Select all open mapper windows.
UNSELECT ALL
Clear all mapper windows.
PAN MAPPER TO SHOW CURSOR POSITION
When the cursor position selected in one mapper is not currently visible in another mapper, select
the check box to pan the map window view to show the cursor position.

DISCOVER TAB 730
CURSOR ON
DISCOVER>Windows>Link>Cursor On
Turn on the cursor position display in linked mapper windows.
Related tasks Show cursor position in linked windows
CURSOR OFF
DISCOVER>Windows>Link>Cursor Off
Turn off the cursor position display.
Related tasks Show cursor position in linked windows
MAP LINKING
DISCOVER>Windows>Link>Map Linking
Geographically links mapper windows so that any pan or zoom applied to one mapper window
is automatically applied to all other map windows included in the linked group.
Displays the Map Linking dialog box.
MAP LINKING DIALOG BOX

MAPPER TO LINK
Displays all open mapper windows and their projections. Select a check box to link the mapper
window.
SELECT ALL
Links all open mapper windows.
UNSELECT ALL
Unlinks all mapper windows. You can also unlink a mapper window by right-clicking inside the
mapper window and clearing the Link this map option on the shortcut menu.
LINKING METHOD
FIXED EXTENTS
The windows are synchronized so that the window centre point and the X axis extents are always
visible in the map window regardless of either the map scale or the window dimensions.
FIXED SCALE
Following a pan or zoom, the new map centre and scale are applied to the other linked mappers.
Thus, each linked mapper window has the same centre coordinate and scale but the amount of
data shown in each depends on the individual window size and dimensions.

DISCOVER TAB 731
MAP SIZE
DISCOVER>Windows>Link>Map Size
Resizes and redisplays all map windows that are linked to the current map window. This allows
for easy comparison of the same area between the linked map windows.
Related tasks Matching the sizes of linked windows
DATA ENTRY
PICKLIST MANAGER
DISCOVER>Data Entry>Setup>Picklist Manager
Use this tool to manage picklist styles by either modifying existing picklists or creating new
picklists by importing from external files or creating a brand new picklist.
Related tasks Creating and managing picklists
SETUP TABLE
DISCOVER>Data Entry>Setup>Setup Table
Configure tables with validation rules and defaults for data entry.
Related tasks Configure table for data entry
RECORD ENTRY
DISCOVER>Data Entry>Capture>Record Entry
Enter valid data into a MapInfo Pro table via a streamlined, dockable single record form.
Related tasks Single record data entry
ENTER DATA
DISCOVER>Data Entry>Capture>Enter Data
Digitize spatial or enter non-spatial validated data with attributes.
Related tasks Enter or digitize table data and map objects
STRUCTURAL SYMBOLS
DISCOVER>Data Entry>Apply>Structural Symbols
Use this tool to apply structural symbols to a point dataset.
Related tasks Applying structural styles from a picklist

DISCOVER TAB 732
APPLY PICKLIST
DISCOVER>Data Entry>Apply>Apply Picklist
Use this tool to apply multiple selected picklist styles to map objects in a table either permanently
or as a thematic map.
Related tasks Applying multiple styles from a picklist
APPLY STYLE
DISCOVER>Data Entry>Apply>Apply Style
Use this tool to apply a single picklist style to either selected map objects or to newly created
map objects.
Related tasks Applying a single style from a picklist
MODE
TABLET MODE
DISCOVER>Mode>Tablet
Display tablet friendly ribbon for touch friendly interface.
DESKTOP MODE
DISCOVER>Mode>Desktop
Display standard ribbon interface.

IMAGES TAB
Tools are listed in left-to-right order as they appear on the IMAGES tab in
list of all tools.
IN THIS SECTION
IMAGE TOOLS
Rectify Image 734
Map to Image 734
Reproject Image 735
Convert Image 735
Modify Image 735
Clip Image 735
Rotate Image 736
Filter Image 736
Enhance Image 736
Properties Image 736
GeoTag Setup 736
GeoTag Viewer 736
IMAGES TAB 734
IMAGE TOOLS
RECTIFY IMAGE
IMAGES>Image Tools>Rectify Image
Load raster images and perform image transformations (rubber sheeting) to correctly register an
image to a selected coordinate system.
Related tasks Registering and rectifying raster images
MAP TO IMAGE
IMAGES>Image Tools>Map to Image
Saves the active map window as a raster image (.BMP, .PNG, .JPEG, .TIF, or .GEOTIFF) and
opens the image as a fully registered map in the same coordinate system as the original map
window. The image will be cropped at the current window dimensions. Use to crop large images,
or to convert multiple layers into a single image, or to convert a vector geology map into an image that
can be overlain on a magnetic or gravity image with a set transparency.
Displays the Map to Image dialog box.
Related tasks Saving a map window as a registered raster image
MAP TO IMAGE DIALOG BOX

SELECT WINDOW TO SAVE
Select the map window to be converted to a registered raster image.
PREVIEW
Displays the image from the selected window.
OUTPUT OPTIONS
IMAGE TYPE
Select a raster image type: BMP, PNG, JPEG, TIF, or GEOTIFF. Note that Discover Mobile does
not support PNG.
DETAIL
1x saves the map at screen resolution (96 dpi). 2x will save the map with the same dimensions but
at twice the resolution. Increasing the detail level increases the display size and file size of the
image.
TRANSPARENCY
Apply transparency to the entire image. Type 0 for an opaque image.
SET BACKGROUND TRANSPARENT
Click to set the white background as transparent.

IMAGES TAB 735
CREATE WORLD FILE

Creates the georeferenced raster image in a portable world file format that can be read by third-
party application software. A world file is a six-line text header file that contains information relating
to the image pixel size in X and Y direction, rotation of row or columns and the X and Y coordinates
of the centre of the image top left pixel. Depending on the raster type selected for the registered
raster image, a world file may have one of the following file extensions: .PGW, .JEW, .BPW or
.TFW. Third-party software programs can read and use this information along with an entered
projection to view the raster image in the correct geographical location.
Note You can add a black border around the raster image with the Print border for map window
option under PRO>Options>Devices>Output Settings>Printing.
Note Problems may be encountered when saving a map to registered raster if the operating system
display adapter DPI settings are customized and specify a scale percentage greater than
100%. This may result in the raster image being offset some distance from the original map
window data. Setting the display adapter DPI scale percentage back to 100% should correct
the problem.
REPROJECT IMAGE
IMAGES>Image Tools>Reproject Image
Reproject raster images into a new coordinate system.
Also available from DISCOVER tab under the Reproject button.
Related tasks Reprojecting an image
CONVERT IMAGE
IMAGES>Image Tools>Convert Image
Save an existing image in a new image file format.
Related tasks Converting an image to another format
MODIFY IMAGE
IMAGES>Image Tools>Modify Image
Apply transparency to the image.
Related tasks Setting image transparency
CLIP IMAGE
IMAGES>Image Tools>Clip Image
Clip a raster image to a region.
Related tasks Clipping an image

IMAGES TAB 736
ROTATE IMAGE
IMAGES>Image Tools>Rotate Image
Rotate image by specified angle.
Related tasks Rotating an image
FILTER IMAGE
IMAGES>Image Tools>Filter Image
Apply smoothing and edge detection filters to image.
Related tasks Applying image filters
ENHANCE IMAGE
IMAGES>Image Tools>Enhance Image
Adjust image contrast and brightness and modify colour and gamma Red, Green, Blue
channels.
Related tasks Enhancing an image
PROPERTIES IMAGE
IMAGES>Image Tools>Properties Image
View image file size, projection, X and Y coordinate extents, number of rows and columns, total
pixels, image type and metadata.
Related tasks Displaying image properties
GEOTAG SETUP
IMAGES>Image GeoTag>GeoTag Setup
Setup and import geotagged image links into a MapInfo Pro TAB File.
GEOTAG VIEWER
IMAGES>Image GeoTag>GeoTag Viewer
View geotagged images within a window in Datamine Discover.

ANALYSIS TAB
Tools are listed in left-to-right order as they appear on the ANALYSIS tab in
list of all tools.
IN THIS SECTION
STATISTICS
Data Statistics 738
Data Classification 740
Trivariate Classification 745
Data Normalisation 748
Correlation Matrix 749
Assign Values 750
RASTER
Hydrology 751
Geophysical Filters 751
Contour Labels 756
Contour Label Positioner 756
DISPLAY
Graphing 756
Graph Overlay 756
Stacked Profiles 756
Traverse Lines 758
Plot Vectors 761
Structural Symbols 762
TENEMENTS
Create Application 762
Create State Grid 763
Tenement Search 763
MANAGE
Legend Editor 763
Colour Table Editor 763
ANALYSIS TAB 738
STATISTICS
DATA STATISTICS
ANALYSIS>Statistics>Data Statistics
Computes standard statistical results for multiple elements in a geochemical data table.
Statistics can be calculated for a selected group within a mixed sample population.
Displays the Data Statistics dialog box.
Related tasks Computing summary statistics
DATA STATISTICS DIALOG BOX

Related tasks Computing summary statistics
SELECT TABLE
Select the data table you want to analyse.
SELECT FIELDS
Click to select an assay field. To select multiple fields, click the first field and drag to select
consecutive fields, or hold the CTRL key to select non-consecutive fields.
SELECT GROUP FIELD
To calculate statistics by group, click the box and select a group field. Results are reported for each
unique value in the group field. To calculate statistics for the entire population, click the box and
select <No Grouping>.
SELECT STATISTICS
Click one or more statistical operations:
• Count: Total number of samples in dataset
• Count valid: Number of samples used in the statistical calculation
• Count invalid: Number of samples not used in the statistical calculation. Any samples set to
null in the Data handling options are invalid samples.
• Min: Minimum assay value
• Max: Maximum assay value
• Sum : Sum of assay values
• Mean: Sum of assay values divided by number of samples
• Median: Middle assay value or 50th percentile of ordered assay values. Median of even
number of samples calculated using mean of two middle assay values.
• Range: Maximum assay value minus minimum assay value
• Mode: Assay value that occurs most frequently
• RMS (root mean square): Square root of the mean of the squares of each assay value.
• Geometric mean: Used for positively skewed distributions. Nth root of the product of the
assay values.

ANALYSIS TAB 739
• Harmonic mean: Sum of the reciprocals of each assay value divided by the number of
samples.
• Trimmed mean: Remove a percentage of the largest and smallest assay values and re-
calculate arithmetic mean on trimmed dataset.
• Median dev. mean: Median deviation from the mean
• Median dev. median: Median deviation from the median
• Variance: Measure of the spread within a dataset. Average squared deviation of set of assay
values from their mean.
• Standard deviation: Measure of the spread within a dataset. Square root of the variance.
• Skewness: Estimate of asymmetry of a distribution compared with a normal distribution.
• Kurtosis: Degree of peakness or flatness of a distribution compared with a normal
distribution.
• Interquartile range: Measure of the spread within a dataset. Difference between the 75th
(3rd) and 25th (1st) quartiles.
• Sum of squares: Sum of the square of each assay value
• Percentile: Division of a dataset into one hundred groups containing equal numbers of
samples. Each percentile represents the proportion of samples that lie below this value; e.g.
60% of data lies below the 60th percentile, 95% of data lies below the 95th percentile, etc.
• Count = 0: Number of samples with zero assay value
• Count < 0: Number of samples with assay values less than zero
• Count of minimum: Number of samples with minimum assay value
• Percent of minimum: Percentage of samples with minimum assay value
• Percent = null: Percentage of invalid samples
Use this option to ignore or replace negative, zero or non-numeric values in the data table. Opens
Data Handling Options dialog box. For more information, see Pre-processing and cleaning data.
OUTPUT TABLE
The default output table is named by adding the extension _Stats to the original table name and
saved to the same directory. To change the output name, type the name in the box. The results
table is created and opened in a new browser window.
DATA HANDLING OPTIONS DIALOG BOX

Related tasks Pre-processing and cleaning data
NUMERIC VALUE
SET NEGATIVE VALUES TO
Replaces all negative values in the table. Select the check box and type Null or a numeric value
in the box.
MULTIPLY NEGATIVE VALUES BY
Multiplies all negative values in the table. Select the check box and type a numeric value in the box.

ANALYSIS TAB 740
SET NON-NUMERIC VALUES TO

Replaces all non-numeric values in the table. Select the check box and type Null or a numeric
value in the box.
SET ALL ZERO VALUES TO
Replaces all zero values in the table. Select the check box and type Null or a numeric value in the
box.
CUSTOM ASSIGN VALUES FROM TEMPLATE TABLE
Apply multiple replacement values from a template. The template must be created and open in
MapInfo Pro before it can be selected. The template must contain three fields: the element name,
the original assay value, and the new replacement assay value. Select the check box, and then
select the template and fields.
SELECT TEMPLATE TABLE
Select a template table. The table must be open before it can be selected.
ASSIGN ELEMENT NAME FIELD
Select the field in the template table that contains the element name.
REPLACE ANY OCCURRENCE OF
Select the field in the template table that contains the original value.
WITH A NEW VALUE OF
Select the field in the template table that contains the replacement value.
OUTPUT
The following options are only available when Data Output Options is selected from the Data
Levelling dialog box.
INCLUDE WORKING COLUMNS IN OUTPUT TABLE
Add processed data columns to the output table.
SCALE OUTPUT UNITS TO INPUT UNITS
Restore transformed data values to the original input units.
OUTPUT NULL VALUE
Replace all null values with a numeric value. Select the check box and type a numeric value in the
box.
DATA CLASSIFICATION
ANALYSIS>Statistics>Data Classification
Point classification of data is used to segregate a dataset into groups defined by a range or
group of values. The point data can then be statistically analysed by group or range, and point
displays can be modulated by colour, size and symbol type. Classifications can be applied to
the same table and field (column) by selecting classifications concurrently on one or more classification
tabs. To modulate colour, size and symbol with separate fields, you must apply each classification
consecutively, saving the classification table between each application.

ANALYSIS TAB 741
Displays the Data Classification dialog box.

Related tasks Classifying data by colour, size, and symbol
DATA CLASSIFICATION DIALOG BOX

TABLE
Select the point table you want to classify.
COLUMN
Select the classification field in the input table.
(CLASSIFY BY)
• Colour tab
• Size tab
• Symbol tab
OUTPUT TABLE
Three output options are available for displaying point classifications:
NEW
Creates a new table containing the classifications applied to the original data table. The new table
is automatically named with the _Classified extension or can be renamed by clicking Filter. The
new classification table is automatically displayed in a new map window.
FILTER
Click the button to select fields in the input data table that you want added to the output table, and
to change the output table name (see Output Table dialog box).
SOURCE
Modifies the selected table in place. After classification, the table must be saved using
DISCOVER>File>Save Table.
THEMATIC MAP
Displays the classified point data as a thematic map layer.
COLUMN
The classification field name.
SYMBOL
The default symbol applied to thematic points. Click the symbol to change.
NULL HANDLING
DISPLAY NULL VALUES
Select the check box to assign the default Symbol to null value data in the selected field. Click the
Symbol to change. Click Options to ignore or replace negative, zero or non-numeric values in the
data table. See Pre-processing and cleaning data.

ANALYSIS TAB 742
COLOUR TAB
COLOUR
Select the check box to modulate the point symbol colour by values in the selected field.
SAVE AND LOAD RANGES
Save and load a classification table. The colour, size and symbol type are recorded in
the saved table.
COLOUR METHOD
Select an auto-ranging method. The resulting range divisions and colours are displayed in the
classification table.
(CLASSIFICATION TABLE)
Displays the divisions in the classification table including division label (Description). the lower
(>=) and upper (<) limits of each division, and the number of occurences in each division (Count),
which is also expressed as a percentage of the total population (%).
To edit the label, limits or colour of a division, click inside the cell and type or select the new value.
The Count and % fields are automatically updated.
Values outside the lowest and highest classification divisions will be ignored. Any gaps created by
editing the range limits will be ignored.
ADD OR REMOVE DIVISION
Add or remove the selected divisions in the classification table. Divisions cannot be
changed for discrete value groups, such as for non-numeric data, except for the
<Custom> classification method.
CLEAR ALL DIVISIONS
Remove all divisions in the classification table.
COLOUR TABLE
Displays the colour lookup table currently applied to the classification. Click the box to select a
different Colour Table. For information on editing and creating a Colour Table, see Creating and
editing legends.
SIZE TAB

ANALYSIS TAB 743
SIZE
Select the check box to modulate the point symbol size by values in the selected field.
the saved table.
SIZE METHOD
Select an auto-ranging method. The resulting range divisions and sizes are displayed in the
(>=) and upper (<) limits of each division, and the number of occurrences in each division (Count),
To edit the label, limits or symbol size of a division, click inside the cell and type the new value. The
Count and % fields are automatically updated.
CLEAR ALL DIVISIONS
MIN
The minimum symbol size in mm.
MAX
The maximum symbol size in mm.
STEP
The increment of symbol size between each division.
SYMBOL TAB

ANALYSIS TAB 744
SYMBOL
Select the check box to modulate the point symbol type by values in the selected field.
the saved table.
SYMBOL METHOD
Select an auto-ranging method. The resulting range divisions and symbols are displayed in the
(>=) and upper (<) limits of each division, and the number of occurences in each division (Count),
To edit the label, limits or symbol type of a division, click inside the cell and type or select the new
value or symbol. The Count and % fields are automatically updated.
CLEAR ALL DIVISIONS
SYMBOL FONT
The current symbol font. Click the box to edit.
OUTPUT TABLE DIALOG BOX

Allows you to select which fields you want included in the output table and to change the name of
the output table.
TABLE
Click the box to edit the file name or click the browse button to select a new output folder.

ANALYSIS TAB 745
UNSELECTED FIELDS
Fields available in the input table that are not included in the output table. To add to the output
table, select the field or fields required in this box, and then click the Add button, or click All.
SELECTED FIELDS
Fields selected to be added to the output table. To remove, select the field or fields in this box,
and then click the Remove button, or click None.
TRIVARIATE CLASSIFICATION
ANALYSIS>Statistics>Trivariate Classification
Three elements in the selected table are assigned an RGB channel and a threshold value.
Samples that pass the thresholds for all three selected elements are displayed using the same
symbol style, colour and size. Each sample is assigned a point classification code which is
saved to a new field in the input table or a new table. Classification legends can be displayed as a
thematic legend or as a MapInfo Pro table, which can be edited and scaled. The output classifications
can be displayed as a thematic map overlay or the new point symbols can be saved to the existing
table or new table.
Displays the Trivariate Point Classification dialog box.
Related tasks Trivariate point classification
TRIVARIATE POINT CLASSIFICATION DIALOG BOX

Related tasks Trivariate point classification
TABLE
SELECT TABLE TO CLASSIFY
Select the point table you want to classify. The number of records in the data table are displayed.
CHANNEL SELECTION
RED
Select the red channel classification field.
GREEN
Select the green channel classification field.
BLUE
Select the blue channel classification field.
THREHOLDED BY
• Value: Type a threshold value for each channel in the adjacent boxes. The data range is
displayed to the right of the box.
• Percent: Type or select a percentage threshold for each channel in the adjacent boxes. The
• Percentile: Type or select a percentile threshold for each channel in the adjacent boxes. The

ANALYSIS TAB 746
USE SINGLE THRESHOLD

Select the check box to use the same threshold (defined for the red channel) on all three channels.
OUTPUT OPTIONS
SAVE CLASSIFICATION CODE TO FIELD
The classification code field name. Click the box to select a different, existing character field, or
type a new field name. The default field name is _ClassField.
The classification code is a three-digit binary number (stored as a character string) that indicates
if the value passes the threshold on each channel. For example, the code 101 indicates that the
thresholds on the R and B channels have been passed (1) but has failed (0) the threshold on the
G channel.
SET POINT STYLES
Displays the Set Point Styles dialog box, where you can assign point styles to each of the eight
RGB classification codes.
DISPLAY CUSTOM LEGEND
Select the check box to display the classification as a thematic legend.
DISPLAY MAPINFO LEGEND
Select the check box to display the classification as a MapInfo Pro table.
DISPLAY/CLASSIFY POINTS THAT INCORPORATE NULL VALUES
Select the check box to classify and display all points in the input table. Clear the check box to
exclude those with null values.
OUTPUT TYPE
Three output options are available for displaying point classifications:
THEMATIC MAP
Displays the classified point data as a thematic map layer.
CHANGE SOURCE
Modifies the selected table in place. After classification, the table must be saved using
DISCOVER>File>Save Table.
CREATE NEW TABLE
Creates a new table containing the classifications applied to the original data table. The new table
is automatically named with the _Classified extension or can be renamed by clicking New table
options. The new classification table is automatically displayed in a new map window.
NEW TABLE OPTIONS
Click the button to select columns in the original data table that you want added to the output
table, and to change the output table name. The Specify Output Table dialog box is displayed.

ANALYSIS TAB 747
SPECIFY OUTPUT TABLE DIALOG BOX

Allows you to select which fields you want included in the output table and to change the name pf
the output table.
FILE NAME
Click the box to edit the file name or click the browse button to select a new output folder.
INCLUDE FIELDS
Select a check box to include the field in the output table or clear to omit.
SET POINT STYLES DIALOG BOX

Assign a point style to each of the eight possible classification codes, that is, each RGB channel
value from 000 through 111.
LEGEND
SAVE AND LOAD POINT STYLES
Click to save point styles as a table and load a saved point styles table.
SYMBOL LEGEND
Displays the symbol style assigned to each classification code. Click a symbol button to display
the Pick Symbol dialog box, where you can edit the symbol type, colour, and size.
NULL SYMBOL SHAPE
The symbol style displayed by a null value data point.
SYMBOL OPTIONS
USE SINGLE SYMBOL STYLE
Select the check box to use the same symbol type (for example, a circle or a square) for all eight
classification code values. Click the symbol button to modify.
GRADUATE SYMBOL SIZE FROM
Select the check box to grade the symbol size automatically. Type the minimum symbol size in the
pts box.
PICK SYMBOL DIALOG BOX

Edit symbol type, size and colour.
FONT
Click to select a different symbol font.
SIZE
Click to change the symbol size.
COLOUR
Click to select a different colour from the colour palette.
SYMBOL
Click a symbol type.

ANALYSIS TAB 748
DATA NORMALISATION
ANALYSIS>Statistics>Data Normalisation
Many statistical processes require data to be normally distributed. Because geochemical data
typically exhibits a log-normal distribution or is positively skewed, it must first be transformed or
“levelled” to a normal distribution. The Datamine Discover levelling tool provides a number of
common levelling functions that can be used to normalize the data.
Displays the Data Normalisation dialog box.
Related tasks Normalising or levelling data.
DATA NORMALISATION DIALOG BOX

Related tasks Normalising or levelling data
SELECT TABLE TO LEVEL
Select the point table you want to level.
FIELDS TO LEVEL
Select one or more fields that you want levelled. To select multiple fields, click the first field and
drag to select consecutive fields, or hold the CTRL key to select non-consecutive fields.
FIELDS TO LEVEL BY
Select the fields that define subgroups of the population in which levelling will occur. Typically, this
will be a geology type, sample type, or analytical method. The number of distinct values in each
field selected is displayed. To select multiple fields, click the first field and drag to select
LEVELLING OPERATIONS
• Mean: Divide each variable by the mean of the group it belongs to. This method performs
a linear transform of the data to give a response ratio or times background measure. Suitable
for normally distributed data.
• Log-mean: Log transforms each variable and divides by the mean of the group it belongs to.
This method performs a linear transform of the data to give a response ratio or times
background measure in log space. Suitable for log-normally distributed data.
• Z-score: Converts each variable to a Z-score for the group it belongs to. This method
performs a linear transform of the data into units of standard deviation centred around zero
(the mean value). Suitable for normally distributed data.
• Log(Z)-score: Log transforms each variable and converts to a Z-score for the group it
belongs to. This method performs a linear transformation of the data into units of standard
deviation centred around zero (the mean value). Suitable for log-normally distributed data.
• Median: Divides each variable by the median of the group it belongs to. This method
performs a linear transform on the data to give a response ratio or times
background measure. It is very similar to the mean method but is more robust to outliers or
extreme data values. Suitable for most distributions.

ANALYSIS TAB 749
• Median-MAD: Subtracts the median from each variable and divides by the
median absolute deviation (MAD) from the median for each group. This method performs a
linear transform which gives a ratio or times background measure. More robust than
the median method to outliers or extreme data values. Suitable for most distributions.
• Rank-percentile: Ranks each variable within the group it belongs to and then converts it
to the equivalent percentile value. This method performs a non-linear transform that
is suitable for most distributions.
• Rank-Gauss: Transforms variables in each category using a non-linear scaling method
so the distribution approximates a normal distribution. The results are then rank ordered. This
method performs a non-linear transform that is suitable for most distributions.
• Standard deviation: Divide assay value for each element by the background standard
deviation concentration calculated for each attribute group.
• Variance: Divide assay value for each element by the background variance concentration
calculated for each attribute group.
• Log: Apply base 10 logarithm to each assay value.
INCLUDE SUMMARY COLUMNS
Adds columns to the output table showing when a channel is higher than the threshold value after
levelling and returns the raw assay values in the same format.
THRESHOLD
Type the threshold value used to filter the summary columns in the output table.
OUTPUT TABLE
The default output table is named by adding the extension _Levelled to the input table name and
is saved to the same directory. To change the output name, type the name in the box. The levelled
data table is created and opened in a new browser window.
CORRELATION MATRIX
ANALYSIS>Statistics>Correlation Matrix
The correlation matrix is a standardized variance-covariance matrix that emphasizes the relative
variation between two elements. Raw data is standardized by calculating the correlation
coefficient so all elements have a variance of one and a mean of zero. The correlation coefficient
is unit-less and is the ratio of the covariance of two elements to the product of their standard deviations.
A correlation matrix can be calculated for either an entire dataset table or a subset (Query).
Displays the Correlation Statistics dialog box.
Related tasks Computing a correlation matrix
CORRELATION STATISTICS DIALOG BOX

Related tasks Computing a correlation matrix
SELECT TABLE
Select the data table you want to analyse.

ANALYSIS TAB 750
SELECT FIELDS
Click to select an assay field. To select multiple fields, click the first field and drag to select
SELECT GROUP FIELD
To calculate statistics by group, click the box and select a group field. Results are reported for each
unique value in the group field. To calculate statistics for the entire population, click the box and
select <No Grouping>..
CORRELATION OPTIONS
OUTPUT TABLE
The default output table is named by adding the extension _CorMatrix to the original table name
and saved to the same directory. To change the output name, type the name in the box. The results
table is created and opened in a new browser window.
ASSIGN VALUES
ANALYSIS>Statistics>Assign Values
This tool operates in two modes: You can either assign aggregated values of map object
attributes in one table to the containing polygon map objects in another table, or you can assign
polygon attributes in one table to contained map objects in another table.
Displays the Assign Values dialog box.
Related tasks Assigning values to and from polygons
ASSIGN VALUES DIALOG BOX

Related tasks Assigning values to and from polygons
ASSIGNMENT RELATIONSHIP
FROM TABLE
Select the table that contains the data that you want to assign. If the assign direction is Contents
to Container, this is typically a point or sample data table. If the assign direction is Container to
Contents, select a polygon data table.
FROM COLUMN
Select the column that contains the data values you want to assign, or select <Expression> to
create an expression from the Expression Construction Dialog Box.
TO TABLE
Select the table that you want the attributes assigned to. If the assign direction is Contents to
Container, select a polygon data table. If the assign direction is Container to Contents, this is
typically a point or sample data table.

ANALYSIS TAB 751
TO COLUMN
Select the column that you want to assign the values to, or select <Expression> to create an
expression from the Expression Construction Dialog Box.
ASSIGN DIRECTION
• Contents -> Container: Assign aggregated values of map object attributes in one table to the
containing polygon map objects in another table. For example, use this mode to calculate a
weighted mean assay value of samples within a polygon and assign the calculated value to
the polygon.
• Container -> Contents: Assign polygon attributes in one table to contained map objects in
another table. The attribute value can be either a single value (such as the polygon lithology
code), or can be created from an expression (such as the mean elevation of the polygon).
ASSIGNMENT OPERATION
When Contents to Container mode is selected,
• Frequency
• Minimum
• Maximum
• Sum
• Mean
• Median
• Weighted Mean (mean weighted by the value of another column in the contents table)
• Standard Deviation
• Mean weighted by area (multiplied by a scale factor from 106 to 10-6)
RASTER
HYDROLOGY
ANALYSIS>Raster>Hydrology
Extract drainage features and generate catchment areas for terrain models/DEM surfaces.
Related tasks Hydrological surface analysis
GEOPHYSICAL FILTERS
ANALYSIS>Raster>Geophysical Filters
Discover's Geophysical Filters extend Raster's powerful and extensive filtering capabilities
(such as Enhancement, Smoothing, Custom and Focal Filters) as found under
RASTER>Operations>Filter.
Related tasks Geophysical filter descriptions
The following functions are available:

ANALYSIS TAB 752
• Apply Geophysical FFT (Fast Fourier Transform) filters, including :

• Band Pass
• Continuation
• High Pass
• Low Pass
• Reduction to Equator
• Reduction to Pole &
• Vertical Derivative filters
• Apply Padding to grid to remove edge effects.
• Apply Fill Holes to remove internal holes within the grid, based on the surrounding grid values.
To use, ensure a raster grid is open in the current map window, and select Geophysical Filters button:
The Geophysical Filters dialog with input, raw and filtered grid previews
Additional grids can be loaded from within the dialog using the Browse button. Specify the grid format
from the Files of Type entry in the Open dialog. Once loaded, the grid content is displayed in the three
preview windows.
Note Grid Filter supports unlimited large grids, except for Grid Utilities>Fill Holes and
Convolution>Advanced filters. These are limited to 50 million cells (including padding).

ANALYSIS TAB 753
PREVIEW WINDOWS
The Full Input Grid window displays the entire original input grid. The Raw and Filtered windows may
show either the entire grid or a portion of the input grid. The Filtered preview window displays the
output grid with the selected filters applied.
To examine the effects of the filtering process more closely position the cursor in the Raw or Filtered
preview window. When the cursor is placed in one of these preview windows initially it is displayed as
a ‘magnifying glass’. Click the left-mouse button to zoom the view inside the Raw and Filtered preview
windows. To return to the previous zoom view, click the left-mouse button again. To pan a zoomed
view, click the right-mouse button and when the cursor ‘hand’ is shown, drag the zoomed image to
display a new view.
Zoom Cursor (left) and Pan Cursor (right)
If the input grid is larger than 400 x 400 rows and columns, a small rectangle is drawn over the original
grid in the Full Input Grid window. This rectangle indicates the portion of the grid that is being
processed in the other preview windows. The rectangle can be selected by the cursor and moved to a
new part of the input grid if required.
GRID INFORMATION
Grid information relating to the size, rows/columns and data within each of the three preview windows
is using the Information button. If a preview window is zoomed or has one or more filters applied the
three grids will contain different grid data content as indicated in the Grid Information dialog:
Grid Information for three preview windows with zoom and filter applied

ANALYSIS TAB 754
PADDING
Padding is a preprocessing step prior to performing the Convolution or Geophysical filters. This is
enabled by ticking Pad Grid before filtering.
The padding process consists of two steps:
1. Fill internal holes in the grid based on interpolating the surrounding cell values by the minimum
curvature algorithm to populate the hole cells.
2. Subtract from this grid a constant value to normalize the dataset (typically the mean of median is
used).
3. Set the nulls surrounding the grid to 0, adding 0 cells to make the grid square, and a extra buffer
padding margin, as set under the Grid Filter Settings.
Note It is recommended to always use padding, and padding is required for FFT filters.
APPLYING GRID FILTERS

The Convolution, Geophysical, and Utils buttons provide pull-down lists of available filters. Selected
filters are listed in the window beneath these buttons. A full list and description of the available grid
filters is provided in Geophysical filter descriptions. The Grid Filter dialog automatically updates to
display the effect of the selected filters. More than one filter can be applied with a cumulative result.
Note You cannot mix Geophysical FFT and non-FFT filters in the same filtering run.
As each filter is selected, it is automatically applied to the portion of the grid displayed in the Filtered
window. The area over which the filters are applied is indicated by a square drawn in the Full Input
Grid. The raw content of this area is displayed in the Raw preview window. The combined output of
the processing steps is shown in the Filtered window.
Filters are applied in the order listed. The processing is applied such that the output of one operation
is the input of the next. This means that complex processing can be applied cumulatively. To alter the
order of operation, use the Up and Down button to the right of the operation list. To remove a selected
filter, highlight it in the filter list and click the Delete button.
The Grid Filter dialog automatically updates to display the effect of the selected filters. More than one
filter can be applied with a cumulative result. The Filter Properties area details any controls that apply
to a highlighted filter. These controls may include kernels, required wavelengths and filter
specifications.
FILLING HOLES
The Fill Holes grid utility is used to replace nulls in a grid by interpolating the surrounding data values.
SAVING THE FILTERED GRID

Once the desired combination of filters has been selected and an acceptable output presented in the
Filtered preview screen, press the Save As button to create an output grid file. By default this will add
a suffix to the input grid file name denoting the filters applied and save it in the source file directory.

ANALYSIS TAB 755
All files, including any temporary and optional output grids, will be stored in this output folder. You may
need up to 5 times the input grid size in disk space in this directory, to include the temporary and
optional files. To automatically display the filtered grid in a new MapInfo Pro map window after saving
to the nominated output file, check the Auto open output grid box.
Note File names greater than 30 characters in length can be ambiguous when used with certain
tools in MapInfo Pro (such as the Layer Control). Datamine Discover displays a warning of this
limitation if the specified output file name exceeds this limit.
GRID FILTER SETTINGS

Click the Settings button to access preview display, padding options, and Fast Fourier Transform
options.:
The Show preview headings option toggles the text display in the preview screens on or off.
The Zoom level can be specified as default integer value: an entry of 5 will zoom the area to 5 rows/
columns for each one seen in the original, upper preview window.
The Padding Margin is appended to the original grid and can be saved for examination if required by
checking the Save padded grid box.
The Restore nulls in final grid will restore any internal holes from the input grid in the final output, which
is part of the unpad process. If you un-tick this, it will effectively produced a final output grid which
includes the Fill Holes filter result.
The Z offset is a constant number which is subtracted from the input grid during the padding process.
This is necessary as the grid will be padded with 0 cells, and to remove edge effects typically the input
grid needs to be normalized around 0. For certain grids a more appropriate value to normalize to is the
median or minimum or maximum values. These can be used by select Use Specified Value and
manually entering the appropriate value.
When applying a FFT filter, the transformed Frequency domain grids, both Real and Imaginary
components, can be saved by ticking Save FFT grid.

ANALYSIS TAB 756
CONTOUR LABELS
ANALYSIS>Raster>Contour Labels
See Polyline Labels.
CONTOUR LABEL POSITIONER

ANALYSIS>Raster>Contour Label Positioner
See Polyline Label Positioner.
DISPLAY
GRAPHING
ANALYSIS>Display>Graphing
Starts the GraphMap tool.
Related tasks Starting GraphMap

Using the GraphMap tool
GRAPH OVERLAY
ANALYSIS>Display>Graph Overlay
Creates and saves multiple selection polygons for a particular graph.
Related tasks Creating permanent selection regions.
STACKED PROFILES
ANALYSIS>Display>Stacked Profiles
Creates a linegraph of a nominated field displayed along a traverse base line. Features include:
display multiple data channels at different scales; apply line filters; set high and low thresholds;
colour fill above or below a baseline; and linear or logarithmic scaling. The data table must
contain a column with a unique line identifier attribute (e.g. line number) and at least one numeric data
column on which to create the profile.
Displays the Stacked Profile dialog box.
Related tasks Stacked profiles

ANALYSIS TAB 757
STACKED PROFILE DIALOG BOX

Related tasks Stacked profiles
INPUT
DATASET
Displays the selected data table from which the stacked profile is generated. Click to select another
table.
FIELD
Select the column containing the data values to be graphed.
LINE
Select the column containing the unique line identifier.
DRAW ACROSS NULLS
Select to continue the graph line when null values are present. Type the numerical value that
represent a null in the box.
DISTANCE THRESHOLD
Terminate the line graph when the distance between points exceeds a threshold. Type the
threshold distance in the box.
SCALE
LOG/LINEAR
Select Linear or Logarithmic graph scale.
TYPE
• Scale factor
• Input units per cm
MAP SCALE
(Input units per cm)
SCALE
(Input units per cm)
AUTO
(Scale factor) Clear the check box and type the graph scale factor in the box.
BASELINE
Choose a Minimum, Maximum, Median, Average or User Defined baseline. If selected, type the
user-defined value in the box.
LINE STYLE
SHOW BASE LINES
Select the check box to display the baseline.
SHOW FIELD LINES
Select the check box to show the graph line for the selected field. Click the style buttons to set the
line colour and line style.

ANALYSIS TAB 758
FILL
ABOVE
Select the check box to colour fill the area above the baseline or a user-defined value. Click the
colour button to set the fill colour. If <Value> is selected, type the value in the box.
BELOW
Select the check box to colour fill the area below the baseline or a user-defined value. Click the
colour button to set the fill colour. If <Value> is selected, type the value in the box.
CLIP
ABOVE
Select the check box to clip the graph line above a user-defined value. The maximum field value
is shown in the box.
BELOW
Select the check box to clip the graph line below a user-defined value. The minimum field value is
shown in the box.
OUTPUT
Profiles are saved to a table and added as a layer to the map window. Click to edit the table name
and path, or click the Open button to select a folder and file name.
TRAVERSE LINES
ANALYSIS>Display>Traverse Lines
Interactively design traverse lines over an area of interest. A set of grid points (pegs) and
traverse lines with both map (real-world) and local grid coordinates will be generated; these can
then be used for geochemical sampling, drillhole Section Lines or geophysical surveys.
Displays the Traverse Lines dialog box.
Related tasks Generating traverse lines and peg coordinates
TRAVERSE LINES DIALOG BOX

Note The Traverse Lines tool does not support Latitude/Longitude projections; ensure that the
mapper window is in a UTM projection system.
• Grid Type tab
• Grid Parameters tab
GRID TYPE TAB

DEFINE TRAVERSE LINES BY
Define the traverse lines by specifying either:
• Baseline orientation: Define the orientation of the baseline along which equally spaced,
perpendicular traverse lines are generated.
• Traverse/cross line orientation: Define the orientation of a traverse line from which equally
spaced, parallel traverse lines are generated.

ANALYSIS TAB 759
GRID PARAMETERS TAB

GRID DIRECTION
BUILD GRID TO [ ] SIDE OF BASELINE/TRAVERSE LINE
Generate the traverse lines left, right, or on both sides of the defined baseline or traverse line.
NO. OF PEGS/LINES TO THE LEFT OF BASELINE/TRAVERSE LINE
If grid is generated <Both> sides, type the no. of pegs/lines to the left of baseline/traverse line.
DEFINE GRID PARAMETERS USING
START COORDINATE AND BEARING
Define the baseline or traverse line by a starting point and line bearing.
LOCAL GRID UNIT
Click to select the unit of the local grid.
TWO SETS OF COORDINATES
Define the baseline or traverse line by a starting point and a second point.
GRID LINE PARAMETERS
Specify any two of the parameters, and then click the calculator button to calculate the third. Click
the toggle button to move the calculator.
BASELINE LENGTH
Type or calculate the length of the baseline.
LINE SPACING
Type or calculate the traverse line spacing along the baseline.
NUMBER OF LINES
Type or calculate the number of traverse lines.
GRID PARAMETERS
DEFINE INTERACTIVELY ON MAP
Click and drag in the map window to define a baseline or traverse line. The corresponding grid
parameters are displayed in the X and Y, Baseline/Traverse line angle, Line length and Projection
boxes.
MAP
Displays the map coordinates of the first point of the baseline. Click in the X and Y boxes to edit.
LOCAL
Displays the local grid coordinates of the first point of the baseline. Click in the X and Y boxes to
edit.
BASELINE ANGLE
Displays the bearing of the baseline
PROJECTION
The native projection of the map window is displayed.

ANALYSIS TAB 760
GRID PARAMETERS
Specify any two of the parameters, and then click the calculator button to calculate the third. Click
the toggle button to move the calculator.
LINE LENGTH
Type or calculate the length of the traverse line.
PEG SPACING
Type or calculate the peg spacing along the traverse line.
NUMBER OF PEGS
Type or calculate the number of pegs. If necessary, move the calculator to the Line length box and
recalculate the line length.
ADVANCED OPTIONS
Displays the Advanced Options dialog box, from which you can specify peg and line numbering
and other options.
PEG SYMBOL STYLE
Click to display the Pick Symbol dialog box.
OUTPUT OPTIONS
CREATE GRID AS POINT FILE
By default a mappable tablename_Point table will be created containing points for every peg in
both real world and local coordinates. Click the Save button to specify the tablename and location
for the output files. The peg table contains the following columns:
• PegNum: peg number
• Line: line number
• LocalX: non-earth easting coordinate
• LocalY: non-earth northing coordinate
• East: easting coordinate in the specified UTM projection
• North: northing coordinate in the specified UTM projection
CREATE GRID AS LINE FILE
Select to create a tablename_Line table comprising a series of attributed grid lines.
ADD TO CURRENT MAPPER WINDOW
Select to add the output tables to the current map window. If a map window other than the original
mapper window is made active, pressing Preview will add the traverse lines to this window. This
can be useful when displaying different datasets of covering the same area in different windows.
PREVIEW
Click to generate a preview of the resulting grid after changing the grid
ADVANCED OPTIONS DIALOG BOX


ANALYSIS TAB 761
FIRST LINE NO.

Type the initial line number in the output Line field (default 1).
FIRST PEG NO.
Type the initial peg number in the output PegNum field (default 1).
PEG NO. INCREMENT
Type the peg number increment (default 1)
PEG NO. PREFIX
Type a prefix to the peg numbers e.g. RH530, RH531, RH532…
PEG NO. SUFFIX
Type a suffix to the peg numbers e.g. 34 west, 35 west, 36 west
PEG NUMBERS INCREASE UP ONE LINE THEN FOLLOW ON DOWN THE NEXT LINE
Select to numer pegs zig-zag style.
OFFSET ALTERNATE LINE BY DISTANCE
Type an offset of half the peg spacing to create a diamond peg pattern.
PLOT VECTORS
ANALYSIS>Display>Plot Vectors
Displays velocity and flow data as oriented vectors with either a fixed vector length or with a
length proportional to a magnitude attribute in the point source table. For example, water flow,
soil creep, erosion rate, dune movement or any surface measurement which has a magnitude
and direction component can be represented in this way. The table must contain mapped point
locations, with attribute columns for the position coordinates (Easting and Northing) and the vector
azimuth. An optional column can also be added to control the length of the vector magnitude.
Displays the Plot Vectors dialog box.
Related tasks Formatting vector objects
PLOT VECTORS DIALOG BOX

VECTOR TABLE
Select the table containing the vector data.
RE-CREATE POINTS
When re-running with new settings, select the check box to re-create the vector display.
OUTPUT TABLE
Select the cosmetic layer, the input vector table (to overwrite the current table), another vector data
table, or <Create a table> (to write the vectors to a new table).
COLUMNS
Select the vector data columns defining the position, orientation and magnitude of each vector.
EASTING
Select the column containing the X coordinate.

ANALYSIS TAB 762
NORTHING
Select the column containing the Y coordinate.
AZIMUTH
Select the column containing the vector azimuth.
MAGNITUDE
(Optional) Select the column containing the vector magnitude.
VECTOR TYPE
• Vector: Use the Magnitude column to modulate the length of the vector arrow.
• Scalar: Vector arrows are the same length.
DISTANCE UNITS
Select the distance units of the vector coordinates.
VECTOR STYLE
SCALE
Select the scale factor in distance units per units of magnitude.
ARROW STYLE
Click to select the arrow line style and colour.
ARROW HEAD
LENGTH
Type the length of the arrow head (to suit the map scale).
WIDTH
Type the width of the arrow head.
STRUCTURAL SYMBOLS
ANALYSIS>Display>Structural Symbols
See Structural Symbols.
TENEMENTS
CREATE APPLICATION
ANALYSIS>Tenements>Create Application
Creates new or modifies existing applications by interactive sub-block selection, and generates
application reports automatically for entry into standard statutory application forms.
Related tasks Apply for an Australian mineral tenement

ANALYSIS TAB 763
CREATE STATE GRID

ANALYSIS>Tenements>Create State Grid
Create polygonized block and sub-block reference grids.
Related tasks Displaying graticular state reference grid
TENEMENT SEARCH
ANALYSIS>Tenements>Tenement Search
Tenement data can be searched with the Tenement Search tool.
Related tasks Searching Australian tenements
MANAGE
LEGEND EDITOR
ANALYSIS>Manage>Legend Editor
See Legend Editor.
COLOUR TABLE EDITOR

ANALYSIS>Manage>Colour Table Editor
Create and modify colour tables from drillhole data and features.
Colour look-up tables can be created and modified using the Colour Table Editor. The colour table
tables are stored in the folder specified under the Settings button in the colour table editor.
The format of colour table files varies depending on the saved format type. Supported types are:
• Arc/ESRII CLR (.CLR) (default)
• Surfer CLR (.CLR)
• ER Mapper (.LUT)
• Geosoft Oasis (.TBL)

ANALYSIS TAB 764
Colour Table Editor dialog
Note Some colour table files may display values or percents in additional columns of comments
fields. These are ignored by the Modify Grid Display tool and only the relative index number is
used for any colour mapping
The Colour Table Editor dialog is divided into functional areas. On the left is a scrollable list showing
all the available colour table. Beneath this list are New and Delete buttons for creating and removing
colour table tables. In the centre of the dialog the selected colour table is displayed showing the various
colour settings for each of the rows specified in the colour table with descriptive comments if required.
At the top of the dialog is the selected colour table name, an colour table description and the actual
filename. On the right of the dialog is a preview of the entire colour table as it would be applied. The
buttons at the base of the dialog are used to control the distribution of colours in the colour table.
A colour table is comprised of a number of rows generally in the order of from 1 to a maximum of 256.
Each row can have a colour individually assigned, or a group of rows can be selected and the colours
distributed through the row range.
Once a colour table has been specified it can be stored using the Save button (into the colour table
directory), or into a different location and with a different format if required using the Save As button.
The above colour table formats are provided as options when the Save As dialog is displayed.
To edit any colour table, Select HSL or RGB from the Colour Interpretation pull-down list. Left-mouse
click any of the Colour cells of a row to select a colour from the standard colour palette. Use the Custom
option to create additional colours. To create a colour spread over a range of cells colour and select
two end member cells in non-adjacent rows by holding down the SHIFT or CTRL key. Click the Interp
Selection button to fill the intermediate blank cells with graduated colour. Use the Clear Cells button to
remove colour from highlighted cells.

ANALYSIS TAB 765
To view the Red, Green, Blue values for each row check the Show RGB values box.
Selected cells can be all set to match the FIRST selected cell using the Duplicate button. This always
operates from the top-most selected cell down, irrespective of the order in which the cells were
selected. Extra rows can be added or deleted using the Insert or Delete Rows buttons.
Colour tables are stored and loaded from a specified folder under the Settings button. By default this
is the same folder that Drillhole Legends (.LEGS) are also stored in.

MODIFY TAB
Tools are listed in left-to-right order as they appear on the MODIFY tab in
list of all tools.
IN THIS SECTION
CREATE
Build Object 767
Object Builder 767
Voronoi Polygons 767
PolyBuilder 767
UPDATE
Mulit-Column Update 767
Multi-Append 768
Insert Nodes 768
Extract Nodes 768
Unique Identifier 768
EDIT
Smooth Lines 769
Reverse Line 769
Line Join 769
Line Cut 769
Line Annotation 769
Line Annotation Select 771
Thin Node Number 771
Thin Node Position 771
Clone Style 771
Donut Polygons 771
Custom Patterns 771
RGB Colourizer 773
MOVE
Transform Object 773
Align Objects 774
Offset Object 774
MODIFY TAB 767
CREATE
BUILD OBJECT
MODIFY>Create>Build Object
Create map objects with coordinates entered from the keyboard.
Related tasks Creating and editing objects from the keyboard
OBJECT BUILDER
MODIFY>Create>Object Builder
Create polyline or polygon map objects from coordinates imported from text files.
Related tasks Creating objects from a table
VORONOI POLYGONS
MODIFY>Create>Voronoi Polygons
Create Voronoi regions from point data, optionally bounded by a selected boundary.
Related tasks Creating Voronoi polygons
POLYBUILDER
MODIFY>Create>PolyBuilder
Clean and create polgons from line objects.
UPDATE
MULIT-COLUMN UPDATE
MODIFY>Update>Multi-Column Update
Updates columns in one table with data from columns in another table with a common joining
field, such as a sample number or drillhole name.
Related tasks Updating multiple columns

MODIFY TAB 768
MULTI-APPEND
MODIFY>Update>Multi-Append
Append multiple tables with the option to order the appending sequence.
Related tasks Appending multiple tables
INSERT NODES
MODIFY>Update>Nodes>Insert Nodes
Insert nodes at specified intervals from the beginning of a line or into polylines/polygons at
regular spacings between existing nodes.
Related tasks Inserting nodes
EXTRACT NODES
MODIFY>Update>Nodes>Extract Nodes
Extracts nodes or line segments from a polyline or polygon. For example, extract nodes from
contour lines and reprocess the three-dimensional point data to create a new interpolation grid.
Extracted node coordinates are added to a new table as attributes.
Note Nodes cannot be extracted from map objects in the cosmetic layer.
Displays the Extract Nodes dialog box.
Related tasks Extracting nodes
EXTRACT NODES DIALOG BOX

EXTRACTION TYPE
Choose to select points or line segments.
POINT EXTRACTION OPTIONS
(Available when Extract points is selected under Extraction type.)
SYMBOL STYLE
Click to set the symbol style.
EXTRACT EVERY N NODES
A value of 1 will extract all nodes. Type a value to sample every Nth node.
UNIQUE IDENTIFIER
MODIFY>Update>Unique Identifier
Add a unique incrementing code to each row in a table.
Related tasks Adding unique identifiers to table records

MODIFY TAB 769
EDIT
SMOOTH LINES
MODIFY>Edit>Lines>Smooth Lines
Smooth polylines by applying a spline.
Related tasks Smoothing
REVERSE LINE
MODIFY>Edit>Lines>Reverse Line
Reverse the direction of polylines and regions.
Related tasks Reversing line direction
LINE JOIN
MODIFY>Edit>Lines>Line Join
Join lines within a specified distance and angle of each other.
Related tasks Joining
LINE CUT
MODIFY>Edit>Lines>Line Cut
Cut any line or region object with a crossing line.
Related tasks Cutting
LINE ANNOTATION
MODIFY>Edit>Lines>Line Annotation
Adds geological annotation to the selected linework. Annotation for a variety of styles can be
added at a user-specified spacing and size, and at a specific map scale.
Displays the Line Annotation Dialog Box.
Related tasks Apply geological line styles and line annotations
Styles and symbol fonts

MODIFY TAB 770
LINE ANNOTATION DIALOG BOX

PLACEMENT
PLACE EVERY
Adds annotation at the specified spacing to the selected lines.
PLACE WITH CURSOR
The annotation tool will be displayed with which you can place the annotation at any position
on any line.
ANNOTATION TYPE
NON-TEXT
Select a non-text annotation style from the Line annotation box. Includes line styles for faults,
synclines, shear zones, and such.
TEXT
Select a character from the Character to place box. ASCII codes 32 to 255 from the standard text
font are available.
SYMBOL
The current symbol is displayed on the Symbol to place button. Click the button to select an
different symbol from the MapInfo Pro Symbol Style dialog box. In addition to the MapInfo Pro
symbols, special symbol fonts supplied with Datamine Discover, such as ET GeoExplore and ET
Structural, can be selected. For more information on special symbol fonts supplied with Datamine
Discover, see Geological symbol font, Structural symbol font, Hydrographic symbol font, and
Environmental symbol font.
ANNOTATION STYLE
SYMBOL SIZE (NON-TEXT ONLY)
Select the symbol size in millimetres.
FONT SIZE (TEXT AND SYMBOL ONLY)
Select the character size in millimetres.
MAP SCALE
FACING LEFT/UP
Annotation is placed on the line facing out towards the side or top of the map window.
USE LINE DIRECTION
Annotation is placed on the left or right according to the direction in which the line has been
digitized. Select this option and Facing left/up to always place annotation on the left of the line.
USE SELECTED LINE STYLE
Clear the check box to change the line and fill styles shown on the adjacent buttons. Click the
buttons to display the MapInfo Pro Line Style and Fill Style dialog boxes. Additional geological and
structural line styles installed with Datamine Discover can be selected from these dialog boxes.

MODIFY TAB 771
SAVE ANNOTATION TO TABLE

Select the table the annotation is stored in.
LINE ANNOTATION SELECT

MODIFY>Edit>Lines>Line Annotation Select
Manually place line style annotations by selecting the position of the annotation on the line with
the cursor.
THIN NODE NUMBER

MODIFY>Edit>Nodes>Thin Node Number
Reduce the number of nodes in polylines or regions by removing every nth node.
Related tasks Removing every nth node
THIN NODE POSITION

MODIFY>Edit>Nodes>Thin Node Position
Reduce the number of nodes in polylines or regions by removing nodes within tolerance
distance or scale.
Related tasks Removing nodes in flat segments
CLONE STYLE
MODIFY>Edit>Clone Style
Clone the style from an object in a MapInfo Pro table and apply to selected objects in the same
or a different table.
Related tasks Cloning object styles
DONUT POLYGONS
MODIFY>Edit>Donut Polygons
Cut-out in-lying polygons for a whole table.
Related tasks Creating donut polygons
CUSTOM PATTERNS
MODIFY>Edit>Custom Patterns

MODIFY TAB 772
Apply transparent shading, as lines or points, to selected polygons. The shading is created as
linework or points and (if the polygon has a transparent fill pattern) does not obscure underlying
map layers, such as rasters. The shading is created in a separate table as a named pattern.
Patterns can be applied at different map scales so that you to use the same pattern on map of different
scales.
Displays the Custom Patterns Dialog Box.
Related tasks Apply transparent fill patterns
CUSTOM PATTERNS DIALOG BOX

Related tasks Apply transparent fill patterns
SELECT FROM LIBRARY
Click the box to select an existing pattern from the pattern library, and then click OK to apply the
pattern to the selected polygons.
ADD
Define a new pattern and add it to the pattern library
EDIT
Edit the selected pattern.
DELETE
Delete the selected pattern from the library.
From this box, you can also:
• Choose a new pattern table
Displays the open table dialog box from which you can select a different pattern table. The
default table STPatts.TAB is stored in the Discover Config folder.
• Apply patterns by attribute
When applied, displays Apply Patterns to Selection dialog box from which you can select the
column in the selected table which contains the pattern name. Matching patterns from the
pattern library are applied to the objects in the table.
SPECIFY PATTERN
Select this option to create and apply a new pattern. Define the pattern and then click OK to apply
to the selected polygons.
PATTERN TYPE
Select a Line, Point or Stripe pattern type. A line, brush or point style can be selected from the
normal MapInfo Pro range of line, brush and point types and colours.
You can select symbol styles from any of those available, including custom bitmaps. If you have
used a custom bitmap to fill a region, then note that the bitmaps are placed as the bottom layer in
the map and may be obscured by other non-transparent region fill styles.

MODIFY TAB 773
Stripe patterns are made up of equal width stripes in alternating brush styles. Choose the stripe
brush styles from the full range of MapInfo Pro brush colours and fill patterns.
Note If you combine stripes with other pattern types, the appearance of the pattern is unpredictable
because Datamine Discover cannot control the order in which MapInfo Pro draws the different
elements in the pattern. To display these patterns together, select two pattern layers, the lower
one containing stripes, and the upper containing the other pattern.
DISPLAY POLYGON BORDER
Select to show border.
PATTERN DENSITY AND ORIENTATION
ANGLE
For line and stripe patterns, type an orientation between 0 and 180 degrees (0 is vertical, and 90
is horizontal).
SPACING
The pattern spacing in map units.
MAP SCALE
The map scale at which the pattern density is correct. If you zoom in or out, the pattern spacing
remains the same in map units, so that the pattern appears more or less dense.
OPTIONS
APPEND TO EXISTING SEETHRU LAYER
By default, the shading is stored in the SeeThru layer, which is stored in the Discover Temp folder.
When you run Custom Patterns, the existing SeeThru table is overwritten. If a table named
SEETHRU is in the front map window, you can append the new shading to it.
SAVE AS
Save the shading to a table that can be used later with a workspace.
RGB COLOURIZER
MODIFY>Edit>RGB Colourizer
Colours map objects on RGB colour schemes entered as attributes in a table or extracts RGB
values from point, line, or polygon map objects and saves them in a table.
Related tasks Colouring map objects by RGB values
MOVE
TRANSFORM OBJECT
MODIFY>Move>Transform Object
Apply shifting, scaling and rotation to one or more objects.
Related tasks Moving, scaling and rotating objects

MODIFY TAB 774
ALIGN OBJECTS
MODIFY>Move>Align Objects
Align the top, bottom, left, right or centre of map objects relative to each other.
Related tasks Aligning objects
OFFSET OBJECT
MODIFY>Move>Offset Object
Create a matrix of map objects at increments from a seed object.
Related tasks Offsetting copies of an object

QUERY TAB
Tools are listed in left-to-right order as they appear on the QUERY tab in the
default ribbon layout. If you are using a customized layout, you can locate a
tool name in Datamine Discover tools, which gives an alphabetical list of all
tools.
IN THIS SECTION
TEXT
Select by Attribute 776
Split by Attribute 777
Search and Replace 778
Table Sort 778
MAP OBJECTS
Select by Style 779
Vector Clip 779
Line Orientation 780
Location Info 780
DISTANCE
Area Change 781
Proximity Search 783
Distance Calculator 784
ZOOM
Zoom to Object 785
Window to Object 785
QUERY TAB 776
TEXT
SELECT BY ATTRIBUTE
QUERY>Text>Select by Attribute
Automatically displays a list of unique attributes in a selected column, allowing easy record
selection by attribute.
Displays the Select by Attribute dialog box.
Related tasks Selecting records by attribute
SELECT BY ATTRIBUTE DIALOG BOX

Related tasks Selecting records by attribute
SELECT OPTIONS
SELECT FROM TABLE
Click to select a table.
GROUP ON FIELD
Click to select a column in the selected table.
GROUPS
Lists all unique entries in a selected column. Select values in the Unselected box and the use the
controls to add and remove values from the Selected box. To select multiple values, click and drag,
or hold down the SHIFT or CTRL key.
Any records which match the selected values will be selected.
OUTPUT
NAME RESULT SELECTION
Select to create and name a result table containing the selected records.
BROWSE SELECTION
Select to display selected records in browser window.
MAP SELECTION
Select to display selected records in a new map window.
ZOOM MAP TO SELECTION
Select to zoom to the extents of the selected records in the active map window.

QUERY TAB 777
SPLIT BY ATTRIBUTE
QUERY>Text>Split by Attribute
Splits a table into multiple tables using unique attribute values in a field. For example, create
separate tables for different geological units covering a project area from a master table, extract
tenement data by holder, or split out open file geochemical data by company.
Displays the Split by Attribute dialog box.
Related tasks Splitting tables
SPLIT BY ATTRIBUTE DIALOG BOX

Related tasks Splitting tables
SPLIT OPTIONS
TABLE TO SPLIT
Click to select a table.
SPLIT BASED ON FIELD
Click to select a column in the selected table.
GROUPS
A table can be split by two methods:
• Auto: Create a new table for every unique value in the selected field.
• Custom: Individually select which values are to be split or combine individual attributes into
groups for splitting. A combination of individual and grouped attributes can also be chosen.
Select values in the Selected box and the use the controls to add and remove values from the
Unselected box.
To create groups, first move the values into the Unselected box, and then select the values in
the required group. To select multiple values, click and drag, or hold down the SHIFT or CTRL
key. When you have selected all the values in a group, click the select button to display the Group
Properties dialog box, from which you can name the group. The group name will be displayed in
the Selected box.
OUTPUT OPTIONS
FILE
The output table name for the split tables uses a stem with the value or group name extension. To
change the default stem name, click on the Save button. The {GROUP} placeholder must be part
of the output table name. Keep output table names as short as possible because MapInfo Pro
truncates table names longer than 30 characters.
GROUP PROPERTIES DIALOG BOX

GROUP NAME
Click to edit the group name.
DETAILS
Displays the values in this group.

QUERY TAB 778
SEARCH AND REPLACE

QUERY>Text>Search and Replace
Search one or more columns in a table for a particular text string with the option to replace each
occurrence with a new string. The search result is held in a temporary table, which can be
displayed in a browser.
Displays the Text Search Dialog Box.
Related tasks Searching and replacing text in tables
TEXT SEARCH DIALOG BOX

Related tasks Searching and replacing text in tables
SEARCH IN COLUMNS
Select the columns to search from the list. Click and drag to select consecutive search columns or
use the SHIFT key. Use the CTRL key to select non-consecutive search columns from the list. You
can search for characters in text and numeric columns.
SEARCH OPTIONS
Select the type of search you want to perform.
• Find text: Find text string in any string.
• Find and replace selected text: Find text string in any string and replace the search string with
the replacement string.
• Find and replace whole string: Find text strings containing the search string and replace the
whole string with the replacement string.
CASE SENSITIVE SEARCH
Select to make a case-sensitive search.
BROWSE SELECTION
Select to view the selected records in a browser window. A message is otherwise displayed
showing the number of records found and replaced.
FIND
Type the characters or word that you want to search for.
REPLACE WITH
Type the text string that will replace the search string.
TABLE SORT
QUERY>Text>Table Sort
Permanently sort a table using one or two sort columns.
Related tasks Sorting tables

QUERY TAB 779
MAP OBJECTS
SELECT BY STYLE
QUERY>Map Object>Select by Style
Selects all objects in a table that have the same graphical style as the selected object. All object
types are supported including symbol, lines, polygons, and text. An object in the cosmetic layer
can also be selected.
Displays the Select by Style Dialog Box.
Related tasks Selecting objects by graphical style
SELECT BY STYLE DIALOG BOX

Related tasks Selecting objects by graphical style
GET SELECTED OBJECT STYLE
Click to display the style attributes of the selected object.
MATCH STYLES
Displays the style attributes of the selected object, which you can edit before making a selection
in the map window. Select or clear the check boxes to refine the selection criteria to select, for
example, symbols of the same colour but of any shape or size, or regions of a particular fill colour
regardless of the fill pattern or line style
FIND MATCHING OBJECTS IN
Select the table that you want to search for matching objects. This can be the same as the selection
table or different table, but not the cosmetic layer.
OUTPUT
NAME RESULT SELECTION
Select the check box to name the selection. By default, the name is the table name plus the
extension "_selection. “ Click the box to edit.
BROWSE SELECTION
View the selection in a new browser window.
MAP SELECTION
View the selection in a new browser window.
ZOOM MAP TO SELECTION
Zoom the map window to the extents of the selected objects.
VECTOR CLIP
QUERY>Map Object>Vector Clip
Clip and save all data from multiple tables which are intersected by the selected vector
polygon/s.
Related tasks Clipping

QUERY TAB 780
LINE ORIENTATION
QUERY>Map Object>Line Orientation
Calculates the orientation of a line or polyline and adds the direction as an attribute in a selected
column in the table. This is useful when analysing tables containing linear map objects such as
faults, fold axes or creeks where no directional attributes exist.
Displays the Line Orientation dialog box.
Related tasks Calculating line orientation
LINE ORIENTATION DIALOG BOX

Related tasks Calculating line orientation
ADD LINE ORIENTATION TO COLUMN
Click to select the column to add the orientation data to.
POLYLINE ORIENTATION BY
Select if you want to average the orientation for each polyline, or use the orientation of the first or
last segment.
USE ANGLES IN RANGE
Select 0-360 degrees to use all segments, or restrict the range.
ROUND BY
Click to set rounding of angles.
Note Use the MODIFY>Edit>Lines>Reverse Line tool to reverse the direction of lines if necessary.
LOCATION INFO
QUERY>Map Object>Location Info
Displays cursor position, distance and bearing between two map window locations and map
object attributes.
Displays the Location Display dialog box.
Related tasks Displaying map coordinates, distances and bearings
LOCATION DISPLAY DIALOG BOX

Related tasks Displaying map coordinates, distances and bearings
Displays the cursor position coordinates continuously as the cursor moves over the map window.
The cursor position coordinates are displayed in the current map window projection.
To move the window, click and drag the window title bar. To close the window, click on the
window close button.

QUERY TAB 781
SELECT ALTERNATE PROJECTION FOR POSITION

Click the button to select an additional projection for the the cursor position display. For example,
the cursor position can be viewed in UTM and lat-long coordinates or UTM and Local Grid
coordinates at the same time.
Note The coordinates displayed in the Location Display window may appear different to those
displayed by the MapInfo Pro cursor position due to inbuilt rounding in the MapInfo Pro
coordinates. Datamine Discover reports and displays the coordinates as reported by MapInfo
Pro for the screen position. The precision of the coordinate locations is dependent on the map
window zoom level, the higher the zoom the greater the coordinate precision.
BEARING AND DISTANCE MEASUREMENT
The bearing and distance values are taken relative to the last selected cursor position. To start
measuring, click a location in the map window. The measurements are updated continuously as
the cursor is moved within the map window. Click in the map window again to re-start the bearing
and distance measurements.
Note Map objects cannot be selected using the MapInfo Pro Snap tool when selecting map window
locations for bearing and distance measurements.
BROWSER INFORMATION
Click the Details for box to select a table to display the browser information. Move the cursor over
the map objects to view the browser entries from the selected table. To stop displaying browser
entries select <None> from the Details for box.
DISTANCE
AREA CHANGE
QUERY>Distance>Area Change
Calculates and maps changes in area or linear features between successive tables of data. For
example, you can examine polygon changes between two tables representing data from
different time periods.
Displays the Area Change dialog box.
Related tasks Calculating area change
AREA CHANGE DIALOG BOX

Related tasks Calculating area change
The area change comparison is based on the polygon attributes contained in a column specified
by the user. This column may contain data such as vegetation type, habitat ID, soil class, erosion
level, etc. All the polygons in a table are grouped by this attribute and identifies differences
between polygons of the same code in the different map layers. The area change calculator is
primarily designed for polygon data; however it can also report differences in overall length of linear
data and the number of point objects between two tables.
CHECK CHANGES BETWEEN
TABLE 1
Select the first table containing the polygon or line features.

QUERY TAB 782
ID COLUMN
Select the polygon attribute column that you want compared. The values in this column must match
the corresponding values in the ID column of the second table.
TABLE 2
Select the second table containing the polygon or line features.
ID COLUMN
Select the polygon attribute column that you want compared. The values in this column must match
the corresponding values in the ID column of the first table.
REPORT TABLE
The file name and path name of the report table is displayed next to the button. Click the button to
edit.
EXPORT REPORT TO TEXT FILE
Select to export the report as a tab-delimited text file, which is saved with the same name to the
same folder as the report table.
MAP TABLE
The file name and path name of the map table is displayed next to the button. Click the button to
edit.
SHOW CODES LOST TO/GAINED FROM
Select to add a Change column to the report, which reports the areas lost or gained for each code.
OPTIONS
AREA UNITS
Click to select the reported unit of area.
DISTANCE UNITS
Click to select the reported unit of distance.
(SHOW CHANGES AS)
Choose an option for the display of lost and gained areas.
• Show changes in same colour, new pattern: Retain original colour and apply new patterns to
lost and gained areas.
• Show changes in same pattern, new colour: Retain original pattern and apply a new colours
to lost and gained areas.
• Show changes in new colour, new pattern: Apply new colour and patterns to lost and gained
areas.
LOST AREA STYLE
Click to change the fill style used to identify lost areas. The colour and pattern applied will depend
on which option is selected to show changes (colour, pattern, or both).
GAINED AREA STYLE
Click to change the fill style used to identify gained areas. The colour and pattern applied will
depend on which option is selected to show changes (colour, pattern, or both).

QUERY TAB 783
PROXIMITY SEARCH
QUERY>Distance>Proximity Search
Displays map objects that are located within a specified distance from one or more selected
objects. Apply additional filter criteria to returned map objects to refine proximity search. For
example, identify geochemical samples that are located within 2 km of an old mine site. The
search can be further refined to only identify samples that have a gold grade greater or equal to 2 ppm.
Alternatively, perform search for all significant copper occurrences that fall with 2 km of a selected
faults.
Displays the Proximity Search dialog box.
Related tasks Selecting objects by proximity
PROXIMITY SEARCH DIALOG BOX

Related tasks Selecting objects by proximity
SELECT OBJECTS FROM
Select the map window layer containing the map objects that you want to select.
BUFFER
WIDTH
Type the buffer width within which the search is made. If search buffers around multiple objects
overlap, a merged boudary is created.
RESOLUTION
Type the number of segments in the search boundary. Increase this value to smooth the boundary.
SHOW BUFFER
Select to display the search boundary in the map window. The buffer is created in the cosmetic
layer. Buffers for previous searches are retained in the cosmetic layer until either deleted or the
map window is closed.
SELECTION REFINEMENT
WHERE
Select to refine the search with a conditional expression of the form:
Field Operator Value
For example, Cu_Eq >= 250
(FIELD)
Click to select a column in the search layer.
(OPERATOR)
Click to select a conditional operator:
(VALUE)
Type the value for the search criterion.
OUTPUT
By default, the search results are saved to the PROXSRCH temporary table.

QUERY TAB 784
SAVE TO FILE
Select to display the Enter Output Table Name dialog box, from which you can name the output
table and select a path name. The output table name is displayed.
BROWSE RESULTS
Click to display search results in a browser window.
ADD TO MAPPER
Select to add the output table to the map window.
STYLES
Click the symbol, line and fill style buttons to set the style of the selected objects.
DISTANCE CALCULATOR
QUERY>Distance>Distance Calculator
Measures the distance and angle between points in two separate MapInfo Pro tables. For
example, determine an error distance and bearing between control points when transforming
point coordinates between two projections. The two tables must share a common field to create
the link or join between them; for example, a control point number. The join must be a one-to-one
relationship. One point in the first table can only be linked to one point in the second table.
Displays the Distance Calculator Dialog Box.
Related tasks Calculating distances between points in separate tables
DISTANCE CALCULATOR DIALOG BOX

Related tasks Calculating distances between points in separate tables
The distance and bearing are calculated by measuring the objects in table 1 to the objects in table
2. Objects are matched by comparing values in the key fields.
Note This tool supports most standard MapInfo Pro coordinate systems, including geographical,
UTM and local coordinate systems.
SELECT TABLES FOR DISTANCE CALCULATION
SELECT TABLE 1
Select the first table.
KEY FIELD
Select the key field in the first table, which is matched to vales in the key field in the second table.
SELECT TABLE 2
Select the second table.
KEY FIELD
Select the key field in the second table, which is matched to vales in the key field in the first table.
OUTPUT OPTIONS
By default, the output table uses the extension “Distances” is added to the Table 1 name.

QUERY TAB 785
FILE
Click the box to edit, or click the Save button to change the output file name and path name.
OUTPUT DISTANCE UNITS
Click to select the units of distance. The distances between points can be calculated in any of the
available units, regardless of the projection.
Note This tool has been primarily designed to work with point datasets. Region or line objects may
be used, however the distance and angle will be calculated from the object centroid.
ZOOM
ZOOM TO OBJECT
QUERY>Zoom>Zoom to Object
Zooms the map window to the extents of the selected objects.
Related tasks Zoom to the extents of the selected object
WINDOW TO OBJECT
QUERY>Zoom>Window to Object
Resizes the map window to the aspect ratio of the selected object and to zoom and re-position
the map window to display the minimum bounding rectangle of the selected object.
Related tasks Fit the map window to the selected object

DRILLHOLES TAB
Tools are listed in left-to-right order as they appear on the DRILLHOLES tab
in the default ribbon layout. If you are using a customized layout, you can
list of all tools.
IN THIS SECTION
MANAGE
Open Project 788
Open Session 788
Import Project 788
New Project 788
Manage Project 788
Subset Project 788
Session Manager 789
Edit Data 789
Section Manager 789
CREATE
Generate Sections 789
Generate Logs 796
Downhole Data 797
Legend Editor 798
Traverse Lines 798
OUTPUT
Print Sections 798
Accept Parameters 798
Modify Parameters 799
Close 799
Section Grid 799
Create Section Legend 799
Collar Plan 799
ANALYZE
Grade 799
Depth 800
Attribute 800
Max/EOH 800
Alpha/Beta 800
Resource Calculator 800
Downhole Info 800
Downhole Clip 801
Downhole Merge 801
3D Coordinates 801
EXTERNAL DATA
LAS Viewer 801
LAS Template 801
LAS Import 801
WinLoG Import 802
gINT Import 802
Drillhole DXF Export 802
Section Layer Export 802
Section Image Export 802
DISCOVER 3D
Drillhole Traces 803
Trench Traces 803
Sections 803
Section Layers 803
Logs 803
3D Coordinates 803
DATAMINE
Export Drillhole Tables 804
Export Drillhole Traces 804
Export Drillhole Section 804
Export Drillhole Layers 804
Export Drillhole Image 804
DRILLHOLES TAB 788
MANAGE
OPEN PROJECT
DRILLHOLES>Manage>Open Project
Open driillhole project from a session.
OPEN SESSION
DRILLHOLES>Manage>[Open Project]>Open Session
Load drillhole project sessions.
Related tasks Related tasks: Opening drillhole projects
IMPORT PROJECT
DRILLHOLES>Manage>[Open Project]>Import Project
Import a Datamine Discover project, either from an older version or a current version project
provided by another user.
NEW PROJECT
DRILLHOLES>Manage>New Project
Create a new drillhole project
Related tasks Creating and managing drillhole projects
MANAGE PROJECT
DRILLHOLES>Manage>Manage Project
Manage, export and delete drillhole projects, including modifying source table and column
assignments.
Related tasks Creating and managing drillhole projects
SUBSET PROJECT
DRILLHOLES>Manage>[Manage Project]>Subset Project
Create a new drillhole project from a selection of drillholes in an existing project.
Related tasks Creating a subset of a project

DRILLHOLES TAB 789
SESSION MANAGER
DRILLHOLES>Manage>[Manage Project]>Session Manager
Save and manage drillhole project sessions containing data tables, sections and associated
tables.
Related tasks Opening drillhole projects
EDIT DATA
DRILLHOLES>Manage>Edit Data
Edit the source native MapInfo Pro tables of a drillhole project.
SECTION MANAGER
DRILLHOLES>Manage>Section Manager
Manage, update and analyse project drillhole sections and plans.
Related tasks Managing and analysing sections and plans
CREATE
GENERATE SECTIONS
DRILLHOLES>Create>Generate Sections
Define parameters to create either plan or vertical drillhole section, including trenches or
costeans and polyline or fence sections.
The Generate Sections dialog box is displayed with the following tabs:
• Define tab
• Offset Multiple tab
• Annotate tab
• Downhole Data tab
• Surfaces tab
Related tasks Creating sections and plans
DEFINE TAB
The Define tab displays controls to define the section parameters.
DISPLAY TYPE
Select the style of drillhole section to create. Types of sections in include plan and vertical.

DRILLHOLES TAB 790
SECTION
Setup and create a vertical drillhole section.
PLAN
Setup and create a horizontal (flitch) drillhole plan.
LOAD PARAMETERS
Load settings for section creation from an existing section within the
currently loaded project. Select either an open or closed existing section
from the current project to populate the section parameters.
DEFINE SECTION
Select the style of section creation. Types of definitions include envelope and long.
ENVELOPE SECTION
Use an envelope of a predetermined width to define which drillholes are displayed on a vertical
section.
LONG SECTION
Display all drillholes from the current project for a defined section length.
OUTPUT
Define the section name. A section can be named with either freehand text or sourced from a field
from the selected definition line.
SECTION ENVELOPE/PLANE
Define vertical section parameters with an envelope. All parameters can be defined either
manually by parameter entry or line selection in the map window, or automatically via selecting
sections from the defined section line table.
POPULATE FROM SELECTED LINE(S)
Capture vertical section parameters from a selected straight line/s in the collar map window.
ENVELOPE WIDTH (±M)
Define an envelope width with either freehand text or sourced from a field from the selected
definition line.
SECTION START ME
Define easting coordinate for the start point of a definition line.
SECTION START MN
Define northing coordinate for the start point of a definition line.
SECTION ORIENTATION
Bearing/orientation of the definition line.
SECTION LENGTH (M)
Length of section definition line.
VIEW DIRECTION TOWARDS
Direction the section will be viewed relative to the direction the line is drawn. If selecting multiple
lines, the direction of each section depends on the direction each line is drawn.

DRILLHOLES TAB 791
PLAN OPTIONS
INCLUDE ALL DOWNHOLE DATA
Subset all downhole data tables in plan section to enable the display of downhole data. If this
option is disabled downhole data cannot be displayed in a plan, however, the drawing time of the
plan will improve.
CENTRAL ELEVATION (M)
Define the elevation or RL for the center point of the plan section
ENVELOPE HEIGHT (±M)
Enable this option to define the envelope dimensions around the defined central elevation height.
SELECT COLLARS TO DISPLAY (ENVELOPE SECTION)
Refine which collars will be displayed on the envelope defined vertical section. Collars can be
selected or deselected for display on a section.
FILTER AVAILABLE HOLES
Filter collars you wish to display defined in an envelope section. Select either manually or
interactively which collars to display on the section. For example, you may choose to show only
reverse circulation (RC) and diamond (DDH) holes on a section, removing rotary air blast (RAB)
and other drilling types.
LOAD MAPINFO SELECTION
Filter and display only the collars selected in the collar map window.
EDIT FILTER
Refine the currently filtered collars.
DISPLAY COMPLETE HOLE TRACES
Display the entire drillhole trace, if this option is not checked the drillhole trace will terminate at the
envelope boundary.
SHOW HOLES INTERSECTING AT DEPTH
Display drillhole traces which are not collared in the section envelope, but intersect the envelope
boundary at depth.
SELECT COLLARS TO DISPLAY (LONG SECTION)
Define which collars will be displayed on the vertical long section. Collars can be selected or
deselected for display on a section. For example, you may choose to show diamond (DDH)
drillholes on a long section for resource work, removing all other drilling types.
HOLES TO SHOW IN PLAN
Define which collars will be displayed on the plan section. Collars can be selected or deselected
for display on a section.

DRILLHOLES TAB 792
OFFSET MULTIPLE TAB

The Offset Multiple tab enables multiple sections to be created from a single definition section line. This
option is only available for vertical sections defined using an envelope.
CREATE MULTIPLE OFFSETTED SECTIONS
Enable to create multiple vertical sections from a single section plane.
NUMBER OF SECTIONS
Number of sections to create.
OFFSET DISTANCE
Distance offset between each section, the default will be double the Envelope width specified on
the Define tab.
OFFSET TOWARDS
Bearing/orientation the sections lines will be created. The offset bearing will be perpendicular to
the section plane.
SECTION NAME SUFFIX
Suffix required to create individual section names. Suffix options include:
• Northing - Section name from the northing coordinate of the section.
• Easting - Section name from the easting coordinate of the section.
• A...Z - Section name generated from A to Z.
• 1...20 - Section name generated from a running number series.
SECTION NAME PREFIX
Optional prefix for naming multiple sections. Alternatively, it is recommended to utilize the
Traverse Lines tool to precisely generate a series of section lines, and then add these to the
drillhole project's Section Line Table for easy section creation and regeneration.
ANNOTATE TAB
The Annotate tab displays controls for scaling, labelling and depth ticks on sections.
SCALING
SCALE 1:
Define a numerical scale value for defining a section. The section label sizes are dependent on the
initial scale of the section. When creating a section you need to be mindful of the final page size or
zoom level you will view the section.
TEXT STYLE
Define enhanced text style attributes.
LABEL FONT SIZE
Font size that the sections label will appear at the defined map scale.

DRILLHOLES TAB 793
LABELS
Configure settings for section labels. Drillholes and trenches are annotated separately.
COLLAR LABEL
Enable this option to display a label at the collar intersection point on the section. Default is
[Hole_Name]
EOH LABEL
Enable this option to display a label at the end of hole (EOH) termination point. Default is
[Hole_Name]
TOP INTERSECT LABEL
Enable this option to display a label where a drillhole enters a drillhole envelope. Default is
[Hole_Name] [Depth] [Depth_Units] (i.e. the depth of the holes entry intersection with the section
envelope in downhole units)
BOTTOM INTERSECT LABEL
Enable this option to display a label where a drillhole exits a drillhole envelope. Default is [Depth]
[Depth_Units] (i.e. the depth of the hole's exit intersection with the section envelope in downhole
units)
SHOW EOH AND INTERSECTIONS DEPTHS LABELS AND SYMBOLS
Display symbols for EOH terminations and envelope intersections at depth.
TICKS
SHOW DEPTH TICKS
Enable this option to display depth intervals and interval ticks.
DEPTH INTERVAL
Specify the numerical interval to display a depth tick down the drill trace.
SHOW LABELS
Enable option to display depth tick labels.
SHOW EVERY NTH LABEL
Option to display depth labels between every one and tenth label.
LABEL OFFSET
Specify in millimetres the label offset from the right of the drillhole trace.
SHOW DISTANCE INFRONT/BEHIND OF SECTION PLANE
Display label at the depth interval a distance the drill trace is either infront or behind the section
plane on a vertical section.
LABEL EDITOR DIALOG BOX

EXPRESSION
Syntax for defining the collar label. Either freehand text or predefined expressions under the
Universal Items or Project Collar Columns can be used.

DRILLHOLES TAB 794
UNIVERSAL ITEMS : [ ]
Label collar with key fields from the drillhole project. Default label expressions include:
[HOLE_NAME]
[HOLE_COLLAR_EAST]
[HOLE_COLLAR_NORTH]
[HOLE_COLLAR_RL]
[HOLE_BOTTOM_DEPTH]
[HOLE_AZIMUTH]
[DEPTH_UNITS]
[UNITS]
PROJECT COLLAR COLUMNS : { }
Label collar using selected fields from the project collar table, these will include an listed under the
Universal Items plus any additional fields defined in the project collar table.
AUTO COMPLETE
Enable this option to pre-empt the expression being written.
DOWNHOLE DATA TAB

The Downhole Data tab displays controls for downhole data schemes and which downhole datasets
are used for section creation.
USE DOWNHOLE DATA DISPLAY SETTING
Select from the available list of downhole data display settings, created using the Downhole Data
tool, to apply to a section.
SURFACES TAB
The Surface tab displays controls for displaying additional surface profiles and sections surface trace.
TOPOGRAPHIC PROFILE
DISPLAY TOPOGRAPHIC/DEM SURFACE PROFILE
Enable this option to display a surface trace line at the collar intersection points.
LINE STYLE
Define enhanced line style attributes for the surface line.
ADDITIONAL PROFILES
Enable additional surfaces to display
ABSOLUTE POSITION
Display additional surface in the absolute or true profile height position. This option should be
selected when the surface units can be correlated to the section height units e.g. water table,
weathering horizon, open cut pit profile.

DRILLHOLES TAB 795
RELATIVE POSITION
Display additional surface in relative units by scaling or offsetting from the original values. This
option should be selected when the surface units are not elevation or require correcting e.g.
geochemical and geophysical grids.
AUTO VERTICAL OFFSET
Select this option to use the Absolute offset value.
SPECIFY OFFSET
Manually specify an offset value to display a surface on a section. Can only be used when Relative
Position is selected.
AUTO VERTICAL SCALE
Select this option to use the Absolute scale value.
SPECIFY SCALE 1:
Manually specify a scale to display a surface on a section. Can only be used when Relative
Position is selected.
LINE STYLE
Define enhanced line style attributes for the surface line.
OPTIONS DIALOG BOX

SECTIONS
VERTICAL EXAGGERATION
By default this is 1:1. Enter a the desired exaggeration value for all sections being created. The
exaggeration is applied as:
Zvalue = ((RealZ - SectionTopZ) * Scale) + SectionTopZ
Where Zvalue is the Section window's Y value, the RealZ the raw elevation, the SectionTopZ
is the maximum collar elevation in the particular section window, and Scale the exaggeration
value entered.
SHOW POLYLINE INFLECTIONS
Vertical dashed lines will appear in a polyline section window indicating the node points where the
polyline bends.
SHOW POLYLINE OVERLAPS
Draws a square grid pattern over areas around a polyline node inflection point, where the buffer/
envelope is distorted.
PREVIEW
SHOW ENVELOPE
Enables the red box preview in the collar map window while the Section and Plan creator is open.
SHOW CENTER LINE
Enables the center line in the collar map window while the Section and Plan creator is open.

DRILLHOLES TAB 796
GENERATE LOGS
DRILLHOLES>Create>[Generate Sections]>Generate Logs
Display downhole data in log style for individual drillholes.
Displays the Drillhole Log Display dialog box.

Related tasks Displaying downhole logs
DRILLHOLE LOG DISPLAY DIALOG BOX

Related tasks Define log display
COLUMNS TO DISPLAY IN LOG DIALOG BOX

Related tasks Define log display
LOG DISPLAY PARAMETERS
Choose a Display Type for each data attribute column. Click the Settings button in either the
Columns to Display in Log or Drillhole Log Display dialog. The following Log Types are
available:
• Text – Numeric and non-numeric data. By default the Text Style scale box is checked to
autoscale text within drillhole log intervals. To modify text size and colour click on the Text
Style button. Display text using a Legend or check the Replace numbers with alias from
table d_abbrev box if required.
• Trace Shade - Numeric and non-numeric data. Trace shades must be displayed using an
associated Legend.
• Bargraph – Numeric data only. Bargraphs may be displayed using a Legend or select a Pen
style and Brush style to apply to all bargraph bars.
• Linegraph – Numeric data only. Linegraphs may be filled with plain colour using the Brush
style colour or from a Trace Shade Legend displayed in another drillhole log column.
DRILLHOLE LOG DISPLAY (GLOBAL SETTINGS) DIALOG BOX

Related tasks Global settings
DRILLHOLE LOG DISPLAY (DEFAULT STYLE) DIALOG BOX

Related tasks Log display parameters
ADVANCED COLUMN LOG DISPLAY SETTINGS DIALOG BOX

CHANGE LOG DISPLAY ORDER DIALOG BOX


DRILLHOLES TAB 797
DOWNHOLE DATA
DRILLHOLES>Create>Downhole Data
Display downhole data variables on sections and plans as text, bargraphs, linegraphs, trace
shade or structure ticks and save as permanent display settings.
Displays the Downhole Data Display dialog box.
Related tasks Displaying downhole data
DOWNHOLE DATA DISPLAY DIALOG BOX

Related tasks Displaying downhole data
TEXT
The Text display option displays data in numeric or character attribute fields as labels
for each sample or interval down the drillhole. The Text Labels Settings dialog contains
options to modify the data range displayed, text styling, positioning, orientation and
formatting of the labels on the drillhole section or plan.
LINEGRAPHS
A Linegraph represents numeric data (such as assays) graphically as a continuous (or
discontinuous) line profile down the drillhole trace, with 'spikes' representing higher
numeric values.
Linegraph finds the mid-point of each interval, and assigns this location the interval's data value.
The size of the linegraph at this position is then a function of both the data value and a user-defined
scale (below). A linegraph / profile is then created by joining these mid-point size locations.
Linegraphs are therefore very effective for high density downhole datasets such as decimetre- or
even centimetre-scale geophysical measurements. They work best with regular/homogenous
downhole interval sizes, however if there is a large variation in downhole interval sizes (e.g. 1m vs.
10m), linegraphs can misrepresent the data as the actual interval thickness is not represented
graphically.
The Data Handling Options dialog provides a range of options for dealing with null values, missing
intervals, extreme values, and dense data.
BARGRAPH
Bargraph presents each downhole interval as a separate bar with the same size as
used in the linegraph, but with the bar 'thickness' correlating with the interval length. As
each bar is a polygon, bargraphs can also be colour and/or pattern modulated using a
legend. Thus bargraphs can be very useful for datasets with variable interval lengths,
but can get cluttered for very small interval lengths. Bargraphs are also slower to render than
linegraphs.
The Data Handling Options dialog box enables the capping of values and sample decimation.
Linegraphs and Bargraphs have a number of options for source data handling:
TRACE SHADE
The Trace Shade display type is designed for displaying downhole data such as
lithology or regolith attributes. This is achieved by displaying a polygon of set width for
each downhole interval shaded by a specified colour legend.

DRILLHOLES TAB 798
STRUCTURE
The Structure Tick display type enables downhole structural data measurements to be
displayed on a drillhole section. Datamine Discover generates a line that crosses the
drill trace at the appropriate dip angle. The structure measurement may be displayed
with either true or apparent dips.
The Data Handling Options dialog enables the capping of values and sample decimation.
LEGEND EDITOR
DRILLHOLES>Create>Legend Editor
Create and modify colour tables from drillhole data and features.
Related tasks Creating and editing legends
TRAVERSE LINES
DRILLHOLES>Create>Traverse Lines
Interactively design traverse lines over an area of interest. A set of grid points (pegs) and
traverse lines with both map (real-world) and local grid coordinates will be generated; these can
then be used for geochemical sampling, drillhole Section Lines or geophysical surveys.
Displays the Traverse Lines dialog box.
OUTPUT
PRINT SECTIONS
DRILLHOLES>Output>[Section Output]>Print Sections
Create drillhole section layout ready for printing.
Related tasks Adding sections to a layout
ACCEPT PARAMETERS
DRILLHOLES>Output>[Section Output]>Accept Parameters
Accept the section scale and page size parameters to create scaled map.

DRILLHOLES TAB 799
MODIFY PARAMETERS
DRILLHOLES>Output>[Section Output]>Modify Parameters
Modify the section scale and page size parameters.
CLOSE
DRILLHOLES>Output>[Section Output]>Close
Close the session of section output.
SECTION GRID
DRILLHOLES>Output>[Section Output]>Section Grid
Overlay map grid on section.
Related tasks Adding a map grid to sections
CREATE SECTION LEGEND

DRILLHOLES>Output>[Section Output]>Create Section Legend
The Create Section Legend tool allows a legend to be created on demand for any existing
section, polyline section or plan for both trenches and drillholes.
Related tasks Creating section legends
COLLAR PLAN
DRILLHOLES>Output>[Section Output]>Collar Plan
Create a plan of drillhole collars for specified section.
Related tasks Creating a section collar plan
ANALYZE
GRADE
DRILLHOLES>Analyze>[Composite]>Grade
Composite downhole data by grade, including optional high cut, distance, internal dilution and
edge grade options.
Related tasks Downhole compositing

DRILLHOLES TAB 800
DEPTH
DRILLHOLES>Analyze>[Composite]>Depth
Composite downhole data by elevation or downhole depth.
ATTRIBUTE
DRILLHOLES>Analyze>[Composite]>Attribute
Composite downhole data by attribute.
MAX/EOH
DRILLHOLES>Analyze>Max/EOH
Calculate maximum drillhole value for assay and EOH assay values.
Related tasks Calculating maximum and EOH values
ALPHA/BETA
DRILLHOLES>Analyze>Alpha/Beta
Convert structural alpha-beta core angles to dip and dip direction.
Related tasks Converting alpha-beta core angles
RESOURCE CALCULATOR
DRILLHOLES>Analyze>Resource Calculator
Calculate sectional resource estimates.
Related tasks Calculating sectional resources
DOWNHOLE INFO
DRILLHOLES>Analyze>Downhole Info
Select the Downhole Info tool from the Drillhole toolbar and click on a drillhole collar. The
Downhole Info dialog displays the data in the collar table along with downhole survey data. To
view information from a downhole table select the table from the downhole data pull-down list.

DRILLHOLES TAB 801
DOWNHOLE CLIP
DRILLHOLES>Analyze>Downhole Clip
Intersect and clip downhole data tables with 3D solids, such as volumes and surfaces.
Related tasks Clipping drillholes by 3D solids or surfaces
DOWNHOLE MERGE
DRILLHOLES>Analyze>Downhole Merge
Merge multiple downhole tables to smallest sample interval.
Related tasks Merging downhole tables
3D COORDINATES
DRILLHOLES>Analyze>3D Coordinates
Calculate and map 3D map coordinates for a downhole data table.
Related tasks Generating 3D coordinates
EXTERNAL DATA
LAS VIEWER
DRILLHOLES>External Data>[Import]>LAS Viewer
View LAS 1.2 and 2.0 files in tabbed display.
Related tasks LAS
LAS TEMPLATE
DRILLHOLES>External Data>[Import]>LAS Template
Create and manage templates to import and append LAS files.
Related tasks LAS
LAS IMPORT
DRILLHOLES>External Data>[Import]>LAS Import
Import LAS 1.2 and 2.0 files into a drillhole project.
Related tasks LAS

DRILLHOLES TAB 802
WINLOG IMPORT
DRILLHOLES>External Data>[Import]>WinLoG Import
Import WinLoG drillhole database into a project.
Related tasks WinLoG
GINT IMPORT
DRILLHOLES>External Data>[Import]>gINT Import
Import gINT drillhole database into a project.
Related tasks gINT
DRILLHOLE DXF EXPORT

DRILLHOLES>External Data>[Export]>Drillhole DXF Export
Export interpolated drillhole traces to a 3D DXF file.
Related tasks Datamine Discover Drillhole Projects
SECTION LAYER EXPORT

DRILLHOLES>External Data>[Export]>Section Layer Export
Export layers from a section to registered 3D DXF file.
Related tasks Export section layers to 3D DXF
SECTION IMAGE EXPORT

DRILLHOLES>External Data>[Export]>Section Layer Export
Export geo-referenced image to 3D.
Related tasks EGB

DRILLHOLES TAB 803
DISCOVER 3D
DRILLHOLE TRACES
DRILLHOLES>Discover 3D>Drillhole Traces
Displays selected drillholes from an open Datamine Discover drillhole project in 3D.
TRENCH TRACES
DRILLHOLES>Discover 3D>Trench Traces
Display trenches/costeans in a open drillhole project in 3D.
SECTIONS
DRILLHOLES>Discover 3D>Sections
Display drillhole sections created in a Datamine Discover drillhole project as georeferenced
bitmap images in 3D.
SECTION LAYERS
DRILLHOLES>Discover 3D>Section Layers
Display drillhole section and plan boundaries created in a Datamine Discover drillhole project as
either 3D vectors or as 3D features in 3D.
LOGS
DRILLHOLES>Discover 3D>Logs
Display drillhole logs created in a Datamine Discover drillhole project as georeferenced bitmap
images in 3D.
3D COORDINATES
DRILLHOLES>Discover 3D>3D Coordinates
Calculate 3D point coordinates and displays in 2D or 3D as points.

DRILLHOLES TAB 804
DATAMINE
EXPORT DRILLHOLE TABLES

DRILLHOLES>Datamine>Studio Export>Drillhole Tables
Export drillhole project tables into Datamine Studio DM file format.
EXPORT DRILLHOLE TRACES

DRILLHOLES>Datamine>Studio Export>Drillhole Traces
Export drillhole project drillhole traces into Datamine Studio DM file format.
EXPORT DRILLHOLE SECTION

DRILLHOLES>Datamine>Studio Export>Drillhole Sections
Export drillhole project section plane and envelope into Datamine Studio DM file format.
EXPORT DRILLHOLE LAYERS

DRILLHOLES>Datamine>Studio Export>Drillhole Layers
Export drillhole project section layers into Datamine Studio DM file format.
EXPORT DRILLHOLE IMAGE

DRILLHOLES>Datamine>Studio Export>Drillhole Image
Export drillhole project sections as images into Datamine Studio file format.

DISCOVER 3D TAB
Tools are listed in left-to-right order as they appear on the DISCOVER 3D
tab in the default ribbon layout. If you are using a customized layout, you
can locate a tool name in Datamine Discover tools, which gives an
alphabetical list of all tools.
IN THIS SECTION
MANAGE
Open 3D Window 806
Open 3D Workspace 806
Save 3D Workspace 806
Refresh 3D Data 806
Toggle 806
DISPLAY
Map Window 807
Vectors 807
Surfaces 807
3D Points 807
3D Lines 807
Seismic Sections 807
DRILLHOLES
Drillhole Traces 808
Sections 808
Section Layer 808
3D Coordinates 808
Trench Traces 808
Logs 808
UTILITIES
Extrusion Wizard 809
Display Wizard 809
Drape Image 809
Multi-Section 809
Object Manager 809
DISCOVER 3D TAB 806
MANAGE
OPEN 3D WINDOW
DISCOVER 3D>Manage>Open 3D Window
Opens the Datamine Discover 3D Window.
Related tasks Viewing data in 3D
OPEN 3D WORKSPACE
DISCOVER 3D>Manage>3D Workspace>Open 3D Workspace
Opens a saved 3D session including data in the 3D window and associated tables and map
windows in MapInfo Pro.
SAVE 3D WORKSPACE
DISCOVER 3D>Manage>3D Workspace>Save 3D Workspace
Saves the current workspace in both MapInfo Pro and Datamine Discover 3D.
REFRESH 3D DATA
DISCOVER 3D>Manage>3D Workspace>Refresh 3D Data
Updates the 3D Window with changes made to associated tables that are open in MapInfo Pro/
Datamine Discover (a drillhole project, for example).
TOGGLE
DISCOVER 3D>Manage>3D Workspace>Toggle
Turn the Auto 3D selection option On or Off. This allows the interactive selection of objects
between MapInfo Pro and Datamine Discover 3D.

DISCOVER 3D TAB 807
DISPLAY
MAP WINDOW
DISCOVER 3D>Display>Map Window
Displays data visible in a MapInfo Pro map window as a georeferenced bitmap image in
Datamine Discover 3D.
Related tasks See “View MapInfo Pro/Datamine Discover Data in 3D” topic in 3D Help
VECTORS
DISCOVER 3D>Display>Vectors
Displays point, line or polygon map objects in a Datamine Discover 3D as 3D vectors.
SURFACES
DISCOVER 3D>Display>Surfaces
Displays selected grid files in Datamine Discover 3D. Only grid files that are currently open in
MapInfo Pro can be displayed.
3D POINTS
DISCOVER 3D>Display>3D Points
Displays point data tables and drillhole pierce points in Datamine Discover 3D.
3D LINES
DISCOVER 3D>Display>3D Lines
Displays line data tables in Datamine Discover 3D.
SEISMIC SECTIONS
DISCOVER 3D>Display>Seismic Sections
Interpret velocity profiles on seismic SEGY sections, then generate depth profiles from these for
viewing in Datamine Discover 3D.

DISCOVER 3D TAB 808
DRILLHOLES
DRILLHOLE TRACES
DISCOVER 3D>Drillholes>Drillhole Traces
Displays selected drillholes from an open Datamine Discover drillhole project in Datamine
Discover 3D.
SECTIONS
DISCOVER 3D>Drillholes>Sections
Displays drillhole sections created in a Datamine Discover drillhole project as georeferenced
bitmap images in Datamine Discover 3D.
SECTION LAYER
DISCOVER 3D>Drillholes>Section Layer
Displays drillhole section and plan boundaries created in a Datamine Discover drillhole project
as either 3D vectors or as 3D features in Datamine Discover 3D.
3D COORDINATES
DISCOVER 3D>Drillholes>3D Coordinates
Calculates 3D point coordinates and displays in 2D or 3D as points.
TRENCH TRACES
DISCOVER 3D>Drillholes>Trench Traces
Trenches/Costeans in a open drillhole project can be migrated into 3D.
LOGS
DISCOVER 3D>Drillholes>Logs
Displays drillhole logs created in a Datamine Discover drillhole project as georeferenced bitmap
images in Datamine Discover 3D.

DISCOVER 3D TAB 809
UTILITIES
EXTRUSION WIZARD
DISCOVER 3D>Utilities>Extrusion Wizard
The Extrusion Wizard provides a user-friendly step-by-step guide to displaying vector objects as
extrude solids in 3D.
DISPLAY WIZARD
DISCOVER 3D>Utilities>Display Wizard
The Display Wizard provides a user-friendly step-by-step guide to displaying either the entire
current map view or individual map objects in Datamine Discover 3D.
DRAPE IMAGE
DISCOVER 3D>Utilities>Drape Image
Drape a raster image over a gridded surface to the original raster resolution.
MULTI-SECTION
DISCOVER 3D>Utilities>Multi-Section
Register multiple images as vertical sections.
OBJECT MANAGER
DISCOVER 3D>Utilities>Object Manager
Display images as geolocated images such as trees, building etc.

GPS TAB
Tools are listed in left-to-right order as they appear on the GPS tab in the
default ribbon layout. If you are using a customized layout, you can locate a
tool name in Datamine Discover tools, which gives an alphabetical list of all
tools.
IN THIS SECTION
CONFIGURE
GPS Setup 811
Capture Setup 811
Display Window 811
DATA CAPTURE
Point Trace 811
Polyline 811
Region 812
Point 812
Pause 812
Resume 812
Stop 812
Waypoint 812
RECENTER
Manual 813
Automatic Recenter 813
GPX
Import GPX 814
Export GPX 816
GPS TAB 811
CONFIGURE
GPS SETUP
GPS>Configure>GPS Setup
Configure GPS settings, start and stop the GPS connection.
Related tasks Connecting the GPS Receiver
CAPTURE SETUP
GPS>Configure>Capture Setup
Setup data capture styles, tables and intervals.
Related tasks Setting up the GPS data capture
DISPLAY WINDOW
GPS>Configure>Display Window
Select the map window you wish to view and capture GPS data.
Related tasks Selecting a GPS map window
DATA CAPTURE
POINT TRACE
GPS>Data Capture>Point Trace
Capture a trailing series of points from your GPS location.
Related tasks Capturing GPS data
POLYLINE
GPS>Data Capture>Polyline
Capture a line from your GPS location.

GPS TAB 812
REGION
GPS>Data Capture>Region
Capture a region from your GPS location.
POINT
GPS>Data Capture>Point
Capture individual points for data collection from your GPS location.
PAUSE
GPS>Data Capture>Pause
Pause the capture of GPS data.
RESUME
GPS>Data Capture>Resume
Resume the capture of GPS data.
STOP
GPS>Data Capture>Stop
Stop the capture pf GPS data.
WAYPOINT
GPS>Data Capture>Waypoint
Navigate to a user defined location through visual prompts.

GPS TAB 813
RECENTER
MANUAL
GPS>Recenter>Manual
Recenter the current GPS location to the map window center.
AUTOMATIC RECENTER
GPS>Recenter>Automatic Recenter
Automatic recentering of the map window turned on.

GPS TAB 814
GPX
IMPORT GPX
GPS>GPX>Import GPX File
Import GPX files from another program or GPS unit. Waypoints, Tracks and Routes are
imported into a MapInfo Pro TAB file.
Related tasks GPX import and export
IMPORT GPX DIALOG BOX
FILE TAB
FILE
INPUT FILE
Select GPX file to import.
OUTPUT FILE
Select folder to save imported GPX files.
FILE SUFFIX
Select folder to save imported GPX files.
Waypoints
File suffix for imported waypoints.

GPS TAB 815
ROUTES
File suffix for imported routes.
TRACKS
File suffix for imported tracks.
ROUTEPOINTS
File suffix for imported routepoints.
TRACKPOINTS
File suffix for imported trackpoints.
OPTIONS TAB
ROUTE
CREATE ROUTEPOINTS
Check this option to create points from each waypoint along the route.
IMPORT ROUTES AS SEGMENTS
Select to create a single polyline object of the route.
IMPORT ROUTES AS MULTIPLE LINES
Select to create lines between every waypoint along the route.
TRACK
CREATE TRACKPOINTS
Check this option to create points from each waypoint along the track.

GPS TAB 816
IMPORT TRACKS AS SEGMENTS

Select to create a single polyline object for each route segment.
Import tracks as multiple lines - Select to create lines between every waypoint along the route.
EXPORT GPX
GPS>GPX>Export GPX File
Export a point MapInfo Pro TAB file into a GPX waypoint file.
Related tasks GPX import and export
EXPORT GPX FILE DIALOG BOX
FILE
INPUT TABLE
Select MapInfo TAB file to export.
OUTPUT FOLDER
Select folder to save exported GPX file.
GPX TYPE
Select type of GPX to export either Waypoint or Track

GPS TAB 817
PROJECTION
FROM
Projection of the selected point file.
TO
Projection GPX file will be reprojected into.
FIELDS
NAME
GPX NAME element, select field from MapInfo TAB file to populate.
ELEVATION
GPX ELE element, select field from MapInfo TAB file to populate.
COMMENT
GPX CMT element, select field from MapInfo TAB file to populate.
DESCRIPTION
GPX DESC element, select field from MapInfo TAB file to populate.

SURFACES TAB
Tools are listed in left-to-right order as they appear on the SURFACES tab in
list of all tools.
IN THIS SECTION
FILE
Open table 820
Vector to Grid 820
Contours to DXF 820
Grid to ASCII 820
Grid Export 820
Grid to Image 820
INTERPOLATION
Interactive Gridding 821
Multi-File Gridding 821
Hydrology 821
DISPLAY
Grid Colour 821
Grid Toggle 821
Grid Legend 822
Contour Labels 822
Contour Label Positioner 822
INFORMATION
Grid Stats 822
Grid Info 822
Grid Query 823
UTILITIES
Assign Values 823
Calculator 823
Classify 823
Clip 823
Clip to Grid 823
Convert 824
Curvature 824
Cut/Fill 824
Edit 824
Fill Holes 824
Filter 824
Flip 825
HGT Convert 825
Merge 825
Outline 825
Overlay 825
Profile 825
Range Query 826
Replace 826
Resample 826
Reproject 826
RGB Grid 826
RGB Split 826
Rotate 827
Shift 827
Slope 827
Statistics 827
Surface Area 827
Tile Grid 827
Value Query 828
Vectorize 828
Viewshed 828
Volume 828
SURFACES TAB 820
FILE
OPEN TABLE
SURFACES>File>Open Table
Open a MapInfo Table.
Related tasks Surfaces module
VECTOR TO GRID
SURFACES>File>Vector to Grid
Convert Vector To Grid.
Related tasks Grid Export
CONTOURS TO DXF
SURFACES>File>Export>Contours to DXF
Export vector contours as a DXF file.
GRID TO ASCII
SURFACES>File>Export>Grid to ASCII
Export surface grid to ASCII file.
GRID EXPORT
SURFACES>File>Export>Grid Export
Convert surface grid into another grid format.
GRID TO IMAGE
SURFACES>File>Export>Grid to Image
Export surface grid as a geo-registered image file.

SURFACES TAB 821
INTERPOLATION
INTERACTIVE GRIDDING
SURFACES>Interpolation>Interactive Gridding
Create a surface grid from point or line vector data.
Related tasks Interactive Gridding
MULTI-FILE GRIDDING
SURFACES>Interpolation>Multi-File Gridding
Create a surface grid from large point datasets (LIDAR) or multiple input files.
Related tasks Multi-File Gridding
HYDROLOGY
SURFACES>Interpolation>Hydrology
Create and analyse drainage surface grid data.
Related tasks Hydrology workflow

Extract drainage features from a DEM
DISPLAY
GRID COLOUR
SURFACES>Display>Grid Colour
Modify the colour and sun shading scheme of a surface grid.
Related tasks Modify Grid Colours and Shading
GRID TOGGLE
SURFACES>Display>Grid Toggle
Toggle support between Surfaces and Raster Modules.
Related tasks Grid Toggle

SURFACES TAB 822
GRID LEGEND
SURFACES>Display>Grid Legend
Create legend for surface grid.

Grid Legend
CONTOUR LABELS
SURFACES>Display>Contour Labels
Create text labels for contoured vector data.
CONTOUR LABEL POSITIONER

SURFACES>Display>Contour Label Positioner
Position text labels on contour lines at defined intervals.
INFORMATION
GRID STATS
SURFACES>Information>Grid Stats
Recompute Grid Statistics
Related tasks Interrogating a Grid
GRID INFO
SURFACES>Information>Grid Info
View statistical information for a surface grid.

SURFACES TAB 823
GRID QUERY
SURFACES>Information>Grid Query
Query the individual grid cell values.
UTILITIES
ASSIGN VALUES
SURFACES>Utilities>Assign Values
Assign surface grid cell values to a selected vector object.
Related tasks Assigning Values from a Grid to Map Objects
CALCULATOR
SURFACES>Utilities>Calculator
Apply arithmetic operations to one or multiple surface grids.
Related tasks Computing Cell Values by Expressions
CLASSIFY
SURFACES>Utilities>Classify
Classify surface grid data value ranges into predefined data values or bins.
Related tasks Using Grid Tools
CLIP
SURFACES>Utilities>Clip
Clip surface grid with a vector polygon or by defined extents.
CLIP TO GRID
SURFACES>Utilities>Clip to Grid
Clip a surface grid with another surface grid.

SURFACES TAB 824
CONVERT
SURFACES>Utilities>Convert
Save a surface grid into another surface grid format.
CURVATURE
Display rate of change in surface grid slope or aspect.
CUT/FILL
Compute the volume of material added and/or removed between surface grids.
EDIT
SURFACES>Utilities>Edit
Edit individual surface grid cell values.
FILL HOLES
SURFACES>Utilities>Fill Holes
Fill holes (Nulls) in a surface grid by interpolating from surrounding cell values.
FILTER
SURFACES>Utilities>Filter
Create surface grid with defined filters for enhanced surface grid analysis.
Related tasks Surfaces module

SURFACES TAB 825
FLIP
SURFACES>Utilities>Flip
Flip the surface grid on the X or Y axis.
HGT CONVERT
SURFACES>Utilities>HGT Convert
Import an SRTM HGT file as a surface grid.
Related tasks Importing Grids
MERGE
SURFACES>Utilities>Merge
Merge multiple surface grids into a single surface grid file.
OUTLINE
SURFACES>Utilities>Outline
Create polygon vector files of one or multiple surface grid extents.
OVERLAY
SURFACES>Utilities>Overlay
Replace surface grid cell values with values from a vector object.
PROFILE
SURFACES>Utilities>Profile
Display surface grid cells values as a continuous profile from a selected vector object.
Related tasks Creating Grid Profiles

SURFACES TAB 826
RANGE QUERY
SURFACES>Utilities>Range Query
Query surface grid ranged values as discrete polygon objects.
Related tasks Select Cells by Multiple Value Ranges
REPLACE
SURFACES>Utilities>Replace
Replace values in a surface grid with user defined values.
RESAMPLE
SURFACES>Utilities>Resample
Modify the size of surface grid cells.
REPROJECT
SURFACES>Utilities>Reproject
Reproject surface grid into another projection system.
RGB GRID
SURFACES>Utilities>RGB Grid
Create a multibanded grid with red, green and blue bands.
RGB SPLIT
SURFACES>Utilities>RGB Split
Split multi-banded surface grid into single bands.

SURFACES TAB 827
ROTATE
SURFACES>Utilities>Rotate
Rotate surface grid with user defined angle.
SHIFT
SURFACES>Utilities>Shift
Offset surface grid by constant X and Y values.
SLOPE
SURFACES>Utilities>Slope
Create slope or aspect surface grid in degrees or percentage.
STATISTICS
Calculate statistics for entire surface grid or constrained within a vector boundary.
SURFACE AREA
Compute surface area for a grid.
TILE GRID
SURFACES>Utilities>Tile Grid
Divide surface grid into smaller grids of equal dimensions.
Related tasks Dividing Grids into Tiles

SURFACES TAB 828
VALUE QUERY
SURFACES>Utilities>Value Query
Query surface grid by discrete value.
Related tasks Select Cells by Surface Property
VECTORIZE
SURFACES>Utilities>Vectorize
Create vector objects from the surface grid cell values.
VIEWSHED
SURFACES>Utilities>Viewshed
Compute line-of-sight surface grid for terrain anlaysis.
VOLUME
Compute volume between two surface grids or from a defined level.

REFERENCE
INFORMATION
GEOPHYSICAL
FILTER
DESCRIPTIONS
Datamine Discover provides a range of Geophysical Fast Fourier Transform
(FFT) filters found under ANALYSIS>Raster>Geophysical Filters, which
supplement the extensive Raster Filtering capabilities found under
RASTER>Operations>Filter.
IN THIS SECTION
Filter process 831
Geophysical FFT Derivative Filters 831
GEOPHYSICAL FILTER DESCRIPTIONS 831
FILTER PROCESS
Grids are comprised of equi-spaced data values located along rows and columns. The intersection of
these rows and columns is called a mesh point or node. When filtering a grid, each grid node of the
output grid is calculated as a function of the corresponding node and its neighbours. The size of the
neighbourhood used in the filtering process is defined by the size and shape of the filter (or kernel).
Filters are generally defined as a rectangular sub-array of nodes, which are assigned a set of filter
weights. Because the filter neighbourhood needs to be centered on a grid node during the filtering
process, filters are generally defined by an odd number of rows and columns. For example, if the width
and the height of the filter neighbourhood are both three, then the neighbourhood of the output grid
node centred at (Row 40, Column 32) is the following rectangular sub-array is:
(39,33) (40,33) (41,32)
(39,32) (40,32) (41,32)
(39,31) (40,31) (41,31)
Shifting the filter neighbourhood across the grid and computing a new value for each grid node
produces the filtered output of the image. If the heights of the neighbourhood nodes are represented
by H and the width by W, the number of nodes in the neighbourhood equals H × W. Therefore, any
nodes in the neighbourhood can be defined as:
Filter Weight (Row+i,Col+j) where:
H  H  W  W 
i = −  ,......,   and j = −  ,......,   (1)
2 2 2 2
where each array is the largest integer less than or equal to its neighbour array.
The filter neighbourhood is shifted across the grid and a new value for each grid node is calculated in
the output image according to the filter method selected.
The Rows and Columns in the Grid Filter dialog box specify the neighbourhood size for the selected
filter. The weights for each grid node in the neighbourhood are displayed below. Each element of the
matrix is used to weight the grid node that lies below it. The products are computed and then summed,
normalized and assigned to the value below the centre node. The filter is then shifted to the next node
and the process is repeated until all nodes of the input grid have been processed.
The following filtering tools are provided with Datamine Discover: The filters are located in subfolders
under .\Program Files\MapInfo\Encom\Discover\Plug-Ins\Filters. The kernel files used are
identical in format to those specified for use by ER Mapper.
GEOPHYSICAL FFT DERIVATIVE FILTERS
FFT VERTICAL DERIVATIVE FILTERS

The transfer function Gzdd(k) for the vertical derivative operator of order p>0 acting upon a grid of
scalar potential field data in the 2D wave number domain is:
Gzdd(k) = |k|p ; for p > 0 (2)
where |k| is the modulus of the 1D wave number vector k. Whence the expression for the first
vertical derivative operator (i.e. for p = 1) is:
G1vd(k) = |k| (3)

FFT REDUCTION TO POLE FILTER

The reduction to the pole (RTP) filter is used to transform a grid of total magnetic field intensity
measurements to a grid of magnetic intensity measurements that would be observed at the north
magnetic pole. The expression for the RTP transform operator Grtp(k) at a point k = (kx,ky) in the
2D in the wave number domain is given by Gibert and Guillamin (1985) and Blakely (1995) as follows :
Grtp(k) = |k|2/[(g⋅f)(g⋅m)] (4)
where
g = (ikx,iky,|k|) is the complex gradient vector in the 2D wave number domain
f = (fx,fy,fz) is the unit vector of direction cosines for the local geomagnetic field vector
m = (mx,my,mz) is the unit vector of direction cosines for the resultant magnetization vector.
Here it is noted that the direction cosines are measured using the International Geomagnetic
Reference Field (IGRF) coordinate system, namely, X-North; Y-East, Z – vertically down.
Furthermore, it is possible to express the RTP transfer function in terms of the transformed 2D Hilbert
operators Hx(k),Hy(k) (Nabighian, 1983) in the k = (kx,ky) wave number domain, namely,
Hx(k) = ikx /|k| ; Hy(k) = iky /|k| (5)
After puting H = g/|k| = Hx,Hy,1), then:
Grtp(k) = [(H⋅f)(H⋅m)]-1 (6)
Or, after putting Θf = H⋅f and Θm = H⋅m, in the notation of Blakely (1995, Ch 12), then:
Grtp(k) = 1/[Θf Θm] (7)
Whence for the induced magnetization case in which the direction cosines m of the resultant
magnetization vector is identical to the direction cosines f of the ambient geomagnetic field, then
equation (7) becomes:
Grtp(k) = 1/Θf2 (8)
FFT REDUCTION TO POLE (LOW LATITUDE) FILTER

In addition to the standard RTP filter provided for Reduction-To-the-Pole processing (see above), an
additional filter specifically for use with magnetic data acquired at low magnetic latitudes is provided.
This FFT filter uses analytic signal computation to calculate simplified responses from magnetic data
acquired at magnetic latitudes less than approximately 30o of inclination. As the analytic signal
computation produces response maxima over magnetic contacts irrespective of the direction of
magnetization, this can be used to assist the processing of observed magnetic data acquired near the
magnetic equator.
Operation of the filter computes both a phase and an amplitude component. A compensation applied
to the phase component can be used to prevent the amplitude increasing and causing the equation to
become unstable. This instability is primarily due to any anomalies oriented north-south within the
observed data.
Use the IGRF calculator to automatically assign the Declination and Inclination. A default Minimum
angle of 20o is assigned.

The effect of changing the Minimum angle factor alters the relative sizes of the phase and amplitude.
If the factor is increased (to a maximum of 90o), the phase component increases and amplitude
adjustment is reduced (to be zero at 90o). If the correction factor is reduced, the phase and amplitude
components become evenly applied.
The Minimum angle factor defaults to a value of 20o but in the filter’s implementation, if it specified less
than the data’s inclination (I), then the Minimum angle correction is reset to the value of 20o to maintain
stability.
FFT REDUCTION TO EQUATOR FILTER

The reduction to the equator (RTE) filter is used to transform a grid of total magnetic field intensity
measurements to a grid of magnetic intensity measurements that would be observed at the magnetic
equator, i.e. where the inclination of the geomagnetic field is zero degrees. The expression for the RTE
transform operator Grte(k) in the wave number domain is given by Gibert and Guillamin (1985) and
Blakely (1995) as follows :
Grte(k) = (gH⋅n)2/[(g⋅f)(g⋅m)] (9)
where
g = (ikx,iky,|k|) is the complex gradient vector in the 2D wave number domain
gH = (ikx, iky) is the horizontal gradient vector in the 2D wave number domain
f = (fx,fy,fz) is the unit vector of direction cosines for the local geomagnetic field vector
m = (mx,my,mz) is the unit vector of direction cosines for the resultant magnetization vector
n = (nx,ny,0) is the unit vector of direction cosines for the specified true north or magnetic
north direction
As noted previously the direction cosines are measured using the International Geomagnetic
Reference Field (IGRF) coordinate system. From equations (44) above it is possible to express the
RTE transfer function in terms of the transformed 2D Hilbert operators Hx(k),Hy(k) in the k =
(kx,ky) wave number domain, namely,
After puting H = g/|k| = (Hx,Hy,1), and H2D = gH/|k| = (Hx,Hy), then:
Grte(k) = (H2D⋅n)2/[(H⋅f)(H⋅m)] (10)
Or, after puting Θf = H⋅f and Θm = H⋅m and Θn = H2D⋅n , then:
Grte(k) = Θn2/[Θf Θm] (11)
Whence for the induced magnetization case in which the direction cosines m of the resultant
magnetization vector is identical to the direction cosines f of the ambient geomagnetic field, then
equation (11 becomes
Grte(k) = Θn2/Θf2 (12)
TWO DIMENSIONAL FFT FILTER DESCRIPTIONS

Frequencies of filters are specified in terms of wavelengths (distance in metres). Cut-off rates
determine the sharpness of the filter and the tapering of the energy spectrum. A high value of the cut-
off has the effect of removing high frequencies, but causes ringing on the edges of large amplitude
changes.

A theoretical description of the filters available in the Grid Filter option is provided below.
A 2D grid of scalar potential field data representing a harmonic scalar potential field function F1(k,z0)
may be transformed to another scalar potential field function F2(k,z0) in the 2D wave-number
domain via use of the convolution theorem, namely, if the transfer function is G(k) then:
F2(k;z0) = G(k)F1(k,z0) (13)
Here it is noted that F1(k,z0) is the two-dimensional Fourier transform of the input scalar potential
field function, namely,
∞
F 1 ( k, z 0 ) = F 1 ( k x, k y ;z 0 ) =
  f ( x, y, z ) exp [ –i ( k x + k y ) ] dx dy
1 0 x y (14)
–∞
Whence for measurements of a scalar potential field function f1(xi,yj;z=z0) defined over the 2D grid 1
£ i £ Nx , 1 £ j £ Ny , the 2D discrete Fourier transform is defined as a complex Hermitian function
F1(k1,k2;z0) defined over the same size (Nx*Ny) grid, namely,
where xi=(i -1)Δx and yj=(j -1)Δy and the discrete kx,ky wave-numbers are given by the
relations:
kx = 2π(k1-1)/NxΔx ; 1 ≤ k1 ≤ Nx and
ky = 2π(k2-1)/NyΔy ; 1 ≤ k2 ≤ Ny
FFT CONTINUATION FILTER

The vertical continuation filter is used to transform a 2D grid of scalar potential field (magnetic or
gravity) measurements from one datum level at z=z0 to another datum level at z=z1 in either an
upward or downward direction. The expression for the vertical continuation operator GUDC(k) at a point
k = (kx,ky) in the 2D wave number domain is given by the following relation (see for example,
Blakely, 1995):
GUDC(k) = exp{|k|δz} δz<0 for upward continuation to z1 (15)
GUDC(k) = exp{|k|δz} δz>0 for downward continuation to z1 (16)
where δz = (z1-z0) is the change in vertical datum from z0 to z1 for the 2D grid and |k| is the
modulus of the 2D wavenumber vector k as defined in equation (38). Here it is noted that z is
measured positive downwards which is in keeping with both the IGRF and the Encom grid coordinate
systems.
FFT LOW PASS FILTER

The FFT Low Pass Filter applies an operator to remove high frequency content with wavelengths
above (that is, smaller than the defined wavelength cut-off). The cut-off rate specifies the severity of
the filter at its wavelength margins. The higher the cut-off, the greater and the sharper the cut-off effect
of removing a particular wavelength cut-off.

FFT HIGH PASS FILTER

This FFT filter is the converse of the Low Pass filter. The High Pass filters pass frequencies that are
higher than the specified cut-off.
FFT BAND PASS FILTER

Band Pass filters remove wavelengths that lie between two specified wavelength limits.
A common cut-off is applied for both the high and low ranges of the wavelengths. Applying a simple
cutoff filter to an energy spectrum (such as a Band Pass filter) almost invariably introduces a significant
amount of ringing (referred to as the Gibbs' Phenomena).

CUSTOMIZING TITLE
BLOCKS
Organizations often need to produce a customized title block that is set out
in a particular way and includes specific information and details. Title blocks
can incorporate company logos or other imagery to enhance final map
presentation.
IN THIS SECTION
About title blocks 837
Company logo 837
Title block parameters 839
Placeholders 840
Scale bar 841
CUSTOMIZING TITLE BLOCKS 837
ABOUT TITLE BLOCKS

Title Block
Rectify Image
Datamine Discover is shipped with a standard title block that can be populated with information
automatically or a user can manually enter details such as map title, author, drawing number, etc. The
title block can then be selected with the Scaled Output tool or opened independently with the Title Block
tool.
The Datamine Discover customizable title block is a normal MapInfo Pro map table stored in a
centimetre non-earth projection. It is designed to be inserted into a layout window at close to true scale.
The Datamine Discover Scaled Output displays the title block at full size (1:1) when the map frame
width is greater than 50cm and at half size (1:2) for a map frame width of less than 50 cm.
A custom title block can be created by making a copy of the default Datamine Discover TITLEBLK file,
located in the Discover Configuration directory (see Configuring Datamine Discover) using
HOME>File>Save Copy As and edit the existing linework and detail placeholders.
COMPANY LOGO
To insert a company logo into a title block, create a raster image of the logo by scanning or copying
the logo into an imaging software program. Note the shape of the logo and determine how you wish
the logo to appear in the title block (i.e. top left hand corner, extending entire width of title block, etc.)
The image may be in any raster format recognized by MapInfo Pro such as .BMP, .JPG, .PNG, .GIF,
etc. Alternatively you can use a custom symbol for the logo, inserted directly into the title block table.
Make sure that the image is sized to the same scale it will be displayed in the title block. In the default
title block, the log cannot be more than 10 cm wide or 1.6 cm high. For example, if your company logo
is square and you wish to display it in the top left hand corner of a 10 cm wide title block, then the image
should be re-sized to the area it will occupy, e.g. 1.6 cm x 1.6 cm. Also make note of the number of
pixels for the image width and height.
The reason for the 1:1 scaling is that the image is to be registered in relation to the title block linework
in the same way that other images are registered in MapInfo Pro. The only difference in this instance
is that the image will be registered using a Non-Earth (centimetres) projection. Like other registered
images in MapInfo Pro, if the image is not registered correctly or the image is stretched or shortened
in any way the overlying title block linework will be distorted and the image will not display correctly.
TO REGISTER A LOGO IMAGE:
1. Open a map window containing the custom title block linework and placeholder information.
2. On the Images tab, click Rectify Image.
3. Click the Open button and select the image. When prompted to load the control points, click Yes.
4. Click the Projection button and change the projection to Non-Earth (centimetres).
5. Select the first control point row (ID=1). Note that the Image_X and Image_Y coordinates are 0, 0.
6. Press S on the keyboard to change to snap mode. Snap mode will change the cursor to a circle
and display a large cross-hair whenever it is placed over a node. Snap mode enables map
objects to be joined together seamlessly or for exact coordinates for a point or node to be
recorded.

7. Click the Map button. In snap mode, click the corresponding point in the title block linework
mapper for the first control point location. If there is no intersecting linework or node to snap to at
the corresponding control point location in the map window, then click the corresponding point in
the map window.
8. In the Rectify Options dialog box, the relevant Map_X and Map_Y coordinates are updated. Edit
the coordinates if necessary to make sure both the map and image coordinates are correct. The
Image_X and Image_Y coordinates are the number of pixels which make up the image in the X
and Y direction. Make sure that the pixel numbers entered here correspond to the minimum and
maximum image pixel extents to prevent image distortion.
Note Map X and Map Y coordinates increase up and to the right from the bottom left-hand corner of
the map window. Image X and Image Y coordinates increase down and to the right from the
top left-hand corner of the Image Registration dialog.
9. Repeat the above steps to assign the Map_X and Map_Y coordinates for each of the remaining
three control points at the image corners.
10. When all four control points have had their Map_X and Map_Y coordinates assigned and the
RMS (Root Mean Square) error calculation is between 0 and 1, under Control Points, click the
Save button and save the control points.
11. Click the Rectify button. A new image and associated TAB file will be generated.
Add this registered image to the title block map window and see how the title block and image display
together. If the title block linework is distorted, then there is a problem with the image registration. In
this case, open the Rectify Image tool, load the saved control points, and then check the map and
image registration coordinates. Make the necessary changes and rectify the image again.
The final step is to add a new record to the custom title block browser window specifying the logo name,
so that when the title block is selected, Datamine Discover will open the title block and display the
correct logo.
Note Logo tables should be stored in the same directory as the customized title block TAB file. If the
Logo TAB file is called LOGO.TAB is will be automatically added to the corresponding custom
title block, and does not require a Placeholder to be created—that is, you can store the custom
title block and log files on a shared network folder.

TO ADD A LOGO PLACEHOLDER:

1. Open the custom title block browser and click the field header cell. The cursor will change to a
hand.
2. Right-click and choose New Row from the shortcut menu.
3. Type the new placeholder Logo [logo_tablename].
Title block with logo inserted and browser reference
TITLE BLOCK PARAMETERS
The TITLEBLK.TAB located in C:\ProgramData\Encom\Discover\Config is the standard Datamine

Discover title block. The above dialog shows the TITLEBLK table opened in a map window and a
browser window view. Note that the TITLEBLK table is comprised of linework and text.

There must be a closed polyline forming the boundary of the title block, so that Datamine Discover
knows how big the title block is. You can easily create a closed rectangular polyline by creating a
rectangle, then using the SPATIAL>Edit>Convert to Polylines tool.
The linework in the TITLEBLK table corresponds to the blank browser records and the Text labels may
have an identical entry in the textfield column or the column may contain different text altogether. The
text in the browser is called a detail placeholder. A detail placeholder is used to denote where in the
title block specific text or items are to be displayed when the title block is created.
When Datamine Discover is creating a title block the detail placeholders are read and the required
information is inserted. Some of this information is inserted automatically while other detail
placeholders require the user to manually enter data into the corresponding blank field in the Title Block
and Scale Bar Options dialog box.
Save custom title blocks (and scale bar) to the desired folder.
Custom title blocks can be added to the list of available title blocks in Datamine Discover through the
Scaled Output tool. To add the title block to the list, select the Scaled Output tool and, under Maintain
Titleblock, click Configure. Then click Add button and browse to select the new title block. Use the
Remove button to delete custom title blocks from the list.
PLACEHOLDERS
The title block shipped with Datamine Discover contains six detail placeholder fields: Author, Date,
Office, Drawing, Scale and Projection. The date field is automatically recognized by Datamine Discover
and the current date inserted, so it cannot be changed in the dialog box. If detail fields Scale and
Projection are present, these are also recognized by Datamine Discover and the current scale and map
projection inserted so that it cannot be changed in the dialog box.
Scaled Output can use up to 12 detail placeholders including specifically named fields as follows:
• Company Name
The company name specified in PRO>Options>Datamine Discover>Configuration is inserted
into the title block in place of the Company Name placeholder. Set the position and font of the
Company placeholder.
• Title Line 1
Set the position and font of the Title Line placeholder. The five lines of title text entered in the title
block dialog in Scaled Output is concatenated, centre justified and inserted in the location of the
placeholder.
If the text appears off centre in the created title block, make the layer editable and manually
centre the text within the title block bounds. Use the HOME>Document Windows>Redraw
Window tool to refresh the map window if necessary.
• Date
Formatted (as set up in control panel options)
• Scale
Formatted e.g. 1:50,000
• CoordSys Name
e.g. AMG Zone 54 (AGD 66)
• CoordSys Clause
e.g. 8,12,7,141,0,0.9996,500000,10000000
• Projection
e.g. Transverse Mercator (Gauss-Kruger)

• Datum
e.g. Australian Geodetic 1966 (AGD 66)
• Ellipsoid
e.g. Australian National
• Origin Longitude
• Origin Latitude
• False Easting
• False Northing
• Logo [logo_tablename]
e.g. Logo [Discover_logo.tab]
• User-Defined Placeholders
The browser text for each of the detail placeholders is what appears in the Titleblock dialog box
(for example, Author:, Office:, Drawing:). The text that you enter in the dialog for each detail is
then appended to the text object in the Map Window for each user-defined detail.
SCALE BAR
• ScaleHolder
The title block shipped with Datamine Discover includes a placeholder for a scale bar called
ScaleHolder. Datamine Discover constructs a scale bar inside this placeholder if it is present. The
ScaleHolder detail is a region and must be large enough to display the created scale bar.
If the title block contains the ScaleHolder record and a detail field called “Scale”, Datamine
Discover does not place text for “Scale 1:nnnnnn” in the ScaleHolder placeholder. The text will be
placed in the Scale placeholder.
If the ScaleHolder placeholder is not present in the title block, then Datamine Discover looks for
a table called ScaleBar (in the Datamine Discover Program Files Directory), which does contain
the placeholder and constructs the scale bar in this table.
The first record in the ScaleBar table is a record called ScaleHolder. If the ScaleBar table
contains a second record called “NoText”, then Datamine Discover does not place text for “Scale
1:nnnnnn” next to the scale bar.

PROJECTIONS AND
TRANSFORMATIONS
IN THIS SECTION
Encom reprojections 843
NTv2 transformation 843
PROJECTIONS AND TRANSFORMATIONS 843
ENCOM REPROJECTIONS
The Datamine Discover reprojection utilities (and Datamine Discover 3D reprojection) use a custom
(“Encom”) reprojection engine, which is separate and slightly different to the MapInfo Pro projection
engine (as used by other tools).
This Encom reprojection engine uses an independent projection list to the MapInfow.prj projection
file. To utilise a custom coordinate system with these Discover tools which has previously been added
to the MapInfow.prj file:
1. Copy the custom projection line from the MapInfow.prj file in the .\MapInfo\Professional
folder.
2. Add this custom projection line into the Encom.prj file located in the
The formatting of the coordinate system string and behavior of this Encom.prj projection file is
otherwise identical to the MapInfow.prj file.
NTV2 TRANSFORMATION
The Datamine Discover reprojection utilities also support NTv2 transformation between selected
coordinate systems. To automatically use the NTv2 transformation parameters when transforming
between the following datums, check the Use NTv2 grid-shift method if available box in each of the
Reproject tool dialogs.
The National Transformation ver. 2 (NTv2) algorithm and grid shift file format, developed by the
Geodetic Survey Division of Geomatics Canada, enables you to convert data between the NAD 27
reference system and the NAD 83 reference system; that is, this algorithm allows you to convert these
two reference systems between each other. Grid shift files used with the algorithm contain one or more
rectangular grids that indicate the coordinate differences between NAD 27 and NAD 83.
The National Transformation was originally designed to convert Canadian data from NAD 27 to NAD
83. The NTv2 grid was an enhancement to compensate for the primary and secondary points that were
based on the GRS80 ellipsoid. This format was later adopted for datum conversion in Australia, New
Zealand, and Germany etc.
The NTv2 transformation supports a number of countries and areas. The data used by NTv2 is stored
in grid shift (.GSB) files stored in the folder:
C:\Users\USERNAME\AppData\Roaming\Encom\Common\NTv2
The countries and datums that include NTv2 support for the specified datums are:
Canada - NAD 1927 to NAD 1983 (NAD27_Canada.gsb)
Australia - AGD66 to GDA94 (AGD66_Australia.gsb)
Australia - AGD66 (7 param, ACT) to GDA94 (AGD66_Australia.gsb)
Australia - AGD66 (7 param, TAS) to GDA94 (AGD66_Australia.gsb)
Australia - AGD66 (7 param, VIC/NSW) to GDA94 (AGD66_Australia.gsb)
Australia - AGD84 to GDA94 (AGD84_Australia.gsb)
New Zealand - NZGD49 to NZGD2000 (nzgd2kgrid0005.gsb)
New Zealand - NZGD49 to NZGD2000 (7 param) (nzgd2kgrid0005.gsb)

PROJECTIONS AND TRANSFORMATIONS 844
Germany - DHDN to ETRS89 (BETA2007.gsb)

Britain - OSGB36 to WGS84 (england-wales.gsb, scotland.gsb)
Spain - ED50 to WGS84 (BALEARES.gsb,PENINSULA.gsb)
Brazil - Corrego Alegre to SIRGAS2000 (CA61_003.gsb)
South America - SAD69 to SIRGAS2000 (SAD69_003.gsb)

STYLES AND SYMBOL
FONTS
IN THIS SECTION
Line styles 846
Style library 846
Geological symbol font 846
Structural symbol font 849
Hydrographic symbol font 855
Environmental symbol font 857
STYLES AND SYMBOL FONTS 846
LINE STYLES
When Datamine Discover is installed, a number of custom line styles are automatically added to the
existing MapInfo Pro pen file.
STYLE LIBRARY
GEOLOGICAL SYMBOL FONT

Datamine Discover includes a geological TrueType font (ET GeoExplore) that contains non-rotatable
geological symbols. These symbols can be used with the Discover Styles Library or from the MapInfo
Pro symbol style picker (see Managing and applying object styles).

Name Symbol ASCII

Petroleum exploration well, proposed site  33
Petroleum exploration well, dry, abandoned  34
Petroleum exploration well with show of oil  35
Petroleum exploration well with show of oil, abandoned  36
Petroleum exploration well with show of gas  37
Petroleum exploration well with show of oil and gas, abandoned  38
Petroleum exploration well with show of oil  39
Petroleum exploration well with show of oil and gas  40
Stratigraphic hole for petroleum exploration  41
Oil well, shut in or suspended  42
Oil well, abandoned  43
Gas well  44
Gas well, shut in or suspended  45
Gas well, abandoned  46
Oil and gas well  47
Oil and gas well, shut in or suspended  48
Oil and gas well, abandoned  49
Gas and condensate well  50
Gas and condensate well, shut in or suspended  51
Gas and condensate well, abandoned  52
Fossil locality  53
Macrofossil locality  54
Microfossil locality  55
Trace fossil locality  56
Fossil wood locality  57
Oncolite locality  58
Palynomorph locality  59
Plant fossil locality  60
Stromatolite locality  61
Vertebrate fossil locality  62
Sample location for isotopic age determination  63
Type locality  64
Drillhole  65
Unworked deposit  66
Prospect or mine with little production  67
Abandoned prospect or mine with little production  68
Mine; may be abandoned  69
Major mine  70
Mine abandoned or not being worked  71
Minor open cut or quarry  72
Major open cut or quarry  73
Abandoned open cut or quarry, or not being worked  74

Name Symbol ASCII

Minor alluvial workings  75
Major alluvial workings  76
Abandoned alluvial workings, or not being worked  77
Treatment plant  78
Treatment plant not operating, or abandoned, or former site  79
Main shaft showing number of compartments  80
Shaft extending above and below plan level  81
Accessible shaft extending below plan level  82
Accessible shaft extending above plan level  83
Head of rise or winze T  84
Foot of rise or winze  85
Rise or winze extending through level  86
Inclined accessible shaft extending below plan level (small scale)  87
Inclined accessible shaft extending below plan level (large scale)  88
Cross-section of cross-cut or drive; same side of plane of section as observer  89
Cross-section of cross-cut or drive; opposite side of plane of section  90
Cross-section of cross-cut or drive extending across plane of section  91
Ore chute  92
Filled workings  93
Portal and approach of tunnel or adit  94
Natural surface  95
Grab-sample locality  96
Costean or trench  97
Oil seep  98
Gas seep  99
Oil and gas seep or show  100
Oil seep reported (by geoscientist) but not relocated  101
Gas seep reported (by geoscientist) but not relocated  102
Oil and gas seep reported (by geoscientist) but not relocated  103
Mud volcano or mud volcano without with hydrocarbons  104
Mud volcano with hydrocarbons  105
Relative gravity high  107
Relative gravity low  108
Proterozoic symbol  109
Cambrian symbol  110
Photo point  111
Drillhole  112
Registration cross  113
Scarp  114
Inclined drillhole  115
Inclined drillhole  116
Inclined drillhole  117

Name Symbol ASCII

Inclined drillhole  118
Major eruptive centre with recorded eruption  119
Major eruptive centre with no recorded eruption  120
Minor eruptive centre with recorded eruption  121
Minor eruptive centre with no recorded eruption  122
Astrobleme or impact structure or cryptoexplosive structure  123
Trigometrical  124
Astronomical station  125
Major volcanic centre  126
Volcanic plug residual  127
Basalt capped residual hill  129
Residual hill  130
Crater wall  131
Pediment  132
Landslips  133
STRUCTURAL SYMBOL FONT

The structural TrueType symbol fonts should be installed on your system via the Fonts folder in
Control Panel. They are then available for use with any software that uses true type fonts, including
MapInfo Pro, Corel Draw and MS Word.
• Structural symbols ordered by Discover code
• Structure symbols ordered by name
The symbols can be referred to in a number of ways:
• Name - Used when placing individual structural symbols (see Applying structural styles from a
picklist). There are three separate structural symbol fonts that are available.
• Australian – ET Structural Australia
• Canadian – ET Structural Canada
• USA – ET Structural USA
• ASCII - The ASCII character code.
• Discover code - Used when entering data into a spreadsheet for display with Discover's
Structural Picklists (see Structural picklists).
STRUCTURAL SYMBOLS ORDERED BY DISCOVER CODE

Name Discover ASCII Australia Canada USA
Code Code
Bedding 1 33 !  
Bedding Horizontal 1 34 "  
Bedding Vertical 1 35 #  
Bedding Overturned 2 36 $  


Code Code
Bedding Overturned Horizontal 2 37 %  
Bedding Facing 3 38 &  
Bedding Facing Vertical 3 39 '  
Cleavage (S1) 4 41 )  
Cleavage (S1) Vertical 4 42 *  
Cleavage (S1) Horizontal 4 43 +  
Cleavage (S2) 5 44 ,  
Cleavage (S2) Vertical 5 45 -  
Cleavage (S2) Horizontal 5 46 .  
Cleavage (S3) 6 47 /  
Cleavage (S3) Vertical 6 48 0  
Cleavage (S3) Horizontal 6 49 1  
Younging 7 132   
Lineation 8 50 2  
Lineation Vertical 8 51 3  
Lineation Horizontal 8 52 4  
Lineation (L1) 9 53 5  
Lineation (L2) 10 54 6  
Lineation (L3) 11 55 7  
Bedding-Cleavage 12 56 8  
Bedding-Cleavage Horizontal 12 57 9  
Crenulation 13 58 :  
Crenulation Horizontal 13 59 ;  
Mineral Alignment 14 60 <  
Mineral Alignment Horizontal 14 61 =  
Banding/Platy Alignment 15 62 >  
Banding/Platy Alignment Vertical 15 63 ?  
Banding/Platy Alignment Horizontal 15 64 @  
Joint 16 65 A  
Joint Vertical 16 66 B  
Joint Horizontal 16 67 C  
Foliation 17 68 D  
Foliation Vertical 17 69 E  
Foliation Horizontal 17 70 F  
Anticline (F1) 18 80 P  
Anticline (F1) Horizontal 18 81 Q  
Anticline (F2) 19 82 R  
Anticline (F2) Horizontal 19 83 S  
Anticline (F3) 20 84 T  
Anticline (F3) Horizontal 20 85 U  
Anticline Overturned 21 86 V  


Code Code
Anticline Recumbent 22 87 W  
Syncline (F1) 23 90 Z  
Syncline (F1) Horizontal 23 91 [  
Syncline (F2) 24 92 \  
Syncline (F2) Horizontal 24 93 ]  
Syncline (F3) 25 94 ^  
Syncline (F3) Horizontal 25 95 _  
Syncline Overturned 26 96 `  
Syncline Recumbent 27 97 a  
Normal Fault 28 101 e  
Normal Fault-Low Angle 29 102 f  
Normal Fault-High Angle 30 103 g  
Thrust Fault 31 104 h  
Shear Zone 32 105 i  
Shear Zone-Wide 33 106 j  
Fault Zone Breccia 34 107 k  
Trend Line 35 108 l  
Parallel Lines 36 109 m  
Vein/Dyke No Dip 37 110 n  
Vein/Sill No Dip 38 111 o  
Vein/Dyke With Dip 37 112 p  
Vein/Sill With Dip 38 113 q  
Oriented Drill Collar 1 39 121 y  
Oriented Drill Collar 2 40 122 z  
Oriented Drill Collar 3 41 123 {  
Dipping Fault Gouge 42 115 s  
Sinistral Fault Wrench 43 99 c  
Dextral Fault Wrench 44 100 d  
Columnar Joint 45 71 G  
Bedding Facing Unknown 46 130   
Bedding Facing Unknown Vertical 46 131   
Undulating Bedding Dip 47 133   
Deformed Bedding Dip 48 134   
Foliation D1 49 163 £  
Foliation D2 50 164 ¤  
Foliation D3 51 165 ¥  
Bedding/Cleavage (S1) Parallel 52 72 H  
Bedding/Cleavage (S2) Parallel 53 73 I  
Bedding/Cleavage (S3) Parallel 54 74 J  
Plunge Bedding/Cleavage (S2) Intersection 55 75 K  
Plunge Bedding/Cleavage (S3) Intersection 56 76 L  


Code Code
Plunge Bedding/Vein Intersection 57 77 M  
Monocline 58 79 O  
Minor Anticline 59 140   
Minor Anticline And Plunge 60 141   
Minor Syncline 61 142   
Minor Syncline And Plunge 62 143   
Minor Fold With Dip 63 144   
Minor Fold With Plunge 64 145   
Kink Fold With Plunge 65 146   
Asymmetric Fold Verge Left 66 147   
Asymmetric Fold Verge Right 67 148   
Fold Verge Left 68 149   
Fold Verge Right 69 150   
Recumbent Fold Verge Left 70 151   
Recumbent Fold Verge Right 71 152   
Minor Fold S Vergence 72 153   
Minor Fold Z Vergence 73 154   
Minor Fold M Vergence 74 155   
Boudin Plunge 75 156   
Chert Contortion Plunge 76 157   
Mylonitic Foliation 77 158   
Mylonitic Foliation Vertical 77 159   
Eutaxitic Foliation 78 161 ¡  
Eutaxitic Foliation Vertical 78 162 ¢  
Glacial Striae-Sense Known 79 116 t  
Glacial Striae-Sense Unknown 80 117 u  
Dipping Shear Zone 81 114 r 
Bedding Facing Overturned 82 40 (  
STRUCTURE SYMBOLS ORDERED BY NAME

Code Code
Anticline (F1) 18 80 P  
Anticline (F1) Horizontal 18 81 Q  
Anticline (F2) 19 82 R  
Anticline (F2) Horizontal 19 83 S  
Anticline (F3) 20 84 T  
Anticline (F3) Horizontal 20 85 U  
Anticline Overturned 21 86 V  
Anticline Recumbent 22 87 W  
Asymmetric Fold Verge Left 66 147   


Code Code
Asymmetric Fold Verge Right 67 148   
Banding/Platy Alignment 15 62 >  
Banding/Platy Alignment Horizontal 15 64 @  
Banding/Platy Alignment Vertical 15 63 ?  
Bedding 1 33 !  
Bedding Facing 3 38 &  
Bedding Facing Overturned 82 40 (  
Bedding Facing Unknown 46 130   
Bedding Facing Unknown Vertical 46 131   
Bedding Facing Vertical 3 39 '  
Bedding Horizontal 1 34 "  
Bedding Overturned 2 36 $  
Bedding Overturned Horizontal 2 37 %  
Bedding Vertical 1 35 #  
Bedding-Cleavage 12 56 8  
Bedding-Cleavage Horizontal 12 57 9  
Bedding/Cleavage (S1) Parallel 52 72 H  
Bedding/Cleavage (S2) Parallel 53 73 I  
Bedding/Cleavage (S3) Parallel 54 74 J  
Boudin Plunge 75 156   
Chert Contortion Plunge 76 157   
Cleavage (S1) 4 41 )  
Cleavage (S1) Horizontal 4 43 +  
Cleavage (S1) Vertical 4 42 *  
Cleavage (S2) 5 44 ,  
Cleavage (S2) Horizontal 5 46 .  
Cleavage (S2) Vertical 5 45 -  
Cleavage (S3) 6 47 /  
Cleavage (S3) Horizontal 6 49 1  
Cleavage (S3) Vertical 6 48 0  
Columnar Joint 45 71 G  
Crenulation 13 58 :  
Crenulation Horizontal 13 59 ;  
Deformed Bedding Dip 48 134   
Dextral Fault Wrench 44 100 d  
Dipping Fault Gouge 42 115 s  
Dipping Shear Zone 81 114 r 
Eutaxitic Foliation 78 161 ¡  
Eutaxitic Foliation Vertical 78 162 ¢  
Fault Zone Breccia 34 107 k  
Fold Verge Left 68 149   


Code Code
Fold Verge Right 69 150   
Foliation 17 68 D  
Foliation D1 49 163 £  
Foliation D2 50 164 ¤  
Foliation D3 51 165 ¥  
Foliation Horizontal 17 70 F  
Foliation Vertical 17 69 E  
Glacial Striae-Sense Known 79 116 t  
Glacial Striae-Sense Unknown 80 117 u  
Joint 16 65 A  
Joint Horizontal 16 67 C  
Joint Vertical 16 66 B  
Kink Fold With Plunge 65 146   
Lineation 8 50 2  
Lineation (L1) 9 53 5  
Lineation (L2) 10 54 6  
Lineation (L3) 11 55 7  
Lineation Horizontal 8 52 4  
Lineation Vertical 8 51 3  
Mineral Alignment 14 60 <  
Mineral Alignment Horizontal 14 61 =  
Minor Anticline 59 140   
Minor Anticline And Plunge 60 141   
Minor Fold M Vergence 74 155   
Minor Fold S Vergence 72 153   
Minor Fold With Dip 63 144   
Minor Fold With Plunge 64 145   
Minor Fold Z Vergence 73 154   
Minor Syncline 61 142   
Minor Syncline And Plunge 62 143   
Monocline 58 79 O  
Mylonitic Foliation 77 158   
Mylonitic Foliation Vertical 77 159   
Normal Fault 28 101 e  
Normal Fault-High Angle 30 103 g  
Normal Fault-Low Angle 29 102 f  
Oriented Drill Collar 1 39 121 y  
Oriented Drill Collar 2 40 122 z  
Oriented Drill Collar 3 41 123 {  
Parallel Lines 36 109 m  
Plunge Bedding/Cleavage (S2) Intersection 55 75 K  


Code Code
Plunge Bedding/Cleavage (S3) Intersection 56 76 L  
Plunge Bedding/Vein Intersection 57 77 M  
Recumbent Fold Verge Left 70 151   
Recumbent Fold Verge Right 71 152   
Shear Zone 32 105 i  
Shear Zone-Wide 33 106 j  
Sinistral Fault Wrench 43 99 c  
Syncline (F1) 23 90 Z  
Syncline (F1) Horizontal 23 91 [  
Syncline (F2) 24 92 \  
Syncline (F2) Horizontal 24 93 ]  
Syncline (F3) 25 94 ^  
Syncline (F3) Horizontal 25 95 _  
Syncline Overturned 26 96 `  
Syncline Recumbent 27 97 a  
Thrust Fault 31 104 h  
Trend Line 35 108 l  
Undulating Bedding Dip 47 133   
Vein/Dyke No Dip 37 110 n  
Vein/Dyke With Dip 37 112 p  
Vein/Sill No Dip 38 111 o  
Vein/Sill With Dip 38 113 q  
Younging 7 132   
HYDROGRAPHIC SYMBOL FONT

Datamine Discover includes a hydrographical TrueType font (ET Water) that contains non-rotatable
hydrographic symbols. These symbols are accessible from the MapInfo Pro symbol style picker. The
available hydrographic symbols are listed along with their equivalent ASCII code.
Name Symbol ASCII

Waterhole or soak  49
Swamp, marsh  50
Mangroves  51
Stream arrow  52
Spring/thermal area  53
Salt spring, salinity not measured  54
Salt spring, salinity <1,500 ppm  55
Salt spring, salinity 1,500–10,000 ppm  56
Salt spring, salinity >10,000 ppm  57
Wind pump  65
Bore with wind pump  66

Name Symbol ASCII

Bore  67
Abandoned bore  68
Artesian bore, flowing  69
Abandoned artesian bore, flowing  70
Artesian bore, ceased to flow  71
Abandoned artesian bore, ceased to flow  72
Subartesian bore  73
Abandoned sub-artesian bore  74
Well  75
Abandoned well  76
Well, salinity <1,500 ppm  77
Abandoned well, salinity <1,500 ppm  78
Well, salinity 1,500–10,000 ppm  79
Abandoned well, salinity 1,500–10,000 ppm  80
Well, salinity >10,000 ppm  81
Abandoned well, salinity >10,000 ppm  82
Water tank  83
Dam on stream  84
Salty bore, salinity not measured  85
Abandoned salty bore, salinity not measured  86
Bore, salinity <1,500 ppm  87
Abandoned bore, salinity <1,500ppm  88
Bore, salinity 1,500–10,000 ppm  89
Abandoned bore, salinity 1,500–10,000 ppm  90
Bore, salinity >10,000 ppm  97
Abandoned bore, salinity > 10000 ppm  98
Salinity bore, 0–500 mg/L  99
Salinity bore, 500–1,500 mg/L  100
Salinity bore, 1,500–3,000 mg/L  101
Salinity bore, >3,000 mg/L  102
Capped artesian bore  103
Artesian bore, salinity <1,500 ppm, ceased to flow  104
Abandoned subartesian bore, salinity <1,500 ppm  105
Well with wind pump  106
Palaeocurrent  107
Minor group of springs  108
Major group of springs  109
Flow arrow  110
Groundwater/surface water divide  111
Group of springs  112
Recharge site  113
Desalination plant  114

Name Symbol ASCII

Liquid waste site  115
Rising water table  116
Palaeodrainage direction  117
Palaeodrainage trend  118
Sink hole  119
ENVIRONMENTAL SYMBOL FONT

Datamine Discover includes an environmental TrueType font (ET Other) that contains non-rotatable
environmental symbols. These symbols are accessible from the MapInfo Pro symbol style picker. The
available environmental symbols are listed along with their equivalent ASCII code.
Name Symbol ASCII

Major eruptive centre with recorded eruption  65
Major eruptive centre with no recorded eruption  66
Minor eruptive centre with recorded eruption  67
Minor eruptive centre with no recorded eruption  68
Survey station  69
 70
 71
 72
 73
 74
Astrobleme or impact structure or cryptoexplosive  75
Trigonometrical station  76
Astronomical station  77
Major volcanic centre  78
Volcanic plug residual  79
Volcanic centre  80
Basalt capped residual hill  81
Residual hill  82
Slope  83
Pediment  84
Landslip  85
Harmful/irritant  86
Toxic  87
Radioactive  88
Flammable  89
Corrosive  90
Oxidizing/supports fire  97
Explosive  98
Significant aquatic habitat  99
Significant fauna habitat  100

Name Symbol ASCII

Significant flora habitat  101
Registration point  102

SUPPORTED FILE
FORMATS
Datamine Discover/MapInfo Pro Advanced supported data types.
IN THIS SECTION
Tabular and vector data 860
Images 862
Raster (grid) data 863
Drillhole data 864
SUPPORTED FILE FORMATS 860
TABULAR AND VECTOR DATA

Format Extension Tool Note
3D Studio files .3DS DISCOVER>Import>Vector Import
Access database .MDB HOME>Open>Database Table a
Access database .MDB HOME>Open>Database Table b
Access 2007 .ACCDB HOME>Open>Database Table c
acQuire database DISCOVER>Import>acQuire Import
AMIRA .TEM DISCOVER>Import>ASCII Import d
AutoCAD .DWG HOME>Open>Universal Data
AutoCAD .DXF HOME>Open>Universal Data
AutoCAD .DXF DISCOVER>Import>Vector Import d
AutoCAD .DXF HOME>Open>Import e
Bentley MicroStation Design .DGN HOME>Open>Universal Data
Bentley MicroStation Design .FC1 HOME>Open>Universal Data
Bentley MicroStation Design .POS HOME>Open>Universal Data
Comma separated ASCII .CSV HOME>Open>Table
Comma separated ASCII .CSV DISCOVER>Import>ASCII Import f
Datamine .DM DISCOVER>Export>Datamine Studio
Export
Datamine wireframe .DM DISCOVER>Import>Vector Import
DataSight database DISCOVER>Import>DataSight Import
dBase .DBF HOME>Open>Database Table
Delimited ASCII .TXT HOME>Open>Table
ERMapper .ASC DISCOVER>Import>ASCII Import f
ERMapper vector .ERV DISCOVER>Import>Vector Import
ESRI ArcInfo Export .E00 HOME>Open>Universal Data
ESRI ArcSDE HOME>Open>Universal Data b, g
ESRI GeoDatabase .MDB HOME>Open>Universal Data b, g
ESRI shapefiles .SHP HOME>Open>Table b
ESRI TIN .ADF DISCOVER>Import>Vector Import
Excel .XLS HOME>Open>Table b
Excel 2007 .XLSX HOME>Open>Table c
Gemcom binary triangulation .BT2 DISCOVER>Import>Vector Import
GemSys .TXT DISCOVER>Import>ASCII Import f
Geographic Markup Language .GML HOME>Open>Table
Geographic Markup Language .XML HOME>Open>Table
Geosoft Database .GDB DISCOVER>Import>Geosoft Import
Geosoft XYZ .XYZ DISCOVER>Import>ASCII Import f
GOCAD vector .TS DISCOVER>Import>Vector Import
GOCAD vector .VS DISCOVER>Import>Vector Import
GOCAD vector .PL DISCOVER>Import>Vector Import
GPS eXchange .GPX DISCOVER>Import>Vector Import
ioGAS .GAS DISCOVER>Import>ioGAS Import


Keyhole Markup Language (Google) .KML DISCOVER>Import>Vector Import
Leapfrog Geo DISCOVER>Export>Leapfrog Export
LIDAR LAS (ASPRS) .LAS DISCOVER>Import>LIDAR LAS Import
LizardTech MrSID .SID DISCOVER>Import>Vector Import
Located Data .LDT DISCOVER>Import>ASCII Import f
Log ASCII Standard .LAS DISCOVER>Import>ASCII Import f
Lotus 1-2-3 spreadsheet .WK* HOME>Open>Table
MapInfo Pro DOS .MBI HOME>Open>Import
MapInfo Pro DOS .MMI HOME>Open>Import
MapInfo Pro DOS Image .IMG HOME>Open>Import
MapInfo Interchange .MIF HOME>Open>Import
MicroMine data .DAT DISCOVER>Import>Micromine Import
MicroMine strings .STR DISCOVER>Import>Micromine Import
Microsoft SQL Server 2008 Spatial HOME>Open>Universal Data h
MineSight string .SRG DISCOVER>Import>ASCII Import
ModelVision Hole files .HOL DISCOVER>Import>ASCII Import f
ModelVision Line files .LIN DISCOVER>Import>ASCII Import f
ModelVision Point files .PTS DISCOVER>Import>ASCII Import f
OS MasterMap .GML HOME>Open>Import
Oracle spatial database HOME>Open>Database Table
PostGIS spatial database HOME>Open>Database Table
Spatial Data Transfer Standard *CATD.DDF HOME>Open>Universal Data
SQL Server HOME>Open>Database Table
Surpac String .STR DISCOVER>Import>Vector Import
Surpac Vector .DTM DISCOVER>Import>Vector Import
Text .TXT HOME>Open>Table
Text .TXT DISCOVER>Import>ASCII Import f
Vector Product Format (VPF) .*FT HOME>Open>Universal Data
Vulcan Archive .ARCH_D DISCOVER>Import>Vulcan Import
Vulcan triangulation .00T DISCOVER>Import>Vector Import
a For the creation of live or refreshable database links

b Read-only
c Read-only in MapInfo Pro 10.0
d Automatically stores attribute elevation data
e Works with most DXF formats, but least flexible
f Import templates, projection assigment, native file creation
g Requires ArcGIS/ArcInfo to be installed
h In MapInfo Pro 10.0

IMAGES
Adobe Photoshop Version 3.0 .PSD HOME>Open>Table
Bitmap .BMP HOME>Open>Table
Bitmap .BMP IMAGES>Rectify Image i
Discover PA Located Images .EGB IMAGES>EGB Import
Windows Enhanced Metafile (+ and +dual) .EMF HOME>Open>Table
ERMapper Enhanced Compression Wavelet .ECW IMAGES>ECW/JP2 import j
ERDAS Image Web Server .ECWP IMAGES>ECW/JP2 import j
GeoTIFF .TIFF HOME>Open>Table k
Graphics Interchange Format .GIF HOME>Open>Table
Graphics Interchange Format .GIF IMAGES>Rectify Image i
Joint Photographic Experts Group .JPG HOME>Open>Table
Joint Photographic Experts Group .JPG IMAGES>Rectify Image i
JPEG 2000 .JP2 .J2K IMAGES>ECW/JP2 import j
MrSID .SID HOME>Open>Table
National Imagery Transmission Format .NTF HOME>Open>Table
PC Paintbrush Exchange .PCX HOME>Open>Table
Portable Networks Graphics .PNG HOME>Open>Table
Portable Networks Graphics .PNG IMAGES>Rectify Image i
SPOT satellite .BIL HOME>Open>Table
Tagged Image File Format .TIFF .TFW HOME>Open>Table l
Tagged Image File Format .TIFF IMAGES>Rectify Image i
Targa .TGA HOME>Open>Table m
Vertical Mapper .GRC HOME>Open>Table
Vertical Mapper .GRD HOME>Open>Table n
Windows Media Format .WMF HOME>Open>Table
i Accurate 'rubber-sheet' rectification i.e. image is stretched, skemed and warped to accommodate control points
j Automatic image registration
k Imports embedded coordiante registration information
l Support for automatic coordinate registration via .TFW world file
m Truevision File Format Specification 2.0
n GRD files can be treated as either a grid or raster image. If the associated .TAB file contains a RasterStyle 6 entry,
the file will be treated as a grid

RASTER (GRID) DATA

MapInfo Pro Advanced supports a range of formats via the following process:
1. Select the RASTER>File>Open tool.
2. Change the filter for Files of type to <Raster Image>.
3. Select the raster file you wish to open and click OK. You may be warned that an existing table
definition exists. Click OK to overwrite it.
4. The raster is loaded into the Map window.
The following formats are supported:
Format Extensions
Band Interleaved Image by line .BIL .BIP .BSQ
Encom Float Grid .GRD
ERMapper ERS Grid .ERS
ESRI ASCII and Float grids .ASC .FLT
ESRI ADF formats .ADF
GDAL default formats .IMG .DEM .DAT .VRT .DT0 .PIX
GDAL ENVI Raster .DAT
Geosoft Oasis Montaj™ Grid .GRD
GeoTiff Images .TIF .TIFF
Multi-Resolution Raster .MRR
Surfer ASCII and Binary Grids .GRD
Vertical Mapper Classified Grid .GRC
Vertical Mapper Grid .GRD
MapInfo Pro Raster multi-resolution raster (.MRR) format is now supported by the following Datamine
Discover capabilities:
• Drillholes
• Hydrology
• Datamine export
• Leapfrog Geo export
• DISCOVER 3D>Display>Map Window
• DISCOVER 3D>Display>Vectors
• DISCOVER 3D>Display>Surfaces*
• DISCOVER 3D>Utilities>Drape Image
• DISCOVER 3D>Utilities>Extrusion Wizard **
These tools all also support multi-band MRR rasters, either via:
• pop-up field-band selector within the tool, or
• using the band set under RASTER>[Display]>Band.

Multi-band MRR exceptions:

* DISCOVER 3D>Display>Surfaces uses by default the first band in a multi-band MRR for initial 3D
display. To change, in 3D open the Surface Properties dialog, and use the Field Selector in the 3D
Surface layer to change the Band.
** DISCOVER 3D>Utilities>Extrusion Wizard can only utilize the first band in a multi-band MRR.
For more information, see the MapInfo Pro Advanced Help.
DRILLHOLE DATA
Datamine .DM DRILLHOLES>Datamine>Studio Export
gINT .GPJ DRILLHOLES>External Data>Import>gINT Import
LAS (well logs) .LAS DRILLHOLES>External Data>Import>LAS Import
WinLog .MDB DRILLHOLES>External Data>Import>WinLoG Import

PRODUCT
IMPROVEMENT
INITIATIVE
The Product Improvement Initiative (PII) has been implemented to better
understand user workflow and interaction with Datamine Discover, assisting
Datamine to improve future releases. The PII works by recording menu clicks
while Datamine Discover is operational; a summary of this information is sent
anonymously on a monthly basis to Datamine for analysis.
IN THIS SECTION
Configuring PII for enterprise deployment. 866
Frequently asked questions 866
PRODUCT IMPROVEMENT INITIATIVE 866
CONFIGURING PII FOR ENTERPRISE DEPLOYMENT.

Datamine Discover contains the optional Product Improvement Initiative (PII) tool. This tool
records how Datamine Discover users interact with the software, as well as the user’s Datamine
Discover version, operating system, etc. All the PII information recorded is anonymous, and is
automatically sent back to Datamine (Datamine) via a web service on a monthly basis. This data is then
collated and analysed to assist with development for future releases.
The PII tool can be configured with a registry value specifically for the purpose of implementing a group
policy in a enterprise environment. To do this:
1. Install Datamine Discover.
2. Prior to initial start up, create a registry value (string value) with the name ShowUsageOptIn in the
location HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Encom\Discover\.
3. Populate the registry value with the following value data depending on the desired
implementation of the PII:
• 0 – PII is Off (not recording) and no PII activation dialog will be shown at start up.
• 1 – PII is On (recording) and no PII activation dialog will shown at start up.
• null (no reg key added) – Operates as normal: PII Is Off, and a PII activation dialog will be
shown at start-up.
FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS
WHAT INFORMATION IS COLLECTED?

• Product name and version (Datamine Discover 2017)
• Operating system version (e.g. Microsoft Windows 10)
• Product license type (bundle, server, etc.)
• Menu click frequency (e.g. Drillhole Project, 16 times )
• Utility uptime (e.g. Drillhole Project, 4.15 hours)
• UniqueID - Datamine Discover collects a unique ID number to help Datamine determine how
many and what percentage of users are using a specific tool. The Product Improvement Initiative
generates a Global Unique Identifier (GUID) that is stored on your computer to uniquely identify it.
The GUID is a randomly generated number: it does not contain any personal information and
cannot be used to identify the individual. The GUID is stored on the individual computer and sent
with every PII report.
HOW WILL DATAMINE USE THE INFORMATION?

The information collected will be used to support, develop new features, and improve Datamine
products. This information is not shared with third parties.
HOW IS MY PRIVACY PROTECTED?

Datamine takes many precautions in protecting the information that is collected and transmitted. You
can learn more about how we handle user information by reviewing the Datamine Privacy Policy:
http://www.dataminesoftware.com/terms-of-use-agreement/

PRODUCT IMPROVEMENT INITIATIVE 867
Since no personally identifiable information is collected, the anonymous data will not be meaningful to
anyone outside of Datamine.
HOW DOES IT WORK?

Datamine keeps a file on the computer that stores the above information. Periodically Datamine sends
that data to a server over an internet connection. After a two month period any unsent data is
automatically deleted on the individual computer.
HOW DO I PARTICIPATE?
The first time Datamine Discover is started, you will be presented with a dialog asking if you would like
to participate in the initiative. Click 'Yes' if you would like to participate or 'No' if you do not want to
participate.
WHAT IF I CHANGE MY MIND?

In Datamine Discover, select PRO>Add Ins>Datamine Discover>Product Improvement.
• To stop participating, select “No, I do not want to participate.” and click OK.
• To join the program, select “Yes, I would like to participate.” and click OK.
WILL I RECEIVE SPAM IF I PARTICIPATE IN THE PROGRAM?

You will not receive any e-mail correspondence from Datamine regarding this program, regardless of
whether you participate. We do not collect personally identifiable information as part of this program.
DO I NEED AN INTERNET CONNECTION?

An Internet connection is required to participate in this program. However, you do not need to be
connected all the time. When an Internet connection becomes available, the information is
automatically transmitted with negligible impact to your connection.
CAN I SEE THE DATA THAT IS COLLECTED BEFORE IT IS SENT TO DATAMINE?

No, the information cannot be viewed.
HOW LONG DOES THE PROGRAM LAST?

Information is collected as long as you use the product version for which you have agreed to participate
or until you decide to stop participating in the program.

DATAMINE STUDIO
IN THIS SECTION
Properties of .DM files 869
Standard file types 870
DATAMINE STUDIO 869
PROPERTIES OF .DM FILES
SINGLE- AND EXTENDED-PRECISION FILES AND PROJECTS

Binary .DM files can be single or extended precision. Both single- and extended-precision files have
the file name extension .DM. Fields are either all single precision or all extended precision in the same
file. The width (page size) of a .DM file is fixed, and so the number of fields and the length of
alphanumeric fields are restricted.
Datamine Studio projects (databases) can be either single or extended precision. Single-precision files
are smaller and are quicker to load and process. Extended-precision projects can contain single-
precision files, but single-precision projects cannot contain extended-precision files.
FIELD TYPES
Fields in a .DM file can be either alphanumeric or numeric (real, float), and implicit or explicit. There is
no integer field type.
IMPLICIT AND EXPLICIT FIELDS

An implicit field is a header field, with the same value implied to each record. Whereas, an explicit field
has a different value for each record. For example, in a block model, XMORIG, YMORIG and ZMORIG
fields (coordinates of the model origin) are implicit and XC, YC, ZC (coordinates of cell centroids) are
explicit.
FILE SIZE
Other than practicality, there are no limits on the number of records in a file. Files of several million
records are common.
NUMBER AND LENGTH OF FIELDS

The length of an alphanumeric field must be multiples of 4 characters.
The number of numeric and length of alphanumeric fields in a single-precision file are constrained by:
N + C ⁄ 4 ≤ 64
where N is the number of explicit numeric fields and C is the total number of characters in all explicit
alphanumeric fields. Hence, a single-precision file can contain 64 explicit numeric fields or a total of
256 characters in one or more explicit alphanumeric fields or any combination thereof.
Similarly, the number of numeric and length of alphanumeric fields in an extended-precision file are
constrained by:
N + C ⁄ 4 ≤ 256
Hence, an extended-precision file can contain 256 explicit numeric fields or a total of 1024 characters
in one or more explicit alphanumeric fields or any combination thereof.
Implicit fields are not counted in the record width, and so do not restrict the length or number of explicit
fields.
FIELD NAMES
The following restrictions apply to field names:
• Cannot be duplicated in the same file.
• Cannot be blank.

DATAMINE STUDIO 870
• Can be up to 8 characters in length. If truncating longer field names, ensure the truncated name is
unique.
• Cannot begin with a space, a number, or the characters . , ! : * & = ( ) @ ?
• Cannot contain spaces or the characters , ! : * & = ( ). The underscore character can be used
instead of a space.
Specific file types are defined by their field names and structure—see Standard file types.
STANDARD FILE TYPES

Datamine Studio uses standard file structures, with reserved field names, for each data type. When
exporting a file from MapInfo Pro to Datamine Studio, choose the appropriate file type.
STRING FILE (LINE AND POLYLINE VECTORS)
Field Numeric or Implicit or Description

Alphanumeric Explicit
XP N E String vertex coordinates
YP N E
ZP N E
PTN N E String vertex number
PVALUE N E String number
attributes N or A E or I String and point attribute fields
POINT FILE (POINT VECTORS)

XPT N E X coordinate of data point
YPT N E Y coordinate of data point
ZPT N E Z coordinate of data point
attributes N or A E or I Point attribute fields

DATAMINE STUDIO 871
DESURVEYED DRILLHOLE FILE (STATIC DRILLHOLE FILE)

BHID N/A E Drillhole ID
FROM N E Distance down the hole to the top of the sample
TO N E Distance down the hole to the bottom of the sample
LENGTH N E Length of the sample
X N E Sample centre coordinates
Y N E
Z N E
A0 N E Azimuth of the sample in degrees measured clockwise
from north
B0 N E Dip of the sample in degrees measured positive down
from horizontal
attributes N or A E or I Sample attribute fields
DRILLHOLE COLLAR FILE

BHID N or A E Drillhole ID
XCOLLAR N E X coordinate of collar location
YCOLLAR N E Y coordinate of collar location
ZCOLLAR N E Z coordinate of collar location
DRILLHOLE DOWNHOLE SURVEY FILE

BHID N or A E Drillhole ID
AT N E Distance down the hole to the survey measurement.
BRG N E Bearing of the survey measurement in degrees measured
clockwise from north.
DIP N E Dip of the survey measurement in degrees measured
positive down from horizontal

DATAMINE STUDIO 872
DRILLHOLE SAMPLE FILE

BHID N/A E Drillhole ID
FROM N E The distance down the hole to the top of the sample
TO N E The distance down the hole to the bottom of the sample
attributes N or A E or I Sample attribute fields
WIREFRAME TRIANGLE FILE

TRIANGLE N E Triangle number
PID1 N E Point IDs from the wireframe point file that define the
triangle
PID2 N E
PID3 N E
attributes N or A E or I Triangle attribute fields
WIREFRAME POINT FILE

PID N E Sequential point identifier, starting from 1 (equal to the
file record number)
XP N E X Y and Z coordinates of the point
YP N E
ZP N E
attributes N or A E or I Point attribute fields

INDEX
NUMERICS AUTOGRID 707

Autogrid
3D Scatter plot Map 38
GraphMap 318 Mask 267
Table 267
Autoload 11
A Automatic Legend Generation
described 272, 703
Absolute path name 23
prerequisites 271
Accept 259
specifying the order within a legend 273
acknowledgments 28
acquire AutoSave
Database Import 45 restore workspace 14, 26
Actual workspace 14
Map Size 256 Autosave interval 14
add Auto-Shade 246
line and point labels 280 AVI
scaled frame 268 movie file format 294
section to layout 469 Azimuth 388, 389
text labels 275
Add Derived Column
GraphMap 323
B
Additional Text Label Options 279 background image
Adobe Reader 17 GraphMap 330
Affine Bar chart
Custom Projection 186 GraphMap 317
Transformation 186 Bearing and Distance
aggregates trench survey table 395
assigning aggregates from points to enclosing boolean field
polygons See Assign Values GraphMap 316, 332
Align Box Border 272
Objects 232 Box plot
Alpha-beta core angles 494 GraphMap 318
Alter browser window
Map Bounds 108 GraphMap 325
analytic signal computation 832 Build
Animation 288 Objects from Table 204
Create 288, 719 Build Objects 204
Movie File 294
Annotation
Line 283 C
Apical plane 494
append calculate
multi-table 141 maximum and EOH values 490
Apply Change Direction
Grid Filter 754 reversing the direction of polylines and
polygons 238
ASCII
advanced import 46 Change Line Direction 238
supported formats 48 Child table
GraphMap 335
Assign
Values 241 Clear assignments
GraphMap 316
Auto open after save option 755
clip Coordinates 181
image 362 Node Edit Node 210
Clip to 240 Nodes 208
Polygon 240 storing/updating current object coordinates 206
Clipping Data Tables 240 Update 181
clipping objects Copying workspace to CD-ROM 24
at a polygon boundary 240 Copyright 7
Clipping Options 240 correlation coefficient
Close geochemistry 178
All 102 correlation matrix
Collar geochemistry 178, 749
trench/costean 394 Cosinus kernel function
collar density grid 527, 562
table 388 Create
colour A Scalebar 269
edit pattems 462 Additional Scaled Outputs 261
Colour code sample assay labels 279 Animation 288, 719
Column Drillhole Sections 386
Multiple Update 139 Map Legend 271
Column Delimited 205 Scaled Output Map 256
Column parameter Stack Profiles 304
GraphMap 324 World file 735
Column Update 139 create
company name 840 custom title block 836
compositing New Legend 464
downhole 474, 483 section collar plan 473
Compute Create License File dialog box 9
Area Change 244 Create tab
Compute Area Change 244 GraphMap 314
Computer Current Mapper Projection 36
license transfer 9 Cursor Position
Configuration Position 41
Configuration File 12 cusstom projections
Configuration menu option 12, 13, 14, 19 Drillhole section plans 471
Configure 257 Custom
Configure button on the Scaled Output dialog 257 Re-Order Mode 273
Configuring MapInfo Discover 12 Custom coordinate system 708, 710
Contacting PBS 16 Custom scheme
Container 242 GraphMap 344
Contents 242 cutting objects
Contents 242 with a selected line See Line Cut
Container 242
Context sensitive help 16
contour D
grid surfaces 390
Data
convert
Digitizing 111
image 369, 370
data
cookie-cutting polygons See Processing Inlying
handling 169
Polygons
Coordinate data handling 169
reproject 195 Data handling options
Transform 182 GraphMap 322
data handling options
coordinate systems 36
GraphMap 322
Coordinate Transformation
transforming data between two coordinate data levelling
systems 182, 723 Geochem 175
data selection downhole data tables 389
GraphMap 331 downhole survey table 389
Data tab downhole table
GraphMap 331 trench/costean 398
data window download
GraphMap 319 data table 389
Datamine 868 Draw
Datamine Studio 3 868 Line 208
DataSight Object 207
import 55 Polyline/Polygon 208
DBMS 103 Pont 207
Auto Refresh 103 draw
decimal degrees section grid 472
grid spacing 266 Draw Arc, Ellipse and Rectangle 209
Default map window Status Bar draw grid labels 266
overriding 13 Draw Grid option 257, 258
define drillhole
log display 459 collar table 388
new section or plan 422 create new project 402
Density and Orientation 282 Create Sections 386
Depth 389 data format 387
Depth From and Depth To 389 merging 483
Dervied Columns, creating project setup 399, 416, 417
GraphMap 323 drillhole collar 388
DeviationSurvey Drillhole Display
WinLoG Import 97 collar location 388
Digitizing drillhole project
Data 111 create new 402
Dip 388, 389 Drillholes 1, 30, 385, 652, 669, 676, 733, 737, 766,
direction 775, 805, 829
changing direction of a line See Change Subset Project 418
Direction Direction Drillholes subsystem
storing direction of a line See Line Direction and resource computation 497
DISCOVER.Prj 36 Drillholes>Add section to layout tool 263
DISCOVER.WOR 14, 26 DXF 57
display
log 457
log parameters 460, 796 E
Distance and Bearing 37
Location Display 37, 780 Easting and Northing 388
Distance Calculator 180 ECW
Distance, Bearing 209 import 73
Document edge ticks 266
Link Setup 251 Edit
Link to Map Object 252 Node Coordinates 210
Linking 250 edit
Open Linked 253 colour pattems 462
Documentation Edit Node Coordinates 210
Getting Started 3 Editor
donutting polygons See Processing Inlying Workspace 22
Polygons Elevation 388
downhole ellipse
compositing 474 and resource calculation 501
info tool 473 enhance
survey table 389 image 364
Environmental Symbol Font 857
Epanechnikov kernel function in map linking 40, 730
density grid 527, 562 Fixed scale 40, 730
Equal Angle See Stereogram in map linking 40, 730
Equal Area See Stereogram flow accumulation 633
ET Str font 283, 770 flow direction 631
Exit 264 Folder locations
Exponential scheme changing 12
GraphMap 344 Font Size defaults 278
export Format 278
colours pattems 467 Text 278
graph as MapInfo table 307 format
graph as raster image 307 drillhole data 387
MineSight SRG 66 Frame
multiple MID/MIF 141 Configure 257
Profile Analyst Located Image 76 Settings 257
section layers 58 Setup 257
Vulcan archive 67 Frame Setup 257
Extract Nodes 243 frame setup 257
F G
F1 key 16 Gaussian kernel function
Favourite density grid 527, 562
MapBasics 19 Geochem
Workspaces 21 data levelling 175
Favourite Mapbasics 19 point classification 172
Favourite Projections 34 statistics 177
Favourite Workspaces 21 Geological Symbol Font 846
FFT Filter geological symbols 846, 855, 857
band pass 835 geology
continuation 834 surface 391
high pass 835 Geosoft database
low pass 834 import 60
field Getting started 3
add 142 global
comparison 142 settings 461
delete 142 Graph Builder
rename 142 GraphMap 314
reorder 142 graph types
type 142 GraphMap 317
field assignments GraphMap 306, 332
GraphMap 314 Advanced Colour Options 343
Files of Type entry 752 Advanced Size Options 345
filter altering symbol display 342
GraphMap 316 colour by group 342
image 365 colour by RGB value 348
Filter field assignment Column parameter 324
GraphMap 316 Create tab 314
Filter Properties 754 Data Handling Options 322
filter, saved selection data selection 331
GraphMap 332 Data tab 331
Filtered Grid data window 319
Save 754 Dervied Columns, creating 323
Fit Map Window to Selected Object 39 export 307
Fixed extents 40, 730
filter 316 H
Global Properties 349
graph window tools 308 handling
Group field 316 data 169
Legend Window 347 Hatching
Load Workspace 307 transparent hatching See See-Thru Shading
MapInfo polygons, importing 334 Help 3, 16
Modify tab 342 sources available 15
Multi-Table Relationships 334 Help buttons 16
navigation 329 Hints 262
Open dataset 307 Histogram
overlay 332 GraphMap 318
Permanent Selection Region, creating 332 Hole ID 389, 390
Permanent Selection Region, importing 334 HoleID 388, 389
precondition data 321 horizontal plan
preconditioning data 321 section 422
quick access toolbar 307 Hydrographic Symbol Font 855
Regression Line 330 hydrology 623
remove selection 332 extract drainage features 625
Reset Layout 350 fill unnatural pits 629
Residuals Graph 330 generate catchments 636
Save Data 307 workflow 624
Save Workspace 307
selection in MapInfo 332 I
Selection Statistics 341
size by group 345 IGRF calculator 832
statistics 341 image
Value parameter 324 clip 362
window tools 326 convert 369, 370
Grid enhance 364
Line Intersection 266 filter 365
grid properties 363
contour Surfaces 390 rectify 353
draw section 472 reproject 360
Grid Filter rotate 367
Apply 754 save control points 358
Information 753 selection 354
Settings 755 image tool
Grid Spacing 266 rectify 355
Grid spacing 708, 710 Images 351
Grid style 708, 710 imperial
grid style 266 scale bars 706
Group field scalebars 269
GraphMap 316 Import
Group field assignment ASCII File 47
GraphMap 316 import
Group field use Acquire database 45
GraphMap 316 advanced ASCII 46
Group scheme Geosoft database 60
GraphMap 344 MicroMine 65
Group, saved selection MineSight SRG 65
GraphMap 332 multiple MID/MIF 141
Profile Analyst Located Image 75
Vulcan archive 66
Import and Export 43 legend
Importing create new 464
lines from coordinates on one row 206 properties 465, 466
Polylines delimited by row or column 204 reordering 704
importing legend border style 704
tables from multiple directories 101 legend creation 272
inclination 833 Legend from objects within map window only option
info tool 273
downhole 473 Legend Order 273, 704
Information Legend Style 272
Grid Filter 753 Legend style 704
in GridProcessor 753 legend text style 704
inlying polygons Legend Window
processing See Processing Inlying Polygons GraphMap 347
Insert Nodes 237 Library
ioGAS Styles 227
import 61 library
SeeThru Shde 282
License
J transferring 9
upgrading 9
JPEG2000
import 73 License information
displaying 10
Licensing 7
K upgrade 9
LIDAR LAS
Key in shapes 206 import 64
keying in Line 208
object coordinates 206 Annotation 283
object descriptions by distance bearing 206 Change direction 238
Knowledge Base 16 Concatinate 236
Orientation 243
Line and Point 280
L Line Annotation 283
Label Creator 275 Line Concat 236
Labels Line Cut 236
creating at an angle 278 cutting objects with a selected line 236
Line and Point 280 Line Direction
labels storing as an attribute 243, 780
Add Text 275 Line graph
on grids 266 GraphMap 317
LAS 64 Line on One Row 206
Layout Linear scheme
Add Scaled Frame 268 GraphMap 344
Local Grid 198 Lineations
layout plotting See Stereogram
section options 471 Lines graph
GraphMap 318
Layout, use existing as title block template 707
Link
Layout>Align 262, 263
Document 250
Legend
Box Boarder 272 Document Setup 251
Create Map 271 Document to Map Object 252
Order 273, 704 Open Document 253
Style 272 Link Document 252
Tables and Columns 271 Linking 250
Document 250 Map>Previous View menu option 263
Fixed extents 40, 730 MapBasics 19
Fixed Scale 40, 730 Favourite 19
Map 40 MapInfo Discover
Local Grid configuring 12
converting from See Coordinate Getting Started guide 3
Transformation help 16
generating 198, 758, 798 introduction 2
Layout 198 map Status Bar 13
Local Grid Layout 198 start manually 11
Location Display 37, 780 starting 11
log workspace AutoSave 14
define display 459 MAPINFOW.PRJ 36
display 457 Mapper State 32
display parameters 460, 796 mappers linked 40, 730
log display MapSize rectangle 259
define 459 Margins
parameters 460, 796 Non-Printing 257
Log scheme mask
GraphMap 344 around grid 267
logo tablename 839 Match Window Sizes 42
low magnetic latitudes 832 maximum and EOH values
calculate 490
MBX 19
M Mean scheme
GraphMap 344
Make Affine Custom Projection 186
merge drillholes 483
Make Custom TitleBlock 268
Methods
manager
transformation 359
secton 429
metric
Manual start 11 scale bars 706
Map
scalebars 269
Accept Position 259
Actual Size 256 MI Label Angles 278
MicroMine
Alter Bounds 108
import 65
Autogrid 38
MineSight
Position 259 import 65
Position Scaled 259 MineSight SRG
Scale 256 import 65
Map Autogrid 38 Minesight SRG
Map Frame Position offsets 257 export 66
Map graph Minimum angle factor 833
GraphMap 317 Modfy tab
Map Grid 265, 266 GraphMap 342
on printed maps See scaled hardcopy output Modify
saving 267 MI Label Angles 278
Map Linking 40 Movie File 294
Map Making Tools 254 Multiple
Map Making>Add scaled frame to layout tool 263 Column Update 139
Map Position 259 multiple line plots See Lines graph
Map projection 708, 710 multiple MID/MIF
Map Scale and Size 256 export 141
Map Styles 846 import 141
Map Window Tools 18, 31 multiple scatter plots See Scatter Matrix
map with no map grid 257, 258 multi-segment pie chart See Pie chart
multi-table
append 141, 142 tables from multiple directories 101
comparison 142 options
field editing 142 output 173
open 101 section layout 471
reproject 141, 196 Oriented core 494
Structure Manager 142 output
Multi-Table Relationships options 173
GraphMap 334 output options
output type 173
point styles legend 174
N set point styles 174
output type
negative values output options 173
display as hole logs 460
Overlay
new section or plan Map Grid 267
define 422
overlay
No List option 271 GraphMap 332
Nodes 208 Overriding default map Status Bar 13
Coordinates 208
Distance, Bearing 209
Insert 237 P
Node Edit Coordinates 210
nodes Packaging workspaces 24
editing object nodes 210 panning
keying in object nodes 206 GraphMap 329
Non-Printing Margins 257 parameters
normal probability plot See Probability plot log display 460, 796
normalize Title block 839
geochemical data 175, 748 Parent table
GraphMap 335
pattems
O edit colours 462
export 467
Object
Pattern 279
Align 232
Colour Text Labels 279
Colouring 246
Pattern Density 282
Cut 236
Pattern Library 282
Offset 230
Pattern Type 282
Transform 230
SeeThru Shadding 282
Object Editing>Key In Shapes 39
Pattern Width 282
Object Information
GraphMap 332 patternsfor see-thru 282, 773
PDF
Object Offset function 261 viewing and printing 17
objects
Percentile scheme
keying in object nodes 206
GraphMap 344
Offset Object 230 Pie chart
Offset Objects GraphMap 318
creating copies of objects at a specified offset
230, 249, 771, 774
PII 11, 670, 865
Plane Transformation 184
Online Knowledge Base 16
Plot
Open 253 Vectors 247
Linked Document 253
Plot Vectors 247
open
multi-table 101 Point 207
point classification
Open Layout Template from workspace 270 Geochem 172
opening
point style legend
output options 174 Q
Poles to Planes
plotting See Stereogram Quartic kernel function
PolyClip density grid 527, 562
clipping objects at a polygon boundary 240 Querying
Polygons based on proximity to selected objects See
Clip to 240 Proximity Search
Clipping Data Tables 240 Querying tables
Clipping Options 240 searching for particular text See Text Search
Donut 239 and Replace
Polyline
Smoother- 769
Thin 234
R
Polyline Smoother 769 Rank scheme
Polyline/Polygon 208 GraphMap 344
Polylines Raster
Column Delimited 205 multi-resolution raster (MRR) 863
Line on One Row 206 rectify
Row Delimited 204 image 353
Position Scaled 259 image tool 355
Map 259 Reduction-To-the-Pole 832
precondition data Registered Raster 287
GraphMap 321 Convert Map 287
Print PDF document 17 Create World File 735
Printer Setup 257 Regression Line
Printing 260 GraphMap 330
Scaled Output Layout 260 Relative path name 23
Probability plot Replace
GraphMap 319 Text 104
Processing Inlying Polygons reproject
and geological maps 239 coordinates 195
cutting polygons from surrounding polygons image 360
239 NTv2 method 843
Product Improvement Initiative 11, 670, 865 tables 141, 196
Profile Analyst Located Image Requirements
export 76 hardware 6
import 75 Residuals Graph
profile information GraphMap 330
and drillholes 390 resource grid 498
Profiles resource parameters
Create Stack 304 setup 498
Proimity resources from cross-sections 497
Search 227 Restore
Projections Mapper State 32
display details 36 Restore Autosave workspace 14, 26
favourite 34 RGB
Make Affine custom 186 formula 348
Map Grid 266 RGB Colourizer 246
Properties RGB values
GraphMap 309 GraphMap 348
properties Rose diagram
image 363 GraphMap 319
legend 465, 466 rotate
Proximity Search image 367
selecting objects based on distance from other rotation
objects 227, 783
GraphMap 330 search orientation
rounded grid spacing 266 for sectional resources 501
Row Delimited 204 Section
Rows and Columns draw grid 472
of filters 831 horizontal plan 422
RTP filter 832 layout options 471
vertical 424
section
S manager 429
section collar plan
Save create 473
Filtered Grid 754 section to layout
Map Grids 267 add 469
Mapper State 32 Sectional Resource Calculator 497
save sections
graoh data as MapInfo table 307 Create Drillhole 386
graph data as CSV file 307 SeeThru
graph legend as MapInfo table 307 Shading 281
image control points 358 See-Thru Pattern Library 282
Save and Overlay Map Grids 267 See-Thru patterns 281
Save Mapper State tool 32 See-Thru Shading
Save Plane 186 applying to selected regions 281
Save tables to workspace folder 24 SeeThru Shading 281
scale bar style 706 Density and Orientation 282
Scale Factor 185 Pattern Library 282
scalebar Pattern Type 282
Title Block 841 SEETHRU table 282, 773
scalebar format 269 Select
scaled hardcopy output Group 105
configuring frame settings 257 Select by Graphical Styles 228
determining coverage 259 Select by Group 105
hints 262 Select by Style dialog 228
scalebar format 269 Select Object to Draw 207
using an existing workspace as a template 270 selection
with standard map sheets 261 image 354
Scaled Output 255, 265, 268 selection region
Creating Additional 261 GraphMap 332
Exit 264 Selection Statistics
Hints 262 GraphMap 341
Printing 260 Send TitleBlock to Back checkbox 270
TitleBlock 260 Set Clip Region 262, 263
Scaled Output>Quit Scaled Output 264 Set default table view 32
Scaled Output>Respecify Parameters 259 setting 32, 697
Scaled Output>Restore Map Window 263 set point styles
Scatter matrix output options 174
GraphMap 319 Set Selection Overlay
Scatter plot GraphMap 330
GraphMap 317 Settings
Search Grid Filter 755
Proimity 227 settings
Text 104 global 461
Search all holes Setup
required 497 Frame 257
search ellipse 500 setup
in Grid Tool 500 drillhole project 399, 417
resource parameters 498
Shading Split 109
See Thru 281 Transformation 182
Sharing workspaces 24 table
smooth curved grid lines 709 append 141, 142
Sort collar 388
Tables 107 comparison 142
Sort Table 107 download data 389
special symbol fonts 283, 770 download survey 389
Specify Order option 272 editing 142
Stacked Profile open 101
Create 304 reproject 141, 196
Standard Deviation structure 142
GraphMap 344 Table Split 109
Standard Map Sheets 261 Table window
Standard Views 32 GraphMap 318
Starting MapInfo Discover 11 table window
statistics GraphMap 325
Geochem 177 Tables
GraphMap 341 absolute and relative path names 23
Stereogram Build Objects 204
GraphMap 319 Columns 271
Store Resource in column 499 Legend 271
stream analysis 623, 634 remove unused 22
Structural data 494 resolve missing 22
structural measurements save to workspace folder 24
plotting See Stereogram tables
Structural True Type symbol fonts 849 sort 107
structure Tables and Columns 271
symbols 637 Technical support 16
Structure Symbol Font 849 Tenements 641
Style Ternary diagram
Legend 272 GraphMap 319
Style button Text
for legends 272 Add Labels 275
Styles Additional Label Options 279
Library 227 Colour Labels from Pattern 279
Styles Library 227 Format 278
surface Replace 104
geology 391 Search 104
grid and contour 390 sizing for a given map scale 278
Surfaces See grids
text label string into a column 279, 718
survey table
download 389 Text Labels 275
trench/costean 394 Text Search and Replace 104
searching for and/or replacing particular text
symbol fonts 770 104
symbology
Thin
GraphMap 342
Polyline 234
symbols
Thin Polyline
structure 637
Node Number 234
Node Position 235
T Thin Polyline by Node Number 234
Thin Polyline by Node Position 235
Table Thin Polylines 234
Multiple Utilities 140 thinning polylines and regions
Set Default 32 by node position 235
Title Block U
insert Company Logo 837
Make Custom 268 Uniform kernel function
placeholders 840 density grid 527, 562
scalebar 841 Update 279
Title block 260 Coordinates 181
add scale bar 707 Table from Text Labels 279
create 836 Text Labels from Table 279
parameters 839 Update Coordinates
position 706 storing coordinates from multiple projections
saving 707 181
scale 707 update coordinate columns from objects 181
send to back 707 update object position from coordinate columns
Title Line placeholder 840 181
Title Lines 269 update the text in text objects 279, 718
TITLEBLK.TAB 270, 707 Updates 16
TitleBlock List 258 updating text labels 279
Titleblock Position 270 Upper Tail scheme
Tools GraphMap 344
Distance and Bearing 37 User Guide described 16
topographic grid Utilities
trench/costean 398 Multiple Table 140
Total Depth 388 Utils 754
Transfer license 9
Transform 182, 230 V
Coordinate 182
Coordinates now 185 Value parameter
Object 230 GraphMap 324
Transformation Values
Affine 186 Assign 241
NTv2 843 Vectors
Plane 184 Plot 247
Save Plane 186 vertical section 424
Scale Factor 185 View PDF document 17
Table 182 viewing individual records
transformation GraphMap 332
Methods 359 viewing multiple records
Transformation Table 182 GraphMap 325
trench Views
Bearing and Distance survey table 395 Set Default Table 32
collar table 394 Standard 32
downhole data table 398 Vulcan archive
setup 416 export 67
survey table 394 import 66
topography grid 398
Triangle kernel function
density grid 527, 562 W
triangular irregular network 225 watershed 623
Triweight kernel function weight power
density grid 527, 562 in Grid Tool 500
Troubleshooting 11 weight the grid node 831
True Type fonts 849 whiskers (box plot)
GraphMap 318
Windows 7 or 8 5
Workspace
AutoSave 14
autosaving and restoring 14
Editor 22
make table path names absolute or relative 23
packaging and sharing 24
resolve missing tables 22
restore AutoSave 14, 26
Workspace Editor 22
Workspaces
Favourite 21
Worspace
remove unused tables 22
X
X axis asssignment
GraphMap 316
X-axis label 709
XY point plot See Scatter plot
Y
Y axis assignment
GraphMap 316
Y-axis label 709
Z
Z axis assignment
GraphMap 316
Zoom to Extents of Selected Object 40
zooming
GraphMap 329
zooms
in GridProcessor 753

Discover User Guide PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Discover User Guide PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

DISCOVER 2017 64-BIT

10 - DATA PROCESSING AND

36 - CUSTOMIZING TITLE BLOCKS

38 - STYLES AND SYMBOL FONTS

39 - SUPPORTED FILE FORMATS

ABOUT THIS GUIDE

CONVENTIONS USED IN THIS GUIDE

DATAMINE DISCOVER 2017 USER GUIDE

DATAMINE DISCOVER 2017 USER GUIDE

MAPINFO PRO ADVANCED

MINIMUM HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS

RECOMMENDED HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS

DATAMINE DISCOVER 2017 USER GUIDE

WHAT THE DATAMINE DISCOVER BUNDLE INCLUDES

INSTALLING DATAMINE DISCOVER

INSTALLING FROM A DOWNLOADED INSTALLATION FILE

UNINSTALLING DATAMINE DISCOVER

LICENSING DATAMINE DISCOVER

DATAMINE DISCOVER 2017 USER GUIDE

DISPLAY INFORMATION ABOUT DATAMINE SOFTWARE INSTALLED ON YOUR COMPUTER

REINSTALLING DATAMINE DISCOVER

DATAMINE DISCOVER HAS NOT BEEN PREVIOUSLY LICENSED ON THE COMPUTER

THE LICENSE IS BEING TRANSFERRED FROM ANOTHER COMPUTER

A LATER VERSION OF THE SOFTWARE HAS BEEN INSTALLED

INSTALLING A NEW LICENSE

DATAMINE DISCOVER 2017 USER GUIDE

Datamine Discover is now ready to use.

UPGRADING AN EXISTING LICENSE

DATAMINE DISCOVER 2017 USER GUIDE

DISPLAYING LICENSE INFORMATION

DATAMINE DISCOVER 2017 USER GUIDE

TROUBLESHOOTING LICENSE ISSUES

PRODUCT IMPROVEMENT INITIATIVE

WHAT IF I CHANGE MY MIND?

STARTING DATAMINE DISCOVER

DATAMINE DISCOVER 2017 USER GUIDE

RUNNING MULTIPLE INSTANCES OF MAPINFO PRO AND DATAMINE

CONFIGURING DATAMINE DISCOVER

VIEWING AND CHANGING DATAMINE DISCOVER DIRECTORY LOCATIONS

DATAMINE DISCOVER 2017 USER GUIDE

OVERRIDING THE DEFAULT MAP STATUS BAR DISPLAY

TO OVERRIDE THE MAPINFO PRO STATUS BAR DISPLAY DEFAULT:

DATAMINE DISCOVER 2017 USER GUIDE

AUTOSAVING AND RESTORING THE WORKSPACE

DISABLING MAPINFO PRO'S AUTOMATIC TAB SWITCHING

DATAMINE DISCOVER 2017 USER GUIDE

DATAMINE DISCOVER USER GUIDE

ONLINE KNOWLEDGE BASE

DATAMINE DISCOVER 2017 USER GUIDE

CHECKING FOR DATAMINE DISCOVER UPDATES

VIEWING AND PRINTING THE ELECTRONIC MANUALS

DATAMINE DISCOVER 2017 USER GUIDE

CONTROLLING THE INTERFACE

ORGANIZING YOUR MAPBASIC TOOLS

DATAMINE DISCOVER 2017 USER GUIDE

TO ADD A FAVOURITE MAPBASIC TOOL:

TO RUN A FAVOURITE MAPBASIC TOOL:

DATAMINE DISCOVER 2017 USER GUIDE

MANAGING YOUR WORKSPACES

Adding a favourite workspace

TO ADD A FAVOURITE WORKSPACE:

TO OPEN A FAVOURITE WORKSPACE:

DATAMINE DISCOVER 2017 USER GUIDE